237

PART–C
Scope and Technical Specifications of Electrical and
Mechanical Services

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 238

INDEX

Sl.No Sub- Description Page No.

Head
1. C PART–C(Heading& Index)
237-238
2. PROFORMA OF SCHEDULES 239-246
3. SCOPE OF ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICALWORKS 247-254

4. C-A Eligibility of Specialized Agencies 255-263

5. C-B General Conditions for all E & M Works 264-278

6. C-1 Internal & External Electrical Installations i/c 27-298

Lightning conductor, Street light, emergency
light, Illuminated signages
7. C-2 Fire Fighting System 299-345

8. C-3 Automatic Fire Alarm System & PA System 346-371

9. C-4 Lifts 372-390
10. C-5 Substation 391-441
11. C-6 DG Sets 442-467
12. C-7 UPS System 468-475
13. C-8 HVAC & Pressurized Mechanical Ventilation system 476-558
14. C-9 Solar Water Heating System 559-561
15. C-10 LAN System 562-557
16. C-11 EPBAX System 558-604
17. C-12 CCTV System 605-618
18. C-13 Audio, Video / Conference system 619-622
19. C-14 STP (Sewerage Treatment Plant) 623-633
20. C-15 Medical Gas Pipeline System 634-690
21. C-16 Modular Operation Theatre 691-702
22. C-17 NURSE CALL SYSTEM 703-710
23. C-18 Water supply System & R.O Plant with water coller 711-718
24. C-19 Non Medical Equipment 719-744

25. C-20 List of preferred Makes 745-761

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 239

PROFORMA OF SCHEDULES
SCHEDULE A TO F (E & M WORKS) MINOR COMPONENT
(OPERATIVE SCHEDULES TO BE SUPPLIED TO EACH INTENDING BIDDER)
(Separate Performa for Civil &, Elect in case of Composite Tenders)
(Operative Schedule to be supplied separately to each intending Tenderer)

SCHEDULE ‘A’

Schedule of financial quote combined rates for Civil, Electrical & Horticulture works and ancillary
works as per page 435.

SCHEDULE ‘D’ Extra schedule for specific requirements/documents for the work, if any.

-NIL-

SCHEDULE ‘E’

Reference to General Conditions of Contract: General Conditions of Contract 2024 for EPC
Projects in CPWD as amended / modified up to previous day of the last date of submission of Bid.

Name of Work: Construction of 100 Bedded ESIC Hospital Building i/c 32 Nos Staff Quarters at Marshal Pitch,
Kanker Khera, Meerut (UP) in EPC Mode -I. SH: Planning, Designing and Construction of various RCC Buildings for
setting up of a 100 bedded Hospital along with ancillary buildings viz. Canteen Mortuary block, Gas store, LT panel cum
substation, Pump room , AC Plant room, STP, Security room, 32 nos. staff quarters (Type-II-16 nos., Type-III-8 nos., Type-
IV-6 nos., Type-IV Special – 2 nos.) including Internal Water supply, Sanitary Installations, Drainage, Development works
like UG Sumps, Terrace water Tanks, Water Treatment Plant (RO plant), Rain Water Harvesting System, Internal Roads,
Pathways, Parking facilities, Water Supply Lines, Storm Water Drains, External Sewerage System, Service Trenches and
Horticulture Work all E&M Services such as Internal Electrical Installations, Fire Alarm System, Firefighting system, Lifts,
Sub-Station, DG sets, UPS, HVAC System, Solar Water Heating System, Water Supply Pumps, CCTV, IBMS, LAN IP
based EPABX System, Studio Visual System, Boom Barriers, STP & ETP Equipment, Medical Gas Pipe System, Nurse
Call System, Street Lighting with LED, Modular Operation Theatre, Illuminated Signages, Non-Medical Equipments &
other Misc. works all complete on Engineering, Procurement and Construction basis including development of BIM
models.

Estimated cost of work: ₹126,65,41,251/- (Civil work - ₹94,90,78,070/- + Electrical work -

₹31,74,63,181/-)

Earnest Money: ₹1,36,65,413/-

(ii) Performance Guarantee

5% of Tendered Value.

(iii) Security Deposit 2.5% of Tendered Value.

SCHEDULE 'F' (GENERAL RULES & DIRECTIONS)

Officer inviting bid: Executive Engineer Meerut Division, CPWD, Income Tax Office Campus,
Bhainsali Ground Meerut (UP)-250001.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 240
Applicable Mode of EPC contract Mode - 1
Type of Building Permanent
List of approved construction As per table 1-A of circular
technologies 17/SE(TAS)/BMTPC/2022/105-H
Dated 24/03/2022 amended from time to
time.

Definitions:

2(vi) Engineer-in-Charge for Civil works Executive Engineer Meerut Division, CPWD,
Income Tax Office Campus, Bhainsali Ground
Meerut (UP)-250001
Engineer-in-Charge for Horticulture DD(H), CPWD, Division- Lucknow.
Works

Engineer-in-Charge for E&M Works Executive Engineer (E), Hindon Electrical

Division Ghaziabad, CPWD,

2(viii) Accepting Authority Chief Engineer (GZB) C.P.W.D, CGO -1, Hapur
Road Ghaziabad Uttar Pradesh (201002)
2(x) Percentage on cost of materials and 15%
labour to cover all overheads and profits

2(x)(b) Standard Schedule of Rates DSR 2023 and Plinth area rates 2023(Civil +
Civil work, Electrical + Horticulture) with amendments up to
the previous date of the last date of submission of
bids.

Electrical work Delhi Schedule of Rate 2022- (E&M) with

amendments up to the previous date of the last
date of submission of bids.

Horticulture Schedule of Rate 2019 with

amendments, up to the previous date of the last
Horticulture work date of submission of bids.

2(xi) Department Central Public Works Department (CPWD)

9(ii) Standard CPWD contract Form GCC General Conditions of Contract-2024 for EPC
2024, CPWD Form as modified & Projects in CPWD corrected up to the previous
corrected up to date. date of the last date of submission of bids.

Clause 1
i) Time allowed for submission of Performance
Guarantee, Programme Chart (time and 07 (Seven) days
Progress) and applicable labour Licenses,
registration with EPFO, ESIC and BOCW
Welfare Board or proof of applying thereof
from the date of issue of Letter of acceptance.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 241
ii) Maximum allowable extension with late fee @ 03 (Three) days with late fee @ 0.1% per
0.1% per day of performance guarantee amount day of the PG amount (non-refundable)
beyond the period provided in (i) above

Clause 2

(i) Authority for fixing compensation under Chief Engineer (GZB) CPWD, CGO -1,
clause 2 Hapur Road, Ghaziabad (U.P.)

Clause 5

(i) Authority to convey the decision of Executive Engineer Meerut Division, CPWD,
shifting of milestone and extension Income Tax Office Campus, Bhainsali Ground
of time. Meerut (UP)-250001

(ii) Authority to decide rescheduling of Chief Engineer (GZB) CPWD, CGO -1, Hapur
milestone and extension of time. Road, Ghaziabad (U.P.)
(iii) Authority to decide shifting of date Chief Engineer (GZB) CPWD, CGO -1, Hapur
of start in case of delay in handing Road, Ghaziabad (U.P.)
over of site.

Time allowed for execution of work: 30 months.

Number of days from the date of issue of letter of

acceptance for reckoning date of start Mile Stone
as table given below : 10 (Ten) days

Table of Mile stones

Sl. Description of Mile stone Time allowed in days Amount to be

No. (From date of start) withheld in case of
non-achievement of
mile stone (% of
T.A.)

As per major Component

Note: Withheld amount shall be released if and when subsequent milestone is achieved within respective time
specified. However, in case milestones are not achieved by the Bidder for the work, the amount shown against
milestone shall be withheld.

Monthly recovery for delay in submission of the monthly progress report within specified period Rs. 50,000/-
per month for each month default

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 242

PROFORMA OF SCHEDULES Clause 5 Schedule of handing over of site

Part Portion of site Description Time Period for

handing over
reckoned from date
of issue of letter of
intent.
Part A Portion without any
hindrance
Part B Portions with As per major Component
encumbrances
Part C Portions dependent on
work of other agencies

Schedule of issue of Designs …………………………………………… Not Applicable

Part Portion of Design Description Time Period for issue of design reckoned
from date of receipt of tenders
Part A Portion already Available
included in NIT
Part B-1 Portions of To be ---
Architectural submitted by
Designs to be issued bidder for
Part B-2 Portions of Civil approval of
Designs to be issued Engineer-in-
Part B-3 Portions of E&M charge
Design to be issued

Clause 7
Gross work to be done together with net payment Rs. 1.00 Cr.
/adjustment of advances for material collected, if
any, since the last such payment for being eligible
to interim payment

Clause 7A
(i) Whether clause 7A shall be applicable. Yes

Clause 8

Details of building/infrastructure project to be completed early for use:

S. Name of building/infrastructure project to be Remarks

No. completed
1. Hospital Building
2. Residential Blocks

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 243
Clause 8A
Authority to decide compensation on account if
contractor fails to submit completion plans.: Chief Engineer (GZB)

Clause 10B (ii)

Whether clause 10B(ii) shall be applicable Yes

Clause 10B (iii)

Whether clause 10B(iii) shall be applicable No

Clause 10CC: Applicable

a. For construction Period

S. Relevant Component of Material/ Labour for price Percentage of total value of

No. escalation work
1 Cement Component
2 Labour Component
3 Civil component other construction material
4 E & M (Electrical and Mechanical) component of
As per major Component
construction materials
5 POL (Diesel) component
6 Reinforced steel bars/TMT bars/structural steels
(including strands and cables) component
7 Component of Bitumen
Total

a. For Maintenance Period Not Applicable

Clause 11

Specifications to be followed for Civil work: CPWD Specifications 2019 Volume- I &
execution of work II with corrections slips up to the previous date of the
last date of submission of bids.
CPWD Green Rating Manual 2021 with correction
slips up to the previous date of the last date of
submission of bids.
CPWD Hand book on Safety, Health and
Environment with correction slips up to the previous
date of the last date of submission of bids.
CPWD Manual on Accessible Built Environment
2019 with correction slips up to the previous date of
the last date of submission of bids.

Electrical work:
CPWD General Specification for Electrical Works

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 244
Part I Internal - 2023.
CPWD General Specification for Electrical Works
(Part II External)-2023.
CPWD General Specification for Electrical Works
(Part III Lifts & Escalators)-2003.
CPWD General Specification for Electrical Works
Part IV Substation - 2013.
CPWD General Specification for Electrical Works
Part V Wet riser & sprinkler system -
2020.CPWDGeneralSpecificationsforElectricalWorks
PartVIFireDetectionandAlarm System – 2018.
CPWD General Specification for Electrical Works
Part VII DG Sets - 2013.
CPWD General Specification for Electrical Works
Part VIII Gas Based Fire Extinguishing System -
2013.

(I) All above specifications shall be applicable with

corrections slips up to the previous date of the last
date of submission of bids.
(II) Wherever the CPWD Specification are not given,
the works shall be executed as per the additional
Specification & terms & conditions mentioned in the
NIT.
(III) The direction of the Engineer-in-Charge shall be
followed in absence of the above two at Serial No.
I&II.
Building information model (BIM) is Yes
applicable

Clause 12

Deviation limit beyond which clause 12.2 As per GCC for EPC Projects- 2024
and 12.3 shall apply for building work

Clause 16

Competent Authority for deciding reduced Chief Engineer (GZB) CPWD, CGO -1,
rates. Hapur Road, Ghaziabad (U.P.)

Clause19 Competent Authority to decide penalty for each default–

Clause 19C Penalty for each default

Clause 19D Penalty for each default As per major Component
Clause 19G Penalty for each default
Enhanced penalty per day for each default
Clause 19K Penalty for each default

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 245

Clause 25
(i) Conciliator: ADG(RL), CPWD or his successor thereof.
(ii) Arbitrator appointing authority: Chief Engineer (Ghaziabad), CPWD or his successor
thereof.
(iii) Place of arbitration Meerut

Clause 32
“Requirement of Technical Representative (s) and Recovery Rates”
S.No. Requirement of Technical Minimum Designation of Rate at which
Staff Experience Technical Staff recovery shall be
(Years) made from the
Strength
contractor in the
(Major
event of not
Qualification + Minor
fulfilling provision
compon
of clause 36 (i)
ent)
Graduate
Engineer
1

Graduate
Engineer
2

Graduate As per Schedule F, clause 32 of Major component.

Engineer or
3 Diploma
Engineer

Graduate
Engineer
4

Diploma
Engineer
5

Graduate
Engineer
6

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 246
Note:
Assistant Engineers retired from Government services, who are holding Diploma will be treated at
par with Graduate Engineers. Diploma holder with minimum 10-years relevant experience with a
reputed construction company can be treated at par with Graduate Engineers for such deployment
subject to the condition that such diploma holders should not exceed 50% of requirement of
degree engineers.
Architect should be registered with COA.
The above given strength shall be required to be deployed as and when necessity arises at site or
so directed by Engineer-in-charge.
The Bidder shall submit a certificate of employment of the technical representative(s) (in the form
of copy of Form -16 or CPF deduction issued to the Engineers employed by him) along with
every account bill/final bill and shall produce evidence of regular physical availability of such
engineers on the above project if at any times so required by the Engineer-in-charge.
Minimum recovery for not deploying Building information Model (BIM) professional shall
be Rs. Three Lac per month.

Clause 38

(i) (a) Schedule/statement for determining theoretical quantity of cement & bitumen on the basis of
Delhi Schedule of Rates 2023 printed by CPWD with up-to-date correction slips till last date of
submission of tender.

(ii) Variations permissible on theoretical quantities:

a) Cement
(i) For works with estimated cost 3% plus/minus
put to tender not more than Rs. 25 lakhs
(ii) For works with estimated cost put 2% plus/minus
to tender more than Rs 25 lakh
b) Bitumen for all works. 2.5% on plus side only & nil on minus side
c) Steel Reinforcement and structural steel 2% plus/minus
sections for each diameter, section and
category.
d) All other materials. Nil

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 247

SCOPE OF ELECTRICAL AND MECHANICAL WORKS

The scope of work includes Planning, Design, preparation of Drawings, Supply, Installation,
Testing and commissioning of following E&M services for 100 bedded Hospital, Sub-station
building and other small buildings i/c 16 nos Type-II, 8 Nos Type-III, 6 Nos Type-IV and 2
Nos Type-IV S Residential Qtrs at ESIC, Meerut, Uttar Pradesh.

Approximate Built-up Area

Description (to be constructed as per details given in
this Tender document)
1. (a) 100 Bedded Hospital building (G+2) 13795.07sqm
(b) Basement 6746.29 sqm
2. Residential blocks (Type-II, III, IV &IV Spl.)
Residential blocks
(a) Type-II (S+4) – 16 Nos. ( 387.36+1626.68)sqm
(b) Type-III (S+4) – 8 Nos. ( 198.65+833.22)sqm
(c) Type-IV (6 Nos.) & Type-IV Special 2 Nos. (S+3) ( 334.81+1235.39)sqm

3. Miscellaneous
Gas manifold store 136.30sqm
Mortuary 102.40 sqm
Bio medical waste 114.37sqm
DG set /Panel room 207.79 sqm
Utility 91.62 sqm
STP block 162.22 sqm
WTP block 45.81 sqm
Canteen and Cafe 147.58 sqm
Guard room (3 nos) 52.50 sqm
LPG store 37.46 sqm
UG tank 172.42 sqm

1. Internal Electrical Installations i/c Street light, emergency light, Illuminated signages

Scope of this sub head covers Design and execution of Wiring for Internal Electrical
Installations i.e., Light & fan points, Light plug & Power plug wiringwith modular accessories
as per the requirement, Telephone, CCTV & LAN Conduiting. Providing LED light fittings,
Ceiling fans, Exhaust & Fresh Air fans etc. Electrical connections to all E & M equipment,
various Hospital Services including cabling, TTA main panels, Floor panels, Lightning
protection, Structural Earthing system, Street/Compound lighting, landscape lighting are part
of the scope. Dimmable light fittings with smart control shall be provided in conference halls,
meeting rooms, Director room and other important locations as decided by the Engineer-in-
charge with lighting controls. All luminaries used shall be energy efficient LEDs. The Rising
Mains for Emergency supply(DG supply) and UPS supply shall be designed based on
maximum connected load and 10% additional capacity. i/c complete wiring, fans, fitting for
all Residential Qtrs., metering panels, cabling & associated misc. works. If any item required
to make the building / scheme habitable and functional, is not specifically mentioned in the
scope of services, the same is deemed to be included within the scope of this tender and
nothing extra shall be paid on this account.
Design and preparation of inventories, detailed layout drawings with marking of individual
power plugs, light circuits, power circuits, submains etc. shall be done. Design and selection
of Electrical fixtures to get the required illumination (lux level calculation at various places),

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 248
selection of ceiling fans, Exhaust fans in toilets as per relevant standards is in the scope of
work. Cables and various services from substation and other areas shall be routed to the
main building through underground duct/tunnel.

2. Firefighting:

Design and installation of Fire Fighting system with wet riser with sprinklers for the Hospital
buildings and other service buildings, Water Curtain Systems wherever required, Fire
sealing of floors in all shafts is in the scope of work. Electric & Diesel Fire pumps, internal
& external fire hydrants, FBC, Portable fire extinguishers, Gas suppression system for
Server Rooms, Spirit Store, LPG Bank, Electrical panels and other areas of the Hospital
shall be provided as per the requirement of NBC 2016 with up-to-date amendments, Fire
bye- laws of Govt. of Uttar Pradesh and CPWD specifications. This will also include
peripheral header /ring mains and isolation of ring mains in the header around the building,
the provision of testing valve in the fire pump house with the facility to transfer the water
again into the fire sump to avoid wastage of water, isolation valve in the feeder pipeline to
each wet riser in the building before entering to the building. Preparation of inventory,
preparation of detailed layout drawings with marking of various firefighting accessories/
equipment i.e., location of sprinklers, water curtains, internal & external hydrants are in the
scope of work.
3. Automatic Fire Alarm System & PA System
Design, installation of Intelligent addressable automatic fire alarm system complete with
detectors, addressable fire alarm panel and all other related accessories, Fire Dampers,
AHUs, Smoke Ventilation System, Public Address System and Gas suppression system
as required in the Hospital Building, and other buildings i/c residential building in
compliance to the requirements of relevant CPWD specifications, fire services norms of local
body and NBC 2016 whichever is more stringent. This includes installation of Digital Public
Address System, fire evacuation system/ plan in the fire control room and at each floor of the
Hospital building. The wiring for the detectors shall be done with armored copper conductor
fire survival cable. Braille signages and all requirements of accessible India Campaign and
Fire norms should be met. Preparation of inventory, preparation of detailed layout drawings
with marking of Detectors, MCPs, fault isolators, hooters /speakers, Main panel, repeater
panel, various fire alarm accessories are in the scope of work.

4. Lifts:

lifts (9 Nos) Bed cum 20 Passenger Hospital lift – 2 Nos, 13 passenger hospital lift – 3 Nos,
13 passeneger residential lift – 4 Nos with speed of 0.75 /1 meter per second, stainless steel
car interior and doors, ARD, Barrier free features, LT Panel, Cabling, Earthing,
Architrave work at Lift Entrance and as per following details is in the scopeof work.

5. Substation:

Scope of this sub head covers Design and execution of 33 KV/0.433 KV Sub station of
with Dry type transformers of (2x1000 kVA capacity) 1 working and 1 standby for Hospital
and other non- residential buildings, comprising of HT VCB Panel, HT Cables, LT Cables
MV TTA Main Panels, Essential Panels, surge protection system, Sandwich Type Bus
trunking, Safety equipment, LT distribution to various E & M services. Planning and design
comprising of calculation of electrical load complete with EI & Medical and other equipment
loads of the building and electrical load of AC Plant and other E&M equipment and

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 249
calculation of total working capacity of the transformers considering diversity factor of the
system are in the scope of work. The contractor shall prepare the drawings of Distribution
system, SLDs and layout of the equipment. During the approval of design and drawing,
the contractor shall submit the data sheets and catalogues of the various equipment in
support of their design. Preparation of inventory is also in the scope of this work.

The sizes of cables shall be designed by taking the additional load of 25% for future
extension. LT Panels shall be designed for essential and UPS supply. APFC Panel for
each transformer shall be provided to improve power factor to a minimum 0.99 lagging.
Suitable size of sandwich type compact bus trunking between transformer/DG Sets to
different essential and non-essential panels is in the scope of work. Earthing for System and
safety of equipment shall be provided as per CPWD specifications/IE rules.

6. DG Sets:

Scope of this sub head covers Design and execution of DG sets with minimum capacity of 2
X 250 KVA (Hospital building) & 1 x 125 KVA (Residential Building), 415 V, silent type D.G.
Sets, AMF panel complete with Automatic load transfer facility /synchronization panel, Bus
Trunking from DG Set Synchronization panel to main LT panel, control cables, Earthing of
DG Sets, exhaust piping as per CPCB norms with statutory approvals i/c
supporting structure /arrangement is in the scope of this work. The facility of manual bye-
pass arrangement from the normal supply shall be in the scope of the work in case of failure
of AMF panel. Planning and design comprising of making SLD for the distribution system,
Calculation of essential load, sizes of cables /bus trunking, layout of the equipment as per
site condition, submission of data sheets and catalogues of various equipment in support of
their design is also in the scope of this work. Earthing and safety of equipment shall be
Provided. Diesel sump (UG tank) of required capacity with pumping arrangement shall be
made as per approved Central/ State fire norms.

7. UPS:

Provision of minimum 1 x100 KVA (for Hospital Building) (Parallel redundant with 2 or more
units in parallel) 3 phase Modular type UPS supply with 30 min. battery backup is in the
scope of this work. Planning and design comprising of detailed calculations, distribution
system for UPS with the sandwich copper vertical rising mains in the Hospital Building
complete with tap-off boxes, cables, distribution boards on every floor and as per the
requirement of NBC 2016. Preparation of SLD, submission of data sheets and catalogues of
the various equipment in support of their design is in the scope of this work. VRLA Sealed
maintenance free batteries shall be provided on a suitable size of rack.

8. HVAC & P re ss uri ze d Mechanical Ventilation:

Scope of this sub head covers Design and execution of HVAC system. Capacity of HVAC
system shall be based on heat load calculations of the hospital building but minimum
capacity shall be 3 x 100 TR water cooled screw type chillers with VFD (2 working+ 1
standby). HVAC plant with high & low side equipment, water cooled chilling machines,
condenser & chilled water Pumps with standby, cooling towers with standby shall be

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 250
provided. HVAC control panel, Sandwich Type bus trunking /Cables from LT Panel to HVAC
Panel, Cabling from HVAC Panel to Chillers, Pumps, Cooling Towers, AHUs, FCUs,
Cassettes etc. is in the scope of work. Necessary hardware & software for AC plant for
monitoring and controlling through , with recording, display, analysis, hardware & software
for optimization of electrical load and energy conservation shall be provided. Clean Room
AC for Server rooms shall be provided.

Number of AHUs may be provided to optimize duct size and false ceiling height. Double skin
AHUs to maintain indoor air quality, Motorized Fire dampers, electrical panels with controls,
cabling, bypass arrangement shall be provided. Dedicated double skin AHU for each OT
with HEPA Filter, Separate coils for chilled water and
heaters for humidity control shall be provided. Factory fabricated Aluminium ducting shall be
provided.

Cooling tower shall be designed by taking minimum 25% additional capacity as that of
chiller. Planning and design of supply and return air duct complete with dampers, chilled
water and condenser water pipelines. Layout of various equipment of HVAC system and
accordingly designing the space to install the units.

Pressurization of Staircases, Lift shafts and lobbies with pressurization fans, ducting, Control
Panels, cabling. Smoke evacuation and mechanical ventilation System for basements,
service duct for fire conditions and for normal exhaust should be as per NBC 2016/ CPWD
Specifications shall be designed. Kitchen ventilation, Mortuary is also part of the ventilation
system to be provided. Design and estimation of proper ventilation system from user comfort
as specified in relevant codes, specifications and also from fire safety point of view.

Marking of various supply/return air griles, ducts, Chillers, Cooling towers, AHUs, FCUs,
Electrical Panels, Mechanical ventilation system etc. on the architecture drawings,
preparation of inventory is in the scope of work.

9. Solar water Heating system:

Scope of this sub head covers Design and execution of Solar water heating system having 5
nos minimum capacity 1000 LPD (Total capacity 5000 LPD) based on a closed-circuit
indirect heat transfer system and capable of producing hot water at 60 deg C. The areas
which are catered by the hot water are Labour Complex including NICU, PICU, Kitchen,
Canteen, CSSD, ICUs and other areas as per Hospital requirement.

10. LAN System

Scope of this sub head covers Planning, Designing, Supply, Installation, Testing and
commissioning of LAN system comprising of core switches & L2 switches with 10G, 10 giga
SFP modules, WIFI access points, WIFI controller, network management software, racks,
CAT 6A cable, patch panels, OFC etc.with software license.

11. EPABX System:

Scope of this sub head covers Planning, Designing, Supply, Installation, Testing and

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 251
commissioning of IP based EPABX system of minimum 256 lines expandable to 512 lines
with 4 no. PRI Trunks lines (30 channels) with clip facility for IP users license for lifetime.
The outlets are as describedinSubHeadC-1.The scope of work also includes the provision of
the IP based telephones as per requirement but minimum Type-1100 Nos. and Type-II 140
Nos. comprising of core switches & L2 switches with 10G, 10 giga SFP modules, Industry
standard appliance server, Cloud-based, enterprise-grade UC solution, Mid / Entry level
IP/SIP phone with, dual 1 gig ports, racks, CAT 6A cable, Patch panels, OFC etc. with
software license i/c Intercom system basic home security for residential colony.

12. CCTV System

Scope of this sub head covers Design and execution of IP based CCTV system for building
security comprising of PTZ, Fixed Bullet and Dome camera, NVRs of suitable
capacity with viewing and recording facility, cabling, display system using required number
of FHD LED Monitors at control room as per the requirement complete with various
hardware and software supports. The complete networking for the CCTV should be separate
and exclusive for CCTV System only and not to be mixed with other LAN System. Software
provided shall support for remote monitoring through PCs i/c CCTV system basic home
security for residential colony.

13. Audio Video Conference System:

Scope of this sub head covers Planning, Designing, Supply, Installation, Testing and
commissioning of Audio Visual / Conference system with Microphones, Speakers,
Amplifiers, mixers, Digital signal processors, Display TV units, Cameras, cables, controllers,
Software etc. in Conference halls & Seminar hallsas per detailed specifications.
14. STP: (Sewerage Treatment Plant)

Scope of this sub head covers Design and execution of STP, marking of pump sets, tanks,
sumps etc. on the architectural drawing is in the scope of work. STP of minimum 50 KLD
capacity based on the MBBR technology with Sump Tanks, Pumps, Vessels, Air Blowers,
Piping, UV System, Electrical control panels etc. for treatment of Bio medical waste from
OTs/Labs, infected waste water and normal waste water. The plant should be capable of
catering the mandatory requirements of CPCB. Permission to establish and operate STP
shall be taken from the local statutory bodies/CPCB, which is within the scope of the
contractor.

15. Medical Gas Pipeline system:

Scope of this sub head covers Design and execution of Medical Gas Pipeline System (as
per international standards) for total 100 Beds ESIC hospital comprising of LMO plant,
Oxygen, Carbon dioxide, Nitrous oxide, AGSS, Air-4, Air- 7, Vacuum outlets, Manifolds,
Pressure alarms, Fully automatic Gas control system, Bed head panels, Copper piping,
Gas Manifold & Compressor system, Vacuum system, Control panels, Safeties, Valves,
cylinder banks, plant equipment such as Air compressors, Vacuum pumps etc.

16. Modular Operation Theatres:

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 252

Scope of this sub head covers Design and execution of Modular Operation Theatres and
each modular OT comprising of anti-microbial, intensive infection control environment,
sterile panel walls & ceiling system with Solid Mineral Surface technology for operating
area, steel framework, seamless conductive antistatic dissipative flooring, clean air laminar
flow, double dome OT Light, touch screen surgeon's control panel, electrical isolation and
distribution system with Suitable capacity UPS, scrub station, X-ray viewing screen, hatch
box, hermetically sealing automatic sliding doors, anesthesia & surgeon pendants with fully
motorized pneumatic braking system etc. complete as required.

17. Nurse Call System:

Scope of this sub head covers of planning, design & preparation of drawings, supplying,
installation, testing & commissioning of Nurse Call System for 100 bedded Hospital. Total
system has to be commissioned with required hardware, software, licenses and other items
to have a fully functional complete Nurse Call System. If any item is required to make the
scheme functional, is not specifically mentioned in the scope and specifications, the
same is deemed to be included within the scope of this tender.

18. Water Supply System & R.O. plant with water coller.

Scope of this sub head covers Design and execution of water supply pump sets to fulfill the
requirement of water for the Hospital building & other services in the campus i/c Residential
buildings. At least 3 Nos Submersible pumps shall be provided in bore wells with 1 number
of the same capacity bore well pump shall be kept as standby. Hydro- pneumatic pumps
with standby for supply of drinking water and flushing water is also in the scope of work.
Standby pumps of same type and capacity shall be provided in each bank of pumps.

2 Nos. (1 for each block) R.O. plant each of minimum 500 LPH capacity shall be provided for
drinking water and Hospital requirement such as OTs, labs etc. In addition, double stage
R.O. water filter shall be provided in the dialysis room.

42 Nos. stainless steel water coolers of minimum 40/ 80 litres capacity shall be provided in
all floors of the hospital.

19. Non-Medical Equipments.

1. General :-
Scope of this sub head the contractor shall provide and install the following Non-Medical
Equipments for 100 Bedded Hoispital building as per the NIT, Detailed Architectural
drawings as directed by Engineer-in-Charge. The contractor shall prepare a detailed floor
wise & room wise layout plan marking the locations of Non-Medical Equipments, Inventory
with quantity. Proposed scheme as per relevant specifications shall be submitted by the
bidder before execution of work and the same shall be checked and approved by CPWD and
Hospital authorities.

2. The Technical Specifications for Non-Medical Equipments are given in Bid Document.

3. The following Non-Medical Equipments shall be provided by the Contractor to be desired

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 253
locations as decided by the client departments.

a) CSSD & TSSU equipments :-

i) Washer Disinfector horizontal rectangular with glass sliding door, fully automatic,
microprocessor controlled mechanical washer , chamber capacity 250 Ltr of size-
550(W) x 550(H) x 550(D) mm i.e. 22” (W) x 22”(H) x 22”(D) i.e. 6 DIN Trays.

ii) Horizontal Cylindrical Autoclave (Manual), Chamber Capacity- 250 L, Chember

size dia - 500mm x 1250 mm deep (Horizontal Cylindrical).

iii) Washing station have three washing sinks and one slop for draining, having over
all dimension of 60” x 20” x 40” (L x W x H).

iv) Air Gun & Water Gun Unit- without Compressor, 0.5 HP Pressure pump.

v) Hot Sealing Machine have Power Consumption - 0.5 kW, Sealing Speed - 0-
12m/min, Sealing Width - 8-10m.

vi) Floor mounted Storage Rack of 5 Nos fixed shelves built in stainless steel SS
304 of size - 900mm (L) X 450mm (W) X 1800mm (H).

vii) Stainless steel Closed Transport Trolley-Green Strips for Sterile goods, Size- 900
x 600 x 1200mm (H).

viii) Steam Steriliser having Chamber Capacity 250 Ltr Horizontal cylindrical Steam
Steriliser Pressure type for Hospital and Pharmaceutical use, Steriliser, Chember
size dia - 500mm x 1250 mm.

ix) ETO Sterilizer Chamber Type - Horizontal – Rectangular, Chamber Capacity -

2.6 CuF, Corrosion free durable Stainless Steel duly high polished.

b) Laundry equipments :-

i) Washer Extractor 25 Kg. capacity.

ii) Washer Extractor 15 Kg. capacity.
iii) Drying Tumbler 15 Kg. capacity.
iv) Flat Work Ironer (Chest Heated) Single Roller, Electric heated.
v) Vacuum Ironing Table size of the table Size 1200mm x 750mm.
vi) Electric Boiler 08 Kg / hr. Fully Automatic.
vii) Wet Linen Trolley Stainless Steel 316 grade 50 Kg.
viii) Dry Linen Trolley Stainless Steel 316 grade 50 Kg. capacity.
If any equipment required to make the laundry functional, is not specifically
mentioned in the scope of services, the same is deemed to be included within the
scope of this tender and nothing extra shall be paid on this account.

c) Kitchen & Canteen equipments :-

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 254

i) Wall mounted single skin exhaust hood.

ii) Big-urli burner, Single Burner, Two Burner, Three burner.
iii) Work table, batter stand, dosa plate Sink unit.
iv) Drainthrough with floor gratings, Four tier pot rack, Four tier storage, Two bowl sink
with under shelf, Three bowl sink unit, Hot bain marie count.
v) Chute table, Vegitable cutting chute table.
vi) Steam boiler gas.
vii) 25 kg capacity rice steam vessel double jacket, 75 ltr capacity sambar steam vessel
double jacket, 50 Ltr capacity milk steam vessel double jacket.
viii) 240 nos capacity steam idly box, L angle gratings, Kneader machine of 10 kg cap.,
Masala Trolley.
ix) Chappathi plate, Food service trolley 3 tier, Pickup counter, Platform trolley, Coconut
scraper, Table top vegetable cutting machine, Dunnage rack, Atta/ Sugar/ Maida
Store bin,.
x) Potato /Onion / Coconut store bin, Ext table, Conventional wet grinder, Tilting wet
grinder, Instant rice grinder, Potato peeler machine, 500 Ltr Capacity VISI Cooler.

If any equipment required to make the kitchen & canteen functional, is not specifically
mentioned in the scope of services, the same is deemed to be included within the scope
of this tender and nothing extra shall be paid on this account.

d) I.V. Tree & Track system

i) Cubicle Curtains Narrow line surface mounted tracks of heavy extruded

aluminum alloy slotted to receive roller carriers, complete with accessories and
components required for complete and secure installations including splices, end
caps and corner bends. of Complete Track System with Curtains for 100 bedded
hospital.

ii) I.V. Tree system 5-Point hanger with 150 mm TRACK surface mounted
aluminum I.V. Track for 100 bedded hospital.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 255

C-A: ELIGIBILITY OF SPECIALIZED AGENCIES:

1. The Main Contractor should either himself meet the eligibility conditions for the
respective E&M components or otherwise he shall have to Associate with Agencies,
fulfilling the eligibility requirements mentioned below and consent letter from at least one
eligible Associate Agency of the respective components of E&M work shall also be
submitted as per attached Form.

2. The Main Contractor shall also be eligible to carry out himself any or all of these works
without associating with any specialized agency, provided, he directly procures the
equipment of approved make from manufacturer and gets it installed from Authorized
Agency/Service Provider of the Manufacturer/ Specialized Agency as per the eligibility
criteria mentionedbelow.

3. The Main Contractor has to submit the following documents for Association of Contractor
within one month of award of work. In support of the eligibility conditions of the proposed
Associated Agency copy of their registration documents, Verifiable completion certificates
of the work, Electrical Contractor’s License, GST Documents duly attested by the Main
Contractor shall be submitted to the EE& SM(C)-I, CPWD who will in turn submit these
documentsto the EE & SM(E) for deciding the eligibility.

4. Each such Associated Agency will certify that they are not debarred, as on the day of
submission of documents. Proposal for Associating Agency for minor components of
work shall be submitted with consent letter from each Associated Agency independently for
all Electrical and Mechanical components. The Main Contractor shall submit an Affidavit
of MOU signed with eligible Associated Agencies. The Affidavit of MOU in the enclosed
Form shall be signed by both the parties i.e., Main Contractor as first party and
Associated Agency as 2nd party. MOU for all Electrical and Mechanical components
shall be submitted, independently.

5. In the event of the concerned E&M Agency not performing satisfactorily or failure of
Associated Agency to complete the E&M work, the Main Contractor on written directions of
the department, shall remove the Associate Agency, deployed on the work and shall
submit name of new Associate who fulfills the conditions mentioned in NIT to execute
the left-over work without any loss of time or variation in cost to the department.

6. Such Associates shall also give an undertaking along with the Main Contractor that, both
of them together will stand guarantee for the equipment already supplied for which
payment has been released by the department. If any equipment supplied for the work,
during the currency of the earlier Associate Agency becomes redundant /not in a
position to be put to beneficial use, the main contractor shall be liable for replacement of
the equipment(s) at no cost to the Department. No change of Associated Agency will be
allowed without priorapproval of the Engineer-in-charge of the work.

7. In respect of all E & M works, the materials shall be procured only from the original
equipment Manufacturers / Authorized dealers of OEM. The contractor shall submit all
documentary details in fulfillment of these conditions regarding procurement of materials
including relevant test certificates.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 256

8. Executive Engineer (E) shall be the Engineer-in-charge for E & M works. Separate
tender schedule and Special Conditions for E & M Work are appended with this tender.
It will be obligatory on the part of the Contractor to sign the tender documents for all
the component parts.

9. The Main Contractor shall be responsible and liable for proper and complete execution
of the E & M works and ensure coordination and completion of both civil and E & M
work. The Associated Agency shall attend the inspection of the work by the Engineer-
in-charge of E&M works as and when required.

10. The Associated Agency should have successfully completed similar works including
capacity of the equipment required as applicable during the last 7 years ending up to
previous day of last date of submission of tenders. The value of executed works shall be
brought to current costing level by enhancing the actual value of work at simple rate of
7% per annum, calculated from the date of completion to the last date of submission
of bid.

11. The completion certificate shall be issued by an officer not below the rank of Executive
Engineer or equivalent, duly attested. The rough cost and capacity of various Sub
heads/Equipment given in the Eligibility criteria should not be used or interpreted for any
other purpose.

Minimum Eligibility Criteria for Associated Agency for Execution of E&M Components
and Specialized Works wherever applicable

Component
Sl. Approx cost in
of E&M Eligibility
No INR (cr.) of
works
Estimate cost
put in tender
1 Internal The Contractor having successfully completed
Electrical Three similar works, each of value not less than
Installations, 12.94 40% of Estimated component cost
Street OR
Lighting etc. Two similar works, each of value not less than
60% of Estimated component cost
OR
One similar work, each of value not less than
80% of Estimated component cost
Similar work shall mean "SITC of Internal
Electrical Installations,Street Lighting etc.”
2 Fire Fighting 2.50 The Contractor having successfully completed
System Three similar works, each of value not less than
40% of Estimated component cost
OR
Two similar works, each of value not less than
60% of Estimated component cost
OR
One similar work, each of value not less than
80% of Estimated component cost Similar work
shall mean "SITC of FireFighting System”

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 257

3 Fire Alarm 1.35 The Contractor having successfully

System with completedThree similar works, each of value not
PA system less than 40% of Estimated component cost
OR
Two similar works, each of value not less than
60% of Estimated component cost
OR
One similar work, each of value not less than
80% of Estimated component cost Similar work
shall mean "SITC of Fire
Alarm System"
4 Lifts 1.82 The main contractor shall associate with the one
of the Lift Manufacturers of Preferred Makes
satisfying NIT conditions. No other Associated
Agency shall be eligible to execute the work.

5 Substation 1.99 Three similar works each of value not less than
40% of the estimated cost put to tender with
capcity of individual transformer being 80% of
individual capacity (rounded off to next available
higher capacity) of the equipment i.e. transformer
proposed in NIT.
OR
Two similar works each of value not less than
60% of the estimated cost put to tender with
capcity of individual transformer being 80% of
individual capacity (rounded off to next available
higher capacity) of the equipment i.e. transformer
proposed in NIT.
OR
One similar works each of value not less than
80% of the estimated cost put to tender with
capcity of individual transformer being 80% of
individual capacity (rounded off to next available
higher capacity) of the equipment i.e. transformer
proposed in NIT.
Similar work shall mean "SITC of
Substation equipment"

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 258
6. DG Set 0.70 Three similar works each of value not less than
40% of the estimated cost put to tender with
capcity of individual DG Set being 80% of
individual capacity (rounded off to next available
higher capacity) of the equipment i.e. DG Set
proposed in NIT.
OR
Two similar works each of value not less than
60% of the estimated cost put to tender with
capcity of individual DG Set being 80% of
individual capacity (rounded off to next available
higher capacity) of the equipment i.e. DG Set
proposed in NIT.
OR
One similar works each of value not less than
80% of the estimated cost put to tender with
capcity of individual DG Set being 80% of
individual capacity (rounded off to next available
higher capacity) of the equipment i.e. DG Set
proposed in NIT.
Similar work shall mean "SITC of DG
Set"
7 UPS System 0.21 The Contractor having successfully completed
Three similar works, each of value not less than
40% of Estimated Component cost and Capacity
not less than 80% of the UPS capacity
OR
Two similar works, each of value not less than
60% of Estimated Component cost and Capacity
not less than 80% of the UPS capacity
OR
One similar work, value not less than 80% of
Estimated Component cost and Capacity not
less than 80% of the UPS capacity.
Similar work shall mean "SITC of UPS
System"
8 HVAC & 2.84 Three similar works each of value not less than
Pressurized 40% of the estimated cost put to tender with
capcity of individual Chiller being 80% of
Mechanical individual capacity (rounded off to next available
Ventilation higher capacity) of the equipment i.e. Chiller
system proposed in NIT.
OR
Two similar works each of value not less than
60% of the estimated cost put to tender with
capcity of individual Chiller being 80% of
individual capacity (rounded off to next available
higher capacity) of the equipment i.e. Chiller
proposed in NIT.
OR
One similar works each of value not less than
80% of the estimated cost put to tender with
capcity of individual Chiller being 80% of

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 259
individual capacity (rounded off to next available
higher capacity) of the equipment i.e. Chiller
proposed in NIT.
Similar work shall mean "SITC of HVAC
System"
9 Solar Water 0.12 The Contractor having successfully completed
heating Three similar works, each of value not less than
system 40% of Estimated component cost
OR
Two similar works, each of value not less than
60% of Estimated component cost
OR
One similar work, each of value not less than
80% of Estimated component cost Similar work
shall mean "SITC of Solar
water heating system"

LAN System 0.54 The Contractor having successfully completed

10. Three similar works, each of value not less than
40% of Estimated component cost
OR
Two similar works, each of value not less than
60% of Estimated component cost
OR
One similar work, each of value not less than
80% of Estimated component cost Similar work
shall mean "SITC of LAN System"

EPABX 0.56 The Contractor having successfully completed

11. System Three similar works, each of value not less than
40% of Estimated component cost
OR
Two similar works, each of value not less than
60% of Estimated component cost
OR
One similar work, each of value not less than
80% of Estimated component cost Similar work
shall mean "SITC of IP based PABX System"

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 260
CCTV 0.58 The Contractor having successfully completed
12. System Three similar works, each of value not less than
40% of Estimated component cost
OR
Two similar works, each of value not less than
60% of Estimated component cost
OR
One similar work, each of value not less than
80% of Estimated component cost. Similar work
shall mean "SITC of CCTV System"

Audio Video 0.08 The Contractor having successfully completed

13. Conference Three similar works, each of value not less than
System 40% of Estimated component cost
OR
Two similar works, each of value not less than
60% of Estimated component cost
OR
One similar work, each of value not less than
80% of Estimated component cost. Similar work
shall mean "SITC of CCTV System"

14. STP 0.37 The Contractor having successfully completed

(Sewerage Three similar works, each of value not less than
Treatment 40% of Estimated component cost
Plant) OR
Two similar works, each of value not less than
60% of Estimated component cost
OR
One similar work, each of value not less than
80% of Estimated component cost.

Similar work shall mean "SITC of STP System"

15. Medical Gas 0.60 The Contractor having successfully completed

pipeline Three similar works, each of value not less than
system 40% of Estimated component cost
OR
Two similar works, each of value not less than
60% of Estimated component cost
OR
One similar work, each of value not less than
80% of Estimated component cost. Similar work
shall mean "SITC of Medical
Gas pipeline system "

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 261
16. Modular 2.16 The Contractor having successfully completed
Operation Three similar works, each of value not less than
Theatre 40% of Estimated component cost
OR
Two similar works, each of value not less than
60% of Estimated component cost
OR
One similar work, each of value not less than
80% of Estimated component cost.

Similar work shall mean "SITC of Modular

Operation Theatre system “

17 Nurse Call 0.21 The Contractor having successfully completed

System Three similar works, each of value not less than
40% of Estimated component cost
OR
Two similar works, each of value not less than
60% of Estimated component cost
OR
One similar work, each of value not less than
80% of Estimated component cost.

Similar work shall mean "SITC of Modular

Operation Theatre system

18 Water Supply 0.31 The Contractor having successfully completed

System & Three similar works, each of value not less than
R.O. Plant 40% of Estimated component cost
with water OR
cooler Two similar works, each of value not less than
60% of Estimated component cost
OR
One similar work, each of value not less than
80% of Estimated component cost.

Similar work shall mean "SITC of Modular

Operation Theatre system

19 NON Medical 1.61 The Contractor having successfully completed

Equpments Three similar works, each of value not less than
40% of Estimated component cost
OR
Two similar works, each of value not less than
60% of Estimated component cost
OR
One similar work, each of value not less than
80% of Estimated component cost.

Similar work shall mean "SITC of Modular

Operation Theatre system

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 262

CONSENT LETTER FROM ASSOCIATED AGENCY

(Separateforeach sub head of E&M work)

Name of Work: Construction of 100 Bedded ESIC Hospital Building i/c 32 Nos Staff Quarters at Marshal Pitch, Kanker
Khera, Meerut (UP) in EPC Mode -I. SH: Planning, Designing and Construction of various RCC Buildings for setting up of a
100 bedded Hospital along with ancillary buildings viz. Canteen Mortuary block, Gas store, LT panel cum substation, Pump
room , AC Plant room, STP, Security room, 32 nos. staff quarters (Type-II-16 nos., Type-III-8 nos., Type-IV-6 nos., Type-IV
Special – 2 nos.) including Internal Water supply, Sanitary Installations, Drainage, Development works like UG Sumps, Terrace
water Tanks, Water Treatment Plant (RO plant), Rain Water Harvesting System, Internal Roads, Pathways, Parking facilities,
Water Supply Lines, Storm Water Drains, External Sewerage System, Service Trenches and Horticulture Work all E&M
Services such as Internal Electrical Installations, Fire Alarm System, Firefighting system, Lifts, Sub-Station, DG sets, UPS,
HVAC System, Solar Water Heating System, Water Supply Pumps, CCTV, IBMS, LAN IP based EPABX System, Sudio Visual
System, Boom Barriers, STP & ETP Equipment, Medical Gas Pipe System, Nurse Call System, Street Lighting with LED,
Modular Operation Theatre, Illuminated Signages, Non-Medical Equipments & other Misc. works all complete on Engineering,
Procurement and Construction basis including development of BIM models.

I/wehere by give consent to Associate with M/s .................................................................. for

Executing the Minor Component/E&M Sub head of work (Mention Sub Head Category)

1. I/We shall execute the work as per specifications and conditions of the agreement and as per directions of the
Engineer in-Charge for the corresponding minor work till the completion of the work.

2. I / We shall be responsible for necessary action to handover the installations and for rectification of defects and
repair during the warranty period.

3. Also, I / We shall employ full time technically qualified Engineer / supervisor for the minor component of the work
as required for the work. I/ We will attend inspection of officers of the department as and when required.

Dated:

Signature of Associated Agency

Address: Address:

Telephone: Telephone:
e-mail: e-mail:

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 263

MEMORANDUM OF UNDER STANDING [M.O.U] BETWEEN

(Separateforeach subhead of E&M work)

1) M/S [Name of the firm with full address ] [Hence forth called the Main
Contractor] And

2) M/S [Name of the firm with full address] [Hence forth, called Associated
Agency]

Nameof
sub-work:…………………………………………

We state that M.O.U between us will be treated as an Agreement and has legality as per
Indian Contract Act [amended up to date] and the Department [CPWD] can enforce all
the terms and conditions of the Agreement for execution of the above work. Both of us
shall be responsible for the execution of work as per the Agreement to the extent this
MOU allows. In case of any dispute, either of us will go for mediation/arbitration by the
concerned SE/CE and any of us may appeal against the mediation/arbitration to the
SE/CE. His decision shall be final and binding on both of us.

We haveagreedas under:
1. The Associated Agency will execute all the Electrical & Mechanical works in the
wholesome manneras per terms and conditions of the agreement. The Associated
Agency shall be paid by Main Contractor as per standard procedure followed by
the Department and the Agreement between parties. Any type of internal
transaction between the Associated Agency and the Main Contractor shall be as per
their convenience and mutual understanding without involving the department.
2. The Associated Agency shall be liable for disciplinary action if he is failed to
discharge the action[s] and other legal action as per agreement.
3. All the machinery and equipment, tools and tackles required for execution of
theelectrical works, as per agreement, shall be the responsibility of the Associated
Agency.
4. The site staff required for the electrical work shall be arranged by the Associated
Agency as per terms and conditions of the agreement.
5. Site order book maintained for the said work shall be signed by the main contractor
as well as by the Engineer of the Associated Agency and by Associated
Contractorhimself.
6. All the correspondence regarding execution of the Electrical & Mechanical works
shall be done bytheDepartment with theAssociated Agency with a copytothe Main
Contractor. In case of non-compliance of the provisions of agreement, the main
contractor, as well as the Associated Agency shall be responsible. The action under
clauses 2 and 3 shall be initiated and taken against the main contractor.

Signature of Main Contractor SignatureofAssociated Agency Address:

Address:
Date: Date:
Place: Place:

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 264

C-B: GENERAL CONDITIONS FOR ALL E&M WORKS

1. The proposed ESIC Hospital Building at Tuticorin comprises of 3 Blocks and other
buildings, shall be designed and constructed to achieve Green Plus level certification
of GHAR based on CPWD green rating manual 2021. Hence all the proposed E&M
equipment shall meet the requirements for achieving the same. All the E&M fittings,
fixtures, machinery and equipment proposed to be used in the execution shall
confirm to ‘5 Star’ rating under star labeling program of Bureau of Energy Efficiency
(BEE) wherever available. Machinery and equipment which does not fall under star
labeling program of Bureau of Energy Efficiency, shall meet Super ECBC 2017
(Upton date) norms.

2. All buildings shall be designed for people with disability (PWD) as per the latest
norms of Govt of India.

3. The information and data shown in the drawings and mentioned in the tender
documents are furnished for general information and guidance only. The Engineer-in-
Charge in no case shall be held responsible for the accuracy thereof or/and
deductions, interpretations or conclusions drawn there from. No claim shall be
entertained whatsoever on this account, if the site conditions/ information is different
or otherwise incorrect. It will be presumed that the contractor has satisfied himself for
all possible contingencies, situations, bottlenecks, and acts of coordination which
may be required between the different associate agencies by the main contractor.

4. The work shall be executed on EPC basis involving getting all local body
clearances/approvals, Design, Drawings & commissioning of services. The
preliminary architectural drawings shall be provided by the department. It may please
be noted that the agency shall be totally responsible for the quality of the work. The
Works shall include all Civil, Electrical, Mechanical, Safety aspects and any work
required for completion of the works in all respects and to the satisfaction of the
Engineer – in – charge.

5. Scope of work covers planning, designing, supply, installation, testing and

commissioning of all Electrical & Mechanical services required to be provided in the
said sub heads. The work shall be executed as per scope and specifications of E &
M works given hereafter in respective sub-heads. If any services/work required to
make the building / scheme habitable & functional, including the statutory
compliance, is not specifically mentioned in the scope of services, the same is
deemed to be included within the scopeof this tender.

6. GeneralSpecificationlays down general guidelines to ensure safe, efficient and

reliable E & M services. Contractor has to provide required cutouts for Piping, Ducts
and Cabling works wherever required for their works and also as marked in approved
drawings. Planning and integration of all E&M services provided in the building is to
be carried out in BIM software at the initial stage so that clashes of services can be
identified and suitable decision can be taken at the planning stage. All electrical
accessories like cable wire, electrical outlets, switches, control panels, etc.
should be firerated, certified for electrical safety.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 265

7. All sundry equipment, fittings, unit assemblies, accessories, hardware items,

foundation, foundation bolts, painting, termination lugs for electrical connections, and
all other items which are useful and necessary for efficient assembly and installation
of equipment and components of the work shall be deemed to have been included
in the tender irrespective of the fact whether such items are specifically mentioned in
the tender documents or not. The tenderers shall take into account the element of
wastage in all elements of the work and quote his price, taking into account. Any
incidental works/ costs which are not mentioned, but are necessary to complete the
work shall be deemed to have been included in the overall amount quoted by the
Contractor for various sub head components of work. Nothing extra payable to this
account.

8. The tenderer should inspect the site and its surroundings before submitting the
tender. Detailed scope, conditions & specifications are included in this tender for
each of the sub-head. Since the drawing/ designs/ calculations related to various
E&M works and packages are interrelated with one another, the contractor has to
ensure that the planning and designing of all E&M works well in advance before
execution of the work. CPWD shall bear no responsibility for the lack of knowledge
and the consequences thereof to the contractor.

9. The rates quoted by the tenderer, shall be firm and inclusive of all taxes and duties,
levies, delivery, installation, testing, commissioning etc. Incidental charges of any
kind such as cartage, storage, wastage, safe custody of material etc. are included in
the quoted rates and nothing extra shall be paid on this account.

10. No foreign exchange shall be made available by the Department for importing
(purchase) of equipment, plants, machinery, materials or any other items required
to be carried out during execution of the work. No claim of any kind shall be
entertained on account of delay in receipt of items and variation in the foreign
exchange rate.

11. The Contractor shall obtain all pre-construction and post construction
approvals/clearances etc. from local body authorities like local Fire department, local
town planning authority, Lift inspectorate, Central Electricity Authority, Local
electrical distribution company, wherever required. The Contractor has to prepare
all the documents as required in the name of Client Department and submit directly
to the local statutory bodies. All approvals shall be in the name of the Client
Department. The Contractor has to comply and, if necessary, resubmit applications
which are required by the local bodies. All statutory fees / charges required for
obtaining clearances from Fire Officer/Lift Inspector/CEA / Local Bodies etc., paid
by the contractor will be reimbursed.

12. The common language used in NBC-2016 for mandatory provisions is by use of
word “recommended”. Therefore, if in NBC whenever the recommended word is
used, it is to be treated as a mandatory provision. In case any part of the work
specification is not available in the aforesaid mentioned documents then part of the
work will be carried out in accordance with sound engineering practice and as per
directions of Engineer-in- charge.

13. The Contractor shall submit a detailed program chart indicating all construction
activities for E&M works to the Engineer-in-Charge in accordance with the
milestones.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 266

14. The contractor shall proceed with the preparation of Design and detailed shop
Drawings, detailing the equipment that are to be installed and the ancillary works that
are to be carried out. The scope of work also covers proof checking of Design and
drawings by an Institute of repute as defined/mentioned in the bid-document and
shall have to submit for approval of the Engineer-in-Charge, before commencement
of work,to ensure that the works will be carried out in accordance with the
specifications including changes mutually agreed upon. The contractor shall also
submit the data sheets and catalogues of various equipment in support of their
design.

15. The Contractor will prepare the co-ordination working drawing after getting all inputs
of various services so that the work of any service should not hamper the progress of
other works. Before start of work, the Contractor shall submit the Reflected Ceiling
Plan (RCP) drawings showing all the services and equipment to get a proper
aesthetic look of the building. During execution, if it is found necessary to amend any
parameter, the same shall be made by the firm again free of cost within the quoted
rates.

16. Any data and details asked by Engineer in charge to finalize and accept the scheme
shall be provided on the established standard/guidelines/codes etc. The scope of E &
M work, specifications mentioned in this document are indicative in general but not
exhaustive. The work shall be carried out in accordance with true intent and meaning
of the specifications and the drawings taken together, regardless of the fact
whether the same may or may not be particularly shown on the drawings and/ or
described in the specifications, provided that the same can be reasonably inferred
therefrom.

17. The contractor has to offer makes of the equipment/ materials from the “List of
Preferred/ Approved Makes” for approval of Engineer-in- charge. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor to get the makes and modelsapproved by the
department before placing of order.

18. The material to be supplied against the contract shall not be more than 6 months old
from date of receipt at site. To procure genuine material from Manufacturers /
authorized dealers shall be the responsibility of Contractor. Routine tests as
prescribed in IS/ CPWD/NBC specifications shall be carried at manufacture facility.
The expenses shall be borne by the contractor.

19. The agency shall get themselves acquainted with CPWD specifications and site
conditions. The E & M Component of work shall be executed in close co- ordination
with the progress of building work. These general conditions are applicable to all sub-
heads of work under this part. Theworkshallbedesigned, executed /carriedout
asperthe following:

a) The Electricityrules 2005, IE Rules 1956 &IndianElectricityAct 2003, National

Electrical Code 2011 amended uptodate.
b) National Building Code-2016, RelevantBISstandardsasamendeduptodate.
c) Energy Conservation Building Code-2017
d) CPWD General Specifications for Electrical Works Part-I (Internal) – 2023, Part
II (External)-2023, CPWD General Specifications for Electrical Works Part – III
(Lifts and Escalators ) – 2003, CPWD General Specifications for Electrical
Works Part – IV (Sub stations) – 2013, CPWD General Specifications for

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 267

Electrical Works Part – V (Wet Riser & Sprinkler system) – 2020, CPWD
General Specifications for Fire detection and Alarm system Part-VI – 2018,
CPWD General Specifications for D G Set Part – VII (DG Set) – 2013, CPWD
General Specifications for Gas based fire extinguish system Part – VIII –
2013,CPWD General Specifications for Air- Conditioning/HVAC works – 2024
with up to date amendments. Medical gas pipeline system 2022,CPWD
General Specification for modular OT 2022 & Nurse Call System 2022.
e) Factories Act, Workmen’s compensation Act.
f) Statutory norms prescribed by Agencies like CEA, Power Supply Co., CPCB etc.
g) Additional Technical specifications and list of acceptable makes.

Stringent conditions among the above shall be followed.

20. Any additional item of work, if taken up subsequently, shall also confirm to the
relevant specifications mentioned above. Nothing in this specification shall be
construed to relieve the successful tenderer of his responsibility for the design,
manufacture and installation of the equipment with all accessories in accordance
with currently applicable statutory regulations and safety codes.

21. Safety Codes and Labour Regulations

a) In respect of all labour employed directly or indirectly on the work the contractor at
his own expense, will arrange for the safety provisions as per the statutory
provisions, B.I.S recommendations, factory act, workman’s compensation act,
CPWD code and instructions issued from time to time.
b) The contractor shall provide necessary barriers, warning signals and other safety
measures while executing the work or wherever necessary so as to avoid
accidents. He shall also indemnify CPWD against claims for compensation arising
out of negligence in this respect. Contractor shall be liable, in accordance with the
Indian Law and Regulations for any accident occurring due to any cause. The
department shall not be responsible for any accident occurred or damage incurred
or claims arising there from during the execution of work. The contractor shall also
provide all insurance including third party insurance as may be necessary to cover
the risk. No extra payment shall be made to the contractor on this account.

22. Contractor shall arrange for compliance with statutory provisions of safety regulations
and departmental requirements of safety codes in respect of labour employed on the
work by the Contractor. Failure to provide such safety requirement would make the
Contractor liable for fine of Rs 5000/- (Rs Five Thousand only) for each default. In
addition, the department wilL be at liberty to make arrangement for the safety
requirements at the risk and cost of the Contractor and recover the cost thereof from
him.

23. Storage and safe custody of all materials shall be the sole responsibility of the
Contractor at his own risk and cost. No storage space will be provided by the
Department.

24. Frequency and type of tests of various Materials/Items/Equipment shall be conducted

as per specifications and relevant BIS-Codes. The test results shall confirm to the
specification/codes. The testing plan for quality control for major E&M services shall
be carried out as per the guidelines issued by
C.P.W.D time to time.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 268

25. Civil works such as foundation of equipment as per recommendations of OEM,

trenches for fuel line & cable, making of openings in walls or in floors, providing Anti
vibration isolators etc., as required shall be provided without any additional cost.
Care shall be taken by the contractor during execution of the work to avoid damage
to the building. He shall be responsible for repairing all such damages and restoring
the same to the original finish at his cost. He shall remove all unwanted and waste
materials arising out ofthe installation from the site of work from time to time.

26. The agency shall insure storage, erection including third party insurance right from
the start to commissioning and handing over of various equipment. All insurance
which the agency is required to enter into under the contract shall be affected with
any authorized general insurance company and the agency shall produce the
policies of insurance. The beneficiary shall be Engineer -In-charge. Insurance costs
shall be borne by the contractor.

27. In case of any delay in Installation, Testing, Commissioning & handing over, the
insurance cover shall be suitably extended by the Contractor at his own cost. If the
agency fails to affect and keep in force the insurance, the department may pay such
premium as may be necessary for that purpose and deduct the amount, so paid by
the department from the Contractor from his dues.

28. No tools and tackles would be made available by the department. Scaffoldings & any
other T & P required for execution, testing and commissioning of work shall be
arranged by the contractor. Contractor shall make his own arrangements for
electricity and water required for execution, testing & commissioning of work at his
own cost.

29. Quality of material andworkmanship:

a) The Contractor shall ensure quality control measures on different aspects of

construction including materials, workmanship and correct construction
methodologies to be adopted. Quality of the project is of utmost importance. This
shall be adhered to in accordance with the provisions of CPWD specifications and
guidelines given in the relevant paras.

b) The quality assurance program should include method statement for various items
of work to be executed along with check lists to enforce quality control.

c) The Contractor shall make available, on request from the Department, copies of
challans, cash memos, receipts and other certificates etc. towards the quantity
and quality of various materials procured, as directed by the Engineer-in-Charge.
Day to day account of receipt of material shall be maintained at site of work.

30. All parts of the equipment shall be designed to function satisfactorily under all rated
conditions of operation. All components of the equipment shall have adequate factor
of safety. The work of fabrication and assembly shall conform to sound engineering
practice and on the basis of “Fail Safe Design”. The mechanical parts subject to wear
and tear shall be easily replaceable type. All connections and contacts shall be
designed to minimize risk of accidental short circuits caused by animals, birds and
vermin etc. All identical items and their component parts should be completely,
interchangeable.

31. Inspection before Dispatch:

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 269

a) No equipment shall be dispatched from the manufacturing premises before routine

tests are conducted and test results recorded. These test certificates shall be
given along with the supply of equipment. The Engineer In-charge shall inspect
and witness the pre-delivery tests. For this purpose, the agency shall give 15 days’
advance notice and arrange for inspection of the department. Department will bear
expenses of its officials for inspection as far as traveling, boarding and / lodging is
concerned.

b) All routine tests shall be conducted before dispatch of equipment. Routine &
Type Test Certificates shall have to be submitted for equipment. Prior to dispatch,
all equipment shall be adequately protected & insured for the whole period of
transit, storage and erection against corrosion and incidental damages etc.

c) All the equipment shall be delivered with Manufacturer´s test certificate,

Manufacturer´s technical catalogues and Installation / Instruction (O&M) manuals.

d) No inspection outside the country is permissible. If required so, the same will be
deemed to be waived off and necessary test reports shall be submitted before the
dispatch of equipment.

32. The contractor shall dispatch materials to site in consultation with the Engineer-in-
Charge. Watch & ward shall be the responsibility of contractor. Program of dispatch
of material shall be framed keeping in view the building progress. Safe custody of all
equipment/ items supplied by the contractor shall be the responsibility of the
contractor till final taking over by the department.

33. The installation shall be subjected to necessary inspection during every stage of
erection, by the Engineer In-charge or his authorized representative. The successful
bidder shall provide all facilities and assistance for the purpose. The completed
installation shall be inspected and tested by the Engineer-in charge in the manner as
will be laid down by him, in consultation the agency. All instruments and facilities
necessary for the tests shall be provided by the agency.

34. The Contractor shall submit the running bills in the shape of the bound computerized
MB in pages of A-4 size (3 sets) duly machine numbered, as per the standard format
of department.

35. Co-ordination with other Agencies: The successful tenderer shall ensure proper
coordination between various Associated Agencies executing the work of different
E&M services.

36. Climatic Conditions: All Electrical and Mechanical equipment and accessories
provided in the work shall be designed and derated for continues and trouble-free
operation in the climatic conditions of the site.

37. Quality Control andTesting of Materials:

a) All the material used on works shall bear ISI certification mark. In case ISI
marked material are not available, the material to be used shall confirm to CPWD
specifications applicable in this tender or IS Code to the satisfaction of Engineer-
in-charge. In all cases proof of procurement of materials from manufacturers shall
be provided by the Contractor. All materials should be got approved by the
Engineer-in-charge before useof said materials in the work.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 270

b) As per the QA plan, it is needed to send required number of samples of materials

for testing in an accredited laboratory, the Contractor at his own expense shall
supply all materials, labour for preparing and testing samples as required by the
Engineer- in-Charge. The testing shall be carried out in the presence of the
representative of the Engineer- in- Charge. The transportation and testing
charges shall also be borne by the Contractor.

c) The technical data sheet and manufacturing drawing of all equipment and
materials as per contract specifications shall be prepared by the respective
manufacturer and will be submitted by Contractor duly signed before placing the
order or manufacturing the material. The Engineer-in- charge shall approve as per
contract conditions.

38. Supervision of Work: The Contractor shall depute Site Engineers & skilled workers
as required for the work. He shall submit organization chart along with details of
Engineers and supervisory staff. The Contractor shall also furnish list of persons for
specialized works to be executed for various items of work. If during the course of
execution of work, the Engineer-in- Chargeis of the opinion that the deployed staff is
not sufficient or not well experienced, the Contractor shall deploy more staff or better-
experienced staff at site to complete the work and to maintain quality and in
stipulated time limit.

39. Completeness of work:

a) The installations shall be completed in all respects and put in to operation even
where certain details have not been mentioned / left out in these specifications.
Any discrepancy may be brought out in pre-bid meeting.

b) All E&M services shall be declared as completed after completion of trial run of 1
month or completion of whole work whichever is later. However, maintenance of
these installations during the defect liability period of 12 months shall be carried
out by the agency at his own cost. DLP / Warranty period of all works / equipment
shall commence from date of completionof complete work (project).

c) All Electrical & Mechanical fittings / fixture / appliances shall have BEE 5- Star-
rating where ever certification is available.

d) SLD of all installations shall be prepared in color print, got laminated in suitable
size and displayed suitably at respective plant room etc. after completion of work.

40. CompletionPlan: Contractor shall submit completion drawings of E&M services as

and when work is completed. These drawings shall be submitted in the form of soft
copy and four sets in hard copy of A0 size These drawings shall clearly indicate
following:

a) Location and details of equipment and other particulars.

b) Complete wiring diagram.
c) Single line diagram, power schematic, control schematic with detailed quantity
and makes.
d) Successful Contractor shall also furnish the Manufacturer’s instructions on
Installation, Operation & Maintenance for all the capital items.

41. The installations shall be handed over to the department after necessary testing and

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 271

commissioning. The installations shall be guaranteed against any defective design /

workmanship. Similarly, the materials supplied by the Contractor shall be guaranteed
against any manufacturing defect, inferior quality. The guarantee period shall be 36
Months from the date of handing over to the department. This guarantee is required
against un-satisfactory performance and/or breakdown due to defective design,
material, manufacture, workmanship or installation.

42. The equipment or component or any part thereof found defective during the
guarantee period shall be repaired or replaced free of cost to the satisfaction of the
Engineer in-charge. In case it is felt by the department that undue delay is being
caused by the Contractor in doing this, the same will be got done by the department
at the risk and cost of the Contractor. The decision of Engineer-in-charge in this
regard shall be final and binding on the Contractor.

43. The contractor has to submit Security Deposit of Rs 25,00,000/- for all LED fittings of
‘Electrical Installations’ component schedule for additional 2 years (3 years DLP +
Additional 2 Years= total 5 years), in an acceptable form i.e., FDR/ Bank
guarantee and submit the same to the concerned Executive Engineer (E). The
Security Deposit deducted from the bills of contractor shall be released to the
contractor only after submission of Security Deposit for LED fittings, failing which the
Security Deposit against LED fittings shall be deducted from Security Deposit for
total work and only balance amount will be refunded. The LED Security Deposit will
be released on pro-rata basis each year after defect liability period.

44. Training: The scope of works includes the on job technical training of two persons of
the department for each specialized E&M work at site.

45. Preference to PPP-MII Policy (Make in India):

a) The Government has issued public procurement policy (Preference to Make in

India) vide Ministry of Commerce and Industry Development of industrial policy
and promotion (PPS) vide order No. P- 45021/2/2017-PP BE-II as amended.

b) The agency shall submit list of makes of materials proposed to be used on the
work from local suppliers (as defined in the above order) along with minimum
local content as specified below for approval of the department out of the
approved makes kept in the tender.

c) The department will be approving only makes of the materials having a minimum
local content of 50% for use on this work, out of the preferred makes list.

d) The minimum local content of 50% is considered for the complete item including
labour component.

e) The agency shall obtain the certificate for all items except for sundry items.

46. The agency shall run all the Air Conditioning Pipe lines, Firefighting Pipes/ Water
Supply Pipes, LT Cables and Other service-related Cables through the Service duct/
Trench from service block to Hospital Building with suitable supports. Necessary
ventilation fans, Fire Alarm System, Flame Proof light fittings shall be provided in the
service Duct. Cables shall be run through suitable size cable trays.

47. Following minimum T& P shall be maintained at site during the execution of work.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 272

S.No. T& P items Quantity

1. Tonge Tester 2 Nos
2. Megger 2 Nos
3. Earth Tester 2 Nos
4. Ladder of different size 1 Lot
5. Multimeter 2 Nos
6. Spanner Set 1 Set
7. Crimping Tools 2 Nos
8. Chase cutting Machine 4 Nos
9. Any other machine/ tool required for As per actual
completion of work as per direction of requirement.
Engineer-In-Charge

The testing plan for quality control for major E&M services

Internal EI, Street Lights/Compound Lights, Substation, DG Set, UPS, Air Conditioning,
Firefighting

Whether Manufacturer's

manufacturer
Standard Applicable/

of
Test Required to be

reqd. in agreement or lot

Total Qty (each type)

test certificates required

Material / Process

size whichever is less

Whether Proof
Dispatch required

At third Party Lab

Sample Size
Stage /SI no

works
Done

At
1 LT Panels CPWD specs. part
with IV/ QA Plan:
ACB Construction, Ratings
of SWG, air gaps Y Y 100% Y N
between Phases,
phase to body, IP Any
rating, Short Circuit
ratings etc.

2 LT Panels Up to Y Y 0 N N
with CPWD specs. part 2
incomer of IV/QA Plan:
more Construction, Ratings >2 Y Y 1 Y N
than of SWG, air gaps and <
200 A between phases, 10
phase to body, IP >10 Y Y 2 Y N
rating, Short Circuit
ratings etc.

3 Rising CPWD specs part Length Y Y 10% N N

Main and IV/QA Plan up to length
Bus 500 mtr and
Trunking fittings

Length Y Y 10% Y N
> 500 length
mtr and
fittings

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 273

4 Rigid MS IS 9537 Pt I&2 up to Y N N N N

Conduit 2500
>2500 Y Y 1 piece
mtr of 1 mtr
for every N Y
1000
mtr

Whether Manufacturer's
Whether Proof of
size whichever is
agreement or lot
Applicable/ Test

type) reqd. in
Required to be

Total Qty ( each

At manufacturer
test certificates required
Dispatch required
/

Sample Size

At third Party
Stage /SI no

Standard
Process
Material

works
Done

less

Lab
5 Rigid PVC 1S 3419 :1989 up to 2500 mtr Y N N N N
Conduit

1 Piece for
>2500 mtr Y Y every N
1000 mtr

6 Cable Tray CPWD Spec. Length upto Y Y N N N

Part- I/II: Check 500 mtr
for perforation
area, paint/
Galvanizing
thickness and
Y Y One piece N Y
Material Length > 500 for every
Composition mtr 500 Mtr
7 DWC/ IS 14930, Length up to Y N N N N
Corrugated Check for 500 mtr
HDPE Pipe thickness, One piece
material, Length > 500 Y Y for every N Y
Wire Mechanical mtr 500 Mtr
Strength and
smoothness
8 Wires IS 694:1990 up to 10000 Y N N N N
mtr
1 piece for
every
>10000 mtr Y Y 10000 mtr or N Y
less

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 274

Whether Manufacturer's
reqd. in agreement or
Total Qty (each type)

lot size whichever is less

test certificates required

Standard Applicable/
Test Required to be
Material / Process

Whether Proof of
Dispatch required

At manufacturer

At third Party
Sample Size
Stage /SI no

works

Lab
Done
Poles Whether in conformity with up to 100 Y Y N
N N
tender specs
9
>100 Y Y 2% Y N

10 LT Cable IS 1554 Part I up to 2500 Y N N

mtr N N

>2500 mtr Y Y 1 piece

for
every
N Y
2500
mtr

11 Fittings Whether in conformity >100 Y Y NA N N

with tender specs

12 HT Panel CPWD specs part IV/QA An y Y Y 1 Y N

Plan: CT ratio and
accuracy Class should be
invariably checked

13 HT Panel: Check CT ratio and Any Y Y 1 Y N

accuracy Class, Relays and
Metering
Meters
and
protectiond
evices

14 Capa CPWD specs part IV /QA Any Y Y 1 Y N

citor Plan: Check for type of
Panel capacitors used, operation
of relay, settings.
Change the load and its
type and check functionality

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 275

in
agreement or lot size
Total Qty (each

Whether Proof of
Material / Process

Dispatch required

At manufacturer
Applicable/ Test
Required to be

At third Party
Stage /SI no

Manufacturer's
test certificates
whichever is less

Sample Size
reqd.

Whether

works

Lab
Standard

Done

type)
15 Transfor CPWD Specs. Part IV/QA Any Y Y 100% Y N
mer Plan: Physical verification
of accessories as per
agreement and Routine
tests as per IS:2026/IS
11171:1985 (whichever
Applicable), with
particular attention to
losses meeting ECBC
norms / as per
agreement, Type test
certificate for exact same
design for impulse
withstand and short
circuit withstand shall be
made available by
Manufacturer,
Temperature rise test of
one transformer of each
design shall be done.
Copies of the certificate for
pressure test, test for
bushings shall be supplied
to the department.

16 DG Load testing as per CPWD Any Y Y 100% Y N

set specs
17 UPS Load testing and Any Y Y 100% Y N
operation logic as per
CPWD specs, Check for
input and output power
quality as per agreement

18 HT Cable IS 1554 Part II Up to 500 Y Y 1 N N

mtr.
>500 mtr Y Y 1Piece N Y
for
every
500mtr

>2500 mtr Y Y 1 Piece N Y

for
every
2500mtr

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 276

Location of

Whether Manufacturer's
reqd. in agreement or lot
Total Qty (each type)

test certificates required

Test

Standard Applicable/
Test Required to be

Whether Proof of
Material / Process

Dispatch required
size whichever is less

Sample Size
Stage /SI no

At manufacturer

At third Party
works

Lab
Done
19 Chiller CPWD specs part VI/ECBC
Code/ Agreement/ QAPlan:
COP, Capacity,IKW/TR,
Any Y Y Y N
1PLV/ N PL, V
1

20 Package AC CPWD specs part V1/

ECBC Code/ Agreement/
Unit QA Plan: COP, Capacity, Any Y Y 1 Y* N
IKW/TR
21 Split/WT AC As per tender specs. and upto 50 Y Y NA N N
>50 1 for every
BEE ratings. Y Y 50 Y* N

22 Pumps As per tender specs. Any Y Y 100 N N

capacity %
23 MS Pipes To be tested for thickness
1 for every
and weight as per Any Y Y 100 mtr N N
applicable IS
24 Insulation / To be tested for Density up to 1000 Y Y NA N N
Acoustics and K value as per tender Sq mtr
material specs. >1000 1
Sq. mtr Y Y for every N Y
1000
Sqmtr
25 Fans for AHU , CPWD specs. part VI/QA up to 20 Y Y NA N N
Ventilation and Plan: Fans to be tested for fans
Pressurization Db level, static >20 1 for every Y N
Pressure, CFM and leaving Y Y 20 fans
fans
Velocity
26 AHU's CPWD specs. part VI/CM up to 20 Y Y NA N N
Plan: Tobe tested for AHU's
capacityin assembled
condition,Fabrication,
Cooling coil and filters 1 for
material & workmanship to >20 every 20
Y Y Y N
be inspected critically. AHU's

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 277

Standard Applicable/Test

reqd. in agreement or lot

Total Qty (each type)

Proofof

Whether Manufacturer's
test certificates required
Required to be Done
Material / Process

size whichever is less

Sample Size

At manufacturer
Stage /SI no

Dispatch required

Stage /SI no
works
Whether
Ducting As per up to 1000
material relevant B I N NA N N
27 S Sq mtr N

> 1000 Sq 1 Sample

mtr Y Y for every N Y

1000 Sqmtr
28 Valves Flow and
up to 20 Y N NA N N
controls as
per data
sheet >20 1 for every
Y Y N Y
20

Y* To be Tested for its capacity at AHRI certified test bed (either at manufacturer's work or at
IIIrd Party)

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 278

Functions of TPQA

When a Third-Party Quality Assurance agency is engaged. it shall carry out the
following functions:

1. TPQA agency shall do their job by field visits, arranging the necessary quality
assurance tests for materials and the construction works, analyzing the test results
and furnishing the comments/ observations thereon and providing general
observations on construction materials and work. The TPQA agency shall submit
their report to CPWD at various stages/ as and when needed.

2. TPQA agency shall check and report whether work is being executed according to the
drawings designs and specifications of the agreement and in accordance with the
approved drawings.

3. The TPQA agency shall be responsible for bringing-out in writing, to the notice of
CPWD any instances of deviations from accepted quality of construction materials,
workmanship and general quality of works at appropriate stages ofconstruction.

4. TPQA agency shall inspect the construction site during the works under progress
frequently to achieve the stipulated standards of quality in the project. If there is any
discrepancy/ error/ omission the team shall point out the same with suggestions and
remedial measures with codal provisions.

5. TPQA agency shall highlight the problem area, if any, also suggest steps/ solutions
to rectify the same so as to achieve the overall target of quality assurance.

6. TPQA agency shall arrange testing of materials used in construction work for
ascertaining their quality through reputed laboratories/ institutions preferably
Government testing Centers. All standard tests shall be arranged. TPQA agency
shall report the results of testing to CPWD with their suggestions and remedial
measures.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 279

C-1 Internal & External Electrical Installations i/c Lightning conductor, Street light,
emergency light, Illuminated signages

1.0 Technical Specification for IEI Works

1.1 The scope of work shall include Planning, designing & preparation of drawings,
supplying, installation, testing & commissioning of Internal Electrical Installations
and its components in Hospital and other Buildings. If any item required to make
the scheme functional, it is not specifically mentioned, the same is deemed to be
included within the scope of this tender. These technical specifications shall be read
along with the General Conditions for all E&M works given under subhead C-B.

1.1.1 Work shall be carried out as per CPWD General Specifications for Electrical Works
Part-I (Internal) 2023 & Part-II (External) 2023, NBC 2016 amended up to the last
date of submission of tender. All electrical works shall be carried out in accordance
with the provisions of Indian Electricity Act, 2003, National Electrical Code 2010 and
Indian Electricity Rules, 1956 amended up to date. List of rules of particular
importance to electrical installations under these General Specifications for internal
electrical works is given for reference.

1.1.2 Conduits and Accessories shall conform to latest edition of Indian Standards. 16/
14 (16 gauge up to 32mm diameter & 14 gauge above 32 mm diameter) gauge MS
conduits shall be used. Joints between conduits and accessories shall be securely
made by standard accessoriesto ensure earth continuity. All conduit accessories
shall be of threaded type only. Make of conduits and accessories shall be used
from the approved list only.

1.1.3 The wiring and conduit route plan/drawings shall be submitted by the contractor and
shall be got approved from the Engineer-in-charge.

1.1.4 Check nuts shall be provided while terminating the M.S. conduits in switch boxes.
The contractor shall provide only ISI marked metallic junction boxes of required
sizes even for PVC conduit laid in the slab. The metallic junction boxes & looping
boxes shall be covered with approved makes of phenolic laminated sheet/ GI sheet.
The fan box cover shall be made from 3mm thick phenolic laminated sheet as per
CPWD specifications.

1.1.5 Four core cables shall be used in place of three and half core cables to minimize
heating of neutral core due to harmonic content in the supply system and also
avoidance of overload failures.

1.1.6 All Internal Electrical Works shall be carried out with MSconduit. All
switches,sockets,ACSockets, IP Phone socket, Data sockets, stepped type (2
module) fan regulators, bell push and accessories along with matching mounting
boxes shall be of modular type. All mounting boxes for modular type accessories
shall be of metallic construction and of the same make as that of the modular type
switches and accessories. Power point for computer shall have 3Nos 5A sockets
and 1 No 15A switch in onebox.

1.1.7 While deciding the size of switch boxes for light points / fan point / exhaust fan

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 280

point, two extra modules shall be provided for each fan point for fixing of
regulator. Wherever extra modules are available, the same shall be provided with
blanking plates without any extra cost.

1.1.8 The wires used for point wiring and power wiring shall be of 650/ 1100 Volts grade
Flame Retardant Low Smoke (FRLS) PVC insulated multi stranded copper
conductor single core cables. Minimum size of copper conductor for power wiring
shall be 4 Sq mm for power sockets, 6 sq mm for AC & Geyser points. Minimum
size of copper conductor for Light, fan points wiring and circuit wiring shall be 1.5 sq
mm. Submain wiring shall not be done with below 6.0 sq mm copper conductor
cable. For conductor sizes less than or equal to 16 sq.mm. only copper conductor
should be used. Colour coding as per specification shall be adopted in the wiring
system.

1.1.9 All components in a wiring installation shall be of appropriate ratings of voltage,

current and frequency, as required at the respective sections of CPWD
specifications of the electrical installations in which they are used. All conductors,
switches and accessories shall be of such size as to be capable of carrying the
maximum current, which will normally flow through them, without their respective
ratings being exceeded

1.1.10 UPS& Essential DBs shall be separate. The size of DBs at one location shall be
same irrespective of number of circuits connected from the DB. The make of
MCBDBs, MCBs and RCBOs shall be same everywhere. All distribution boards
shall be marked with circuits controlling the rooms/ area/ SDB controlled. Size of
distribution board shall be as per number of light / power circuits. All circuits shall be
terminated on individual MCBs. All distribution boards shall be double door type.

1.1.11 RCBO of 30 mA sensitivity of suitable rating shall be provided as Incomer of each

Distribution board. The MCB should be 10 KA breaking Capacity and of same
make as that of MCB DBs.

1.1.12 The Conduiting work for the telephone, LAN and CCTV wiring shall be carried out in
such a way that all the other end of wirings can be terminated in Patch panel
including rack of each floor and in the EPBAX room/ Control room.

1.1.13 Wherever providing of rigid conduits is not possible, flexible MS conduit pipe shall
be provided for drawing/ running the wires. However, such arrangement has to be
kept minimum and only with the prior approval of Engineer-in-charge or his
authorized representative.

1.1.14 While laying MS conduits for fire alarm system and wiring for other services,
sufficient junction outlets are to be provided as per the direction of the Engineer-in-
Charge for detectors as required.

1.1.15 Wiring with Cat 6A for Intercom / Telephone shall be terminated in suitable size of
G.I. Junction box with face plate and RJ-45 socket. All the other end of wiring shall
be terminated in Patch panel including rack of each floor and in the EPBAX room.
The wiring shall be suitably tagged/marked mentioning the location of each point.
The fiber optic cable shall be used for inter connection of networking switches. The
patch panels patch chords and layer 2 and layer 3 switches are in the scope of
work. In all waiting areas sufficient multiple multistrand 6 A socket outlet should be
provided as mobilecharging point

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 281

1.1.16 No ceiling rose /connector/ looping box shall be provided, wherever false ceiling is
being provided. The point wiring in that case shall be extended up to the fitting/fan
etc. directly without provisions of any termination arrangement in between. The wire
from the end points up to the fixture shall be considered to be included in the point
wiring.

1.1.17 Earthing and all items of work that cannot be checked later, are to be got approved
from Engineer-in-charge or his authorized representative before proceeding further.

1.1.18 The firm shall use only electrically operated chase cutting machine for cutting the
chases in the wall for recessed conduit wiring.

1.1.19 Tinned copper lugs / Thimbles / ferrules shall be provided for termination of earth
wire to all Metallic outlet boxes / fittings / fixtures / fan regulator / MCB DB / switch
board / Meter board. Termination should be properly crimped / brazed / soldered.
Metal sheath of Co-axial T.V. cable shall be terminated using 'U' shape thimble /
lugs / ferrules.

1.1.20 A suitable brass / tinned copper neutral links shall be fixed at suitable places in the
Metallic outlet boxes of all sizes to terminate neutral wire properly.

1.1.21 All hardware material such as nuts / bolts / screws / washers etc. to be used in the
work shall be zinc / cadmium plated iron. These hardware items which are
essentially required for completing any item as per specifications is deemed to have
been included in the item even when the same have not been specifically
mentioned. The galvanized boxes of modular switch / sockets etc. shall be of the
same make as of switch / socket etc.

1.1.22 To facilitate drawing of wires, GI fish wire shall be invariably drawn in recessed
conduit. No or minimum junction box shall be provided in the entire length of conduit
run for drawing of wires.

1.1.23 The ceiling roses wherever required to be provided (along with earthing provision)
are included in the scope of work. The connection to incoming switch / isolator / bus
bar / MCB shall be made with suitable size of thimble and cable.

1.1.24 The Incomer for vertical DBs used for power distribution, shall be suitable rating
MCCB of 35/36KA rating breaking capacity.

1.1.25 Power supply to DBs located in lift machine room at suitable location as approved
by Engineer-in- charge shall be done using suitable insulated armored cable.
Supply, installation, testing and commissioning of cable shall be in the scope of
work.

1.1.26 Inside the lift shaft, there shall be arrangement of one light point at each floor level
and one light point at overhead, one light point in lift pit. All light points shall be in
group controlled and wired with 2.5 sq mm FRLS PVC insulated copper conductor
cable. One 15-amp power plug and one 5-amp power plug shall be provided at each
floor with individual switch. Wiring of these power plugs shall be done with 4 sq mm
FRLS copper wires. LED Bulkhead fittings of suitable rating to provide minimum 200
lux shall be connected with each point of lift shaft.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 282

1.1.27 LT panels shall be cubicle TTA type panels only, as per accepted list of makes
attached and as per drawings approved by Engineer–in–Charge. All TTA panels shall
be strictly as per IEC61439 /BIS/CPWD specifications. Each TTA Panel shall be
fabricated from 2 mm thick M.S. sheet powder coated with 7 tank process and shall
be equipped with 4 pole MCCBs, Copper Bus bars, digital multifunction meter, LED
indicating lamps, extended rotary handle and all accessories as required.

1.1.28 TTA Floor Panels shall be provided for all UPS and Essential supply panels.
Incomer of UPS and Essential panels shall be connected with DG set Supply with
Auto changeover switch / Auto Transfer Switcher (ATS). Incomer, outgoing, bus bar,
indicating instruments etc. shall be designed as per maximum load and shall be got
approved from Engineer-in-charge. All TTA panels shall be of same Make.

1.1.29 The MCCBs, if used as incomer then it should have Over voltage, earth fault
protection and time delay. Earth leakage modules are not acceptable. breaking
capacity of MCCBs for all types of panel boards except DBs shall be as per fault
level of that location. The rated service breaking capacity should be equal to rated
ultimate breaking capacities (Ics=Icu=100%). MCCBs above 200A rating shall be
provided with microprocessor relay with suitable fault level, (Minimum of 35/36 KA
breaking capacity) adjustable Over Load, Short Circuit protection.

1.1.30 Lightning arresters and aviation obstruction lights (LED Type) shall also be
provided.

1.1.31 For accommodating various size of cables in road crossings, medium class
G.I. pipe of suitable size but not less 150 mm shall be provided. Different power
supplies shall be taken in independent pipes. Additional provision of one spare pipe
for supply cables, each of minimum 150 mm size, shall be kept for future extension
within the quoted rates.

1.1.32 Earthing system comprising of Structural Earthing to be made for all the buildings.
Necessary provisions for tapping the earth electrode at all locations as required
shall be provided. To all those services for which providing tapping from structural
earthing is not possible / not advisable separate copper plate earth electrode with
earth conductor, earth bus shall be provided as per provision laid down in CPWD
specifications part I, 2013. Earthing system should be designed such as to
maintain earth resistanceas specified in CPWD specifications.

1.1.33 A Specialized Agency shall be appointed for Structural Earthing and lightning
protection system. The credentials of the Specialized agency from one of the
approved makes shall be submitted for approval of Engineer-in- Charge.

1.1.34 The wiring shall be done in such a way to provide UPS back up in the areas as
mentioned below
i. Lighting loads of the Hospital building
excluding below mentioned areas (at ii & iii) : 25%
ii. Lighting loads of stair case, Toilets, Substation Building, Meeting Rooms,
Kitchen, Mortuary and Director’s Room :100%
iii. Power Loads/ Equipment Load of Computers CCTV, Access Control, FA&
PA System,

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 283

MGPS, Nurse Station, Nurse Call System. :100%

1.1.35 Provision is to be taken into consideration during designing for

i. LED mirror light above each wash basin.
ii. Hand driers shall be installed in each toilet and Doctor’s Rooms.
iii. Tentative power requirement to be provided in areas are as given below.
These are minimum requirements and may be
higherasperthedesignandfunctionalrequirementofclient.

1.1.36 In other areas which are not covered in above paras, following minimum
provision shall be provided in the building: -
a) All 16A sockets shall be Universal type with 6 / 16 A, 6 pin sockets. In corridor
area for each 30 sq mtrs areas 1 no. 16 amp power plug (Switch & Socket), 2
nos 6 amps light plug (Switch & Sockets) outlets.
b) Two runs of 25 mm x 5 mm thick copper strips shall be provided for each Lift.
These earth strips shall be connected with connectors taken out from the
Structural Earthing system of the building.

1.1.37 Provision of PowerPoints of rating at least 25% more than the load of the
equipment, shall be kept for all medical equipment in the Hospital Building.

1.1.38 Suitable size XLPE insulated copper / Aluminium conductor cables shall be laid for the
power and light requirements of the all Medical / Non-Medical equipment in kitchen,
laundry, MGPS, CSSD, lifts, STP plant, Medical OT, TSSU, X-Ray, CT, MRI, Ultra-
Sound, Rising mains and other servicesfrom Main LT panels located at
substation.Floor/wall mounting electrical panels of important medical services such as
OTs, CT, MRI, X-ray etc. shall be fed from two different feeders with Auto Transfer
facility.

1.1.39 The Electrical supply from the Online UPS shall be through TTA type UPS Panel
with necessary MCCB incomers and outgoings of suitable capacity andrating. From
the UPS output panel, the connections shall be given to the UPS rising mains.The
panel should confirm with IEC 61439-1 & 2 for Type tested assemblies and IEC
61641for Internal Arc in vertical bus bar, Horizontal busbar and functional unit
chambers.

1.1.40 The supply from the UPS and DG set to various equipment and E&M services shall
be as per the latest relevant guidelines and shall be decided during the execution of
work as per the client department.

1.1.41 All materials and equipment supplied by the contractor shall be new. They shall be
of such design, to satisfactorily function under the rated conditions of operation
and to withstand the environmental conditions at site.

1.1.42 The make of material has been indicated in the list of acceptable makes. No other
make shall be acceptable. The material to be used in the work shall be got
approved from the Engineer-in-charge before its use at site. The Engineer-in-charge
shall reserve the right to instruct the contractor to remove the material which, in his
opinion, is not as per specifications.

1.1.43 The materials shall be subjected to quality tests at the discretion of the Engineer-in-
charge as per the specifications described for the item/material. Materials brought to

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 284

the site of work, the contractor shall, furnish manufacturers test certificates to satisfy
the provisions of IS codes relevant to the material and/or the work done.

1.1.44 Similar parts of all switches, lamp holders, distribution fuse boards, Switch gears,
ceiling roses, brackets, pendants, fans and all other fittings of the same type shall
be interchangeable in each installation.

1.1.45 Inspection of materials and equipment:

a) The firm shall be required to procure material as per the approved makes
directly from the manufacturer/ authorized dealers to ensure genuineness & quality.
Proof in this regard of purchase shall be submitted by the contractor, if required by
the department.

b) Inspection at factory or at godown of the manufacturer, as required, shall be

arranged by the firm for a mutually agreed date. Certificate for genuineness of the
fittings shall have to be provided duly signed by the manufacturer’s officer not below
the rank of Regional Manager. Department shall reserve the right to waive
inspection in lieu of suitable test certificate, at its discretion.

1.1.46 Materials and equipment to be used in the work shall be inspected by the
departmental officers. Such inspection will be of following categories:
a) Inspection of materials / equipment to be witnessed at the Manufacturer’s premises in
accordance with relevant BIS / Agreement Inspection Procedure.
1.1.47 The contractor shall give a trial run of the equipment and machinery for establishing
its capability to achieve the specifications within laid down tolerances to the
satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge before commencement of work.

1.1.48 The contractor shall engage suitably skilled/ licensed workmen of various categories
for execution of work duly supervised by technical representative having appropriate
qualification and experience to ensure proper execution of work. They shall carry
out instructions of Engineer-in-charge and his authorized representatives during the
progress of work.
1.1.49 The contractor shall provide recesses, holes, openings, etc., as may be required for
the electrical, air conditioning and other related works. contractor has also to fix
inserts, sleeves, brackets, conduits, base plates, insert plates, clamps etc., if any at
the time of casting of concrete, stone work & brick work. These inserts, sleeves,
brackets, conduits, base plates, insert plates, clamps etc., shall be arranged by the
contractor.

1.1.50 The contractor shall ensure quality construction in a planned and time bound
manner. Any substandard material or work which is not within permissible tolerance
limits shall be summarily rejected.

1.1.51 The contractor shall make sample as per time-line mentioned in the milestone given
in this tender document using all approved materials, for approval of Engineer-in-
charge, before commencement of execution of mass scale work.

1.1.52 After completing the work, necessary test results shall be recorded and submitted to
the department

1.2 Light Fittings,Fans and Accessories

1.2.1 Light fittings and accessories shall conform to relevant IS standards and

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 285

specifications as amended up to the date. The common language used in NBC-

2016 for mandatory provisions is by use of word “recommended”. Therefore, if in
NBC whenever the recommended word is used, it is to be treated as a
mandatory provision. In case any part of the work specification is not available in
the aforesaid mentioned documents, then part of the work will be carried out in
accordance with sound engineering practice and as per directions of Engineer-in-
charge.

1.2.2 All the light fixtures shall be energy-efficient. Fittings shall be designed for
continuous trouble-free operation under any atmospheric conditions without
reduction in lamp life or without deterioration of materials and internal wiring.
Outdoor fittings shall be weather and rainproof.

1.2.3 All lighting fixtures should be LED type having efficacy more than 110 Lumen/ Watt
and CRI >80, THD <10%, LM 79 & LM 80 test report from NABL accredited lab
should be submitted by the agency. The Colour temperature maybe 4000 K to 6500
K as per site requirement. External / outdoor light fittings shall be IK 10, IP 65/66
rating.

1.2.4 For this specification, the relevant LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) shall be of specified
parameters as per latest datasheet of Original Equipment Manufacturer. (Only
NICHIA/ PHILIPS LUMILEDS/ AVAGO/ SEOUL Semiconductor /OSRAM / CREE
make LEDs with life of minimum 50,000 hours shall be used)

1.2.5 Lighting & Fan Design should be carried out as per National Lighting Code 2010/
NBC 2016 /CPWD specifications /ECBC guidelines. Wherever range of illumination
for space is mentioned, higher side of Lux level must be taken for design purpose.
Number of LED fittings shall be provided on the basis of average illumination
range for different areas. If as per the design, the quantity of light fixtures comes out
that does not make the symmetry, then higher number of light fixtures shall be taken
to maintain the symmetry in the room. Similarly, number of ceiling fans shall be
designed. It may be ensured that at least 25% of lights in the Hospital premises
shall be connected to UPS supply. All the internal lighting load, fans Load of the
Hospital, Car Parking and other building and external lights shall be connected with
essential supply.

1.2.6 Dimmable lightings with smart control shall be provided in conference hall
/meeting rooms.All the corridor and common area lights shall be sensor based as
per ECBC 2017 requirements.

1.2.7 To maintain different levels of illumination near beds in Wards downlighters can be
used in combination with 2’ X2’ / 4’ X 2’ fittings as required.

1.2.8 Ceiling fans shall be provided in every building and at each location except toilets /
Bath rooms. Either ceiling fans or wall fans shall be provided in air- conditioned
areas considering the ceiling height. All ceiling fans shall be of appropriate sweep
and should be BLDC type. Optimum size / number of ceiling fans for room of
different sizes shall be as per provision laid down in CPWD specifications for
internal EI work 2013 and NBC 2016. Minimum air delivery and service value shall
be as per the above specification.

1.2.9 Ventilation fans with ducting /Exhaust fans of suitable capacity and sweep shall be
provided in all Toilets/WC, stores, Substation, MGPS room,

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 286

Laundry, CSSD, STP room, Electrical panel rooms, Pantryand Isolation Beds (as
indicated in ventilation drawings) on the basis of CFM calculations as per NBC-
2016, CPWD Specifications and as per the approval of Engineer-in-Charge.

1.2.10 A few cubicles may have a choice of positive or negative operating pressures
(relative to the open area). Cubicles usually act as isolation facilities and their lobby
areas must be appropriately ventilated in line with the function of an isolation area
(i.e., pressure must lie between that in the multi-bed area and the sideward).

1.2.11 Negative pressure isolation rooms: - In these rooms the windows do not open. They
have greater exhaust than supply air volume. Pressure differential of 2.5 Pa shall be
maintained. Clean to dirty airflow i.e., direction of the air flow is from the outside
adjacent space (i.e... corridor, anteroom) into the room. Air from room preferably
exhausted to the outside.

1.2.12 Positive pressure isolation rooms: - To provide protective environment for patients
at highest risk of infection. These rooms should be provided with positive air flow,
through HEPA filter. (i.e., air flows from the room to the outside adjacent space).
Pressure differential of 2.5 Pa – 8 Pa shall be maintained. The temperature should
be 21±1 Deg. C and relative humidity should be 50 ±5%.

1.2.13 Return air of battery room shall be exhausted. In addition, equal capacity of standby
exhaust fan shall be provided for battery room.

1.2.14 All corridors shall be provided with proper ducted air circulation/ ventilation to
achieve the conditions with number of air changes as per NBC-2016.

1.2.15 Gate lighting with decorative LED type post top lantern shall be provided.
Illumination to be maintained as per NBC 2016 and shall be controlled by timer
switch panel for Auto ON/OFF. Lighting with Bollard fittings shall be provided in
Lawns and Internal Walkways.

1.2.16 Illuminated Signages :- Planning, Designing and preparation of drawings obtaining

approvals form the department for emergency light and illuminated sign board, SITC
of sign board in each building showing exit , floor lift, stari case, electric shaft etc. at
every building in the campus as per detailed specifications.

1.2.17 The cabling of the compound lights should be in such a way that every third or
alternate pole shall be connected from each R-Y-B phase of 3-phase supply line for
ensuring minimum light at the time of failure of either of the phase.
1.2.18 The light luminaries/electrical light fixtures provided under the contract shall be
guaranteed for a period of 5 years from the date of completion/ handing over
whichever is later. In this regard contractor shall furnish an undertaking for
Guarantee/Warrantee of LED luminaries for 5 years from the manufacturer duly
endorsed by him.

1.3 Details of the light fittings to be installed in different areas.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 287

SITC of Recess / Surface Mounting 2’x2’/ 4’X2’ LED Tile

fitting of28-36W, having minimum efficacy 110 lumen/W,
with IP 40 protection. LM79 Report from authorized NABL
Lab required to verify system lumen output. Luminaire
2’X2’ / 4’X2’ LED housing should be made of Powder coated CRCA with PC
Recess/ Surface diffuser. CCT of Luminaire 5700K with ANSI Binning, CRI
Mounting Fitting >80. LED Used should have a life of 50000 hrs. LM80
(Lobbies / Report should be provided to verify life span of LED. LED
Offices / Wards / Driver Should be Isolated type constant current APFC and
Doctor / CMO / have Input voltage range of 150-270Volts, THD - <10%,
HOD rooms etc) PF - 0.95, Surge protection - 2KV, Driver Efficiency > / =
85% and should have Output Short Circuit protection,
Open Circuit protection, Over Load protection. Product
Should be BIS Approved. Reports Required - LM79/
LM80/ Photobiological Safety
report.

SITC of Recess / Surface Mounting LED Down lighter of 9/

12/ 15/ 18 W having minimum efficacy of 110lm/W with IP
40 protection. LM79 Report from authorized NABL Lab
required to verify system lumen output Luminaire housing
LED Downlighter should be made of Powder Coated aluminium pressure
9W /12W /15 die casting with diffuser to reduce glare. CCT of
W/18 W Recess / Luminaire 5700K with ANSI Binning, CRI >80. LED Used
Surface should have a life of 50000 hrs. LM80 Report should be
Mounting Fitting provided to verify life span of LED. LED Driver Should be
(Staircases / Isolated type constant current APFC and have Input
Corridors / voltage range of 90-265Volts, THD - <10%, PF - 0.95,
Washrooms etc) Surge protection - 2KV, Driver Efficiency > / = 85% and
should have Output Short Circuit protection, Open Circuit
protection, Over Load protection. Reports Required
- LM79/ LM80/Photobiological Safety report.

SITC of LED Street Light fitting suitable for pole mounting

of 60W/ 90W having minimum efficacy of 110lm/W with IP
65 protection. LM79 Report from authorized NABL Lab
required to verify system lumen output Luminaire housing
should be made of powder coated aluminium LM06 or
ADC 12 pressure die casting with IP PC Lenses to
provide batwing light distribution as per requirement. The
LED Street Light
CCT of Luminaire 5700K with ANSI Binning, CRI >70.
fittings 60W / 90
LED Used should have a life of 50000 hrs. LM80 Report
W (Peripheral
should be provided to verify life span of. LED Driver
Lighting)
Should be completely potted Isolated type constant
current APFC and have Input voltage range of 120-
300Volts, THD - <10%, PF - 0.95, Surge protection - 4KV
with 10KV SPD, Driver Efficiency > / = 85% and should
have Output Short Circuit protection, Open Circuit
protection, Reports Required - LM79/ LM80/
Photobiological Safety report.

SITC of Surface/ Wall Mount IP65 LED Bulkhead of 9-

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 288

12 W having minimum efficacy 110lm/W. LM79 Report

from authorized NABL Lab required to verify system
lumen output Luminaire housing should be made of
LED Bulkhead Powder Coated aluminium pressure die casting with
Fitting (Terrace / Polycarbonate diffuser to reduce glare. CCT of
Lift shafts / Luminaire 5700K with ANSI Binning, CRI >80. LED
Outside the Used should have a life of 50000 hrs @. LM80 Report
Pump house, should be provided to verify life span of LED. LED Driver
Substation & Should be Isolated type constant current APFC and
other similar have Input voltage range of 140-280Volts, THD - <10%,
exposed places) PF - 0.95, Surge protection - 2KV, Driver Efficiency > / =
85% and should have Output Short Circuit protection,
Open Circuit protection, Over Load protection. Reports
Required - LM79/ LM80/ Photobiological Safety report.
SITC of Pole mounted Post Top fittings, 35-40W
LED,having minimum efficacy 110lm/W, 400mm
(approx.) dia height 300mm Light distribution 120
degree for uniform lighting all around with PMMA
Diffuser for superior Performance. Product should have
Post Top Fitting IP65 protection. CCT should be 5700K/4000K with ANSI
35-40W (Gate Binning. Housing should be made of powder coated
Lighting / aluminium rust protection with top opening aluminium
Compound cover suitable for Pole dia 60-75mm. Life of LED should
Lighting for areas be 50000 Hrs and LM80 report should comply the same.
other than CRI >70. Driver should be completely potted with >IP65
Peripheral Protection, it should be Constant current isolated type
lighting) and have Input voltage range 150-270V, Surge
Protection - 2KV, driver efficiency > / = 85%, THD <10%,
Output Short circuit Protection, Open Circuit Protection,
Reports Req. - LM79/ LM80/ Photobiological Safety
report.

SITC of Surface Mountingtype 2ft Industrial Grade LED

Batten of 10W having minimum efficacy 110lm/W. with
IP40 protection LM79 Report from authorized NABL Lab
required to verify system lumen output. Luminaire
housing should be made of Aluminium Extrusion with PC
diffuser. CCT of Luminaire 5700K with ANSI Binning,
CRI >80. LED Used should have a life of 50000 hrs. LM80
10W LED
Report should be provided to verify life span of LED. LED
BattenFitting
Driver Should be Isolated type constant current APFC and
(Wash-basin
have Input voltage range of 150- 270Volts, THD - <10%,
Mirror Lights)
PF - 0.95, Surge protection -
2KV, Driver Efficiency > / = 85% and should have
Output Short Circuit protection, Open Circuit protection,
Over Load protection, should have High voltage cutoff
@305V± 10V.Reports Required - LM79/ LM80/
Photobiological Safety report.

SITC of Surface Mountingtype 4ft Industrial Grade LED

Batten of 20W / 40W having minimum efficacy 110lm/W.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 289

with IP40 protection LM79 Report from authorized NABL

Lab required to verify system lumen output. Luminaire
housing should be made of Aluminium Extrusion with PC
20W/ 40W LED
diffuser. CCT of Luminaire 5700K with ANSI Binning, CRI
BattenFitting
>80. LED Used should have a life of 50000 hrs. LM80
(Service Building
Report should be provided to verify life span of LED. LED
areas / Ramps /
Driver Should be Isolated type constant current APFC and
Lift machine
have Input voltage range of 150- 270Volts, THD - <10%,
Rooms and other
PF - 0.95, Surge protection - 2KV, Driver Efficiency > / =
Misc. Rooms)
85% and should have
Output Short Circuit protection, Open Circuit protection,
Over Load protection, should have High voltage cut-off
@305V± 10V. Reports Required - LM79/ LM80/
Photobiological Safety report.

SITC of Surface Mount IP40 LED Batten of 20W having

minimum 110lm/W. LM79 Report from authorized NABL
Lab required to verify system lumen output. Luminaire
housing should be made of Powder coated CRCA with
PC diffuser. IT should have a inbuilt occupancy sensor
for presence detection or movement detection. CCT of
20W LED Batten
Luminaire 5700K with ANSI binning, CRI >80. LED Used
with Sensor
should have a life of 50000 hrs. LM80 Report should be
(Stores /
provided to verify life span of LED. LED Driver Should
Basement)
be Isolated type constant current APFC and have Input
voltage range of 150-270Volts, THD - <10%, PF - 0.95,
Surge protection - 2KV, Driver Efficiency > / = 85% and
should have Output Short Circuit protection, Open
Circuit protection, Over Load protection. Reports
Required - LM79/ LM80/ Photobiological Safety report.

SITC of Surface Mount/ Pendent mount LED highbay

fitting of 80W having minimum 110lm/W with IP65
protection. LM79 Report from authorized NABL Lab
required to verify system lumen output. Luminaire
housing should be made of aluminium die cast with PC
lens. CCT of Luminaire 5700K with ANSI binning, CRI
80W LED
>80. LED Used should have a life of 50000 hrs. LM80
highbay Fitting
Report should be provided to verify life span of LED. LED
(for double
Driver Should be Isolated type constant current APFC
height Area)
and have Input voltage range of 120-300Volts,
THD - <10%, PF - 0.95, Surge protection - 4KV, Driver
Efficiency > / = 85% and should have Output Short
Circuit protection, Open Circuit protection, Over Load
protection. Reports Required - LM79/ LM80/
Photobiological Safety report.

10-20W LED decorative bollard made of aluminium

Bollard Light casting with aluminium top. The top head should be at
fittings (for least 300mm to match the light levels as approved by
Lawns) engineer in charge. Height should be at least 1100mm

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 290

with polycarbonate unbreakable diffuser with

mechanical impact protection of IK10 and rated as dust
protection as IP65. The efficacy of the LEDs should be
greater than 100 lumen per watt and should be powered
with at least 3KV surge protection driver. The fixture must
have an external surge protection device, Input
Voltage- AC 240 Volt

1.4 Hand Driers: -

Efficient approximate 20-30 seconds to dry hand Rated power usage of < 2000 watts.
Shuts off automatically when user removes hands, saving electricity. Touch free
operation reduces chance of user contamination. Dries excess water from hands
quickly, rather than dropping on floor. Noise absorption module decreases noise level.
Burn proof ABS plastic. Electrical and temperature sensors for greater safety. Stylish
ergonomic design.

Technical Specifications
i. Operating Voltage: 220 – 240V AC, 50 HZ.
ii. Warm Air Speed Output: 103 m/s.
iii. Noise Level: 82dba at 1 meter.
iv. Motor Type: 2800 rpm motor.
v. Thermal Protection: Auto resetting thermostat turns unit off, 240V at 221-
degree Fahrenheit (105 degree Celsius).
vi. Heater Element: 1800-2000 W heater.
vii. Mount Type: Wall Mounted.
viii. Material: High Grade ABS.
ix. Power: 1800-Watt or above
x. Operation type: Touch free Infra-red Sensor activation.
xi. Automatic Cut Off: Upto 60 sec.
xii. Air speed: >15 m/s.
xiii. Drying time: 20Sec – 30 Sec.
xiv. Color: White

1.5 EV Charging Points

Minimum 5 % slow charging stations and 1.5 % fast charging stations of total
parking capacity shall be provided for 4W/2W parking in the basement for charging of
Electrical Vehicles.

1.6 Post Top Pole (Ornamental)

The pole should be of 4 meter black painted galvanized decorative designer steel
poles in different sections, top 60mm dia., bottom 140mm dia. with gold colour
painted ornamental ring having lockable weather proof flush door junction box in
bottom section, base plate dia. 280-350mm complete erected in an approved manner
on existing foundation. Suitable size &type of foundation bolts 4 nos. X 16mm X
450mm 'J' type (EN8 grade). These poles shall be provided in the front side of the
building to cover the areas other than covered by Peripheral Lighting.

1.7.1.1 Streetlight 7 Meter Octagonal Pole (Peripheral Lighting)

These streetlight poles with fittings shall be provided all around the building
other than front sides.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 291

Height of mast: 7 meters

No. of sections: One

Material construction: S 355 grade as per BS-EN10 025

Top: 70 mm,
Base dia. and top diameter (A/F):
Bottom: 130 mm

Plate thickness & section Length: Top: 3 mm, Length - 7000MM

Cross section of Mast: 8 side polygons.

Standard for of galvanisation: As per BS EN ISO 1461

Base Plate 200X200X12

Lightning protection finial: Not required

Max. wind speed: As per IS: 875 (Part - III)

Number of foundation bolts: 4 nos.

PCD of foundation bolts: 200

Type / diameter / length of foundat

bolts: TS 600 / 20 mm dia / 600 mm long

1.7 Lightning Protectlon System

1.7.1 The Indian Standard specifications and Codes of Practice will apply to the
equipment and the work covered by the scope of the contract. Wherever
appropriate Indian Standards are not available, relevant British and/ or IEC
Standards shall be applicable.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 292

1.7.2 It is to be noted that updated and current Standards shall be applicable even
though those are listed below.
Code of Practice for the protection of buildings
Structures against Lightning IS 2309: 1989, IS/ IEC 62305 Code of Practice
for Earthing IS 3043: 1987

1.7.3 The Lightning Protective System shall comprise of Air Terminations, Down
Conductors, Earth Terminations etc. as required. The System shall preferably
use the same conducting material throughout and will comply to the detailed
specifications as detailed here in after. The entire lightning system should be
mechanically strong to withstand the mechanical forces produced in case of a
lightning stroke. The system shall be designed as per NBC/ CPWD
specifications.

1.7.4 Materials

The materials of which the protective system is composed shall be resistant to

corrosion or be adequately protected against corrosion. The material shall
comply with the following requirements:

1.7.4.1 Copper - When solid or stranded copper wire is used, it shall be of the grade
ordinarily required for commercial electrical work and generally designated as
being of 98% conductivity when annealed, conforming to Indian Standard
specifications.

1.7.4.2 Galvanized Steel - Galvanized steel used shall be thoroughly protected

against corrosion by hot dipped Zinc coating . The material coating shall
withstand the test specified in 182309:1968.The strips to be used shall be in
maximum lengths available as manufactured normally, avoiding unnecessary
joints.

1.7.5 AIR Terminatlons

1.7.5.1 Vertical Air Terminations

Vertical air terminations shall comprise of finials made of 25 mm dia. GI tube
with multiple prongs at the top. Vertical terminations wherever provided shall
project 30cms above the project salient pointor network on which it is fixed

1.7.5.2 Horizontal Air Terminations

Horizontal air terminations should be so interconnected that no part of the roof
is more than 9.0 meter away from the nearest horizontal conductor. For a flat
roof, horizontal air termination along the outer perimeter of the roof is to be
used . For a roof of larger area, a network of parallel horizontal conductors shall
be installed . Horizontal air terminations should be coursed along contours
such as ridges, parapets and egdes of the flat roofs and wherever necessary,
over flat surfaces in such away as to join each air termination to the rest and
should themselves form a closed network.

All metallic finials, chimneys, duct, vent pipes, railings, gutters, and the like on or
above the main surface of the roof of the structure should be bonded to and form
partof the air termination network.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 293

1.7.5.3 Down Conductors

These shall be distributed around the outside walls of the structure and shall
preferably be run along the corners and other projections. Lift shafts shall not be
used for fixing the down Conductors.
The routing of the down Conductors shall be such that it is accessible for
inspection, testing and maintenance .

1.7.6 Testing Joints And Bends

1. The lightning protective system should have as few joints in it aspossible .
2. Wherever joints in the down conductor above ground level are necessary, they
shall be mechanically and electrically effective .
3. In the down conductor below ground level there shall be no joints.
4. The joints may be clamped , screwed , bolted , riveted , brazed or welded .
Bolted joints should be used on test points or on bonds to existing metal.
5. Each down conductor should be provided with a testing joint in a
position convenient for testing but in accessible.
1.7.7 Fasteners
Conductors shall be securely attached to the building by fasteners which shall be
substantial in construction, not subject to breakage. These shall be of galvanized
steel or other suitable materials with suitable precautions to avoid corrosion. The
method and nature of the fixing should be simple, solid and permanent . The
lightning conductors shall be secured at not more than 1.20 m apart for horizontal
run and 1.00 m for vertical run.
1.7.8 Earth Termination
All down conductors shall have earth termination to the structural Earthing done to
the building and all earth terminations should be interconnected through the
structural earthing system.
1.7.9 Earth resistance
The whole of the lightning protective system should have a combined resistance to
earth not exceeding 5 ohms before any bonding has been effected to metal or on a
surface or to surface below ground.
1.8 LED-Based Aviation Obstruction Warning Light
Supplying, Installation of Two or more steady-burning red Aviation Obstruction lights
suitable for 230V, single phase, AC supply diagonally or on diametrically opposite
positions to ensure an unobstructed view of one or more lights by a pilot.
1.8.1 Features:
i. LED Warning Light shall be a “fit-and-forget” solution that utilises the latest InP LED
technology to eliminate hazard and frequent replacement.
ii. Aviation Obstruction Light (AOL) shall be made by utilising highly reliable high
luminosity LEDs to offer the following features:
a) Long life of 1,00,000 hours (on continuous burning basis), thus requiring no
further replacement once fitted.
b) Low power consumption of 10 to 15 watts only, giving significant reduction in
energy costs.
c) Solid-state reliability; built-in fail-safe feature due to parallel circuits.
d) Shock-proof, vibration-resistant construction.
e) Ability to withstand voltage fluctuations.
f) Improvement in power factor.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 294

1.8.2 Construction and other details.

The AOL shall have multiple-LED units fitted in an LM-6 alloy cast metal AOL
body and covered with thick clear glass cover. The AOL unit shall have InP
technology LED design giving total 360° (integrated) luminous intensity (of all
LEDs nominal 300cd), resulting in a designed radial (directional) intensity of 15cd
(average) in any direction in the horizontal plane.
1.8.2.1 Physical Data Enclosure: Model ‘A’ design Protection: Weatherproof IP 65
Construction: Cast metal LM-6 alloy
Gasket: Endless neopreneCable entry: ET 19mm
Terminals: Fitted in a weatherproof box on the body of the unit, Earth terminal
shall be provided externally
1.8.2.2 Light Service Data
LEDs: Multiple InP technology LEDs Colour: Red (wavelength: 615-650nm)
Total designed integrated candela: 300 candela nominals, resulting in a relevant
designed radial (directional) intensity of 15-18cd in any direction in the horizontal
plane
1.8.2.3 Electrical Data
Each unit shall be tested at 280VAC (20% over voltage) for 100 hours or seven
days to ensure reliability. This also serves as a test for verification of use of InP
Technology LEDs, as well as for a technically sound circuitdesign.

1.8.2.3.1 Typical power consumption: 15W maximum at 230V AC.

1.8.2.3.2 Input voltage variability: shall withstand a fluctuation of ±25%.

1.8.2.3.3 PIV protection: LEDs shall be internally protected against reverse voltages of up
to 1 kV.

1.8.2.3.4 Insulation resistance: 10 MΩ at 500VDC

1.8.2.3.5 Dielectric strength: 2.5 kV

1.8.2.3.6 Spike Protection: Surge protectors shall be provided.

1.8.2.3.7 EMI/RFI Protection: Filter shall be incorporated for protection against

electromagnetic and radio frequency interference and random line noise.

1.8.2.3.8 Flashing Requirement: The light shall be supplied with a flasher for operating in
flashing mode for warning indication. The flasher circuit shall be placed externally
to the lighting unit, in an indoor environment.

1.9 Structural Earthing PME System

All the Buildings shall have integrated earthing which shall be suitable for all
purposes (i.e., Lighting protection, electrical systems, telecommunication systems).
This earth termination system shall be connected to the main equipotential bonding
bar of the building. Thus, all the buildings shall have foundation / structural earthing
system. Necessary coordination shall be done with structural earthing Agency in this
regard.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 295

The Lightning protection system and the foundation earthing system are the integral
part of the building reinforcement / Structure. Therefore, it is necessary that the
agency for the Structural earthing be decided well in advance so that the
reinforcement drawing shall incorporate the foundation earthing design also. The
Structural earthing shall be carried out by an authorized and certified agency of the
approved makes given in the list of preferred makes. Proper documentation shall be
submitted for approval of the engineer-in-charge before this work is carried out.

Earthing system shall confirm the following regulation and standards

• CEA regulations for Measures relating to Safety and Electric Supply 2010 IS
3043, IS 732: 2019, NEC: 2011(SP30) & NBC2016

• TN-S system with PME - Doubleearthing

Earthing for safety, voltage reference, shielding and lightning current dissipation shall
confirm the requirement as per the above standards. TN-S with double earthing for
transformer, electrical panels and major equipment satisfying IS 3043, IS 732, IEC
60364

Earthing shall satisfy the requirement of PE conductor, Supplementary PE and

reduce resistance less than 5 Ohms, Less than 1 Ohms and less than
0.2 Ohms depending upon the application as per the above standards. Earthing shall
include type B Earthing for Lightning Protection and provisions to make
STAR/MESH/RING/IBN or other defined earthing topologies for IT enabled
areas/buildings
The earthing system shall ensure that protection is achieved in the prescribed time
specified in IS 732. After completion of the electrical installation, resistance need to
be measured for each panel / equipment and need to be recorded to ensure safety.
Earthing and Structural bonding system shall confirm to the requirements of IS/IEC
62305 (all parts) as well as NBC2016.
Structural bonding system consists of an additional conductor installed inside an
RCC column along with structural steel. The grid thus formed shall be used for the
interconnection of PE conductor with the structure and shall reduce over voltages
due to fault inside the building. The conductor shall be of continuous length from
basement to the top of the building. This conductor shall support the electrical
installation and act as supplementary PE conductor. Sizing of the conductor shall be
as per the loop resistance/fault current requirement of the installation confirming the
standards. The conductor shall have minimum joints and all joints shall be
exothermically welded for application in soil and under foundation. Clamp joints are
permitted only inside concrete / exposed in air. All conductors for this purpose shall
be copper coated and the coating thickness of conductor shall confirm to NBC-2016
and shall be minimum 100 microns.

Exothermic weld shall confirm the requirements of IEEE 837:2014. Every component
used shall be able to withstand the fault current with minimum temperature raise.
The earth studs shall be 100 % corrosion resistant and shall confirm the
requirements of IEC 62561.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 296

1.9.1.1 Earth Conductor & Earth Stud: The earth conductor (e.g. - 10 mm round) sizes specified
based on lightning protection and 18mm round based on transformer short circuit level.
Copper coated steel tested to IEC 62561 shall be used as dedicated earth conductor in
concrete as well as ring earth in case if the foundation has water proof plastic membrane.
Earth studs are for the purpose of bringing the electrical connection between structural
steel with other steel installations in the building. Both earth conductor as well as earth
stud shall be corrosion resistant and shall be tested acc. to IEC 62561.Earth stud shall be
connected to earth conductor by exothermic welding.

1.9.1.2 Earth Conductor for soil and in concrete.

a) 10 mm round conductor SRC 10-CU for applications like Lightningprotection,

Panels and equipment earthing.
b) 17-25 mm round conductor for applications like generators,Transformers and Panels
area only.
c) Exothermic Weld for all interconnections in soil

1.10.1.3 Earth Studs:

a) Corrosion-free SS earth stud (Irms: 5kA per sec)
b) Corrosion-free SS earth stud (Irms: 8kA per sec)
c) Corrosion-free SS plate with copper terminals of earth stud (Irms: 28kAper sec)
d) Corrosion-free SS plate with copper terminals of earth stud (Irms: 40kAper sec)
i. 8 to 10 mm suitable for 16 to 32 mm steel reinforcing rod for Equipotential
bonding purpose.
ii. Straight connector used for 17-25 mm copper bonded steel ROD
floor to floor interconnection for electrical panels purpose
iii. Cross Connector used for mesh junction for Electrical room and DGareas
Straight connector used for 10mm copper bonded ROD floor to floor
interconnection for Lightning protection purpose
iv. Cross Connector used for mesh junction for Lightning protection atterrace
v. Diagonal clamps used for interconnection of earth studs with 10mmConductor
and reinforcementsteel.
1.9.2 Execution:
1.9.2.1 Building with plastic waterproof membrane: The installation needs to be carried out
before installing the waterproof membrane, preferably below PCC. The earth
conductor shall run under waterproof membrane as a grid of 10 meter by 10 meter.
The grid shall be extended up to floor level outside the plastic membrane at every 10
meters. All joints shall be exothermically welded and in addition wrapped with
corrosion protection bandage. Puncturing of water proof membrane is not permitted in
case if this “under foundation earthing” is not carried before laying the waterproof
membrane. Alternatively ring earthing with vertical earth electrodes at floor level can
be done with special care. At floor level / above water proof membrane, the conductor
shall be connected to Steel in RCC columns, plinthbeams.
1.9.2.2 Buildings with foundation other than raft / mat foundation: the earth conductor shall run
throughout the interconnected plinth beam. Plinth beam at the outer wall / perimeter of
the building shall have earth studs at every 10 meters for the purpose of ring
earthing interconnections.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 297

1.9.2.3 Grid Sizing: The earth grid design shall satisfy NBC-2016 (5meter* 5meter grid) for
improvement of the Earth termination system in a power source like: Transformers
and Generators.

1.9.2.4 Down Conductor for Lightning Protection as well as Bonding conductor for electrical
installations (RCC Building): The dedicated copper coated 10 mm solid round
conductor shall run inside columns on the periphery of the building and must be
connected to the reinforced steel available in the columns will serve the purpose of
down conductor for lightning protection as well as base for Equipotential bonding in
every floor of a multistoried building. If the distance between 2 columns is lesser than
5 meters, alternate columns shall be selected to route the down conductors. If the
distance is more than 10 meters, all the columns shall be used for down
conductorrouting.

Provisions for interconnection of metal frame of wall cladding shall be provided at every 5
meters in vertical and horizontal sections based on the architectural design.

1.9.2.5 Earthing for safety of LV network: Additional earth studs need to be installed in
places where electrical panels & electronic equipment is installed. All electrical
rooms as well as every floor level in electrical shaft must have a local Equipotential
bonding earth stud extended from the structural earthing. Sizing of earth stud for
electrical room shall be based on the short circuit current requirements of the
electrical system considering TN-S network. In addition, earth studs for the purpose
of testing the efficiency of protection system shall be provided in easily accessible
places at top and bottom of the building at every 20 meters around the periphery
of the building.

1.9.2.6 Testing of Down conductor: Structural earthing used as a part of lightning protection
system, overall resistance shall not be more than 0.2 ohm when measured between
the air termination and the earthing test point providedat the ground level.

1.9.2.7 Testing of Earth conductor as supplementary PE: Structural earthing used as

supplementary PE conductor, overall resistance of each stud shall be measured,
fault clearance time of switchgear need to be established and expected heat
generation in cables as well as earth stud / conductors during a fault has to be
calculated.

1.9.2.8 Air termination system: Air termination system (Horizontal/Vertical) in the roof shall
be according to Lightning Protection Level specified in NBC 2016. The air
termination system consisting of vertical rods and/or mesh shall be connected to
the structural conductor through earth studs provided at the parapet / columns of
the building. For this purpose, sufficient earth studs with provision of mechanically
strong connection need to be provided at the parapet / wall / column at the top of
the building. Air termination system shall be installed strictly after completion of the
installation of all roof mounted electrical / metalinstallations.

For building with metal roof, the air terminal shall be directly connected to the steel roofing
sheet with special leak proof screws. Bonding of roof steel and structural support columns
shall be ensured by installing braided wiresat every 10 meters

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 298

1.9.2.9 Installation, Testing and Certification: The Earth studs type test reports to be
submitted for Irms value tested in CPRI/ERDA to besubmitted.

The total installation needs to be carried as per IS/IEC 62035. The installation must
also be tested and certified by a qualified lightning protection expert as specified in
IS/IEC 62305.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 299

C-2 Fire Fighting System

2.0 Technical Specifications of Firefighting System

2.1 The scope of work consists of Planning, designing, Supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of Firefighting system with wet riser & Sprinklers for the Hospital
buildings and all other service buildings, Water curtain systems wherever required,
Gas suppression system for server rooms, spirit store, LPG bank, Electrical panels
and other relevant areas of the building etc. and dewatering pumps in the
basements.Any material or accessories which may not have been specifically
mentioned but are necessary for satisfactory operation and maintenance of the
equipment, shall be furnished by the Contractor. These technical specifications shall
be read along with the General Conditions for all E&M works given under subhead
C-B.

2.1.1 Conformity With Statutory Acts, Rules, Orders, Standards and Codes

a) All components and their installation shall conform to relevant Indian Standard
Specifications, wherever existing.

b) Designing of the system shall be done as per NBC-2016, CPWD General

Specification for Electrical Works (Wet Riser)-2020, and local bye laws. Municipal
Regulations of the city shall also be taken into consideration while selecting and
designing firefighting system.

c) Contractor shall obtain approval of the installation from the local fireauthorities as
may be required as per local bye-laws at all stages before and on completion of
the installation work. The contractor shall pass on these approvals to the
department. Any statutory fee paid to the Government / Municipal Authorities/
Statutory Bodies etc. for obtaining approvals and shall be reimbursed to the
contractor on submission of documentary proof.

d) The components of the installation shall be of such design so as to satisfactorily

function under all conditions of operation. The entire work of
manufacture/fabrication, assembly and installation shall conform to sound
engineering practice. The entire installation shall be such as to cause minimum
transmission of noise and vibration to the building structure.

2.1.2 Drawings for approval on award of the work

The contractor shall prepare and submit the following drawings and get them
approved by the Engineer-in-charge before the start of the work. The approval of
drawings however does not absolve the contractor of his responsibility to supply the
equipment/materials as per agreement. In case of any contradiction between the
approved drawings and agreement, the decision of the Engineer-in-Charge shall be
final and binding on the contractor.
(a) Layout drawings of the equipment to be installed in the pump room and
terrace. Drawings showing the details of erection of entire equipment including
their foundations.
(b) Drawings showing the layout of entire piping, diameter and
lengthofpipes,hydrant,airvessel,valvesandisometricdrawingsshowing
connections to variousequipment

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 300

(c) Sprinkler drawing indicating layout and sizes of pipe, location of valves,
sprinklersetc.
(d) Electrical wiring diagrams for all electrical equipment and controls including
the sizes and capacities of the various cablesand equipment.
(e) Drawings showing details of supports for pipes, cable trays, any other
drawing(s) relevant to thework.

2.1.3 Documents To Be Furnished on Completion of Installation

Five sets of the following drawings shall be submitted by the contractor while
handing over the installation to the Department. Out of this one set shall be
laminated on a hard base for display in the fire control room. In addition, soft copy
shall be given by the contractor.

(a) Installationdrawingsgivingcompletedetailsofalltheequipment,sizes and lengths

of all the pipes, sizes and locations of all types of valves, including drawings
for the entire piping including the pipe connections to the various equipment.

(b) Line diagram and layout of all electrical control panels giving switchgear
ratings and their disposition, cable feeder sizes and their layout.

(c) Manufacturer’s technical catalogues operation & maintenance manuals of all

equipment and accessories.

Before occupation,the building is to be inspected by the representative of Chief Fire

Officer and local bodies. The building will be issued N.O.C. for occupation only
when all safety provisions including firefighting work are complete to the
satisfaction of Fire Officer. As such, firefighting work is to be completed and
commissioned with temporary power supply well before other building works and
services are completed.

2.1.4 Guarantee
a) The contractor shall guarantee the complete system to provide the specified flow
and pressure under all conditions atoutlets.

b) All equipment shall be guaranteed for a period of 36 months from the date of
acceptance and taking over of the installation by the Department against any
unsatisfactory performance and/or breakdown due to defective design, material,
manufacture, workmanship or installation. The equipment or component or any
part thereof so found defective during the guarantee period shall be repaired or
replaced free of cost to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge. In case, it is
felt by the department that undue delay is being caused by the contractor indoing
this, the same will be got done by the department at the risk and cost of the
contractor. The decision of Engineer- in-charge in this regard shall befinal.

2.1.5 System Components for water based firefighting system:

Following types of fixed firefighting installations are to be provided in the
buildings:
(i) Wet Riser
(ii) Yard Hydrant
(iii) Automatic Sprinkler

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 301

(iv) Fire Extinguishers

Firefighting system shall comprise supply, installation, testing and commissioning

of components as mentioned below.
i. Electric Motor Driven Fire Pumps -2 Nos.
ii. Diesel Engine Driven Fire Pumps -1 No.
iii. Pressurization Pumps -2 Nos.
iv. Vertical risers in the building
v. Pipe network inside the building to be protected with Sprinklers
vi. External pipe line around the building and ring main on the terrace.
vii. Internal Hydrants, Yard Hydrant (External Hydrants)
viii. First-aid hose reel, Hose Pipe and Branch Pipe.
ix. Air Vessels.
x. Fire Service Connections, Fire Service Inlet.
xi. Control components like pressure switches, flow switches level indicator,
alarm etc.
xii. Electrical Power and Control Panel with cable and earthing etc.
xiii. Pipeline accessories i.e., Butterfly/ Sluice Valves, Non-Return Valvesetc.
xiv. Dewatering pumps, Four sets in the main building basement, one set in
A.C Plant Room and one set in Water Supply Pump House shall be provided.
Each set shall consist dewatering pumps of suitable capacity (1 working + 1
Standby).
2.2 The following factors shall be taken into consideration while designing various
components.
2.2.1 Wet Riser
a) Pressure at the hydraulically remote hydrant and at the highest hydrant shall not
be less than 3.5 kgf/cm2. The pressure at any hydrants shall however not
exceed 7 kgf/cm2.
b) The pipeline shall be designed in such a way that it should be possibleto get a
discharge at any location. Design parameters shall be as under:-
(i) Maximum flow velocity : 2.5 mps
(ii) Maximum Friction : 5 m per 100 m runThe size of wet riser shall
be 150mm.

c) Main Fire Pumps (Both electrical as well as diesel) shall be selected for:
i. Discharge : 2280 lpm for Wet Riser & Sprinkler
1650 lpm Water-Curtain
ii. Head : 35 m + Height of terrace level hydrant
above pump level + 6% of the maximum length of pipe from pump
discharge to any hydrant at terrace level

d) Pressurization pump (Jockey Pump) shall be selected for:

I. Discharge : 180Ipm
II. Head : 35 m + height of terrace level hydrant above pumplevel
e) Number of risers shall fulfil that, no corner of the building is farther than 30 m
from the nearest riser. Horizontal distance between two risers shall not be more
than 50 m. Minimum one riser shall be provided for every 1000 sq.m of plinth
area or part thereof.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 302

f) However, the number of risers can be suitably increased to meet the given
situation.

2.2.2 Internal Hydrant: Every riser shall be provided with the following at every floor
including terrace and basement over and above sprinkler system.
(i) Single-headed outlet -2 Nos.
(ii) First Aid Hose Reel -1 No.
[Length of pipe shall be such that nozzle of the hose can be taken into every
room and within 6 m of any part of the rooms keeping in view layout and
obstruction.]
(iii) Hose Pipe 63 mm dia, 15 m longwith male and female couplingatends.
-2 Nos.
(iv) Branch pipe 63 mm dia with 20 mm nominal internal diameter nozzle and
Suitable for instantaneous connection. -1 Nos.
2.2.3 Yard Hydrant (External Hydrant)
a) For connecting yard hydrants, a ring of pipe shall be laid underground around the
building at a minimum distance of 2 m but not more than 15 m from the face of
the building. All internal risers shall be connected with this ring. The yard
hydrants shall be easily accessible and should normally be provided near the
boundary wall/along the road. While locating yard hydrants it should be ensured
that same do not become a hindrance in vehicular movement or entrance to the
building. Yard hydrants should be located around the building in such a way that
it should be possible to fight the fire on any face of the building from the nearest
hydrant. At least one hydrant post shall be provided for every 45 m.
b) Fire Hydrants shall be of stand post type conforming to IS 908. All Yard hydrant
outlets shall be situated 1 m above ground level. The hydrant couplings shall be
of the instantaneous spring-lock (female) type of 63 mm diameter and valves
shall be of the screw-down type.
c) Suitable pressure reducing devices shall be provided for the yard as well as
internal hydrants where the pressure exceeds 7 kgf/cm2, considering the safety
of operators. All hydrants should be painted red and serially numbered.

d) Each yard hydrant shall include the following accessories

I. Connection from the ring main with 80 mm dia MSpipe
II. 63 mm dia single head landing valve - 1 No.
III. Butterfly/sluice valve 80 mm dia - 1 No.
IV. Hosepipe 63 mm dia 15 m long with male and female coupling at ends
- 2 Nos.
V. Branch pipe 63 mm dia with 20 mm nominal internal diameter nozzle,
suitable for instantaneous connection -1 No.

e) All above Components shall be housed in a suitable size MS cabinet made from
a 2 mm thick sheet with a glass panel on the front. The cabinet shall be painted
red.

2.2.4 Fire Service inlet: In order to facilitate feeding of water in the system by fire
service, a 3-way 63 mm diameter collecting head shall be provided and
connected with each riser and the ring main with non-return valve and

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 303

butterfly/sluice valve. This should be located at a place where fire brigade tender
can reach.
2.2.5 Fire Service connection:It is for feeding water to underground storage tank by fire
tenders. The static water storage tank shall be provided with a fire brigade collecting
head with 4 number 63 mm diameter instantaneous male inlets arranged in a valve
box at a suitable point at street level. If tank is not approachable for the fire
engines, the fire brigade collecting head shall be connected to the static tank by
a suitable fixed galvanized iron pipe not less than 150 mm in diameter to
discharge water into the tank.
2.2.6 Fire Brigade draw out collecting head: Each of the static water storage tanks shall
also be provided with a fire brigade draw out collecting head with 63 mm diameter
instantaneous male draw out arranged in a valve box at a suitable point at street
level. This draw out shall be connected to a galvanized iron pipe of 100 mm
diameter with foot valve arrangement in thetank.

2.2.7 Air Vessel: - To counteract the water hammer effect, air vessel shall be provided at
the top of each riser.

2.2.8 Orifice Plate: - Suitable pressure reducing devices shall be provided for yard as well
as internal hydrants to control pressure to desired limit especially at lower-level
hydrants. The size of orifice shall be calculated as per IS/ CPWD specifications.
2.2.9 Alarm for Wet Riser System: - To indicate the flow of water in the system, turbine
type alarm shall be provided at a prominent place outside the pump house in the
main line before any connection is taken. The alarm will indicate the healthiness of
the system and shall not be silenced till the main fire pump is in operation.
2.2.10 Control system
The system shall be designed for operation automatically so that as and when water
is drawn from the system through any hydrant, the pumps will operate automatically
and feed water in to the system. However, once a fire pump starts working, it will be
stopped only manually (except jockey pump). Facility shall also be provided for
manual operation. A selector switch for auto/ manual selection shall be provided for
each pump.
The control system shall be designed to provide the following sequence of
operation:
i) The Pressurization Pump shall maintain pressure in the system and shall operate
only on account of slow pressure loss. In case of sudden pressure loss, the
Pressurization Pump shall not operate. The pump shall start when the water
pressure in the system falls to a pre-set value and shut down when the system
pressure reaches the set value. Both limits shall be adjustable.
ii) Main Electric Fire Pump shall operate on account of sudden pressure loss. As
long as Main Electric Fire Pump is working, other Fire Pumps shall not operate.
The pump shall start when the water pressure falls to a pre-set value in the
system (about 1kgf/cm2).

iii) In case, Normal Electric Supply fails while the Main Electric Fire Pump is
running, the DG Set for essential supply will start within 5 seconds.
iv) The Diesel Fire Pump shall start on sudden pressure loss, only in case supply
to Main Electric Fire Pump is not available or within a pre-set time the Main
Electric Fire Pump fails to start or fails during operation. Noother pump shall

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 304

work when Diesel Engine Fire Pump is in operation. Audio- Visual Alarm shall
be available to indicate failure of Main Electric Fire Pump.

v) Three attempts starting facility shall be provided for the diesel pump. If within a
pre-set time, the stand by pump also fails to start or fails to develop pressure, the
stand by pump shall also be shut down and locked out. An audio-visual alarm
indication shall be given at the controlpanel.

vi) For sprinkler pump:

a) Sprinkler jockey pump shall start on pressure loss in the sprinkler header.
b) If Sprinkler Jockey pump does not start in preset time or fails during operation,
the main electric fire pump shall start and feed water to sprinkler system.
c) Diesel pump will startand feed water only in case supply to Main Electric pump
is not available or within a preset time the main electric pump fails to start
or fails during operation. No other pump shall work when diesel pump is in
operation. Audio-visual alarm shall be available to indicate failure of Main
Electric pump.
vii) Only one pump shall work at a time. In manual mode more than one
pump can be started.
viii) Water level in UG and terrace tanks shall be monitored and in case of low
water level, pumps connected with the tank shall not operate (even on manual
mode) or stop operation as the case may be. An audio- visual alarm shall be
given at the controlpanel.

2.2.11 Wet Riser: -Wet Riser shall be interconnected at terrace level to form a ring and cut-
off shall be provided for each connection to enable repair/maintenance without
affecting rest of thesystem.

2.2.12 Following provisions/spaces are required for firefighting system:

Pump House for installation of firefighting pumps (Main Electrical Pumps, Diesel
Engine Driven and Pressurization Pumps) along with Electrical & Control Panel,
valves, diesel tank etc., pump house is required. Following factors are to
beconsidered:
(i) Suitable ramp with proper slope and/or cutout in roof shall be provided for
lowering the equipment in to the pump house. Stair case with entry door at
ground level and locking arrangement shall beprovided.
(ii) Adequate ventilation for dissipation of heat due to operation of motors/engine
shall be provided.
(iii) Proper water proofing shall be provided. A sump of size 0.6 m x 0.6 mx 0.3 m
with 1(Working)+1(Standby) dewatering pumps shall be provided in the pump
house in one corner adjacent to the tank wall. The floor slope will lead
towards the sump so that water leakage, if any can be pumped out.
(iv) In order to ensure that there is no leakage of water in the pump house, no
pipe/ cable shall cross the pump house below ground level. Suitable opening
in wall above ground level shall be provided for crossing of pipes/cables.
(v) Installation of negative suction arrangement and submersible pumps shall not
be allowed.

2.2.13 Internal Hydrant - Internal hydrants are provided to fight fire from within the building.
Following factors are considered for deciding location of internal hydrant:

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 305

(i) Internal hydrants shall be provided at every floor at the same location and
connected withrisers.
(ii) Hydrant for firefighting shall be located in the lobby in firefighting shaft. Those
hydrants planned to be provided near fire exit staircase on the floor shall be
within 5 m from exit door in exit access.
(iii) Numbers and location of risers shall be decided to fulfil the conditions stated
earlier.
(iv) Every wing of the building shall preferably be provided with independent
hydrants. Hydrant shall be located in the center of the building so that one
hydrant can cover area on both sides.
(v) A masonry enclosure on three sides minimum 1200 mm wide and 800 mm
deep and 2100 mm height size shall be provided. Two Cut-outs of 200 mm x
200 mm size be provided in one corner in the slab for wet riser and sprinkler
pipe. If sprinkler installations are to be provided, additional cut out of similar
size for sprinkler pipe and drain pipe as the case may be, shall be provided.
Steel shutter with 1250 mm glazing on top with locking arrangement shall be
provided in front of the hydrant. The shutter shall be painted red.
(vi) Internal hydrant shall be easily accessible. A clear space of at least
1.5 m should be available in front of the internal hydrant for operation. Internal
hydrant shall not be provided in a lockableroom.
(vii) Internal hydrant shall be clearly marked with the inscription of “FIRE HOSE
CABINET”of letter size75mm in height and12mm in width by luminous sign.
Suitable lighting arrangement shall be provided in front of the internal
hydrant. The location of such cabinets shall be shown on floor plan and duly
displayed in the landing of the respective fire exit stair case.

2.2.14 Drainage
Drain traps in pump room shall be made by the agency/ contractor only. Piping
Connections from the equipment to the drain trap shall be done by the contractor.

2.2.15 Paint
The entire piping work along with fire pumps, Motors & Engines shall be painted
with red color shade No. 536 of IS5.

2.2.16 Building to be Sprinkler Protected

The sprinkler pipes are installed throughout the area to be protected. The structure
shall be designed to support sprinkler pipes and the contained water. Inbuilt
drainage with slope shall be provided throughout the area so that in the event of
operation of sprinkler, water is drained out without spreading to other parts of the
building. Storage racks/platforms shall be sufficiently raised above floor. It is
essential to make provisions for avoiding water from Sprinkler/hydrant operation
entering lifts and electrical rooms.

2.3 Fire Control Room

A fire control room shall be provided on the entrance floor of the building.
Fire pumps shall be provided with positive suction and automatic starting
devices capable of sequential starting of the pumps.
Insertions like flexible couplings/connections, bellows, etc., in the suction and
delivery piping shall be suitably planned and installed.

(i) Pipe connecting pump house to ring main shall not be less than 150 mm
diameter. Higher size pipe shall be selected depending upon length of pipe

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 306

and friction loss. Size of Ring main and Risers shall not less be than 150 mm
diameter.

(ii) Fire service inlet and fire service connection shall be with pipe of size not
less than 150 mmdiameter.

All Tee off connections for landing valves from vertical risers and for external
(iii)
hydrants from ring main shall be with pipe size not less than 100 mmdiameter.
2.3.1 Selection of Material: - Components like landing valve, hose coupling branch pipes
etc. are to be made of Gunmetal.

2.3.2 Hose Pipes/ Branch pipes: - A minimum of two number of 63 mm diameter, 15 m

long hose pipes with instantaneous coupling at both ends and one number branch
pipe with nozzle shall be kept with every internal and externalhydrant.
a) During Construction of underground tank, 4 Nos. 200 mm diameter MS
-C
Class pipe swith flanges on both sides shall beem bedded for connection with
suction header of the fire pumps. The pipes shall be extended at least 100
mm on wall.

b) The underground tank and Pump house shall be tested for any
leakage/seepage before start of the work. It shall be ensured that both tank
and pump house are free from leakage/seepage.

c) The work of laying of pipe for sprinklers should be taken up in coordination

with the duct installation.

d) The sprinkler pipes should be tested area wise and capped for connection to
pipes of adjoining area.

e) The route of external pipe i.e., pipe from pump house and ring main should be
decided in coordination with other building services.

f) For laying of external pipes, excavation up to a depth of 1.25 m ormore is

to be carried out. External pipes shall therefore be laid in a phased manner in
coordination with other agencies. The pipes shall be tested and earth filled
back before excavation for next phase is taken up. Equipment for testing etc.
should be made available in advance before start of underground pipe laying
work.

2.4 Fire Pumps

Pumps conforming to IS 12469 shall be used for Firefighting purposes. The pumps
shall be centrifugal type direct driven with a 3 phase, 415 V + 10%, 50 Hz, A.C.
motor. The standby fire pump shall be driven by diesel engine. The pumps shall be
of horizontal split casing (HSC) type with operating speed not exceeding 1500 rpm.

The main fire pump and terrace pump shall be suitable for continuous operation in
the system. The jockey pump shall be suitable for intermittent operation to build-up
pressure in the system on account of leakage, If any. The head shall be suitable for
the system and shall take into consideration the pressure drops across the various
components in the water circuit as well as the frictionallosses.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 307

The rated discharge of Electric Driven and Diesel Engine Driven pump for wet riser
and sprinkler system shall be minimum 2280 lpm.Pumpshallbecapableofdischarging
not less than 150 percent of the rated discharge at a head of not less than 65
percent of the rated head. The shut off head shall not exceed 120 percent of the
rated head in the case of horizontal Pumps.
2.4.1 Material and Construction
a) The pump casing shall be of heavy section close grained cast iron and
designed to withstand 1.5 times the working pressure. The casing shall be
provided with shaft seal arrangement as well as flanges for suction and
delivery pipe connections asrequired.
b) The impeller shall be of bronze, shrouded type with machined collars. Wear
rings shall be of the same material as the impeller. The impeller surface shall
be smooth finished for minimum frictional loss. The impeller shallbe secured to
the shaft by a key.
c) The shaft shall be of stain less steel and shall be accurately machined. The
shaft shall be balanced to avoid vibrations at any speed within the operating
range of the pump.
d) The bearings shall be suitable for the duty involved. These shall be grease
lubricated and shall be provided with grease nipples/cups. The bearings shall
be effectively sealed a gainst leakage of lubricant or entry of dustor water.
e) The shaft seal shall be mechanical type, so as to allow minimum leakage. A
drip well shall be provided beneath theseal.
f) The pumps shall be directly coupled to the motor/diesel engine shaft
through a flexible coupling protected by a couplingguard.
g) The pump and motor/diesel engine shall be mounted on a common robust bed
plate fabricated from mild steel section. The bed plate shall have rigid,
Flat and true surfaces to receive the pump and motor/dieseling in emounting
feet.The pump shall be perfectly aligned with the motor/engine to avoid any
vibration during operation at all variations of load.

2.4.2 Accessories
Each pump shall be provided with the following accessories: -
a) Sluice valvesonsuctionanddelivery.
b) Reducers, as may be required to match the sizes of the connected
pipework.
c) Non-return valve at thedelivery.
d) Pressure gauge at delivery side between pump and the non-returnvalve.
e) Flexible coupling/connections shall be provided between Pump sets and
Valves on suction and delivery sides of all the pumpsets.
f) No butterfly valves shall be installed inside the pumproom.
g) The size of the non-return valve and cut off (Sluice valve) shall not be less
than the size of the initial deliverypipe.

2.4.3 Installation

a) The pump and motor/engine assembly shall be mounted and arranged for
ease of maintenance and to prevent transmission of vibration and noise to the
building structure or to the pipe work. The pump and motor/engine assembly
shall be installed on suitable RCC foundation. The length and width of the
foundation shall be such that 100 mm space is left all around the base
frame. The height of foundation shall be so decided that the total weight of
foundation block is 1.5 timesthe operating weight of the pump assembly.The
foundation shallbeisolatedfrom the floor by vibration isolating pads. Angle iron

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 308

frame of size 35 mm x 35 mm x 3 mm shall be provided on the top edges of

thefoundation.

b) More than one pump and motor assembly shall not be installed on a single
base or cement concreteblock.
c) The suction/discharge pipe shall be independently supported and their weight
shall not be transferred to the pump. It should be possible to disconnect any
pump for repairs without disturbing the connecting pipe line.

d) A minimum clearance of 1 m around the main pumps shall be provided. For

jockey pumps clearance of 75 cm shall beadequate.

e) Sufficient space is to be left in front for the radiator of diesel engine for free
discharge of hot air. Arrangement for discharging hot air to outsideof the pump
house shall be provided, so that hot air does not stagnate in the pump house.

2.5 Diesel Engine for Fire Pump

The diesel engine shall be suitable for automatic operation complete with necessary
automatic starting gear, battery system and shall be complete with all accessories.
Both engine and pump shall be assembled on a common bed plate, fabricated from
mild steelchannel.

The pump shall be only direct driven by means of a flexible coupling. The coupling
between the engine and the pump shall allow each unit to be removed without
disturbing the other. Coupling guard shall be provided. The speed shall be
1500RPM.

2.5.1 DieselEngine
The engine shall be multi-cylinder 4 stroke cycle, water cooled, developing
suitable HP at the operating speed specified to drive the fire
pump. Continuou scapacity available for the load shall be exclusive of the power
requirement of auxiliaries of the diesel engine, and after correction for altitude,
ambient temperature and humidity for specified environment conditions. The
engine rating shall be suitable to drive the pump at 150 percent of its rated
discharge with at least 65 percent of rated head or 20% in excess of the maximum
brake horsepower required to drive the pump at its duty point, whichever is
higher. The engine shall have 10% overload capacity for one hour in any period
of 12 hours continuousrun.
The engine shall be:
a) naturally aspirated, supercharged or turbo-charged and rather air or water-
cooled.
b) provided with an in-built tachometer to indicate rpm of theengine.
c) able to develop full load within 15 seconds from the receipt of the signal
to start.
d) The diesel engine shall conform to BS 649/ IS 1601/ IS 10002, amended up
todate.
2.5.2 Engine Accessories- The engine shall be complete with
following accessories:
(i) Flywheel dynamicallybalanced
(ii) Direct coupling for pump and coupling guard
(iii) Radiator with hoses, fan, water pump, drive arrangement andguard

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 309

(iv) Air cleaner drytype

(v) Fuel service tank with necessary pipework
(vi) Fuelfilter
(vii) Pump for lubricating oil and lube. oilfilter
(viii) Electric starting battery 12 V/24 V.
(ix) Exhaust silencer with necessary pipework
(ix) Governor
(x) Instrument panel housing all the gauges, including tacho meter, hourmeter
and starting switch with key (for manualstarting)
(xi) Necessary safetycontrols
(xii) Winterization arrangement
(xiii) Hand operated semi rotary pump for filling the servicetank
(xiv) A standard kit of tools (this shall be kept on hand at alltimes)

2.5.3 The engine shall be radiator water-cooled. The radiator assembly shall be mounted
on the engine. The radiator fan shall be driven by the engine as its auxiliary with
multiple fan belts. When half the belts are broken, the remaining belts shall be
capable of driving the fan. Cooling water shall be circulated by means of an auxiliary
pump of suitable capacity driven by the engine in a closedcircuit.

2.5.4 The fuel system shall be gravity fed from the fuel tank to the engine-driven fuel
pump. The engine fuel tank shall be mounted either adjacent to the engine or
suitably wall mounted on brackets. The fuel filter shall be suitably located to permit
easy servicing.

The fuel tank shall be of welded steel construction (3mm thick) and of capacity
sufficient to allow the engine to run on full load for at least 8 hours. The tank shall be
complete with necessary floor mounted supports, level indicator (protected against
mechanical injury) inlet, outlet, overflow connections and drain plug and piping to
the engine fuel tank. The outlet should be so located as to avoid entry of any
sediments into the fuel line to the engine. Any valve in the fuel feed pipe between
the fuel tank and the engine shall be placed adjacent to the tank and it shall be
locked in the openposition.

All fuel tubing to the engine shall be with M.S.'C’class pipe with flexible hose
connections wherever required. Pipe joints shall not be soldered and plastic tubing
shall not beused.

The following shall be provided:

i) A sludge and sediment trap shall beprovided.
ii) An inspection and cleaninghole
iii) Means to enable the entire fuel system to be bled of air (Air relief cocksare not
allowed; screwed plugs arepermitted)

2.5.5 Lubricating Oil System- Forced feed lubricating Oil system shall be employed for
positive lubrication. Necessary lubricating oil filters shall be provided, located
suitably for convenient servicing.

2.5.6 Starting System- The starting system shall comprise of necessary batteries of 12
Volts/ 24 Volts, starter motor of adequate capacity and axle type gearto match with
the toothed ring on the flywheel. Suitable protection to protect starting motor from
excessively long cranking runs shall be suitably integrated with the engine

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 310

protection system.

The capacity of the battery shall be suitable for meeting the needs of the starting
system.

The battery capacity shall be adequate for 10 consecutive starts without recharging
with cold engine under full compression.

Three attempts starting facility shall be provided. If the engine fails to start after third
attempt, the engine shall be locked out and suitable audio-visual alarm shall be
given to indicate engine failure. The starter motor used for automatic starting may
also be used for manual starting provided there are separate batteries for manual
starting. The scope shall cover all cabling, terminals, initial charging etc.

2.5.7 Exhaust System- The exhaust system shall be complete with residential grade
silencer suitable for outdoor installation and silencer piping shall be extended up to
1 m, outside pump house duly insulated with 50 mm thick glass wool and 1.0 mm
thick aluminum sheet cladding.

2.5.8 Retrofitted emission-control equipment shall be used having a minimum specified

PM-capturing efficiency of at least 70%, type approved by one of the five CPCB
recognized labs. (Recommendations of National Clean Air Program 2019 launched
by Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change)

2.5.9 Engine shut down mechanism- This shall be manually operated and shall return
automatically to the starting position after use.

2.5.10 Governing System- The engine shall be provided with an adjustable governor to
control the engine speed within 5% of its rated speed under all conditions of load up
to full load. The governor shall be set to maintain rated pump speed at maximum
pump load.

2.5.11 Engine Instrumentation - Engine instrumentation shall include thefollowing:

(i) Lube. Oil pressuregauge
(ii) Lube. Oil temperaturegauge
(iii) Water temperaturegauge
(iv) Tachometer
(v) Hourmeter
The instrumentation panel shall be suitably mounted on the engine.

2.5.12 Engine protection devices - Following engine protection and automatic shutdown
facilities shall beprovided: -
(i) Low lube. oilpressure.
(ii) High cooling watertemperature.
(iii) High lube. oiltemperature.
(iv) Over speed shutdown

2.5.13 Pipe work- All pipe lines with fittings and accessories required shall be provided for
fuel oil, lube. Oil and exhaust systems.

2.5.14 Anti-vibration mounting- Suitable vibration mounting duly approved by the engineer-
in-charge shall be employed for mounting the unit so as to minimize transmission of
vibration to the structure.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 311

2.5.15 BatteryCharger-
Battery of diesel engine operated fire pump shall have separate charger from
emergency power supply circuit. Necessary float and boost charger shall be
incorporated in the control section of power and control panel with manual selection
of boost charge, to keep the battery under trim condition. Voltmeter to indicate the
state of charge of the batteries shall be provided. Where separate batteries are
provided for automatic and manual starting, the charging equipment shall be
capable of trickle charging both the batteries simultaneously. Equipment shall be
provided to enable the stateof charge of the batteries to bedetermined.

The engine installation shall be approved by the representative of engine

manufacturer (who shall carry out after sales service under AMC).

The following spare parts shall be supplied with the engine and keptonhand:
a) Two sets of fuel filters, elements andseals;
b) Two sets of lubricating oil filters, elements andseals;
c) Two sets of belts (whereused);
d) One complete set of engine-joints, gaskets andhoses;
e) Two injectornozzles;
f) One complete set of piston rings for each cylinder;and
g) One inlet valve and one exhaustvalve).
2.6 Pipe Work
2.6.1 The contractor shall be responsible for selection of sizes as per detailed engineering
to be done by him. Plumbing design to be done by the contractor shall incorporate
the following:-
(i) Sluice valvesshall be provided at suctionand delivery sides of pumps.
a) Externalhydrant
b) Fire serviceconnection/inlet.
c) Testvalve.
d) Drainconnections.
(ii) For testing the system healthiness and automatic operation on daily basis,to
avoid wastage of water, this pipe shall discharge water in thetank.

(iii) Non-return valve shall be provided at the delivery of each pump andfire
service inlet. This shall be of swing type.

(iv) Air release valves with ball valve shall be provided in the piping system for
venting trapped air with a size of 25 mm for pipes up to 100 mm and 40 mm
for larger pipes.

(v) Plumbing drawings showing the sizes of pipe, valves, layout and other details
shall be prepared and shall be got approved from the Engineer-in-Charge
before the execution of the plumbing work.

2.6.2 Pipe Materials

Pipes shall be of the following materials:
a) Mild steel heavy class (C-class) conforming to IS:1239 for sizes up to 150
mm.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 312

b) Welded black steel pipe, Class 2, conforming to IS: 3589, for sizes greater
than 150 mm. These pipes shall be factory rolled and fabricated from
minimum 6mm thick M.S. Sheet for pipes up to 350 mm diameter and from
minimum 7 mm thick M.S. sheet for pipes of400 mm diameter andabove.

c) Castiron double flanged pipe,Class-A conforming to IS1536 or IS:1537(to be

provided only in under ground application).

Note: For pipe work of Automatic Sprinkler System inside the building, Stainless
Steel Pipes and fittings of grade AISI 304 as per JIS standard 3448 are also
permitted particularly where replacement of pipes is not easy like areas above
false ceiling etc., subject to the condition that these pipes with associated
fittings are suitable to safely withstand the system testpressures.

d) GI Pipe medium Class (B-class) conforming to IS:1239 (ForDrain) Cadmium

plated steel nuts/bolts/washers shall be used. Flex drops of stainless-steel
metallic pipe with mounting accessories, frame for installation on false ceiling.

2.6.3 Pipe Joints

a) Electric welding joints shall be provided in the MS pipe work. Flanged joints
shall be provided for connections to valves, pumps, air vessels etc and
also on straight lengths at suitable points to facilitate rection and subsequent
maintenance.

b) For connection of C.I. Pipe, fittings shall also be of C. I. heavy grade

conforming to IS:1538. The flanges shall be smooth faced and neoprene
gasket shall be provided between joints. All bolt holes in flanges shall be
drilled. The drilling of each flange shall be in accordance with the relevant
Indian Standards. Wherever un- avoidable to connect underground pipe with
risers, MS pipe may be used in the form of distant pieces. The joint between
C.I. and MS pipe shall be flanged type. MS pipe laid at such locations shall
be provided
With anti-corrosive treatment.

c) Mild steel flanges shall be in accordance with IS: 6392 i.e., “Plate Flanges for
Welding" and flange thickness shall be as under. Gasket thickness shall not
be less than 3mm.

I. Pipediameter Flange
Thickness 200mm 24mm
II. 150 mm and125mm 22mm
III. 100 mm and80mm 20mm
IV. 65mm 18mm
V. 40 mmandbelow 16mm

d) Fittingsinstalledundergroundshallbeofcastiron‘heavy’gradeconforming to IS 1538
whereas those installed above ground shall normally be of medium grade
wrought steel or mild steel conforming to IS 1239 (Part 2) or malleable iron
fittings conforming to IS1879.

e) All hardware items such as Nuts, Bolts, Washers shall be of appropriate size.
Washers shall be used on both sides of thebolt.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 313

2.6.4 Anti-Corrosive Protection on Under Ground MS Pipe.

Corrosion protection tape shall be wrapped on MS pipes to be buried in ground.

This corrosion protection tape shall comprise of coal tar/asphalt component
supported on fabric of organic or inorganic fiber and minimum 4 mm thick and
conform to requirement of IS: 10221-Code of practice for coating and wrapping of
underground mild steel pipe line. Before application of corrosion protection tape, all
foreign matter on pipe shall be removed with the help of wire brush and a suitable
primer shall be applied over the pipe thereafter. The primer shall be allowed to dry
until the solvent evaporates and the surface becomes tacky. Both primer and tape
shall be furnished by the same manufacturer.

Corrosion protection tape shall then be wound around the pipe in spiral fashion and
bounded completely to the pipe. There shall be no air pocket or bubble beneath the
tape. The overlaps shall be 15 mm and 250 mm shall be left uncoated on either
end of pipe to permit installation and welding. This area shall be coated in-situ after
the pipe line is installed. The tapes shall be wrapped in accordance with the
manufacturer’s recommendations. If application is done in cold weather, the surface
of the pipe shall be pre- heated until it is warm to touch and traces of moisture are
removed and then primer shall be applied and allowed to dry.

Holiday Testing for wrapping and coating is essential. Holiday testing may
preferably be carried by flexible and detachable ring probe, which will enable the
entire 360° of the surface of the pipe to be scanned.

2.6.5 Valves
Each pump shall be provided with a non-return valve and a sluice valve on the
delivery side, the sluice valve being installed on the upstream side of the non-
return valve. A pressure gauge shall also be provided between the pump and the
non-return valve. The size of the non-return valve and cut off (sluice) valve shall not
be less than the size of the initial delivery pipe and, in no case, less than the
delivery outlet of the pump. No butterfly valves shall be installed inside the
pumproom. Sluice valve shall conform to IS: 780.Butterfly valve, wherever used,
shall conform to IS:13095.
All valves shall be suitable to with-stand the pressure in the system and rating shall
be PN 1.6. All valves shall be right-handed (i.e., handle or key shall be rotated clock
wise to close the valve), the direction of opening and closing shall be marked and
an open/shunt indicator fitted.

a) The material of valves shall be as under:

i. Body - Castiron
ii. Disc - Cast Bronze or Stainless-Steel
iii. Seat - Either integral or Nitrile rubber
iv. O-ring - Nitrite/ Silicon

b) Non return valves shall be swing check type in horizontal run and lift check
type in vertical run of pipes.

c) Air release valves shall be of gunmetalbody.

2.6.6 Isolation Valves:

a) Isolation valves shall be provided in the network to enable isolation of any

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 314

section of the network without affecting the flow in the rest. These valves are
distributed according to the general layout of the installation. The isolation
valves shall be normally located near the loop junctions. Additional valves
shall be provided in the segments where the length of the segment exceeds
300m.

b) Cut-off valves shall conform to IS 780 (PN 1.6 rating)/IS 14846, Class3.

c) Butterfly valves can be accepted subject to the condition that the valves of
diameter exceeding 150 mm shall necessary be of gearoperated.

d) All Cut-off valves shall be of the right-hand type and enclosed in properly
constructed surface boxes, at least 1 m2 in area so as to allow for broken joints
being easily remade. The top of the surface box shall be 80 mm above ground
level, except where it is located on a road. Valve wheels shall have an
arrowhead engraved or cast thereon showing direction for turning open
andclose.

e) It is recommended that the position of the surface box be indicated by an iron

plate painted fire red with distinct lettering. Such plates shall also show the
open and close direction as cast or indicated on the valves and the serial
number of the sluicevalve.

f) Locations where vehicles can pass shall be avoided for provision of valve
below ground.

g) In case of installations in earthquake prone zones, flexible couplings shall be

used for jointing purposes at requiredlocations.
h) Valves in fixed firefighting installations shall have supervisory switch with its
signaling to fire alarm panel or to have chain(s), pad lock(s), label and temper-
proof security tag(s) with serial number to prevent tempering/unauthorized
operation. These valves shall be kept in their intended ‘open’position.

2.6.7 Strainers
Stainless steel strainers shall have minimum 1 mm thick screen with 3 mm
perforations. Strainers shall be provided with flanges.

2.6.8 OrificePlate
Orifice plate shall be made of 6 mm thick stainless steel and shall have an
identification tag projecting beyond any flange between which it is clamped. The
orifice shall be plain central hole without burs and diameter not less than one-half
of the internal diameter of the pipe to which it is fitted.

2.6.9 Instruments
Pressure gauge of appropriate range and 150 mm diameter size shall be provided.
The pressure gauge shall be duly calibrated before installation and shall be
complete with shut offvalve.

2.6.10 Air Vessel

Air vessel shall be provided on top of each riser and shall be fabricated out of 8
mm thick M.S. Sheet. The ends shall be dished. This shall be of 250 mm
diameter, 1.2 m high and installed vertically on suitable legs. The legs shall be
provided with M.S. Plate of size 75 mm x 75 mm x 5 mm at the bottom so that the
legs do not puncture the roof. The legs shall be grouted in CC foundation. Flange

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 315

connection shall be provided for connection with wet riser pipe. Air release valve
and pressure gauge with shut off valve shall be provided. The air vessel shall be
tested at 25 kgf/cm2 pressure before installation.

2.6.11 Installation

a) The installation work shall be carried out in accordance with the detailed
drawings prepared by the contractor and approved by the Engineer-in-charge.

b) In pipe above ground level, expansion loops or joints shall be provided to take
care of expansion or contraction of pipes due to temperature changes.

c) Tee-off connections shall be through equal or reducing tees, otherwise ferrules

welded to the main pipe shall be used. Drilling and tapping of the walls of the
main pipe shall not be resorted to.

d) Open ends of piping shall be blocked as soon as the pipe is installed to avoid
entrance of foreign matter.

e) Piping installation shall be supported on or suspended from structure

adequately. The contractor shall provide, clamps, hangers etc.
f) Proper lines and levels shall be maintained while installing exposed pipes.

g) Pipe supports in pump house shall be floor mounted and of mild steel/

h) G. I. Spacing of pipe supports shall not be more than that specified below:
S Nominal Pipe Spacing
. Size (mm) (m)
N
o
1 20 and 25 2.00
2 32 to 125 2.50
3 150 and above 3.00
Extra supports shall be provided at the bends and at heavy fittings like valves to
avoid undue stress on thepipes.

i) Anti-vibration pads, springs or liners of resilient and non-deteriorating material

shall be provided at each support, so as to prevent transmission of vibration
through the supports.

j) Pipe sleeves of diameter larger than the pipe by least 50 mm shall be provided
wherever pipes pass through walls and the annular spaces shall be
filledwithfeltandfinishedwithretainingrings.
(i) Vertical risers shall be parallel to walls and column lines and shall be
straightandinplumb.Riserspassingfromfloortofloorshallbesupporte dat
each floor by clamps.
(ii) The space in the floor cut outs around the pipe work shall be closed using
cement concrete (1:2:4 mix) or steel sheet, from the fire safety
considerations, taking care to see that a small annular space is left
around the pipes to prevent transmission of vibrationto thestructure.

(iii) Riser shall have suitable supports at the lowestpoint.

k) Wherever mild steel pipes shall have to be buried under ground, the same

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 316

shall be treated before laying. The top of the pipes shall be not less than 1m
below the ground level. Wherever this is not practicable, permission of the
Engineer-in-charge shall be obtained for burying the pipes at lesser depth.
Masonry or CC blocks shall be provided for supporting the pipes at interval.
After the pipes have been laid, the trench shall be refilled with the excavated
soil in layers of 20 cm and rammed and any extra soil shall be removed from
the site of work by the contractor.

l) Underground pipe shall be laid at least 2m away from the face of the building
preferably along the roads and foot paths. As far as possible laying of pipes
under road, pavement and large open spaces shall be avoided. Pipes shall not
be laid under buildings and wherever unavoidable, these shall be laid in
masonry trenches with removable covers and cut-off valves shall be provided
at points of entry and exit.

m) Pipe over ground shall be painted in red color. Suitable identification shall be
provided to indicate the run of underground pipe wherever the
route of underground pipe cannot be ascertained from the location of yard
hydrant/isolating valves.

n) It shall be made sure that proper noiseless circulation is achieved in the

system. If proper circulation is not achieved due to air-bound connections, the
contractor shall rectify the defective connections. He shall bear all the
expenses for carrying out the above rectification, including the tearing up and
refinishing of floors, walls, etc. asrequired.

2.6.12 Flushing Arrangement

Flushing connections with isolation valves should be provided at suitable locations
in the firewater ring main.

2.6.13 Pressure Testing

(a) All piping shall be tested to hydrostatic test pressure of at least one and a
half times the maximum operating pressure, but not less than 10 kgf/sq.cm
for a period not less than 24 hours. While Hydro Testing, inclusion of cut-off
valves in the mains to be tested can be avoided. All leaks and defects in joints
revealed during the testing shall be rectified to the satisfaction of the
Engineer-in-Charge.
(b) Piping repaired subsequent to the above pressure test shall be re- tested in
the samemanner.
(c) System may be tested in sections and such sections shall be securely capped.
(d) Pressure gauges may be capped off during pressure testing of the installation.

2.6.14 Pipe Supports

Forinstallingpipesverticallyorhorizontallyinsidethebuildingstandardpipe supports of
reputed make shall be used. Following supports shall beused.

(i)Split pipe support clamps with rubber lining for vertical, horizontal and roof
hanging.
(ii) Clevis Hangers for horizontal supports to adjust varyingheights.
(iii) Sprinkler Hangers for horizontal supports for pipes from 15 mm dia to150
mmdia.
Fasteners and fully threaded rods shall be used for installing the pipe supports. The

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 317

sizes of pipe supports and installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer’s

recommendations.
For pipes of size 100 mm and above, with the prior approval of Engineer-in-
Charge,'U’clampwith dash fastener may be used for supporting horizontal pipe from
ceiling.

2.7 Fire fighting Accessories

2.7.1 LandingValve
Landing valves are provided in the system for connection of hose pipes for
discharging water for fighting fire by fire brigade or trained personnel. The landing
valves shall be as per IS: 5290
Material ofconstruction
I. Body, outlet and cap etc. : Bronze
II. Spindle : Brass
III. Handwheel : Mild steel or castiron.

The water discharge shall not be less than 900 lpm for single head valves at 7
kgf/cm2pressure.

2.7.2 Installation

The landing valve shall be fitted to a T-connection of the riser at the landing in such
a way that the valve is in the center of the internal hydrant opening and at a height
of 900 mm from floorlevel. The valve base shall be vertical and the valve facing
outside. There should be no hindrance in operation of thehandle.

2.7.3 First Aid HoseReel

First Aid Hose Reel shall consist of 20 mm (nominal internal) diameter hose tubing
length wrapped around a reel with water inlet pipe, stop valve and shut-off
nozzle. The entire assembly is mounted on a wall bracket and can swing 180
degrees. The water inlet shall be connected directly to the riser/down-comer mains
by means of 37 mm socket and valve. The hosetube can be pulled out easily for
the purpose of discharge of water on fire. First aid hose reel shall be as per IS-
884. The coupling, branch pipe andnozzle shall be as perIS:8090.

2.7.4 Material Of Construction-

Hubandsides : Mild steel

WallBracket : Cast iron / Mildsteel.

Hose tube(20mm) : Thermoplastic (Textile Reinforced)
(Nominalinternaldia) Type-2 as perIS-12585
Nozzle with branch Pipe :Brass
StopValve (BallValve) : Gunmetal.

The water flow rate shall be not less than 24 lpm and the range of jet shall be not
less than 6 m.

2.7.5 Installation

First aid hose reels are installed with internal hydrant. The cabinet shall be painted
red. The size of the cabinet shall be such that there is no obstruction in swinging the
hose reel. The location of cabinet shall be such that it does not form an obstruction

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 318

in passage/escaperoute.

The length of hose tube shall be such that the nozzle of the hose can be taken into
every room and within a range of 6 m from any part of the room. There shall be no
obstruction in swinging the hose reel and should be installed above landing valve
wherever provided. The inlet valve shall be at 900 mm above floor level. Hose reel
bracket should be firmly grouted on the wall with the help of raw bolts.

2.7.6 Fire Hose Delivery Coupling, Branch Pipe andNozzles: -

These are important accessories used for firefightingoperations.

2.7.6.1 Material ofConstruction: CopperAlloy

2.7.6.2 Delivery HoseCouplings

The delivery hose couplings consist of male half coupling and female half
coupling.Groovesareprovidedonoutersideonboth thecouplingsforbindinghose pipes
with wires. In female coupling, spring loaded cam tooth is provided for holding male
half coupling in position. Male half coupling and female half coupling are provided
on both sides (i.e., on one side male and on other side female) of hose pipes. Two
or more pipes can be joined to gether with the help of these couplings in
stantaneously.

2.7.6.3 Branch Pipe and Nozzle: -

BranchPipeswithnozzlearemountedattheendof hose pipe. Branch pipe is properly
finished and free from sharp edges. One end of branch pipe is fixed with hose
coupling and the other end is threaded to fit thenozzle.

a. Nozzleis ataperedpipewithoneendthreadedinternally andfixedonbranch pipe.

The size of another end i.e., nozzle shall be 20 mm (nominal internal diameter).

b. Spare Branch pipes and nozzles to the extent of 10 percent of the above
requirements, with a minimum of two sets, shall always be kept readily available
in fire control room/pump room.

2.7.7 Fire Service Inlet and Fire ServiceConnection

These are provided for connection of fire service hose pipes for either directly
pressurizing the system with their pumps or filling water in the tank from a distance.
Non-return valve with butterfly valve shall be provided for holding water pressure.
Fire service inlet shall be provided with each wet riser/down comer and the ring
main. These are fixed to 150 mm diameter pipe and located in MS Box made of 2
mm thick mild steel sheet with openable glasscover. These shall be as per IS:904.
Material of Construction: Copper Alloy.

2.7.8 HosePipes

Hose pipes shall be rubber lined woven jacketed and 63 mm in diameter. They shall
conform to Type A (Re-inforced rubber lined)of IS:636.They shall be flexible and
capable of being rolled. Length of hose pipe will be 15 m.The hose pipe shall be
complete with male and female coupling at the end.Besides keeping hose pipe
with internal hydrant and yard hydrant, spare hose pipes to the extent of 10 percent
of the above requirements, with a minimum quantity of 30 m shall always be kept
readily available in fire control room/pump room. Such spare hose shall be in 15 m

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 319

lengths, readily attached tocouplings.

2.8 Automatic Sprinkler System

2.8.1 The following standards shall be followed for Automatic Sprinkler system.
(i) IS: 15105: - Design, Installation and Maintenance of Fixed Automatic Sprinkler
Fire Extinguishing Systems- Code of Practice
(ii) IS: 9972: - Specification for Automatic Sprinkler Heads for Fire Protection
Service
2.8.2 Planning
Pressure in the sprinkler installation piping shall not exceed 7 bar and pressure at
the most remote sprinkler at any level shall not be less than 0.5 bar and also not
more than 5 bar.

2.8.3 Extent of Sprinkler Protection:-

Sprinklers shall be provided, except in the but for following areas:
(a) Areas, rooms or places where the water discharged from a sprinkler may pose
a fire or explosion or toxic hazard. In such areas alternative arrangement shall
be made.

(b) Stairs, spaces below stair headings (but not rooms above a stair) and lift wells.
Any part of the building not provided with sprinkler protection shall be fire
separated by walls. Fire doors not less than 1 hour in fire resistance shall be
provided in the opening of suchwalls.

(c) Wash rooms, toilets and WCs (but not cloak rooms) of area less than 5m2. If
area of these rooms exceeds 5m2, these shall be provided with sprinkler
protection unless fire separated by walls and all openings in the walls are
protected.

(d) Sprinklers shall not be required in electrical equipment rooms where all of the
following conditions aremet:

i) The room is dedicated to electrical equipmentonly.

ii) Only dry-type electrical equipment isused.
iii) Equipment is installed in a 120 minutes fire-rated enclosure including
protection for penetration inwalls.

(e) Rooms like server room or electrical control room where alternateprotection by
other automatic extinguishing systems shall be provided.

(f) In areas having height 17 m or above such as in atria, sprinklers installations

may be rendered ineffective and hence may be avoided.

(g) The area to be protected by sprinkler is divided into various zones. For
detecting operation of sprinkler in a zone, flow switches are provided which
are wired to an annunciation panel installed in the Fire Control
Room. In the event of operation of sprinkler(s) in an affected area. The
annunciation panel will give audio-visual alarm and indicate the affected zone.
This arrangement will be independent of fire alarm system.

(h) For moderate hazard, water discharge shall be at least 5 liter/min/m2 over an
assumed area of operation covering 360 m2.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 320

(i) Sprinkler Spacing, Arrangement, Distribution and Locations: - Sprinkler

heads may be installed on ceiling and or side walls.

(i) Minimum DistancebetweenSprinklers is 1.8 m (for Ceiling as well as

Sidewallsprinklers)

(ii) Maximum distanceofsprinkler (For ceiling &sidewallsprinklers): it shall not

exceed from endwalls: half of theallowable distance between sprinklers
Note: For ceilingsprinklers:
a) where the external walls are combustible or built with metallic or
otherwise or open sided; and in case of open joisted ceilings or where
the roof has the rafters exposed, the distance between the boundary and
the sprinklers shall not exceed 1.5m.
b) Distance shall be measured perpendicular to thewall.
(iii) Sprinklers shall not be located at a distance less than 100 mm from the wall
(for ceilingsprinklers).

a) Sprinklers shall not be located at a distance less than 100 mm from

the end wall (for sidewall sprinklers)
b) While designing and installation of the sprinklers, the recommendation
of sprinkler manufacturer shall beconsidered.

2.8.4 SpacingbelowSprinklerHeads:-Clear minimum space of 0.5 m shall be maintained

below the deflector of sprinkler head.

2.8.5 Sidewall Sprinkler Deflector Location and Orientation in relation to building

structure:

i) Distance between sprinklers and the ceiling shall not exceed 150 mm. If
specifically approved for use and listed so, the distances between ceilings and
the sprinklers can be increased up to 450mm.
ii) Vertical side wall sprinkler deflectors shall be located not more than
150 mm or less than 100 mm from the wall from which they areprojecting.
iii) Sprinklers shall be so located to minimize obstructions (to discharge) either on
parallel or perpendicular sides thereof. If required, additional sprinklers shall
be provided to obviate theobstructions.

2.8.6 Sidewall Sprinkler Obstruction: Sprinklers shall be located at least 1.2 m away from
any lighting, fan and similar fixtures either in front of or on the same wall where the
sprinklers are mounted. For any obstruction (to
discharge) including lighting, fan etc., shall bebeyond1.2m, distances A and B shall
be maintained as per the Tables given below. In case these distances cannot be
maintained, the sprinkler shall not be allowed at such location.
Clearance between the top of storage if any to the deflector shall not be less than
450mm.

a) Side wall sprinklers in rooms shall neither be installed above the grills of air
conditioner nor within 450 mm thereof on the same wall. Horizontal sidewall
sprinkler shall be located not more than 100 mm and are allowed to be located
with their deflectors less than 100 mm from the wall on which they are
mounted.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 321

b) Deflectors of the sprinklers shall be aligned parallel to the ceilings or roofs.

c) When installed under a sloped ceiling (1 in 6), sidewall sprinklers shall be

located at the high point of slope and positioned so as to discharge down the
slope.

d) Where vertical side of a beam/projection from a wall is used for installing a

sidewall sprinkler, additional sprinklers shall be installed below the soffit if the
width of beam or projection from the wall exceeds 200 mm.

e) When soffits used are within 200 mm in width or projection from the wall,
additional sprinklers shall not be required subject to the deflector of the
sprinklers falling within prescribed distance.

2.8.7 Concealed Spaces: -

If the height of the concealed space at roof and floor is not greater than 0.8m, the
spaces shall be sprinkler protected only if they contain combustible materials or are
constructed with combustible materials.Spaces between roofs and ceiling more
than 0.8 m deep shall be sprinkler protected asfollows: -
a) Concealed spaces less than 5m2 in area shall not require sprinkler protection.

b) Sprinkler heads shall be provided considering the space as any other area in
the building.

c) Sprinkler heads may be connected individually with the range/distribution

pipes below, which shall be sized by taking the room and concealed space
sprinklerscumulatively.

d) Sprinkler heads for concealed space and for the room may be connected with
separate range/distribution pipes connected, with common feed pipe. The
common feed pipes shall be not less than 65 mmdiameter.

2.8.8 Pipe Sizing and Design: - Sprinkler heads shall be connected with pipe lines
permanently charged with water. Depending upon location of sprinkler heads and
site conditions, sprinkler heads may be connected with range and distribution
pipes.

The pipes connecting the sprinkler heads are to be sized depending upon
number of sprinkler heads and arrangement of their connection. Range Sizes of
pipes are to be calculated from various tables and hydraulic calculations given in
IS:15105.

Pipe sizes shall be determined using one of the following methods:

a) Pre-calculated system: applicable only where light and ordinary occupancies
where the aggregate floor plate area (in one or more floors combined) is 5000
m2 or less (except where gridded or looped layouts are used).

b) Pre-calculated pipework is applicable only to the extensions of old pre-

calculated systems.

c) Fully calculated system: applicablefor

i) Light and ordinary occupancies where the aggregate floor plate area (in
Addition: NIL Correction: NIL
Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 322

one or more floors combined) exceeds 5000m2.

ii) High hazardoccupancies,

iii) Storage occupancies,andAll occupancies where conventional and special
sprinklers are used like ESFR, LD, EC, intermediate,etc.

d) Some guidelines relating to pre-calculated system are given below:

i) Pipe less than 25 mm diameter is not to be used.

ii) There shall not be more than 6(Six) sprinklers in any range.

iii) Range and distribution pipe nominal sizes shall be selected from Tables
given below respectively.

2.8.9 Range Pipe Nominal Sizes for Various Pipe Layouts in Moderate/Ordinary Hazard
Installations.

Range Pipe Layout Pipe Nominal Maximum Number

Bore (mm) of
Sprinklers to be
fed by Pipe of size
listed

(a) (1) Range(s) at remote end of

each distribution pipe spur in
end feed layout:

(i) Last two 2 1

ranges in two end- 5
side layouts 3 2
2
(ii) Last three ranges in 2 2
three end-side layouts 5
3 3
2
(2) Last range in all other 2 2
layouts. 5
3 3
2
4 4
0
(b) All other ranges in case of 2 3
1(i), 1(ii) & (2) above 5
3 4
2
4 6
0

2.8.10 Distribution Pipe Nominal Size in Moderate/Ordinary Hazard Installations and

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 323

Maximum Number of Sprinklers

Distributi Type of Distribution Pipe Maximum Number

on Pipes Layout Nominal (mm) of Sprinklers to be
fed by Pipe size
listed

At extremities of Two end 32 2

the side 40 4
installation layouts
50 8
65 16
Last threeranges All other 32 3
layouts 40 6
50 9
65 18
Between design All To be calculated as per 10.4.4 (b) of
points and the IS15105
Installation
Control Valve

2.8.11 Components of sprinkler system: - Following types of valves are used in the
installations:

1. Test Valve. - For testing hydraulic alarm or electric alarm by drawing water from
downstream side, test valve shall be connected with downstream of the water
flowalarm.

2. Drain Valve: - For drainage of system, drain valve of 50 mm diameter shall

be provided down stream of Installation Control Valve or any subsidiary stop
valve.

A common valve can perform the functions of test and drain. The outlet shall be
connected with a 50 mm diameter G.I. drain pipe along with riser pipes.

3. Flushing Valve: -Ifthewaterusedforsprinklerisnotpotable,flushingvalves shall be

provided at the end of a distribution pipe. The valve size shall be same as
distribution pipe. Valve outlet shall be fitted with a brass plug and extended to
not more than 3 m abovefloor.

4. Check Valve: - Check valve shall be provided where more than one water supply
is available and same shall be fitted on each water supplypipe.

5. Subsidiary Stop Valve: - Subsidiary stop valve which shall be of the same
diameter as the pipe line in which they are fitted and shall be provided to control
water supply to sprinklers of highly sensitive areas like computer rooms.

6. Installation Control Valve (ICV): - A sprinkler installation shall be fitted witha

suitable Installation Control Valve to control the water supply to the
installation.The valve set shall comprise of:

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 324

(a) a main stopvalve.

(b) an alarmvalve.
(c) a water motoralarm.
The alarm valve shall be fitted immediately downstream of the main stop valve of
each building/block and before any connection is taken off to supply any part of the
installation.
The Installation Control Valve shall be placed externally in the vicinity of the main
entrance of the building protected at an easily accessible place so that the alarm
bell sound is heard by the inhabitants/passer-by. The valve shall be secured open
by a pad locked or rivetted strap and protected against impact damage.

If there are genuine constraints in locating the Installation Control Valve outside the
buildings, this may be located inside the building in the vicinity of main entrance
(subject to approval of authorities concerned). Installation Control Valve in such
cases, shall be located away from any exposure to damage and personnel shall be
normally available in the vicinity of the location to get alerted by alarm operation.
Also, electrically operated sirens interfaced with the opening of the alarm valve of
ICV, shall be provided outside the building. In no case, Installation Control Valve
shall be provided inside basement or inside pump room.

A plan of the risk with the position of Installation Control Valve shall be placed in a
conspicuous location. A location plate shall be fixed near the Installation Control
Valve bearing the following words in raised letters:

SPRINKLER
ALARM VALVE
7. Water motor alarm: Water motor alarm shall be provided very close to the alarm
valve. Strainer shall be fitted between the alarm valve and the motor nozzle
connection. The water outlet shall be positioned so that any flow of water can be
seen. The alarm device shall provide audibility level of 85 dB above the back
ground noise level.

8. Pressure Gauges: Pressure gauges shall be provided immediately above and

below each alarm valve. Stop cock shall be provided before pressure gauges for
removal without interruption of water supply of the installation. Pressure gauges
shall be as per IS: 3624.

2.8.12 Selection of TemperatureRating

Temperature rating of a sprinkler should not be less than 30° C more than the
highest anticipated temperature of the location of installation. Under glazed roofs or
where there are roof sheets of PVC or similar plastic material,
sprinklershallberated73°Cto100°C.

2.8.13 OrificeSize
Sprinklers orifice size of minimum 15 mm shall be used.

2.8.14 Size ofInstallations

The protected floor area to be controlled by any one Installation Control Valve shall
not exceed 12000 m2.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 325

As far as possible one area shall be controlled by one Installation Control Valve. If
the area is quite large, more than one Installation Control Valve should be planned.
Details of area controlled by an Installation Control valve shall be exhibited near it.
If there are more than one block in a campus, each block shall be provided with
different Installation Control valve.

2.8.15 Protection of Sprinklers

Any sprinkler installed in a position of risk or accidental damage, shall befitted with
a metal guard suitable for sprinkler service.

2.8.16 Sprinkler Annunciation Panel and Alarm

Electrically operated alarm shall be provided for indication of operation of sprinkler
in an area. Water flow switches shall be installed in main distribution pipes which
shall be wired to sprinkler annunciation panel. In the event of operation of a
sprinkler, the flow switch will operate and give signal to the annunciation panel to
indicate operation of sprinkler in the area. This will initiate an electrically operated
alarm. The system shall be independent of fire alarm system and compatible with ,.
Necessary potential free contacts for use in , should be provided.

2.8.16.1 ConstructionDetails

a) The Panel shall be fabricated out of not less than 2 mm thick MS sheet and
powder coated after 7 tank treatment process and shall be totally enclosed dust
damp and vermin proof. Suitable knockout shall be provided for the entry of
cables. The panel shall be designed such that the equipment for power
supply and battery charging are housed in
independent compartments. Sealed maintenance free batteries shall also be
accommodated inside thepanel.

b) Indicating lamps control switches, buttons and fuses shall be suitablylocated

in the front and properlylabeled.

c) The indicating lamps shall be LED type of following colors. The flow switch
operation conditions shall be indicated by twinlamps.
I. Red to indicate flow switchoperation.
II. Amber to indicate fault condition.
III. Green to indicate healthycondition.

d) The test buttons to test the indication lamps shall be provided.

e) The panel control shall be microprocessor type.

f) The primary function of the panel shall be to respond automatically to the

operation of one or more flow switches to give alarm and to indicate area/areas
where the device has been activated. The operation of one or more flow
switches shall result in simultaneous alarm given by the following: -
I. External alarm hooter(s) (provided outside the building to be
protected).
II. A visible indication on panel.
III. Audible alarm on panel itself (common for allzones)

g) The panel shall indicate the fault within the system and immediate fault warning
shall be given by an audible and visible signal on the panel in case of open
circuit, short circuit and earth fault in cable between flow switch and

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 326

annunciation panel.

h) The panel shall be complete with mimic diagram for the areas covered by
different flow switches. The layout of mimic diagram shall be got approved from
Engineer- in-Charge.

i) Battery backup with trickle cum boost charger shall be provided for operation of
the system. Indication of mains failure and the state of charge of the batteries
shall be provided. The batteries shall be sealed & maintenance free. The
capacity of the battery shall be 12 Volt, 2 Nos. 24 Ah each. All standard
accessories shall beprovided.

2.8.16.2 Installation
Following points in addition to general installation guidelines, are to be takencare for
sprinkler installations:

a) For fixing sprinkler heads, 15 mm diameter M.S. Socket is to be welded to

range pipes at the locations as per drawings. Dead plug shall be fixed in the
socket.
b) If sprinkler head is to be provided away from range pipe, M.S. Pipe nipple of
suitable size be used to extend the sprinkler head and socket is welded at
desiredlocation.
c) After completion of work in sections, pressure testing at 7.5 kgf/cm2
pressureshallbecarriedoutfor24hrs.
d) Aftercompletionoftheentirework,pressuretestingofentirepipeworkshall be
carried out for 24 hrs. at a pressure of 7.5 kgf/cm2. The drop of pressure
up to 0.5 kgf/cm2shall be accepted.
e) The lines shall be flushed before completion of building work so that any foreign
matter which might have entered the system is taken out. The pressurization
pump (Jockey Pump) be operated and valves opened at differentlocations.
f) During occupation of the building, sprinkler heads shall be provided in place of
dead plugs. Teflon tape shall be used on threaded portion. The sprinkler heads
shall be properly tightened in thesocket.
g) When all sprinklers’ heads are installed, pressure is built up in the system by
pressurization pump slowly and in case no leak is found, desired pressure is
developed and maintained. In case any leak is detected, the same shall be
attended before pressurizing the system further.

2.8.17 Spare Sprinklers to be Kept in Stock:

A stock of spare sprinklers shall be maintained in the premises so that prompt

replacement is possible after the operation/damage of sprinkler heads. The spares
shall be kept in an easily accessible location under conditions where the
temperature does not exceed38°C.
Minimum 50 Sprinklers of each type shall be supplied to the department at the time
of Handover.

2.9 Water Curtain Sprinkler: -

For basement car parking, compartmentation can be achieved, with fire barrier or
with water curtain nozzle (K-23) or with a combination thereof. Automatic deluge
system comprising deluge valve, piping, nozzles etc. shall be used to zone the
compartment in case of water curtain system. In case of water curtain, existing

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 327

water storage shall be supplemented by water demand for water curtain nozzles for
60 min considering the largest compartment’ s perimeter out of all compartments of
car parking in any of the basements. The water supply for the water curtain nozzles
shall be through an independent electric pump of adequate capacity (flow and head)
with piping/riser for the water supply to the nozzles. The water curtain shall be
operated by the actuation of flow switch actuating sprinkler system.

2.9.1 Installation
The spray nozzle must be handled with due care. Nozzle which is visibly damaged
should not be installed. Use Teflon tape or soft thread sealant on male thread of the
nozzle. The nozzles must be tightened into the fitting. Excessive tightening torque
may result in serious damage to nozzle arms and the deflector which may affect the
spray pattern of the nozzle and its performance. Spray nozzles are to be installed in
accordance with the latest published standards of NFPA or similar organizations
and also with the provisional governmental code, ordinance and standards
whenever applicable. The use of these nozzles may be limited due to occupancy
and hazard, Refer to Authority having jurisdiction prior to installation.

2.9.2 Inspection, tests & maintenance

It is recommended that the window spray system be inspected regularly by

authorized technical personnel. The nozzle must be checked for atmospheric
effects, external and internal obstruction, blockage if any. The nozzles should be
cleaned or replaced if required. The system must be operated with optimum water
flow at least twice in a year or as per the provisions of NFPA or local authority
having jurisdiction. The owner is solely responsible for maintaining the water spray
system and the components therein so that it performs properly when required.

2.10 Electrical Work

a) Unless otherwise specified in the tender specifications, all equipment and

materials for electrical works shall be suitable for operations on 415 V / 240 V +
10% (3 phase/single phase), 50 Hz ACsystem.

b) All electrical works shall be carried out complying Central Electricity

Authority (Measures Relating to Safety and Electric Supply)
Regulations, 2010 and NEC 2011, as amended up todate. All parts of
electrical works shall be carried out as per appropriate
CPWDGeneralSpecificationsforElectricalworks,namely,PartI(Internal) 2023,
Part II (External) 2 0 2 3 work, and Part IV (Sub-station)- 2013 allas amended
up todate.

c) All materials and components used shall conform to the relevant IS

specifications amended todate.

2.10.1 PowerSupply

a) Power supply to following systems and equipment, where provided, shall be

from normal and emergency (standby generator) power sources with
changeover facility:
I. Firepumps
II. Pressurization and smoke venting; including its ancillary systems such
as dampers andactuators.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 328

III. Fireman's lifts (including alllifts).

IV. Exit signagelighting.
V. Emergency lighting.
VI. Fire alarmsystem.
VII. Public address (PA) system (relating to emergency voice
evacuation and annunciation).
VIII. Lighting in fire command center and securityroom.

b) The generator shall be capable of taking starting current of all the fireand life
safety systems and equipment as above.

c) The electric supply to the pumping set(s) shall be entirely independent of all
other equipment in the premises that is even when the power throughout the
entire premises is switched off, the supply to the pump
shall continue to be available un-interrupted.

d) The power supply to the panel/distribution board of these fire and life safety
systems shall be through fire proof enclosures or circuit integrity cables or
through alternate route in the adjoining fire compartment to ensure supply of
power is reliable to these systems and equipment. It shall be ensured that the
cabling from the adjoining fire compartment is protected within the compartment
of vulnerability. The location of the panel/distribution board feeding the fire and
life safety system shall be in fire safe zone ensuring supply of power to these
systems.

e) Circuits of such emergency system shall be protected at origin by an automatic

circuit breaker so set as to permit the motor to be overloaded during an
emergency to the maximum limit permissible by the manufacturer. Further, the
no volt coil/the under-voltage release of that circuit breaker shall be removed.
Master switches controlling essential service circuits shall be clearly labelled.

f) Independent supply shall be provided for water supply pumps if installed in the
same pump house. If the fire pump house is away from the sub- station
building, the route of the cable shall not pass under the building or permanent
structure. Cable shall be laid along the route which is safe from fire.

g) Sufficient spare power shall always be available to drive pumping sets at all
times throughout the year. Suitable capacity ACBs/ MCCBS/ SDFUs shall be
provided in the electrical panel for extending supplies to fire pumps. Such
switches shall be suitably marked "FIRE SWITCH" and shall not be switched-off
without permission/intimation to appropriate authority. In case any
maintenance/repair work is to be carried out on the electrical panel where from
supplies to fire pumps have been extended, alternative arrangement shall be
made to ensure that power supply to fire pumps continue to be available for
operation any time.

2.10.2 Motors
The motors shall be squirrel cage AC induction type. The motors shall be suitable
for continuous duty and rating necessary to drive the pump at 150 percent of its
rated discharge with atleast 65 percentratedhead.Themotor shall be totally enclosed
fan cooled type confirming to protection clause IP 21of IS:4691.The class of
insulation shall be ‘F’.The synchronous speed shall be 1500/3000 rpm as per

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 329

requirement of the pump. The motor shall conform toIS:325.

2.10.3 MotorStarter
a) The motor starter shall conform to IS: 1822 “Motor starters of voltage not
exceeding 1000 volts” and shall be air insulated and suitable for 415 V, + 10%,
50 Hz, 3 phase AC supply and shall be integrated in the panel.

b) Starter for the motor shall be direct on line (D.O.L) for motors up to and
including 7.5 H.P. rating and automatic star-delta type for motors of
higher ratings unless otherwise specified in the tender specifications. However,
for main Fire Pump & Sprinkler Pump Soft Starters may be used.
c) Each starter shall be provided with the following protections:-
1. Thermal overload on all the three phases with adjustablesettings,
2. Independent single-phase preventer. (Current sensingtype).

d) Adequate number of extra NO/NC contacts for interlocks, indicating lamps,

remote operation etc. shall be provided on the starter/ contactor.

e) Under voltage/No volt trip shall not be provided.

2.10.4 PanelBoards
a) The main panel board shall be floor mounted, free standing or wall mounted
cubical type and shall be factory built fabricated by one of the approved
manufacturers. Shall be fabricated from 2.0 mm thick CRCA sheet and powder
coated after 7 tank treatment process, fabricated with IP 42 degree of
protection. It shall be suitable for termination of the incoming cables
frombottom.

b) The capacity of switch gear shall be suitable for the requirements of motor
fed/ controlled. Starting currents shall be dulyconsidered.
SDFUS/MCCBsshallbeusedupto
630A.ACBshallbeusedfor630Aandaboveratings. All Switch fuse
units/SDFUs shall be of AC 23 duty as per IS: 4064-1978 as amended up to
date. They shall be complete with suitable HRC cartridgetypefuses.

c) Panel boards shall house starters for motors with independent current sensing
type single phase preventor for each starter. Volt meter with selector switch, a
set of indicating lamps and fuses for voltmeter and lamps shall be provided.
Ammeter with CTs, and selector switch shall be provided with each motor
starter. Instruments shall be flush mounted with the panel and have a class
index not higher than 1.0. The fabrication of switchboard shall be taken up only
after the drawings for the fabrication of the same are approved by theEngineer-
in-charge.

d) The layout shall be designed for convenient connections and inter- connections
with the various switchgear. Connections from individual compartments to cable
alleys shall be suchas notto shut down healthy circuits in the event of
maintenance work becoming necessary on a defective circuit. Care shall be
taken to provide adequate clearances between phase bus bars as well as
between phase bus bars, neutral andearth.

e) Where terminations are done on the bus bars by drilling holes therein, extra
cross section shall be provided for the bus bars. Alternatively, terminations may

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 330

be made byclamping. Provision shall be made for proper termination of cables

at the switchboards such that there is no strain either on the cables, or on the
terminators. Cables connected to
the upper tiers shall be duly clamped within the panel board.

f) Identification labels shall be provided against each switchgear and starter

compartment, using plastic/aluminum engravedlabels. Metallic danger board
conforming to relevant IS shall be fixed on each electricalpanel board.

2.10.5 System Controller

For controlling operation of pumps and indicating fault,
systemcontrollershallbeprovided.Thesystemcontrollershallconsistofrelays, timer,
contactors etc. and shall be designed to operate the fire pumps with interlocking
and fault indication. Annunciation window shall be provided to indicate
followingfaults:
a) Low water level in UGtank
b) Low water level in terracetank.
c) Main pump failed tostart.
d) Main pump failed duringoperation.
e) Diesel pump failed tostart.
f) Diesel pump failed duringoperation
g) Supply to Main Pumpfailed
h) Supply to Pressurization Pumpfailed
i) Supply to Terrace Pumpfailed.

Suitable sensors, differential pressure switches, monitors shall be provided at

respective locations. The control system shall be operational on 12 Volt/24 Volt DC
starting batteries of engine. Battery chargers shall be provided to ensure that the
batteries remain charged. Batteries shall be sealed maintenance free type.

2.10.6 Remote IndicatingPanel

The remote indicating panel shall be provided in the fire control room. This panel
shall have necessary status indication of all electricmotors. Back indication to
show the status of operation of all the motors, pressure in the system, water level
in underground and overhead tank etc. shall be provided.
Panel shall be fabricated from not less than 1.6 mm thick CRCA sheet and powder
coated after 7 tank treatment process. The panel shall be dust, damp and vermin
proof. This shall be of wall mounting type. This shall be complete with necessary
termination arrangements, multicore cables, tag blocks, control transformer,
designation plastic labels, double earth studs etc. asrequired.

2.10.7 PowerCabling
a) Power cables shall be XLPE insulated, PVC sheathed aluminum/ Copper
conductor, armoured cables of 1100 V grade.

b) Power cables shall be of sizes to meet the starting and running current of
motors fed and shall be as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge, after taking
into consideration the load, the length of cabling.

c) Cables shall be laid in suitable metallic trays suspended from ceiling, or

mounted on walls. Cable ducts shall not be provided in pump rooms.
Cable trays shall be of perforated steel sheet with adequate structural strength
and rigidity. Necessary supports and suspenders for cable trays shall be

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 331

provided asrequired.

2.10.8 Control Wiring

a) Control wiring shall be done using PVC insulated and PVC sheathed,
2.5 sq.mm, armoured multi-core copper conductor cable. The control cable shall
also be laid in the same manner as power cable.The number and size of the
control cables shall be such as to suit the control system design adopted by the
contractor.

b) Runs of control wires within the-switchboard shall be neatly bunched and

suitably supported/clamped. Means shall be provided for easy identification of
the control wires.Control wiring shall correspond to the circuitry/sequence of
operations and interlocks approved byEngineer- in-Charge.

2.10.9 Earthing
a) Metallic body of all motors, medium voltage equipment and switch boards shall
be properly earthed. Number of earth tapping points shall be intimated well in
advance to the Structural earthing agency and shall connect to the points being
provided.

b) Armoring of cables shall be connected to the body of the equipment/switch

board at both the ends. Compression type glands shall be used for all such
terminations in the case of PVC/XLPEcables.

2.10.10 Painting
All panels shall be supplied with the manufacturer’s standard finish painting.

2.11 Installation, Testing and Commissioning

2.11.1 Preparation And Approval ofDrawing
Following points are to be taken care while preparing the drawings.
The location of yard hydrants, fire service inlet and fire service connection are to be
decided based on considerations stated earlier. However necessary adjustments
are to be made so that these components do not become hindrance invehicular
movement an dentrance to the building.
Requirement of other building services are also to be given due consideration.
Symmetry should be maintained for aesthetic considerations.
2.11.2 Pump House: -The layout of equipment in pump house is very important from
operation and maintenance considerations in case other equipment i.e., water
supply pumps etc. are to be installed in the same pump house, sufficient space shall
be left for them as well. The dimensioned foundation drawing of pumps should be
available for marking in the pump room layout. The layout is to be prepared in such
a way that it should be possible to maintain any equipment without disturbing the
adjoining equipment. Electrical panels are to be installed at a location which is
easily accessible near the entrance to the pump house and there should be no
possibility of water dripping over or near the electrical panel.

2.11.3 Electrical Panel: -Complete wiring drawing,layout etc.are to be examined to ensure

that provisions of agreement are incorporated in the drawing. Sizes of various panel
and mounting arrangement may be decided keeping in view ease of operation and
aesthetic consideration aswell.

2.11.4 Installation: -
a) The pump and motor/engineare to be perfectly aligned on the base plate so that

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 332

there is no vibration during operation. All nuts,bolts,washers shall be of

adequate size and galvanized.

b) The pipe supports should be decided in a way that the weight of pipes and
valves are not transferred to the pumps and supports do not cause hindrance in
movement inside the pump house. As far as possible, floor supports may be
provided in pumphouse.

c) All valves shall be installed at a height and in a position that theiroperation by

right hand is conveniently possible.

d) All pressure gauges should be installed so that the dial is vertical and is visible
while entering the pumphouse.

e) Electrical panels should not be installed at floor level. The panels shall be
sufficiently raised above ground level. If panels are to be mountedon wall,
anangleironframeshallbeprovidedsothatatleast75mmspaceisleft behind the
panels. The panels shall be easily approachable.

f) Drain pump shall be installed in the sump provided. The pump shall operate
automatically for which water level sensor shall be provided.

g) In no case, any structural member i.e., RCC wall, column, beam and floor are
to be damaged during installation. Mechanical fasteners are to be used for
groutingsupport.

h) U.G. tank wall is not to be used for any support. No pipe/cable is to cross the
pump house below ground level. Openings above ground level are only to be
used for thispurpose.

i) The engine installation work shall be carried out in accordance with the
requirement of engine manufacturer and be got approved by the manufacturer
or their authorized service center. The exhaust pipe should be suitably
extended outside the pump house so that smoke does not affect nearby
structure. Fuel tank shall be properly supported and located in a way that the
same does not cause hindrance in movement in the pump house.

j) While excavating for laying of external pipes,suitable sign board/ barricading

shall be provided to ensure that no person falls in the trench.

k) No earth or any other matter is to be allowed to enter the pipes. The

ends shall be kept closedalways.

l) Pressure testing is to be carried out in sections before filling the earth back in
the trench.

m) The earth filling is to be done in layers of 20 cm each and properly rammed so

as to avoid possibility of settlement. Surplus earth/ malba shall be removed
from the site by the contractor.

n) Where pipes crossing road likely to have heavy traffic, additional protection over
pipe shall be provided to ensure that pipe is not damaged. However, semi-
circular RCC Pipes shall be provided overcast iron pipes at road crossings.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 333

o) External hydrants and fire service connection/ inlet shall be located parallel to
the nearby road/ foot path so as to give proper appearance. Foundation shall be
raised from below ground level and shall be properly plastered in plumb. The
hydrants shall be facing the road/ approach. There shall be no obstruction in
approaching the hydrants for operation.

p) Risers shall be parallel to the wall and in plumb. Adequate supports shall be
provided from the wall. Opening around the pipe in slab shallbe filled with CC
and finished with plaster.

q) Internal hydrant shall be provided in the center and facing outside for ease of
operation. Sufficient space shall be provided around the handle for operation.
There shall be no hindrance in moving the first aid hose reel.

r) Terrace pipes shall be supported on CC pedestals of adequate height. The pipe

route shall be such as no hindrance is created in movement at the terrace.
Pipes shall be sufficiently raised above terrace. It is to be ensured that water
proofing is not damaged during laying of pipes.

2.11.5 Testing

a) During laying of pipes, the same shall be subjected to 10 kgf/cm2 hydraulic

pressure for a period of 24 hours, insections. After completion of the work, all
valves / fittings shall be installed in position and entire system shall be tested for
24 hours at a pressure of 10 kgf/ cm2. The drop of pressure up to 0.5 kgf/cm2
shall beaccepted.

b) After completion, all operation checks shall be carried out for automatic
operation of the systems. For this purpose, landing valves may be opened at
different locations. The exercise shall be repeated couple of times to ensure
trouble free operation of the system.

c) The design flow of pumps shall be checked. The pump shall be operated after
opening a number of landing valves at different locations. Design pressure is to
be maintained in the pump house. Water discharge is to be measured by drop
in level in UG tank for a certain period. All pumps
shall be tested one by one. The flow rate shall be not less than as
specified while maintaining the design pressure in pumphouse.

2.11.6 Inspection By Local FireOfficer

After completion of the work and testing to the entire satisfaction ofEngineer- in-
Charge, the installation shall be offeredfor inspection by Chief Fire Officer or his
representative. Testing as desired by the Fire Officer shall be carried out. The
contractor shall extend all help including manpower during testing. Rectification of
observations of Fire Officer shall be attended by the contractor. The installation will
be accepted by the department only after clearance by Fire officer.

2.11.7 Commissioning

a) Flushing the System: Before commissioning, the entire system shall beflushed
to ensure that any earth/ foreign matters which might have entered
duringinstallationaretakenout.Forthis,pumpmaybeoperatedandvalves

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 334

openedatdifferentlocations.

b) As soon as the work is complete, the system shall be commissioned and

made available for use. Requirement of firefighting installations is equally
importantduringoccupationofthebuilding.Ifthebuildingistobeoccupied in part,
firefighting system of building completed shall be commissioned by isolating
the system of under construction portion ofthe building.

c) The firefighting system shall be maintained and manned from the very first
day of itscommissioning.

d) Any defects noticed during the warranty period shall be promptly attended
and availability of the system at all times is to beensured.

2.11.8 List Of Relevant Indian Standards

S. No IS No. Title
1. IS-884 Specification for first-aid hose reel for firefighting

2. IS-901 Specification for couplings, double male and

double female instantaneous pattern for
firefighting,
3. IS-902 Specification (for suction hose couplings for
firefighting Purposes (third revision)
4. IS-903 Specification for fire hose delivery couplings,
branch pipe, nozzles and nozzle spanner. (Fourth
revision)
5. IS-904 Specification for two and three- way suction
collecting heads for firefighting purposes.
6. IS-907 Specification for suction strainers, cylindrical type
for firefighting purpose. (Second revision)
7. IS-908 Specification for fire hydrant, stand post type.
(Second revision)
8. IS-909 Specification for underground fire hydrant. Sluice
valve type
9. IS-937 Specification for washers for water fittings for
firefighting purposes.
10. IS-1643,IS-1646 Code of practice for fire safety of buildings
(general)
11. IS-2871 Specification for branch pipe, universal for
firefighting purposes.
12. IS-5290 Specification for landing valves.
13. IS-8090 Specification for couplings, branch pipe, nozzle,
used in hose reel tubing for firefighting.
14. IS-8442 Specification for stand post type water and foam
monitor for firefighting (first revision)
15. IS-9972 Specification for automatic sprinkler heads. (First
revision)

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 335

16. IS-11101 Specification for extended branch pipe for fire

brigade use
17. IS -9668 Code of practice for provision and maintenance
of water supplies and firefighting.
18. IS -3844 Code of practice for installation and maintenance
of internal fire hydrants and hose reel on
premises.
19. IS 12469 Specification for Pumps for Fire Fighting System
20. IS -10221 Code of practice for coating and wrapping of
underground mild steel pipe lines. (First revision)
21. IS-15105 Design and installation of fixed automatic
sprinkler fire extinguisher system-Code of
Practice.
22. IS-1239 Mild steel tubes, tubulars and other wrought steel
fittings.
23. IS -3589 Specification for Steel pipes for water, andsewage

24. IS -2592 Recommendation for methods of measurement

or fluid flow be means of orifice plates and
nozzles.
25. IS:1536 Specification for Centrifugally Cast (Spun) Iron
pressure pipes for water, gas & sewage (first
revision)
26. IS 1537 Specification for Vertically Cast-Iron pressure pipes
for water, gas & sewage (first revision)
27. IS:13039 Code of practice for provision and maintenance
of External Hydrant System (first revision)
28. IS:15496: Inspection and Maintenance of Gaseous Fire
Extinguishing system.
2004

2.12 Technical Specifications for Fire Suppression System

2.12.1 The scope of work shall include Design, Supply, Installation, Testing and
Commissioning of Total Flooding Clean Gas Fire Suppression System with HFC
227ea/ HFC 236/ NOVEC-1230 or equivalent gas Suppression system and related
accessories as per NFPA2001-2015 at Electrical Substation, Server Rooms, UPS
room, Medical gas pipeline system, LPG Manifold in kitchen etc., as required.

a) Total flooding clean gas fire suppression system cylinders, Relays, Valve
assembly, Solenoid valves and other accessories like NRVs, flexible hoses,
pressure gauges, Safety devices, Directional control valves etc. shall be as per
UL/VDS/LPCB/FM approvals and relevant standards.

b) Installation of Control panels and laying of cables necessary for Total Flooding
Clean Gas Fire Suppression systems (All the cables are to be provided with
casing cabinets for aesthetic look).

c) Necessary interfaces are to be provided for Fire Alarm Panel with Total
Flooding Clean Gas Fire Suppression system.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 336

d) Installation of Total Flooding Clean Gas Fire Suppression system cylinders in

prefabricated enclosures. Fabrication and erection of piping necessary for Total
Flooding Clean Gas Fire Suppression system with proper supports.

e) Training for operation and maintenance of Total Flooding Clean Gas Fire
Suppression system.

f) Submission of Design calculations, Drawings, Technical specifications, Supply,

Installation, Testing and commissioning procedure for Total Flooding Clean Gas
Fire Suppression systems.

g) Implementation of safety at different stages of installation and commissioning.

h) Submission of warranty for efficient and specified performance of the Total

Flooding Clean Gas Fire Suppression system. In case, any item is found to
mal-operate or fails to provide specified performance during inspection/ testing
or during commissioning/ trial runs of the system or during warranty period, the
Contractor shall attend to the faulty/defective item and make necessary
repairs/ replacements to the satisfaction of the Department, without any extra
cost.

i) Total Flooding Clean Gas Fire Suppression systems shall be installed as per
the approved installation drawing.

2.12.2 Submission Of Technical Documents

a) Contractor shall submit for approval, The following documents anddrawings:
b) Technical literature & data sheets of Total Flooding Clean Gas Fire
Suppression systems and related accessories.
c) Design of Total Flooding Clean Gas Fire Suppression systems.
d) General sensor, panel location, cable routing & cylinder module location and
pipe line routing drawings and execution plan.
e) Total Flooding Clean Gas Fire Suppression systems, piping fabricationdrawings
and isometric drawings.
f) Installation sequence schedule along with installation drawings,interface study
details.

2.12.3 Fabrication, Installation & Testing

a) Contractor shall depute competent engineers with experience on similar works

to supervise installation works and sufficient skilled labour to ensure completion
of work in time.

b) An aesthetic cabin housing for Total Flooding Clean Gas Fire Suppression
system cylinder modules, Gas release panels at each location is also in the
scope of work.The scope also includes civil works required for completion of the
job.

c) After commissioning the system, all panel Keys, Passwords and software
required for programming devices shall be handed over to department in order
to ensure smooth functioning of the system.

d) Proper cable management system shall be used to route the cables in all the

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 337

locations.

2.12.4 Instruction to the Contractor

a) The items covered in this specification shall confirm to technical specifications,
latest revision of relevant standards and requirements in respect of accuracy,
performance, dimensions, materials of construction, manufacturing, safety,
reliability & quality assurance.

b) Total Flooding of Clean Gas Fire Suppression system and accessories to be

supplied under this package shall be new.

c) All necessary facilities including tools, testing equipment, instruments,

accessories, manpower assistance etc. shall be provided by the Contractor to
enable inspection by CPWD during its manufacture/ fabrication/ assembly.

d) The Contractor shall be responsible for adherence to all the applicable rules,
regulations & requirements of statutory bodies as required.

2.12.5 Compliance to Standards

All the items supplied or used shall be manufactured/ fabricated and tested
in accordance with the relevant Indian/International standards.
NFPA 2001 Standard on clean agent fire extinguishing system

UL 521 UL Standard for Heat Detectors for Fire Protective

Signaling Systems
LPS 1666 Direct Low-Pressure application for fixed fire
suppression

GCR 2016 Gas Cylinder Rules 2016

2.12.6 Systemdesign
a) Design of system shall be as per NFPA 2001-2015. The clean gas agent shall
be stored in a pressure not more than 50 bar. Design temperature shall be
taken as 21 Deg C (70 Deg Fahrenheit). All items like valves, actuators, Hoses,
cylinders, and piping manifolds, pressure switches, Arrangement for supervisory
switch connection for monitoring the cylinder pressure, nozzles, Annunciators,
evacuation sign boards, gas release panels etc., shall be UL/VDS/FM/LCPB
listed.
b) Piping network and nozzles shall be designed for minimum piping inside room
and effective distribution of extinguisher agent.
c) The clean gas fire suppression system of each room shall be interfaced with the
Fire Alarm system of the room. The system shall be operable automatically from
fire alarm panel upon detection of fire signal from two detectors simultaneously
of that location when the confirmed fire signal (Two detectors simultaneous
activation Logic) is received from fire detection & alarm system, automatic
clean gas total flooding system shall be triggered. Then complete premises,
shall be filled with gas and the fire shall be extinguished. High Sensitivity Laser
Smoke Detector shall be provided in these areas wherever Fire Suppression is
Provided.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 338

d) The total flooding clean gas fire suppression system shall also to be manually
operable from local gas release control panel located near each room to be
protected. Necessary hardware interfaces with necessary relay logics and the
status are to be provided.
e) To avoid possibility of inadvertent manual triggering, the system shall be
latched with safety key switch.
f) The control panel shall also have status monitoring of gas discharge actuator
and Audio-visual annunciation of gas discharge.
g) Clean gas cylinders, associated instruments including control panel and pipe
manifold shall be located inside suitable enclosure with door near protected
area entrance.
h) Clean gas total flooding system shall be actuated on receipt of confirmed Fire
Detection Signal by FDA system.
i) AHU related to this rooms shall be tripped as receipt of confirmed fire signal
from FDA panel via interface modules.

2.12.7 Equipment Schedule & Specification:

Eachsystem shall consistoffollowingmainitems/accessories:
a) Gas cylinder with gas and control valves (Cylinders shall have PESO
approval).
b) Actuators: Electrical, Pneumatic
c) Flow switch
d) Supervisory switch for monitoring cylinder pressure.
e) Cylinder manifold along with interface Hoses and check valves.
f) Gas nozzles
g) Discharge hose
h) Pressure Gauge
i) Evacuation board
j) Cylinder trolley – one only for all systems
k) MRPS (Manually Release Push Switch)
l) Inhibitor
m) CS Seamless pipes: ASTM A 106 Gr. B (Schedule of pipe as per Design
calculations)
n) CS Pipe Fittings-Forged: ASTM A 234 WPB (Above 40NB Sizes: Butt welded
type, below 40NB Size: Socket welding type)
o) CS Flanges: ASTM A 105 Raised face with serrations. (Class rating of Flanges
as per Design calculations)
p) Control panel and related electrical/ electronic hardware.
q) 24V DC regulated linear power supply at each facility.
r) Enclosure for housing cylinder bank, manifold and gas release panel for each
location.
In addition to above, Any other items/ accessories which are required for
completion of the work and commissioning of the system are also in the scope
of work.

2.12.8 Cylinders:
Cylinders shall be seamless construction in accordance with the requirements of
NFPA / Relevant BIS standards. Cylinder neck shall be threaded to suit the type of
valves.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 339

2.12.9 Actuators:
Electrical / Pneumatic actuators, manual actuators, all actuators shall be as per
NFPA.

2.12.10 Flow Switch

Flow switch is provided on discharge pipe and is connected to the control panel to
provide indication of “GAS DISCHARGED”. Necessary logic circuit shall be built to
derive the status to local control panel and also remote- control panel.

2.12.11 Cylinder Manifold:

Manifold is a high-pressure common line. The outlet of each gas cylinder
valve is connected by means of high-pressure hoses to the manifold, where a non-
return valve is provided for each connection.

2.12.12 Gas Nozzles:

Type: Pendent Nozzles, Suitable for Uniform Agent Distribution.Material: Brass.

2.12.13 Discharge Hose:

Connection of individual gas cylinder with Manifold is by means of High- pressure
discharge hose. This enables the leakage free connection of individual cylinder to
the manifold.

2.12.14 Pressure Gauges:

The gas cylinders are pressurized with the help of Nitrogen. Due to various reasons,
there could be minor leakage from the cylinder, Pressure gauges as per IS 3624-
1987 are provided to monitor the pressure.

2.12.15 Evacuation Board:

One evacuation board in each premises, shall be provided. As soon as fire is
detected by detector, Control panel shall initiate an audio-visual alarm and shall
switch on the signal of evacuation board with the warning “EVACUATE
IMMEDIATELY, GAS UNDER RELEASE”.

2.12.16 Manually Release Push Switch (MRPS):

Manually Release Push Switch is also to be provided for the system. This consists
of break glass type emergency push button unit. The depression of Push button
shall initiate the system into fire condition with the audio-visual alarms at the control
panel and separate indications of MRPS. In this operation, however time lag and
electrical interlocking shall automatically over ride and the discharge of gas shall be
immediate.

2.12.17 Inhibitor:
Auto gas system can be operated in Auto mode or in Manual mode. When a
confirmed fire signal is received by the control panel, it initiates the signal for
release of gas into the affected premise. Since the discharge of gas is purposefully
delayed say up to 60 seconds, the persons present in the premise may decide to
stop the release of gas, if fire is of minor nature or due to any other reason. This is
done with the help of Inhibitor.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 340

2.12.18 Interconnecting Cable

2C X 1.5 Sq.mm FRLS, PVC insulated copper conductor, shielded, armoured cable
with cable management system shall be used. The colour of the cable shall
Preferably be RED and shall have Tags at regular intervals. Hooters, Junctions
Boxes and Other accessories required as per relevant standards/codes.

2.12.19 Pipes, Fittings, Flanges, Check Valves etc.

a) Pipes to be used for clean gas fire suppression system network shall be of
seamless type, schedule to suit the system requirement. (ASTM A106 Gr. B)
b) All Fittings shall be as per ASTM A 234 WPB, class rating to suit the system
requirement. Flanges shall be forged, as per ASTM A 105, class rating to suit
the system requirement.

2.12.20 Control Panel:

a) In the automatic operation, the control panel shall provide a 24V DC output to
the electrical/pneumatic actuator of the first cylinder. Subsequently all cylinders
in manifold will be activated by pilot. The automatic system shall be initiated by
simultaneous activation of two detectors provided in the area to be protected,
the control panel, which provides an audiovisual alarm in case of receipt of a
signal from any of the detector in areas to be protected.

b) Control panel audible alarm may be silenced at the panel, though the condition
of fire continues. When silenced the control panel provides a low intensity
audible alarm but serving to indicate the cancellation of the intermittent fire
alarm. Control Panel shall provide an adjustable time lag from 0 to 60 seconds
from the receipt of signal to the actual discharge of gas. All the necessary
cabling and interfaces are to be done as per standard. The control panel shall
have control and status of actuator and status of gas discharge. The necessary
provision shallbe available for extending the status to remote control room.

c) The Gas release panel shall be interfaced with fire alarm panel.

d) The scope of contract includes supply of required cable for interfacing Gas
release panel with Main fire alarm panel, laying, casing cabinets for routing
the cables, termination junction boxes and other required items /accessories
required for completion of the installation.

2.12.21 Integrated system testing:

a) Commissioning of the entire installation like integrated testing with Fire Alarm
system, Gas release panel testing in Auto mode/Manual mode, Gas Abort
station operation, Manual call point operation, Solenoid operation etc. shall be
done in the presence of the Engineer -in- charge or his representative.

b) Flow test shall be carried with Compressed air/Nitrogen gas to ensure that there
is no blockage of nozzles.

c) All necessary instrumentation, equipment, materials and man power required for
testing shall be provided by the Contractor.

d) The Contractor shall record all tests and system calibrations and a copy of
these results shall be retained in Log Book.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 341

2.12.22 Specifications for Maintenance of Clean Gas Fire Suppression System

during Three years defect liability period.
a) Servicing and undertaking preventive maintenance for a period of three years
for the clean gas fire suppression system panel and alarm signals.

b) Necessary man power, tools, consumables like smoke generator for testing
detectors, and test instruments etc. for maintenance of the system is in the
scope of Contractor.

c) During the period, quarterly visits shall be made by the OEM. During the defect
liability period, false alarms/emergency calls should be attended immediately on
receipt of information either from CPWD/ ESIC.

d) During every quarterly visit, scope of work shall include but not limited to the
following:

i. Check the health of Local control panel.

ii. Complete check-up of wiring, local control panel, Simulation checks of

detectors, remote indicators, junction box, Solenoid valve of total flooding
clean gas fire suppression system etc.

iii. Simulation checks of safety interlocks of clean gas fire suppression system
solenoids including AHU tripping from local control panels.

iv. Functional checks of Main/Redundant UPS and DC regulated power supply

change over circuit.End to end functional checks.Testing/Simulation checks of
alarms at Gas discharge Panels and repeater panels if any.

v. Checking the condition of the Piping manifolds, Hoses, clean gas Cylinders,
monitoring of cylinder pressure, safety burst disc, electronic control head /
Solenoid, pressure operated control head, flexible hose, strap, non-return
valve (NRV) and safety cap etc.

2.13 Automatic Fire Suppression system for Electrical Panels (With Heat Detection
Tube)

This section is for an Automatic Fire Detection and Clean Agent Fire Suppression
Systems by use of Linear Pneumatic Heat Detection Tube as ‘Direct’ Gas Flooding
System for Electric Panels. The scope of work includes design, supply, installation,
testing and commissioning of Automatic Clean Agent fire suppression System for
All electrical panels complete with fire detection tube, cylinder, valves, integration
with Main Fire Alarm Control Panel for status monitoring etc.
a) Arrangement of Clean Gas Agent for flooding inside the panels.

b) Audio-visual annunciation devices for indicating the incidence of fire.

c) The electrical panel fire suppression system shall be complete with Direct
‘Clean’ Gas storage cylinders of required capacities, linear fire detection tubing,
filling of gas, end-of-line adaptors, pressure switches, control equipment and all
necessary accessories and push in fittings to form a complete and working
installation to protect all-Electrical panels
in case of fire.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 342

d) The system so provided shall have an interface with the Fire Alarm Control
Panel. In case of fire in the concerned Panel, indication of Fire detection and
Gas discharge status should be available in the Fire Alarm Control Panel.

e) All installations shall conform to BIS requirements wherever applicable.

Wherever relevant BIS standards are not available, then the NFPA
requirements shall be met.

f) The clean agent used should be eco-friendly like HFC227ea/ HFC236 / NOVEC
1230.

g) Each Clean Agent extinguishing unit, when installed, shall be a self- contained
system, equipped with its own automatic (non-electric) detection system, which
when actuated, automatically shall release the suppression agent into the
Electric panel.

h) The Clean Agent Automatic Direct System shall consist of the following major
components: Clean Agent Cylinder, Valve Assembly, Cylinder Mounting
Bracket; Fire Detector, Actuation and Discharge Fire Tubing Fittings and
Pressure Switch.

i) The Clean Agent Automatic Direct System shall utilize flexible tubing that shall
be attached to the top of the cylinder valve. This tubing shall be pressurized
with dry nitrogen, which is temperature sensitive, and it shall act as a
continuous linear thermal detector that ruptures upon Flame impingement.
Once the detector tubing is ruptured forming a nozzle at the rupture point, the
Clean Agent flows through, distributing the extinguishing agent only into the
protected area. Upon system actuation, the pressure switch shall be used to
indicate system discharge, shutdown ventilation, or shut-off electrical power
etc.

j) The Clean Agent Automatic Direct System shall be designed and listed as an
Automatic unit. No manual or electric means is to be required for simultaneous
actuation of multiple systems. Only 1 unit shall be used to protect one hazard
and shall not be combined to protect a larger size hazard.

k) The Clean Agent shall be stored in pressurized cylinders and the ambient
operating temperature range for all the cylinders and all other system
components shall be from 10 Deg C to 50 Deg C

l) Each container shall be equipped with a nickel–plated brass valve, a pressure

gauge to monitor container pressure, and a quarter-turn ball valve for
connection to the Detection Tubing. In addition, the container valve shall be
equipped with a pressure relief (rupture disc) device complying to Indian
Standards.

m) A wall-mounted bracket shall be used to mount the container/valve assembly in

a vertical (upright) position and each bracket shall be with two integral quick-
clamp straps.
n) The tubing shall perform the three functions of heat detection, System
Activation, and Clean Agent discharge. The tubing shall be installed throughout
the Electrical Panel volume, with one end connected to the top of the Clean
Agent container valve.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 343

o) A pressure switch shall be connected at the end of line of the Detection Tubing
to monitor system pressure, system actuation and / or to energize / de-energize
electrically operated equipment. There shall be provision to connect the
pressure switch to some other device(s) to alert personnel in the event of a
system discharge.

2.13.1 The following shall be the design requirement

A sufficient amount of Clean Agent liquid to convert into Clean Agent HFC227ea
/HFC226/NOVEC 1230 shall be provided.
The contractor shall submit the calculations to verify suitability of the volume of the
clean agent. The following shall be considered during the design calculations:

a) Volume of hazard area.

b) Specific volume of Clean Agent.

c) Discharge time and flow rates.

d) Design concentration and design factors.

e) Detector/discharge tubing placement.

f) Interface system with main control fire alarm system and , shall be provided.
g) Provide total flooding of Clean Agent concentration by volume as per NFPA-
2001.
h) When the additional limitations of hazard volume, area coverage, maximum
height, design concentration, agent quantity, detection tubing arrangement etc.
are also met, the system installation shall comply with the design requirements,
NFPA-2001.

i) All doors and holes in the enclosed / equipment shall be closed or sealed to
maintain the tightness of enclosure.

j) The system shall have means to close the exhaust fans if installed in the panel
at the time of system activation.

k) The main supply of panel can be shut off with the system, if so, required by the
Engineer-in-Charge.

2.13.2 Detection Tubing

a) The automatic system shall become a self-contained, self-actuating unit and

shall not require an external source of power or electricity.
b) The system shall utilize flexible tubing that shall be attached to the container
valve. This tubing shall be pressurized with Dry Nitrogen to 150 psi at 70 Deg
F. The tubing shall be temperature sensitive and shall act as a continuous linear
thermal detector that shall rupture upon flame impingement.

c) Once the detection tubing is ruptured, forming a nozzle at the rupture point, it
shall allow the Clean Agent through the Nozzle into the protected area.

2.13.3 System Components

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 344

a) PESO approved Cylinder of steel construction with standard red epoxy paint
finish. Cylinders shall be accompanied by original manufacturers test certificate
confirming the contents of the cylinder and filled in PESO Approved plant.

b) Each cylinder shall have pressure gauge and integrated low-pressure switch
to provide visua land electrical supervision of the cylinder pressure.The low-
pressure switch shall be wired to the Audio- Visual
Alarmtoprovideaudibleandvisualtroublealarm in the event of drop of pressure.
The pressure gauge shall be color coded to provide an easy,visual in
dication of cylinder pressure.

c) The cylinder shall be equipped with brass valve, pressure gauge (to monitor
agentpressure) and isolation valve for maintenance purposes. The cylinder
valve shall be with a safety burst disc of 28 Bar rupture Pressure.

d) Furnishaweldedsteelbracketwitheachcylinderassemblyforholdingthecyli nders
inasaddlewitha front bracket piece that secures the cylinders.Cylinder shall be
provided with a certificate provided by the company who chargewith the gas
mixture.

e) The Detection Tube shall be ULapproved red / black in Colour and pressurized
as per system design requirement.Theintegrated PressureSwitch (CE/UL/LPCB
marked) should be integral part of valve havingNO /NC contact.

f) The control box enclosure shall be at least IP 54 rated from OEM of gas
suppression system provider complying standard. The unit shall have LED
indication for system Healthy, Mains Healthy and Gas Release. The unit shall
also have signal silence button. Third Party test reports for IP and
Functionality of the system to be submitted for approvalcomplete as required.

2.13.4 Installation
a) Thesystemshallbeinstalled as per approved shop drawings.The installation/final
connections shall be carried out indirect supervision of representative of
Manufacturer/ specialized agency. Cylinder shall be located so that they are
not subjected to mechanical,chemical or other
damage.

b) All system components shall be capable of with standing heat offire and sever e
weather conditions. DetectionTube to be properly secured inside the panel by
Clips/ Tieetc. The Detection Tube out side the panel should be protected in
flexible conduit.

c) Inspectioncertificateshouldbepastedoncylinderclearlymarkingnextdued ateof
inspection.

2.13.5 Testing & acceptance

Testing of the system shall be done at site by holding the Nitrogen Pressure at 14
Bar into the detection tube for 24 hrs. to check for any pressure leakage in the
system. If there is no pressure leakage of the system, then the installed system is
accepted as healthy and the isolation valve shall be opened.

2.13.6 Documentations
Contractor shall prepare shop drawings of automatic Linear Pneumatic Heat

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 345

Detection tube fire suppression system for approval of EIC beforecommencement of

work / procurement of any items.
a) General arrangement (GA) drawing clearly show routing of tube inside the panel
as well as in equipment compartments as per system design requirements,
location & fixing arrangement of cylinder & its system components, cut out
details in panels etc.
b) Technical leaflets / specifications. On completion of work, the contractor shall
submit as built drawings. The drawings shall be Computer aided design
drawings (CADD).

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 346

C-3 Automatic Fire alarm system & PA System

3.0 Technical Specifications for Intelligent Addressable Fire Alarm System

3.1 The scope of work shall include designing supplying and installing of Intelligent
Addressable Fire Alarm System and Public Address System. The work under this
system shall consist of furnishing all materials, equipment, appliances and labour
necessary to install the complete Fire Alarm System, complete with Main Fire
Alarm Control Panel, Sensors, Sounders, Strobes, Manual Call Stations, Relays
etc. for interfacing with other systems in Main Hospital building and other service
areas as required. These technical specifications shall be read along with the
General Conditions for all E&M works given under subhead C-B.

3.1.1 The facility shall have an emergency voice alarm communication system. Digitally
stored message sequences shall notify the building occupants that a fire or life
safety condition has been reported. Message generator(s) shall be capable of
automatically distributing up to eight (8) simultaneous, unique messages to
appropriate audio zones within the facility based on the type and location of the
initiating event. The Fire Command Centre (FCC) shall also support Emergency
manual voice announcement capability for both system-wide or selected audio
zones, and shall include provisions for the system operator to override automatic
messages system-wide or in selected zones.

3.1.2 The system shall support additional, alternate Fire Command Centers, which shall
be capable of simultaneous monitoring of all system events. Alternate Fire
Command Centers shall also support an approved method of transferring the
control functions to an alternate Fire Command Centre when necessary. All Fire
Command Centers shall be individually capable of assuming Audio Command
functions such as Emergency Paging, audio zone control functions, and
Firefighter's Telephone communication functions.

a) Each designated zone shall transmit separate and different alarm, supervisory
and trouble signals to the Fire Command Center (FCC) and designated
personnel in other buildings at the site via a multiplex communication
network.Any opening/chasing in the wall/ceiling required for the installation
shall be made good in appropriate manner.
b) The Contractor shall also undertake to control and monitor the ventilation and
other systems from the Fire Alarm Panel through the use of Addressable Output
/ Input Modules.
c) The building shall be designated as multiple fire zones with each area forming
one or more programmed zones. All wiring shall be done using 2 x 1.5 mm2
Fire Survival armoured copper conductor cable.
d) Alarm, trouble and supervisory signals from all intelligent reporting devices shall
be encoded on NFPA Class A Signaling Line Circuits (SLC). Initiating Device
Circuits (IDC), Notification Appliance Circuits (NAC) shall be wired in NFPA
Class A.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 347

e) Alarm signals arriving at the FACP shall not be lost following power failure
(or outage) until the alarm signal is processed and recorded.
f) Two-way emergency telephone communication circuits shall be supervised for
open and short circuit conditions.

i. Two-way emergency telephone (Fire Fighter Telephone) communication

shall be supported between the Audio Command Center and up to thirty
(30) remote Fire Fighter's Telephone locations simultaneously on a
conference in multiple FFT Risers.

ii. Means shall be provided to connect FFT voice communications to the

speaker circuits in order to allow voice paging over the speaker circuit from
a telephone handset.

iii. The digital audio message generator shall be of reliable, non- moving parts,
and support the digital storage up to 32 minutes of tones and emergency
messages, shall support programming options to string audio segments
together to create up to 1000 messages, or to loop messages and parts of
messages to repeat for pre-determined cycles indefinitely.

3.1.3 Basis Of Design

Intelligent Fire Alarm System (IFAS) shall be provided to effect total control over the
life safety services required in the building. The IFAS shall be of the digital,
distributed processing, real-time, multi-tasking, multi-user and multi-location type.

The IFAS provided shall be able to tie up the following Mechanical, Electrical &
Low Voltage Services into an integrated system.
a) Air Handling Units, Fire Dampers.
b) Staircase pressurization fans, Lift shafts and lift lobbies pressurization
fans.
c) Public address system.
d) Lifts
e) Smoke evacuation system
f) Firefighting/ Fire Suppression system

The system shall be provided with Addressable fire alarm initiating,

annunciating and control devices. The addressable and intelligent system
shall be such that smoke detectors, thermal sensors, manual call points,
etc., can be identified with point address.

In the event of a fire alarm, but not in a fault condition, the following action
shall be performed automatically.

a. The System Alarm LED on the main fire alarm control panel shall flash.

b. A local sounder in the control panel shall be sounded.

c. The LCD display on the main fire alarm control panel shall indicate all
information associated with Fire Alarm conditions including the type of alarm
point and its location within the premises.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 348

d. History storage equipment shall log the information associated with the Fire
Alarm Control Panel condition, along with the time and date of occurrence.

e. All system output programs assigned via control-by-event programs that are to
be activated by a particular point in alarm shall be executed, and the
associated system outputs (alarm notification appliances and/or relays) shall
be activated.

f. The audio portion of the system shall direct the proper signal (tone or voice) to
the appropriate speaker circuit.

g. All lifts initiated through the system shall automatically be returned to Ground
Floor.

h. Air handling units on affected floors shall automatically be switched OFF and
simultaneously respective fire dampers shall also be closed.

j. Staircase / Lift Lobby pressurization fans shall be put on.

k. Toilet exhaust fans on affected floors shall be put off.

l. Pre-recorded alarm messages shall be played through the interface with

Public Address system.

m. Startsmoke evacuation system.

3.1.4 General Instructions

Fire Alarm System shall be

i. Protected from moisture by using appropriate coverings.

ii. Sequence work to avoid interferences with building finishes and installation
of other products.
iii. For ease of service, all panel I/O wiring terminal blocks shall be removable,
plug-in types and have sufficient capacity wire. Terminal blocks that are
permanently fixed are not acceptable.

3.1.5 Standards

The design, supply and installation and testing of the entire fire alarm system shall
conform to EN 54 / BS: 5839 or NFPA 71 and 72. The detectors shall conform to
relevant IS codes for Fire Alarm Systems, Local Bye-laws and National Building
Code, CPWD Specifications Part-VI (Fire Alarm System).

All components of AFAS shall be new and suitable for the environment of
installation at site. These shall be satisfactory in operation at voltage
deviated by ±10 % from the nominal value.

3.1.6 Works to be done by the Contractor:

In addition to supply, installation, testing and commissioning of all the equipment
and materials,the following works shall be deemed to be included within the scope
of work to be executed by the contractor.
(i) Loopearthlingas required.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 349

(ii) All minor building work such as cutting and making good thedamages.
(iii) Necessarytestingequipment.
(iv) Approval from the concerned fire authoritiesas may be required as per the
local Fire Regulations and by elaws.

3.1.7 Painting and protection:

Metal work of all equipment to be supplied (except the detectors) shall be given the
final coat of paint over the primer after necessary treatment at the works before
dispatch All damages to painting during transport and installation shall be setright or
repainted to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge before handing over.

3.1.8 Guarantee:
The contractor shall guarantee the entire AFAS installation as per specifications
both for components and for system as a whole. All equipment shall be guaranteed
for Three years from the date of acceptance against performanceor break
down due to defective design, manufacture and/or installation. The installation shall
be covered by the condition that the whole installation or any part the reoffound
defective with in the years from the date of taking over shall be replaced or
repaired by the contractor free of charge to the entire satisfaction of Engineer-in-
Charge. In case it is felt by the department that undue delay is being caused by
the contractor in doing this, the same will be got done by the department at the risk
& cost of the contractor.
The warranty shall cover the following: -
(i) Quality strength and performance of materials used.
(ii) Safe mechanical and electrical stress on all parts under all specified
conditions of operation.
(iii) Satisfactory operation during the DL Pperiod.
(iv) Performance figures and other particulars asspecified by the tenderer under
schedule of guaranteed technical particulars.

3.1.9 After sales service:

The contractor shall ensure adequate and prompt after sales services in theform of
maintenance personnel and spares as and when required with a view
to minimize the break down period. Particular attention shall be given to ensure that all
spares are easily available duringthenormallifeoftheinstallation.

3.2 Fire Alarm System

a) The Fire Alarm System shall confirm to EN54, BS: 5839 or NFPA 71/72 in
respect of design and installation, and it shall give Audio/Visual Alarm Signals
when there is rise in temperature in case of Heat Detector or while measuring
Smoke Density in case of Smoke Detector, while it exceeds the pre-set limit.
The system shall give pinpoint location of fire with warning system and voice
communication for commands and instruction if required.
b) The system shall have a microprocessor-based control and monitoring facility.
The basic function of the system shall be able to achieve pinpoint location of
alarm indication.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 350

c) It shall be possible to program each loop with up to 99 Detectors & 99 Modules

in a circuit.
d) Annunciation facility shall also be inbuilt into the FACP, the panel being able to
initiate alarm signal for any particular zone.
e) The system shall be fully supervised for all fault conditions with distinctive alarm
operated for fault and fire conditions. Test buttons and software features shall
be provided to test the electronic circuits and Detector health.
f) The FACP shall be so programmed that when a particular Detector or group of
detectors gives a fire signal the FACP should be able to trip an individual AHU
automatically. In case of Fire in an area handled by an AHU the FACP shall be
able to trigger a Relay that shall shut off the AHU through an additional contact
provided in the AHU panel by the contractor.
g) The FACP shall also be able to operate the fire suppression system in high-risk
areas automatically upon receiving input warnings from one or more VESDA
(very early smoke detection and alarm) units located in that area.
h) The FACP shall have facility to connect addressable Input / Output Devices in
the peripheral RS 485 bus. These may be input card, relay card, sounder card,
passive/active repeater panels and mimic driver cards.
i) The system shall be based on an “Open Protocol” to ensure flexibility of using
Sensors / Detectors of an alternate manufacturer, in case the user requires
such an option at a later date.
3.2.1 Inventory

Inventory of Fire Alarm system is prepaired by Contractor & Shall be design,

prepare drawings and layouts for Fire Alarm System and get it approved by the
Engineer-in- charge.

3.2.2 Fire Alarm Control Panel (FACP)

This refers to the microprocessor-based panel that shall be connected to the
various sensors/devices by means of 2 wire loops. The FACP shall be able to
supervise individual detectors for proper performance as well as to give pinpoint
location of Fire or Fault Alarm and initiate Alarms as well as facility for cutting off of
AHU’s and Electrical Power is also to be included. The Fire Alarm Control Panel
shall be microprocessor based Addressable, Control Unit which shall control all
Analogue Addressable Detectors, Manual Call Stations and Switching Systems
(for disconnecting AHU and power supply to Lifts etc.) connected to it.

a) The panel should work on Dual Redundant control module. i.e., if the main
panel experiences a system fault, the DRCM automatically switches all field
wiring to the redundant panel. If the mains incoming supply fails, an internal
feeder selector card switches to a backup mains supply.

b) All addressable units shall be connected to the FACP through the Loop Cards
and shall be addressed through individual numbers. The FACP shall be able to
obtain analogue value for all detectors in the circuit through a pulsed digitalized
current data. The FACP shall be able to analyze all analogue inputs from all
addressable units, and through its own software and ambient level screening
the FACP shall be able to identify fire, possible fire or fault conditions. The unit
supervision shall be dynamic and continuous.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 351

c) The FACP shall itself have loop card built in. The capacity of the Panel and
number of loops shall be designed by the contractor based on the total
detectors and devices. All the networked panels shall display all the events
occurring anywhere in the system. Each FACP on the network shall effectively
function as a repeater panel as well.

d) The FACP shall also give adequate warning signal whenever there is dust
accumulation in detectors, and up to the point of its replacement it should be
possible to change the level of ambient alarm calibration condition either by the
use of software program operable by the owneror by resetting the detector.

e) Short / Open circuit units shall also be reported at the FACP. In such cases, the
system through the use of fault isolators shall be able to isolate that segment
between the two fault isolators. The missing Detectors/Devices shall also be
reported at the FACP with identification of the location.

f) When an alarm condition is sensed at the FACP from a smoke or heat detector,
a delay time/alarm verification period shall be started. If the sensor is still in
alarm after the delay time expires, an alarm condition is reported. The delay
time shall be adjustable from 0 to 990 secs.

g) The FACP shall have the facility to perform walk test such that an operation can
be periodically checked out for all initiating devices. As each device is placed
into alarm, the FACP shall print the condition and automatically rest the device.
Audible devices shall be initiated, if required, at a pre-programmed time. If a
zone is inadvertently left in walk test mode, it shall automatically reset to normal
after the idle time is exceeded. During the walk test, the zones other than the
programmed zones shall be under continuous supervision (normal mode). In
case of any alarm initiated by detector/devices, the walk test shall get
terminated automatically.

h) Programming functions shall include alarm/trouble type assignment, point

descriptor assignment, alarm message assignment, etc.

i) Programming may be carried out from the FACP keyboard or utilizing the
approved PC setup software via laptop/desktop computer.

j) The FACP shall have a minimum 300-character graphics/ LCD display with
touch screen or other keypad and minimum 4000 events history log in the non
volatile memory (EPROM), power supply unit (230 ± 5% V,50 hz), 48 hrs back-
up with 24-volt sealed maintenance free batteries with automatic charger. In
case of testing of the system from the FACP the Display shall be able to give
readouts of analogue value of alldetectors being tested. The FACP shall also be
able to carry out continuous self-monitoring when in normal condition.

k) The FACP shall have facility for in-built or external printer coupled to the FACP,
which shall log all events with time. The printout shall clearly indicate the event -
Fire/Pre-Alarm/Fault etc. with the unit address and time.

l) The FACP shall also be able to discriminate between false alarms and fire
conditions, as well as priority selection of alarm in case alarm activates in two or
more remotely located units simultaneously. In such cases, the Manual Call
stations shall have the highest priority.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 352

m) The FACP also is able to actuate switching systems automatically in case of

Fire condition that of AHU’s and power supply or other systems such as Fire
Suppression Systems.

n) The System shall be fail safe and adequate safe guards should be under taken
that in the event of a failure of a part of the System, it shall not handicap the
complete System. The Loop Cards shall be of Modular Construction.

o) The Contractor shall undertake the responsibility of the complete installation,

commissioning, user trials, training and maintenance of the System, installation
of System Software into the FACP. The Software shall be such so as to be
easily operated by the Client’s Personnel and secured against Software errors,
ability to be upgraded so as to incorporate more features at a later date.

p) The FACP shall have its own Battery Backup of a minimum of 24 hours in
normal condition and then half an hour in alarm condition. The backup time
calculation shall be done as per IS 2189 standards. The Battery shall be 2*12V
(24V) DC with required AH capacity and of sealed lead acid rechargeable
maintenance free type, housed inside the FACP.

q) It shall be able to withstand temperature variations from 0˚ centigrade to 50˚

centigrade. Further, Relative Humidity (non-condensing type) 10 to 90% shall
not hamper its performance.

r) The FACP shall be totally enclosed dust and vermin proof type made of
minimum 16-gauge dust inhibited sheet with even baked finish. The FACP shall be
of completely solid stage design.

s) The FACP shall have any one of these approvals: EN / UL / FM.

t) The system shall be designed such that it shall be possible to add at least 20% of
the Detectors for future expansion without extra cost on the panel.

u) The FACP shall be capable of being networked (future expansion) with other
similar FACPs located at different parts of the premises through a single RS485
bus.

v) The FACP shall have provision for interfacing with the Public Address System.

w) The panel should have the facility to interface with an automatic two- channel
programmable speech dialer for verbal reporting of fire. It shall be able to call four
telephone numbers per channel. The programmable speech dialer shall have
two alarm inputs and shall provide listen-in capabilities through the built-in
microphone. The dialer shall have a built-in keypad for easy operation,
programming and voice recording.

x) The panel shall have facility to connect printer to printout log and facility to have
seamless integration with analog/digital voice evacuation system and shall be
complete with all accessories. The panel shall be compatible with open protocol
BACnet/ Modbus over IP complete as per specifications

3.2.3 Loop
A loop shall be capable of supporting not less than 240 devices (including
detectors) and minimum 120 detectors per loop and loop length up to 2 km,
network communication card. The loop card shall have built-in short circuit

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 353

isolators to accommodate Class A wiring.

3.2.4 Addressable Detectors
The Detectors shall be Analogue Addressable type. The chamber should be
easily removable for the purpose of easy maintenance. The address programming
shall be done through the decade switch in the Detector. The Detectors shall have
a common base to allow easy interchange of various types of Detectors. Address
setting by DIL Switch or through Hand Held Programmer shall not be acceptable.
A. Optical Thermal/ Multi criteria detector
a) All detectors are fitted with plug-in system type connections, from the
maintenance and compatibility point of views. An alarm release will not
affect a detector’s good functioning. After resetting the alarm, the detector will
resume operations without readjustment of any kind.
b) The detector shall be able to sense incipient fire by detecting the presence of
visible and invisible products of combustion. The detector shall be suitable for
low voltage (15 to 32 V DC) two wires supply. The sensitivity of the detector
shall not vary with change in ambient temperature, humidity, pressure or
voltage variation.
c) The detector shall be suitably protected against dust accumulation/ ingress
and it shall be free from maintenance and functionally tested at intervals. All
detectors shall be identical in construction design and characteristic to
facilitate easy replacement.
d) The coverage per smoke detector shall strictly follow IS 2189 standards. It
shall be possible to connect Smoke Detector with Heat Detector or Manual
Push Button in the same circuit. The sensitivity of detector shall be set from
the FACP to suit the site requirement.
e) It shall have in-built locking mechanism to check the removal and pilferage of
the detector.
f) The Photoelectric type Smoke Detector shall be Analogue Addressable type
and be able to send analogue output to the FACP regarding its condition. It
shall be able to communicate with the FACP by the pulses emitted from the
FACP. The detector should be programmed using a decade or rotary switch.
g) The base of the Detector shall be electronics free and interchangeable with
other smoke or heat detectors. It shall be able to withstand temperature
variations from 0 degree centigrade to 60 degrees centigrade. Further, Relative
Humidity (non-condensing type) 10 to 90% shall not hamper its performance.
h) The Detector shall have EN or UL/FM approval. It shall be possible to test the
Detectors working both from the FACP as well as locally. It shall be possible to
mount the detectors in Duct Casting Unit for sampling of Supplying Air from
the AHUs.
i) Response indicators with LEDs shall be provided for all the Above False Ceiling
Detectors / for Closed Rooms.
j) The detector shall have LEDs for 360 degree viewing angle. LED on the
detector shall blink each time the sensor is scanned by the FACP. If the FACP
determines that the sensor is in alarm, the FACP will command the sensor LED to
remain on to indicate the same. Each sensor will be capable of being tested
for alarm via command from the FACP. Each sensor shall respond to FACP
scan with the information about its type foridentification.
k) It shall be possible to connect loop powered base sounders on the detector
loop.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 354

B. Heat Detector
a) Heat detector shall provide temperature measurement when it reaches pre-
alarm in normal course. However, the operator shall have the option of calling
up the temperature measured by the specific detector as and when required.
b) It shall have in-built locking mechanism to check the removal and pilferage of
the detector.
c) The heat detector shall be Analogue Addressable type and be able to send
analogue output to the FACP regarding its condition. It shall be able to
communicate with the FACP by the pulses emitted from the FACP. The
detector should be programmed using a decade or rotary switch.
d) The base of the Detector shall be electronics free and interchangeable with
other smoke or heat detectors. It shall be able to withstand temperature
variations from - 0 degree centigrade to 60 degrees centigrade. Further,
Relative Humidity (non-condensing type) 10 to 90% shall not hamper its
performance. The voltage rating shall be from 15V to 32V DC though the
voltage may be changed depending upon the Manufacturer’s standards.
e) The Detector shall have EN or UL/FM approval. It shall be possible to test the
Detectors working both from the FACP as well as locally by means of magnet to
do a Functional Test.
f) The detector shall have LEDs for 360 degree viewing angle. LED on the
detector shall blink each time the sensor is scanned by the FACP. If the FACP
determines that the sensor is in alarm, the FACP will command the sensor LED to
remain on to indicate the same. Each sensor will be capable of being tested
for alarm via command from the FACP. Each sensor shall respond to FACP
scan with the information about its typefor identification.
g) It shall be possible to connect loop powered base sounders on the detector
loop.

C. High Sensitivity Laser Smoke/ Dual ray Detectors.

a) Laser Smoke detector will provide extremely high Sensitivity to fire
conditions, by detecting earliest particle of Combustion.
b) Detector should detect both fast flaming and slow smoldering fires.
c) The detector should have different sensitivity levels from (0.07- 6.56%
/m).

d) Detector shall have LEDs for 360 degree viewing angle. LED on the detector
shall blink each time the sensor is scanned by the FACP. If the FACP
determines that the sensor is in alarm, the FACP will Command the sensor
LED to remain on to indicate the same. Each Sensor will be capable of being
tested for alarm via command from the FACP. Each sensor shall respond to
FACP scan with the Information about its type for identification.
e) it shall be possible to connect loop powered base sounders on the Detector
loop. The sounder shall have a sound output of at least 85db and will not
require a separate cable for power supply.

f) The Detector should be more sensitive than normal Smoke Detector.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 355

g) These shall be provided in High-Risk areas like Substation, Electrical Rooms,

Server Room, MGPS Room. And need to be Integrated with Gas based Fire
Suppression System for quenching the Arc / Fire in those areas.

D. Addressable Beam Detector (Infra-RED-LIGHT detector)

a) The Beam Detectors shall be long range, projected beam type smoke
detectors which consist of a separate transmitter and receiver and evaluating
unit integrated into a compact housing.

b) The transmitter shall emit an invisible pulsed infra-red beam to receiver when
beam is obscured beyond selected threshold (20%, 30%,
........70% obscuration) by smoke, the receiver shall signal an alarm. If the
beam is completely blocked, receiver shall signal a trouble.

c) It shall provide selectable sensitivity and alarm response time for flexibility of
installations.

d) It shall have a range coverage from 9 mtrs. to 100 mtrs. with upto 16- 17 mtrs.
spacing between adjacent detectors on smooth, flat ceilings.

e) It shall have automatic environment compensation. These detectors shall be

installed in the main entrance atrium with Double height.

3.2.5 Manual Call Stations

a) The Manual Call Station shall be addressable type with Input Modulesto define
the address for each station. The function shall be similar tothat of conventional
Manual Call Point and should be resettable without replacing the glass.
b) The manual station shall be a press to break type. The device shall be red in
color and suitable for surface or flush mounting. Manual stations shall be
interfaceable to an addressable input module that can be accommodated within
the device. The manual station shall have normally open fire alarm and
annunciator contacts and these contacts shall close on activation. Contacts
shall remain closed until station is manually reset.

c) The Manual Call Station shall be fully addressable with its own addressable
module and operated by digitized signals from the FACP. The voltage range
shall be from 15V to 32V. It shall have protection as per IP33. The operating
temperature range shall be from 0 degree C to 60-degree C. Relative Humidity
(non-condensing) range of performance parameters shall be between 10 to
90%.

3.2.6 Fire Alarm Repeater / Annunciator Panel

a) The Alarm Repeater/Annunciator Panel shall display fire/fault messages
simultaneously with the FACP. It shall be capable of interfacing with the FACP
on a single RS 485 Bus. The panel shall be capable of operating on 24 V DC
supply.
b) The panel shall have backlit type alphanumeric LCD display, which shall display
date, time & description of alarm/trouble events that are displayed in the FACP
with an inbuilt buzzer to indicate fault/fire alarm.
c) The panel shall be powered from the FACP.
d) It shall have control keys for Sound, Silence, Mute and to reset the FACP from

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 356

the repeater station.

e) The repeater panel shall have the following LED ‘s indications
a. Supply
b. Fault
c. Mute
d. Silent
e. Disabled
f. Fire

3.2.7 Sounder/hooters cum Strobes

a) The sounder shall be Addressable Loop Powered electronic type and shall give
discontinuous/ intermittent audible alarm whenever any detector or MCP
operates. The sound output from the Hooter should not be less than 85
decibels and up to 120 decibels at 1mtr distance.

b) The sounder/Hooter shall be powered from either 2-wire detector loop or

separate power supply 24 VDC can be used or additional cable shall be used
in case of external power supply.

c) The horn/strobe shall be listed to UL 1971/ UL 464/ LPCB and shall be

Approved for fire protective service. The horn/strobe shall be wired as a
primary-signaling notification appliance and flashing over the strobe’s entire
operating voltage range. The horn shall have three audibility
options and an option to switch between a Temporal pattern and a non-
Temporal (continuous) pattern. These options are set by a multiple position
switch.

3.2.8 Duct Casting Unit

a) The Duct Casting Units are to be directly installed in the return Air conditioning
ducts for detecting any hazardous quantity of products of combustion be carried
through the ducts.

b) The complete unit shall consist of Polycarbonate housing to accommodate

Photo Electric Detector with plug - in facility and samplingtubes, one for Air inlet
and other as the air outlet.

c) The Inlet tube shall extend into and across the duct width; the outlet tube
shall be of fixed length.

d) When the AHU blower fans operate, a continuous cross-sectional Sampling of

air from the duct shall flow through the housing containing the Detector. The
outlet tube shall return the sampled air into the duct.

e) The functional requirements of the Duct Casting Unit shall be:

i) Uniform Sensitivity - irrespective of air velocity - up to 1200 meters per

minute.

ii) It shall function on the Venturi principle, with Aluminium Venturi tubes.

iii) The Duct Casting Unit shall be compact, easy to install and with the

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 357

facility to dismantle the cover or Detector for maintenance

purposes.

iv) The housing shall be mounted outside the duct; the probe tubes shall be
inserted through the duct by cutting precision sized holes into the duct
and sealed with rubber gaskets.

v) The Duct Casting Unit shall be LPCB/UL Approved.

3.2.9 Addressable Monitor Module

a) The input modules shall be of dual/single channel type. The dual channel
module shall be selectable for Normally Open or Normally Close by a 2-bit DIL
switch.
b) The monitor module shall provide an addressable input for N.O. or N.C. Contact
devices such as manual stations, Water flow switches, sprinkler Supervisory
devices, etc. It shall provide a supervised initiating circuit. An open-circuit fault
shall be Annunciated at the Fire Alarm panel (Subsequent alarm shall be
reported.)
c) The device shall contain an LED, which blinks upon being scanned by the Fire
alarm panel. Upon determination of an alarm condition of an alarm condition,
the LED shall be latched on. The device shall have a selectable inbuilt fault
isolator.

3.2.10 Addressable Control Module

a) Output module shall mean Addressable points from the FACP with potential
free contacts for tripping of AHUs, power supply to Lifts etc. as required. Any
module shall operate two relay outputs powered from the loop and preferably
consuming single address on the loop. The system shall also be able to handle
separate modules to interface the speakers of the Public Address System.
b) Addressable Control Module shall be provided to operate dry contacts for
switching ON OFF pressurization fans, AHU’ s etc. in case of fire etc. It shall
have a built-in type identification to automatically identify this Device to the
control panel. It shall have internal circuitry & relay powered directly by two-wire
loop. It shall have a selectable inbuilt fault isolator.
3.2.11 Fault Isolator Module
a) The fault isolator device shall be placed at every 20 devices to limit the Number
lost in the event of a short-circuit/wiring fault. All the other detectors shall remain
functional because of the Class A wiring of the loop. The isolator shall not utilize
an address and shall be built into the detector base wherever required.
b) The Fault Isolator Device shall detect and isolate a short-circuited segment of a
Fault-tolerant loop. The device shall automatically determine a return to normal
condition of the Loop and restore theisolated segment.
3.2.12 Graphic Monitoring Software
a) The Graphic Software Shall Provide both Alarm Management and system
maintenance tool.
b) All the information is available on a single screen allowing quick Assessment,
whilst any actions can be taken by accessing the Built-in menus. Building
Evacuation, Alarm Silencing and Reset are available to any users with
suitable security clearance.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 358

c) System maintenance can be performed on any device or zone whether the

workstation is connected to a single panel or a series of networked panels.
From a single location simple check can be performed to assess the status of
individual devices, whilst devices and zones can easily be temporarily isolated
for on-site works to be performed. Advanced functionality is available to users
with level 3 access permitting the maintenance of PC software security
passwords, Time & Date setting and control of the workstation functionality.
d) The schematic view offers users the site plan. It can be configured to provide a
number of levels representing the overall site, individual floor plans, small
sections of the floor plans or even individual rooms. Each plan is independently
named and can be configured to show all devices as installed on the site.
e) The event log details a complete history of the activity of the fire system. All
major control actions are recorded with date, time, user and an Optional
comment field. Entries are colour coded to help easy Identification of
specific types of events.
3.3 InstallationGuidelinesforDetectors
3.3.1 Zones: -
a) In buildings, wherever an alarm is activated it shall initiate a number of different
activities, e.g., provision of assistance, commencement of firefighting operations
and emergency evacuation procedures, summoning of fire brigade etc. It is
essential that these activities are well coordinated. It is therefore important, for
ease of communication that the building may be divided in number of
identifiable sectors/zones.

b) All buildings with the exception of smaller ones need to be divided into
detection
zones.Thezonesneedtobesmallenoughforafiretobelocatedquickly.Evenift he
system is addressable, zoning indications needs to be provided as this often
provides
aquickerdisplay.Also,thiswouldenablefirefighterswhoarenotfamiliarwitht he
building toproceedtothelocationoffire.

3.3.2 Requirements of detection zones shall be as follows:

a) Thefloorareaofsinglezoneshallnotexceed2000Sqmtr.
b) Eachzoneshallberestrictedto asinglefloor.
c) Voids above or below the floor area of a room, can be included in the same
zone.The voids and the room constitute a single compartment.
d) The traveled distance by any one responding to a fire alarm signal, shall not
exceed 30 mtrs.
e) Any enclosed stairwell, lift well or other enclosed shaft-like structures shall be
considered as a separate zone.
f) If manual call points are located on the landings of an enclosed staircase, such
points at each level shall be incorporated within the zone that serves the
adjacent accommodationonthatlevel.
g) The detectors and manual call points within sectors/zones shall be wired to the
controlandindicatingequipment.
h) The entire electrical installation pertaining to the entire fire alarm system as

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 359

described above shall be independent of other systems.

i) It is advisable to provide adequate fire separation between the zones.
j) If the requirement of detectors or call points is less than 20 in any area,division
of the area into zones is not necessary.Similarly,sectorization is not necessary if
the number of zones is not very large.
k) For larger system covering more than one building it may be necessary to
create sectors in addition to zones in order to restrict the number of zones from
which alarm originate simultaneously or in succession.
l) The division into zones and/ or sectors shall be decided based on careful
consideration on the type risk and accessibility of zone in respect of main
circulation routes and main control and indicating equipment. Response
indicators outside doors of rooms, cabinetc.,within a zone may be useful, if
doors are likely o be locked.Making an area easier to search, the use of remote
indicator lamps reduced the need for a large number of smaller zones.
m) Where as pecial risk is present withina larger protected area,e.g.,as
praypainting both in engineering workshop and it is considered important to
obtain rapid identification of fire in that risk,such special risk shall be deemed as
a separate zone.

3.3.3 Sitting of fire Detectors: -

Atthetimeofinstallationandpriortocommissioning,everyfiredetectorshoul d be
allotted an identification number, preceded by alphabetic initials showing the
type of detectors, for example, Z1/SD(I) 20 meaning Smoke Detector,
Ionization, zone 1, 20th detector. Z2/SDOT/3 meaningSmoke detector
Optical, Zone 2, 3rd detector, HFT/2 (Fixed
Temperature heat detector, 2nd detector), HFR (Rate of rise heat detector)
etc. A record of this should be maintained inthecontrolcenter.
3.3.4 Spacingandsittingofdetector:- (CommontoalltypesofsmokeandHeatDetectors).
a) Under flat ceilings, the horizontal distance between any point in a protected
area
andthedetectornearesttothatpointshallnotexceedi)7.5mtrs.incaseofsmo ke
detectorandii)5mtrs.incaseofheatdetector.
b) Underslopingroofpitchedceiling(wherethedistancebetweenthetopofape xand
bottom of the roof exceeds 600mm), spacing of detectors at or in the vicinity
of apex
maybespacedbetween7.5mtrs.to8.5mtrs.forsmokedetectors.
c) Heatdetectorsshouldbeinstalledthatsensingelementisnotlessthan25mm and
more than 150mm below the ceiling/roof level. For smoke detectors, Sensing
element should not be less than 25 mm and not more than 600mm below
the ceiling/roof level except as necessary.
d) Detectors shall not be mounted within 500mm of any walls, partitions or
obstructionstoflowofsmokeorhotgases,suchasstructuralbeamsandduct work
wheretheobstructionsaregreaterthan250mmindepth.
e) When structural beams or ductwork of any other ceiling attachments, not
greater than 250mm depth, create obstacles to the flow of smoke, detectors
shall not be
mountedclosertotheobstructionthantwicethedepthoftheobstruction.
f) Wherepartitionsorstorageracksthatreachwithin300mmoftheceiling,they shall be
considered as walls that extend to the ceiling for the purpose of sitting the

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 360

detectors.
g) Similarly, ceiling obstructions such as structural beams, deeper than 10% of
the overall ceiling height shall be considered as walls for the purpose of sitting
the detectors.

h) Detectors shall not be mounted within1000mmofanyairinlet(supplyairGrills of

HVACsystem)oraforcedventilationsystem.
i) A clear space of 500mm is maintained below each detector. Where detectors
are constrained to be fixed to the wall,they shall be sited in such a way that the
top of the detection element is between150mm and 300mm below theceiling.
Additional detector shall be placed on the ceiling at a position 1500 mm from
any opening.

j) A detector shall be placed on the protected side of the premises on the

ceiling1500mm from any door, window or any opening in the wall partitions
separating the protected premises from the other premises.

k) All stairwells, lift shafts, other utility

shafts, etc. shall have a detectorat the top. Lift machine rooms shall be provided
with a detector. All enclosed staircase shall have one detector at each main
landing within the staircase.
l) The detector shall also be provided in cable tunnels, ducts, false floors, AC &
AHU room, A.C. return ducts and distribution boards, mainBoardA.C.niches.
Every enclosure e.g., room / cabin shall have a detector at ceiling, level and
also under false ceiling, if provided.
m) A response indicat or shall be installed at the entrance to each room/cabin to
the indicated where the detector has actuated.This arrangement shall also be
followed in case of all concealed detectors in false floors, plenums, shafts,
tunnels, etc.
n) Voids area in case of false ceiling, false flooring more than 800mm shall also
be protected with detectors with spacing like in normal installation.However,voi
ds in false ceiling / flooring less than 800mm height need not necessarily have
independent coverage unless the void is such that the spread of fire products
between the rooms or compartments take place through it.
o) No detector should be subjected to any interior decorations treatment that is
painting,alteration of exterior cover etc.to confirm with environment.

3.3.5 Spacing of Detectors at different Ceiling Height–This is given below

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 361

Note: -
The spacings have been adopted from the charts published by Fire Detection
Institute of America and adopted by NFPA (National Fire Protection
Association of America). The spacing for parameters of other than those
considered here can be found from these charts.

3.3.6 In Case of Computer/EDPCenter/OtherElectronicEquipmentInstalled in

Air- Conditioned Areas; The Following Requirements Should Apply: -
The exactlocation where detectors should be installed on ceiling/below
false floor should be determined after observing/studying air
movements.This could be done by suitable smoke generating devices and
observing smoke density by suitable measuring instruments. All detectors
in the rooms, below false floor, above false ceiling or generally hidden
should have external response indicators sited at prominent place.

3.3.7 Compensationtothespacingofdetectors: -
Heightconsideration: Spacingof7.5meterforsmokedetectorsisvalidonlyup
toa height of 7 meter only and that 5 meters for heat detectors is valid
only up to a height of 5 meter. Beyond these heights, spacing between
the detectors shall be adjustedas below:
a) Above7-meter ceilingheight:Onlybeamdetectorsshallbeprovided.
b) Heat detectors for heights between 5 meter and 7 meters: 3.5 meter spacing.

3.3.8 High air movement consideration:

Spacing between detectors shall be suitably reduced in areas where high
air movement or where high air changes prevails. Modified values of spacing

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 362

is given in the following table.

Multiplyingfactorformodified
Airchangesperho
ur inside Spacing(inmet (Areacoverage)(inSq. meter)
block er)
Less than 7.5 1.00 (1.00)

8.5 0.95 (0.91)

10.0 0.91 (0.83)
12.0 0.83 (0.70)
15.0 0.74 (0.55)
20.0 0.64 (0.40)
30.0 0.50 (0.25)
60.0 0.38 (0.15)
i. Detectors shall not be located in the vicinity of supply air diffusers.
Minimum distance between the detector and the air inlets/diffusers
shall be at least 1.5 meter.
ii. Detectors shall be so mounted as to favour the air flow towards return
air openings.
iii. After designing the detector spacing, it shall be cross checked to
ensure that there is at least one smoke detector for every 100 m² or
one heat detector for every 50 m² of the compartment area.

3.3.9 Additional requirements for optical detectors: -

a) Optical beam –type detectors shall be sited in such a way that no pointin the
Protected space is more than7.5 meters from the nearest point of optical beam.

b) In case of asloping roof or pitched ceiling (where the distance between the top of
apex and bottom of the roof exceeds 600 mm), distance stated above may be
increased to 8.5 meter.

c) Where optical beam type smoke detectors are used more than 600mm from
ceiling level in order to provide supplementary detection of rising smoke
within a high space (likeAtrium etc.), the width of the area protected on each side
of optical beam shall be regarded as12.5% of the height of the above beam from
groundle vel.

d) Where there is a probability of people walking through the beam or where the
beam is likely to be obstructed by forklifts etc., detectors shall be mounted
at a suitable height.

e) Transmitters,Receiversand/orreflectors shall be mounted on a solid

construction which shall with stand vibrations, temperatures or any

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 363

imposed load.

f) The path length of the optical beam shall be within the limits specified by
the manufacturers.
g) Beam detection area shall not exceed the detection zone in which it isinstalled.

3.3.10 Siting off lamedetectors

The location and spacing of the detectors shall be based on sound
engineering evaluations taking into account the following.
(a) Size of the fire requiring detection
(b) Fuel involved
(c) Sensitivity of detectors
(d) Distance between the fire and detector
(e) Radiant energy absorption of the atmosphere
(f) Presence of other sources of emission
(g) Purpose of detection system
Certain flame detectors respond to the instantaneous level of radiation
received while othersdependuponthelevelreceivedoveraperiod.
In either case the response will depend on the distance between theflame
detector and the fire, since the radiation level received is inverselyproportional
to the square of this distance. Increased distance from thefire will, therefore,
lead to an increase in the size of the fire at detection. A clear line sight to the
area being protected is of great importance but at the same time care must be
exercised to avoid a direct line sight to likely sources of non-fireradiationto
preventfalsealarms.
3.3.11 Spacingguideline
a) Sufficient number of detectors shall be used and they shall be positioned
such that no point requiring detection in the hazard area is obstructed or
outside the field of view of at least one detector.
b) The spacing of the detectors shallvary from fuel to fuel. It is there fore
necessary to fix the distance as per there commendations of the
manufactures.
c) The location of the detectors shall also be such that structural members or any
other opaque objects or materials do not obstruct their line of sight.
d) When installed outdoors, detectors shall be shielded to prevent
diminishing sensitivity due to rain, snow, ice etc., and allow a clear vision of
the hazardare.

3.4 Inspection, Testing and Commissioning

3.4.1 Testingbeforesupply
a) Detectors, control and indicating panels, sounders, PA system
equipment and battery unit with charger etc. shall be tested at the
manufacturer's works to indicate satisfaction to the contract specifications,
and test certificates be furnished with the supply at site of work by the
contractor.
b) In case of imported fire alarm components such as main fire alarm

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 364

panel, Rep eater panel,Smoke, Heat and Beam detectors,Manual Call

points, Monitor and Control modules, Response Indicators, etc.;
individual certificate with individual number confirming to the relevant
international standard shall be provided by the contractor at the time of
supply at site of work.
3.4.2 InitialInstallation Inspection:
a) After installation, a visual inspection of all the detectors should be made
to make sure that they are property placed. Each detector should be
inspected to ensure thatit is properly mounted and connected.
b) Restorable heat detectors and restorable elements of combination
detectors should be tested by a heat source, such as a hair dryer, or
shielded heat lamp until it responds, making sure that the sensing
element is not damaged. After each heat test, the detector should be reset
and precaution should be taken to avoid damage of the non- restorable
fixed temperature element of a combination rate of rise /fixed
temperaturedetector.

c) Non-resettable fixed temperature heat detectors which are not to be

heat-tested
shouldbetestedmechanicallyorelectricallyforfirealarmfunction.
d) Heat detectors with replaceable fusing alloy element should be tested
first by removing the element to see whether contact operate properly and
then reinserting theminproperposition.
e) In periodic testing, heat detectors should be visually examined for
damages for other conditions (such as heavy coats of paints etc. likely to
interfere with the correct operation).
f) Each smoke detector should be tested to initiate an alarm at its installed
location with smoke or other approved aerosol which demonstrates that
the smoke can enter the chamber and initiate an alarm.
g) In order to ensure that each smoke detector is with in its senility range, it
should be tested using either.
I. Acalibratedtest method,or
II. Amanufacturer's/supplier's approved calibratedsensitivitytest instrument, or
III. Approvedcontrolequipmentforthepurpose,or
IV. Other approved calibratedsensitivitytest method.
h) Detectors found to have a sensitivity outside the approved range should
be replaced.
Note: Detectors sensitivity cannot be tested or measured using any
spray/smokeproducingdevicethatadministersanunmeasuredconcentrationof
aerosol/sm oke intothedetector.

3.4.3 Testingafterinstallation:
Following tests shall be conducted in a completed FAS/AFAS/intelligent
addressable FAS installation, in the presence of the Engineer-in-Charge
and the test certificate shall be furnished for the followingtest.
(i) Continuitytest.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 365

(ii) Test for insulation resistance of the wiring and the control and indication panels.
(iii) Test for system operation.

In the case of AFAS (See the note below), this test for fire conditions shall
be conducted using a test fire at normal floor level. The number of locations
for such a test shall be 1% of the total number of detectors in an installation
subject to a minimum of two and maximum of five. The system operation for
fault conditions shall be conducted by introducing faults such as open
circuit, short circuit, removal of detector, open/short circuit in a sounder
circuit etc.

Note: Use of a test fire in the case of installation using heat detectors need
not be insisted upon.

3.4.4 Inspectionbylocalbodies
It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to get the installation inspected and
passed by the local authorities concerned, as may be required by the local
bye-laws, and 'No Objection Certificate(N.O.C) shall be obtained.Payment
made for statutory fees shall be reimbursed on production of receipts.

3.5 Integrated Public Address and Voice Announcement system

The scope of work includes planning, designing, supplying and installation,
testing & commissioning of Public Address System complete with Speakers,
Amplifiers, Mike, and Zone Selection Panel for interfacing with other systems.
The PA system is designed to serve the dual purpose of making general
announcement and Voice Evacuation at the time of Fire alarm. The Public
Address and Voice Evacuation System shall comprise Audio Matrix Units, High-
quality speakers, Audio rack all mounted on a Rack and fully connected and
integrated into the fire alarm system.

The system shall be fully programmed to accommodate fire alarm and voice
communication zones. The system shall be configured to allow on-site
modifications with the minimum of disruption using the PC-based software to
facilitate changes or alterations.

3.5.1 Applicable Standard:

EVAC Compliant with IEC/EN60849 Loudspeakers -Rated power IEC

60286-Part 5 Tested in accordance with BSEN60268-5 Acoustic models
ready for CATT, ULYSSES & EASECompliant with BS5839 Part 8

3.5.2 Generalrequirements:

a) All system components shall be monitored including and not limited to

amplifiers, backup amplifiers, speaker circuits, paging microphone, and
230 V AC line. Each amplifier/line circuit shall be monitored individually
and shall report any faults back to the master controller unit.

b) The system should support announcement consoles and multiple

remote announcement stations as required.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 366

c) In the equipment/console room, all cables and wires should be

terminated in the main junction box and should be clearly marked with
cable ferrules. The system design should be such that it allows for future
expansion at low cost. The system should be modular for ease of
maintenance.

d) The system should have provision to avoid echo during announcement

and suitable feedback suppressor and audio processor should be used
in the system integration as may be required depending on the
analogue or digital interface.
e) The system should have a provision for playing continuous soft
background music round the clock in all the floors of the building with a
music level of 55-60dB and should be maintained. For inviting the
attention of the announcement, a pleasing chime should precede every
announcement. The music should be cut off during the announcements.

f) The equipment must be able to operate continuously and satisfactorily,

without deterioration in performance, safety and reliability at
temperatures 0 deg to 55 deg centigrade ambient. The level of PA
announcement should be uniform at listening level of an adult person.
The loudness level should be 16dB to 20dB above the ambient noise
for clear and intelligible speech. The measured speech intelligibility STI
(Speech Transmission Index) should be a minimum of 0.5 or more in all
the floors/areas where the announcements are made.

g) The system integration should take into consideration the height of the
ceiling at various places, critical distance and directivity factor of the
speaker system. The reverberation time of each zone in the terminal
should be measured and the Electro acoustical adjustments should be
carried out to achieve the target criterion as required, where
announcements are made.
3.5.3 System Design
a) The PAVA system shall be connected to the Fire Alarm system with in-
built isolators to protect the system in case of any cable faults. The
system shall be decentralized in nature, each distributed rack DAU
(Distributed Amplifier Unit) shall have all the DSP (Digital Signal
Processing), amplifiers and monitoring in such a way that can work in a
stand-alone mode in case the master rack is faulty or down.

b) All system components shall be digitally monitored including and not

limited to, Messages, Amplifiers, and backup amplifiers, Speaker
Circuits, Audio Matrix units, Paging Microphone, Battery Charger and
the 230VAC line. Each amplifier/line circuit shall be monitored
individually and shall report any faults back to the Master Audio Matrix
Unit as well as the Paging Microphone.

c) The Man-Machine Interface (MMI) shall be connected back to the

control room, to monitor and control the entire PAVA system. Voice
Evacuation and Public Address system integration include paging
system and background music system.

d) The system shall be capable of sending messages automatically to any

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 367

zone at any time interval, without affecting the music in the other areas.
Each Zone and circuit speaker shall have a separate amplifier, system
sharing two amplifiers with multiple circuit speakers are not acceptable.
There shall be one backup amplifier for every five amplifiers, the system
shall automatically change over to the backup in case of any amplifier
failure, and the backup amplifiers shall be monitored as well. In case of
any system component failure, the paging microphone shall override
any defective unit and provide paging to the required zone. The System
can provide any Cause & Effect programs after integrating with the Fire
Alarm System, thus Alert/Evacuate messages can be programmed and
delayed as well as played on any zone/floor as per the Cause & Effect
approved by the Engineer.

e) The Battery backup shall provide 24 hours of backup in standby mode

and 30 min in normal operation. The power supply/charger shall be rack
mounted. Battery calculation shall be based on the amplifier size and
not the speaker circuit load.
3.5.4 Digital Amplifiers
a) All amplifiers shall be digital & power amplifier type with High-quality
speech and Music broadcast. The power amplifiers shall have adequate
continuous (RMS) power output to meet the requirement of the
configuration. The unit shall deliver the rated output power with less than
0.1% harmonic distortion in the design bandwidth. The amplifier shall
have a broadband frequency response of 60 Hz to 15 KHz. The output
voltage and impedance shall meet the system requirements. Amplifiers
shall be protected against overloads and output shorts and a special
thermal overload on the heat sink.

b) The Amplifier shall have eight channels, four primary & four backups,
and each primary channel have a rated power of 100W. The Amplifier
shall have switch power technology for power saving, sleep mode is
automatically enabled when no signal input is detected. Total number
of Amplifiers and rating of each one shall be designed as per the actual
requirement.

c) The amplifier shall have AC 70V or 100V power supply and DC 24V
input, having a separate fuse for each channel. The Amplifier shall be
connected through balanced audio input and shall work on 100V
Speaker Line.

Technical Specifications

➢ Main power supply 100-240 V, 50 Hz

➢ Amplification Digital
➢ Battery Voltage 24V/ 48 V DC (max 10% deviation)
➢ Frequency Response 60Hz to 16KHz
➢ S/N Ratio 70 V mode, >70 dB
➢ Total Harmonic Distortion <0.5% at rated power
➢ Power Efficiency >75%
➢ Operating Temperature 0 to 50 Deg. C
➢ Humidity 90% (Non-Condensing)

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 368

3.5.5 Speakers
a) Speakers shall specially be designed for broadcasting high-quality,
integrated emergency fire alarm signals and voice communications and
approved by an appropriate authority for use in such situations. Speakers
shall be ceiling, wall-mounted or Horn speakers and shall be completed
with mounting bracket, accessories and metal enclosures etc. as
required.
b) Speakers shall be of high efficiency, providing maximum output at
minimum power across 60 – 16000 Hz frequency range for Indoor
Speakers. Speakers shall have a line matching transformer for direct
connection to amplifiers with multiple taps. Speakers external
appearance shall be approved by the Engineer-in-charge. Speakers shall
be interconnected in the zone configuration.

I. Ceiling/Wall Mounted Digital Speaker

The speakers should be designed to simulate the sound quality and
distortion prior to installation. The Ceiling speaker shall allow easy
parallel connection of multiple loudspeakers. The Speaker shall have
multiple tapping for different applications according to room size and
ambient noise environment. The Speaker shall have Aluminium grille
and metal baffle and shall have a spring clip clamp for easy
installation.

II. Technical Specifications

a. Rated power 6-9 W (ceiling) / 9-12 W (wall)
b. Tapings 100V line 25% / 50% / 75% / 100%
c. Operation Voltage 100V or 70V
d. Effective frequency range 60 Hz - 16kHz (10% Variation
allowed)
e. SPL @ 1W/m (1KHZ) 90 +/- 5 dB

3.5.6 Rack

a) The equipment shall be housed in a standard rack of suitable height,

with a Plexiglas door or metal mesh and lock. Ventilation panels of 1U
height shall be provided between each item of equipment.

b) Details of the proposed equipment shall be forwarded to the engineer-

in-charge with performance specifications, dimensions, construction
and finish for approval.

c) The Rack should have DIN Rail Mounted Terminal Blocks for
termination of Speaker Zone cables on the rear. All cables coming from
Speaker zones, Call Stations, and Power supply should enter from the
Bottom. The rack should be installed at a location which has a minimum
of 600mm space from front & back for accessing it easily. The rack
should be installed in a well-ventilated room preferably Air-conditioned.
The unit should have Fans from the top. The unit should have a
Lockable Glassdoor at front.
3.5.7 Speaker Cables
All cables associated with PA System shall be of the following

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 369

specifications:

The 2-core speaker cable will be connected to the speakers by screw

terminals. Care has to be taken for avoiding any single strand of wire that
shall not come out of Lug & screw terminals to avoid noise & leakage.
Speaker cables used shall be multi-Stranded type Flexible Copper
Conductor of 1.5 Sq. mm FRLS PVC insulated, PVC sheathed. These
Cables shall be laid in MS Conduits /cable trays. Call station cables should
be CAT 6A type, It should be crimped by RJ45 Shielded Male Connectors.

PUBLIC ADDRESS SYSTEM

1. Scope of work
Design, supplying, installation, testing and commissioning of public address
system in the building. Each floor of the building shall be divided into suitable
number of zones as number of speaker and its location and every equipment of PA
system coming in that particular zone shall be in that Zone only. Each zone of fire
alarm system shall be in sync with each zone of PA system. Integration of system
shall be done accordingly, and all hardware components, convertors, relays,
software components etc. required for the same shall be included in the scope of
contractor. The Public Address System provided shall be a standalone system
with local control and no centralized control system is required.
The system shall be fully redundant, scalable, completely supervised and flexible. It
shall consist of IP based PA controller, Amplifiers, Call station, speakers and
communication cable i.e., the system bus. The system shall be fully IP-network
based. The features like audio processing, communication using MODBUS
protocol and control functions shall entirely be in the digital domain. The sound
quality shall be improved by providing Digital signal processing (DSP) in every
equipment.
2. Control Panel: The control Panel shall be IP based of minimum 8 zone Panel
with features like voice alarm controller with USB, MP3 player (including 8 zone
touchscreen paging station) with Rack Mounted expandable up to 450 zones. The
required zones can be integrated with the FAS panel and all hardware and
software components required for the same are included in the scope. The voice
alarm controller should be able to connect directly over Ethernet having seamless
integration facility with main fire alarm panel for Zone wise voice evacuation
complete as required. All system devices such as system controller, amplifiers and
call stations shall communicate via IP, using an Audio over IP (AoIP) protocol
which supports the controller for control with optional encryption and
authentication to prevent unauthorized access, misuse and modification of data.
The speaker loops shall be directly fed from the controller instead of amplifier in
order to provide effective the control and monitoring of speakers and coming
devices.
3. Amplifier: The amplifiers shall be of minimum of total 125w/ 250w/ 500w/750 W
Class-D Amplifier as per the requirement of design) with 2 speaker circuits with 1
channel and should have inbuilt feature like protection against re-settable
overcurrent, overload, overheating, overvoltage, under-voltage and DC protection

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 370

and should have 100V/70 Output, with 100 - 240 VAC input and 24 VDC backup
with UPS power supply complete etc. as required.
o Each amplifier shall not be loaded more than 80% of its rated capacity
o Every alternate speaker shall be connected with two different amplifier circuits to
provide speaker line redundancy for each zone.
o All amplifier channels shall supervise the integrity of connected loudspeaker lines
without interruption of audio distribution.
o Every amplifier shall have an independent spare channel for redundancy or one
separate spare amplifier for providing channel wise redundancy for a cluster of N
main amplifiers, where N<=7. Th
4. Paging Station: The paging station shall be IP based with appropriate size
Networkable capacitive touch screen for selection of zones. It should be having
inbuilt features like supervision of system status, setting of scheduled broadcasts
with the minimum features of Built-in monitoring loudspeaker, Detachable goose-
neck microphone or handheld microphone, LCD touchscreen display with up to
2000 zones complete etc. as required. The power supply shall be done through
POE switches as required.
The priority of paging shall be as follows:
(i) Fire/security control room – 1st Priority
(ii) PA control room -2nd Priority
(iii) OT floor and Doctors call -3rd Priority
5. Speakers: The speakers required for PA system shall be of recessed type with
metal box in ceiling/wall with minimum power rating of 6W and shall be tapped to
3W/1.5W as per the requirement of the system.
6. System Management Software: Supply, Installation, programming
customization as per site conditions, testing & commissioning of System
Management software in integration with IBMS software with one server & client
license of minimum 10 years. It should connect with upto 250 controllers.
Administrator can decide No. of users and define user authorities freely. It shall
display all equipment status and indicate fault alarm location, record and read
history of operation and fault logs. It shall support Text-to-Speech (TTS) function.
The flexibility of accessing Audio files stored on the server from any zone on the
system network etc as required.

7. The components of PA system shall be neatly installed in sufficient sized Rack

assembly of not less than 10 U made of aluminum channels, side & rear panels
made up of 16 SWG powder coated steel sheet, front transparent persplex door
bearing with rails & rollers, 2 fans at the top for ventilation. The ventilation
requirement shall be varied with the size of rack used. The rack assembly shall be
so designed for proper mounting of amplifiers, system controller & all accessories
etc. as required. The rack assembly shall provide a dedicated arrangement for
cable management system and all network racks shall be powder coated with
guarantee of not less than 10 years.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 371

8. The wiring of PA system shall be done with suitable grade FRLS PVC insulated
twin core, shielded, copper conductor flexible cable in the recessed MS (mild steel)
conduit laid in wall/ slab including connections and interconnections etc. as
required.

9.Power supply of Equipment: The power supply shall be done from OEM
prescribed DC power device which provides DC‐power supply to connected
amplifiers and peripherals from the mains, with a standards compliant charger for a
single 12 V backup battery, saving on installation and battery maintenance costs.
The integrated 6‐port POE switch which shall be connected with RJ 45 of SFP port,
with glass fiber support is required for the interconnection of decentralized clusters
of devices.
The power supply of paging station, amplifier etc shall be done through separate
POE switch of minimum 8 port with 2 Nos SFP ports.
In addition to the standalone battery mentioned in above para, The Main power
supply shall be taken from the UPS room from the dedicated supply provided in
electrical shaft.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 372

C-4 LIFTS

4.0 Technical Specifications for Lifts

4.1 The scope includes Planning, Designing & preparation of Drawings providing,
installation at site, testing and commissioning of MRL/ Machine Room type
Passenger / Hospital bed liftsof various capacities block wise details as given, as
per architectural plans and in accordance with NBC 2016 / CPWD Specifications as
amended up to the date.If any item required to make the service functional, is not
specifically mentioned in the scope and specifications, the same is deemed to be
included within the scope of this tender.These technical specifications shall be read
along with the General Conditions for all E&M works given under subhead C-B.

4.1.1 The lift manufacturer should fulfil the following eligibility criteria.

a) The lift manufacturer shall comply with BIS standards, duly certified by the
manufacturer itself.
b) The manufacturer shall be compliant to the Public Procurement (Preference to
Make In India), Order 2017 (as amended from time to time) issued by the
Department of Industrial Policy and Promotion (DIPP), Ministry of Commerce
and Industry.
c) The manufacturer shall furnish an undertaking regarding availability of spares
for the entire expected life of the lift i.e. 15 to 20 years.
d) The complete lift installation including its components, safety devices, various
types of controls etc., testing, inspection, operation & maintenance shall
conform to relevant Codes, Standards, code of practices, guidelines, safety
rules, inspection manual(s), rules issued by Bureau of Indian Standards, as
amended up to the last date of receipt of tenders.
e) Quality standards shall conform to latest IS/ISO-9001:2015.
f) The down time of installed lifts being maintained by the manufacturer shall not
be more than 8 hours (average) in case of minor faults and 7 days (average) in
case of major faults during the last one financial year.

4.1.2 Followingfeaturesshallbeconsidered whiledesigning:

a) Safetytopersonnelandequipmentduringbothoperationandmaintenance
Reliabilityof service
b) Minimalfirerisk
c) Automaticprotectionofallelectricalequipmentthroughselectiverelayingsy stem
d) Maximum interchangeability of equipment
e) Fail safefeature.
f) Suitabilityofapplicableenvironmentalfactors
g) These specifications define the basic guidelines of the system as necessary for
lifts. Alldata required in this regard shall be taken into consideration to develop a
detailed engineering of the system. Site conditions as applicable are mentioned
elsewhere. Compliance with these specifications and or approval of any of
contractor’s documents shall in no case relieve the Contractors of his
contractual obligations.
h) All works to be performed and supplies shall be affected as a part of
contractrequirement, specific approvals/review of Engineer-in-Charge.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 373

4.1.3 Major activities requiring approvals / review shall include but not be limited to the
following: -

a) General Arrangement drawings for the lifts including section through lift pit and
lift shaft,
b) Quality assurance procedures,
c) Field testing and commissioning procedures
d) Engineering activities to be performed by Contractor.
e) Control and protection scheme.
f) Factory inspection and testing procedures.
g) Preparation of as-built drawings
h) Any other work/activity, which is not listed above, however is necessary for the
completion of lift/system.
4.1.4 Conformity with statutory Acts, Rules, Regulations, Standards and SafetyCodes:

The installation shall be carried out in conformity with the local lifts Act and Rules.
where no local Lifts Act are in force, the Bombay Lift Act shall be followed. The
installation shall also conform to requirements of local Municipal Bylaws, norms laid
by Tamilnadu State Electricity Board etc.

All electrical works in connection with installation of electric lifts shall be carried out
in accordance with the provisions of Indian Electricity Act 2003 and the Indian
Electricity Rule 1956 amended up to date and CPWD General Specifications for
Electrical works amended up to date.

4.1.5 Verification of correctness of Equipment at Destination

The contractor shall have to produce all the relevant records to certify that the
genuine equipment from the manufacturers has been supplied and erected.

4.1.6 Training
The scope of works includes on job technical training of two persons at site.

4.1.7 Guarantee

The installation shall be handed over to the department after necessary testing and
commissioning. The installation materials shall be guaranteed against any defective
design/workmanship. The guarantee period will be for a period of 36 months from
the date of handing over of entire work covered under agreement to the
Department. The firm will be required to submit guarantee of material from the
manufacturer to the department. AMC (Comprehensive) of lifts during the defect
liability period will be in the OEM scope, nothing extra payable for AMC during
defect liability period.

Sufficient trained and experienced staff shall be made available to meet any
exigency of work during the guarantee period till the end of defect liability period.
The maintenance up to the end of defect liability period, routine as well as
preventive, as per manufacturer’s recommendation, shall be carried out and the
record of the same shall have to be maintained.

4.1.8 Running Inperiod:

After satisfactory final inspection&after complete installation, the contractor shall
demonstrate the trouble-free running of the installation for a period of not less than

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 374

30 days before the department takes over. During this period, the lift shall be kept
either automatic or manual mode by the department. After the installation and
operation without any major breakdown for 30 days it shall be taken over by
Department.Subject to the guarantee, clause date of taking over the installation
after 30 days of trouble-free operation shall be the date of acceptance. Any undue
wear and tear of components during the running in period shall be made good by
the contractor free of charge.

4.1.9 Works to be Done by the Contractor:

a) Toprovidescaffoldingthehoistwayrequiredfor erectionoflift.

b) To carry out minor civil work, such as modification and making good the
pocket/cutout in wall/ceiling for car, counter weight, rail bracket, hall buttons,
indicators and laying of sills in positions or any other work required for smooth
operation & commissioning of lifts.

c) Toprovideandfixthesteelitemssuchasmachinebeams,loadbearinghooki nthe lift

well slab, lift shaft for installation of machinery. Separators wherever required
and buffer support channels and vertical iron ladderin lift.

d) Providingofhoistingbeam,liftinghookintheliftshaftforhoistingofequipment during
erection and to facilitate maintenance in future including their fixing etc.

e) Providingandfixingofnecessarysillsupportingprojections,sheetsteelfacia plates
on all landings as per requirements.

f) Inside the lift shaft, there shall be an arrangement of one light point at each floor
level and one light point at overhead, one light point in lift pit. All light points
shall be in group controlled and wired with 2.5 sq mm FRLS PVC insulated
copper conductor cable. One 15-amp power plug and one 5-amp power plug
shall be provided at each floor with individual switch. Wiring of these power
plugs shall be done with 4 sq mm FRLS PVC insulated copper conductor cable.
LED Bulkhead fittings of suitable rating to provide minimum 200 lux shall be
connected with each point of lift shaft.

4.1.10 Permission to Install the Lifts and License to Run

It shall be the responsibility of the successful tenderer for obtaining the necessary
permission, if required, to install the lifts from the Inspector of Lifts, and relevant
local authorities and subsequently to have the installation inspected by Inspector of
Lifts, & the relevant local authorities and arrange to obtain the license to run the
lifts. All relevant papers connected for obtaining the permission and final inspection
will be signed by the Engineer- in-Charge. The requisite fee for this purpose shall be
reimbursed to the contractor on production of the receipts on this account.

4.1.11 Requirements as per CPWD Manual on Accessible Built Environment for Lifts.
All lifts shall meet the accessibility requirements.
a. Lift door:
Lift door shall be automatic with horizontal siding centre opening. A gap
between the lift door and building floor shall not be more than 12 mm. Time of
closing of an automatic door shall be more than 5s and the closing speed shall
not exceed 0.25 m/s. A mechanism to increase this time shall be installed to
be customized by a user with mobility impairments.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 375

b. Call button:
Clear floor space of at least 900 mm X 1200 mm with no obstruction placed for
wheel chair user from reaching the call button and shall be installed at a height
800- 1000 mm.
c. Control panel
The control panels inside the lift shall be placed at a height of between 900
mm to 1100 mm from the floor level either horizontally or vertically within this
space.
d. Handrails
Handrails shall be placed at a height of 900 mm from the floor level and
are fixed on both sides and at the rear of the lift.
e. Audio and visual indicators
Voice announcements system clearly audible shall be provided to indicate the
floor level with the information that the door of the cage is open or closed for
entry or exit.
f. Lift signage
A sign indicating the number of the floor arrived shall be provided on each lift
landing on the wall opposite the lift in big font with good colour contrast.
g. Emergency warning alarm
Lift car shall be equipped with emergency warning alarm Device (two- way
communication system) permanently connected to a manned security point
with visual and audible information feedback to the passengers confirming
that, the alarm has been received, voice communication established, using the
green enlightened symbol consisting of two heads.
4.2 Codes

The following Indian Standard Specifications and Codes of Practice, currently

applicable and as per amended updated as on date irrespective of dates given
below, shall apply to the equipment and the works covered in this contract.
Wherever appropriate, If Indian Standards are not available, relevant British and/or
IEC Standards shall be applicable.

IS 14665
Electric Traction Lifts (Part-1 to5)
1100-volt grade XLPE/ PVC insulated cables IS7098 /IS1554

FRLS PVC insulated copper conductor wires

IS 694
Rigid steel conduits IS 9537 1981
Flexible steel conduits IS3480 1966
Safety procedure and practices in electrical works
IS5216 1982
Electrical installation fire safety of buildings IS1646 1997

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 376

4.2.1 Hoist Motor

(a) Each elevator shall be provided with 415 Volt AC 3 phase, 50 cycles AC
Motor. The motor shall be designed for lift duty i.e., for repeated starts and
shall be of high-capacity integral motor with class F insulation and equipped
with thermal protection. It shall be AC reversible type for elevator service with
high starting torque and low starting current. It shall be with minimum sound
during operation and shall comply with latest relevant IS specifications for lifts.

(b) Protection for motor - Provision shall be made for over load protection of
motor. Protective relay shall be provided on the controller to protect the lift
equipment against low voltage and phase failure. The slow speed winding of
this motor shall function automatically when the car is approaching a floor so
as to provide a greater stopping accuracy.

(c) Reverse phase relay - A reverse phase relay shall be provided on the
individual controller to protect the lift equipment against phase reversal, low
voltage and phase failure switches. Relays shall have suitable contact to
withstand wearing due to frequent make/break operation in hoist way.

4.2.2 Braking System

The brakes shall be used only to hold the counter weight and car in position. The
brakes should not be used for stopping the lift. The electromechanical brakes
mounted on the motor and gear shall work on rectified D.C. supply. The brakes shall
be fitted with self-aligning shoes and operated on power release principle to ensure
safety if the power supply fails. The brake should be capable of operation
automatically by various safety devices, current failure and by normal stopping of
car. It should be possible to release the brake manually, such releases requiring the
permanent application of manual force so as to move the lift car in short stops. For
this purpose, one set of brake release equipment shall be supplied. Stopping of the
lifts shall not be achieved electrically but by electromechanical system.

4.2.3 Control
The control shall be by microprocessor controlled electronically regulated
A.C. Variable Voltage & Variable Frequency drive with phase reverse relay.
Controller with Simplex / duplex full collective control and selective, drive control
with digital technology.

4.2.4 Hoistway
a) Car Frame: A suitable car frame shall be provided with adequate bracing to
support the platform and car enclosure. The buffer striking plate on the
underside of the car-frame platform assembly must fully compress the buffer
spring in the pit before the plunger reaches its lowerlimit of travel.
b) Platform, Heavy Loading Type: The car platform shall be arranged to
accommodate load weighing up to 25% of the rated capacity, such as Hospital
stretchers, wheeled food carts, passenger’s baggage etc.
The platform shall be recessed 25mm for flooring Granite stone flooring as per
approved samples pattern.
c) Wiring for hoist way electrical devices included in scope of the elevator system,

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 377

hall panel, pit emergency stop switch, and the travelling cable for the elevator
car.

4.2.5 Car Frame Safety Gear And Governor

The car frame which supports the car platform and enclosure shall be made of
structural steel and equipped with suitable guides and car safety devices mounted
under car platform. The safety gear shall be of instantaneous type. Car safety, to
stop the car whenever excessive descending speed is attained, shall be operated
by a speed governor through a continuous steel rope. Suitable device shall be
provided to cut off power from the motor and apply the brake on application of
safety.

4.2.6 Thermal Overload Protection

Auto thermal overload protection is to be provided to protect the driving motor
against overloads. If the car is overloaded, it should not start. The overload indicator
and the sounding buzzer shall signal the overload condition.

4.2.7 Priority Control

Switching on the key contact and at the same time pressing the required floor
buttons will allow a direct travel to the selected floor while the already registered car
commands will be cancelled.

4.2.8 Full Load Control

Fully loaded cars should respond only to car commands. Floor calls remain
registered and are served by the next available not fully loaded cars.

4.2.9 Counter Weight & Guides

a) All counter weights shall be of cast iron and shall travel between rigid guides
of steel frame capable of withstanding buffer impacts. Suitable metallic
counter weight guard of required length shall be provided at the bottom of the
hoist way.
b) Car and counter weight guides shall be of rigid steel guides and shall be of
machined ‘T’ section only. The size being in accordance with relevant
standards, it shall be capable of withstanding the forces resulting from the
application of car or counter weight safety devices.

4.2.10 Sound Reduction

The contractor shall provide necessary sound reduction materials, preferably
antivibration pads of proper density to effectively isolate the machine from the
machine beams or flooring.

4.2.11 Terminal and Final Limits

Terminal switches shall be provided to slow down / stop the car at the terminal
landings. These terminal switches shall act independently of the operating device or
final limit switches. Ultimate or final limit switches shall also be provided to
automatically cut off the power and apply brake in case the car travel beyond
terminal landings.

4.2.12 Terminal Buffer

Suitable spring buffers shall be installed to stop the car and counter weight at the
extreme limits of travels. Buffer must be suitable for installation in the space

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 378

available.

4.2.13 Ropes
The hoist ropes shall be of traction steel of suitable size, construction and number to
ensure the proper operation of elevator and shall give satisfactory wearing qualities.
The Governor rope shall be of steel.No car or counter weight ropes shall be repaired
or lengthened by splicing. Fixing arrangements shall confirm to IS 2365-1977.

4.2.14 Car Platform

The car platform shall be of framed construction and designed on the basis of rated
load evenly distributed. The flooring shall be sound isolated platform having 6mm
Chequered plate with tough wearing floor cover and fire- resistant material and final
finish with approved granite stone. Car stoppage accuracy at floors shall be within
5mm.

4.2.15 Car Enclosure or Body

The car body shall be in approved finish of 1.6 mm thick stainless-steel material.
The car shall have suspended ceiling with arrangement for air through pressure fan
/ blower mounted on the roof of car and indirect lighting shall be with LED lamp
fixtures evenly distributed in the cabin.

4.2.16 Cabin Finishes

a) Telephone cabinet with phone and lead up to the lift well. Microphone with
switch along with communication cable between cabin car and Centralized
Security Room / Reception shall also be provided

b) Full height infrared light-ray with photo-electric cells across the car entrance.
c) The lift should have a voice announcement system along with a visual display to
indicate the floor level and also the information that the door of the car is open
or closed for entrance or exit.
d) The announcement system should be clearly audible i.e., the announcement
should be 50 decibels.
e) The provision of a mirror on the wall of the lift car opposite the lift door is a
positive aid to navigation for wheelchair users. It allows the wheelchair user to
see if anyone is behind them and also to see the floor indicating panel. The
mirror should not extend below 900mm from the lift floor to avoid confusing
the people with impaired site.

4.2.17 Car Door & Landing Door

Stainless steel finish shall be as per brief technical sheet. The door panels to be of
centreopening type with horizontal sliding doors. Landing door shall be 1 hr. fire
rated as per NBC 2016.An electric door operator for opening and closing the car
door and the landing door, shall be provided. It shall consist of a machine on the
elevator car for each stopping at a landing. The car door and the landing door shall
be mechanically connected and shall move simultaneously while opening and
closing. Every landing door shall be provided with a locking device which shall
comply with the following requirements: -

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 379

a) It shall not be possible to open the landing door from the landing side until
the lift car is within that particular relevant zone.
b) However, provision shall be made for opening the door by means of special
key for use in case of an emergency.
c) It shall not be possible for the car to be started or kept in motion unless all the
landing doors and car door are closed and locked.
d) An electric contact for each car door shall be provided which shall prevent car
movement away from the landing unless the door is in closed position.

4.2.18 Car Door Safety Shoe

Full height infrared car Door safety panel shall be installed on the car door panel. In
the event of a person interrupting the beam, the closing operation of the doors (the
car and landing doors) shall return to the open position. The closing operation of
the doors shall also be reversible by pressing a button (Door Open button) in the lift
car operating panel.

4.2.19 Car and Car Frame

a) The passenger cars shall be isolated from frames to prevent vibration being
transmitted from the ropes and guide shoes. Lateral and upward motion of the
car shall be restrained by locking blocks but there should not be any metal
contact between the car and the frame. The car frames shall be of suitable steel
section, properly and securely braced and shall be sufficiently rigid to withstand
the operation of the safety gear without permanent deformation of car frame.
b) All lifts shall be of metal construction with center opening sliding steel doors,
side panels in stainless steel finish.

4.2.20 Following features shall also be provided in all lifts: -

a) False ceilings: Stainless Steel (Stainless steel finish and panels as per
manufacturer) fitted with LED light fittings through two rows oftranslucent fixture
& Pressure fan/ blower with grills. The fan shall be connected on electric mains
independent of mains supplying power to lift machine. Ventilation opening shall
be provided inside the enclosure as per standard practice of lift manufacturers.
To permit switching off the power supply to the lift without switching off the fan
and the light, a separate circuit with control shall be provided as per directions
of Engineer -in- Charge.
b) Two number car operating panels with buttons in stainless steel finish. All
operating panels shall have Braille Buttons.
c) Digital car position indicator in car and car position indicators at all landing
floors.
d) Car direction indicator showing up/down directional movement of car is to be
fitted on all landing floors.
e) Overload warning indicator in car.
f) DO’s and DONTs notice for lift operation duly framed.
g) Call Registration indicator for the purpose of registering the requirement of car
at a particular landing.
h) A three-pin plug socket with switch for a hand lamp shall be fitted on top of the

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 380

lift car for use by a person working thereon.

i) Voice Announcement system for each landing
j) Automatic Rescue Device shall be provided.

4.2.21 Emergency Light In Car

A trickle charged battery operated emergency light lamp shall be provided in the
car which shall operate automatically in case of power failure for minimum
90minutes.

4.2.22 Alarm Bell

An emergency alarm bell shall be provided. The alarm bell shall be located at the
ground floor landing and push for the same shall be at the car operating panel. The
system shall be operated by batteries with trickle charger and the bell/siren should
work the moment the alarm button in the car is pressed (90 min Back up).

4.2.23 Communication System

Telephone system with cables shall be provided between cabin car and Machine
Room for each lift. In addition to this, each lift shall be connected with centralized
room / Reception.Cable for CCTV and potential free contacts for , interface shall be
provided.

4.2.24 Floor Position Indicator & Direction Arrows

Digital signal indications at all landings shall be provided by the appropriate numeral
and direction arrows being indicated when the car is passing the corresponding
floor. The indicator shall remain illuminated when the car is stopped at a floor. The
top cover of the floor position and direction arrow indicator units shall be stainless
steel.

4.2.25 Emergency Key

Emergency key or equivalent device shall be provided as required by the elevator
supplier.

4.2.26 Detailed Instructions

Inside the lift car suitable instruction for passengers on car operating panel shall be
displayed. Such instructions in lift car shall indicate capacity, No. of persons, ‘No
smoking’ and such other instructions as are suitable for proper and safe operation of
the lifts.

4.2.27 Fire Man Switch

Each lift shall have fireman toggle switch for access of fireman shall be provided in a
breaking glass. The operation of this switch shall cancel all calls to this lift and lift
will stop at the next nearest landing if travelling upward. The doors shall not open at
this landing and the lift should start travelling to ground floor. In case of its travel in
the downward direction when the fireman’s switch is operated, it shall go straight to
ground floor direct without stopping enroute. The emergency stop button inside the
car shall become inoperative during the journey. Once the car has reached the
ground floor, it shall be under the command of fireman by car buttons, landing calls
being isolated. The lift can be put in normal use by putting the fireman switch in its
original position.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 381

4.2.28 Operation

The operation shall be Simplex, full collective-selective with or without attendant. It

shall generally function in the manner described below:

On every intermediate landing there is a Up/Down button with ‘Call Registered’

lights. The extreme positions have one call button with a ‘Call Registered’ lights.
Inside the car shall be provided with complete set of buttons and a key operated
change over switch to facilitate operation withor without attendant.

The car shall answer all calls in a sequenced order depending upon the direction in
which it is travelling.

4.2.29 Emergency Stop Switch

On top of the lift car an emergency stop switch shall be provided for use by
maintenance personnel. Similar switches shall also be provided in the car.
Operation of these switches shall render the car and landing buttons inoperative
and cancel all registered calls.

4.2.30 Automatic Rescue Device (ARD)shall have the following specifications.

a) ARD should move the elevator to the nearest landing in case of power failure
during normal operation of elevator.

b) ARD should monitor the normal power supply in the main controller and shall
activate rescue operation within 10 seconds of normal power supply failure. It
should bring the elevator to the nearest floor at a slower speed than the normal
run. While proceeding to the nearest floor, the elevator will detect the zone and
stop. After the elevator has stopped, it automatically opens the doors and parks
with door open. After the operation is completed by the ARD the elevator is
automatically switched over to normal operation as soon as normal power
supply resumes.

c) In case the normal supply resumes during ARD in operation the elevator shall
continue to run in ARD mode until it reaches the nearest landing and the doors
are fully opened. If normal power supply resumes when the elevator is at the
landing, it shall automatically be switched to normalpower operation.

d) All the lift safeties shall remain active during the ARD mode of operation.

e) The emergency battery unit shall consist of suitable capacity of SMF (Sealed
Maintenance Free) batteries with battery charger having auto trickle/ boost rate
of charge The battery capacity should be adequate so as to operate the ARD at
least seven times a day provided the duration between usage is at least 30
minutes. A battery run-down indicator shall be provided.

f) The elevator shall be equipped with an automatic stopping device arranged to

bring the car to a stop at the terminal landings, independent of the regular
operating device in the car. This safety device is required so that in case of
controller failure or power failure, the lift should notget stuck in the shaft. With

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 382

this device, the lift will come to the nearest landing and its doors will open and
the person can come out of the lift.

4.3 Electrical Wiring

Power wiring between the controller and main board and controller to various
landings shall be done in heavy gauge M.S. conduits confirming to Indian Electricity
Rules and Specifications for electrical works. All cables shall be of appropriate size
and voltage grading. Complete copper wiring for the entire lift installation shall be
used.

4.3.1 Machine
The machine shall be, of gearless traction type for variable speed equipment for all
lifts and shall include electric motors, electromechanical brakes, steel sheave shafts
and bed plate. The driving sheave shall be grooved to ensure sufficient traction and
minimum rope wear. The machines shall be equipped with an arrangement for
manual winding of machine for testing purpose or for operation when the power
supply fails.

4.3.2 Dual Operation With Attendant

A Keyoperated switchshall be provided forAuto / Attendant mode.

4.3.3 Automatic Self Levelling Devices

This device shall be operated in slow speed to bring the car door in level with
landing door.

4.3.4 Light Fixtures

Suitable LED light fittings, recessed in the false ceiling and operated by a switch in
the car operation panel shall be provided. Properly earthed lighting arrangement
shall be provided in the hoist way in the form of Bulk-head fitting at each floor
level.

4.3.5 Car Operating Panel / Controlpanel

The car operating panel shall be flush mounted to full height in car enclosure and
shall contain the following.
a) Two numbers of car operating panels shall be provided in each lift.
b) Bank of buttons shall correspond to various floors / landings served.
c) Emergency switch for stopping the car independent of regular operating
device.
d) Emergency alarm button. The alarm should be operated through DC
battery.
e) Light / Fan control switches.
f) A key operated switch to operate lift “Automatic without attendant” and
“With Attendant”
g) Overload warning indicator in car.
h) Battery operated emergency light.
i) Have buttons with Braille letters and in sharp contrast from the
background to aid people with visual impairments.
j) Illuminated Lift Out of Order Board

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 383

4.3.6 Trailing Cable

The trailing cable shall have flame retarding and moisture resistant outer cover.
They shall be flexible and shall be suitably suspended to relieve strain in the
individual conductors.All multi-core trailing cables employed for the car shall satisfy
the requirement of relevant Standard. Trailing cables shall be so suspended,
anchored and run that the strain on individual cable conductor shall be reduced to a
minimum and the cables are free from contact with the car counter weight, shaft
sides etc. No intermediate jointing shall be permissible in the trailing cable.

4.3.7 The works listed as under shall be arranged by Contractor and deemed to be
included in the quoted rates.
a) All cuttings of walls, floors or partitions together with any repairs made
necessary thereof, including grouting in position like bolts, sills, steel
members, indicator, button boxes etc., after they are fitted
in position.
b) Scaffolding including temporary barricade required for lift works in elevator
hoist way during the erection period and to remove the same thereafter.
c) Facia Plates are to be provided and installed by the contractor.
d) All painting works of elevator material.

The quoted rates shall be deemed to include for full and entire completion of all
works in accordance with good engineering practice and recognized principles. If
any additional civil works required other than mentioned in above to suit the lift well
as constructed at site shall also be got executed by the contractor under his own
arrangement, and the cost of the same shall be deemed to have been included by
them. The details of construction that may not have been specified but are
apparently and obviously required for making the lifts functional, shall be deemed to
be included in the lump sum rate quoted by the contractor. Decision of Engineer-in-
Charge in such matter shall be final and binding.

4.3.8 Additional Features Required

a) Emergency Power Operation

The power supplies to lifts are provided from essential panel. A backup UPS
system shall be provided to supply power to light fixtures, fan, alarm and
intercom.

b) Anti -Nuisance
If number of calls registered is in excess of corresponding car load, all car
calls shall be cancelled.

c) Load Nonstop
When the car load exceeds a predetermined limit, the elevator shall not
respond to hall calls.

d) Door Failure Operation

When an obstruction prevents a door from opening, the controller shall attempt
its removal by repeated opening and closing, failing which the car shall travel
to the next floor.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 384

e) Self – Diagnostic Facility

The Controller shall perform self - diagnostic tests and report the health of the
system. The system shall take care of minor faults like door operation and
motor overheating.
f) Car Failure Operation
In case of car mal-function, the system shall make a self - diagnostic check
and then allow the car to travel to the nearest floor at slow speed, if safe.
g) Selective floor Service
Programming for selective floors services shall be software driven.

h) Auto Fan Off

In case no calls are registered for pre-set time, the cabin fan shall be
automatically switched off.

4.4 Drawings
Before the commencement of work, the contractor on receipt of building drawings,
shall prepare and submit all drawings, necessary shop drawings showing the
general arrangement of the lift equipment for the approval of the Engineer-in-
Charge. Contractor shall also check the exact dimensions of the lift shaft at site,
before taking up the manufacturing the equipment at site.

4.5 Painting
All exposed metal work furnished under these specifications, except as otherwise
specified shall be properly spray painted over an anti-corrosive primer coat.

4.6 Schedule of requirements for lifts:

Sl. 13 Passenger 20
Description
No. Lift Passeng
er
Hospital
Lift
1 Total No. Of 3 2
Elevators
2 Operation Simplex/ Simplex/
duplex Duplex
3 Control ACVVVF ACVVVF
Operation With /
4 W / WO W / WO
Without Attendant
5 Capacity
a. Rated 1360
Load (Kg)
b. No. of Persons 13 20

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 385

Gearless, Machine
Gearless with
6 Machine RoomLess
MachineRoom

7 Rated Speed 1.0 m/s 0.75 m/s

(MPS)
8 Floors B+4 B+4
Served
Travel
9
Distance -
Approx.
10 Stops &
Openings
A. No. Of 5 5
Stops
B. No. Of 5 5
Openings
C. Same Yes Yes
Side
Car And
11 1000 1200
Hoist Way
Entrance (In
mm)

12 Height of Lift 2200 2200

Car
Machine As per CPWD
13 Not Applicable
Room Specifications
Dimensions

14 Pit Depth (in 1600 1600

mm)

15 Overhead (in 4250 4250

mm)
Noise Level
16 52 db 52 db (A)
(in Cabin
(A)
(Running
Car)
Panels with Honeycomb/ Moonrock
finish, Stainless steel (SS304). SS
17 Car Interior mirror finish handrails full length of rear
Finishes panel. Additional handrails on 2 sides
as per car size.

Automatic power-operated centre-

Car and opening doors; Honeycomb/ Moonrock
18
Landing finish, Stainless steel (SS304). Multi-
Doors beam infrared / ultrasonic door Sensor

Granite Flooring of shade as

19 Flooring
approved by Engineer-in-
charge.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 386

Residential II & III

Sl.
Description 13 Passenger Lift
No.

1 Total No. Of 3
Elevators
2 Operation Simplex/Duplex
3 Control ACVVVF
Operation With /
4 W / WO
WithoutAttendant

5 Capacity

a. Rated Load (Kg) 1088

b. No. of Persons 13

6 Machine Gearless, Machine

Room Less
7 Rated Speed (MPS) 1.0m/s
8 Floors Served

9 Travel Distance -
Approx.
10 Stops & Openings
A. No. Of Stops 5
B. No. Of Openings 5
C. Same Side Yes
Car And Hoist Way
11 1000
Entrance (In mm)

12 Height of Lift Car 2200

Machine Room
13 Not Applicable
Dimensions

14 Pit Depth (in mm) 1600

15 Overhead (in mm) 4250

Noise Level (in Cabin

16 52 db (A)
(Running Car)
Panels with Honeycomb/
Moonrock finish, Stainless
17 Car Interior Finishes steel (SS304). SS mirror
finish handrails full length of
rear panel. Additional

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 387

handrails on 2 sides as per

car size.

Automatic power-operated
centre- opening doors;
18 Car and Landing
Honeycomb/ Moonrock
Doors
finish, Stainless steel
(SS304). multi- beam
infrared / ultrasonic door
Sensor
Granite Flooring of shade
19 Flooring
as approved by Engineer-
in- charge.
Residential IV
Sl.
Description 13 Passenger Lift
No.

1 Total No. Of Elevators 1

2 Operation Simplex/Duplex
3 Control ACVVVF
Operation With /
4 WithoutAttendant
W / WO
5 Capacity
a. Rated Load (Kg) 1088
b. No. of Persons 13

6 Machine Gearless, Machine

Room Less
7 Rated Speed (Mps) 1.0 m/s
8 Floors Served
9 Travel Distance -
Approx.
10 Stops & Openings
A. No. Of Stops
B. No. Of Openings
C. Same Side Yes
Car And Hoist Way
11 1000
Entrance (Inmm)

12 Height of Lift Car 2200

13 Machine Room Not Applicable

Dimensions

14 Pit Depth (in mm) 1600

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 388

15 Overhead (in mm) 4250

Noise Level (in Cabin

16 52 db (A)
(RunningCar)
Panels with Honeycomb/
Moonrock finish,
17 Car Interior Finishes Stainless steel (SS304).
SS mirror finish handrails
full length of rear panel.
Additional handrails on 2
sides as per car size.
Automatic power-
operated centre- opening
18 Car and Landing doors; Honeycomb/
Doors Moonrock finish,
Stainless steel (SS304).
Multi-beam infrared /
ultrasonic door Sensor
Granite Flooring of
19 Flooring
shade as
approved by Engineer-
in- charge.
4.7 Testing
Testing at manufacturer’s facility of the various equipment and components as
required by IS codes/standards and other standards shall be done before
dispatching the materials to site. If Engineer-in-charge or his representative, wishes
to witness these tests, the scheduled dates for the same shall be informed well in
advance before carrying out such tests.
4.7.1 Tests at Site:
a. LevelingTest:
Accuracy ofthefloorlevellingshallbetested with thelift empty,fully loaded.Thelift
shall run to each floor while travelling both in upward and downward
directions and the actual distance of car floor above/ below landing floor shall
be measured. The tolerances for levelling shall be as +/- 5mm accuracy.

b. SafetyGearTest:
Instantaneous safety gear controlled by a governor, should be tested with
contract load and a contract speed, governor being operated by hand. Two
tests should be made, however, with wedge clamps or flexible clamp safeties,
one with contract load in the car and the other with 68 kg (equivalent to one
person) in the car. The stopping distance obtained should be compared with
specified figures and the guides, car platform, and safety gear should be
carefully examined afterwards for signs of permanent distortion.
Counterweight safety gear should be tripped by the counterweight governor
and the stopping distance shall be noted. In this case, The governor tripping
speed shouldexceed that of the car safety governor but by not more than 10
percent.
During the safety gear test, car speed (from the governor orthe main sheave)
can be determined at theinstant ortripping speed with that stated in I.S. The
governor jaws and rope should be examined for any undue wear.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 389

c. ContractSpeed:
This should be measured with contract load in the car, with half load and with
no load, and should not vary from the contract speed by more than 10 percent.
The convenient method is by counting the number of revolutions, made by the
sheave or drum in a known time.Chalkmarkonthesheaveordrumanda
stopswitch willfacilitatetimingbut care must be exercised to ensure that no
acceleration orretardation periods are included. If the roping is 2 to 1, the
sheave speed is twice the car speed.Alternatively, the speed can be
measured by a tachometerapplied directly to shaft immediately below the
sheave.

d. Car andlandingdoorsinterlocks:
The lift shall not move with any door open. The car door relay contact and
the retiring release cammust betested.The working
ofthedooroperationandthesafetyedgesand light equipment, if any, provided
shall also be examined.

e. NormalTerminalStoppingSwitches:
This shall be tested by letting the car run to each terminal landing in turn, first
with no load and then with contract load and by taking measurements, top and
bottom over travels can be ascertained.

f. FinalTerminalStoppingSwitches:
The normal terminal stopping switches shall be disconnected for this test. It
shall be ensured that these switches operate before the buffers are engaged.

g. Insulation Resistance:
This shall be measured (after removing the electronic PCBs and their
connection) between power and control lines and earth and shall not be less
than 5 mega-ohms when measured with D.C. voltage of 500 volts. The test
shall be carried out with contactors so connected together as to ensure that all
parts of every circuit are simultaneously tested.

h. Earthing:
Allconduits, switches,casingand similarmetalworkshallhaveearthcontinuity.
i. Buffers:The carshouldberun on to itsbuffersat contract speed and with contract
load inthe car to test whether there is any permanent distortion of the car or
buffers. The counterweight buffers should be tested similarly.

Undertaking

We,M/s ,
here by submit this undertaking in respect of work of

We will provide all the required spares and materials for smooth comprehensive
maintenance of lifts till their useful life of 20 years from the date of successful
handing overof thetotalproject tothedepartment. In no case, the department shall be
asked to replace/ upgrade the lift or any parts i/c controller either manufactured by
us or outsourced from our vendors, before expiry of the life of equipment, on

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 390

account of becoming the model obsolete/ upgraded design. No extra charges shall
be claimed on account of upgradation/ obsoleteness of spares during the life time of
the lifts.

1. We also agree for carrying out maintenance for 3 years i.e., till competition of
defect liability period
1. (Signature of lift manufacturer)
Name:
Designation:
Company Name & address:

2. (Signature of Contractor)
Name:
Designation:
CompanyName&address:

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 391

C-5- Substation
5.0 Technical Specifications for Sub-Station Work

The specifications given below pertains to the Electrical sub-station

installation work. Sub-station equipment is proposed to be located in a
separate Building. The Electrical sub-station consists of HT Panel Room,
Transformer rooms, LT Panel room. The electrical service connection is at
11KV supply from the electrical utility i.e., UPPCL (PVVNL). The
coordination with local electricity authority including obtaining the approval
from the Central Electricity Authority shall be the sole responsibility of the
contractor. However, statutory fees paid by the contractor will be
reimbursed.

The Electrical power flow will be from Metering Unit to ESIC’s incoming H.T.
VCB Panel to 11 KV / 440V step down transformers to the Main LT Panel.
The power from Transformer to LT Panel shall be fed using sandwich type
Copper Bus bar Trunking. Under power supply failure conditions, the D.G.
Set shall be started to cater to emergency loads of the Hospital, other non-
residential Buildings.

These technical specifications shall be read along with the General

Conditions for all E&M works given under subhead C-B.

5.1 HT Panel

Technical Specification for 11 KV VCB Panels.

The HT Panel shall comprise of Indoor type, floor mounted metal clad, 11
KV VCB panel board with 6 panels, 2 I/C & 4 O/G panels (Three for Non-
Residential + One Spare), totally enclosed & fully interlocked, Horizontal
draw out, Horizontal isolation type breaker as per IEC-62271- 100/200, as
amended up to date and additional specifications, having capacities as
mentioned below, shall be designed as per requirement and get it approved
by Engineer-in-charge as per following specifications.

5.1.1 Codes and Standards

a. All equipment and materials shall be designed, manufactured and

tested in accordance with the latest applicable Indian Standards (IS)
and IEC which are mentioned above except wherever modified and/or
supplemented by this specification.
b. The electrical installation shall meet the requirements of Indian
Electricity Rules as amended up to date and relevant IS Code of
Practice. In addition, other rules and regulations applicable to the work
shall be followed.

5.1.2 Design Criteria

a) The VCB, shall be used to supply power to power transformers. The

VCBs shall be located in a clean atmosphere. Equipment shall be
furnished in strict accordance with the design and requirements.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 392

b) For continuous operation at specified ratings, temperature rise of the

various VCB components shall be limited to the permissible values
stipulated in the relevant IEC standards.
c) The VCB, and components thereof shall be capable of withstanding the
mechanical forces and thermal stresses of the short circuit current
without any damage or deterioration of material.
d) Circuit breaker shall not produce any harmful over-voltage during
switching off induction motors, unloaded lines and unloaded
transformers. If required, surge protective device shall be provided in
the scope of supply to limit over-voltage.

5.1.3 Construction
a) The VCB shall confirm to the latest IS/ IEC 62271-200, Front-Lateral-
Rear access, medium voltage parts which are connected to earth and
with separate the bus bars, the withdrawable part (circuit breaker, fuse-
contactor, disconnector truck or earthing truck) type, which means that
the panels shall be four side internal arc tested and shall have metal
partitions. The panel shall be floor mounted, draw out type. Design and
construction shall be such as to allow extension at either end (modular).
Unless otherwise stated, the H.T. (11 kV) Vacuum Circuit Breaker Panel
shall conform to IS 3427, IS: 13118 (1991), IEC 62271- 100 & 200 for
breakers & Panel and Indian Electricity Rules and Regulations
amended up to date.

b) The panel shall be single break, trip free mechanism, motor charged
and manually/electrically closing breaker suitable for use on 11 KV, 3
Phase, 50Hz A.C. supply with STC 26.3 KA for 3 Sec. Internal Arc for
AFLR 26.3 kA at rated voltage for 1s at individual compartments i.e.,
Busbar, VCB and cable compartment. complete with self-contained,
fully interlocked, rack in and rack out mechanism, air insulated and
encapsulated copper bus bars not less than 1500 Amps capacity,
breaker featured with ON/OFF indicator with hand trip device, spring
release coil, shunt trip coil and auxiliary switch of 6 NO + 6 NC and
equipped with following switch gears and accessories. Separate
earthing truck shall be required for each bus earthing & cable earthing.
Earthing truck shall be so designed that it is impossible to earth alive. It
shall be provided with capacitive voltage divider and complete with
audio visual annunciation, one for each panel. Contractor should offer
all type of test reports as per IEC62271-100 & 200 for the model being
offered.

c) Enclosure and internal: Partitioning of the cubicles is of 2mm thick,

CRCA sheet, coated with Alu-Zinc for corrosion resistance. The front
shall be closed off by pressure resistant doors which open to an angle
of almost 130°.

d) The correct performance of the circuit breaker operations shall be

ensured by proper interlocks with the addition of mechanical indicators
and inspection windows, guarantee the utmost safety for the operating
personnel.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 393

e) The VCB assembly shall comprise a continuous, dead-front, line-up of

free standing, vertical cubicles. Each cubicle shall have a front-hinged
door with latches and a removable back cover. All covers and doors
shall be provided with neoprene gaskets. The panel board shall be
Provided with Lifting Lugs for each shipping section.

f) VCB cubicle shall be so sized to permit opening of the front access door
only when the breaker is pulled out to TEST position. The movement of
the Circuit Breaker from TEST to SERVICE position should be possible
only with the Breaker door closed.

g) Circuit breakers, instrument transformers, bus bars, cable compartment

etc., shall be housed in separate compartments within the cubicle. The
design shall be such that failure of one equipment shall not affect the
adjacent units.

h) All relays, meters, breaker control switches, selector switches and

indicating lamps shall be flush mounted on the respective cubicle door
or on control cabinet built on the front of the cubicle. AC/DC auxiliary
supply switches / isolation switches for cubicle space heater, cubicle
lamp, spring charging motor circuit shall be located inside metering
compartment.

i) Dummy panel shall be provided in the VCB line up, if required, for easy
termination access of power and control cables. Dummy panel / bus
trunking panel shall be of full cubicle with closed roof and rear cover
similar to enclosures for active cubicles.

5.1.4 Bus and Bus Taps

The main buses and connections shall be of high conductivity Electrolytic
copper as per IS:1897. The busbar shall be insulated, covered, and
supported on rigid epoxy support insulators, sized for specified current
ratings with maximum temperature.

a) Bus bars shall be of same size for the entire length of the VCB. Continuous
current rating of bus connections shall be same as that of continuous in
panel current rating of associated breaker.

b) Adequate contact pressure shall be ensured by means of two bolts

connection. Bus bar joints shall be complete with high tensile steel bolts
and Belleville washers and nuts. Bus bars shall be thoroughly cleaned at
the joint locations and suitable contact grease shall be applied just before
making a joint

c) Bus bars shall be sleeved with heat shrinkable joint sleeves with adequate
phase/ground clearances. Insulating sleeves for bus bars and cast-resin
shrouds for joints shall be provided, suitable for maximum temperature rise
of bus bars.
d) All buses and connections shall be supported and braced to withstand
stresses due to maximum short circuit current and also to take care of any
thermal expansion.
e) Bus bars shall be colour coded for easy identification and so located that
the sequence R-Y-B shall be from left to right, top to bottom or front to rear,

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 394

when viewed from front of the switch-gear assembly.

5.1.5 Vacuum Circuit Breaker

a) Vacuum Circuit breaker shall be triple pole, single throw type, not less than
1250 Amps rated.

b) Circuit breakers shall be Cassette type, horizontal isolation and horizontal

draw out type, having SERVICE, TEST and DISCONNECTED positions
with positive indication for each position.

c) Circuit breakers of identical rating shall be physically and electrically

interchangeable. The Operating duty of offered CB shall be O- 0.3 sec –
CO- 3 min – CO. (Opening operation followed, after 0.3 sec delay, by a
close open operation, finally after 3 minutes delay another close open
operation)

d) The make of Vacuum Interrupter shall be same as that of Circuit breaker.

The Vacuum Interrupter should withstand 100 nos. of full load short circuit
operations. The panel should be tested with power frequency withstand
voltage of 70 kV rms & Impulse Withstand Voltage of 170 kV peak.

e) Circuit breaker shall have motor wound spring charged trip free
mechanism with anti-pumping-feature and shunt trip. In addition, facility for
manual charging of spring shall be provided. The spring charging handle
shall be an integral part of the Circuit Breaker. The vacuum bottles shall
be encapsulated in epoxy housings. Open type vacuum bottles shall not
be Provided.

f) For motor wound mechanism, spring charging shall take place

automatically after each breaker closing operation. One open-close-open
operation of the circuit breaker shall be possible after failure of power
supply to the motor.

g) Mechanical safety interlock shall be provided to prevent:

I. The circuit breaker from being racked in or out of the service position
when the breaker is closed.

II. Racking in the circuit breaker unless the control plug is fully engaged.

III. Automatic safety shutters shall be provided to fully cover the female
primary disconnects when the breaker is withdrawn.

h) Each breaker shall be provided with an emergency manual trip,

mechanical ON-OFF indication, an operation counter and mechanism
charge/discharge indicator. The breaker shall also be provided with
Mechanical anti-pumping feature.

i) Each breaker shall be provided with Auxiliary switch, with 6 NO + 6 NC

contacts, mounted on the draw out portion of the VCB. Position/cell switch
with 3 NO + 1 NC contacts, one each for TEST and SERVICE position.
Auxiliary switch, with 4 NO + 4 NC contacts, mounted on the stationary

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 395

portion of the VCB and operated mechanically by a sliding lever from the
breaker in SERVICE position. Alternatively, electrically reset type latching
relay may be used for the purpose.

j) Switch contact shall be rated 10 Amp AC. and 2 Amp DC at their respective
operating voltage.

k) Closing and Tripping coils shall be continuous rated to ensure longer life.
The Circuit Breaker mechanism shall be designed for easy access to the
coils and spring charging motor.

l) Meter selector switches shall be maintained contact, stay put type with
knob handle. Ammeter & voltmeter selector switches shall be four position
type. Ammeter selector switches shall have make before break feature to
prevent open circuiting of CT secondary.

m) Breaker control switch shall be multistage, spring return to normal, with

lost motion device and pistol grip handle. The protection and tripping
arrangement of incoming & outgoing circuit breaker shall be as per actual
requirement / design.

5.1.6 Interlocking features

In order to ensure proper operation and to prevent dangerous situations and

malfunction, that might jeopardize the personnel safety and put at risk the
installation functionality, a series of interlocks must be provided to protect
the operators and the VCB itself.

In particular the following interlocks must be provided:

a) The withdrawable part can only be moved from the

test/disconnected position (and back) when the circuit breaker is off.

b) The circuit breaker can only be switched ‘ON’ when the

withdrawable part is in the test or service position. In the in-between
position, the circuit breaker is mechanically interlocked.

c) Connecting and disconnecting of the control wiring shall only be

possible in the test position of the circuit breaker.

d) The shutters shall be secured independently of each other with

padlocks when the circuit breaker part has been removed.Cable
and circuit breaker doors shall be pad-lockable.
e) Prevent the racking in of a circuit breaker truck having a different
size through the codification of the control wiring plug.

5.1.7 Control & Indication

The circuit breaker shall be wired up for local & remote operation. Each
Breaker cubicle shall be equipped with the following: -

i. One (1) TEST-NORMAL-TRIAL selector switch stay put type with

pistol grip handle and key interlock.
ii. Two (2) heavy-duty oil tight, push buttons for TRIP &CLOSE.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 396

iii. Four (4) indicating lights on front of compartments:

GREEN : Breaker Open and Spring Charged
RED : Breaker Closed
AMBER : Trip/Trip circuit trouble

iv. Lamps shall be clustered type LED module pilot lights in thermoplastic
enclosure with polycarbonate lens and diffuser. LED shall be protected
by in-built fuse with surge suppressor and leakage voltage glow
protection. Lamp and lens shall be replaceable from front.

v. The general scheme of connection for control, interlock and protection

is shown in the enclosed drawings. Detailed requirements shall be
intimated later to the successful tenderer, who shall develop and
furnish the schemes accordingly.

5.1.8 Current Transformer

a) Accommodation shall be provided in the circuit breaker panel to mount
one set of three numbers dual core dual ratio CTs for metering and
protection purposes. Access to the CTs for cleaning, testing or changing
shall be from the front, back or top of the panel.

b) Accuracy class of the Current Transformers shall be as per IS/IEC 60044-

1: 2003. The protection CTs shall be of accuracy class 5 P 10 of IS 2705-
Part III as amended up to date. The metering CTs shall conform to the
metering ratio and accuracy class 0.5 for incomer and class 1 for
outgoing panels.

c) Current transformer secondary shall be rated for 1 A or 5 A, depending

on requirement. Secondary terminals of CTs shall be brought out suitably
to a terminal block which will be easily accessible for testing and terminal
connections.

d) Feeders requiring remote metering and/or current monitoring shall be

provided with current transducers with calibration for full scale reading.

5.1.9 Voltage Transformer

a) Voltage Transformer (VT) shall be cast-resin, draw out mounted in a
separate compartment below the circuit breaker in the same panel. The
VT shall be mounted on the separate trolley and not on the breaker
trolley. Voltage transformer shall be accessible from front of panel & shall
be independent of breaker position/ operation. However, due to design
constraints if Line PT & Bus PT cannot be offered in separate
compartment in same panel, then separate Line PT & Bus PT panel shall
be offered by Manufacturer. A voltage transformer of burden not less than
100 VA and of proper ratio as specified shall be provided.

b) High voltage windings of voltage transformer shall be protected by

current limiting fuses. The voltage transformer and fuses shall be
completely disconnected.

c) MCBs shall be suitably located to permit easy replacement while the VCB
is energized. The accuracy class for the VT shall be class 0.5 as per IS

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 397

3156 Parts I to III for incomer and class 1 for outgoing panels.

5.1.10 Numerical Relays

a) The offered relays shall be provided both HV and LV sides completely

numerical with protective elements having software algorithm based on
sampling of energized currents, analogue to digital conversion and
numerical handling. Hardware based measurement shall not be
acceptable.

b) Relays shall be suitable for flush mounting type and consisting of

multifunctional draw out type modules. In case separate module is
considered, then main protection relay and module should be supplied
from the same manufacturer. Panel shall be supplied with numerical relay
along with arc sensors to protect from arc flash fault at Breaker, Cable
and Busbar. To avoid any nuisance tripping for ARC, relay should work
on principle of detecting Light and Current both to take decision.

c) The relay shall have minimum 4 CT inputs, of which 3 Nos. can be used
for over current and 1 No. for Earth fault. The relay shall be suitable for
both 2 CT and 3 CT connections. It shall be possible to energize the relay
from either AC or DC auxiliary supply.

d) The relay enclosure shall be dust tight having degree of protection

minimum as IP5X.

e) The relay must have facility for local settings through front keypad from
relay itself. Relay should have facility of online relay setting i.e., it should
be possible to alter setting without switching off breaker or contactor.

f) The offered relay shall have LED / LCD display for settings, status,
measurement and fault data & indication. It shall have at least 4 Fixed
function LEDs (for fault trip, relay healthy, control supply ON & Relay out
of service) and 4 programmable LEDs
g) Relay shall have comprehensive self-diagnostic feature with indication of
relay failure on relay front and alarm should be generated without tripping
the feeder. However, while diagnostic circuit runs, it must not interfere in
the main protective relay circuit and allow working of main protective
circuit continuously.

h) The relays shall have the following tools for fault diagnostics.

I. Fault record – The relay shall have the facility to store at least 5 last
fault records with information on cause of trip, date, time, trip values of
electrical parameters.
II. Event record – The relay shall have the facility to store at least 75
sequence of event records with 1ms resolution.
III. Disturbance records – The relay shall have capacity to store at least 5
disturbance record waveforms with at least 3s duration each.
i) No separate earth bus is necessary for the relays. It shall be possible to
connect the relay earth to the common earth bus in the substation.

j) The offered relay must be immune to any kind of electromagnetic

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 398

interference. Contractor to submit all related type test reports for the
offered model along with the offer.

k) The relay should conform to the requirements of IS: 3231 / IEC60255

standards with respect to features/ construction/design etc. All the Relays
shall belong to a common platform and shall be of single make with
Electromechanical relays in Draw out casing.

l) The relay shall be built in communication facility for hooking the relay on
MMI / upstream communication system. The offered relay shall have a
comprehensive local MMI for interface.
It shall have the following minimum elements to enable viewing and
setting the relay locally.
I. key tactile keypad for browsing and setting the relay menu
II. The relay shall have a front RS232 communication port for connecting
to a local PC/Laptop for setting and viewing the data from the relay.
III. The relays shall have a RS485 rear port for connecting many relays in
multidrop fashion to connect to a remote master (SCADA/DCS)
IV. It shall be possible to provide the relay with at least two standard
communication protocols (viz, MODBUS &BaC NET IEC-870-5-103)
in addition to any proprietary protocols.

m) Set of software should be supplied along with relays for viewing and
downloading measurement, fault records and to carry out easy settings
of relays locally.

n) The relay shall be suitable for providing the following protections:

i. The relay shall have 2 independent stages for both over current and earth
fault protection.
ii. First stage can be selected as definite time or inverse time over current
characteristic. The inverse characteristics shall be as per IEC which
should include normal inverse, very inverse, extremely inverse, long
inverse curves and shall be soft ware selectable at site.

iii. The second stage of protection can be with instantaneous or definite time
operations. There should be a possibility to disable the unit in case of
contactor-controlled feeders.

iv. Relay shall be suitable for both residually connected CT input as well as
CBCT (Circuit Breaker Coil Tester) input. This protection should have
automatic doubling function when the protected object is connected to
network i.e., at starting, allowing the set value being lower than the
connection in rush current. Relay should have minimum 2 nos.
independent selectable setting groups.

o) In case any trip function is not available in a single relay, separate

numerical relays shall be provided to achieve the requirement. All
protective relays shall be provided with self-reset type of contacts.

p) Apart from protection relays, each breaker shall be provided with

separate discrete auxiliary relays for anti-tripping or Trip-free relay (trip
circuit supervision Relay), trip annunciation (Annunciator Relay), trip

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 399

supervision (Alarm Relay), electrically reset type breaker contact

multiplication (A.C. Circuit Breaker auxiliary) relay and lockout or master
trip relay functions. Lockout relay shall be hand reset type. Individual trip
circuit supervision function shall be provided with respect to each trip coil
of circuit breaker.

q) Numerical under voltage relays with time delay relay including VT fuse
failure relay shall be provided for Bus VTs.

r) Zero-sequence CT and associated relay combination shall be such as to

ensure a pickup sensitivity of 10A primary ground fault current.

s) Circuit Breaker failure protection:

The relay should have a feature of circuit breaker failure protection, which
generates another trip signal if the breaker fails to trip on fault, which can
be wired to upstream breaker trip coil. The relay shall have
comprehensive self-diagnostic feature. This feature shall continuously
monitor the healthiness of all the hardware and software elements of the
relay. Any failure detected shall be annunciate through a output watchdog
contact. The fault diagnosis information shall be displayed on the LCD
and through the communication port.

t) Arc Flash Fault Protection: Each panel shall be equipped with the
following for Arc flash fault protection: Relay should have integrated
feature sensing any ARC produced in any of the 3 chambers i.e.,
Breaker, Cable and Bus bar a part from Protection features. In case
integrated offer is not available, separate module to be considered
without compromising on the tripping time. Necessary sensors to be
supplied along with the relay and it should have supervision of these
sensors. Relay should operate due to ARC such that overall relay trip
time should not exceed 18-20 ms.

5.1.11 Metering Instrument, Panel Accessories (Digital)

5.1.12 Metering
Digital Multifunction Meter, accuracy class 0.5, with LED display of Max
Demand Load, Current, Voltage, Frequency, Active, Reactive, Apparent
Power & Energy; Power factor; % unbalance of current & voltage;
calculated neutral current; %TDH individual harmonics up to 15th level
(complying with IEC61557-12) with RS 485 port and protection MCBs. and
required accessories to complete the system.
Lamp indication shall be provided to indicate ON/OFF (BY red green
respectively) of switch gear.
Voltage Selection Scheme: VT Transfer Relay shall be incorporated to
provide necessary potential for metering. This will be necessary when
energy metering is done on individual feeders or where VT supply is used
for trip circuits. Alternatively, PTs shall be provided on both the bus
sections (incomers) with individual metering on each incomer.
Instrument Panels: The instrument panel shall form part of the housing.
Relays, meters and instruments shall be mounted as per general
arrangement drawings to be submitted by the tenderer. They shall be

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 400

preferably of flush mounting type at a maximum height of 2000mm.

5.1.13 MCB
MCBs, shall be with manual close / open mechanism. Automatic tripping
provision for over load and short circuit shall also be provided. MCB shall
be provided with required number of auxiliary contacts as per circuit
requirement.

5.1.14 Push Button

Push button shall be heavy duty, shrouded, push to actuate type with
coloured button and inscription plate. Each push button shall have 2 NO +
2 NC contacts, rated for AC and DC operating voltage.

Identification tags shall be fitted to all wire terminals to render identification

easy and to facilitate checking in accordance with IS375. Necessary
terminal blocks and cable entries shall be provided for RTD relay wiring,
power supply etc.

5.1.15 Small Wiring

The VCB shall be fully wired at the factory to ensure proper functioning of
control, protection, transfer and interlocking schemes. The small wiring
shall be carried out with minimum 2.5 sq.mm multi FRLS PVC insulated
copper conductor cables.
a) Fuse links and MCB shall be provided to permit individual circuit isolation
from bus wires without disturbing other circuits. All spare contacts of
relays, switches and other devices shall be wired up to terminal blocks.

b) Each wire shall be identified, at both ends, with interlocking type

permanent markers bearing wire numbers. AC / DC wiring shall have
separate color-coding.

c) Wire termination shall be made with crimping type connectors with

insulating sleeves. Wires shall not be spliced between terminals. All
spare contacts of relays, timers, auxiliary switches shall be wired up to
the terminal block.

5.1.16 Terminal Block

1100V grade, multi way terminal block complete with mounting channel,
binding screws and washers for wire connections and marking strip for
circuit identification shall be provided for terminating the panel wiring.
Terminals shall be stud type, suitable for terminating 2.5 sq.mm Multi
stranded copper conductor cable. Terminals for C.T. secondary leads shall
have provision for grounding.

a) Not more than two wires shall be connected to any terminal. Spare
terminals equal in number to 20% active terminals shall be furnished.
Separate terminal blocks shall be provided for AC/ DC wiring
termination.
b) Terminal blocks used for interface with SCADA via termination cabinet
shall be suitably sized to facilitate proper termination of interconnecting
cables.

5.1.17 Cable Termination

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 401

a) VCB shall be designed for cable entry from bottom. Sufficient space shall
be provided for ease of termination and connection.

b) Gland plates shall be of minimum 3 mm thick. The gland plate and

supporting arrangement for incoming power cables shall be of CRCA
Sheet with Zinc coating or pre-galvanized sheet.

c) Sufficient space shall be provided between the power cable termination

and gland plate. Core balance CTs wherever specified, shall be
accommodated within this space, inside the cubicle.

5.1.18 Ground Bus

a) A ground bus, rated to carry maximum fault current, shall extend for the
full length of the VCB. The ground bus shall be provided with two-bolt
drilling with G.I. bolts and nuts at each end to receive 50 mm x 5 mm
copper strip.

b) Each stationary unit shall be connected directly to the ground bus. The
frame of each circuit breaker and draw out Voltage Transformer unit
shall be grounded through heavy multiple contacts at all times except
when the primary disconnecting devices are separated by a safe
distance.

c) Wherever, the schematic diagrams indicate a definite ground at the

VCB, sufficient size conductor for each circuit thus grounded shall be run
independently to the ground bus and connected thereto.

d) CT and VT secondary neutrals shall be earthed through removable links

so that earth of one circuit may be removed without disturbing other.
5.1.19 Earthing Truck
a) Earthing trucks shall be provided for earthing the VCB bus bars or
outgoing cables. The trucks shall have a voltage transformer and an
interlock to prevent earthing of any live connection. The trucks shall
have audio-visual annunciation to warn the operator against earthing of
live connections. It shall not be possible to use bus-earthing truck for
cable earthing & vice versa. Earthing truck shall be non- fault making
type. Panels with integral earth switch are acceptable.

b) The earthing of the breaker body and moving portion shall be so

arranged that the earthing of the non-current carrying structure to the
frame earth bar is completed well before the main circuit breaker plugs
enter the fixed house sockets. The entire panel board shall have a
common tinned copper earth bar of suitable section with 2 earth
terminals for effectively earthing metallic portion of the panels. The
frame earthing of panel shall be in accordance with Section earthing of
these specifications.

5.1.20 Caution notice on suitable metal plate shall be affixed at the back of each
vertical panel.

5.1.21 Space heaters and Plug socket

Each cubicle shall be provided with Anti-condensation thermostat-controlled

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 402

space heaters and 5A, 3 pin plug socket. These space heaters shall be
suitable for operation on 240 V, 1 phase, 50 Hz A.C. In addition, motor
feeder cubicle shall be wired-up for feeding the motor space heater through
a suitable rated breaker auxiliary NC contact and/or contactor. Cubicle
heater, Motor heater, Plug/socket circuits shall have individual switch fuse
units.

5.1.22 A.C/D.C Power Supply

It shall be possible to energize the relay from either AC or DC auxiliary
supply. The following power supplies shall be made available to each VCB:

DC shall be provided through SMF batteries of minimum 26 AH capacity

with a battery charger as per recommendation of the manufacturer both for
protection as well as indications. Alternatively, Power Pack converters fed
through PT/ 230V externally could be provided with 2 Nos., 12 volts, suitable
AH SMF batteries for tripping. In cases where tripping is fed through PT, VA
burden of PT shall be suitably increased (say 200 VA) as recommended by
the manufacturer depending upon the number of panels and connected
controls. In addition, external DC supply shall be provided for indications
etc. through 2 No. SMF batteries of 12volts of minimum 26 AH capacity with
a battery charger as per recommendation of the manufacturer.

Numerical Relay shall have in built breaker failure protection as local

breaker backup. Built in Trip Circuit Supervision to ensure healthy trip
circuit. The offered relays shall have a battery backed real time clock for
providing accurate time reference.

a) Isolating switch fuse units shall be provided at each VCB for the
incoming supplies, 4-pole, single throw for A.C. and 2-pole, double throw
for D.C. Moulded case circuit breaker (MCCB) shall also be accepted as
an alternative for AC circuit only.

b) Bus-wires of adequate capacity shall be provided to distribute the

incoming supplies to different cubicles. Isolating switch fuse units /
MCCB shall be provided at each cubicle for A.C/D.C. supplies.

c) A.C. load shall be so distributed as to present a balance loading on

three-phase supply system.

5.1.23 Tropical Protection

a) All equipment, accessories and wiring shall have fungus protection,
involving special treatment of insulation and metal against fungus,
insects & corrosion.

b) Screens of corrosion resistant material shall be furnished on all

ventilating louvers to prevent the entrance of insects.
5.1.24 Painting
a) The panels shall undergo seven tank pre-treatment process followed by
powder coat painting having a paint thickness as per Manufacturer’s
standards.

b) The VCB shall be finished in light gray colour (or) any other colour as
per Industry standards with two coats of powder paint. The coating shall

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 403

be done electro statically followed by stoving.

c) Sufficient quantity of touch-up paint shall be furnished for application at

the site.

5.1.25 Tests
The VCB shall be completely assembled, wired, adjusted and tested at the
factory as per the relevant standards.
Tests at Works: All routine and other tests prescribed in IS shall be carried
out at the manufacturer’s works before the dispatch in the presence of
Engineer-in-charge or his authorized representative. Copies of the test
certificates shall be furnished to the department. The Contractor shall give
15 days’ advance intimation to Engineer-in-charge for witnessing the routine
tests. No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture before
inspection, unless inspection is waived off in writing. The acceptance of any
quantity of material shall in no way relieve the Contractor of any of his
responsibilities for meeting all requirements of the specification, and shall
not prevent subsequent rejection if such material is later found to be
defective.

5.1.26 Type Tests

The Manufacturer should submit the Type test reports conducted earlier on
similar equipment’s/ Panels carried out from National / International
accredited Laboratory as per relevant IS/ IEC-62271-200 and IEC-60694
Standard.
5.1.27 Installation

The installation work shall cover assembly of panels lining up, grouting the
units etc. In the case of multi panels switch boards after connecting up the
bus bar all joint shall be insulated with HV insulation tape or with approved
insulation compound. A common earth bar shall be run preferably at the
back of the switch board connecting all the sections for connecting the earth
system. All protection, indications & metering connections and wirings shall
be completed.
Where trip supply battery is installed, the unit shall be commissioned,
completing initial charging of the batteries. All relay instruments and meters
shall be mounted and connected with appropriate wiring. Calibration checks
of units as necessary and required by the licensee like CTs, VTs Energy
Meters etc. shall be completed before pre-commission checks are under
taken.

5.1.28 Testing and Commissioning

Procedure for testing and commissioning of relay shall be in general and in

accordance with good practice. Commissioning checks and tests shall
include in addition to checking of all small wiring connections, relays
calibration and setting tests by secondary injection method and primary
injection method. Primary injection test will be preferred for operation of
relay through CTs. Before panel board is commissioned, provision of the
safety namely fire extinguishers, rubber mats and danger board shall be
ensured. In addition, all routine megger tests shall be performed. Checks
and test shall include following.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 404

a)
Operation checks and lubrication of all moving parts.
b)
Interlock function checks.
c)
Continuity checks of wiring, fuses etc. as required.
d)
Insulation tests.
e)
Trip test and protection gear tests.
f)
The complete panel shall be tested with 5000 V megger for insulation
between poles and poles to earth. Insulation test of secondary CTs
and VT.
g) Any other tests as may be required by the Licensee/ Inspector shall be
conducted
h) Where specified, the entire switch board shall withstand high voltage
test after installation.
i) Any other test required by the consignee / inspecting officer.
5.1.29 Guaranteed Technical Particulars

S.No. Description Parameters

1.0SystemParameters
1.1 AmbientTemperaturefor 40°C
design
1.2 Main System 3-Phase,3-wire
1.3 Frequency 50Hz
1.4 Highest systemVoltage 36KV
1.5 Rated System Voltage 33KV
1.6 DryFrequencywithstand 70KV
voltage (rms)
1.7 Rated Impulse voltage 170KV(Peak)
1.8 SystemFaultLevel 26.3 KA
1.9 Duration 3sec
2.0 Breaker
2.1 Type Vacuum
2.1.1 Make AsperPreferredmakeslist
2.2 Controlvoltage
2.2.1 Closingcoil 24/30/48/110/220VDC
2.2.2 TrippingCoil 24/30/48/110/220VDC
2.2.3 SpringCharging motor 230VAC
2.3 CastleLock Requirement Yes
3.0 Current transformer
3.1 CT Make AsperPreferredmakeslist
3.2 CTFaultLevel 25KA
3.3 Duration 3sec
4.0 Potentialtransformer
4.1 PTMake AsperPreferredmakeslist
5.0 MainProtection Relays

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 405

5.1 Make AsperPreferredmakeslist

5.2 Type Numerical
5.3 Relaycommunication IEC103/ IEC61850/Modbus,
RS485
6.0Construction
6.1 Type of Switchboard Cassettetype
6.2 Installation Indoor
6.3 Mounting Floor Mounted
6.4 Front access Required
6.5 Degree of Protection IP 4X
6.6 Fabrication & Painting
6.6.1 Material CRCA
6.6.2 Thickness of Panel board 2mm
6.6.3 Surface protection Aluzinccoating/galvanization
6.6.4 Exterior & Interior shade RAL7032
6.7 Bus bars / Connections
6.7.1 Temperature rise limit 50°C
6.7.2 Rated Current 1250Amps
6.7.3 Material Copper
6.7.4 Phase Identification R,Y,Bsleeves
6.8 Earth Bus Bar
6.8.1 Material Copper
6.8.2 Size Notlessthan 250sq.mm
7.0FeederConnections
7.1 Size of conductor from Asperbreaker ratingand
Main Bus bar to Circuit Manufacturer's standards
Breaker
7.2 Material Copper
7.3 Insulation FullRatedVoltage Sleeve

7.4 Feeder Connections (in As perCTrating

cable chamber)
7.5 Material Copper
7.6 Insulation FullRatedVoltage Sleeve
8.0AuxiliaryEquipmentandSupply
8.1 Cable compartment As perManufacturer
Space standards
Heater
8.2 Breaker compartment As perManufacturer
Space Heater standards

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 406

8.3 Wiring & Size of wire Asperstandards

(Control and Auxiliary
Circuits)
8.3.1 Auxiliary Circuit FRLSPVCinsulatedcopper
conductor, 1.1 KV grade
8.3.2 CT Circuit/ PT Circuit/ 2.5 Sq.mm
Control Circuit
9.0TerminationArrangement
9.1 Incomer Feeder Entry- Bottom
9.2 Outgoing Feeder Entry-Bottom
9.3 Gland plate- For single 3mm thickGIor better
core, three core
10.0ReferenceStandards
10.1 Common specification for IS/IEC62271-1
high voltage switchgear
10.2 High voltage AC circuit IEC62271-100&IS13118:
breaker 1991(Reaffirmed2002)
10.3 AC metal-enclosed IS/IEC62271-200
switchgear and control
gear
10.4 Degree of Protection IS/ IEC 60529(2001)
provided by enclosures
10.5 Current transformer IS/IEC 60444-1 (2003)
(Part-I to III)
10.6 Potential transformer IS: 3156
(Part-I to III)
5.1.30 Incomer Panel (1 Nos each Comprising of):

a) 1-Metal clad housing with trunk having 1250 A, 350 MVA, TP integral
VCB with manually /electrically operated mechanism (spring charging
motor-230 V AC)
b) 1 set of air insulated copper bus bar of 1500 A
c) 1 set of isolating plug and receptacle
d) 1 set of automatic safety shutter
e) 1 set of breaker control switch, lockable type Trip/Neutral/Closed
(TNC)
f) 1 set of dual core CTs
g) Core l 200/50/5/5 A class 5P-10 (15 VA) protection
h) Core ll 200/50/5/5 A class 1.0 (15 VA) metering
i) Shunt trip closing coil 24 V DC / 110 V A.C
j) 11 KV end termination kit for 3 x300 sq.mm AI XLPE 11 KV armoured
cable
k) 3-Nos PTs of 33/0.11 KV of (100 VA) cast resin type
l) 1-set ON/OFF /Trip & Circuit healthy and phase indicating LED Lamps.
m) 1 No Microprocessor based Numerical relay with O/C EF &SC
Protection. Relay

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 407

n) Should have arc flash fault protection in cable, busbar and breaker
chamber.
o) 1-no UL& CE Multifunction Digital meter displaying Voltage, Amps,
kWh, kW, P.F., Active, reactive, apparent energy, disturbance
direction detection, Individual harmonic up to the 63rd harmonic. at
least 256 samples/cycle with Ethernet Port with inbuilt web server and
complying to IEC 61557-12, IEC 62053-22 certified by third party
laboratory.
p) 1-no master trip relay
q) 1-12 nos annunciation window with relays and push buttons

5.1.31 Outgoing Panel (2 nos. Each Comprising of):

a) 1-Metal clad housing with trunk having 1250 A, 350 MVA TP integral
VCB manually/electrically operated mechanism (spring charged motor
230 V A.C.)
b) 1 Set of air insulated copper bus bar 1500A
c) 1 Set of isolating plug and receptacle
d) 1 Set of automatic safety shutters
e) 1 Set of breaker control switches (TNC)
f) 1 Set of dual core CTS
g) Core l 200/50/5/5 A class 5P-10 (15 VA) protection
h) Core ll 200/50/5/5 A class 1.0 (15 VA) metering
i) Shunt trip closing coil 24 V DC / 110 V A.C
j) 11 KV end termination kit for 3 x 300 sq.mm AI. XLPE 11 KV armoured
cable
k) 3-Nos P.TS 33/0.11 KV of (100 VA) cast resin type
l) 1-set ON/OFF /Trip & Circuit healthy Indicating LED lamps.
m) 1 No Microprocessor based Numerical relay with O/C, EF & SC
Protection. Relay should have arc flash protection in cable busbar and
breaker chamber.
n) 1 No – Over Voltage Relay 1 No – Master
o) 1-No master trip relay
p) 1-12 No's annunciation window with relays and push buttons
q) 1-No 2 elements auxiliary relay for transformer (WTI with alarm & trip)
r) 1-set of terminal block with 20% extra terminal for connection with
2.5sq.mm 4 core PVC insulated PVC sheathed copper cable from
panel to transformer
s) 1 set of 3 phase differential relay with set of CTs of class 5P10 on both
sides.
b) The above VCB rating details are indicative only.

5.2 Power Transformers

5.2.1 This specification covers the design, manufacture, testing, supply,

installation, testing and commissioning of Three-phase cast resin dry type
indoor transformers, having class F insulation with Air Natural (AN) cooling

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 408

designed for use in three-phase distribution systems. The equipment

offered shall conform to the relevant standards complete in all respects and
capable to perform continuous and satisfactory operations. The transformer
and accessories shall be designed to ensure satisfactory operation under
sudden variations of the load and voltage including short circuit.

5.2.2 Minimum 2 Nos. (1 working + 1 standby) of Suitable KVA, 3 Phase, 11 KV /

433 V, 50 Hz Transformers shall be provided. The capacities of
transformers given in the schedule of quantities are indicative only.
Contractor has to design according to the load requirements in the campus.

5.2.3 Standards:

The Transformers shall comply with the following Indian Standards as

amended up to date:
I. IS 11171: 1985 - Dry type power transformers. IS: 2026 Power
Transformers,
II. IEC: 60076, IS 10028 (Part II & III) - Installation and Maintenance
of Transformers.
III. IS:5621-1980 & IS:2099-1986 – High Voltage porcelain Bushings.
IV. These transformers shall be manufactured in accordance with a
quality system in conformity with ISO 9001, ISO 14001.

5.2.4 Windings & Connections

a) All windings shall be made of electrolytic high conductivity copper, fully

insulated with class F insulation. The windings shall be so designed
that all coil assemblies of identical voltage, rating shall be inter
changeable. The windings shall be cast in a class F fireproof epoxy
resin casting.

b) HV connections shall be made from copper connection bars protected

by heat shrinkable tubing. The output from each LV winding will
comprise copper connection terminal, enabling all connections to be
made without using a contact interface.

c) Off load type tap changing switch with tapping range of +5% to -7.5%
in 2.5 percent steps shall be provided on HV windings to keep LV
Voltage constant. Relevant provisions of IS 2026 (Part-IV): 1977 shall
be applicable.

5.2.5 Thermal protection

These transformers shall be equipped with a thermal protection device. An
electronic converter with two independent monitoring circuits equipped with
a changeover switch should be installed. A plug-in terminal block for
connection of the sensors to the electronic converter shall be provided. The
sensors will be assembled and wired to the terminal block fixed on the upper
part of the transformer.

5.2.6 Metal enclosure

All the MS parts shall be galvanized to make them corrosion free. The core
coil assembly shall be housed in a prefabricated enclosure. The enclosure

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 409

shall be fabricated with sheet steel CRCA sheets with adequate provision
for ventilation. The enclosures shall undergo the seven-tank process.
Finally, the external and internal surfaces of the enclosure shall be powder
coated with the required paint shade.

5.2.7 Continuous Maximum Rating and Overloads:

a. Transformers shall comply as regards to rating temperature rise and

overload with the appropriate requirements. Transformers shall be
capable of operation continuously in accordance with IS loading guide
at their C.M.R (continuous maximum rate) and at any ratio irrespective
of the direction of flow of power and with voltage of the untapped
winding maintained at the voltage stated in the ordering schedule.
b. The transformers may be operated without danger on any particular
tapping at the rated KVA provided that the voltage does not vary by
more than + 10% of the voltage corresponding to the tapping.
Transformers shall be designed for 110% continuous over fluxing
withstand capability.
c. The maximum loss of each transformer shall be corresponding to
energy efficiency level 3 of IS: 1180/ Super ECBC.

5.2.8 Accessories
Each transformer shall be equipped with other accessories such as Flat bi-
directional rollers, lifting lugs, Haulage holes on the undercarriage, Earthing
terminals, RTD temperature controller, rating diagram, Marking plate and
Danger notice plate.

5.2.9 Testing
a) Tests at Works: All routine and other tests prescribed in IS shall be carried
out at the manufacturer’s facility before the dispatch of the transformer in
the presence of Engineer-in-charge or his authorized representative.
Copies of the test certificates shall be furnished to the department. In
addition to the prescribed routine tests, temperature rise test shall
invariably be done on one transformer of each design. The Contractor shall
give 15 days advance intimation to Engineer-in-charge for witnessing the
routine tests. No material shall be dispatched from its point of manufacture
before inspection, unless inspection is waived off in writing. The
acceptance of any quantity of material shall in no way relieve the
Contractor of any of his responsibilities for meeting all requirements of the
specification, and shall not prevent subsequent rejection if such material
is later found to be defective. Type test certificates as specified in IS shall
be submitted to the Department.

b) Tests at Site: In addition to tests at manufacturer’s premises, all relevant

pre-commissioning checks and tests conforming to IS code of practice
shall be done before energization. All test results are to be recorded and
reports should be submitted to the department. These tests shall be carried
out by the contractor in the presence of Engineer-in-charge or his
authorized representative.

5.2.10 Installation and Commissioning

The transformer shall be installed in accordance with IS 10028-Code of

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 410

practice for Installation and maintenance of transformer. Necessary support

channels shall be grouted in the flooring. The transformer shall be moved to
its location and shall correctly be positioned. Transformer wheels shall be
either locked or provided with wheel stoppers. Earthing of neutral and body
of the transformer shall be done in accordance with relevant specifications.
Manufacturer’s authorized representative shall be present at the time of
commissioning of Transformers.

5.2.11 Technical Particulars of Vacuum Cast Coil (VCC) Dry type Transformers

S. No. Description Parameter

1 Name of Manufacturer As per preferred makes list
2 Type Dry Type Transformer
3 Installation Indoor
4 Duty Continuous
5 Application Distribution
6 Altitude up to 1000 m
7 Rated power (based on AN As per requirement
Cooling) KVA
8 Rated No-Load Voltage Ratio 11 / 0.440 KV
(Primary / Secondary)
9 Rated Frequency 50 Hz
10 Number of Phases 3 Nos.
11 Material of Winding (Primary / Cu/Cu
Secondary)
12 Vector Group Dyn11
13 Connection (Primary / Secondary) Delta / Star
14 Type of Tap Changer Off Circuit Tap Links
15 Tapping Range/Tap step +5 to -7.5 @ 2.5%
16 No. of Steps 6 Steps
17 HV Variation / LV Variation HV Variation
18 Class of Insulation F
19 Method of Cooling AN
20 Avg. Temp. Rise of Winding (at 90 / 90 0C
principal tap)
21 Ambient Temp. (Max. / Mini.) 40/20 0C
22 % Impedance at Rated Current, at
75Deg.C & at Principal Tap
23 Efficiencies at 75 Deg.C at Unity
Power Factor (Reference value) As per Super ECBC.
a a) At Full Load
b b) At 3/4 Full Load
c c) At 1/2 Full Load
24 Regulation at Full Load at 75 Deg.C
A At Unity Power Factor
B At 0.8 Power Factor (Lagging)
25 BIL (Insulation Level):
26 Full Wave Lightning Impulse 170 kV peak
Withstand Voltage (HV / LV)

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 411

27 Separate Source Power- 70 / 3 KV rms

Frequency Voltage Withstand (HV
/ LV)
28 Enclosure degree of protection IP23
class
29 Termination Arrangements
A HV Cable Box
B LV Flange for Busduct
30 Orientation between HV & LVDeg. 1800C
Rating & Diagram plate,
Base Channel, Earthing
31 Fittings / Accessories
terminals & WTI with 3 PT-
100 Sensors.

5.3 Busbar Trunking System

5.3.1 This specification for design, manufacture, transporting, installation and

testing at site of compact sandwich type copper conductor LT Bus Bar
Trunking system suitable for indoor /outdoor installations as required.
Compact sandwich type busbar trunking products and fittings (straight
length, elbow, tees, flanged ends, cable tap box etc. shall be in accordance
with IEC 61439 or UL857 and from the same manufacturer as the busbar
trunking system. 3–Phase, 4 strip (100% neutral) with continual integral
earth busbar shall be provided. The neutral conductor should have the same
cross-sectional area as the phase conductor. The earth busbar must be one
continuous piece without bolting on housing.

5.3.2 Indian Standard Specifications and Codes of Practice will apply to the
equipment and the work covered by the scope of this contract. In
addition, the relevant clauses of the following standards as amended up
to date shall also apply. Wherever appropriate Indian Standards are not
available, relevant British and/or IEC 61439-6 Standards shall be
applicable.

5.3.3 Electrolytic quality Copper Conductor with Halogen Free insulation shall
be used for busbars. Rated operating voltage of the bus bar trunking is
1000V, 3 Phase, 4 strip with integral earth. Copper Bus trunking (Bus
duct) having suitable capacity shall be used to feed Main LT Panel from
the transformers, from transformer to APFC and HVAC panels (all
contacts should be silver plated). The busbar trunking system, both
feeder and plug-in shall be compact sandwich construction.

5.3.4 The Busbar trunking system shall be capable of withstanding the short
circuit of the electrical installation without damaging the electrical,
mechanical, and thermal stress under fault condition at a service voltage
of 1000V, 50Hz. Rated impulse withstand voltage 12 KV at 1000 V.
5.3.5 Housing / Enclosure

a) The busbar trunking housing shall be constructed of electro

galvanized steel/ aluminium and shall be provided with a suitable
protective finish epoxy paint. The busbar trunking housing shall be

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 412

totally enclosed, non-ventilated for protection against mechanical

damage and dust accumulation and tested for IK10. There shall be
no bolts passing through the busbars of the busway.

b) It shall pass at least 1500 hours salt spray test to ensure the anti-
corrosion ability. The enclosure of Bus Trunking System shall be
fabricated from 1.5 mm thick CRCA sheet steel/ GI/ Extruded Al and
shall be powder coated to suite the aesthetic ambience or as approved
after regress metal treatment process. Busbars shall be of copper with
silver plated contacts.

c) The absolute temperature at any point of the bus bar trunking

enclosure and at joints shall be strictly in conformation to IEC 61439-
6.

d) Ingress protection for the enclosures shall be minimum IP54 for indoor
Bus duct and IP 65 (without considering any Canopy) for outdoor Bus
ducts as per IEC 60529. However, suitable canopy to be provided to
cover the outdoor busducts to avoid any mechanical damage by any
accidental falling of foreign bodies.

e) The bus bar trunking joint shall be with Factory fitted Monobloc type
which utilizes high strength steel bolt(s) and Belleville washers to
maintain proper pressure over a large contact surface area. The bolt
shall be two-headed design to indicate when proper torque has been
applied and require only a standard long handle wrench to be properly
activated.
Access shall be required to only one side of the bus-bar trunking for
tightening joint bolts.

f) It shall be possible to remove any joint connection assembly to allow

electrical isolation or physical removal of a bus-bar trunking length
without disturbing adjacent busbar trunking lengths.

g) There shall be no bolts passing through the bus bars of the bus way
as a part of safety.

5.3.6 Insulation

Each bus bar shall be insulated with minimum Class F (155 Deg.
Centigrade) Multilayer PET film. Epoxy insulation shall not be permitted.
The insulation shall be certified as "halogen-free" by the manufacturer.
All plastic components shall have a V1 Self-extinguishing degree.

5.3.7 Flange End Boxes

Flanged end box shall be provided to accommodate flange end for
connecting the bus trunking with the flanges of panels, transformers etc.,
as recommended by manufacturer. The flange end termination on panel
should be guaranteed for Ingress protection for indoor/outdoor
application. Phase matching of bus trunking with equipment shall be
done prior to installation.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 413

5.3.8 Plug-in Boxes/ Tap off Boxes:

a) The connecting jaw of the plug-in unit shall plug directly on to the bus-
bar Rising Mains and have full contact with bus-bar itself. Welded tab
at plug-in bus-bar is not allowed.
b) All contact on joint and plug-in opening should be silver plated copper.

c) It shall be possible to inspect the plug-in opening and busbars prior to

the installation of the plug-in units.

d) The tap-off boxes are made 1.5 mm thick sheet steel with powder
coated and provision for fixing MCCBs.

e) Tap-off boxes should have an interlock with a cover and can be

inserted and removed from the outlet only when the cover is in the
'OPEN" position that is in the isolated position.

f) All tap-off boxes should have protective conductor which is the first to
make an electrical connection when plugged into the outlet, and the
last to disconnect when the tap-off is unplugged.

g) All insulating plastic components comply with the incandescent wire

test and have self-extinguishing properties.

h) Operating voltage and Insulation voltage level must be 1000 Volts and
suitable for 50 Hz frequency.

5.3.9 Support of busbar Trunking

Hanger spacing shall not exceed manufacturer’s recommendations. Indoor

feeder rising mains shall be approved for minimum hanger spacing of up to
3 meters for horizontally mounted run and 2 meters for vertically mounted
runs except at the bends. Outdoor feeder busbar trunking shall be approved
for spacing of up to 1.5 meters for horizontally or vertically mounted runs.
Installation shall be done with all the required hot dipped galvanized iron
supports as per the manufacturer's recommendations.

5.3.10 Earthing
The entire bus trunking system shall be provided with Cu integral earthing,
and with two independent earthing conductors of size, at least 25x5 (mm)
throughout the length of the system.
The earth flats shall be effectively connected to the enclosure by riveting
/bolting. End covers shall be provided as required.
5.3.11 Certificates / Documents to be enclosed:
The type test certificates from independent testing authority are to be
enclosed and submitted before supply of materials:

5.3.12 Testing at factory:

Routine tests like dimensional checks, electric continuity checks, IR test,
dielectric withstand test shall be carried out at facility / factory as per IEC
61439-6 in the presence of department engineers in order to qualify the
product. All routine test reports are to be submitted to the Engineers visiting
the factory for inspection. All test facilities required shall be provided for the

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 414

tests prescribed without any additional cost at their factory. The product
shall be dispatched from the factory only after obtaining necessary
clearances from the department engineers.

5.3.13 Installation, Testing and Commissioning at site:

a) It is the responsibility of the contractor to inspect all the materials for

damage, if any, after unloading at site. Installation shall be done with
required supports, joints etc strictly as per the recommendations of the
manufacture and IEC standards. Care should be taken by the
contractor to ensure that no damage is caused either to the product or
the technicians who are deployed for the installation work.

b) Department shall not be responsible for any such losses that may
occur during installation, testing and commissioning works.

c) All the required commissioning tests shall be carried out in the

presence of department engineers.

d) Installation, Testing & Commissioning shall be done by the

manufacturer personnel only. The system shall be commissioned only
after the manufacturer's engineer qualifies that the product has been
installed and tested as per the manufacturer's recommendations and
in conformation with IEC 61439.

e) All the required operating and maintenance manuals, as-built layout of

the bus way along with complete details of all the components of the
system, necessary protocols to be followed during maintenance etc
shall be handed over to the Department. The agency shall provide
three complete sets of operation and maintenance manuals and test
certificates.

f) The department reserve the right to accept / reject any part of work, In
case of any failure to carry out the scope of work in time as per the
instruction of department, the work shall be carried out / got done by
the department at the risk and cost of the agency and the entire
amount with supervision charges shall be recovered from the agency.

5.4 LT Panels and Switchgear

This section covers the detailed requirements of medium voltage Panel board for
415 volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz, 4 wire system. The Panels shall have incoming
sectionalization and outgoing switchgears as per requirement. The design shall be
cubical type. The degree of enclosure protection shall be IP 43 for Indoor panels
and IP 54 for outdoor panels unless otherwise stated. The panels shall be of
1100V Insulation Voltage grade for switch gears & Operating voltage of 415 +/- 10
%. All LT panels should be TTA type conforming to IEC 61439- 1 & 2 .

These panels shall comprise of following:

I. Incoming & outgoing feeders.

II. Bus bars and feeder connections.
III. Meters, indicators and wiring.
IV. Steel enclosure.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 415

a) The Panel boards and the associated equipment including switchgear,

control gear, Busbar supports, Busbar orientation, Busbar links etc.
shall be identical in construction to the assembly which has undergone
the type test. The drawings of the type-tested assemblies shall be
made available for inspection.

b) The main LT panels shall be located in the substation building, and

having sufficient no. of outgoings to feed all other Sub-panels /
Services such as APFC panels, HVAC panels, Rising mains, UPS,
Firefighting Panels, Water supply panels, Street lighting,
STPplant,Medical / Non-Medical equipment.

c) Suitable size XLPE insulated copper / Aluminium conductor cables

shall be laid for interconnecting panels within the service building..

d) Panel boards shall have a short circuit level withstand as per relevant
standard amended up to date.

e) The enclosures shall be designed to take care of normal stress as well

as abnormal electro- mechanical stress due to short circuit conditions.
All covers and doors provided shall offer adequate safety to operating
persons. Suitable pressure relief devices shall be provided to minimize
danger to operator during internal fault conditions.

f) The compartmentalization shall be achieved by using metal

separators. Use of PVC sheet / phenolic laminated sheets shall not be
allowed.

5.4.1 Standards and Codes

a) Updated Indian Standard Specifications and Codes of Practice shall

apply to the equipment and the work covered by the scope of this
contract.

b) Low Voltage switchgear Assemblies IEC61439-1/2, IS 8623

c) Low Voltage switchgear & control gear IEC 60947 /IS 13947: 1993

5.4.2 Panel Configuration

a) The Panel shall be designed with Air Circuit Breakers, MCCB's. for
incoming and outgoing feeders as per the required

b) The MCCBs can be arranged in multi-tier formation whereas the Air

Circuit Breakers shall be arranged in Single tier formation only to
facilitate operation and maintenance.

c) The Panel boards shall be of adequate size with a provision of spare

space to accommodate possible future additional switch gear.

d) There should be total discrimination and co-ordination between

upstream and downstream switchgear&protectionondevicesi.e.,ACBs,
MCCBsetc.uptotheservicebreakingcapacitylevel as per IS/IEC - 60947-

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 416

2 for better continuity of supply and fault localization.

e) Electromechanical interlocking facility shall be provided between the

circuit breakers fed from different supply panel shall be designed in
such a way to feed total load using standby transformer in case of
failure of any one transformer.

f) The Panel boards shall be metal clad totally enclosed; floor mounted
free-standing type of modular extensible design suitable for indoor/
Outdoor mounting.

g) Panel board construction shall employ the principle of

compartmentalized and segregation for each circuit.

h) Incomer and bus section panels or sections shall be separate and

independent and shall not be wired with sections required for feeder.
The incomer panel shall be suitable for receiving bus trunking or MV
cable of required size.
i) Panel boards shall be made up of requisite vertical sections, which
when coupled together, shall form continuous dead front Panel
boards. Panel board shall be readily extensible on both sides by
addition of vertical sections after removal of the end covers.

j) Neoprene gaskets between all adjacent units and beneath all covers
shall be provided to render the joints dust and vermin proof to provide
a degree of protection as specified.

k) Special care to be taken to ensure effective earthing of the frame and

doors of the Panel boards.

l) Each vertical section shall be provided with a rear or side cable

chamber housing the cable end connections and power/control cable
terminations. There should be generous availability of space for ease
of installation and maintenance with adequate safety for working in
one vertical section without coming into contact with any live parts. The
design of the Panel board shall allow standard extension chambers if
required to accommodate cables.
m) Panel boards shall be fabricated with CRCA Sheet Steel of thickness
not less than 2.0 mm and shall be folded and braced as necessary to
provide a rigid support for all components. The doors and covers shall
be fabricated from CRCA sheet steel of thickness not less than 2 mm.
Joints of any kind in sheet metal shall be seam welded and all welding
slag shall be ground off and welding pits wiped smooth with plumber
metal.

n) Panel board shall be provided with “Danger Notice Plate” conforming

to relevant Indian Standards.

o) All metallic parts shall be given pre-treatment for degreasing,

phosphatizing etc. in seven-tank process. Enclosure shall be powder
coated with RAL7035 coat with matt finish.

p) Feeder connections shall be by solid copper strips of suitable size for

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 417

100 A or higher size switchgear through nuts, bolts and spring

washers.

q) Four lifting bolts per cubicle shall be provided for easy lifting of the
enclosure.

r) The louvers shall be covered with brass wire mesh to avoid access of
reptiles and insects in the Enclosure. The Enclosure shall be provided
with hinged cover for access to equipment.

s) The overall height of the Panel board shall be limited to 2200 mm for
all the Busbar ratings and type of Panel boards. Panel should have
integral base frame of 100 mm MS channel duly painted. Operating
levers, handle etc. of highest unit shall not be higher than 1.7 meters.

5.4.3 Panel board Compartmentalization

a) For compartmentalized Panel boards, separate totally enclosed

compartments shall be provided for horizontal busbars, vertical
busbars, ACBs, MCCBs, and cable alleys.

b) Earthed metal or insulated shutters shall be provided between draw

out and fixed portion of the switchgear such that, no live parts are
accessible with equipment drawn out.

c) Sheet steel hinged lockable doors for each separate compartment

shall be provided.

d) Circuit breakers separate and adequate compartments shall be

provided for accommodating instruments, indicating lamps, control
contactors and control MCB etc. These shall be accessible for testing
and maintenance without any danger of accidental contact with live
parts of the circuit breaker, busbars, and connections.
e) Each switchgear cubicle shall be fitted with label in front and back
identifying the circuit, switchgear type, rating, and duty. All operating
devices shall be located in front of switchgear only.

f) A horizontal wire way with screwed cover shall be provided at the top
to take interconnecting control wiring between vertical sections.

g) Separate cable compartments running the height of the Panel board

in the case of front access boards shall be provided for incoming and
outgoing cables.

h) Cable compartments shall be of adequate size for easy termination of

all incoming and outgoing cables entering from bottom or top. The
construction shall include necessary and adequate and proper support
shall be provided in cable compartments to support and clamping the
cable in the cable alley / cable chamber.

5.4.4 Logic for PLC Based Main LT Panel

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 418

i. The Main LT Panel shall have PLC logic control with three sectionshaving
Electrical and Mechanical interlocking.
ii. Section A shall be connected with Transformer 1 and DG synchronization
panel Feeder 1
iii. Section B connected with Transformer 2
iv. Section C connected with Transformer 3 & DG synchronization panel
Feeder 2
v. All sections shall be coupled through 2 nos. Suitable sized Bus coupler ACB
vi. Section A & C shall have outgoings to different feeders in the building as
specified & section B treated as standby
vii. Each section shall be operated in both Auto and Manual Mode.

viii. AutoMode:
a) If Mains Supply fails at any particular section, load of that particular
section shall be transferred to Transformer 2. Other section loads shall
not be disturbed & shall remain on mains supply.

b) In case of Mains fail, all the three DG sets shall be started and load
should be transferred to DG sets through synchronization panel.
Number of DG sets to be operated, shall be decided automatically on
load requirement at that time. Preference of DG sets which to be
operated shall be decided on previous running hours of DG sets. The
DG sets which are stopped based on load requirement shall come into
the operation immediately in case of increasing of loads suddenly or
failure of operating DG sets due tofaults.

c) There shall be two 1600 Amps outgoing feeders for PLC based HVAC
panel. On Mains failure HVAC plant shall run for essential loads only so
anyone of outgoings shall be open.

d) After restoring of mains, load shall be transferred to mains with time

delay and DG engine shall be stopped after coolingperiod.
5.4.5 Bus Bars
a) The bus bars shall be of copper of high conductivity electrolytic quality
and of adequate section. Current density for copper shall not exceed
160 amps/sq. cm.

b) Busbars shall be of rectangular cross sections, suitable for full load

current for phase bus bars and neutral bus bar. Busbar shall be suitable
to withstand the stresses of fault level as designed as per site
requirement.

c) Main Horizontal busbar and Neutral should be in same compartment.

d) The bus bar system may comprise of a system of main horizontal bus
bars and auxiliary vertical bus bars run in bus bar alloy on either side in
which the circuit could be arranged with front access for cable entrances

e) The bus bars shall be supported on non-breakable, non-hygroscopic

epoxy resin or glass fibre reinforced polymer insulated supports able to
withstand operating temperature of 110 degree C at regular intervals.
The material and the spacing of the Busbar support should be same as
per the type tested assembly

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 419

f) Auxiliary buses for control power supply, space heater power supply or
any other specified service shall be provided. These buses shall be
insulated, adequately supported, and sized to suit specific requirement.
The material for auxiliary supply bus will be insulated electrolytic copper
Wires.

g) Clearances between phases and phase to neutral should be in line with

CPWD Specifications for Internal Electrical works-2013 amended up to
date.

5.4.6 Requirement of main LV panel and other panels.

a) Bus bar capacity of any panel shall be more than the capacity of
Incomer.

b) The outgoing of the 3 transformers shall be terminated into Main LT

panel through minimum 3 nos suitable capacity ACBs through separate
Copper sandwich type bus trunking. These 3 ACBs shall be connected
through couplers of minimum 3200 Amp capacity with the facility of
Electrical/ Mechanical interlocking and castle key arrangement.

c) The outgoing of the Synchronization panel of 3 Nos DG Sets shall be

terminated into 2 ACBs of minimum 2500 Amp capacity through
separate Copper, sandwich type bus trunking of minimum 3200 Amp
capacity.

d) The outgoing switch gears shall be designed on the basis of functional

requirement as per the provisions contained in the NBC 2016.

e) The additional spare ACBs/ MCCBs of each capacity from minimum

25% to maximum 100% of the minimum functional requirement shall
be included in the design of the panel for future extension. The same
is included in the scope of the work.

5.4.7 Draw out Features

Air Circuit Breakers shall be provided in fully draw out cubicles, unless
otherwise stated. These cubicles shall be such that draw out is possible
without disconnection of the wires and cables. The power and control
circuits shall have self-aligning and self-isolating contacts. Mechanical
latches shall be integrated in ACB at service, test and isolated position to
ensure that Breaker is firmly latched in respective position. It shall not be
possible to move the breaker from the position unless latch is manually
operated.

5.4.8 Instrument Accommodation

All voltmeter and ammeter and other instruments shall be flushed mounted
type conforming to class 0.5 of IS 1248 for accuracy. All meters shall be
protected withMCBs.

a) Instruments and indicating lamps shall not be mounted on the Circuit

Breaker Compartment door for which a separate and adequate

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 420

compartment shall be provided, and the instrumentation shall be

accessible for testing and maintenance without danger of accidental
contact with live parts of the Panel board.

b) For MCCBs, instruments and indicating lamps can be provided on the

compartment doors.

c) The current transformers for metering and for protection shall be

mounted on the solid busbars with proper supports.

d) On all the incomers of switch boards ON/OFF indicator lamps shall be

provided suitable for operation on AC 230 volts supply. All lamps shall
be protected by MCBs.

e) For Incomer and outgoing feeders more than 200 Amp rating,
comprehensive power meters shall be provided which shall display A,
V, Pf, Hz, Kw, KVA, KVAR, Kwh, Kvarh, average and maximum values,
demand values, THD on current and Voltages. Also add on modules for
RS 485 port, programmable contacts, analogue output etc. to link to
,/SCADA system.

f) All the Outgoing feeders of Main LT panel shall be provided with

Submetering equipment as per Super ECBC requirements.

5.4.9 Wiring

All small wiring for Controls, Indication etc. shall be with 2.5 sq. mm size
FRLS/ HFFR (halogen free fire retardant) copper conductor cables. The
wiring shall be coded and labelled with approved ferrules for identification.
Runs of wires shall be neatly bunched and suitably supported and clamped.
Means shall be provided for easy identification of wires. Identification
ferrules shall be used at both the ends of wires. All control wires meant for
external connections are to be broughtoutonaterminalboard.

5.4.10 Earthing
Continuous GI earth bus of suitable size for prospective fault current to be
provided with arrangement for connecting to station earth at two points.
Hinged doors / frames to be connected to earth through adequately sized
flexible braids.

5.4.11 Sheet Steel Treatment and Painting

Sheet steel used in the fabrication of Panel boards shall undergo cleaning
and surface treatment, seven tank process comprising of alkaline
degreasing, descaling in dilute sulfuric acid and a recognized phosphating
process after which a coat of primer paint compactivity with the final paint
shall be applied over the treated surface. Final paint coat of oven baked
powder coating, of shade approved by Engineer-in- Charge shall
beprovided.

5.4.12 Name Plates and Labels Suitable engraved white on black name plates
and identification labels of metal for all Panel boards and Circuits shall be
provided. These shall indicate the feeder number and feeder designation.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 421

5.4.13 Type test reports.

Panel board configurations offered shall be tested for all the tests as per
IEC61439 and internal arc tests. Type tests for the enclosure as per
IEC61439 shall be submitted along with the verification tests.

5.4.14 Testing and Commissioning Copie s of type test carried out at ACB/MCCB
manufacturer’s facility and routine tests carried out at the Panel board
fabricator’s shop shall be furnished along with the delivery of the Panel
boards. Engineer-in-Charge reserves the right to get the Panel board
inspected by their representative at fabricators facilityprior to dispatch.

Commissioning checks and tests shall include all wiring checks and
checking up of connections. Relay adjustment/setting shall be done before
commissioning in addition to routine Megger tests. Checks and tests shall
include the following

a) Physical variation and dimensionalcheck

b) Verification of material
c) Operation checks.
d) Interlock function checks.
e) Continuity checks of wiring, fuses, earthing etc. as required.
f) All enclosures shall be tested for dielectric test with 1000V megger.
g) HV test, Trip tests and protection gear test.
h) Functional test shall be done for all ACBs, MCCBs and other
components.

5.5 Air Circuit Breakers

a) The ACB shall confirm to IEC/IS – 60947-2. The ACB shall have
ultimate breaking capacity (Icu) shall be equal to Service breaking
capacity (Ics) and Short Ckt Withstand capacity (Ics=Icu=Icw for 1
sec). Rated Impulse withstand voltage shall be 12kv and rated
insulation voltage at 1000V. The ACB release should have true RMS
sensing.

b) The breaker shall provide class II insulation between the front panel
and internal power circuits to avoid any accidental contact with the live
main current carrying path with the front coveropen.

c) Protective devices, metering, CTs, PTs, push buttons and indicating

lamps shall be provided asper relevant CPWDspecifications.

5.5.1 Constructional Features

a) TheCircuitBreakershallbeflushfront,metalclad,horizontaldraw-
outpattern,three/fourpoleas required and fully interlocked. Each Circuit
Breaker shall be housed in a separate compartment enclosed on
allsides.

b) The Circuit Breaker cradle shall be designed and constructed to permit

smooth withdrawal and insertion. The movement shall be free of jerks,
easy to operate. Mechanical Latch to be provided to identify the
Isolated, test & service position of breaker to prevent over racking.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 422

c) All current carrying parts in the breaker shall be silver plated and
suitable arcing contacts shall be provided to protect the main contacts
which shall be separate from the main contacts and easily replaceable.
In addition, Arc chutes shall be provided for each pole, and these shall
be suitable for being lifted out for the inspection of the main and the
arcing contacts.

d) The circuit breaker shall have indication of mechanical wear of

contacts enabling visible indication of contact life.

e) Self-aligning cluster type isolating contacts shall be provided for the

Circuit Breaker, with automatically operated shutters to screen live
cluster contacts when the Breaker is withdrawn from the cubicle.
Sliding connections including those for the auxiliary contacts and
control wiring shall also be of the self-aligning type. The fixed portion
of the sliding connections shall have easy access for maintenance
purposes.

f) There shall be flexibility in changing the types of terminals at site to

suit the bus bar orientation if required.

g) The cubicle for housing the Breaker shall be free standing dead front
pattern, fabricated from the best quality sheet steel.
5.5.2 Operating Mechanism
a) The Circuit Breaker shall be trip free with independent manual spring
operated also motor wound spring-operated mechanism as specified
and with mechanical ON/OFF indication. The operating mechanism
shall be such that the circuit breaker is at all times free to open
immediately the trip coil is energized. The breaker shall be provided
with in built anti-pumpingmechanism.

b) The closing time shall be less than or equal to 70 ms to ensure faster

closing of the breaker. And tripping time should be less than 30 ms to
reduce the let through energy in the event of fault.

c) The operating handle and mechanical trip push button shall be at the
front of and integral with the Circuit Breaker.

d) There shall be mechanical indicator on the front panel for ‘Ready to

close’ situation for the breaker by checking all interlockings.
e) The Circuit Breaker shall have the following four distinct and separate
positions which shall be indicated on the face of the panel. The breaker
shall get latched in each of three positions namely Service, Test and
Isolated, operator to de-latch before racking in/out to otherposition

I. "Service" -- Both main and secondary isolating contacts closed

II. "Test" -- Main isolating contacts open and secondary isolating
contacts closed
III. "Isolated" -- Both main and secondary isolating contacts open.

5.5.3 Circuit Breaker Interlocking

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 423

Sequence type strain free interlocks shall be provided to ensure

thefollowing:

a) It shall not be possible for the Breaker to be withdrawn from the cubicle
when in the "ON" position. To achieve this, suitable mechanism shall
be provided to lock the Breaker in the tripped position before the
Breaker is isolated.

b) It shall not be possible for the Breaker to be switched "ON" until it is

either in the fully inserted position or, for testing purposes, it is in the
fully isolated position.

c) It shall not be possible for the Circuit Breaker to be plugged in unless

it is in the OFF position.

d) A safety latch shall be provided to ensure that the movement of the

Breaker, as it is withdrawn, is checked before it is completely out of
the cubicle, thus preventing its accidental fall due to its weight.

5.5.4 Circuit Breaker Auxiliary Contacts.

The Circuit Breaker shall have suitable free / minimum 4 NO/NC auxiliary
contacts rated at 10 amps 443 volts 50 Hz. These contacts shall be
approachable from the front for connecting all external wiring from the front.
They shall close before the main contacts when the Circuit Breaker is
plugged in and vice versa when the Circuit Breaker is Drawn Out of the
cubicle.

5.5.5 Electrical Auxiliaries

a) All electrical auxiliaries, including the spring charging gear motor shall
be installable on site without requiring adjustment or any tools other
than a screwdriver.
b) The auxiliaries shall be placed in a compartment which under normal
operating conditions, shall not contain any conducting parts capable
of entering into electrical contact with the circuit breaker poles. It shall
be possible to connect all auxiliary wiring from the front of the
circuitbreaker.

5.5.6 Circuit breaker Releases

All Air Circuit Breakers should have microprocessor release.

a) TheIncomingcircuitbreakertobeequippedwithadjustable short circuit

protection with adjustable time delay, over current protection, and
adjustable earth fault protection with adjustable time dely. The
release should have graphical display showing the IDMT curve. It
should have display of all electrical parameters like V, A, W, VAR,
VA, Wh, VARh, VAh It should be possible to store tripping history of
last ten faults with time and date of fault and the type of fault with
values.

b) ACB should have thermal Memory and Zone selective interlocking

for logic discrimination to reduce thermal/electrodynamics stresses
in the event of short circuit and earth fault.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 424

c) The outgoing ACBs should have short circuit and overload

protections with display of current. Percentage loading indication of
all the three phases of the breaker to be available on the release. On
line setting of the parameters should be possible. The setting of the
ACB should be possible digitally as well as with dial settings with the
help of screwdriver.

d) Option of communication port on all types of the releases, even if the

same is not specified at the time of ordering.

e) As an option it should be possible to have programmable contacts if

required at later date.

5.5.7 Earthing

The frame of the Circuit Breaker shall positively be earthed when the Circuit
Breakerisrackedinto thecubicle.

5.5.8 Moulded Case Circuit Breakers (MCCBs)

The Moulded case circuit Breaker (MCCB) shall confirm to the latest IEC
60947-2 and IEC 947-3- 1989. MCCBs shall be suitable for rated operation
voltage up to 415 V AC.

MCCBs in AC circuits shall be of triple pole / four pole construction.

Operating mechanism shall be Double break quick-make, quick-break and
trip-free type. The “ON”, “OFF” and “TRIP” positions of the MCCBs shall be
clearly indicated and visible to the operator when mounted as in service.
Front of door operating handle shall be provided with door interlock. The
Service short circuit Breaking capacity of all MCCB’s shall be Ics=100%Icu.
MCCBs of rating up to 200 A can be with thermal magnetic/ Microprocessor
release. Whereas MCCBs of 200 A and above ratings shall be with
Microprocessor release only.

MCCBs used with Three Pole and Neutral connections shall be of Four pole
type only.

5.5.9 Construction, operation, environment

a) MCCBs shall be actuated by a toggle or handle that clearly indicates

the three positions: ON, OFF and TRIPPED.

b) The operating mechanism shall be designed such that the toggle or

handle can only be in OFF position (O) if the power contacts are all
actuallyseparated.

c) MCCBs shall be equipped witha“push to trip” button infront to test

operation and the opening of the poles.

d) MCCB rating, “push to trip” button and contact position indication must
be clearly visible and accessible from the front, through the front panel

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 425

or the door of the Panel board.

5.5.10 Communication

MCCB should have option for communication in the Main LT Panel for
critical feeders i.e., RS 485 communication port.

5.5.11 Thermal memory

All the MCCBs should have thermal memory feature. In the event of
repeated overloads, the electronic trip unit shall optimize protection of
cables and downstream devices by memorizing temperature variations.

5.5.12 Miniature Circuit Breaker (MCB)

a) Miniature circuit breakers shall be of approved design and make and

must be tested and validated as per IEC/EN 60898 and IEC 60947-2
standards.

b) MCBs shall be suitable for operation at 230V/415V, 50Hz supply. The

rated short circuit capacity shallbe10kA.MCBsshallbeofferedwith
‘C’trippingcharacteristics.TheMCBsshall be suitable for mounting on a
DINrail.

c) MCBs shall ensure complete electrical Isolation of downstream circuit

or equipment, when the MCB is switched OFF (to be marked on the
MCB in symbolic form).
d) IP 20 Degree of Protection shall be ensured to prevent electrical
shocks by accidental touch to any live parts, by providing finger touch
proof terminals.

e) Operating knob shall have provision to lock in ON/OFF condition

without affecting any automatic tripping.

f) Circuit-breakers shall be capable of operation under ambient

temperature up to 50 °C,without derating of their over load tripping
thresh old with respect to the irrated operat ingcurrent.The same must
be tested and validated as per IEC 60947-2 standard.

g) MCBs shall be suitable for field-fixable Protection auxiliaries (viz. Over-

voltage release, Under- voltage release, Shunt trip) and Indication
Auxiliaries (like Auxiliary Contact, Trip alarmcontact).

5.6 11 kV Surge Arrestors

5.6.1 Introduction

This section covers the specification of Distribution class Surge Arrestor for
33kV indoor type VCB breaker panel, transformers etc. with highest system
voltage of 36 kV at 50 Hz.

5.6.2 Standards

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 426

The design, manufacture and performance of Surge Arrestors shall comply

with IS:3070 Part-3 and other specific requirements stipulated in the
specification. Unless otherwise specified, the equipment, material and
processes shall conform to the latest applicable Indian/International
Standards as listed here under:

IS:2071- Methods of High Voltage Testing General Definition

1993(Part-1 & 2) & Test procedures.

IS:2629-1985 Recommended Practice for hot dip galvanizing

on Iron & Steel
IS:3070-1993 Specification for surge arrestor for
(Part-3) alternating current systems. Metal-Oxide
lightening Arrestors

IS:5621-1980 Hollow Insulators for use in Electrical Equipment.

IS:6209-1982 Methods of Partial discharge measurement.

ANSI/IEEE- Design Test Report Polymer Distribution
C.62.11 Arresters
IEC-60099-4 Surge Arrestors

5.6.3 General requirement

a) The metal oxide gapless Surge Arrestor without any series or shunt
gap shall be suitable for protection of 33kV side of transformers from
voltage surges resulting from natural disturbance like lightning as well
as system disturbances. The surge arrestor shall draw negligible
current at operating voltage and at the same time offer least resistance
during the flow of surge current. The surge arrestor shall consist of
non-linear metal oxide resistor elements placed in series and housed
in electrical grade porcelain housing/ silicon polymeric of specified
Creepage distance.

b) The assembly shall be hermetically sealed with suitable rubber

gaskets with effective sealing system arrangement to prevent rest of
moisture.
c) The surge arrestor shall be provided with line and earth terminals of
suitable size. The ground side terminal of surge arrestor shall be
connected with 25x6 mm GI strip, one end connected to the surge
arrestor and second end to a separate ground electrode.

d) The surge arrestor shall not operate under power frequency and
temporary overvoltage conditions but under surge conditions, the
surge arrestor shall changeover to the conducting mode.

e) The surge arrestor shall be suitable for circuit breaker performing 0-

0.3min- CO- 3min-00- duty in the system.

f) The reference current of the arrestor shall be high enough to eliminate

the influence of grading and stray capacitance on the measured
reference voltage.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 427

g) The Surge Arrestor shall be thermally stable and contractor shall

furnish a copy of thermal stability test.

h) The arrestor shall be capable of handling terminal energy for high

surges, external pollution and transient over voltage and have low
losses at operating voltages.

5.6.4 Arrestor housing

The arrestor housing shall be made up of silicon polymeric housing and
shall be homogenous, free from laminations, cavities and other flaws of
imperfections that might affect the mechanical and dielectric quality. The
housing shall be free from blisters, burrs and other similar defects. The
housing shall be so coordinated that external flashover shall not occur due
to application of any impulse or switching surge voltage up to the maximum
design value for arrestor. The arrestors shall not fail due to contamination.
Sealed housings shall exhibit no measurable leakage.

5.6.5 Arrestor mounting

The arrestors shall be suitable for mounting on VCB breaker panel for
transformer and for incoming and outgoing lines.

5.6.6 Fittings & Accessories

The surge arrestor shall be complete with disconnector and terminal
connectors and all other accessories. The terminals shall be non-magnetic,
corrosion proof, robust and of adequate size and shall be so located that
incoming and outgoing connections are made with minimum possible
bends. The top metal cap and base of surge arrestor shall be galvanized.
The line terminal shall have a built-in clamping device which can be adjusted
for both horizontal and vertical take-offs.

5.6.7 Tests on Surge Arrestors

The Surge Arrestors offered shall be type tested and shall be subjected to
routine and acceptance tests in accordance with IS: 3070 (Part-3)-1993. In
addition, the suitability of the surge arresters shall also be established for
the followings
a) Acceptance tests:

I. Measurement of power frequency reference voltage of arrester

units.
II. Lightning impulse residual voltage on arrester units (IEC clause
6.3.2)
III. Internal ionization or partial discharge test.
IV. Thermal stability test (IEC clause 7.2.2)

b) Routine tests:
I. Measurement of reference voltage
II. Residual voltage test of arrester unit
III. Internal ionization or partial discharge test
IV. Sealing test
V. Verticality checks on completely assembled surge arresters as a
sample test on each lot if applicable.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 428

5.7 Automatic Power Factor Correction Panels.

The panels shall be indoor type floor mounting, fixed type, single front, self-
standing, totally enclosed to make it dust and vermin proof (IP42).

a) The Panels shall be fabricated with 2 mm thick CRCA sheet steel.

b) The number of steps and the KVAR rating of the Panels shall be as
below:

Overall Rating
2 No. panels of suitable KVAR (40% of Transformer capacity)
(1No. for each side of main LT Panel) with 12 steps APFC relay
out of which 1No. 50 KVAR static capacitor shall be permanently
connected to the bus.

c) Adequate lifting facilities shall be provided and the lifting eye bolts shall
be removabletype.

d) The Panel shall be so designed to maintain the Power factor above

0.99(lag) at all loads (confirming to Super ECBC standards).
e) The panel shall consist of 4 Strip bus bars. The bus bars shall be of
Electrolytic Copper and of sufficient cross section to carry fault current
without any damage. The rating of bus bas shall be equivalent to rating
of incomer ACB, current density shall not be more than 1.6 Amps/sq.
mm, The bus bars shall be supported on epoxy cast resin / DMC
insulators and covered by heat shrinkable PVC sleeves. The main bus
bars shall be adequately supported to withstand stresses developed
due to short circuit current. Tapping points shall be treated against
oxidation. Appropriate identification markings / labels shall be provided
on the bus bars and tapings for distinguishing the various phase
andneutral.

f)The panel should be so designed that it should operate in auto as well

as in manual modeand the relay should be capable of operating the
total KVAR of capacitors with minimum stages up to 12 stages. The
capacity of the Bus-Bar shall be designed on the basis of KVAR rating.

g) The fabricated panel shall undergo 7 tank treatment and primer, before
inside and outside powdercoating.

h) The equipment inside the compartment shall be arranged in a logical

manner for ease of reference atsite.

i)
Undrilledgland plates shall be provided at to pand bottom of the panel
and shall ber emovable type with nuts and bolts for proper fixing.

j) The control supply shall be tapped after the Mains Incomer ACB.
Control circuit shall be provided with MCBs forprotection.

k) Indicating lamps shall be provided for each Bank. Capacitors “ON”

Indications shall be provided.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 429

l) The control wiring shall be provided with suitable size un-armoured

copper conduct or cable with ferrule numbers and the terminal block
shall benumbered for ease inconnection/identification.

m) The individual capacitors & their control shall be provided in separate

comp artments in panel through MCCBs.
Capacitors : MD-XL Type
Incomer Breaker : ACB Three Pole,65 KA
Outgoing Circuit : MCCB’s
25 KVAR : 63 Amps
50 KVAR : 125 Amps
100 KVAR : 250 Amps

n) Suitable rating contactors, copper wound Harmonic block with 7 %

filtering factor shall be provided for the following capacities
ofCapacitors:

5.7.1 Current Transformer:

The C.Ts shall be of tape wound type and shall be capable of withstanding
the rated fault current of the system for 1 second and should be of 10 VA
burden.

5.7.2 APFC Relay:

The panels shall be provided with micro-processor based APFC relay
having 12 steps with facility for setting target P.F. range in the form of high
and low, step indication, low current indication, auto-manual selection,
segment LED display to be provided to indicate existing power factor. The
relayshouldbecapabletoprovideovervoltageprotectionupto10%ofratedvolta
ge&Leadpower factors eliminated and the switching shall take place on
FIFOarrangement. LED Type Phase Indicating Lamps, Digital Multifunction
meter to indicate Voltage, Current, PF, Freq, KVAR, KW, KVA etc shall be
provided. The panels shall be provided with 2nos Earthing terminals on both
sides of the panel.

5.7.3 Specification for Capacitors Standards:

The capacitors shall confirm to IS-2834-Shunt capacitors for power system.
Thecapacitorsshallbesuitableforoperationon480V,3Phase,3wire,50HzAC
supplysystem.

a) The capacitor shall be mixed dielectric type. The capacitor should be

self-healing type. Internal loss of the capacitor should not be more than
0.5W/KVA.

b) The elements shall be connected to the terminals and enclosed in a

metallicenclosure.

c) After evacuation and impregnation, all voids shall be completely filled

with the impregnant and the container shall be hermetically sealed to
prevent ingress of air, dust andmoisture.

d) The capacitor shall be suitable for a rated voltage of 480 volts and shall
be continuously operating at a maximum over- voltage of 10% above

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 430

the ratedvoltage.
e) The rated frequency is 50Hz. The capacitor shall however, be suitable
for continuous operation with a frequency variation of +3% from the
ratedfrequency.
f) The capacitor shall be suitable for operation in temperature category
50 Deg.C.

g) The capacitor shall also be capable of carrying without injury an

increase in current loading up to 30% of the rated current, which may
arise due to increase in voltage, increase in frequency, presence of
non-sinusoidal voltage supply or other causes. The maximum
continuous reactive output of the capacitor shall not exceed 30% over
the rated reactive output.

h) Each power capacitor shall be provided in separate compartment with

door interlock arrangement to disconnect power contact or of the
capacitor when the concerned compartment of capacitor is opened.
Heat dissipation louvers covered with micro mesh & exhaust fans
shall be provided for cross ventilation in capacitor mounting
compartments and bus barchambers.

5.7.4 Discharge Devices:

Each capacitor bank shall be internally fitted with a low loss continuously
rated effective discharge device. It shall be designed to discharge the entire
capacitor from the peak AC voltage not exceeding 50 volts measured at the
terminals of the capacitor within a maximum period of 1 minute of
disconnection from supply.

5.7.5 Tests At Manufacturer’s facility

All routine and type tests as per IS 2834 relevant to capacitor banks as
amended up to date shall be carried out at manufacturer’s facility and test
certificates shall be furnished to the department.

5.7.6 Installation

Capacitor banks shall be installed at least 30 cm away from the walls on

suitable metal frame work of welded construction. The earth terminals
provided on the body of capacitor bank shall be bonded to the main
capacitor panel earth bus with 2 Nos. 8 SWG copper or 6 SWG GI earth
wires.

5.7.7 Tests at Site

Insulation resistance with 500 V DC Megger shall be carried out and test
results shall be recorded at site.

5.8 Cables

5.8.1 HT Cables
The specification covers the supply, installation,testing & Commissioning of
PVC sheathed 11 KV (E) grade, XLPE insulated Aluminium conductor
cables.The cable shall be manufactured strictly conforming to IS: 7098 (Part

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 431

2) - 1985 amended up to date and shall bear ISI mark. The 11 KV HV cable
size shall be designed based on the fault level of the feeder, obtained from
the supply company.

5.8.2 Standards:
The cable shall conform to the following standards.

a) IS 7098 Part 2: 1985 XLPE insulated PVC sheathed cables for working
voltages up to and including 11 kV.

b) IS 3975:1988 Mild steel wires, formed and tapes for armouring of

cable.

c) IEEE-383:1974 Standard for type test of class IE electric cables, field

splices, and connections for nuclear power generating stations.

d) NEMA-WC5,1992 Thermoplastic Insulated Wire and cable for the

transmission and distribution of Electrical Energy.

e) IEC:754 (Part-1):1994 Test on gases evolved during combustion of

electric cables - Determination of the amount of halogen acid gas
evolved during combustion of polymeric materials taken from cables.

f) IEC:332 (Part I):1993 Test on electric cables under fire conditions.

Test on a single vertical insulated wire or cable.

The cable, joints, outdoor and indoor termination and their accessories and
fittings may conform to Indian and/or equivalent international standards.

5.8.3 Electrical Characteristics & Performance:

a) All cables shall be suitable for high ambient, high humid tropical
climatic conditions. Cables shall be designed to withstand the
mechanical, electrical and thermal stresses under the unforeseen
steady state and transient conditions and shall be suitable for
proposed method of installation.

b) Extruded Semi-conducting screening and metallic screening shall

generally be as per IS 7098 (Part-II) with latest amendments. The semi
conducting compound shall be suitable for the operating temperature
of the cable and compatible with the insulating material.

c) The interface between insulation and insulation screen shall be free of

any voids. Insulation screen shall be strippable type.

5.8.4 Cable Construction:

a) XLPE insulated underground cable shall be manufactured with use of
suitable materials for XLPE semi-conducting, insulation and XLPE
screen. The Cables in this specification does not have any metal
sheath and the short circuit rating of the cable shall depend on the
conductivity and continuity of the strands of the armour wires, which
shall be ensured by guarding against corrosion.
b) A semi-conducting cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE) screening shall
be extruded over the conductor to act as an electrical shield which

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 432

together with elimination of the so called “Strand Effect” prevents to a

great extent air ionization on the surface of the conductor.The main
insulation of the Cable shall be extruded unfilled, chemically cross-
linked polyethylene (XLPE) inert gas cured.

c) The insulation screen shall be an extruded layer of black semi-

conducting compound and continuously covers the whole area of
insulation. The contact surface between insulation and insulation
screen shall be smooth and free from protrusion and irregularities.

d) The semi conducting XLPE screen shall be extruded over the main
poly ethylene-insulating wall to prevent partial discharge at the surface
of the insulation. The copper tape shall be wrapped over the semi
conducting tape or extrusion for 3 core cables. The metal screen so
formed around the cores shall be in contact with one another as the
cores are laid up at triangular configuration. Conductor screening,
insulation and insulation screening shall be extruded in triple extrusion
processes so as to obtain continuously smooth interfaces.

e) Makes of cables Manufactured with “triple extrusion” process will only

be considered. The Contractor shall produce necessary reports before
getting approval for cables makes.

f) The cable core shall be supplied with bedding of PVC (Inner sheath)
in the form of extruded PVC sheath for 11 KV cables.

g) The cable shall be steel strip armoured for 33KV and 11 KV. Three
core cables to ensure an adequate return path for the flow of fault
current and also provide suitable mechanical protection.

5.8.5 Current Rating of Cables:

a) Nominal Current rating shall not be less than the Specific Technical
Requirements. Contractor shall submit design data in respect of all
cables in the prescribed format.

5.8.6 Discharge Free Construction:

The inner conductor shield, TR-XLPE insulation, and outer insulation shield
shall be extruded with a true triple extruder head using a dry cure process.
The conductor screen, Insulation and Insulation screen shall all be extruded
in single point at one time process to ensure homogeneity and reduction of
voids, in the insulation and the screening system of the cable.

5.8.7 Tests and Testing Facilities:

Type Tests:

All type tests in accordance with IS: 7098 (Part 2) amended up to date, shall
be performed on cable samples drawn by department.

Type tests reports carried out from Government laboratories or Government

approved laboratories on the cables shall be submitted.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 433

5.8.8 Routine Tests:

All Routine tests and acceptance tests as per IS shall be carried out and
result should be given in test report. Partial discharge test must be carried
out in a fully screened test cell. It is, therefore, absolutely essential that the
manufacturer should have the appropriate type of facility to conduct this
routine test.The facilities shall be provided by the Contractor to the Engineer-
in-charge or his authorised representative for witnessing the tests in the
manufacturer’s premises.
5.8.9 Marking:
Identification Marks on Cable:
The following particulars shall be properly legible embossed on the cable
sheath at the intervals of not exceeding one meter throughout the length of
the cable. Manufacture name and/or Trade name.
a) Voltage grade of Cable.
b) Year of manufacture.
c) ISI Mark.
d) Size of cable

5.8.10 Installation
HT Cables shall be laid in ground, trenches, cable trays and on walls as
specified. Installation shall include all supports and clamps as required. The
complete work shall be in accordance to CPWD General Specifications for
Electrical Works - Part II (External) 1994 amended up to date. As far as
possible cables shall not be fixed on walls directly but can be laid on cable
trays.

5.8.11 Jointing for Cable Glands

Jointing work shall be carried out only by licensed experienced cable jointer
and shall be in accordance to CPWD General Specifications for Electrical
Works - Part II (External) 1994 amended up to date.

5.8.12 Earthing for Cable Glands

All HV cable glands shall be connected to the earth with suitable size copper
or G.I. conductors.

5.8.13 Power Distribution System Losses

The power cabling shall be adequately sized as to maintain the distribution
losses not to exceed 1% of the total power usage. Record of design
calculation for the losses shall be maintained. The cables shall be designed
as per the voltage drop regulations at peak load.

5.9 LT Cables
This specification covers the supply & installation of LT power & control
cables. Cables shall be tested at manufactures facility and supplied in
accordance to relevant Indian Standard Specifications. The LT power
cables shall be XLPE insulated, PVC sheathed, Aluminium / copper
conductor armoured cables conforming to IS: 7098 (Part - I).

5.9.1 Data and Manuals

Drawings, data and manuals shall be submitted for the following: -
a) Manufacturer's catalogues giving cable details and characteristics.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 434

b) Cable current ratings for different types of installation inclusive of

derating factors for ambient temperatures, grouping etc.
c) Manufacturer's recommended method of jointing, termination etc of
the cables.

5.9.2 The cables shall be used for connection of power circuits of the electrical
system. Cables will be generally laid in ground, surface or in RCC/Hume/GI
pipes/ cable tray. For continuous operation at specified rating, maximum
conductor temperature shall be limited to the permissible value as per
relevant standard and/ or this specification. The insulation and sheath
materials shall be tough enough to withstand mechanical stresses during
handling. Armouring shall be round/flat wire of galvanised steel. Core
identification for multi core cable shall be provided by colour coding.
The cables shall be designed as per the voltage drop regulations at peak
load and length of the Cable.

5.9.3 Specific Requirements

Cable identification shall be provided by embossing on the outer sheath the
following at regular intervals of 2/3 metres.
a) Manufacturer'snameorbrandnameortrademark.
b) Typeofcableandvoltagegrade.
c) ISI Mark.

5.9.4 Tests

All tests shall be carried out in accordance with relevant Indian Standard
code of practice and Indian Electricity Rules. Test certificates of all the tests
carried out at the works shall be furnished for approval of the Engineer-in-
charge before the cables are dispatched from the manufacturer's facility to
the site.Test reports shall be complete with all details and shall also contain
IS specified limit values wherever applicable to facilitate review.

5.9.5 Laying of cables:

Cables shall be laid as per the CPWD specifications (Amended up to date)
given below:

a) Duct system:
Wherever specified such as road crossing, entry to building or in paved area
etc. cables shall be laid in underground ducts. The duct system shall consist
of a required number of stone ware pipes, GI, CI or spun reinforced concrete
pipe with simplex joints and all the jointing work shall be done according to
the CPWD building specifications or as per the instructions of the Engineer-
In-Charge as the case may be.
The size of the pipe shall not be less than 150mm. The pipe shall be laid
directly in ground without making any special bed but wherever asbestos
cement pipes are used, the pipes shall be encased in concrete of 75mm
thick. The ducts shall be properly anchored to prevent any movement. The
top surface of the cable ducts shall not be less than 60 cm. below the ground
level. The duct shall be provided with manholes of adequate size at regular
intervals for drawing the cables. The manhole cover and frame shall be of
cast iron and machine finished to ensure a perfect joint. The manhole covers
shall be installed flush with the ground or paved surfaces. The duct entry to
the manholes shall be made leak proof with lead-wool joints. The ducts shall

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 435

be properly plugged at the ends to prevent entry of water, rodents, etc.

Suitable duct markers shall be placed along the run of the cable ducts. The
duct markers shall at least be 15 cm. square embedded in concrete,
indicating duct. Suitable cable supports made of angle iron shall be provided
in the manholes for supporting the cables. Proper identification tags shall
be provided for each cable in the manholes.

b) Cables in laid ground:

i. The depth of the underground trench shall not be less than 75cm for cables
up to 1.1 KV grade and 1.2m for cables above 1.1KV grade from the final
ground level. When more than one cable is to be laid in vertical formation,
the depth of the trench shall be increased by 30 cm for each additional tier
to be formed. The width of the trenches shall not be less than 45 cm.
However, where more than one cable is laid, an axial distance of not less
than 15 cm. shall be allowed between the cables. Wherever there is a
change in direction, suitable curvature shall be provided complying with the
requirements. Suitable shoring and propping may be done to avoid caving
in of trench walls. The bottom of the trench shall be level and free from stone
brick bats etc. The trench shall then be provided with a layer of clean, dry
sand cushion of not less than 8 cm. in depth.

ii. The cable shall be pulled over rollers in the trench steadily and uniformly
without jerks and strains. The entire cable length shall as far as possible be
paved of in one stretch. However, where this is not possible, the remainder
of the cable may be removed by "Flaking" i.e., by making one long loop in
the reverse direction. After the cable has been uncoiled and laid into the
trench over the rollers, the cable shall be lifted slightly over the rollers,
beginning from one end by helpers standing about 10 mtrs. apart and draw
straight. The cable should then be taken off the rollers by additional helpers
lifting the cable and then laid in a reasonably straight line.

iii. When the cable has been properly straightened, the cores are tested for
continuity and insulation resistance and then the cable length be measured.
The ends of all cables shall be sealed immediately. In case of PVC cables,
suitable moisture seal tape shall be used for this purpose.

iv. Cable laid in trenches in a single tier formation shall have a covering of
clean, dry sand of not less 17 cm above the base cushion of sand before
the protective cover is laid. In the case of vertical multi-tier formation after
the first cable has been laid, a sand cushion of 30 cm shall be provided over
the initial bed before the second tier is laid. If additional tiers are formed,
each of the subsequent tiers also shall have a sand cushion of 30 cm as
stated above. The top most cable shall have final sand covering not less
than 17 cms before the protective cover is laid.

v. Unless otherwise specified, the cables shall be protected by the second-

class bricks of not less 20 cm x 10 cm x 10 cm (nominal size) protection
covers placed on top of the sand (bricks to be laid breadth wise) for the full
length of the cable. Where more than one cable is to be laid in the same
trench, this protective covering shall cover all the cables and project at 5

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 436

cm. over the sides of the end cables. The trenches shall be taken back filled
with excavated earth free from stones or other sharp edge debris and shall
be rammed and watered, if necessary, in successive layers not exceeding
30 cm, unless otherwise specified.

vi. At the time of original installation, approximately 3m of surplus cable shall

be left on each terminal end of the cable and on each side of the
underground joints. The surplus cable shall be left in the form of a loop.
Where there are long runs of cable such loop cable may be left at suitable
intervals as specified by the Engineer-in-charge.

c) Cables in indoor trenches

Cables shall be laid in indoor trenches wherever specified. The trench shall
be made of brick masonry with smooth cement mortar finish with suitable
removable covers (i.e., pre-cast slabs or MS chequered plates). The
dimensions of the trenches shall be determined depending upon the
maximum number of cables that is expected to be accommodated and can
conveniently be laid. Cables shall be arranged in tier formation in trenches
and if necessary, cables may be fixed with clamps. Suitable clamps, hooks
and saddles shall be used for securing the cables in position. Spacing
between the cables shall not be less than 15 cm centre to centre. Wherever
specified, trenches shall be filled with fine sand and covered with RCC or
steel chequered trench covers.

d) Jointing and Terminations

i. Cable jointing shall be done as per the recommendations of the

cable manufacturer. All jointing work shall be done only by
qualified/licensed cable jointer.

ii. All jointing pits shall be of sufficient dimensions as to allow easy and
comfortable working. Jointing materials and accessories like
conductor, ferrules, solder, flex, insulating and protective tapes,
filling compound, jointing box etc. of right quality and correct sizes,
confirming to relevant Indian Standards.

iii.
Each termination shall be carried out using brass compression
glands and cable sockets. Hydraulic crimping tool shall be used for
making the end terminations. Cable gland shall be bounded to the
earth by using suitable sized copper wire/tape.
5.9.6 Route Marker

Route markers shall be provided along the runs of cables at locations

approved by the Engineer-in-Charge and generally at intervals not
exceeding 100m. Markers shall also be provided to identify change in the
direction of the cable route and at locations of underground joints.

Route markers shall be made out of 150mm dia x 5mm (Thickness)

GI/Aluminium/ CI plate welded/ bolted on 35 mm x 35mm x 6mm angle iron,
60cm long. Such plate markers shall be mounted parallel to and at about
0.5m away from the edge of the trench.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 437

The word “MV/HV CABLE” as the case may be, shall be inscribed on the
marker.

5.10 Technical Specification for Cable Trays

5.10.1 The scope of work shall cover hot dip galvanisedCable trays, tray support
systems, fittings and accessories for laying the power cables, control
cables and tele technical cables. Manufacture and finish shall be
completed at the factory works.
The cable trays shall be of steel as per IS 226 and galvanized and the
thickness of galvanization shall not be less than 100 microns. All bolts and
nuts also be galvanized. Hot dip galvanizing shall confirm to IS 2633. The
galvanizing shall be uniform, clear, smooth, continuous and free from acid
spots.

5.10.2 The cable trays and accessories shall be fabricated out of hot rolled steel
sheets, which shall be hot dipped galvanized. The complete assembled
cable tray sections shall be corrosion resistant, high strength and with
extreme smooth surface.The tray shall have suitable strength and rigidity to
provide adequate support for all contained cables.It shall not present sharp
edges, burrs or projections injurious to the insulation of wiring/cables.It shall
have side rails or equivalent structural members.It shall include fittings or
other suitable means for changes in direction and elevation of runs.

5.10.3 Cable Trays — Types

Ladder Type Cable Trays

Ladder type cable trays shall be used for laying the power cables of medium
voltage and low voltage. Ladder type cable trays shall be made out of
Channels for side rails and rungs.

Ladder type cable tray shall consist of a Welded rung assembly of field
proven design. It shall consist of side rails of 3.0 mtrs. Standard lengths and
slotted rung spaced 250mm centre to centre.

Coupler, Coupler fasteners, tray assembly fasteners must form the part of
the equipment. The Ladders should be heavy duty sheet metal
constructions yet robust enough to carry a cable load of 50 kg/m on a span
of 1.25 mtrs.

The design shall be flexible enough to accommodate change of widths at

site. Sections of 2mm shall be standard for different widths of trays.
Horizontal bends, Vertical internal / external, tees, crosses shall be standard
products. Hinged or flexible coupler assemblies for Vertical / Horizontal
route changes shall be available as standard as also reducers (offset
couplers). Covers shall be of pre-galvanized sheet 18 SWG (1.25mm up to
300w) & 16 SWG 1.6mm on higher widths) construction possible for easy
mounting on to trays wherever applicable. Provision to add on earth flat
holding clamps, trays fixing clamps should be part of cable tray design.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 438

5.10.4 Perforated Cable Tray

Perforated cable trays shall be used for laying the cables of low voltage and
control cable. Perforated cable trays shall generally be of channel type and
the perforation in the trays shall be either 8 x 15 mm or 10 X 20 mm oval
holes.

Perforated cable trays of standard lengths of 2.5 mtrs shall be offered. Finish
shall be as specified earlier.The cable tray of size 150mm Width and Less
than that shall be of Perforated type.
Sizes
The cable trays shall be of the following standard sizes.
Width 300 / 450 / 600 / 800 / 1000 mm as required.
Height 75 / 100 mm
Thickness of sheet steel2.0 mm / 3.0 mm as per width of tray.The flange
and width of the cable trays shall be decided based on the diameter and the
number of cables running through each section of the cable tray.

5.10.5 Cable tray manufacturer shall supply suitable accessories for fixing the
cable trays on supports from ceiling and beams of the building structure.
Cable trays shall be supplied with GI coupler plates, hardware, nuts bolts
and washers for joining the standard length of sections.

5.10.6 Installation
a) Cable trays shall be installed as a complete system. Trays shall be
supported properly from the building structure. The entire cable tray
system shall be rigid.

b) Each run of the cable tray shall be completed before the installation of
cables.In portions where additional protection is required, non-
combustible covers/ enclosures shall be used.

c) Where cables of different system are installed on the same cable tray,
non-combustible, solid barriers shall be used for segregating the
cables.
d) Cable trays shall be grounded by two numbers, earth continuity wires.
Cable trays shall not be used as equipment grounding conductors.

e) At no place, the cable tray / rack / ladder running horizontally should

rest on any building partition like Brick wall, RCC beams etc. but
instead proper MS supports/ hangers to be provided at minimum of
1500 mm intervals and at every Turning Angle.

5.10.7 Testing and Inspection

a) Deflection load test at the manufacturer's facility Test span shall be

simple bream span with free unrestrained ends.

b) The cable tray shall be uniformly loaded along the span with cable tray
simply supported at the two ends as per the load criteria.
5.11 Earthing System
5.11.1 This section covers the general requirements of the earthing system for Sub-

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 439

station installation. Earthing system shall comprise earth electrodes in

accordance with General Specifications for Electrical Works (Part I-
Internal), 2013. All Neutral and Body earthing of all transformers / D.G Sets
HV & MV panels shall be done using Connectors taken from the Structural
Earthing of the building. Wherever it is not possible, the earthing shall be of
copper plate type and as per CPWD specifications.After installation, the
tests shall be carried out and results to be recorded.

5.12 Foundation Design.

a) All foundations shall be of reinforced cement concrete. The design and

construction of RCC structures shall be carried out as per IS 456 and
minimum grade of concrete shall be M25. Higher grades of concrete than
specified above may be used at the discretion of the bidder without claiming
anything extra from the department.

b) Foundation drawings of VCB Panels, Transformers, LT panels shall be

submitted to the department and work shall be commenced only after getting
approved from the Engineer-in-charge.

c) The procedure used for the design of the foundations shall be the most
critical loading combination of the steel structure and /or equipment and /or
superstructure, and other conditions which produce the maximum stresses
in the foundation or the foundation component, and as per the relevant IS
Codes of foundation design. The design calculations shall be submitted by
the bidder showing complete details.

d) All foundations shall rest below virgin ground level and the minimum depth
of foundation below the virgin ground level as per relevant standards shall
be maintained.

e) Design shall consider any sub-soil water pressure that may be encountered.
Necessary protection to the foundation work, if required, shall be provided
to take care of any special requirements for aggressive alkaline soil, black
cotton soil or any other type of soil which is detrimental or harmful to the
concrete foundations.
f) All building sub-structures shall be checked for sliding and overturning
stability during both construction and operating conditions for various
combinations of loads. Factors of safety for these cases shall be as stated
as per relevant IS codes or as stipulated elsewhere in the specifications. All
foundations shall be designed in accordance with the provisions of the
relevant parts of latest revisions of IS 2911 and IS 456.
5.13 Safety Requirements
This section covers the requirements of items to be provided in the sub-station
for compliance with statutory regulations, safety and operational needs.
a) Requirements
Safety provisions shall be generally in conformity with CPWD General
Specifications of Electrical Works (Part I-Internal), 2013. In particular following
items shall be provided:
b) Insulation Mats
Insulation mats conforming to IS 15652: 2006 shall be provided in front of panel
boards as well as other control equipment.
c) First Aid Charts and First Aid Box
Charts (one in English, one in Hindi, one in regional language), displaying
methods of giving artificial respiration to a recipient of electrical shock shall be

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 440

prominently provided at appropriate place. Standard first aid boxes containing

materials as prescribed by St. John Ambulance brigade or Indian Red Cross
should be provided in each sub-station.
d) Danger Plate
Danger Plates shall be provided on HV and MV equipment. Danger notice plate
shall be 200 mm x 150 mm made of mild steel at least 2 mm thick vitreous
enamelled white on both sides and with the descriptions in signal red colour on
front side as required. Notice plates of other suitable materials such as
stainless steel, brass or such other permanent nature material shall also be
accepted with the description engraved in signal red colour.
e) Fire Extinguishers
Portable CO2 Fire Extinguishers conforming to IS: 2878, Dry chemical
powder extinguishers conforming to IS: 2171, HCFC Blend A (P-IV) shall be
installed in the sub-station at suitable places. Other extinguishers
recommended for electric fires may also be used.
f) Fire Buckets
Fire buckets conforming to IS 2546: 1974 shall be installed with the suitable
stand for storage of water and sand.
g) Tool Box
A Standard tool box containing necessary tools required for operation and
maintenance shall be provided in the sub-station.
h) Caution Board
Necessary number of caution boards such as “Man on Line” ‘Don’t Switch
on’ etc. shall be available in the sub-station.

i) Key Board
A keyboard of required size shall be provided at a proper place containing
castle keys, and all other keys of sub-station and allied areas.

8.0.1 Standards:

The following standards and rules shall be applicable.

IS 7098, Part -II, : XLPE insulated HT cables

1985
IS 3975 : Mild steel wires, formed wires and tapes from
armouring of cables.
IS 1255 : Code of Practice for installation and maintenance
of Power cables upto and including 11 KV
ratings.
IS 10418 : Drums for Electric Cables
IS 1554 : PVC insulated (heavy duty) electric cables Part I
for working voltages upto and including 1100 V.
IS 8130, 1984 : Conductors for insulated electric cables and
flexible cords.
IS 3961 : Recommended current ratings for cables :( Part
2) PVC Insulated and PVC sheathed heavy duty

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 441

cables.

IS 5831 : PVC insulation and sheath of electric cables.

IS 10810 : Methods of Tests for Cables.
IS 4905 : Methods for random sampling

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 442

C-6- DG. SETS

6.0 Technical Specifications of D.G. Sets
The scope of work includes Design, Manufacture, supply, installation, testing,
commissioning of DG Sets. The capacity of DG sets given in this tender are
indicative only. Contractor has to design according to the load requirements
of various equipment. However, Minimum 2 Nos. of DG sets with prime power
rating of each 250 KVA at 1500 RPM, 415V, 50HZ, 3 Phase ,0.8 pf (lag) (for
Hospital Building) and 1 No. DG set with prime power rating of 125 KVA at
1500 RPM, 415V, 50HZ, 3 Phase, 0.8 pf (lag) (for residential building), with
complete accessories, AMF control panel, Synchronization panel shall be provided
in all respects as indicated in these specifications. Hence any material or
accessories which may not have been specifically mentioned but are necessary
for satisfactory and trouble-free operation and maintenance of the equipment, shall
be furnished by the Contractor. These technical specifications shall be read
along with the General Conditions for all E&M works given under subhead C-
B.
6.1 The contractor shall submit:
a) Written commitment from OEM/OEA to supply the DG Sets and delivery
schedule as per the requirement of the department.

b) Certificate from OEM/OEA or authorized service provider of engine

manufacturer for commissioning of DG Set after completion of the work.

c) Required Guarantee of DG Set from OEM/OEA in favor of Engineer-in-

Charge to cover defect liabilities.

d) An undertaking that mandatory free service is carried out during the

guarantee period by the authorized service provider of engine manufacturer

6.1.1 Each DG set shall be silent type with acoustic enclosure, heat exchanger type
cooled, suitable for continuous operations & capable to deliver prime power rating
at average load of 85%, manually and automatically operated. The DG set shall
comprise of Diesel Engine coupled to four-pole Alternator on a single frame with
integrated microprocessor based Genset monitoring and control system having
self-regulated, brushless/static excitation system.

6.1.2 The Design, Manufacture, Inspection, Testing and performance shall comply with
all the currently applicable standards, safety codes, relevant Bureau of Indian
Standards (BIS), International Electro Technical Commission (IEC) Publications,
CPWD specifications, CPCB norms.

6.1.3 All equipment shall be suitable for working under the conditions specified and shall
withstand the atmospheric conditions without deterioration.The time schedule for
routine maintenance / overhauling operations necessary for continuous satisfactory
operation of DG set shall be intimated by the contractor.

6.1.4 All controls shall be of 24V DC. DG Sets shall be started/ stopped from Engine / DG
Panel/ Remote.

6.1.5 The scope of work includes providing,

a) DG Sets complete with all the accessories like batteries, battery charging
arrangement, fuel system, exhaust system etc.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 443

b) AMF (Auto Mains Failure) panels. These D.G. sets shall be designed to run
in parallel and synchronized with Main LT panel on common bus. The Auto
Synchronizing panel with auto load sharing shall be supplied with D.G. sets.
The required controls, indications, interlocking etc. shall be provided.

c) Neutral Earthing and Body Earthing for each DG set shall be provided from
Structural Earthing of the services building and 25 x 5mm copper Strip for
connecting the neutral with the provided connectors.

d) Power and Control Cables, Earthing for all equipment and

accessories.Battery system with chargers and switch for isolation of battery
from engine.

e) Heat Exchanger type Cooling system.Acoustic Enclosure (Silent canopy) for

DG set.

f) HSD UG Storage Tank & Pumping System shall be provided for continuous
pumping of HSD oil to the DG Sets. Fuel Day Tank and related piping. Fuel
tank should be with level indicator and marking.POL i.e., HSD oil and lube oil
for testing at OEA/ OEM works shall be arranged by the contractor.

g) Exhaust system with piping & insulation including stack complete. Civil
foundation for the DG set, Fuel Tank and other accessories including
vibration isolation springs/ pads.

h) Minor building works necessary for installation of equipment, foundation

trench for fuel line & cable, making of opening in walls or in floors and
restoring them to their original finish and necessary grouting etc. as required.

i) Painting of all exposed metal surfaces of equipment and components with

appropriate colour.

j) All tools and tackles required for handling of equipment and materials at site
of work as well as for their assembly and erection and also necessary test
instruments shall be the responsibility of the contractor.

k) Clearance/ Approval of the complete installation from CPCB/ State Pollution

Control Board, Central Electricity Authority (CEA)/ Local Bodies and other
licensing authorities, wherever required.

6.2 Design Basis for DG Sets:

a) Load estimation / Load Calculation: The generator supply shall give 100%
backup to Lighting, Power, AHUs, Ventilation system, Lifts, MGPS, MOT and
Other Medical equipment including 30% of AC chilling units.

b) The selection of DG Set rating shall be done after taking all above factors in
consideration. The sandwich type copper bus duct shall be provided
between DG sets and synchronization panel with rating more than the
Ampere rating of DG sets.
c) The incomers rating of Synchronization panel shall be equal to alternator
rating of DG set or next rating available in ACB.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 444

6.3 Performance Requirement:

a) The equipment shall be capable of delivering continuously at the generator
terminals, (100% output at 85% load at unlimited time) except for periodical
maintenance when operating under the site and ambient conditions
described in this specification as per relevant IS/BS 5514.

b) The design parameters of the generator and excitation system shall be so

chosen, that the set is stable while running at any load between no-load and
full load. It should have isochronous speed control with load sensing
governing system and should be capable of paralleling between sets at
isochronous speed.

c) Engine shall be of standard design of the original manufacturers. Engine

should be heavy duty four stroke, turbo charged after cooled.
Climate conditions
Design ambient temperature 40° C
Altitude above MSL 1000 Mtrs. from MSL
Relative humidity 85%
Type of Building Hospital

6.4 Approvals
a) The contractor shall obtain information relating to local regulations, Bye-Laws,
application of all laws relating to his work or profession and his having to
execute work as required. No additional claims shall be admissible on this
account.

b) Contractor shall obtain approval of the installation from the relevant inspection
Authorities at all stages and on completion of the installation work. The
contractor shall pass on these approvals to the Owner. Statutory charges
payable to the Government / Municipal Authorities/ Statutory Bodies /
Electrical Inspectorate/ Central/State Pollution Control Board/CCOE etc. for
obtaining approvals will be paid by the department.

c) The components of the installation shall be of such design so as to

satisfactorily function under all conditions of operation. The entire work of
manufacture/fabrication, assembly and installation shall conform to sound
engineering practice. The entire installation shall be such as to cause
minimum transmission of noise and vibration to the building structure.

6.5 Engine and Accessories:

6.5.1 Diesel Engine

a) The engine shall be of standard design of the original manufacturers. It should

be 4 stroke cycles, Heat exchanger, turbo charged (as per manufacturer
standard), diesel engine developing suitable BHP for giving a power rating as
per ISO 8528- Part-1 in KVA at the load terminals of alternator at 1500 rpm at
actual site conditions.
b) The engine shall be capable for delivering specified Prime Power rating at
variable loads for PF of 0.8 lag with 10% overload available in excess of
specified output for one hour in every 12 hours. The average load factor of the

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 445

engine over a period of 24 hours shall be 0.85 (85%) for prime power output.

c) The engine shall conform to IS:10000/ ISO 3046/ BS:649/ BS 5514 amended
up to date.

d) The manufacturer shall furnish certificate, that the engine for the DG set
complies with the CPCB emission norms.

e) The engine shall be fitted with following accessories subject to the design
of the manufacturer:
i. Dry exhaust manifold with suitable Hospital grade silencer.
ii. Suitable self-starter for 24 V DC.
iii. Battery charging alternator unit and voltage regulator, suitable for
starting
batteries, battery racks with interconnecting leads and terminals.
iv. Necessary gear driven oil pump for lubricating oil, priming of engine
as well as fuel systems as per manufacturer recommendations.
v. Lubrication oil cooler
vi. Crank case heater as per manufacturer recommendations.
vii. Fuel pump with engine speed adjustment

6.5.2 Fuel System

It shall be fed through engine driven fuel pump. A replaceable element of fuel
filter shall be suitably located to permit easy servicing. Individual Daily fuel service
tank of minimum capacity 990 liter, fabricated out of 3mm thick M.S. sheet
provided with all accessories such as inlet, outlet connections air vent tap,
drain plug and level indicator (gauge) M.S. fuel piping from tank to engine with
valves, unions, reducers etc. for each D.G Set. Fuel system shall comply
with the latest environment flue gas data limitations amended up to date.

6.5.3 Lubricating Oil System

It shall be so designed that if the engine starts after a long shut down
lubrication failure does not occur. A timer-based auto priming pump
(operative on AC/DC) shall be provided to keep bearings primed all the
time.

6.5.4 Cooling System

a) Heat exchanger cooled engines, forced ventilation system shall be
provided. Care should be taken to avoid re circulation of hot air. In some
cases, it may also be achieved by natural wind direction consideration.
i) Fan flow rate should be selected according to the engine breathing air and
radiation heat dissipation with permissible temp rise in DG
room/Enclosure.
ii) Static head of the fan should be selected according to the restriction at air
suction area and hot air outlet area, also consider the attenuation
requirement.
Maximum temperature allowed to rise in DG Set room is:
Max. Ambient temperature Allowable temp. rise
Up to 40 deg. C 10 deg. C
40 to 43 deg. C 7 deg. C
Above 45 deg. C 5 deg. C

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 446

6.5.5 Heat Transfer Coils

Air cooled fluid cooler consisting of heat transfer coils made of copper tubes
and corrugated staggered hole continuous plate type aluminum fins.

6.5.6 Headers
Headers are made of carbon steel with vent and drain sockets.

6.5.7 Casing
Casing is made out of heavy gauge galvanized iron steel sheet. The casing is
powder coated for protection against moisture / rust.

6.5.8 Fans & fan mountings

The fans used are to be Axial fans of aero foil design. The fans are of variable
angle glass reinforced and pressure die cast aluminium alloy hub. The fan
blades are very light weight, spark & corrosion resistant and are of high
strength.

6.5.9 Motors
The motors are totally enclosed (TEFC) for protection against dust / moisture and
class F insulated with IP-55 protection. The motors are foot mounted and are
designed for 415 ± 10% Volts, 3 Phase and 50 Hz.

6.5.10 Base Frame

Base frame is made up of heavy gauge steel section. The entire unit is
assembled on this heavy-duty channel iron base frame and can be mounted on
rooftop depending upon the job site requirement.

6.5.11 Air& Drain Valves

Air purging valves are mounted on the top of coil headers to make sure that the
cooler is with water and no Air pockets in the system. The Air and drain valves
shall have ball valves with dummy plugs.

6.5.12 Starting System

This shall comprise of necessary set of heavy-duty batteries of 24V DC and not
less than 360 AH Capacity, and suitable starter motors, axial type gear to match
with the toothed ring on the fly wheel. A timer in the control panel to protect the
starter motor from excessively long cranking runs, shall be integrated with the
engine protection system. Battery capacity shall not be less than 360AH for
meeting the needs of starting system (as 3 attempts starting), as well as the
requirements of control panel, indications and auxiliaries such as priming pump
as applicable etc. The scope shall cover all cabling, terminals, including initial
charging etc. The system shall be capable of starting the DG set within 20-30
seconds even in winter condition with an ambient temperature down to 0o C.

The battery charger shall be suitable to charge required number of batteries at

24 volts complete with, transformer, rectifier, charge rate selector switch,
indicating ammeter &voltmeter etc. Connections between the battery charger
& batteries shall be provided with suitable copper leads with lugs etc.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 447

6.6 Governor

Electronic governor of class A1, as per ISO 3046/ BS 5514 with actuator shall be
provided. Governor shall be a self-contained unit capable of monitoring speed.

6.7 Piping Work

All pipe lines and fittings and accessories requirement inside the room/ enclosure
and outside for exhaust piping shall be provided by the contractor. This shall
include necessary flexile pieces in the exhaust, fuel, lubricating Oil and water lines
as are necessary in view of the vibration isolation requirement in the installation.
Piping of adequate size shall be used for lubricating Oil of the material as per
manufacturer standard. However, only M.S pipes for the exhaust shall be used.
For fuel lines with in the acoustic enclosure, PVC braided pope as per
manufacturer recommendations can be used. However, for fuel lines outside the
acoustics enclosure, only MS pipe be used.

The pipe work shall be inclusive of all fittings and accessories required such as
bends, reducers, elbows, flexible connections, necessary hardware etc. the
installation shall cover clamps, supports hangers etc., as are necessary for
completing the work. However, the work shall be sectionalized with flanged
connections as are necessary for easy isolation purposes for maintenance of unit
as approved by Engineer-in-charge.

6.8 Exhaust System

Engine exhaust system shall be fitted with hospital super critical grade silencer.
Thermally insulated aluminum cladding for exhaust piping etc. shall be provided
along with structural support with stays for the engine.

6.8.1 Exhaust Piping:All M.S. Pipes of Class ‘B’ for exhaust lines shall be conforming to
relevant IS. The work includes necessary cladding of exhaust pipe work using 50
mm thick Loosely bound resin (LBR) mattress/ mineral wool/ Rockwool, density
not less than 120 kg/m3 and aluminium cladding (0.6 mm thick) for the complete
portion. The exhaust pipe work includes necessary supports, foundation etc. to
avoid any load & stress on turbo charger / exhaust piping & the design and drawing
for exhaust piping structure run along wall/building shall be got approved from the
Engineer-in-charge.

(a) Exhaust system should create minimum back pressure.

i. Numberofbendsshouldbekeptminimumandsmoothbendsshouldbeuse
d to minimize back pressure.
ii. Pipe sleeve of larger dia. should be used while passing the pipe
through concrete wall & gap should be filled with felt lining.

iii. Exhaust piping inside theAcoustic Enclosure/ Genset room should be

lagged with asbestos rope along with aluminium sheet cladding /
insulated to avoid heat input to the room.
iv. 45 Degree downward cut should be given at the end of the pipe to
avoid rain water entry into exhaust piping.
v. Care should be taken to ensure that no carbon particles emitted due
to exhaust leakage enters and deposits on alternator
vi. When tail end is vertical, there should be rain trap to avoid rain water
entry.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 448

vii. Silencer should be installed with drain plug at bottom.

6.8.2 Engine Mounted Instrument Panel

Engine Shall be supplied with engine mounted microprocessor based fully

integrated generating set monitoring, metering and control system which should
be equipped with electronic governor along with electronic AVR to facilitate
discreet control of speed and voltage. It should be equipped with starting control
including integrated fuel ramping to limit the black smoke frequency overshoot
with optimized cold weather starting. The indicating panel should have
communication network facility to facilitate remote hooking on a common
network. Engine instrument panel should be equipped with digital alarm and
status mirage to monitor and display the parameters of engine and generator.

6.8.3 Alternator
The alternator shall be Separately excited, Screen Protected Drip Proof, IP23,
Class 'H' insulation as per OEM, self-ventilated, air cooled, brushless, machine
with exciter and shall be rated continuous duty temperature rise with in class ‘H'
Limits at rated load.

a) The alternator shall be brushless synchronous and suitable for 3 phase,

415volts, 50 Hz. 0.8 p.f. and 1500 RPM and capable to deliver rated KVA
at 40 degree C.

b) The alternator shall be suitable for coupling directly to the engine. It shall
be drip proof screen protected as per IP23. The alternator shall be double
bearing type.

c) The alternator shall be continuously rated and designed to withstand

tropical conditions. It shall be confirming to BS: 5000 (Part-99)/ IS: 4722-
1992/IEC:34.

d) Suitable Nos. Resistant Temperature Device (RTDs)to measure the

winding temperature and (Bearing Temperature Device) BTDS to
measure bearing temperature shall be provided as per OEM standards.

e) The leads of space heaters shall be wired up to the terminal block in a

separate terminal box. Manufacturer shall indicate the setting values for
each RTD / BTD for alarm and trip.
f) Alternator shall be provided with anti-condensation space heater of
adequate rating suitable for 240 V, 50 Hz, 1 Phase AC supply and shall
be wired up to a separate terminal box.

g) The independent earth terminals on the frame complete with nuts,

spring washer and plain washer shall be provided.

h) Alternator shall be provided with suitable flanges for termination of

cables. Suitable arrangement shall be provided in the terminal box for
cable/earthing bus.

i) DG Set shall be capable of working in synchronizing with other DG sets.

The supply of any relays, contactors, CTs etc. required for this purpose
shall be included.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 449

j) Alternator shall be suitable for bearing the starting (magnetizing/inrush

current) current of Transformer after changeover.

6.9 Excitation System

a) The alternator shall be provided with a complete brushless excitation
system, capable of supplying the excitation current of the generator under
all conditions of output from no load to full load and capable of maintaining
voltage of the generator constant at one particular value/ or as per
manufacturer's standards.

b) The excitation system shall comprise a shaft driven AC exciter with

rotating rectifiers. The rectifiers shall have in-built protection for over-
voltage.

c) The alternator should be complete with shunt and booster excitation. The
exciter shall be fast response type and shall be designed to have a low
time constant to minimize voltage transients under severe load changes.
The excitation voltage response ratio shall be at least 0.8.

d) The rated current of the main exciter shall be at least 10% more than the
exciter current and it shall have a 40% overload capability for 10 seconds.

6.10 Automatic Voltage Regulator

a) An automatic high speed, dead band type voltage regulator shall be
provided complete with all accessories. The regulation system shall be
provided with equipment for automatic and manual control.
b) The regulator shall regulate the output voltage from generator current and
potential signals. Series compounding transformer shall be provided to
enable maintaining adequate terminal voltage in the event of terminal
faults. Alternatively, excitation system shall be provided with arrangement
for field forcing. Contractor shall co-ordinate suitably the protection relays
for generator with the operational characteristics of automatic voltage
regulator, especially under short circuit conditions.
c) In the event of any fault e.g., over voltage/ high bearing temperature/
high winding temperature or an external fault, theAVR shall remove
the excitation voltage to the alternator. An emergency trip shall also be
provided.

d) Voltage regulation and steady stage modulation shall be within + 1% of

the line voltage with manual voltage adjustment capability within + 5%.

e) Necessary equipment for field suppression and surge protection shall be

provided.
f) The response time of the exciter and the generator shall be properly
matched to avoid hunting.

g) AVR system shall be provided with equipment for automatic and remote
operation/control as required/ as per manufacturer's standards.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 450

h) Necessary equipment shall be furnished for the following: -

I. To prevent automatic rise of field voltage, in case of failure of
potential supply.

II. Circuit to assure correct division of reactive power for parallel

operation. The excitation and voltage regulation shall be designed to
cause necessary de-excitation in case of short circuit. Cross current
compensation circuit shall be provided.
III. Any other item not included/ specified but is a standard design of the
manufacturer.

6.11 AMF panel

AMF Panel with bypass system complete with relays, timers, set of CTs for
metering & protection and multi-function meter to indicate currents, phase, and
line voltages, frequency, KVA, power factor, KWH & provision for overload,
short-circuit, restricted earth fault, under voltage control, control cabling from
AMF panel to diesel engine and elsewhere if required, all complete and inter
locking including the following:

a) 2 Nos. 4 pole ACBs 800 A, 50 KA (for hospital building) and 2 Nos. 4

Pole 400 A, 36 KA (for residential building) or higher as per design of
fault levelwith microprocessor based with short circuit, overload & earth
fault protection.

b) AUTO Transfer arrangement of required capacity.

c) Auto/Manual/Test/Off select or switch, 2 Nos. over voltage relay, 2 Nos.

reverse power relay and 2 Nos. under voltage relay.

d) 3 Sets of current transformers accuracy for protection and 15 VA Class-I

for metering.
e) Multifunctional meter shall indicate current voltage frequency power
factor, KWH Phase, KVARH, KVA and all other parameters as required.

f) Indicating lamps for load on mains and load on set shall be provided.

g) MCBs for instrumentsBattery charger, complete with transformer/rectifier,

D.C. voltmeter and ammeter, selector switch for trickle, off and boost and
current adjustment.

h) Battery charging indicationMain supply failure monitor, Supply failure

timer, Restoration timer Control unit with three impulse automatic
engine start/stop and failure tostart lockout.

i) Impulse counter with locking and reset facility.

j) ON/OFF/Control circuit switch with indicator
k) Low lubricating Oil trip indication
l) Audio/Video annunciation for

i) High water temperature

ii) Low lubricating oil pressure
iii) Engine over speed

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 451

iv) Engine fails to start

v) Full load/maximum load warning
vi) Weak Battery Warning
vii) Dead Battery Shutdown
viii) Over Crank Shutdown
ix) Fail To Crank Shutdown

6.12 Synchronization Panel

6.12.1 Operation of DG sets shall be monitored and controlled by PLC panel i.e.,
Programmable logic controller-based logic panel. In case of mains failure, this
logic panel shall control auto changeover from mains to DG Sets supply and
interlocking of ACBs, auto synchronizing and auto load management functions
along with annunciation for alternator control and protection.

6.12.2 The logic panel shall be provided with a total manual over ride facility. There shall
be Smooth transfer of DG set operation from PLC to manual system & vice versa
without any interruption/tripping. The logic panel shall be complete with all
Auxiliary Relays, Timers, Contactors, Programmable logic controller, control
wiring, interconnections etc. with 2.5 sq.mm. FRLS PVC insulated, 1.1 KV grade
copper conductor wires.

6.12.3 The Synchronization panel should have 3 no s incomers of 1600 A and 2 no

outgoings of 2500 A. the outgoings should be terminated in to the main LT panel
through separate copper, sandwich type bus ducts of 3200 A capacity.

6.12.4
Control Philosophy AutomaticStart&StopofEngine. The system should come
in operation after sensing of grid failure and automatically control the start &
stop of engines, depending on the predefined load setting in the PLC. In
case engine does not start in the first cranking, two more auto commands
should be given with proper intervals. Even then if engine fails to start,
indication must appear on MMI (Man Machine interface). In the event the
engines are under loaded i.e., load sensed is capable of being catered by
less than the capacity of running DG sets then command must be given to
stop required number of excess DG sets after running idle for short
duration. Provision to select no. of DG sets to be started and synchronised
at no load to cope up with sudden load without tripping the DGs should also
be inbuilt into the system.

The facility of synchronization shall be available in both Auto & Manual

mode. In normal circumstances, the auto synchronisation will work,
however due to any reason auto synchronisation fails repeatedly, the
facility for closure of ACB must be available automatically. In manual
mode, ACB will be closed by panel push button.

6.12.5 Automatic Load Sharing

The load sharing shall be automatic, by sensing both active & reactive power.

6.12.6 Back up Protection

The system should have following inbuilt protection other than external relays in
synchronization panel:

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 452

Reverse power, Reverse KVAR, Over Current, Under voltage, Over voltage,
Under frequency, Over frequency, synchro-check & earth fault relay except
differential relay. Due to any electrical fault, PLC shall trigger the master trip relay.
These PLCs will be state of the art equipment using latest technology and of most
rugged and reliable design. Since they shall be operating in the harsh & unfriendly
environment of DG room, they will be suitable to operate trouble free in those
conditions. The chosen equipment should be able to withstand high
temperature, humidity & voltage fluctuations, thus making it suitable for the
operating conditions described above.

6.12.7 Sequence Of Operation

The following sequence of operation shall be achieved through PLC based logic
panel in addition to hardware interlocks as well as software interlocks:
a) Selection of any generator as a lead generator to achieve the uniform
running hours of all generators.

b) Three attempts to start the engine of lead generator. In case the engine
fails to start or does not achieve the requisite speed within the
predetermined time, PLC system declares engine of generator faulty. In
this event PLC automatically selects next generator as the lead generator.

c) The PLC system automatically selects starting sequence of other

generators on the basis of the lead generator being selected by the
operator.
d) Before issuing close command to lead generator air circuit breaker, PLC
checks that ACB of any other generator is not in close position. Then PLC
system gives close command to lead generator ACB. The PLC system
tries two times with interval of 5 secs. to close the ACB. Simultaneously,
it also gives starting command to next generator engine in queue
depending upon load.

e) The speed, excitation, frequency and voltage of incoming generator is

controlled identically as per the lead generator starting sequence
described above, except closing of ACB.

f) When the lead generator KW crosses more than the 85% of rated
capacity of DG set, the PLC system performs synchronization sequence
for paralleling of generator prior to switching on of the ACB of 2nd
generator. When the KW of 2nd generator crosses 80% of rated capacity
of DG set, then the PLC system performs synchronization sequence for
paralleling of next generator prior to switching on the ACB of 3rd generator
and similar sequence to be followed for other DG sets.

g) The last incoming generator ACB is tripped when PLC system senses that
the total load on the system is less than the specified load and stops the
engine after 5 minutes of idle running.
h) DG sets will start and stop automatically depending on the predefined load
setting in the PLC & also all DG sets will operate in load sharing mode.

6.13 Exhaust stack height:

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 453

In order to dispose exhaust above building height, minimum exhaust stack height
shall be 30m High or 3m above the building height, whichever is higher as per
MOEF & CPCB requirements.

6.14 Performance
Voltage dip shall not exceed 20% of the rated voltage for any step load or transient
load as per ISO 8528 (Part-1). The winding shall not develop hot spots exceeding
safe limits due to imbalance of 20% between any two phases from no load to full
load.

The generator shall preferably be capable of withstanding a current equal to 1.5

times the rated current for a period of not more than 15 seconds as required vide
of IS 4722:1992.

Theperformancecharacteristicsofthealternatorshallbeasbelow:
Efficiencyatfullload0.8P.F. as per Super ECBC up to date
Total distortionfactor Lessthan 3%
i. 10% overload One hour in every 12 Hrs. of continuous use.
ii. 50% overload 15seconds.

6.15 Painting
All steel surfaces, which are to be painted, shall be thoroughly cleaned, degreased
and supplied with primer prior to assembly and shall be applied with two coats of
epoxy paint shade RAL 7032 as per IS5.

All castings shall be sand blasted, degreased and cleaned before painting as
per manufacturer standards..
6.16 Foundation:
a) Foundation should be designed considering safe bearing capacity of soil
and DG set static and dynamic load. Anti-Vibration Mounts (AVMs) are
provided to reduce generator set vibration and noise transmission to the
surrounding structure.
b) The depth of the foundation to be decided in consultation with the certified
structural engineer depending on static and dynamic load of the DG set
and soil condition.

c) The length and breadth of foundation should be minimum 150 mm (6”)

more than acoustic enclosure size / base rails size

d) Ensure that the concrete is completely set and hardened before

positioning the generator set.

e) The foundation elevation is to be minimum 150 mm above finish ground

level.

f) DG Set foundation level to be checked with water level tube at frame

mounting area and should be within +/- 5mm.

g) Metal shims to be provided between DG frame and civil foundation to load

DG Set uniformly.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 454

h) The AVMs of DG Set should be loaded uniformly for DG sets where AVMs
are placed on foundation & below DG set base frame. Use shims below
AVM resting area. Shim plate should be of 3 mm minimum thickness and
to be used in multiple as required. Ensure that AVMS are loaded evenly.

i) It is recommended to take services of structural Engineer for designing

foundations and carryout seismic analysis if required.

j) For cable laying, necessary trench shall be constructed as per site

requirements. In case of cable termination at the top/ bus duct, the trench
is not required but necessary supports are to be considered.

k) In case of special requirement, civil foundation to be casted in isolation

with building structure.

6.17 Cabling

a) connection between alternator to AMF panel & AMF Panel to Essential

panel shall be through bus-trunking. For exposed/ outdoor bus trunking
protection requirement should be IP-55.
b) Multi-core 2.5 sq.mm copper cables shall be used for control wiring.
c) It is recommended to support output cables on separate structure on
ground so that weight of cables should not fall on alternator/ base rail.
d) External wirings, when provided for remote voltage / excitation monitoring/
droop CT etc. shall be screened sheathed type. Maximum length of such
wiring shall not exceed 5 meters.
e) For proper terminations between links and switchgear terminals, the
contact area must be adequate.
f) The following situations should also be avoided as they lead to creation of
heat sources at the point of termination:
g) Point contact arising out of improper position of links with switchgear
terminals
h) Gaps between busbars / links and terminals being remedied by
connecting bolt/stud. In such cases, the bolt will carry the load current.
Normally these bolts / studs are made of MS and hence are not designed
to carry currents.
i) Adequate clearance between busbars / links at terminals should be
maintained (IS 4232 may be referred to for guidelines).

6.18 System Operation:

Diesel - alternator sets function shall be as follows: -

6.18.1 Automatic Mode

While the normal mains supply is healthy, the diesel alternator set will be at rest
and the load will be supplied by the mains. The AMF system shall monitor the
main supply voltage & when the main supply voltage drops below a certain
preset value, the system shall sense these conditions & shall give automatic
start command to the control systems. After a time, delay of 1.5 seconds from
the main supply failure, the diesel engine shall start.

When the DG set attains its rated speed and voltage, a closing signal shall be
given to the VCB of the DG set. When the voltage in the mains gets restored,
its quality is monitored for about one minute and if proven satisfactory, the main

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 455

supply breaker shall close automatically transfer the load from Diesel engine to
the main supply at H.T. Panel. The set shall stop after idle running of one minute
after restoration of main supply. The diesel alternator set reverts to its standby
conditions &it's ready to start should the mains supply fail again.

6.18.2 Manual Mode:

In a manual mode, it shall be feasible to start-up the generator set by the operator
on pressing the start push button. Five attempts starting facility shall be operative
for the start-up function. Alternator circuit breakers close and trip operations shall
also be through operator only by pressing the appropriate button on the panel
and closure shall be feasible only after alternator has built up full voltage. If the
load is already on ‘mains’, pressure on ‘close’ button shall be ineffective. Engine
shut down, otherwise due to faults, shall be manual by pressing a ‘stop’ button.

6.18.3 Test Mode:

When under ‘test’ mode pressing of ‘test’ button shall complete the startup
sequence simulation and start the engine. The simulation will be that of mains
failure. Sequence Auto & Manual Modes shall be completed. Engine shall build
up voltage but the set shall not take load by closing of alternator circuit breaker.
When the load is on the mains, monitoring of performance for voltage/ frequency
etc. shall be feasible without supply to load.

If during test mode, the power supply has failed, the load shall automatically get
transferred to alternator. Bringing the mode selector to auto position shall shut
down the set provided main supply is ON. If the mains supply is not available at
that time, the alternator shall take load.

6.19 Earthing

Neutral Earthing and Body Earthing shall be provided from the Structural Earthing
to be done within the Service Building. Suitable size of copper strip may be used
for the purpose of connecting the DG set with Structural Earth Connectors laid.

No. of Structural Earth Connectors required for this purpose shall be intimated to
the Structural Earthing agency at the earliest. And the same may be confirmed
during building construction. Test joints should be provided for testing the
earthing as and when required.

6.20 Guaranteed Technical Specifications Required

1.0 Engine
1.1 Make To be intimated by contractor
1.2 BHP at rated RPM Not less than 1180 @1500
RPM
1.3 No. of cylinders & type 12, Vee type
1.4 Type of aspiration Turbo charged, after cooled
1.5 Overload Capacity 10% for 1 Hr in every 12 Hrs
Run
1.6 Governor Electronic, A1
1.7 Type of Cooling Heat Exchanger type
1.8 Coolant capacity Minimum 200 Ltr
2.0 Fuel System

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 456

2.1 Type of fuel HS Diesel

2.2 Day Oil tank capacity 990 Ltr
2.3 UG Fuel tank capacity Not less than 10000 Ltr
3.0 Exhaust System
3.1 Height of Exhaust pipe 30 mtr / 3 mtr above building
height whichever is more
3.2 Type of Silencer Hospital Grade
3.3 Anti-vibrating Spring Required
mounting
3.4 Necessary insulated Required
exhaust inside Room
3.5 Maximum allowable 7 Kpa
Back pressure
4.0 Starting System
4.1 Battery type 24 V
4.2 AH rating 360 AH
5.0 Alternator
5.1 Make To be intimated by contractor
5.2 Rated continuous KVA & 500 KVA / 808 KW
Rated KW
5.3 Voltage, Frequency 415 Volts, 50 HZ
5.4 Variation
(i) in voltage + / - 5%
(ii) in Frequency + / - 1%
5.5 Rated Speed 1500 rpm
5.6 Full load current at rated 1400 A
KVA
5.7 Insulation class H
5.8 Enclosure category Acoustic Enclosure
5.9 Type of Voltage Electronic AVR
Regulator
5.10 Efficiency at rated P.F. Asper Super ECBC (5 star)
5.11 Specific Fuel Less than 220 g / KwH
Consumption
5.12 Excitation Separately Excited

6.21 Specification for HSD (High Speed Diesel) UG Storage Tank & Pumping
System

a) HSD Storage Tank & Pumping System shall be provided by the EPC
Contractor for continuous pumping of HSD to the DG Sets installed in
substations. Underground HSD tanks shall be located as per
CPCB/NFPA/CPWD/Local bylaws. Underground Diesel storage tank of
suitable capacity minimum of 10 KL along with Auto fuel transfer system
comprising of suitable number and capacity of fuel pumps (working &
standby) with underground pipeline from underground diesel tank up to the
buffer diesel tank in ESS shall be provided. Fuel Transfer Pumps shall be
flame proof, rotary gear, positive displacement type or as required for HSD
pumping application. Underground tanks, buffer tanks, piping, fuel pumps,
valves, cabling, control/ level switches, earthing etc. has to be provided as
per CPCB/NFPA/CPWD/Local bylaws. The supply of first fill of HSD Tanks,

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 457

Buffer Diesel Tanks and DG Set fuel tanks is included in the scope of works.
First fill of HSD fuel shall be provided up to rated capacities of all diesel
tanks. Suitable level of Transmitter shall be fitted on top of each tank to give
continuous level status.

b) Necessary licenses or approvals for diesel storage shall be obtained before

installation of UG diesel storage tank and pumping station from Local
Administration and Chief Controller of Explosives, Petroleum & Explosives
Safety Organization.

c) Provisions regarding permissible stresses, design, fabrication and erection

as included in IS 800: 1984 shall apply unless specified otherwise in this
code.

d) For provisions regarding analysis for saddle support and associated local
loads, reference shall be made to IS 2825: 1969.
6.21.1 Statutory Provisions
Compliance with this code does not absolve anyone from the responsibility of
observing any statutory provisions as may have been promulgated by the
statutory bodies, such as Department of Explosives.

6.21.2 Tank
The tank may be manufactured from suitable size plates covered in IS
1730:1989.

Table 1 covers recommended sizes, plate - thickness for tanks of various

nominal capacities. The shell and end plate thicknesses include a corrosion
allowance of 1.5 mm.

General arrangements for underground tank is shown in Fig. 2.

6.21.3 Materials
The material for the construction of oil storage tanks shall conform to Indian
Standards, wherever applicable.

Structural Steels

Steel plates and sections used in the tank construction shall conform to any one
of the following specifications:

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 458

IS 226:1975, IS 961:1975, IS 2002:1982, IS 2041:1982, IS 2062:1984 or IS

8500:1977.

The dimension of structural steel sections and plates used in tank

constructionshall conform to IS 808:1989 and IS 1730:1989, respectively.

6.21.4 Cast Steel Mountings

The mountings shall be suitable for welding and shall conform to Grade 3
of IS1030:1982.

6.21.5 Piping
Unless specified otherwise the pipe and pipe couplings shall conform to IS
1978:1982. If so, specified in the contract or order, couplings for threaded
connections may be supplied without recesses; when so supplied the coupling
in all other respects shall conform to IS 1978:1982. Pipes used for structural
purposes shall conform to IS 1978:1982 or IS 1979:1985 with respect to
physical properties of the material. Pipes of heavy class conforming to IS 1239
(Part 1): 1990 may be used for nozzles on tank and internal piping, if so,
specified in the contract or order.

6.21.6 Flanges
6.21.7 Bolts and Nuts
Bolts shall conform to property class 4.6 or 4.8 and other requirements specified
in IS 1367 (Part 3): 1979. Nuts shall conform to property class 4 of IS 1367 (Part
6):1980.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 459

Other materials used in association with steel work shall, where appropriate
Indian Standard specifications for materials exist, conform to such
specifications.

6.21.8 Permissible Stresses

Maximum permissible stresses in shell and other structural members shall not
exceed values stipulated as below.

a) In the design of tank shells, the maximum permissible tensile stress

before applying the factor of joint efficiency of 0-7 shall not exceed 165
MPa in case of steels conforming to IS 226: 1975 and IS 2062:1984. For
other steels this shall be taken as 0.70 of the minimum yield stress or 0-
4 of the minimum tensile stress specified, whichever is less.
b) The permissible stresses in compression, buckling, shear, bearing, etc.
(not covered), shall not exceed those specified in IS 800:1984. For this
purpose, steel conforming to IS 2002:1982 and IS 2041:1982 shall be
treated as equivalent to IS 226 :1975 or IS 2062:1984 whereas Type 2
steel conforming to IS 2041:1982 shall be treated as equivalent to IS
961:1975.

6.21.9 Design
Tanks manufactured as per provisions of the codes and thicknesses shall not be
less than the thicknesses given in Table 1. Tanks to be installed underground shall
also be designed for external earth pressure acting on the tank when it is empty.

The design temperature shall be the lowest one day mean temperature where the
tank is to be installed, as available from relevant IS codes, metrological department
or local authorities.

6.21.10 Corrosion Protections

Tanks to be installed underground shall be suitably protected against corrosion
caused by the soil strata and/or sub-soil water. The contractor shall specify type of
such protection that he considers desirable.

6.21.11 Tank Anchorage

Tank to be installed underground shall be anchored to resist the buoyancy force
induced by high water tables that may occur seasonally. The anchorage could
be either provided by means of steel flat of round bars having adequate cross
section to resist the uplift. The anchors should be embedded in RCC draft
having necessary dead weight, bonding and shear strength to resist the uplift
force.

6.21.12 Appurtenances And Mountings

Appurtenances or mountings installed on tanks shall conform to this code.
Alternative designs of appurtenances which provide equivalent strength,
tightness and utility are permissible, if so agreed to by the Engineer-in-charge.

Manhole necks, nozzle necks, reinforcing plates and shell-plate openings which
have either sheared or oxygen-cut surfaces shall have such surface made
uniform and smooth, with the corners rounded, except where such surfaces are
fully covered by attachment welds.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 460

The opening in tank larger than 65 mm in diameter shall be reinforced. The

minimum thickness of the reinforcing pad shall be the same as the shell
thickness and diameter shall be twice the diameter of the hole cut subject to
maximum diameter of the opening plus 200 mm.
6.21.13 Manhole
Each tank shall have a minimum of one manhole of not less than 500 mm size
(diameter). The manhole cover may be hinged with single or multiple bolts
fixing, as required by the purchaser.

Nozzles
The nozzle sizes shall be selected to meet individual operating conditions of
filling and emptying rates.

Lifting Lugs
The lifting lugs shall be provided in the tank at appropriate position to lift the
empty tanks only.

6.21.14 Accessories
The tank shall be provided with a fill connection, a draw-off connection, a dip-
connection a vent connection and a drain connection.

a) Fill Connection
When the tank is filled from the top, an internal fill pipe running down
to within 100 mmofthe tankbottom shall be providedto avoid
splashingof product and generation of static electricity. End of the fill
pipe shall be chamfered at 45°.

b) Dip Connection The dipconnection shall be provided with a galvanized

iron cover and is fitted with an internal perforated pipe running down to
within 100 mm of the tank bottom. Appropriate perforationshall be
provided for various products. The calibrated dip rod shall be of non-
sparking material (12mm square brass rod is recommended).

c) Vent Connection
The vent pipe shall be securely supported and shall not be less than 4
min height and at 4 m distance from any adjoining land or property or
any other source of fire. Vent pipe of any tank shall not be
interconnected with that of another. The open end of every vent pipe
shall be covered with two layers of non-corrodible metal wire gauge
having not less than 11 meshes per linear centimetre and shall be
further be protected from rain by a hood or by suitably bending it
downward.
d) Earthing Connection The horizontal storage tank, whether above
ground or under ground, shall invariably be provided with earthing
connection to eliminate the possibility of accumulation of static
charge on the surface of the tank either due to atmospheric
electricity or due to flow of product into thetank.

For this purpose, two earthing bosses of appropriate sizes shall be

welded to the saddle support in case of above-ground tanks and to the
end plate in case of underground tanks.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 461

6.21.15 Fabrication And Shop Painting

The tanks shall be fabricated by welding. Welding procedure in general and

the cylindrical shell shall be of full penetration double butt-welded
construction.The end plates and penetration shall be attached to the
cylindrical shell by means of double fillet welds.

6.21.16 Shell Plate Arrangement

When the shell length is produced from more than one single plate the
longitudinal seams shall break joint at intermediate circumferential scams. It is
recommended that whenever possible a longitudinal seam should be situated in
the upper third of a tank or on the top centre line.

The end plates shall be adequately stiffened. The recommended size of angle
stiffeners is as given in Table 1

6.21.17 Shop Painting

All the external surfaces of the tank shall be thoroughly cleaned and freed from
rust and scale and painted with one coat of approved primer paint. All the interior
surfaces of the tank shall be cleaned to remove all rust and foreign matters like
grease, dirt, etc., before dispatch.

6.21.18 Tolerances
Tolerance on Shell Diameter

The tolerance on diameter at any point on the length of the tank shell shall be
within +0.35 percent of the specified diameter (Max) when calculated from an
external circumferential measurement.

a) Tolerance on Circularity
The tolerance on circularity at any point on the length of the shell that is the
difference between maximum and minimum internal shell diameter, shall not
exceed one percent of the nominal internal diameter.

b) Tolerance on Overall Length

The overall length of the tank shall not differ by more than 0.5 percent of the
overall length given in Table 1.

6.21.19 Inspection and Testing

Examination of welds shall be done by non-destructive testing such as spot
radiography carried out.

All gauges and templates necessary for inspection, to the satisfaction of the
inspector shall be supplied by the manufacturer. All tanks shall be subjected to
hydraulic test and checked for leaks.

6.21.20 Calibration
Tanks may be calibrated mathematically. Where physical calibrations are
specified, tanks shall be calibrated in accordance with IS 2009: 1975 using a
certified water. Calibration may be certified by an independent authority, if so
required.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 462

6.21.21 Asphalt Doping

Asphalt doping should be adopted to provide satisfactory protection to steel

against soil attack. Doping of tank should not be taken in hand until the tank is
finally tested inside the pit and all water emptied out. However, on the portion of
the outside surface of tank which come in contact with cement concrete or
foundation, doping can be carried out before testing, excluding the welding joints
portions which shall be completed after testing.

Recommended practices for carrying out asphalt doping are as follows:

a) Surface Preparation - The outside surface of the tank, turn buckle,

anchor bolts, buried portion of manholes, nozzles, saddles, etc.,
should be thoroughly cleaned by scraping with wire brushes and sand
papers to bare metal. All mill scales dirt should be completely removed
before starting the doping work.

b) Primer Coat --- The surface thus prepared should be treated with two
coats of primer. Each coat is applied uniformly after the previous one
is completely dried.

c) Doping - After the application of primer coats, two coats of hot 30/40
Grade bitumen shall be applied as per manufacturer's
recommendations, resulting in an overall coating thickness of 3.2 mm.
The30/40Gradebitumenshallbeheatedtotherequiredtemperatureasrec
ommended by the manufacturer for easy and uniform application of
bitumen.

d) The applicationof bitumenshall be done insuch a way as to give the

appearance ofarough cast plaster and this can be obtained by dabbing
only and not painting.

6.21.22 Earthing Connection

Every tank shall be electrically connected with the earth in an efficient

manner by not less than 2 separate and distinct connections placed at the
opposite extremities of such tank. The connections and contacts shall have
as few joints as possible. All joints shall be riveted, welded or bolted and
also soldered to ensure both mechanical and electrical soundness. The
resistance to earth shall not exceed 70 and the resistance to earth plate or
to any part of fittings

6.22 Testing at factory/ Manufacturer’s premises

6.22.1 Following tests shall be carried out at the manufacturer's works in the presence
of Engineer-in-charge or his representative. DG sets and the auxiliaries shall be
assembled at the manufacturer's works and the following tests shall be performed.
Load test for 12 hours at rated KW at DG set's KW rating followed by a 1 hour on
10% overload (after continuous run of the 12 Hours with fuel consumption).

a) Engine starting time

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 463

b) B.H.P. as per OEM test Certificate to be attached.

c) Noise/Vibration test
Before each test, the engine shall be brought to a steady state under the
conditions of the test. The alternator shall be subjected to the tests/test
reports shall be provided as per relevant IS standards.

The alternator shall be subjected to following routine tests:

a) Measurement of resistance of stator and rotor windings

b) Insulation resistance of stator and rotor windings
c) High voltage tests on stator and rotor windings
d) Open circuit and short circuit tests
e) Temperature rise test
f) Regulation test
g) Efficiency test
h) Momentary over load test
i) Vibration and noise level measurement
In addition to the above routine tests, temperature rise test on generator shall be
conducted.

6.22.2 Tests at Site

After successful testing of the DG Set, a trial run at available load will be carried
out for 120 Hours on each DG set individually. The DG Set will be operated and a
log of all relevant parameters will be maintained during this period. The
arrangement of staff for trial run/ running in period & fuel will be made by the
successful tenderer. The contractor will be free to carry out necessary
adjustments. The DG Set will be said to have successfully completed the trial
run, if no break-down or abnormal/ unsatisfactory operation of any component of
the entire installation included in the scope of work of the contract, occurs during
this period. After this the DG Set will be taken over by the department subject to
guarantee clause of the contract.

6.22.3 Type Test Certificates

a) Copies of manufacturer's type test for the engine and the alternator of
all ratings shall be enclosed along with the dispatch of the DG sets. Test
certificate shall be submitted in six (4) copies.

b) The test reports shall furnish complete identification of the data, including
serial number of each equipment. The successful tenderer shall arrange
staff / fuel / POL for test run at his cost. Inspection and Testing of DG sets
shall necessarily be carried out at factory / manufacturer premises in
presence of representative of the CPWD.

6.23 Drawings/Documents to be furnished on completion of Installation

6.23.1 Four sets of the following drawings shall be submitted by the contractor
whilehandingovertheinstallationtotheDepartment.Onesetshallbelaminatedo
n a hard base for display in the DG set room/room whereAMF panel is
installed. In addition, drawings will be given in Compact Disc (CD):

a) DG set installation drawings giving complete details of all the equipment,

including their foundations.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 464

b) Line diagram and layout of all electrical control/AMF panels giving switchgear
ratings and their disposition, cable feeder sizes and their layout.

c) Control wiring drawings with all control components and sequence of

operations to explain the operation of control circuits in AMF panel/PCC.

i. Manufacturer’s technical catalogues of all equipment and

accessories.
ii. Operation and maintenance manual of all major equipment,
detailing all adjustments, operation and maintenance procedure.

6.24 List of Relevant Indian/International Standards

ISO 8528 Part – I- XI Generating Set

IS 10000 Part – I- XIII Engines
(Naturally
Aspirated)
BS 5514 Part 5 - Reciprocating Internal Combustion
1979 engines,
ISO-3046 Part (1-6) Reciprocating internal combustion
engines
BS 649 Reciprocating Internal Combustion
engines, performance, torsional
vibrations.
(C) Alternator
IS 4889/BS - For declaring efficiency of electrical
269 machines.
IS 4722 - 2001 Capability of machine to withstand
over current/overload.
IS – 13364 Part I & II Alternator - Voltage Regulation
IEC 60034 -1 - Rotating Electrical machines -
1983 Rating & Performance
(D) Acoustic Enclosure
IS – 8183 Insulation material for sound
absorption.
ISO 3744 2010 Acoustics - Determination of sound
power levels of noise sources.
ISO 8528 Part - 10 Measurement of Air borne noise by
2018 (E) enveloping surface method.
ISO 9614 - 1993 Part – Requirement of grade - II. Accuracy
I & II for insulation.
(E) Control Panel/ AMF Panel
IS -2147 1962 Degree of protection.
IS – 4230 H.V. testing for panel

226: 1975 Structural steel (standard quality) (fifth revision)

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 465

800:1984 Code of practice for general construction in

steel (second revision)
812: 1957 Dimensions for hot rolled steel beam,
column channel and angle sections (revised)
814: 1991 Covered electrodes for manual metal are welding of
carbon and carbon manganese steel (fifth revision)
816: 1969 Code of practice for use of metal are welding for
general construction in mild steel (first revision)
961: 1975 Structural steel (high tensile) (second revision)
1030: 1982 Carbon steel castings for general engineering
purposes
1239 (Part1): Mild steel tubes, tubular and other wrought steel
1990 fittings: part 1 Mild steel tube
1367 (Part 3& Technical supply conditions for threaded steel
6) fasteners

1730: 1989 Dimensions for steel plate, sheet, strip and flats for
general engineering purposes
1978: 1982 Line pipe
1979: 1985 High test line pipe
2002: 1982 Steel plates for pressure vessels for intermediate
and high temperature services including boilers

2009: 1975 Method for calibration of horizontal and tilted oil

storage tanks
2041: 1982 Steel plates for pressure vessels used at moderate
and low temperature
2062: 1984 Weldable structural steel
2825: 1969 Code for unfired pressure vessels
6392: 1971 Steel pipe flanges
8500: 1977 Weldable structural steel (medium and high strength
qualities)
9595: 1980 Recommendations for metal arc welding or carbon
and carbon manganese steels

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 466

2.0. COMMERCIAL AND ADDITIONAL CONDITIONS- DG SETs

2.1. Specification-:
The work shall be executed as per CPWD’s general specification for
Electrical Works part-I (2023) & Part-II (2023) & Part-VII (2013) for DG
Set Work, IE Rules, Indian Standards amended up to date and as per
direction of Engineer-in-Charge. The additional specifications are to be
read with above and in case of any variations, specifications given in the
tender shall apply.
2.2. Inspection by CEA & CPCB/SPCB-:
After completion of the work, the contractor will offer the same for
inspection of Central Electricity Authority, Central Pollution Control Board
& State Pollution Control Board if required. The contractor will extend all
help including test facilities to the representative of Central Electricity
Authority, Central Pollution Control Board & State Pollution Control Board.
In case the contractor fails to make desired facilities available during
inspection, the department reserve the right to provide the same at the
risk & cost of the contractor. The observation of Central Electricity
Authority, Central Pollution Control Board & State Pollution Control Board
which are a part of agreement will be attended by the contractor promptly.
The installation will be commissioned only after receiving clearance from
Central Electricity Authority. Inspection fees of Central Electricity Authority,
Central Pollution Control Board & State Pollution Control Board will be
borne by the department however liasioning for inspection and getting
clearance from the Central Electricity Authority, Central Pollution Control
Board & State Pollution Control Board shall be done by the contractor.
Nothing extra shall be paid for this.
2.3. The material required to be used in the work shall be got approved from
the Engineer-in- charge before its use at site. The Engineer-in-charge
shall reserve the right to instruct the contractor to remove the material
which, in his opinion, is not as per specifications.
2.4. Contractor shall preserve the copies of invoices, test certificates, gate
passes etc. To prove the genuineness of material/purchases. The
responsibility of procurement, genuine material of specialized works shall
rest with the contractor.
2.5. The contractor shall offer inspection call at factory premises before
dispatch of DG set to carry out test as per CPWD specification & fuel
charge & other charges of testing of DG set for 13 hours shall be borne
by the agency. To & fro journey fare of the CPWD officers for inspection of
DG set shall be borne by the department.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 467

2.6. The contractor shall submit the following after award of work:
(i) Submission of GA drawing of DG set for approval
(ii) Written commitment from OEM/OEA to supply the DG Sets and delivery
schedule as per requirement of department.
(iii) Certificate from OEM/OEA or authorized service provider of engine
manufacturer of satisfactory installation and commissioning of DG Set
after completion of the work.
(iv) The defect liability period shall be reckoned from the date of
handing over of the installation to the department.
(v) An undertaking that mandatory free service shall be carried out during the
Defect liability period as per this agreement by the authorized service
provider.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 468

C-7 UPS System

7.0 Technical Specifications of UPS

7.1 ThescopeofworkincludesPlanning,design,supply,installation,testing
andcommissioning of Online Modular type UPS system with required
battery banks. Minimum Capacity of UPS shall be minimum 200 KVA
Modular UPS (in N+2 combination) with parallel Redundant withminimum
30Minutes Backup with maintenance free batteries. Suitable battery
capacity and quantity shall be provided for each UPS and Battery Size
Calculation should be submitted by the contractor for approval by
Engineer-in-charge. Energy Efficiency Requirements at 100 % Load shall
be as per Super ECBC 2017 to provide continuous, uninterrupted power
comprising. These technical specifications shall be read along with the
General Conditions for all E&M works given under subhead C-B.

7.1.1 The capacity of UPS is indicative only. The agency shall design a suitable
capacity with calculations and get it approved by Engineer-in charge. This
Specification describes a three-phase, online, continuous operation, solid-
taste uninterruptible power supply system (UPS). The UPS shall operate
as an active power control system, working in conjunction with the
building electrical system to provide power conditioning and online power
protection for the critical loads. The following loads shall be considered
for designing the capacity of the UPS.

a) Lighting loads of the Hospital building

excluding below mentioned areas : 25%

b) Lighting loads of stair case, Toilets,

Substation Building, Meeting Rooms,
Kitchen. :100%

c) Power Loads/ Equipment Load of Computers

CCTV, Access Control, FA& PA System, ,,
MGPS, Nurse Station, Nurse Call System. :100%

7.2 Standards:

TheUPSshallcomplyto IEC62040-UPS Systems-Part1 to 4 to fulfil

General and safety requirements, Electromagneticcompatibility
(EMC) requirements, Method of specifying the performance and test
requirements, Environmental a spects–Requirements and reporting.

7.3 System Description

7.3.1 The UPS shall be provided with separate feeds for rectifier/inverter
and static bypass switch. Each single-UPS unit shall operate in
double-conversion mode. The UPS shall be of the double conversion
on-line topology with power factor corrected inputs. It shall be a VFI-
type UPS made up of the components, described in detail. The system
shall be designed with N+2 modules. So, as to support full designed

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 469

load even after break down of 2 modules.

7.3.2 The UPS shall be housed in a freestanding self-containedcabinet with

casters and shall contain thefollowingbreakers. The mechanical
structure of the UPS shall be sufficiently strong and rigid to withstand
handling and installation operations without risk. The sheet metal
elements in the structure shall be protected against corrosion by a
suitable treatment, such as zinc electroplating, epoxy paint or
equivalent.
a. Unit inputbreaker(UIB)
b. Staticswitchinputbreaker(SSIB)
c. Unitoutputbreaker(UOB)
d. Maintenancebypassbreaker (MBB)

7.3.3 Installationaccessshallbefrom thebacksideofthesystem. TheUPS

systemshallcontainabypassstaticswitch andadisplay.The UPS shall
be designed for forced air cooling. Air inlets shall be provided from the
front and top of the UPS enclosure. Air exhaust shall be from the top
portion of the unit.

7.3.4 TheUPS batteryshallbe sizedforrequired KVAfor30minutesbackup.

TheUPSshallhaveashortcircuitwithstand capabilityof 10 kA.
TheUPSshallcontainanEmergencyPowerOff (EPO).
TheUPSshallbewithminimumLevel3invertertopology.

a) ACInput Characteristics:
i) Input voltage : 415Vac, 3-phase and 4 -wire
ii) Input voltage range :305-477V
iii) Input power factor :> 0.98
iv) Total harmonic distortion : Less than 3%
v) Frequency : 40-65 hertz.

b) Output Characteristics:
i) Output Voltage : 415 volts AC 3-phase and 4-wire
vi) Frequency : 50 hertz, ± 0.5
ii) Voltage Stability : ±1.0% for balanced load, ±2.0% for
unbalanced load.
iii) Output voltage harmonic distortion:
< 2% at 100% linear load.
< 5% at 100% non-linear load.
iv) Power Factor : 1 (Unity) at the rated KVA.
v) Overloadcapability
: 110%for1 Hour.

: 125% for 10 minutes.

: 150%for1 minute.

vi) Output power factor: (1 Unity)

vii) Efficiency : not less than 93.8%. (With 100% load)
ix) Audiblenoise atfullload : Lessthan60dB at1meter

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 470

7.4 System Components

7.4.1 Rectifier
The UPS shall include an active power factor corrected, Insulated Gated
Bipolar Transistor (IGBT) rectifier.
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) currentcontrol shall be used. Digital Signal
Processors (DSP) shall be used for all monitoring and control tasks. Analog
controlis not acceptable. The input current limiter shall
be designed to charge batteries at 20% of the UPS
outputrating, Provide regulation with mainsd eviation ofup/downto+/-
15%ofthenominalinput voltage.
The battery charging voltage shall be compensated against
temperature variations (battery temperature compensation) to always
maintain optimal battery float charging.

The rectifier shall correct power factor to maintain an input power factor of
0.98 lagging to unity at 75 percent or above load levels to ensure generator
compatibility and avoid reflected harmonics from disturbing loads. The
Rectifier shall produce a sinusoidal input AC current on each phase with
low harmonic content.

7.4.2 Batteries:

The battery technology shall be Valve regulated sealed lead acid (VRLA-
AGM) batteries. The battery charger shall be equipped with a temperature
probe to enable temperature compensated charging and shall adjust the
battery float voltage to compensate for the ambient temperature.
Battery voltage shall be battery temperature compensated as outlined in
therectifier sectionabove. The battery charging circuit shall remain active
when the Power factor controller operates normally. Batteries shall be
supplied with suitable MS powder coated battery bank rack, flexible
connectors, and all standard accessories.

7.4.3 Inverter:

The inverter shall consist of fast switching IGBT modules. The inverter
shall be aminimum Level 3 inverter topology. Inverter shall be PWM
controlled usingDSP logic. Analogcontrolshallnotbeacceptable. The
inverter shall be capable of providing the specified precise output power
characteristics while operating over the battery voltage range.

7.4.4 Staticbypassswitch:

The static switch shall consistoffullyrated Silicon Controlled Rectifiers

(SCRs). Partrated SCR swith contactor device are not acceptable.
The static bypass switch shall automatically transfer the load to bypass
inputsupply without interruption after the logic senses in one of the
followingconditions:
a) Inverter over load beyond rating.
b) Battery run time expired and by pass available.
c) Inverter in operable.
d) Control system in operable.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 471

The static bypass switch shall automatically retransfer from bypass

to the Inverter whentheInverterisactive(on).
The static bypass switch shall be equipped with a manual means of
transferring theloadtobypass andbacktoinverter.

7.4.5 Isolator Transformer (Optional):

As optional, the UPS shall be equipped with dedicate isolation transformer
for the bypass line, to guarantee the full isolation and independency of the
Neutrals of the input line and the output UPS line.

7.4.6 Mechanical:
a) The UPS shall be housed in a free-standing cabinet with casters.
b) The cable entry shall be from the back of the UPS.
c) The UPS shall meet an ingress level of minimum IP20.
d) User replaceable dust filter shall be provided with the standard cabinet.
e) The critical components i.e.,PCBs shall be confirmedly coated

7.4.7 Microprocessor-Controlled Logic:

Complete UPS operation shall be provided using microprocessor-
controlled logic. Operation and parameters shall be firmware-controlled,
thus eliminating the need for manual adjustments or potentiometers. The
logic shall include self-test and diagnostic circuitry such that a fault shall
be isolated down to the printed circuit assembly or plug-in power assembly
level. Diagnostics shall be performed via a PC through the local
diagnostics port on the UPS.

7.5 Display and Control panel

7.5.1 The UPS shall include a standard control and indicator panel with backlit
LCD display and a keypad consisting of push button switches with choice
of languages for indication of UPS status, metering, battery status, alarm/
event log, and advanced operational features. LED mimic diagram. The
mimic diagram: shall enable display of installation parameters,
configuration, operating status and alarms and indication of operator
instructions for switching operations (i.e., bypass).

The UPS shall provide an audible alarm that can be stopped using the user
interface. If a new alarm is sensed after the original alarm has been
silenced, it shall reactivate the audible alarm.

It shall be possible to display the following measurements:

INPUT
Voltage (Vac), per phase
Current (Aac), per phase
Frequency (Hz)
Power (kVA)
OUTPUT
Voltage (Vac), per
phase Current (Aac),
per phase Frequency

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 472

(Hz)
Power (kW), per phase
Load (%), per phase

BYPASS
Voltage (Vac), per phase
Frequency (Hz)

INVERTER
Voltage (Vac), per phase
Frequency (Hz)
AC/DC (Rectifier)
Voltage (Vdc)

BATTERY
Voltage (Vdc), Current (Adc)
Type (Ah)
Autonomy (minute, %)

Log of time-stamped events shall store in memory and make available,

for automatic or manually initiated recall, time-stamped logs of important
status changes, faults, and malfunctions, complete with an analysis and
display of troubleshooting procedures.

7.5.2 Thefollowing LED status indications shall be shown on the UPSfront

a) Load:
1) UPS outputison.
2) OverloadonUPSoutputoroutputhasshorted.
3) UPS outputisoff.

b) Battery:
1) Batteryischarging.
2) Batteryisdischarging.
3) Batteryisinoperable.
4) Batterylowvoltage.
5) Batteryandbatterychargerarenormal.

c) Bypass:
1) Loadsuppliedbybypasssource.
2) Bypasssourceisunavailableorstaticbypassswitchis inoperable.
3) Bypassvoltage isoutoftolerance.
4) Bypasssourceisnormal.

d) Rectifier:
1) Rectifierisworkingcorrectly mains is normal.
2) Rectifierisinoperable.
3) Mains isunavailable.
4) Rectifier isoff.
e) Inverter:
1) Loadsuppliedbyinverter.
2) Load not supplied by inverter; inverter is inoperable.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 473

3) Load supplied by inverter, but an inverter alarm is present.

4) Inverter is off.

f) PushButtons/UserControls:
For control of UPS in addition to the push buttons on the system,
necessary arrangement shall be available for remote communication.

7.5.3 Fullloadtestingwithoutexternalloadbank:
The UPS shall have an inbuilt feature to test itself at 100% loading,
continuouswithout any external load bank on the site. If this feature is
not available, Contractor shall provide an external load bank with the
input and output breakers and cables for full loadand over load testing
of UPS.

7.5.4 Software and connectivity:

TheEthernetWeb/SNMPAdaptorshallallowoneormorenetworkmanage
mentsystems(NMS) to monitorandmanage the UPS inTCP/IP
networkenvironments.The management information base (MIB) shall
be provided in MIB formats.
TheSNMPinterfaceadaptorshallbeconnectedtotheUPSviatheRJ45seri
alportonthestandardcommunicationinterfaceboard.

7.5.5 RemoteUPSmonitoring:

a) The UPS shall be equipped with provisions for remote emergency

power off and dry contact input that shall be used to command UPS
shutdown remotely. One USB /RS232 connector with serial output
shall be provided for field diagnostics.

b) Remote UPS Monitoring shall be possible through a standard Mod bus

protocol RS 485 port.

7.5.6 Modes of operation: The UPS shall operate as an on-line system in

the following modes:

a) Normal mode: The inverter and the rectifier shall operate in an on-line
manner to continuously regulate the power to the critical load. The
rectifier shall derive power from the input source and supply DC
power to charge the battery. The rectifier supplies the inverter with DC
current while the charger simultaneously floats charges the battery.
The load is continuously supplied with dependable electrical power by
the inverter.

b) Battery mode: Upon failure of the input source, the load shall continue
to be supplied by the inverter without any switching. The inverter shall
obtain its power from the battery. There shall be no interruption in
power to the load upon failure or restoration of the input source.

c) Static bypass mode: The static bypass switch shall be used for
transferring the load to bypass supply without interruption to the critical
power load in case Inverter overload exceeds its rating or Inverter

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 474

failure. This shall be accomplished by turning the inverter off.

Automatic re-transfer or forward transfer of the load shall be
accomplished by turning the inverter on. The static bypass transfer
switch shall have the following overload characteristics:

i. 1000 percent of UPS output rating for one cycle

ii. 150 percent continuous.

d) ECO mode: In ECO mode, the UPS shall use static bypass mode as
the preferred operation mode under predefined conditions. In case of
a failure of the input source, the UPS shall transfer to battery mode.

e) Maintenance bypass mode: The UPS shall be provided with a

maintenance bypass breaker (MBB) to supply the load directly from
the mains supply. A manual static transfer shall be initiated from the
UPS control panel by turning the UPS inverter off.

f) Auto-restart mode: When the UPS is configured to auto-restart, the

UPS shall automatically restart after end of discharge and restoration
of the input source.

g) Battery recharge: Upon restoration of the input source, the UPS shall
simultaneously recharge the battery and regulate the power to the
load. The UPS system shall ensure equal sharing of the total load
between the various parallel-connected units.

h) The UPS shuts down and should not transfer to the bypass mode
when a shortcircuit occurs on the output of the unit. After the short
circuit removed, the UPSshall operate normally again.

7.6 TechnicalSpecificationforBatteries forUPS Applications.

The battery bank shall be with VRLA-AGM type batteries of suitable

capacity, designed for 30 minutes backup at full load capacity of the UPS.
Battery sizing calculations shall be submitted by the contractor before
supply of batteries. A suitable MS powder coated stand shall be provided
for battery bank. The dimensions of thecompletebattery bank to be so
designed, that it occupies lessspace.
Nominal capacity Nominal capacity of the battery is defined
in terms of Ampere Hour (AH) capacity.
The rating assigned to the battery shall be
the capacity expressed in ampere hours
(Ah) stated by the manufacturer
obtainable when the battery is discharged
at the 20-hour rate to an end cell voltage
of 1.75 V at 25 deg C.
Nominal Voltage 12 Volts per module.
Applicable Standards JIS 8702, IS 1146
Float life 9 Years designated life.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 475

Discharge characteristics The battery offered shall be capable of

delivering the following currents for the
specified durations:
a) 2 C current for a duration of 10
minutes
b) 1.58 C current for a duration of 15
minutes Where C = Rated capacity of the
battery
1.0. Standards
The UPS shall comply to the following minimum standards: -
1.0.1 Safety:
(i) IEC 62040-1: 2008-06, 1st edition Uninterruptible Power Systems (UPS) - Part 1:
General and safety requirements for UPS
(ii) EN 62040-1: 2013-01, 1st edition amendment 1
1.0.2 EMC/EMI/RFI:IEC 62040-2: 2005-10, 2nd edition Uninterruptible Power
Systems (UPS) - Part 2: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) requirements
1.0.3 Performance: IEC 62040-3: 2011-03, 2nd edition Uninterruptible Power
Systems (UPS) - Part 3: Method of specifying the performance and test
requirements
1.0.4 Environmental: IEC 62040-4: 2013-04, 1st edition Uninterruptible Power
Systems (UPS) - Part 4: Environmental aspects – Requirements and reporting

1.1. Project conditions

1.1.1 UPS Environmental requirements
(i) Operating ambient temperature: 0 °C to 45 °C
(ii) Relative humidity: 0 to 95%, non-condensing.
(iii) Operating altitude with no de-rating for Meerut.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 476

C-8 HVAC & Pressurized Mechanical Ventilation system

8.0 Technical Specifications of HVAC

8.1 Scope of work includes Design, Supply, Installation, Testing &

Commissioning of HVAC system including Pressurisation and other related
works as required for smooth functioning of the 100bedded hospital building
and other connected areas. HVAC works shall be designed and executed
as per the guidelines issued by ASHRAE, NBC-2016, CPWD HVAC
specifications 2017, various IS codes, various bye-laws and norms of local
bodies, NABH guidelines, amended up to date, additional specifications
including any additional requirement of ESIC authorities. The design and
materials of the system shall comply with Super ECBC 2017 norms.
Complete HVAC System shall be , Compatible.

a) The rating and capacity of equipment mentioned are minimum

requirement to be provided. However, during detailed designing, if
required and found necessary, the capacity / rating of the equipment may
be upgraded by the Contractor. All HVAC and mechanical installations
shall be of high quality, safe, complete and fully operational including all
necessary items and accessories whether or not specified in details.

b) The work shall be carried out simultaneously with building work, civil
work, etc. and shall be completed satisfactorily along with the completion
of building works. The Contractor shall provide all labour and install all
materials, appliances, equipment necessary for completion of work. The
work shall include all incidental jobs connected with HVAC System
installation such as excavation for trenches and back filing, cutting/drilling
holes through walls/floors and grouting for fixing of fixtures, equipment
etc.

c) During the progress of work, completed portion of the building may be

occupied and be put to use by ESIC Authorities but the contractor shall
remain fully responsible for the maintenance of HVAC installations till the
entire work specified/ covered under this contract is satisfactorily
completed by him and handed over to the ESIC authorities.

d) In case of any missing specifications, contractor shall follow NBC-2016 /

CPWD HVAC Specifications-2017 or manufacturer’s specifications.
Decision of Engineer-in-charge shall be final and biding, on any issue
arising out of such discrepancies.

e) The work shall be executed as per scope & specifications of HVAC works
given hereafter. If any services required to make the bldg. / scheme
habitable and is not covered in the scope of services, same shall either
be pointed out in pre-bid meeting else, it shall be presumed that the same
shall be provided within the quoted cost.
f) It is the intention of the specification and drawings to get a complete work,
including testing and ready for operation. Any incidental accessories to

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 477

make the work complete, even if not particularly specified, but necessary
to make the work complete is within the scope of work.

g) Floor wise drawings with HVAC equipment and Plant floor drawings are
enclosed for reference.

8.1.1 Interpretation of Project Documents:

a) These Specifications shall be considered as part of this contract and any

work or material not called for in the specification or vice versa, shall be
executed as if specifically called for in both. The Drawings indicate the
extent and general arrangement of the HVAC Equipment Layout etc. and
are essentially diagrammatic. The drawings are for the guidance of the
contractor, exact locations, distances and levels shall be governed by the
building. The contractor shall submit his drawings and get it approved
from the Engineer-in-Charge before staring the work.

b) The materials, design and workmanship shall satisfy the specifications

contained herein and codes referred to. Where, the technical
specifications stipulate the requirement in addition to those contained in
the Standard Codes and specifications, those additional requirements
shall also be satisfied.

c) An integrated Air-conditioning system shall be designed to maintain the

temperature, humidity, velocity within specified tolerance and indoor air
quality, with proper air distribution within the air-conditioned area.

d) System / System components offered shall have:

i. Higher efficiency & Co-efficient of Performance.

ii. Minimum power consumption, efficient parts load operation.
iii. Ease of operation and maintenance.
iv. Minimum vibration and noise level.
v. Reliability, Simplicity, Compactness, Modularity and
Interchangeability.
vi. Better Environmental protection and Indoor Air Quality.

e) Power supply, water required for construction shall have to be arranged

by the contractor at his own costs i/c required for testing &
commissioning.

f) The work covers the preparation of layout plans, drawings for HVAC
schemes and approval of the same from the respective local bodies
before the commencement of work. During execution, if the local bodies
etc. require a modification, the same shall be executed without any extra
cost. After execution, approvals / NOCs / clearances from local bodies
etc. shall be the responsibility of the contractor. Any statutory fees /
charges required for obtaining clearances from Local Bodies paid by the
contractor will be reimbursed.

8.1.2 Actual Route of Piping:

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 478

The location of the AHUs, FCUs, Chillers, Chilled water pumps, Cooling
Towers and CHW and Cooling water piping etc. are indicative only,
therefore, the actual route of piping and the location may differ from the
plans according to the details of the building construction and the conditions
of executions of the installations.

The contractor shall supply and install at his own expenses all the secondary
materials and special fittings found necessary to overcome the interference
and do necessary modifications on the route of piping that are found
necessary during the work, to the complete satisfaction of the Engineer-in-
Charge.

8.1.3 Material and Equipment:

a) All material and equipment shall conform to the relevant standards and
shall be of the approved make and design. The Contractor shall be
responsible for the safe custody of all the materials and shall insure them
against theft or damage from any cause whatsoever, it may be. A list of
items of materials and equipment, together with sample of each shall be
submitted to the Engineer-in-Charge.

b) All materials of the same kind of service shall be identical and made by
the same manufacturer. Any deviation to this rule shall be approved by
the Engineer-in-Charge. Materials/ Products/ Items shall be only among
the preferred makes contained in this document.

c) Rating of all items shall be appropriate for the conditions on the particular
site on which the items will be used. All the equipment shall be fit for
continuous work.

8.1.4 Inspection and Testing:

Engineer-in-Charge or his authorized representative reserves the right to

inspect and test at manufacturer’s works during manufacture of items for
this contract. Tests at site of completed works shall demonstrate, among
other things:

a) That the equipment installed complies with specification in all particulars

and is of the correct rating for the duty and site conditions.
b) That all items operate efficiently and quietly to meet the specified
requirements.

c) That all the features performed at its best and loading and unloading of
the system.

d) That all the accessories used on low side work are of specified make
only.
e) The contractor shall provide all necessary instruments and labour for
testing, shall make adequate records of test procedures and readings,
shall repeat any tests requested by the Engineer-in-Charge and shall
provide test certificates signed by a properly authorized person.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 479

f) If tests fail to demonstrate the satisfactory nature of the installation or any

part thereof then no claims for the extra cost of modifications,
replacements or re testing will be considered. Engineer-in-Charge’s
decision as to what constitutes a satisfactory test shall be final & binding.

The above general requirements on testing shall be read in conjunction with

any particular requirements specified elsewhere.

8.1.5 Test Certificates:

a) The contractor shall submit test certificates of equipment and materials

used in the HVAC system.

b) The contractor shall prepare and produce instruction, operation and

maintenance manuals in English for the use, operation and maintenance
manuals of the supplied equipment shall be submitted to the department
at the time of handing over of the installations.

8.1.6 Samples and Catalogues:

Before ordering the material necessary for these installations, the contractor
shall submit to Engineer-in-Charge for approval, a sample of every kind of
material such as diffusers, grilles, ducts, etc., along with the catalogues.

For big items such as chillers, cooling towers, pump sets etc. the submission
of catalogues shall be enough. No material shall be procured prior to the
approval of the Engineer-in-Charge.

8.1.7 Shop Drawings:

The contractor shall prepare and submit Detailed Heat load Calculations
with all assumptions, detailed drawings of HVAC plans, HVAC Plant Room,
all equipment, chilled Water Piping plans, Detail Ducting Drawing with Grill/
Diffuser Sizing and equipment and relevant data. Any other information
required by Engineer-in-Charge. Engineer-in-Charge reserves the right to
alter or modify these drawings if they are found to be insufficient or not
complying with the established technical standards or if they do not offer the
most satisfactory performance or accessibility for maintenance.

8.1.8 As Built Drawings:

At the completion of work and before issuance of completion certificate, the

contractor shall submit to Engineer-in-Charge, layout drawing indicating the
complete system “as installed”. These drawings must provide location and
capacity of all HVAC Equipment and piping.
8.1.9 Guarantee:

The contractor shall furnish written guarantee indemnifying department

against defective materials and workmanship for a period of 36 months after

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 480

successful completion of work. The contractor shall hold himself fully

responsible for reinstallation or replacement at free of cost to department,
for:

I. Any defective work or material supplied by the contractor.

II. Any material or equipment damaged or destroyed as a result of
defective workmanship by the contractor.

8.1.10 Site Engineer and Training:

The contractor shall employ a competent, qualified, Engineer to supervise

the work of HVAC installation in accordance with the drawings and
specifications. The engineer shall be available all times at site to receive
instructions from Engineer-in-Charge or his authorized representative, in the
day-to-day activities throughout the duration of contract. Contractor shall
train the ESIC staff for operation and routine in-house maintenance.

8.2 Based on heat load calculations, design and selection of high side & low
side equipment in consultation with the CPWD to get the equipment load,
the condition of various rooms and designing according to the required air
changes, temperature, RH etc. and capacity of the chilling units is in the
scope of work.
The excluded areas for HVAC are Non critical areas, General wards,
Library, Record room, Physiotherapy, Corridors, Lobby, Waiting Areas,
Toilets, Staircase. Areas to be air conditioned are shown in the Indicative
drawings. If required, part of the excluded areas need to be air conditioned
as per the ESIC authority’s requirement and guidelines.

Minimum installed capacity shall be 3 x 100 TR water cooled Chillers (3

Nos. working + 1No. standby). During the designing of HVAC system, the
following points shall be considered:

a) Isolation of air-conditioned area (Zoning) according to the hospital

requirement and designing the size of AHU/FCU for the zone.

b) Calculation of CFM and capacity of the AHU/FCUs. Designing of chilled

water, condenser, water, pipeline system of the AC plant.

c) Designing of LT Panels and control panels and its cabling network from
AC plant to equipment. All Panels should be TTA panels.Layout of
various equipment of HVAC plant at service building.

d) During the planning and designing of HVAC system, requirement of client

department shall also be taken into consideration and accordingly the
design shall be made and get approved from Engineer-in-Charge. The
Contractor shall prepare the drawing of ducting with design calculation as
per site condition.

e) During the approval of design and drawing, the contractor shall submit
the data sheets and catalogues of equipment in support of their design.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 481

f) Smoke management system with mechanical ventilation fans shall be

provided as per NBC 2016. The fan shall start automatically and linked
through the fire alarm system.

g) The agency shall run chilled water pipe lines through the service
trench/duct from Service block to hospital building with suitable supports.

h) Temperature of UPS room shall be maintained as per manufacturer

standard. Proper ventilation system shall be provided for the battery
room.

i) Proper control for the AHUs /FCUs shall be provided as per the site
requirement. Separate AHUs to be provided for, Minor OTs, 8 Nos.
Modular OTs, HDU, Infectious ward, ICU, Super specialty, Pre- OT and
Post OT wards.

j) Wherever AHUs are provided on open terrace, they should be suitably

protected with whether proof enclosures.

k) Separate Air Conditioning shall be provided for Mortuary with 100%

exhaust system. Due to heavy bacterial contamination and odour,
autopsy room requires special attention for exhausting air above the roof
of the hospital. To prevent spread of contamination to adjoining areas,
the Mortuary must be maintained at negative pressure.

l) Chillers, Pumps, Cooling towers and their related Elect. Panels shall be
housed at engineering services building which is a separate building and
the same is shown in the architectural site plan drawing. Service
trench/duct as per drawings shall be constructed and be used to bring all
HVAC services from service block/building to Hospital building.

m) Further, the services of working areas of the building shall be concealed.

Vertical shafts, floor cut-outs & floor fill shall be provided all through the
building. Safety, Conservation of energy & water and optimization of
resources with environmental friendliness has to be one of the important
factors in the design concept. Fire safe, and fail-safe systems with least
maintenance is the major consideration for design of systems.

n) All equipment shall be supplied as per manufacturer’s standard finish

paint. Touchup painting, removal of dents shall be done by the
contractor, which is within the scope of the work.

o) Various types of HVAC equipment are shown in the indicate drawings

(attached to tender).
8.2.1 HVAC System requirements & design parameters

a) AC equipment-High side
i. Chillers selected shall be Water Cooled Screw / Centrifugal type, with
VFD. Minimum 3 x 100 TR (2 Working +1 Standby).
ii. Constant primary Chilled Water, variable secondary chilled water pumping
system with VFD & Condenser water pumping system.
iii. CTI approved Cooling Towers and their related pumping system with &

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 482

water treatment plant. Cooling tower capacity shall be 25% more than
chiller capacity.
iv. AHUs, DX type / Cassette type/ Split air conditioners/ FCU
v. One No. 100TR Chiller shall run on essential supply (DG power supply)
for providing air conditioning to critical areas such as Operation Theatres,
ICUs, PICU, and NICU etc.
vi. All Pressurization system and Ventilation system shall work on essential
supply (DG power supply).
vii. Automatic Tube cleaning system
viii. Chiller plant manager with ultrasonic flow meter.

b) AC Equipment – Low Side

i. Indoor units of varying capacities at various areas.

ii. Floor Mounted/ Ceiling Suspended Air handling units.
iii. Fan coil units run on Chilled Water
iv. 4 Way Cassette units / Split Units run on Chilled Water
v. CHW/CDW Piping System with necessary valves and insulation etc.
vi. Ducting for Supply Air, Return Air and Fresh air
vii. Supply and Return Air Diffusers, Grills, Volume Control Dampers and Fire
Dampers etc.
viii. AHU starter Panel etc.

c) Air distribution system

All Ducting shall be made of Aluminium. Air terminal shall be powder coated
extruded Aluminium except for battery room where GRP grills shall be used.

d) Noise and Vibration control

i.
AHU room shall have floating floor or spring isolator to avoid
transmission of noise and vibration in hospital usage area.
ii. Sound attenuators to maintain low noise level in all areas.
8.2.2 GuidelinesforParameterstobeConsideredforHVACSystemDesignforHealth
CareFacilities-
Humidity

Minimum Total Air

Sl
Changes per Hour

Air Pressure in
to
of
Air

Outdoor Air per

Area/Functional

No.
Surrounding Area
Temperature
Space

Minimum
Changes
ºC

Relative
Percent

Relation
Hour

1. Operating theatres 18-24 45-55 25 5 Positive

2. Cath labs 20-22 30-60 15 3 Positive
3. Delivery rooms 20-22 30-60 25 5 Positive
4. Recovery room, 20-24 30-60 6 2 Equal
ICU, Treatment
rooms
5. Endoscopy, 20-24 30-60 12 2 Negative
Bronchoscopy

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 483
6. Patient rooms 24±1 30-60 6 2 Equal
7. Toilets — — — 10 Negative

8. Protective 24±1 30-60 12 2 Positive

environment rooms,
(Immuno
suppressed patients)
9. Isolation room, (for 24±1 30-60 12 2 Negative
patients with
infectious, disease)
10 Corridors — — 2 2 Negative
11. X-ray/Radiology 20-24 30-60 15 3 Positive
12 Laboratories (Other 22-24 30-60 6 2 Negative
than biochemistry
and serology)
13 Biochemistry and 22-24 30-60 6 2 Positive
serology labs and
pharmacy

14 Admission/Waiting 22-24 30-60 6 2 Negative

rooms
15 Diagnostic/Treatmen 22-24 30-60 12 2 Negative
t OPD
16. Sterilizer room 22-26 30-60 10 — Negative
17 Sterilizer storage 22-26 30-50 4 2 Positive

8.2.3 Mechanical Ventilation & Pressurisation

Areas covered for Mechanical Ventilation are main building basement,

Service block basement, Service tunnel (Duct), Kitchen & Mortuary.
Pressurisation of lift wells, lift lobbies and staircases. Ventilation and
Pressurisation shall be done as per the NBC-2016, CPWD HVAC
Specifications-2017 as amended up to date.
8.2.3.1 Equipment for Mechanical Ventilation & Pressurisation:

a) Fresh Air and Exhaust Air Fans.

b) Volume Control Dampers and Fire Dampers
c) Supply and Exhaust Grills
d) Tube Axial Fans for Lift well, Lift Lobby and Staircase pressurization.
e) The recommended ventilation rate shall ensure that the CO level shall be
maintained within 29 mg/m³.
f) Closed staircases shall be pressurized to maintain 50 Pa pressure.
g) All lift wells shall be pressurized through multi-level air injection to
maintain 50 Pa pressure.
h) All lift lobbies shall be pressurized through multi-level air injection to
maintain 25 Pa pressure.

8.2.3.2 Operation theatres:

a) The AHU of each OT should be a dedicated one and should not be linked
to air conditioning of any other area in the OT and surroundings.

b) The location of outdoor air intake for an AHU must not be located near
potential contaminated sources like DG exhaust hoods, lab exhaust
vents, and vehicle parking area.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 484

8.2.4 Guidelines for Air Conditioning in Operation Theatres –NABH-Air

conditioning OT.

a) Positive Pressure:
The minimum positive pressure recommended is 2.5 Pascal. There is
a requirement to maintain positive pressure differential between OT
and adjoining areas to prevent outside air entry into OT. Positive
pressure shall be maintained in OT at all times (operational & non-
operational hours). 100% fresh air shall be utilized for air conditioning.

b) Air handling in the OT including air Quality: Air is supplied through

Terminal HEPA (High- Efficiency Particulate Air) filters in the ceiling.
The HEPA can be at AHU level, if it is not feasible at terminal level
inside OT. The minimum size of the filtration area should extend one
foot on all sides of the OT table.

c) Air Filtration:

The AHU (i.e., air handling unit) must be an air purification unit and air
filtration unit. There must be two sets of washable flange type filters of
efficiency 90% down to 10 microns and 99% down to 5 microns with
aluminum / SS304 frame within the AHU. The necessary service
panels to be provided for servicing the filters, motors &blowers. HEPA
filters of efficiency 99.97% down to 0.3 microns or higher efficiency are
to be provided. Air quality at the supply i.e., at grille level should be
Class 100/ISO Class 5 (at rest condition). Note: class 100 means a
cubic foot of air should not have more than 0.5 microns or
larger.Temperature & Relative Humidity: Temperature should be
maintained at 21°C ± 3°C (except for Joints replacement where it
should be 18°C
± 2°C) with corresponding relative humidity between 20% to 60%,
though the ideal RH is considered to be 55%. Appropriate devices to
monitor and display these conditions inside the OT shall be installed.

I. Air-Conditioning System of ICU/HDU Ward: -

a) The ICU should be fully air-conditioned which allows control of
temperature, humidity and air change.
b) Central air-conditioning systems and re-circulated air must pass
through appropriate filters.
c) It is recommended that all air should be filtered to 99% efficiency down
to 5 microns.
d) For critical care units having enclosed patient modules, the
temperature should be adjustable within each module to allow a choice
of temperatures from 16 to 25 degrees Celsius.

e) Individual fan coil units / Cassette type/Split type AC units in private

rooms / Doctor’s rooms with room thermostats for independent temp
control shall be provided.
f) Clean filtered air without the possibility of contamination from adjoining
areas and variable range of temperature capability.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 485

II.Labour & Delivery: The procedures for normal child birth are considered
non-invasive and rooms are controlled similar to PT rooms. Invasive
procedures such as a caesarian section are performed in Operation
Theatres.

III.MRI & CT Scan Rooms: Normal comfort air conditioning and ventilation is
required. However, in case, if requested by department/ ESIC authorities,
Precision Air conditioner may be provided to handle the high heat release
of computer equipment and cryogens used to cool the magnet.

IV.Mortuary: Separate air conditioning arrangement shall be made by providing

Package/ Cassette / Split air conditioners with a 100% fresh air system.

V.CSSD (Central Sterile Services Department): Separate AHU shall be

provided for the CSSD and no air mixing should be made. Used and
contaminated utensils, instruments and equipment are brought to this unit
for cleaning and sterilization prior to reuse. CSSD usually consists of
cleaning area, a sterilizing area and a storage area, where supplies are kept
until requested.

VI.Pharmacies and Drug Storage Areas: This is another unit within hospital
and other healthcare organizations that require air conditioning in order to
carry ‘temperature dependent’ drugs. Inadequate temperature control here
either means that medication would not function as required or the hospital
would simply not be able to stock some emergency treatments.
VII. Server room & UPS room Air Conditioning

a) Server shall be Air-conditioning through Centralized system to maintain

temperature. Dual source i.e., chilled water and DX unit-based Air
conditioning unit, as a backup, shall be provided for the server room air
conditioning. The system shall operate 24 hours x 7 days in a week.
b) UPS room and battery room shall be air conditioned; Battery room shall
be supplied with conditioned air with 100% exhaust. Return air of battery
room shall be exhausted.

VIII. Fire & safety

a. Installation of fire dampers on all ducts.

b. Installation of fire rated door grills.
c. All the insulation shall be covered with fire protective coating.

8.3 Water Cooled Chilling Machine

Water-cooled Screw/ Centrifugal chiller shall be completely factory-

packaged including evaporator, condenser, Semi-hermetical multiple Screw
Compressor (Two or more per chiller) / Centrifugal Compressor, with VFDs
(Individual VFD Starter for each Compressor), lubrication system, control
Center and all interconnecting piping and wiring, expansion valves and
other equipment prior to field start-up. Refrigerant used shall be R-134a or
equivalent green CFC and HCFC free refrigerant. VFDs shall be unit
mounted and factory fitted. Chiller shall be with factory fitted harmonic filter

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 486

with THD less than 5%. Chiller shall comply with 5-star rating as per up-to-
date ECBC Norms.

8.3.1 Parameters & Performance:

Chiller:

Capacity : Min 4Nos x 100 TR

(nominal)
Chilled Water Leaving Temperature : 6.67 °C
Chilled Water Entering Temperature : 12.2 °C
Fouling Factor : 0.0005(British Unit)
Maximum permissible pressure drops : 10 m of water head.

Condenser:

Condenser Water Entering Temperature: 32.2 deg C

Condenser Water leaving Temperature: 36.4 deg C
Fouling factor: 0.001(British Unit)
Maximum permissible pressure drops: 10 m of water head.
8.4 Compressor:
8.4.1 Screw Type Compressor (Variable Speed):

a) The screw compressor shall have Semi-hermetical type rotary multi

screw (Two or more), shall be using R-134a or equivalent CFC and
HCFC free refrigerant. The screw compressor shall be of variable speed
and each variable speed compressor shall have separate factory
mounted variable speed drive. Screw compressor shall be manufactured
from forged steel. The profile of screws shall permit safe operation up to
a speed of 3000 RPM for 50 Hz operation.

b) The compressor shall unload from fully loaded to the minimum capacity
by means of hydraulically actuated slide valve positioned over the screw
rotor/ pilot operated solenoid valve & VFD. The compressor housing shall
be of high-grade cast iron, machined with precision, to provide a very
close tolerance between the rotors and the housing. The rotors shall be
mounted on antifriction bearings designed to reduce friction and power
input. There shall be multiple cylindrical bearings to handle the radial and
axial loads.

c) There shall be built in oil reservoir to ensure full supply of lubricants to all
bearings and a check valve to prevent backspin during shut down. There
shall be oil pump or other means of differential pressure inside the
compressor for forced lubrication of all parts during start-up, running and
during shut down. An oil sump heater shall be provided in the casing.

d) The units shall be complete with automatic capacity control mechanism,

to permit modulation between 25% to 100% of capacity range.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 487

e) The driving motor shall be double squirrel cage type or suitable Semi
hermetic type as required, protected against damage by means of built-
in protection devices.

8.4.2 Compressor motor and starters

a) The electrical motor driving the compressor shall be squirrel cage

induction motor, class ‘F’ insulation, and totally enclosed, (refrigerant
cooled) for hermetic/ semi-hermetic unit. The motor shall be suitable for
operation on 415 + 10% volts, 3 phase, 50 Hz alternating current supply.
Its synchronous speed shall be up to 3000 RPM. All compressor motors
in screw chillers shall be provided with VFD.

b) Motor Starters: Motor starters shall be zero electrical inrush current

(Variable Frequency Drives) for minimum electrical inrush. Open
transition Star-Delta and Across the Line type starters will not be
acceptable.

c) Power factor correction capacitors as required to maintain a

displacement power factor of 95% at all load conditions shall be provided.

8.4.3 Controls

a) Automatic control of chiller operation including compressor start/ stop and

load/ unload, anti-recycle timer, evaporator pump, condenser pump,
evaporator heater, condenser heater, unit alarm contacts and run signal
contacts shall be provided.
b) Chiller shall automatically reset to normal chiller operation after power
failure.
c) Unit operating software shall be stored in non-volatile memory. Field
programmed set points shall be retained in lithium battery backed
regulated time clock (RTC) memory for minimum 5 years. Alarm controls
shall be provided to remote alert for any unit or system safety fault.

8.4.4 Display and Keypad:

a) Provide minimum 80-character liquid crystal display that is both viewable

in direct sunlight and has LED backlighting for night time viewing. Provide
one keypad and display panel per chiller.

b) Display and keypad shall be accessible without opening main

control/electrical cabinet doors.

c) Display shall provide a minimum of unit set points, status, electrical data,
temperature data, pressures, safety lockouts and diagnostics without the
use of a coded display.

d) Descriptions in English (or available language options), numeric data in

English (or Metric) units.

e) Sealed keypad shall include unit on/ off switch.

f) Programmable Set points (within Manufacturer limits): Display language,

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 488

chilled liquid cooling mode, local/ remote control mode, display units
mode, system lead/lag control mode, remote temperature reset, remote
current limit, remote heat recovery kit, leaving chilled liquid set point and
range, maximum remote temperature reset.

8.4.5 Display Data:

Chilled liquid leaving and entering temperatures; lead system; flow switch
status; evaporator/condenser pump status; active remote control;
evaporator pressure, discharge, and oil pressures, condenser and
economizer pressures per refrigerant circuit; economizer temperature and
superheat; sub cooler liquid temperature and superheat; compressor
discharge temperature and superheat, motor; temperatures, educator
temperature, per refrigerant circuit; compressor speed, condenser level,
condenser level control valve; economizer superheat; economizer feed
valve percentage open, evaporator/ condenser heater status; oil pump
status; compressor number of starts; run time; operating hours; evaporator
and condenser heater status; history data for last ten shutdown faults;
history data for last 20 normal (non-fault) shutdowns.
8.4.6 Predictive Control Points:
Unit controls shall avoid safety shutdown when operating outside design
conditions by optimizing the chiller controls and cooling load output to stay
online and avoid safety limits being reached. The system shall monitor the
following parameters and maintain the maximum cooling output possible
without shutdown of the equipment: motor current, evaporator pressure,
condenser pressure, discharge pressure, starter internal ambient
temperature, and starter baseplate temperature.

8.4.7 System Safeties:

Shall cause individual compressor systems to perform auto-reset shut
down if: high discharge pressure or temperature, low evaporator pressure,
low motor current, high/low differential oil pressure, low oil level, low
discharge and economizer superheat, smart freeze point protection, high
motor temperature, system control voltage, educator clog.

Unit Safeties: Shall be automatic reset and cause compressors to shut

down, if low leaving chilled liquid temperature, under voltage, flow switch
operation. Contractor shall provide flow switch and wiring as per chiller
manufacturer requirements. Manufacturer shall provide any controls not
listed above, necessary for automatic chiller operation.

8.5 Centrifugal Compressors (Variable Speed)

Centrifugal compressor shall be totally sealed type. It shall be working on

CFC and HCFC free refrigerant. The impeller shall be of shrouded design
and made of cast aluminium alloy of high strength and protected against
corrosion. This shall be statically and dynamically balanced and over speed
tested so as to ensure vibration free operation. The impeller shaft or drive
end of the gear shaft, shall be connected with the rotor shaft. The
compressor casing shall be of high strength ductile casting and of such

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 489

design that servicing can be carried out without disturbing connections.

8.5.1 Drive gear

The centrifugal compressor shall preferably be variable speed.

a) The variable speed compressor shall have compressor/ chiller

manufacturer ‘s factory matched variable speed drive.

b) Where the impeller is designed for operation at speed higher than the
drive motor, necessary speed increasing gear shall be connected to the
impeller shaft in a self-aligning and balanced way. The gears and pinion
shall be pressure lubricated.

c) Variable speed drive (VSD) shall be installed with appropriate.

8.5.2 Bearings:

The compressor shall incorporate the necessary design features to take

both axial and radial thrusts. The bearings shall be of self-aligning type.
The bearing shall be pressure lubricated during operation and shall be
completely sequenced and interlocked with the startup of the machine in
such a way that oil pump should start earlier than the machine and the
machine should start after some time, provided the required oil
temperature and pressure is maintained during the startup period.

8.5.3 Shaft seal:

The compressor shaft seal shall be as per manufacturer ‘s standard

design. The seal should have small face area and low rubbing speed. It
should provide an efficient seal under both vacuum and pressure
lubricated during compressor operation. The seal must effectively prevent
the leakage of refrigerant along the shaft during shut down periods. During
operation, an oil film should prevent outward leakage of refrigerant.

8.5.4 Lubrication system:

a) Lubrication system must ensure complete forced and speed lubrication

(at a pressure and controlled temperature) to all bearing surfaces under
any speed conditions, at start up, at shut down and during operation at
various loads. Adequate arrangement shall be provided to take care of
lubrication during failure of power or abnormal shutdown. Full lubrication
must be available to the machine during acceleration and deceleration
periods through an automatic auxiliary motor driven pump. The
lubrication system should include Filter mesh, Oil level indicator, Oil
coolers and oil heaters (with built-in thermostat to aid maintaining
constant temperature).

b) The compressor shall be complete with all accessories such as drive

arrangement, capacity control, safety controls.

8.5.5 Capacity Control:

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 490

The compressor shall be equipped for modulating the capacity from 100%
up to the 25% at constant condenser entering water temperature without
surging and hot gas bypass. The vane position shall be controlled through
hydraulic/ linkage system. The positioning of the vane shall be through
microprocessor-based controller with its sensing elements in the outgoing
chilled water lines. The automatic damper will enable maintenance of
specified chilled water temperature within + 0.11 °C.

8.5.6 Drive motor:

a) The drive motor shall be an independent and coupler type or semi

hermetic/ hermetic type depending on the design adopted by the
manufacturer.

b) The electric motor shall be of squirrel cage type and shall be suitable for
operation on 400/415 V +/- 10%, 3 phase, 50 Hz, AC supply. All
Compressor motors in Screw and Centrifugal chillers with variable speed
compressors shall be provided with VFD and shall also be suitably
designed for use with Variable Frequency Drive.

c) Synchronous speed of the motor shall not exceed 3000 RPM.

d) Continuous BHP rating of the motor shall not be less than the maximum
power requirement of the compressor and drive under specified design
conditions).

e) Motor protection during over current shall be provided through winding

temperature sensor in case of refrigerant cooled motors/ current sensing
in each phase through microprocessor in case of open type air cooled
motors.

f) Power factor correction capacitors as required to maintain a

displacement power factor of 95% at all load conditions shall be provided.

g) The compressor motor shall be interlocked with the following: -

I. Differential pressure switch in the chilled water lines in chilled

water system,
II. Differential pressure switch in the condenser water lines
III. Anti-freeze thermostat in case of chiller.
IV. Condenser water pump
V. Chilled water pump
The interlocks shall be provided with indicating lamps or flags in the control
panel in the refrigeration plant room.

8.5.7 Control Console

The chiller shall be controlled by a stand-alone microprocessor-based

control center. The chiller control panel shall provide control of chiller
operation and monitoring of chiller sensors, actuators, relays and switches.
The chiller control panel shall also provide:

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 491

a) System operating information including:

i) return and leaving chilled water temperature

ii) return and leaving condenser water temperature
iii) evaporator and condenser saturation temperature
iv) differential oil pressure.
v) percent motor current
vi) evaporator and condenser saturation temperature
vii) compressor discharge temperature
viii) oil reservoir temperature
ix) compressor thrust bearing positioning and oil temperature
x) operating hours
xi) number of compressor starts

b) Digital programming of set points through the universal keypad

including:

i) leaving chilled water temperature

ii) percent current limit
iii) pull-down demand limiting
iv) six-week schedule for starting and stopping the chiller, pumps and
tower
v) remote reset temperature range

c) Status messages indicating:

i) system ready to start

ii) system running
iii) system coast down
iv) System safety shutdown-manual restart
v) system cycling shutdown-auto restart
vi) system pre-lube
vii) start inhibits

d) The text displayed within the system status and system details field shall
be displayed as a color-coded message to indicate severity: red for safety
fault, orange for cycling faults, yellow for warnings, and green for normal
messages.

e) Safety shutdowns enunciated through the display and the status bar, and
consist of system status, system details, day, time, cause of shutdown,
and type of restart required. Safety shutdowns with a fixed speed drive
shall include:

i) evaporator – low pressure

ii) evaporator – transducer or leaving liquid probe
iii) evaporator – transducer or temperature sensor
iv) condenser – high pressure contacts open
v) condenser – high pressure
vi) condenser – pressure transducer out of range

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 492

vii) auxiliary safety – contacts closed

viii) discharge – high temperature
ix) discharge – low temperature
x) oil – high temperature
xi) oil – low differential pressure
xii) oil – high differential pressure
xiii) oil – sump pressure transducer out of range
xiv) oil – differential pressure calibration
xv) oil – variable speed pump – pressure setpoint not achieved
xvi) control panel – power failure
xvii) motor or starter – current imbalance
xviii) thrust bearing – proximity probe clearance
xix) thrust bearing - proximity probe out – of – range
xx) thrust bearing – high oil temperature
xxi) thrust bearing – oil temperature sensor
xxii) watchdog – software reboot

f) Safety shutdowns with a VSD Shall include:

i) VSD shutdown – requesting fault data

ii) VSD – stop contacts open
iii) VSD – 110 % motor current overload
iv) VSD – high phase A, B, C inverter heat-sink temp.
v) VSD – high converter heat-sink temperature

g) Cycling shutdowns enunciated through the display and the status bar,
and consists of system status, system details, day, time, cause of
shutdown, and type of restart required. Cycling shutdowns with a fixed
speed drive shall include:

i) multiunit cycling – contacts open

ii) system cycling - contacts open
iii) oil – low temperature differential
iv) oil – low temperature
v) control panel - power failure
vi) leaving chilled liquid - low temperature
vii) leaving chilled liquid - flow switch open
viii) motor controller – contacts open
ix) motor controller – loss of current
x) power fault
xi) control panel – schedule
xii) starter – low supply line voltage
xiii) starter – high supply line voltage
xiv) proximity probe – low supply voltage
xv) variable speed pump - drive contacts open

h) Cycling shutdowns with a VSD shall include:

i) VSD shutdown – requesting fault data
ii) VSD – stop contacts open

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 493

iii) VSD initialization failed

iv) VSD - high phase A, B, C instantaneous current
v) VSD – phase A, B, C gate driver
vi) VSD – single phase input power
vii) VSD – high DC bus voltage
viii) VSD – pre charge DC bus voltage imbalance
ix) VSD – high internal ambient temperature
x) VSD – invalid current scale selection
xi) VSD – low phase A, B, C inverter heatsink temp.
xii) VSD – low converter heatsink temperature
xiii) VSD – pre-charge - low DC bus voltage
xiv) VSD – logic board processor
xv) VSD – run signal
xvi) VSD – serial communications
i) For variable speed compressor
a. VFD starter, will vary the compressor motor speed by controlling the
frequency and voltage of the electrical power to the motor. The
adaptive capacity control logic shall automatically adjust motor
speed and compressor pre-rotation vane position independently for
maximum part-load efficiency by analyzing information fed to it by
sensors located throughout the chiller.

b. To Limit Harmonic generation from VFD, Active Harmonic Filters as

per IEEE 519 must be used at the source itself.

c. Drive will be PWM type utilizing IGBTs with a power factor of 0.95
or better at all loads and speeds.

d. Make of VFD shall be exactly same as per global catalogue /

practice. The variable speed drive shall be with all power and
control wiring between the drive and chiller factory installed,
including power to the chiller oil pump.

e. Field power wiring shall be a single point connection and electrical

lugs for incoming power wiring will be provided.

j) The following features shall be provided:

i) Door interlocked circuit breaker capable of being padlocked.
ii) Ground fault protection.
iii) Over voltage and under voltage protection.
iv) 3-phase sensing motor over current protection.
v) Single phase protection.
vi) Insensitive to phase rotation.
vii) Over temperature protection. Digital readout at the chiller unit
control panel of output frequency, output voltage, 3-phase output
current, input Kilowatts and Kilowatt-hours, self-diagnostic service
parameters. Separate meters for this information will not be
acceptable.

8.5.8 Evaporator:

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 494

Unit shall be with multi pass flooded type evaporator. The maximum
refrigerant-side working pressure shall be 230 psiG (15.85 bar) and the
water side pressure shall be 150 psiG(10.34 bar), It should be tested as
per standard as specified above. The evaporator shall be mechanically
cleanable, shell-and-tube type with multi pass arrangement and
removable nozzle in head type connections. Tubes shall be internally and
externally grooved, high efficiency tubes, seamless-copper and shall be
rolled into tube sheets. Shell shall be insulated with 19 mm thick closed-
cell nitrile rubber. Evaporator thermal insulation shall be factory fitted. The
evaporator shall have a drain and vent in each head. Design shall
incorporate one refrigerant circuit. Removable compact nozzle in head
water boxes of cast iron or welded steel with stub-out water connections
shall be provided to permit access for tube cleaning and replacement.
Water Velocity through tubes shall not exceed 12 fps(3.66 m/s). Maximum
allowable pressure drop across the evaporator shall not exceed 10 m of
water. Heat exchanger shall be in accordance with ASME.
8.5.9 Condenser:

Unit shall be equipped with a single condenser. The maximum refrigerant-

side working pressure shall be 230 psiG (15.85 bar) and the maximum
water side pressure shall be 150 psiG (10.34 bar). It should be tested as
per standard as specified above. The condenser shall be mechanically
cleanable shell-and-tube type with multi pass arrangement and removable
heads. Tubes shall be internally & externally grooved, seamless Hard
drawn copper and shall be rolled into tube sheets. Design shall incorporate
one refrigerant circuits. The condenser shall have a drain and vent in each
head. Removable compact nozzle in head water boxes of cast iron or
welded steel with stub-out water connections shall be provided to permit
access for tube cleaning and replacement. Water Velocity through tubes
shall not exceed 12 fps (3.66 m/s). Maximum allowable pressure drop
across condenser shall not exceed 10 m of water. Heat exchanger shall
be in accordance with ASME.

8.6 Chiller Central Plant (Manager) Controller – CPM

a) This specification applies to the automation of a Water-Cooled Chiller

Plant, which has 4 Water-cooled Chillers, 4 Cooling Towers, 4 condenser
pumps, 4 variable speed chilled water Secondary pumps and 4 fixed
speed chilled water Primary pumps.

b) The plant control system shall be supplied with all the hardware, software
and programming required to control above mentioned equipment
demand sensors to maintain minimum flow.

c) The quantity of chillers, pumps, valves and demand sensors to be

controlled shall be independently configurable on-site at the graphic user
interface by selection from pull down menus, without requiring
reprogramming or software download. All schematics, tables and menus
in the graphic user interface shall show only the data and graphics
corresponding to the selected configuration.

d) The plant control system shall be supplied with all the hardware, software

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 495

and programming required to be seamlessly integrated with the reporting

and remote read-write capabilities of the building management system.
The control system shall allow field adjustments of control parameters.

e) A remote fault detection and diagnostics service shall be provided

including quarterly performance reports and calibration for the first full
year following commissioning.

f) The controller shall be designed with programmed logic controller to

achieve pre-defined IKW per TR of the plant room. The equipment
operations shall be fully controlled by this controller based on the demand
load.

8.6.1 Submittals
Provide a complete Chilled Water Plant Control System Submittal with all
requirements as defined in the general requirements of these
specifications. As a minimum, the Submittal shall include the following:
i. Dimensional drawings of the main components, also indicating
weight and any special hoisting or working space clearances
requirements.
ii. Description of system operation
iii. Electrical power and control wiring diagram
iv. Control layout drawing with sequence of operation
v. Operation and maintenance manuals

8.6.2 As a minimum, the Operation and Maintenance Manual shall include:

i. System summary sheet
ii. Description of system operation, with equipment and control
sequence of operation
iii. Electrical power and control wiring diagrams
iv. Installation and maintenance manuals from equipment
manufacturers
v. Snapshots of all graphic user interface screens, with description of
all variables and recommended tuning values or tuning methods.
vi. Submittals and operation and maintenance manuals shall be
assembled in a neat and orderly manner and bound in booklet form.
Include a front page that identifies the job particulars followed by a
table of contents.

8.6.3 Commissioning, Warranty and Service

a) Commissioning shall be done by manufacturer or his authorized dealer.

b) Warranty period: 36 months from the date of successful handing over of

the plant. From the time of commissioning, continuous service covering
the central chilled water plant shall be provided. The service shall include
a web based self-serve interface and shall not require any additional
hardware added to the plant controller.

c) web interface shall include summaries via the web. It shall also include
ongoing tracking of the performance relative to the predicted

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 496

performance. The predicted performance shall be based on daily

measured building loads and external temperature and humidity. The
assessment of the chilled water plant shall include KW drawn from each
chiller(s), chilled water pump(s), condenser water pump(s) and cooling
tower fan(s)

The service shall include

I. Summary of plant efficiency profiled against operating loads.
II. Detailed chart of how the chilled water plant performed relative to
the predicted performance.
III. The predicted performance shall be calculated as outlined above.
IV. The report shall summarize of key findings regarding overall
performance.
V. Recommendations to improve the efficiency of the overall chilled
water plant based on the analysis

d) The detailed quarterly report shall be delivered electronically at the end

of the preceding quarter.

e) Daily summaries shall be generated and provided in email or other

electronic notification that summarize the actual measured efficiency of
the chilled water plant relative to the predicted efficiency. The predicted
efficiency shall be based on the outdoor weather conditions for the day
(temperature and humidity in combination with the building load).

8.6.4 Chilled water plant control system and Associated Equipment

a) The chilled water plant control system shall be a stand-alone system

capable of operating independently of the Building Management system,
and at the same time capable of receiving remote instructions from the ,.

b) The plant automation shall be performed solely by the PLC and the PC
shall not be required for plant operation, other than initial setup or
configuration.

c) The chilled water plant control system shall include a combination of PC-
based and PLC controller.

d) The chilled water plant control system shall have an internal circuit
breaker and run on 240 V AC /1Ph/50 Hz power supply.

e) Operation temperature range: 0°C - 45°C (32°F-113°F)

f) Operation humidity range: 5% - 95%, non-condensing

g) Power supply: AC 100-240V.

h) The control system shall have a key lockable IP54 or better rated cabinet.
All operator interface control switches, indicators and displays shall be
physically separated from any field terminations. Manual backup control
switches and indicators must be protected from unauthorized operation
by a key lockable door.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 497

i) The plant control system shall have Hand-Off-Automatic control for each
chiller, pump and tower fan drive. These virtual H-O-A switches shall be
accessible through the touch screen display, and in Hand mode, the
control system shall allow the pump speed and the tower fan to be
manually set and changed.
j) The chilled water plant control system shall include a back-lit touch
screen color display operator interface of at least 10.4” and show active-
element schematic displays with links to sub-menus for status reports,
data and setup menu options. No data shall be lost during power supply
interruptions.

k) The control system shall be self-prompting. All messages shall be

displayed in plain English. The operator interface shall have store in
memory at least 50 faults and be able to recall them on the screen, on-
screen help functions, and separate user screens for:

I. Chiller configuration (including factory default setup data)

II. Pump configuration (including factory default setup data)
III. Differential pressure, flow, and temperature sensors’ setup
(including factory default setup data)
IV. Zone setups (including calibration of differential
pressure/temperature sensor range) (including factory default setup
data)
V. Alarm history and event review
VI. Display of zone status, chiller status, pump status and system
status.
VII. Best Efficiency Point speed setup (including factory default setup
data)
VIII. PID control parameters setup (including factory default setup data)
IX. BAS communication setup (including factory default setup data)
X. System schematic(s) showing chillers, pumps and valves operating
parameters and sensors readings.

8.6.5 Instrumentation

a) The chilled water plant control system shall provide the following remote
mounted transmitters and sensors to be installed and wired back to the
central plant control system.

b) Temperature sensors, pressure sensors and flow meter shall be installed

by the contractor as per site requirement to modulate the chilled water
system.

c) Temperature sensors shall be self-contained. RTD type temperature

transmitter for chilled water systems designed to meet IP65 construction.
The temperature probe shall use sensing element in a 316SS sheath,
spring loaded and inserted into a stainless-steel thermos well. The two
probes of the supply and return temperature sensors shall be matched
pair. Sensors shall not be locally adjustable. The accuracy of the
temperature sensor shall be 0.5% of span and shall be calibrated and

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 498

traceable to NIST.
The temperature transmitter shall receive its power input and send its
current output, 4-20 mA, over the same pair of low voltage wires. Sensors
shall be mounted such that effects of radiation from heating elements are
minimized and rapid response to changing temperature is achieved.
Wiring installed by the contractor between the control system and the
transmitters shall be 2-wire, shielded, twisted cable (or equivalent) and
shall not be placed in conduit containing wiring for alternating current.
Supply and return temperature sensor shall be field installed and wired
between the chillers and the bypass line.

d) Pressure sensors shall be complete, self-contained, variable capacitance

type, stainless steel construction differential pressure transmitters
designed to meet IP65 construction and provide a 4-20 mA signal output.
The accuracy of the pressure sensor shall be 0.5% of span including
linearity, hysteresis and repeatability. Wiring terminals and electronics
shall be in separate compartments, so the electronics remain sealed
during installation. Reverse polarity protection shall be included to keep
wiring mishaps from damaging the transmitter. Wiring between the
control system and the transmitters, provided by the installing contractor,
shall be 2 wire, shielded twisted cable (or equivalent) and shall not be
placed in conduit containing AC electrical wiring. Pressure switches shall
have adjustable ranges and adjustable differentials to suit the application.

e) The flow sensor shall be a high precision magnetic flow meter with no
moving parts. Paddle and turbine type sensors shall not be accepted.
The sensor shall have a maximum operating pressure of 300 psi,
operating temperature range of 5°F to 158°F. Accuracy shall be within
0.5% of actual reading at the calibrated typical velocity and within +2% of
reading over 200:1 turndown (from 0.05 to 10 m/s). Provide certificate of
calibration with each flow sensor. The sensor shall have integral 4-20mA
analog output for connection to the control system. The flow sensor shall
be constructed of stainless steel with IP65 protection. Contractor shall
supply hot tap installation, in order to be both insertable and removable
through a ball valve when the pipe is under pressure. Flow meter shall
be field installed and wired by the contractor. The sensor shall be field
mounted and wired in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

f) Relative Humidity Sensors:

Relative humidity sensors shall be capacitance type with an
effectivesensingrange of10%to90%. Accuracy shallbe +/-5%orbetter.
Ductmountedhumiditysensorsshallbeprovidedwithasamplingchamber.
Wall mounted sensors shall be provided with covers identicalto
temperature sensors. Sensor housing shall plug into the base suchthat
thesamecan beeasily removedwithoutdisturbingthewiring.

8.6.6 Software

a) Capabilities: The chilled water plant control system software shall be

preprogrammed to perform, but shall not be limited to, the following:
I. Manual or automatic control system
II. Schedule start/stop.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 499

III. Duty cycling

IV. Automatic lock-out of malfunctioning equipment
V. Backup sequences of control for any sensor failure
VI. Automatic temperature control
VII. Primary pumps control to satisfy zones demand.
VIII. Control sequences for dedicated and for headered pumps.
IX. Control sequences for dual dedicated pumps with options for
duty/duty, duty/standby and lead/lag operation
X. Optimized sequencing of the Chilled Water pumps Control
sequences for Sensorless and zone sensors distribution pump
speed control options.
XI. Constant flow Condenser pumps
XII. Zone set points reset based on most open load valve.
XIII. Optimized and independent sequencing of chillers based on cooling
demand.
XIV. Sequencing of chillers override to prevent exceeding their kW rating
and FLA.
XV. Supply temperature set point reset.
XVI. Load shedding / Demand limit
XVII. Scanning and alarm processing
XVIII. Graphic screen reporting
XIX. Trend Logging.
The chilled water plant control system software shall be easy and intuitive
to operate. Operators shall be able to perform the following operations
after one day of training:

I. View systems parameters

II. Select relevant screens, systems and points.
III. Turn on and off controlled points manually.
IV. Acknowledge alarms.
V. View and download logged trend data, Receive, understand and
respond to the notifications and recommendations of the
diagnostics service

b) Input/Output Summary: A complete I/O schedule shall be provided,

detailing analogue and digital input and output point description,
functions, types and any special requirements. The control system shall
be capable of accepting and processing appropriate signals (Differential
Pressure, Temperature, or Flow)

c) Trending and Reporting Capabilities: The control system shall provide a

data-logging feature with 5 year of data and shall be capable of displaying
the alarm history on its graphical touch screen display. The chilled water
plant control system shall display live and trend data on demand. The
control system shall provide graphic screens of system schematics.
I. The chilled water plant control system shall be able to
communicate with the Building Management System over one or
more of the following protocols: Modbus RTU, Modbus TCP,
BACnet MS/TP, BACnet IP or Lonworks.
II. The plant control system shall allow changes to the field the

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 500

network address of equipment it communicates with (chillers,

variable speed pumps, etc.) and its own address on the interface
it communicates to the BAS. Network addresses cannot be hard
coded.
d) The chilled water plant control system shall include webserver
functionality and be accessible through an internet TCP/IP internet
address with read/write functionality. This access shall allow the relevant
staff to:

I. Remotely view all screens available at the local graphic user

interface (GUI), with the same functionality. I.e.: view plant status,
view and modify parameters and set points, override equipment
and navigate screens.
II. Receive alarm messages, automatically processed and conveyed
via the network.
III. Upgrade the plant control system software from the remote
stations. Such remote upgrading shall not interrupt the plant
operation and shall not require local intervention.
IV. Remote manual override by the , shall be possible for the following
equipment settings:

1. Control System ON/OFF

2. Plant Mechanical mode/Stand-by mode

e) Alarms: Alarms shall be generated, and the alarm messages shall be

displayed in clear textual form on the screen, until it is acknowledged by
the operator. Alarms shall include but not limited to the following list:

I. System fault alarms

II. General alarm
III. Pumps run feedback alarms.
IV. Chiller alarms
V. Pump alarm
VI. Drive fault alarms.
VII. No flow alarm.
VIII. Zone/sensor alarm
IX. Drive communication alarm.
X. 4 potential free contacts shall be provided for general alarm,
buzzer, communication alarm and general sensor alarm.

f) Safety Features shall include but not limited to the following list:
I. Auto omission of pump in case of pump failure
II. Auto omission of chiller in case of chiller failure
III. Backup sequences in case of flow sensor failure, temperature
sensor failure, and all zone sensors failure.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 501

IV. Sequencing of chillers to prevent the flow through the running

chillers to exceed their rated maximum (or fall below their
minimum), or to exceed the power consumed by the running
chillers to exceed their rated maximum.
V. Program distributed over several PLCs in such way that if those
handling the most complex functions and remote communications
fail, the lower-level ones shall keep the plant running with simpler
logic.
VI. Indication of any Failure (or) malfunctioning in the touchscreen
screen user interface, the remote access screens, in the ,
communication.
VII. Pumps status confirmation with differential pressure switches
VIII. Remote stop for emergency shutdown.

g) Sequence of Operation:

I. All plant control system settings, including the number of chillers,

cooling towers and pumps, as well as how they are connected
(headered or dedicated) can be modified at the graphic user
interface (GUI) after entering the appropriate password.

II. The plant control system determines the most efficient

combination of operating pumps, and pump operating speed
based on the zone differential pressure, zone Temperature sensor
signals as per the field adjustable configuration.

III. The control system shall continuously monitor all zone signals to
determine an active control zone. Use of a multiplexer for multiple
sensor inputs is not acceptable.

IV. The control system shall respond to the most dissatisfied zone by
increasing either, the number of operating pumps, or the pump
speed.

V. The control system shall automatically disable any zone

differential pressure or Temperature signals that are not within
limits and alert the operator of a possible transmitter failure. If
system found all differential pressure/temperature sensors failure
in the building, the pump speed shall default to a pre-defined
percent of full speed (factory default loaded as 95% of full speed).

VI. The pump logic control system shall sequence the pumps based
on a field adjustable interval of operating hours with a “bump-less”
transfer algorithm. The control system incorporates an adjustable
PID control loop and embedded logic to prevent hunting.

VII. The control system shall determine the optimum numbers of

chillers to operate based on the plant load (thermal energy
rejected) or to prevent the flow through the running chillers to
exceed their rated maximum (or fall below their minimum), or to

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 502

exceed the power consumed by the running chillers to exceed their

rated maximum, or to prevent the supply temperature to exceed
the set point by a field adjustable offset.

VIII. For each chiller the control system has an adjustable field to enter
its capacity. The plant load (in Tons and %) is displayed on the
touch screen display and used to Stage on and off the chillers, in
conjunction with the other conditions explained in the previous
paragraph.

IX. The control system shall rotate the Lead chiller on a field
adjustable interval of operating hours. Should any chiller fail, the
control system shall trigger an alarm on the touch screen display
and remove said chiller from the auto sequence and rotation.

X. The control system shall be capable of interfacing with up to 5

isolation valves (used when the chillers are headered). A digital
output opens and closes the valves, and a digital input provides
open/close feedback.

XI. The control system modulates the bypass valve to maintain the
minimum flow required by the operating chillers.
XII. If dedicated, the condenser pumps shall be sequenced with the
chillers.
XIII. If headered constant speed, the condenser pumps shall be
sequenced to maintain the design flow required by the running
chillers.
XIV. The condenser pumps shall maintain the Chiller flow.

h) Automatic operation mode: When the chilled plant control system is in

automatic operation mode, the chiller plant is automatically started and
all equipment is sequenced and modulated entirely automatically to meet
the current cooling load with optimum operating efficiency.

i) Manual operation mode (for commissioning): When the chilled plant

control system is switched to the manual operation mode by the operator,
there is no automatic operation or sequencing of any equipment and
operation of chillers, chilled water distribution pumps, condenser water
pumps, cooling towers and cooling tower fans continue at the same
status when operation mode was switched to manual mode, until further
changes by the operator. When operation mode is switched back to auto,
the automatic operation mode is restarted.

The chilled plant control system shall be capable of providing parallel

primary pump station control for speed and sequencing of pumps using
one or more of the following methods:

i. Remote zone differential pressure (DP) sensor

ii. Local pump station DP sensor with simulated quadratic control
curve.
iii. Zone return temperature sensor and/or
iv. Sensor less pump speed and Parallel Sensorless pump staging.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 503

8.6.7 Execution

a) Electrical Wiring and Installation

The wiring for data communication between sensors, control systems and
valve actuator shall be shielded so as not to be susceptible to electrostatic,
magnetic, mode and cross talk noise. Electrical wiring shall conform to the
requirements of the electrical services section of the specifications and
Electrical codes.

b) Testing

Upon completion of all systems startup and checkout procedures and while
the mechanical systems are being monitored and controlled in a “normal
operating” condition, the manufacturer and the facility personnel shall jointly
demonstrate the performance of the complete system to maintain flows,
temperatures, levels and pressures for 7 days, with no alarms. The test must
meet the particular building’s design requirements. Any failures or alarms
shall require the test to be restarted.

c) Calibration and Commissioning

The calibration and commissioning procedure shall consist of validating field

I/O calibration, loop checks, actuator stroking and integrated system
operation validation. All commissioning information shall be documented on
commissioning data sheet forms which shall be submitted to the Engineer
In Charge for approval prior to testing. Notify the testing schedule so that
operating personnel may observe calibration and commissioning.

d) Training

The chilled water plant control system manufacturer shall train the
personnel of the ESIC in the operation of the control system. Drawings,
operation and maintenance manuals are to be provided to the ESIC
authorities in a single binder, clearly indexed.

8.7 Air Handling Unit (AHU) (Factory Fabricated)

The specification for Double Skin Air handling unit comprises the design,
manufacture, delivery at site, erection, commissioning and conducting
performances test at site of Air handling units conforming to these
specifications. Factory fabricated AHUs only acceptable.

AHUs shall comply with all currently applicable statutes, regulations and
safety codes. The equipment shall also conform to the requirements of the
latest editions of applicable ASHRAE Standards. Nothing in this
specification shall be construed to relieve the Contractor of his
responsibility.

The air handling unit shall be of double skin construction, draw through type
in sectionalized construction consisting of blower section, coil section,
humidification section (where specified), filter section and insulated drain
pan. The unit shall be horizontal type. All AHUs shall be provided with VFDs.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 504

a) Capacity:

The air handling capacities, maximum motor horsepower and static pressure
shall be as per the approved design and drawings.

b) Rating:

I. The coil shall be designed for a face velocity of air not exceeding
155 m/min.

II. The requisite static pressure demanded by the air circuit shall be
developed by the fan at the selected operating speed. The static
pressure value shall not in any case be less than 40 mm water
gauge in normal cases, not less than 65 mm water gauge where
microvee filters are also used and not less than 100 mm water
gauge where absolute filters are also used. The fan motor HP shall
be suitable to satisfy these requirements and the drive losses.

III. The air outlet velocity from the blower fan shall not exceed 610
m/min.

IV. Noise level at a distance of 2 m from AHU shall not exceed 75 dBA.

c) Material and Construction

Housing/ Casing

I. The housing/ casing of the air handling unit shall be of double skin
construction. The housing shall be so made that it can be delivered at
site in total/ semi knocked down conditions depending upon the
requirements. The main framework shall be of extruded Aluminium
hollow structural sections. The entire framework shall be assembled
using mechanical joints to make a sturdy and strong framework for
various sections. For 100% fresh air application, framework shall be
made of thermal break hollow extruded Aluminium profile.

II. Double skin panels shall be 25mm thick, made of 0.8mm pre-
plasticized and pre-painted with PVC guard, GSS sheet on outside
and 0.8mm Aluminium sheet inside with Polyurethane foam insulation
of density not less than 38 kg/cu. m injected in between by injection
moulding machine. These panels shall be bolted from inside/ screwed
from outside on to the framework with soft rubber gasket in between
to make the joints airtight. The gaskets shall be inserted within groove
in extruded Aluminium profile of the framework. For units installed
outdoor, the thickness of double skin panels shall be minimum 40 mm.

III. Frame work for each section shall also be bolted together with soft
rubber gasket in between to make the joints air tight. Suitable doors
with nylon handles, Aluminium die-cast powder coated hinges &
latches shall be provided for access to various panels for maintenance.
However, AHU in the form of complete single unit shall also be

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 505

acceptable with access door(s) for maintenance to various sections.

The entire housing shall be mounted on galvanized steel channel
frame work made out of G.I. sheet of thickness not less than 2mm. For
higher capacity AHUs, hot dip galvanized steel channel framework
made of minimum 3 mm thick G.S. sheet shall be used.

IV. Condensate drain pan shall be sandwich construction fabricated from

1.25 mm Aluminum sheet with all corners welded and provided with
19 mm thick nitrile rubber insulation. It shall be isolated from; bottom
floor panel through 25mm heavy duty TF expanded polystyrene or
urethane foam to be sandwiched.

8.7.2 Cooling Coil:

a) The coil shall be made from seamless solid drawn copper tubes. The
minimum thickness of tube shall be 0.5 mm for cooling coils.

b) The depth of the coil shall be such as to suit the requirements, viz. re-
circulated air applications, or 100 % fresh air applications. The coil shall
be 4 or 6 rows deep for normal re-circulated air application and 8 rows
deep for all outdoor air application. In case of 8 rows deep coils, it shall
be made of 2x4 rows deep coils with a spacing of 200mm between the
two coils, access door and independent drain pan.

c) U bends shall be of copper, jointed to the tubes by brazing, soft soldering

shall not be used.

d) Each section of the coil shall be fitted with flow and return headers to
feed all the passes of the coil properly. The headers shall be of copper
and shall be complete with water in/out connections, vent plug on top and
drain at the bottom. The coil shall be designed to provide water velocity
between 0.6 to 1.8 m/s in the tubes.

e) The fins shall be of Aluminium. The minimum thickness of the fins shall
be 0.15 mm nominal. The no. of fins shall not be less than 12 per inch
length of coil. Fins may be of either spiral or plate type. The tubes shall
be mechanically expanded to ensure proper thermal contact between fins
and tubes. The fins shall be evenly spaced and upright. The fins bent
during installation shall be carefully realigned. For coastal areas fins shall
be phenolic coated and for 100% F.A. application fins shall be hydrophilic
type.

f) The coil shall be suitable for use with the refrigerant specified or with
water as the case may be. Refrigerating coils shall be designed for the
maximum working pressure under the operating conditions. Water coils
shall be designed for a maximum working pressure of 10 kg./sq.cm.
g) Shut off and regulating valves at the inlet and outlet of water shall be
provided. In the case of DX coils, solenoid valve and expansion valves
shall be provided at the inlet of coil.

8.7.3 Supply Air Fan and Drive

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 506

a) The supply air fan shall be AMCA certified centrifugal type with forward/
backward curved blades double inlet double width type. For static
pressure up to 65mm, forward curved blades shall be used and for higher
sizes backward curved blades shall be used.

b) The fan housing of Galvanized sheet steel and the impellers shall be
fabricated from heavy gauge steel sheet. The side plates shall be die
formed for efficient, smooth airflow and minimum losses. Fan impeller
shall be mounted on solid shaft supported to housing using heavy duty
ball bearings. Fan housing and motor shall be mounted on a common
extruded Aluminium base mounted inside the fan section on anti-
vibration spring mounts or cushy- foot mount. The fan outlet shall be
connected to casing with the help of fire-retardant fabric.

c) The fan impeller assembly shall be statically and dynamically balanced.

d) The fan shall be fitted with vee belt drive arrangement consisting of not
less than two evenly matched belts. Belts shall be of oil resistant type.
Adequate adjustments shall be provided to facilitate belt installation and
subsequent belt tensioning by movement of the motor on the slide rails.
A readily removable door guard shall be provided.

e) The fan motor shall be totally enclosed fan cooled squirrel cage induction
motor with IP-54 protection & selected for quiet running. The motor shall
be suitable for operation on 415 ± 10%V, 3 Phase, 50 Hz, A.C. supply.
The fan motor shall be of premium efficiency IE3 class, as per IS 12615.
The motor shall suitably be designed for use with variable frequency
drive.

f) AHU fan motors shall be provided with variable frequency drive where
VAVs (Variable Air Volume control) are provided in the ducts.

8.7.4 Type of filters

a) Pre-filters: Cleanable metallic viscous type filter made out of Aluminium

wire mesh or of dry cleanable synthetic type of minimum 50mm thick,
shall be provided on the suction side of AHU as standard equipment with
the unit. These filters shall have the efficiency of 90% down to 10-micron
particle size. When these filters become loaded or full of dirt, it is removed
from service and replaced by another filter. The dirty filter can then be
washed in a cleaning solution in a tank, dried and then given a bath of
viscous oil. Face velocity across these filters shall not exceed 155 MPM.

b) Dry fabric (fine) filters: These filters shall have efficiency of 99% down to
5-micron particle size as per EU/MERV 7 standard. These filters shall be
provided for all AHUs. These are provided on the discharge side of AHU
after fan section and are always backed by pre-filters provided on the
suction side of AHU. Face velocity across these filters shall not exceed
155 MPM.

c) Absolute (HEPA) filters: These filters shall have efficiency of 99.97% up

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 507

to 0.3-micron particle size as per EU/ MERV 13 standard & are required
for applications like operation theatre, micro-labs etc. These are also
provided in the AHU after fan section or at terminal point and always must
be backed by fine filters & pre filters. These filters after they become
dirty, cannot be reused and have to be thrown away. Face velocity across
these filters shall not exceed 155 MPM.
8.7.5 General Construction of filters

a) Each AHU shall be provided with a factory assembled filter section

containing pre-filters made of cleanable metal viscous filters made of
corrugated Aluminium wire mesh, or dry cleanable synthetic filters. These
shall be minimum 50 mm thick with a frame work of Aluminium.

b) The filter area shall be made up of panels of size convenient for handling.
The filter panels shall be held snugly within suitable Aluminium
framework made out of minimum 1.6 mm Aluminium sheet with sponge
neoprene gaskets by sliding the panels between the sliding channels so
as to avoid air leakage.

c) In order to indicate the condition of these filters while in operation, a

manometer shall be provided to indicate the pressure drop across the
fine filters and absolute filters.

d) Special filters, if any specified in the tender specifications shall be

provided in addition to the above filters. In that event, the latter shall
function as pre-filters.

e) Each fine and HEPA filter shall carry test certificate from manufacturer.

8.7.6 Instruments and Valves

The following instruments shall be provided at the specified locations in the

AHUs for the chilled water / hot water system:

a) Pressure gauges at the inlet and outlet of the coil with tubing & gauge
cock. Stem type thermometers at the inlet & outlet of coil with tubing &
gauge cock.

b) Butterfly valve at the inlet and outlet of coil. Balancing valve at the outlet
of coil. Y-strainer at the inlet of coil.

c) Motorized-way diverting/ mixing valve along with proportionate

thermostat. Controls shall be as per the manufacturer’s standards.

8.8 Fan Coil Units

a) The fan coil units shall be floor/ wall/ ceiling mounted draw through type
complete with finned coil, fan with motor, insulated drain pan, cleanable
air filters and fan speed regulator and other controls as described.

b) The casing shall be fabricated out of minimum 1.25mm thick G.S.S.

sheet.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 508

c) The coil shall be of seamless copper tubes with Aluminium fins. The fins
shall be uniformly bonded to the tubes by mechanical expansion of the
tubes. The coil circuit should be sized for adequate water velocity but not
exceeding 1.8 m/s. The air velocity across the coil shall not exceed 155
m/min.

d) Fan shall consist of two lightweight Aluminium impellers of forward

curved type, both statically and dynamically balanced, along with
properly designed GI sheet casings. The two impellers shall be directly
mounted on to a double shaft, single phase multiple winding motor
capable of running at three speeds.

e) Drain Pan shall be fabricated out of minimum 1.00 mm thick stainless-

steel sheet covering the whole of coil section and extended on one side
for accommodating coil connection valve etc. and complete with a 25mm
drain connection. The drain pan shall be insulated with 10mm thick
closed cell polyethylene foam insulation and jacketed from outside with
single piece moulded FRP tray.

f) Air Filter shall be cleanable type 15mm thick with 90% efficiency down to
10 microns of dry cleanable synthetic type to be mounted behind the
return air grill in the unit casing.

g) Speed control shall be achieved with a sturdy switch shall be provided

with the unit complete with wiring, for ON/OFF operation and with
minimum three speed control of the fan.

h) Automatic controls unit shall have a room type thermostat and a solenoid
valve. The valve shall be fixed at a convenient location. The thermostat
shall be mounted along with the speed control switch on a common plate.
The plate shall clearly indicate the fan positions. The water valves on inlet
line shall be of gun metal ball type with internal water strainers, having
BSP female pipe thread inlet and flare type male pipe thread outlet
connection. The valves on return line shall be as above, but without the
water strainer.

i) The water lines shall be finally connected to the coil of the fan coil unit,
by at least 300mm long, type `L ‘seamless solid drawn copper tubing,
with flare fittings and connections.

j) Unit shall be selected for the lowest operating noise level of the
equipment, Fan performance rating and power consumption data, with
operating points clearly indicated shall be submitted and verified at the
time of testing and commissioning of the installation.

8.9 Pump Sets

a) The type and size of all chilled water & condensing water pumps shall be
in accordance with requirement. However, the pumps shall be selected
to have interchangeability of spares for similar requirements in order to
reduce inventory. It shall have a fixed speed Primary Pumping and

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 509

variable speed secondary pumping with VFD for chilled water circuits and
pump sets with VFDs for Cooling towers. Water flow rates and head of
the pumps shall be in accordance with the requirements.

b) The pumps for Chilled Water and Condenser cooling water shall be of
True Back-pull out type, End suction, mechanical seal, Centrifugal type
pumping unit. The pumps shall be Horizontal split casing, centrifugal type
with CI casing with equal size suction and discharge flanges and having
separate tapped flush line and pressure gauge connections, Gunmetal
Bronze dynamically balanced impeller, stainless steel shaft, low carbon
throttle bushing, Outside Balanced type mechanical seal with Resin
Bonded Carbon rotating face, Sintered Silicon Carbide stationary seat
and Viton secondary seal. The pump shall be supplied duly aligned with
motors from the manufacturer’s works with base frame. Efficiency of the
pumps at selection should be 70 % or above.

c) Pump casing shall be close-grained cast iron of heavy section, Horizontal

split casing, making possible complete servicing of rotating parts without
breaking piping or motor connections. Suction passages shall be volute
in form, promoting smooth entry to impeller and increased efficiency.
Motor to pump connection shall be of the flexible coupling type.

d) Impeller shall be Gunmetal bronze, enclosed type, hydraulically balanced

& passages smooth-finished for minimum friction and Maximum
efficiency.

e) Shaft shall be steel, protected by gunmetal sleeves extending through

stuffing boxes. Stuffing boxes shall be supported in ball /journal bearings,
grease lubricated, contained in easily removable housing. Pumps shall
be fitted with an air valve, two grease lubricators, drain plug and water
seal connections. Mechanical seal shall be used for chilled water pumps.

f) Motor shall be totally enclosed, fan-cooled (TEFC), IE3 Class efficiency,

of approved make. The motor rating shall be such as to ensure non
overloading of the motor throughout its capacity range including the
pumps operating in parallel. Motor shall be suitable for 415  10% volts,
3 phase, 50 cycles AC, and power supply. Pump motors greater than or
equal to 3.7 KW (5HP) shall be controlled by VFDs.

g) Base shall be of a size suitable for the pump, motor and shaft and shall
be constructed of cast iron or welded steel.

h) The pump set shall be provided duly aligned with motor and installed on
the base frame from manufacturers works. A guard mounted on the
common base shall protect flexible coupling.

i) The pump shall be installed on a concrete foundation.

j) Performance: All the pumps must perform according to selected duty

point and respective performance curve. Pre-dispatch performance test

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 510

and site performance test shall confirm the design / required

performance.

8.9.1 Variable Speed Pumping System

a) The pumping package shall be assembled by the pump manufacturer

who is actively engaged in basic design and construction of centrifugal
pumps.

b) The pump manufacturer shall assume "Unit Responsibility" for the

complete pumping package. Unit responsibility shall be defined as
responsibility for interface and successful operation of all system
components supplied by the pumping system manufacturer.

c) The overall variable speed pumping system shall comprise of True Back-
pull out type, End (single) suction, mechanical seal, Centrifugal type with
integrated pump mounted VFD coupled with motor duly aligned and
dynamically balanced, variable speed controller, field instrumentation &
adjustable frequency drives all integrated into a single package.

d) Given below are broad design considerations and specifications for

Pumps and allied system peripherals to be complied by the variable /
fixed speed pumping system.
e) While the finer requirements of the type of pumps are mentioned in the
specifications, the contractor is instructed to adhere to the following
general selection criteria for all pumping applications covered in this
tender. The intent is to ensure a minimum maintenance / long lasting
performance and better efficiency selection.

f) Pumps supplied shall confirm to rigid flexible coupling design only; close
coupled pumps or mono-block pumps shall not be accepted.

g) The pump design shall be with internally self-flushing chamber as against

compressed stuffing box type pump volute in order to ensure better head
removal ensuring better seal performance for a longer time.

h) All pumps shall be supplied with Gunmetal bronze impellers unless

otherwise specified and preferably using the investment casting
manufacturing process. The pump should be rated for PN-16 pressures.
i) Bearings used shall be regreasable type due to its longer life span and
reduced maintenance. Pumping speeds shall preferably be 1450 RPM.

j) Coupling - Rigid spacer type of high tensile aluminum alloy. Coupling to

be designed to be easily removed on site to reveal a space between the
pump and motor shafts sufficient to remove all mechanical seal
components for servicing and replacement without disturbing other
components of the pump or motor. The coupling shall be provided with a
fully enclosed guard complying with the Machinery Directive.

k) The pumps shall be Horizontal split casing, centrifugal type with CI casing
with equal size suction and discharge flanges and having separate

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 511

tapped flush line and pressure gauge connections, Gunmetal Bronze

(BS1400 LG2C) dynamically balanced impeller, stainless steel shaft, low
carbon throttle bushing, Outside Balanced type mechanical seal with
Resin Bonded Carbon rotating face, Sintered Silicon Carbide stationary
seat and Viton secondary seal. The pump shall be supplied duly aligned
with motors from the manufacturer’s works with base frame. Efficiency of
the pumps at selection should be 70 % or above.

l) The pump seal seats shall preferably be ceramic type for higher corrosion
resistance suitable for HVAC application.

8.9.2 Pumping selection software features

The Pump selection and optimization software from the pump supplier
shall specifically be customized for HVAC applications. Is should cover
variable speed curves, detail part selection and custom special fluid
viscosity and temperature correction over and above other standard
features.

8.9.3 Control System requirements for variable speed pumping

a) The control system shall include as, a minimum, the programmable logic
pump controller, adjustable frequency drive(s) and remote
sensor/transmitters/ Sensor less. Provide additional items as specified or
as required to properly execute the sequence of operation.

b) Control software (Sensor/ Sensor-less) shall be embedded in the

Integrated Variable control unit to provide automatic speed control in
variable volume systems with/ without the need for differential pressure
sensor. The default operating mode under sensor/ Sensor-less Control
shall be 'quadratic pressure control', whereby, head reduction with
reducing flow shall be according to a quadratic control curve. Control
mode setting and minimum / maximum head set-points shall be user
adjustable via the inbuilt programming interface.

c) Pump logic controller, adjustable frequency drives, sensor/transmitters

and related equipment shall be installed by the contractor.
d) Line voltage, Low voltage (24 VDC and 115 VAC, power wiring, field
connection wiring shall be provided by the contractor for the pumping
system

8.9.4 Components

Pump Logic Controller

a) The Pump logic controller assembly shall be specifically programmed for

variable speed pumping applications. Pump Logic Controller shall be
provided as one independent unit and should not be housed in VFD.
Contractor shall submit the pump sequence of operation for establishing
the safe and desired system operation.

b) The controller shall function as a proven program safeguarding against

damaging hydraulic conditions including:

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 512

I. Pump flow surges

II. Hunting
III. End of curve

c) The pump logic controller shall be capable of receiving up to two or more

discrete analog inputs from zone sensor/transmitter/ sensor less as
indicated in the plans, based on the application requirements. It shall then
select the analogue signal that has deviated the greatest amount from its
set point. This selected signal shall be used as the command feedback
input for a hydraulic stabilization function to minimize hunting. Each input
signal shall be capable of maintaining a different set point value.
Controller shall be capable of controlling up to three pumps in parallel.

d) The pump logic controller shall be capable of accepting an additional

analog input for a flow sensor. This input shall serve as the criteria for the
end of curve protection algorithm.

e) Contractor shall clearly indicate in the drawings for approval (DFA) the
number of sensor inputs considered for the variable speed pumping
package.

f) The hydraulic stabilization program shall utilize a proportional-integral-

derivative control function. The proportional, integral and derivative
values shall be user adjustable over an infinite range.

g) The pump logic controller shall be self-prompting. All messages shall be

displayed in plain English. The operator interface shall have the following
features:

I. Multi-fault memory and recall last 10 faults and related

operational data.

II. Red fault light, yellow warning light, and green power on light
III. Soft-touch membrane keypad switches.

h) The display shall preferably have four lines, with 20 characters on three
lines and eight large characters on one line. Actual pump information
shall be displayed indicating pump status.

8.9.5 The following communication features shall be provided to the ,:

It should be possible to acquire and seamlessly integrate the following

pumping system data with the main Building Management System by the
pumping controller on open MODBUS / BACNET / LONWORKS protocol.
The , system shall support these protocols.

I. Individual Analog Input.

II. Individual Zone Set points
III. Individual Pump/VFD on/off status
IV. System percent speed
V. System Start/stop command

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 513

VI. System operation mode

VII. Individual KW signals
VIII. System flow, when optional flow sensor is provided.

The Pump logic controller shall be designed for the number of variable
speed pumps as per requirement.

8.9.6 Variable Frequency Drive (Applicable for AHU Fan motors and
Secondary pumps)

a) VFD shall be providing near unity displacement power factor (cos Ø) without
the need for external power factor Correction capacitors at all loads and
speeds. VFD shall be CE Marked showing compliance with both the EMC
Directive and the Low Voltage Directive. VFD shall be IP-55 rating UL Type-
12. The VFD shall be housed in a NEMA 1 enclosure. VFD with plastic
enclosures shall not be acceptable.
b) The VFD shall employ an advanced sine wave approximation and voltage
vector control to allow operation at rated motor shaft output speed with no
derating. This voltage vector control shall minimize harmonics to the motor
to increase motor efficiency and life.

c) The VFD shall have balanced DC link reactors to minimize power line
harmonics. VFD’s without a DC link reactor shall provide a 5% impedance
line reactor.

d) Automatic motor adaptation (AMA) algorithm shall be utilized. This feature

shall allow for automatically optimized drive performance and efficiency
leading to additional energy savings.

e) Input and output power circuit switching shall be done without interlocks or
damage to the VFD.
f) The following customer modifiable adjustments shall be provided:

I. Acceleration time.
II. Deceleration time.
III. Minimum frequency.
IV. Maximum frequency.

g) An automatic energy optimization selection feature shall be provided. This

feature shall reduce voltages when lightly loaded and provide additional
energy savings.

h) The VFD shall be suitable for elevations to 1000 m above sea level without
derating. Operating ambient temperature shall not be less than 40°C. VFD
shall be suitable for operation in environments up to 95% non-condensing
humidity.

i) The VFD shall be capable of displaying the following information in plain

English via alphanumeric display:
I. Frequency
II. Voltage

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 514

III. Current
IV. Kilowatts per hour
V. Fault identification
VI. Percent torque
VII. Percent power
VIII. RPM

8.9.7 Sensor / Transmitters

Provide field mounted differential pressure sensor transmitter(s) as

indicated in the plans. Unit shall transmit an isolated 4-20mA dc signal
indicative of process variable to the pump logic controller via standard two
wire 24 DC system. Unit shall have stainless steel wetted parts with two
0.25" male NPT process connections. It shall be protected against radio
frequency interference and shall have a watertight, NEMA 4 electrical
enclosure capable of withstanding 2000 PSI (140 Kg/ cm2) static pressure
with a 0.5" NPT conduit connection. Accuracy shall be within 0.25% of full
span.

8.9.8 Sequence of Operation

a) The Variable speed pumping system shall comply to following sequence of

operation, as a minimum.

b) The system shall consist of a Programmable logic pump controller, multiple

pump/VFD sets, with manual and automatic alternation and pump staging.

c) The pumping system shall start upon the closure of customer's contact
when the pump logic controller Mode of Operation selector switch is in the
REMOTE position.

d) When the pump logic controller selector switch is in the LOCAL position,
and start command on Pump Logic Controller is given via operator interface,
the pumping system shall operate automatically.

e) Sensor/transmitters shall be provided.

f) Each sensor/transmitter shall send a 4-20mA signal to the pump logic

controller, indicative of process variable condition.

g) The pump logic controller shall compare each signal to the independent,
engineer/user determined set points.When all set points are satisfied by the
process variable, the pump speed shall remain constant at the optimum
energy consumption level.

h) The pump logic controller shall continuously scan and compare each
process variable to its individual set point and control to the least satisfied
zone.

i) If the set point cannot be satisfied by the designated lead pump, the pump
logic controller shall initiate a timed sequence of operation to stage a lag

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 515

pump [wherever applicable].

j) When the set point criteria can be safely satisfied with fewer pumps, the
Programmable pump logic controller shall initiate a timed restages
sequence and continues variable speed operation.

k) As the worst-case zone deviates from set point, the pump logic controller
shall send the appropriate analog signal to the VFD to speed up or slow
down the pump/motor.

l) In the event of a VFD fault, the pump logic controller automatically initiates
a time sequence of events to start the redundant pump/VFD set in the
variable speed mode. The redundant variable speed system shall be started
through the pump logic controller.

m) Upon VFD fault(s), the pump controller shall display an alarm condition
through a plain English message.

n) VFD fault indication shall be continuously displayed on the operator

interface of the pump until the fault has been corrected and the controller
has been manually reset.

o) In the event of the failure of a zone sensor/transmitter, its process variable

signal shall be removed from the scan/compare program. Alternative zone
sensor/transmitters, if available, shall remain in the scan/compare program
for control.

p) Upon sensor failure, a plain English warning message shall be displayed on

the operator interface of the pump logic controller.
q) In the event of failure to receive all zone process variable signals, a user
selectable number of VFDs shall maintain a user adjustable speed; reset
shall be automatic upon correction of the zone failure.

8.10 Cooling Tower:

Cooling Towers shall be induced draft, bottle type or rectangle type and
single cell or multi cell type, in accordance with requirement. All cooling
towers shall be certified by CTI (Cooling Tower Institute). The cooling tower
capacities shall be designed as per the plant requirement. The pump set of
each cooling tower shall be provided with VFD.

8.10.1 FRP induced draft / forced draft cooling tower:

Cooling Tower shall be vertical, induced draft, counter / cross flow type, fiber
reinforced plastic construction, in square / octagonal, complete with fan,
motor, surface and spray section, eliminators, steel supports, and sound
attenuation equipment suitable for outdoor use. The Cooling tower shall be
designed to cool the requisite quantity of water through 4.2° C, against the
prevailing wet bulb temperature. The cooling tower shall be selected for a wet
bulb approach of not more than 2.77 ° C. The water flow rate through the
cooling tower shall match that through the condenser. The induced draft
cooling tower shall be one or more cells. The fan motor shall be premium

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 516

efficiency IE3 class, as per IS: 12615. VFD shall be provided to each pump
of cooling tower.

8.10.2 Material and Construction:

a) Side Casing

This shall be made out of FRP with minimum resistance to airflow. It shall
have sufficient structural strength to adequately withstand high wind
velocities and vibration. The casing shall be installed in the fiberglass-
reinforced basin. The tower supporting structure shall be made out of hot dip
galvanized frame. Air intake shall be all along the sides so that tower can be
installed quite independent of prevailing wind direction. Anodized aluminum
or PVC louvers integrated withfil shall be provided at air intake. Sufficient
clearance between casing and water basin shall be provided to enable
servicing and periodic cleaning.

b) Cold Water Basin

Cold water basin shall be a deep fiberglass reinforced sump on which cooling
tower super structure shall be supported. (RCC suction tank with easily
removable double brass strainers shall be provided with this basin. The basin
shall have a holding capacity adequate for operation for at least 30 minutes
without addition of make-up water to the basin.

c) Bottom outlet
I. Screened suction assembly fixed to the casing.
II. Drain at underside of suction side sheet.
III. Overflow fixed to inside of casing side sheet.
IV. Ball type automatic makeup water valve.
V. Equalizing connection.

d) Distribution System:
Hot water distribution system shall comprise of HDG piping header and
branch arms system with HDPE nozzle flow system.

e) Fillings:
Fillings shall be made of corrosion proof and rigid virgin PVC film in honeycomb
design and arranged in square / rectangular form or fill sheets shall be
suspended from H.D.G steel structural tubing supported from the lower
structure & shall be elevated above the floor of the cold-water basin to facilitate
cleaning and easy replacement. They shall be arranged in such a manner to
ensure negligible resistance to air flow and to eliminate back water spots and
prevent fouling through scales that may form. In order to reduce carry-over
losses through entrapment of moisture drops in air stream, virgin PVC drift
eliminator shall be installed.

f) Mechanical Equipment:
a) Fan shall be of the propeller type cast Aluminium alloy, light-weight rotor
fitted with multiple aero foil blades. The entire fan assembly shall be made

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 517

of Aluminium casting, statically and dynamically balanced. Fan shall be

directly / gear-reducer driven by 415  10% volts, 3 phase, 50 cycles, AC
supply, 2 Speed, IP55, IE3 rated motor of approved make, totally-
enclosed, fan-cooled, weather- proof construction, designed and selected
to operate in humid air stream.

b) Fan shall be protected by fan guard & shall be easily accessible for
inspection and maintenance. A service steel ladder shall also be provided
for greater convenience. The mechanical equipment assembly shall be
adequately supported on a rugged steel base welded to tubular support
assuring vibration-free support. Fan guard shall be provided to prevent
birds from nesting during idling periods. Gear-reducer shall be of spiral
bevel type. G.S.S / FRP canopy shall be provided over the fan motor for
protection against rain water. Care shall be taken that fan air is not
restricted. Motor terminal box shall be made water tight.

8.10.3 Auto Condenser Tube Cleaning System

On-Line Condenser Tube Cleaning System (OLCTCS) complete with all
accessories as per the requirement specified in different sections of this
specification for 4 Nos. chillers including additional Tube cleaning. The On-
Line Condenser Tube Cleaning System (OLTCS) is intended to prevent the
formation of various forms of fouling and scaling in the inner wall of condenser
tubes.The scope of supply includes one set of OLCTCS for each condenser.
However, each OLCTCS skid shall be common for one or two passes of each
condenser.

8.10.4 Each set of OLCTCS shall comprise the following:

a) Skid with Pump and Valves:
Skid shall be made of Pipe and fittings with flange joints of Mild Steel of IS
2602 Grade B. Each welding joint shall be performed by argon welding. The
skid frame shall be made of Mild Steel. Skid shall be equipped with Pump.
Motorized Ball Valves for injection and collection process, Manual Ball Valves
at the skid for water inlet and outlet tapping points and pressure Gauge across
the Pump. Skid shall be painted.

b) Control Panel:
Control Panel shall be of fully automatic PLC-based control and touch screen
HMI. It shall be provided with system mimic, process flow status, faults, alarm
and status of Motorized Valves, Pump. It shall be compatible with standard
communication protocols like RS485, RS232, Ethernet connection, etc.
Control Panel enclosure shall be weatherproof and with lock & key
arrangement.

c) Ball Strainer:
Ball Strainer shall be installed on condenser water outlet line. Material of
Construction of Ball Strainer shall be Mild Steel of IS2602 Grade B as per
pipe size, screen inside strainer shall be made of SS 304 perforated sheet.
Counter Flanges shall be provided with Ball Strainer. Ball Strainer shall be
treated with sandblasting then primer and final paint with epoxy paint. The
screen shall be approachable easily for disowning during maintenance.
Fasteners shall be of high-tension grade.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 518

A differential pressure measuring system shall be provided for each ball

strainer.

d) Ball Accumulator
Ball Accumulator shall be provided for each condenser and with a view
glass for checking of sponge balls during injection, collection, and standby
mode of the cycle. View glass shall be accessible to change sponge balls.
Material of Construction of Ball Accumulator shall be Mild Steel of 152302
Grade B, as per pipe size and screen inside Ball Accumulator shall be
made of SS 304 perforated sheet. Ball Accumulator shall be treated with
sandblasting, then primer and final paint with epoxy paint. Fasteners shall
be of high-tension grade.

e) Complete Pipework, including interconnection piping, Manual Valve,

Motorized Valves, Distributors, Injection & collection nozzle, support
installation materials shall be used.

f) Main Power Supply for OLCTCS shall be provided near to the system.
Set of mandatory spares shall be provided.

8.11 Mechanical Ventilation & Pressurisation

In addition to controlling the inside temperature, it is necessary to controlthe
concentration limit of various pollutants. This is done by providing
DemandControl Ventilation System using sensors for detecting the
concentrationandvaryingthe FreshAirSupply through motorizeddampers.
The design shall conform to NBC-2016.
8.11.1 Basement Ventilation
The following system components shall be provided to extract heat and
smoke from the basement in normal as well as in fire conditions. The scope
of ductless ventilation system includes supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of Jet fans using CFD analysis. The type, size & quantity of
jet fans shall be finalized through CFD analysis software.

I. JET Fans
II. Co Sensors
III. Control Panel with Programmable logic control
IV. CFD analysis.

8.11.2 Jet Fans

a) Jet fans shall be completely assembled at factory. Each jet fan shall be
complete with motor, motor mount, silencers at inlet and outlet discharge,
terminal box. Mounting brackets shall be provided with vibration isolation
type suspension arrangement.

b) Casing of Jet fans shall be constructed of heavy gauge sheet. Fan casing
and motor mount shall be of welded steel construction. Casing shall be
hot dip galvanized to protect against corrosion. Noise level from Jet fan
shall not exceed 52 dB(A) at 1 m distance. Silencers Casing should be
rolled, pre‐galvanized sheet steel with spun end rings incorporating
tapped inserts for fixing.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 519

c) Impeller of Jet fans shall be constructed from die cast aluminum. Profiles
of impeller blade should be of aero foil type to have high efficiency and
low noise levels. Aero foil Fan impellers shall have a unique aerodynamic
section blade to optimize the efficiency of performance and minimize the
generation of noise. Impeller must be statically and dynamically balanced
as per ISO 1940 grade 6.3. Jet fans shall have Inlet cone made of
Galvanized steel. Protection Guard should provide at inlet side of Jet fan.

d) Temperature Rating -The complete fan assembly with its casing, impeller
and motor shall be tested as per EN/UL for 300°C for 2 Hrs. operation.
The fan shall have a non-overloading characteristic. The peak power
inputs occur within range of normal operating pressures and is always
exceeded by motor rating.

e) Fan Motor shall be energy efficient, squirrel cage, thermally enclosed,

Class H insulation, continuous duty, IE3 rated, Dahlander winding for
dual speed applications suitable for 415± 10% V, 3 Ph, 50Hz, AC power
supply.

f) Terminal Box- Motor conduit box shall be mounted on exterior of fan

casing, and lead wires from the motor to the conduit box shall be
protected from the air stream by enclosing in a flexible metal conduit. It
shall be sealed with fire rated sealant. Absorbent material used should
be of acoustic grade mineral fiber with a layer of erosion resistant facing
and must be further protected by a sheet of pre-galvanized perforated
steel. Minimum length of silencers should be 900mm.
8.11.3 Mounting Brackets-Jet fans shall be supplied with mounting brackets for
ceiling suspension.

8.11.4 CFD Analysis-

CFD (Computer Fluid Dynamics) is a dynamic simulation of the

behavior/development of smoke, air speed, visibility and others, given
certain conditions (airflows, temperatures, etc.). Computational fluid
dynamics (CFD) can simultaneously predict airflow, heat transfer and
contaminant transport in and around buildings. A CFD model is built upon
fundamental physical equations of fluid flow and energy transfer. The
technique is capable of providing time dependent and as well as steady
state solutions to the coupled differential equations that govern fluid flows.

8.11.5 Carbon Monoxide Analog Transmitter

Analog transmitter for monitoring of gases and vapors in the ambient air.
The μ-Guard analog transmitter series MA is a reliable gas detector.

8.12 Centrifugal Fan:

The scope of this section comprises the supply, erection, testing and
commissioning of fans conforming to this specification.

8.12.1 Centrifugal exhaust air fan:

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 520

a) Type:
Centrifugal fans shall be of double-width, double-inlet construction, with
bearing on both sides, complete with access door, squirrel-cage induction
motor, IE3 rated, V-belt drive, belt guard etc.The efficiency of fans at
operating conditions should be more than 75%.

b) Housing:
Housing shall be constructed of 14-gauge sheet steel welded construction.
It shall be rigidly reinforced and supported by structural angles. Split casing
shall be provided on larger sizes of fans, however neoprene/asbestos
packing shall be provided throughout split joints to make it air tight. 18-
gauge galvanized wire mesh inlet guards of 5 cm sieves shall be provided
on both inlets. Housing shall be provided with standard clean out door with
handles and neoprene gasket. Rotation arrow shall be clearly marked on
the housing.

c) Fan wheel:
Fan wheel shall be of GSS backward – curved non-overloading type
utilizing hollow sectioned aerodynamically shaped aero foil blades. Fan
wheel and housing shall be statically and dynamically balanced. For Fans
up to 450 mm dia., fan outlet velocity not exceed 1450 rpm. For Fans
above 450 mm dia., the outlet velocity shall not exceed 610 meter/minute.
High static pressure fan speed shall be as per manufacturer.
d) Shaft & Bearings.
Shaft shall be constructed of steel, turned, ground and polished. Bearings
shall be of the sleeve/ ball bearing type mounted directly on the fan
housing. Bearings shall be especially designed for quiet operation and
shall be of the self-aligning, oil/grease pack pillow block type.

e) Motor & Drive

Fan motor shall be TEFC, Squirrel cage, induction motor, IE3 rated, with
IP-55 protection and class 'B' or equivalent insulation as per particular
application. Motor shall be suitable for 415 10% volts, 3 phase, 50 cycles,
and A.C. supply. Motor shall be of continuous duty and specially designed
for quiet operation and motor speed shall not exceed 1450 rpm. Motor
nameplate horsepower shall exceed brake horsepower by a minimum of
10%. The fan and motor combination selected for the particular required
performance shall be of the most efficient (smallest horse power), so that
the sound level is lowest. Flexible coupling with guard shall be provided if
fan- motor arrangement is direct drive type. The No. of belts shall not be
less than 2. `V' belts and pulleys shall be provided if fan-motor
arrangement is variable drive type. Belt guard with vent shall be provided
for belt protection and heat dissipation.

f) Vibration Isolation:
M.S. base shall be provided for both fan and motor, built as an integral
part, and shall be mounted on a concrete foundation through spring
isolators. The concrete foundation shall be at least 150 mm above the
finished floor level.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 521

8.13 Axial Flow Fans

a) Casing shall be constructed of heavy gauge sheet steel. Casing shall be
provided with hinged door enabling easy replacement of wheel, shaft and
bearings. A small inspection door with handle and neoprene gasket shall
also be provided. Casing shall have flanged connection on both ends for
ducted applications. Support brackets for ceiling suspension shall be
welded to the casing for connection to hanger bolts.

b) Straightening vanes shall be aerodynamically designed for maximum

efficiency by converting velocity pressure to static pressure potential and
minimizing turbulence.

c) Rotor hub and blades shall be of cast aluminium, or cast steel

construction. Blades shall be die-formed aerofoil shaped for maximum
efficiency and shall vary in twist and width from hub to tip to effect equal
air distribution along the blade length. Fan blade mounting on the hub
shall be statically and dynamically balanced. Extended grease leads for
external lubrication shall be provided.

d) Motor shall be of 3 phase squirrel-cage totally enclosed, fan cooled type,

IE3 rated. The speed of fan shall not exceed 1000 RPM for fans with
impeller diameter above 450 mm, and 1450 RPM for fans with impeller
diameter of 450 mm and less.

e) Drive:
I. For Duct/Wall Mounted Fan:
For duct/wall mounted fans the impeller shall be mounted directly on the
motor. Drive unit and impeller shall be totally enclosed inside the duct.

II. For Floor/Ceiling Mounted Fan:

The fan shall be provided with belt drive and adjustable motor sheave,
standard sheet steel belt guard with vented front for heat dissipation.
Belt shall be of the oil resistant type.

f) Vibration Isolation
Base shall be provided for each fan. Base for both fan and motor shall be
built as an integral part and shall be mounted on a concrete foundation
through cushy foot vibration isolators. The concrete foundations shall be at
least 15 cm above the finished floor level and shall be further isolated from
the structural floor through 5 cm. thick layers of sand all around, topped with
bitumen. In case ceiling hung fan within the ceiling shall be provided with
Vibration Isolation Suspension (VIS) in each string.

8.14 Propeller Fans

a) Propeller fans shall be direct-driven, three or four blade type, mounted

on a steel mounting plate with orifice ring.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 522

b) Mounting plate shall be of heavy gauge sheet steel construction,

streamlined venturi inlet (reversed) for supply applications. The size shall
suit the fan size.

c) Fan blades shall be constructed of aluminium or steel. Fan hub shall be

of heavy welded steel construction with blades bolted to the hub. Fan
blades and hub assembly shall be statically and dynamically balanced at
the factory.

d) Motor shall be standard single phase, permanent split capacitor or

shaded pole for small sizes, totally enclosed with pre lubricated sleeves
or ball bearings, designed for quiet operation with a maximum speed of
1450 RPM, IE3 rated. Motors for larger fans shall be suitable for 415 +
10% volts, 50 cycles, 3 phase, power supply. Motors shall be suitable for
either horizontal or vertical services

e) The following accessories may be required and provided with propeller

fans

I. Wire guard on inlet side and bird screen at the outlet.

II. Gravity operated louver shutters built into a steel frame.
III. Regulators for controlling fan speed for single phase fan motors.

8.15 Roof Mounted Fans

a) Roof mounted fans shall be propeller type or centrifugal fans, direct

driven or belt driven, complete with motor drive and housing with weather-
proof cowl.

b) Housing shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel sheet. The housing

shall have adjustable flange to facilitate installation and shall be
especially adapted to receive fan, motor, and drive. The housing shall
have a low silhouette. For belt driven units, motor shall be installed in
ventilated water proof housing outside the air stream. The discharge cowl
shall be hinged along one edge for easy access to motor and drive for
inspection and maintenance. The entire assembly shall be weatherproof
and raised from the roof terrace sufficiently to prevent down flow of rain
water accumulated on the terrace. Galvanized steel mesh bird screen
shall be provided on all discharge cowls around the outlet areas.

c) Fans shall be backwardly inclined centrifugal wheel or propeller type as

required, designed for maximum efficiency, minimum turbulence and
quiet operation. Fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced.

d) Single phase motor shall be shaded pole with permanently lubricate

sleeve bearing, or split capacitor type with permanently lubricated sleeve
or ball bearings, designed for quiet operation. Bearing shall be designed
for vertical mounting. Motor name plate horsepower shall be such that
the motor shall not be overloaded in the entire range of rated speed.
Motor and fan assembly shall be easily removable. Motor's power supply
characteristic and maximum speed shall be as specified for propeller

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 523

fans.

e) Fan bearings shall be of heavy duty, self-aligning sleeve/ball bearing

designed for thrust load and sealed for grease retention.

f) Backdraft damper shall be provided where specified. Roof mounted fan

shall be equipped with rattle-free backdraft damper to prevent air from re-
entering the fan when fan is not in operation, thus sealing completely in
closed position. Damper shall be shatterproof.

8.16 Inline Fan Unit:

a) The Inline ventilation fans shall be designed for space saving / low noise
generation. Inline fans shall preferably be single skin with swing out
motors; these fans shall be complete with casing and impeller. Direction
of discharge and rotation position shall be as per the job requirement and
shall be marked on the fan assembly. Brief specifications for the fans are
as under.

b) The fan shall be complete with casing, motor and impeller. Housing Shall
be of GSS powder coated design. The duct connections at the inlet and
discharge side of the fan shall be in accordance with the manufacturer
standards to avoid transmission of vibrations, if any, to the ducting.
Impeller Fan shall have Aluminum impeller with backward curved blades
suitable for lowest sound power level. Impeller shall be statically and
dynamically balanced. Necessary acoustic insulation required to bring
down the noise as per standards shall be carried out if required.The
product shall be supplied with factory insulated design.

c) Ball Bearings Shall be completely maintenance free and shall be used in

any mounting position at maximum indicated temperature.

d) Fan motor Fans shall be energy efficient, IE3 type have external rotor
motor or IEC standard motor supplied with built-in thermal contacts. At
the critical high temperature point the thermal contact shall open and
break the power supply of the Fan. Fan motor shall be of insulation class
F and protection class IP54.Drive of the fans shall be direct driven.

e) Performance Data: All fans shall be selected for the lowest operating
noise power levels. Capacity ratings, power consumption with operating
points indicated shall be submitted and verified at the time of testing and
commissioning of the installation. All technical data of fans should be as
per AMCA accredited. High temp fans should have valid with EN / UL
Certification and rated for 300°C for 2 hrs.

f) Testing Capacity of all fans shall be measured by an anemometer.

Measured air flow capacities shall confirm to specified capacities and
quoted ratings. Power consumption shall be computed from
measurements of incoming voltage and input current.

8.17 Kitchens shall be provided with ventilation. The system shall consist of air
washer units, air distribution system and grilles. Cool and washed air shall

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 524

be directly discharged in working areas. All kitchens shall be conditioned by

maintaining indoor temperature less than of 34 °C at hood area and
remaining area shall be maintained at temperature less than 30 °C. Kitchen
hoods over cooking area of main kitchens shall be compensating type. All
kitchen hoods shall be provided with makeup air @ 80%. Balance air shall
be through kitchen air washer & adjoining spaces. However, cooking areas
shall be fully exhausted with Air cleaning unit (dry type Scrubbers). The
exhaust shall be collected from the kitchen hoods and shall be connected
to Ecological Unit (ECU) as per requirement of local pollution board. Greasy
air shall pass through various sections of ECU and clean air shall be
exhausted outdoor at service floor terrace level. Kitchens shall be
maintained at negative pressure to prevent spread of food smells to other
areas.

8.17.1 Air Cleaning Units for Kitchen Hood Exhaust – Dry Type Scrubbers:
Unit to be constructed in modular construction by using minimum 16G GSS.
All the welds and the finished area of welds are treated with corrosion & rust
inhibiting coating to assure long life cabinet to be finished & completed with
a durable industrial grade semi glass, backed on enamel not less than 3 mm
thick. All doors shall be provided withgasket to prevent air & water leakage.

8.17.2 Sections
Pre Filter: - Metal mesh or perforated plate type pre filter to capture
oversize objects and agglomerated mists.
8.17.3 Electrostatic Air Cleaner Module

Electrostatic Air cleaners section capable to remove extremely small

particulate. The working of electrostatic air cleaner should be as under.
“As air enters filter, the particles pass through a high intensity electrical field
that imparts an electrical change to the particles and the charged particles
shall be up to 10 microns”
The charged particles pass through a series of alternately charged collector
plates. The particles should be repelled by plate with the same polarity and
attracted to plates with opposite polarity.
Ionizing-Collecting Cells: Ionizing-Collecting cell(s) shall be of one-piece
construction 13.38” (340mm) deep in direction of airflow. All support
framing, end plates and ionizer ground electrodes shall be 0.090 inch
(2.2mm) thick aluminum. Both repelling and collector plates shall be 0.032
inch (0.8mm) thick aluminum alloy material rigidly retained in place with
tubular spacers and tie rods. Each plate shall be corrugated, perpendicular
to airflow direction. Spacing between plates shall be no less than 0.318 inch
(8mm). Each cell shall weigh at least 14 kg with at least 8 ionizing wires.

8.17.4 Ionizer
Ionizing electrodes / wires shall be of tungsten material, rigidly supported
both vertically and laterally. Ionizing electrode to ground electrode spacing
shall be 1.0" (25mm). High voltage support insulators shall be of Teflon
material, glazed to enhance dielectric strength and retard tracking.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 525

8.17.5 Power Supply

Power supplies shall be 100% solid state, operate on 240 VAC, 50 HZ,
single Phase input and provide a dual high voltage output of 12 to 13 KV
DC for the ionizer and 6.0 to 6.5 KVDC for the collector in normal operation
conditions. Current output at the high tension shall be 12mA. A maximum
power output for the solid-state power supply shall be 120 watts to maintain
the specified collection efficiency. Integrally mounted Electrical interlocks
shall be provided to prevent access to the high voltage components without
first interrupting the primary input power. The power supply shall operate
over a temperature range of 0o C- 60oC, be overloaded self-protecting and
Provide LED lights indicating the performance status of the
ionizing/collecting cell. High voltage output components in the power supply
shall be sealed with epoxy for moisture resistance.

8.17.6 Performance Indicator Lights

There shall be 2 LED lights (Green & Red) installed on the access door
ofthe unit to indicate the status of the air cleaning system. Control Panel
should be as a part of Main MCC panel.

8.17.7 Blower Section

Blower section should be equipped with heavy duty energy efficient plug
type fans along with VFD driven fan motor. The fan motor should be direct
mounted type with extended shaft. The motor should be out of Air stream
by creating compartment in between Plug Type fan & motor. The
compartment where motor is installed should be provided with louvers for
Ventilation.

8.18 Water Plumbing Work

The scope of this section comprises the supply and laying of pipes, pipe
fittings and valves, testing and balancing of all water and refrigerant piping
required for the complete installation. All piping inclusive of fittings and
valves shall follow the applicable Indian Standards.

8.18.1 Plumbing Design

Plumbing design to be done by the Air-conditioning contractor shall conform

to the following: -

a) Water velocity in pipes shall not exceed 2.5 m/sec. Butterfly/ Ball valves
shall be provided at

i. suction and delivery sides of pumps.

ii. Inlet and outlet of each condenser, chiller, cooling tower, hot water
generator.
iii. all drain connections from equipment.
iv. Inlet & outlet of every heat exchanger coil, namely for AHUs, FCUs,
convector etc.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 526

b) Non return valve shall be provided at the delivery of each pump. This
shall be of swing type.

c) Balancing valve shall be provided at the outlet side of chiller, condenser,

heating and cooling coils to regulate the maximum flow rate up to value
preset as desired.

d) Balancing valves shall be provided, where specified, for AHUs to regulate

the maximum flow rate up to a value preset as desired. A mercury
manometer shall be supplied with every 10 nos. or part thereof of
balancing valves, whether or not specifically indicated in the tender
specifications.

e) Air valves shall be provided at all high points in the piping system for
venting with a size of 25 mm for pipes up to 100 mm and 40 mm for larger
pipes.

f) Plumbing drawings showing the sizes of valves, layout and other details
shall be prepared and shall be got approved from the Engineer-in-Charge
before the execution of the plumbing work.

8.18.2 Pipe Materials

Pipes shall be of the following materials:

I. Mild steel medium class (Black steel) tube conforming to IS: 1239 for
sizes up to 150 mm.
II. Welded black steel pipe, class 2, conforming to IS: 3589, for sizes
greater than 150 mm. These pipes shall be factory rolled & fabricated
from minimum 6mm thick M.S. Sheet for pipes up to 350mm dia. &
from minimum 7mm thick M.S. sheet for pipes of 400mm dia. & above.

8.18.3 Pipe Joints

Seismic considerations shall be taken into account while planning joint

details. Joints in black steel pipes shall be of any of the following types.

a) Screwed joints and union joints screwed to pipes, up to 25 mm size.

b) Butt welded joints for pipe sizes above 25mm. Electric welding shall
be used for sizes 100mm and above.

c) Flanges joints with flanges as per IS: 6392 for all sizes. Flanges may
be steel welded neck type or slip-on type welded to pipe, or
alternatively screwed type.
d) Flexible coupling V groove joints.

e) Flexible connections shall be provided at the pumps, and other

machine which require following specifications.

I. The Flexible connections shall be flanged type expansion joint.

Flanges shall be non-compressible and mechanically strong type

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 527

and the Neoprene rubber shall be provided in between the flange

ends.
II. The connections shall work for a temperature range of minus 10°C
to 70°C.
III. The length and working pressure of bellows shall be as per
manufacturer standards.
IV. Connections shall be provided with control rods to control the
excessive elongation or compression of piping systems.
V. these shall be capable to withstand torsional movement up to 3o (3
degree) without damage.

8.18.4 Pre-Insulated Chilled Water Pipes

a) The pipe shall be MS ERW as specified in the Piping Section.

b) The pipe insulation shall be polyurethane foam with minimum density of

36 kg/cu m, 90% minimum closed cell content, minimum compressive
strength of 2.7 kg/cm2, and initial thermal conductivity of 0.02 W-m/K.
The insulation shall completely fill the annular space between the service
pipe and jacket and shall be bonded to both the service pipe & jacket.

c) The cladding shall be spirally woundAluminium for pipes installed on

surface.

d) For pipes installed on surface, the insulation (PUF) shall be provided with
thickness of cladding as per NBC / CPWD Specifications.

I. Underground systems shall be buried in a trench with the top of the

pipe is not less than 600 mm deep from the ground level& not less
than 450mm wider than the combined OD of all piping systems. A
minimum thickness of 600mm of compacted backfill over the top of
the pipe is desirable.
II. Trench bottom shall have a minimum of 150mm of sand, pea gravel
or specified backfill material, consolidated to suit operating weight
& to act as a cushion for the piping.
III. For pipes buried in ground, outer protective insulation jacket shall
be seamless, extruded, black, UV resistant, high-density
polyethylene (HDPE).
IV. For leak identification purpose, 2 wire diagnostic wiring shall also
be provided.
V. Fitting can be fabricated at site over the carrier pipe and correct
quantity of PUF shall be poured manually.
VI. Field joints insulation shall consist of PUF poured manually in a site-
fabricated GI cladding fixed around the joint.
VII. For pipes buried in ground, HDPE jacket and PUFshallbeProvided.

8.18.5 Pipe Sizes

Pipe sizes shall be as required for the individual fluid flows. Pipe size design
along with necessary documents shall be submitted by the contractor for
approval of Engineer-In- Charge.

8.18.6 Chilled Water & Condenser Water Piping:

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 528

a) All chilled water pipes and cooling tower water pipes are pre insulated
and all fittings shall be M.S. Class ‘C’ (Heavy Class) conforming to
relevant IS Code 1239. Factory rolled pipes upto 300 mm diameter,The
wall thickness shall be 5.0 mm

b) All jointing in the pipe system shall generally be by welding, unless

otherwise mentioned, or directed at site. All welding shall be done by
qualified welders and shall strictly conform to IS Code of practice for
manual metal arc welding of Mild Steel. Butt weld, upon approval of
welding joints, the concerned welder shall be allowed to carry further
welding of the pipes. Rest of the welds shall have 100% visual inspection.
Before welding of pipes, make proper ‘V’ notch at the joints by chamfering
the ends of pipe. All electrodes shall be selected to match the mechanical
and chemical properties of the parent material. The welding rods shall be
selected as per AWS-E-7018 or Equivalent BIS code.

c) All pipes shall be thoroughly cleaned and given one primary coat of red
oxide paint before being installed. All welded piping shall be subjected to
the approval at site.
d) Fittings shall be malleable casting of pressure rating suitable for the
piping system. Fittings used on welded piping shall be of the weldable
type.

e) Tee-off connections shall be through equal or reducing tees, otherwise,

ferrules welded to the main pipe shall be used. Drilling and tapping of the
walls of the main pipe shall not be resorted to.

8.18.7 Valves:
a) Valves shall have non-rising spindles unless otherwise specified and
shall be suitable for not less than 10-kg/cm2 gauge working pressure.
Tail piece shall be used wherever required. Butterfly valves shall perform
the function of isolation of rotating equipment and Heat exchangers.

b) Butterfly valves shall have cast iron body with black nitrile rubber seat.
All butterfly valves shall be provided with locking devices. Valves above
200 mm dia. shall be gear driven.

c) Balancing valves shall be provided at chiller, AHU outlet lines. The valves
shall have built-in pressure drop measuring facility to compute flow rate
across the valves. Flanges shall be of approved make. The supply of
flanges shall also include supply of bolts and nuts and suitable asbestos
fiber / rubber insertion gaskets (minimum 3 mm thick).

d) Non return valves shall be dual plate check valves provided, conforming
to relevant Codes.

e) The spring and hinge/stop pin shall be SS304 and bearing PTFE
material. Valves shall be suitable for not less than 10 Kg/cm2 gauge
working pressure.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 529

f) Materials:

i) The material of butter fly valves shall be as under:

Body-Castiron
Disc-Cast Bronze or Stainless steel
Seat-Either integral or Nitrile rubber
O-ring-Nitrile/Silicon

ii) Balancing valve shall be of cast iron flanged construction with

EPDM/ SG iron with epoxy coated disc with built in pressure drop
measuring facility (pressure test cocks) to compute flow rate across
the valve. The test cocks shall be long enough to protrude out of
pipe insulation.

iii) Non return valves shall be of gun metal construction up to 65 mm,

the metal conforming to class 2 of IS: 778. For 75 mm and above,
the valve shall be of bronze or gun metal, body being of cast iron.
While screwed or flanged ends may be provided up to 65 mm,
flanged ends shall be provided for larger sizes.

iv) Air valves shall be of gunmetal body.

8.18.8 Strainers

a) 'Y' strainers shall be provided on the inlet side of each air-handling unit
and pump in chilled water and condenser water circuit.

b) Pot strainers, shall be provided in return water headers, for chilled water
and condenser water.

c) Filtration area of Y-strainer shall be minimum four times the connecting

pipe size. Strainers shall have a removable bronze/ stainless steel
minimum 1mm thick screen with 3 mm perforations and permanent
magnet.
d) Strainers shall be provided with equal size isolating gate valves on either
side so that the strainers may be cleaned without draining the system.
8.18.9 Instruments

a) Pressure gauge of appropriate range and 150 mm. dial size shall be
provided at the following locations.
i. Supply and returnofall heatexchange equipment.
ii. Suction anddischargeof allpumpsets.
b) Direct reading industrial type thermometer of appropriate range shall be
provided at the inlet and outlet of all heat exchange equipment. The
thermometers shall be installed in separate wells.

c) Appropriate number of additional sockets shall be provided for the

installationofpressure& temperaturetransducers for,.

8.18.10 Expansion tanks

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 530

a) Expansion tanks for chilled water and hot water shall be of M.S.
construction and of adequate capacity, to contain 200% of the maximum
expansion likely to take place in the system. The tank shall be insulated
and be complete with float valve, gauge glass, drain, overflow and make
up connections, with gate valves and vent piping wherever required.

b) The piping shall be enlarged at the connection to the expansion tank to

permit entrained air to separate and to be vented through the tank. The
expansion tank should be located at the pump suction side at the highest
point of the system.

c) Valves, strainers and traps must be omitted from the expansion line since
these may be accidentally turned off or become plugged.

d) Pressurized expansion tank with air separator, can be used where the
conventional type expansion tank is not feasible to be provided.

8.18.11 Installation

a) Wherever reducers are to be made in horizontal runs, eccentric reducers

shall be used if the piping is to drain freely, in other locations, concentric
reducers may be used.

b) Open ends of piping shall be blocked as soon as the pipe is installed to

avoid entrance of foreign matter.

c) All pipes using screwed fittings shall be accurately cut to the required size
and threaded in accordance with IS: 554 and burs removed before laying.

d) Piping installation shall be supported on or suspended from structure

adequately. The Contractor shall design all brackets, saddles, clamps,
hangers etc. and shall be responsible for their structure integrity.

e) Pipe supports, preferably floor mounted shall be of steel, adjustable for

height, prime-coated with zinc chromate paint and finish-coated gray.
Spacing of pipe supports shall not be more than that specified below: -

Nominal Pipe size (mm) Spacing (Meters)

12 and 15 1.25

20 and 25 2.00

32, 40, 50 and 65 2.50

80, 100 and 125 2.50

150 and above 3.00

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 531

f) Extra supports shall be provided at the bends and at heavy fittings like
valves to avoid undue stress on the pipes. Pipe hangers shall be fixed on
walls and ceiling by means of metallic or rawl plugs or approved shear
fasteners.

g) Insulated piping shall be supported in such a manner as not to put undue

pressure on the insulation.

h) Anti-vibration pads, springs or liners of resilient and non-deteriorating,

material shall be provided at each support, so as to prevent transmission
of vibration through the supports.

i) Pipe sleeves atleast 3mm thick, diameter larger than the pipe by at least
50/100 mm shall be provided wherever pipes pass through walls and the
annular spaces shall be filled with felt and finished with retaining rings.

j) Vertical risers shall be parallel to walls and column lines and shall be
straight and plumb. Risers passing from floor to floor shall be supported
at each floor by clamps or collars attached to pipe with a 12 mm thick
rubber pad or any other resilient material as approved by the Engineer- in-
charge.

k) The space in the floor cut outs around the pipe work (after insulation
work) shall be closed using cement concrete (1:2:4 mix) or steel sheet,
from the fire safety considerations, taking care to see that a small annular
space is left around the pipes to prevent transmission of vibration to the
structure.Riser shall have suitable supports at the lowest point.

l) Underground systems shall be buried in a trench with the top of the pipe
is not less than 600 mm deep from the ground level & not less than
450mm wider than the combined OD of all piping systems. A minimum
thickness of 600mm of compacted backfill over the top of the pipe is
desirable.

m) Trench bottom shall have a minimum of 150mm of sand, pea gravel or

specified backfill material, consolidated to suit operating weight & to act
as a cushion for the piping.

n) All pipes and their steel supports shall be thoroughly cleaned and given
one primer coat of Zinc chromate before being installed.

o) After all the water piping has been installed, pressure tested as
mentioned in these specifications, all exposed piping in the plant room
shall be given two finish coats of paint, approved by the Engineer-in-
Charge. Similar painting work shall be done over insulated pipe work,
valves etc. The direction of flow of fluid in the pipes shall be indicated
with identifying arrows.

p) 3 mm gasket shall be used for flanged joints.Cut-outs in floor slabs shall

be sealed with cement concrete or steel plate after the plumbing work is
done, from the fire safety point of view.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 532

8.18.12 Pressure testing

a) All piping shall be tested to hydrostatic test pressure of at least one and
a half times the maximum operating pressure, but not less than 10
kg./sq.cm. for a period not less than 24 hours. All leaks and defects in
joints revealed during the testing shall be rectified to the satisfaction of
the Engineer-in-Charge.
b) It shall be made sure that proper noiseless circulation is achieved through
all the coils and other heat exchange equipment in the system. If proper
circulation is not achieved due to air-bound connections, the contractor
shall rectify the defective connections. He shall bear all the expenses for
carrying out the above rectification, including the tearing up and
refinishing of floors, walls, etc. as required.

c) Insulation shall be applied to piping only after the completion of the

pressure testing to the satisfaction of the Engineer-in-charge.

d) Pressure gauges may be capped off during pressure testing of the

installation.

8.18.13 Balancing
a) After completion of the installation, all water system shall be adjusted
and balanced to first minimize throttling losses; then the pump impeller
shall be trimmed or pump speed shall be adjusted to meet design flow
conditions. Exceptions to above:

I. Where Variable frequency Drives are used as starter

&capacitycontrol.
II. Impellers need not to be trimmed nor pump speed adjusted
forpumpswithpumpmotorsof7.5kW(10hp)orless.
III. Impellers need not to be trimmed when throttling results in
nogreater than 5% of the nameplate horsepower drawn, or 2.2
kW(3hp),whicheverisgreater.
b) Automatic control valves (Pressure Independent Balancing cum Control
Valve) and three-way diverting valves shall be set for full flow condition
during balancing procedure. Water circuit shall be adjusted by balancing
cocks provided for balancing. These shall be permanently marked after
the balancing is completed so that they can be restored to their correct
positions, if disturbed.

8.18.14 General Requirements

a) The pipe assembly shall be suitable for the service and pressure it
serves. The assembly shall be totally leak proof and easy for
maintenance.

b) Necessary flanged joints and control valves shall be incorporated in

pipe for easy maintenance, replacement and isolation of section of
pipes. The flanged joints shall be 3 mm neoprene gasket suitable for
the pressure and temperature of the fluid.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 533

c) The pipes shall be laid in lines and levels. The vertical risers shall be
properly secured to the structure with necessary Clamps and Support
Channels and shall be supported at the base, which shall withstand the
total weight of the pipe and fluid contained. The horizontal runners shall
be hung from the ceiling using pipe hangers or laid on support channels.

d) Additional supports shall be provided at the assembly of valves and

control accessories, change in direction of pipes etc.

e) All piping work shall be provided with protective coating.

i. The pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned internally and externally
during the fabrication, assembling and completion, of the entire
piping work using compressed air, clean water etc.

ii. All field fabricated piping shall be cleaned at the completion of

fabrication. Care shall be taken to see that all burrs, welding icicles
and weld spatter are removed by reaming, chipping, filling sanding
or other suitable means.

iii. All foreign materials such as cement, mortar sand, heavy oil and
loose scale shall be removed from the interior of pipe by thoroughly
flushing with water.

1) Above Ground Piping

i. All piping shall be erected in accordance with these specifications
so as to conform with the applicable codes and engineering design.
Arrangement drawing shall show general location and indicate
dimensions, location of valves, fittings etc. Special attention shall be
given in the erection of piping to prevent damage and ensure the
continued cleanliness of such piping. All flanged joints shall be fitted
up so that the gasket contact faces uniformly on the gasket, and
then made up with relatively uniform bolt stress. The pipes crossing
roads, pavements etc., shall be taken through Hume pipe.

ii. Slopes of piping shall be maintained. Valve drains shall be provided

at all low points where the liquid may be trapped. All high points
shall have valve vents or plugged connections.

8.18.15 Guidelines For Corrosion Protection of Over Ground and UG piping.

The pipe assembly shall be provided with outer coating to prevent corrosion.
The pipe laid above ground shall be provided with Two coats of paint of
approved colour over Zinc chromate primer for M.S pipe. Two coats of paint
of approved colour for G.I piping.
I. Pipe laid underground or concealed in building structure shall be
provided with two coats of bitumen paint and wrapped with fiber glass
tissue.

II. All carbon steel pipes and pipe fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned of
oil and grease.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 534

8.18.16 Cold water and drain piping.

a) All pipes to be used for cold water (makeup) drain, condensate drain
and fittings shall be MS class ‘C’ class conforming to relevant BIS
Codes.

b) All jointing in the pipe system shall be by screwed / welded joints & / or
by screwed flanges using rubber insertion gaskets. Pipe threads and
flanges shall be as per relevant BIS Codes.

c) Fittings shall be galvanized steel ‘C’class malleable casting of pressure

rating suitable for the piping system. Flanges shall be of approved
make. Supply of flanges shall include bolts, nuts, and gaskets as
required. Sufficient number of flanges and unions shall be provided for
future cleaning and servicing of piping. Tee-off connection shall be
through equal or reducing tees. All equipment and valve connections or
connections to any other mating pipes shall be through flanges required
for the mating connections.

d) BF valves, globe valves, check valves and strainers shall be similar to

those specified for chilled water piping.

8.19 Ducts

8.19.1 All ducts shall be factory fabricated from Aluminium sheets conforming to
IS:737.
a) Design parameter for Duct design shall be:

I.Maximum flow velocity in ducts for air conditioning

Main Duct : 400 m/ min.
II. Branch duct : 250 m/ min.
III. Maximum velocity at supply air grilles
/ diffusers : 150 m/min.
IV. Maximum friction in duct : 1 centimeter water gauge
/100 m run
V. Maximum flow velocity in ducts for
Ventilation :Value of all above parameters
be kept at 1.5 times of above
values.

b) The thickness of sheets for fabrication of rectangular ductwork shall be

as under. The thickness required corresponding to the longest side of the
rectangular section shall be applicable for all the four sides of
theductwork.

Longestside(mm) Minimum sheetthickness in mm

ForAluminium
750mmandbelow 0.80
751mmto1500mm 1.00
1501mmto2250 mm 1.50

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 535

2251mm&above 1.80

c) All sheet metal connections, partitions and plenums required for flow of
air through the filters, fans etc. shall be at least 1.8 mm thick aluminium
sheet and shall be stiffened with 25 mm x 25 mm x 3 mm angle iron
braces.

8.19.2 Associated Items

a) Supply/ return air outlets, F.A. grilles and accessories shall be

constructed from extruded aluminium sections.

b) Flanges for matching duct sections, stiffening angles (braces) and

supporting angles shall be of rolled steel sections.

c) Hanger rods shall be of mild steel and of at least 10 mm dia. for ducts
upto 2250 mm size, and 12 mm dia for larger sizes.

d) All nuts, bolts and washers shall be zinc plated steel. All rivets shall be
galvanised or shall be made of magnesium - aluminium alloy. Self-
tapping screws shall not be used.

8.19.3 Construction

a) Ducts
I. Factory Fabricated ducts shall be as per IS: 655 "Specifications
for metal air ducts".
II. The interior surfaces of the ducting shall be smooth.

III. All the ducts up to 600 mm longest side shall be cross broken
between flanges by a single continuous breaking. Ducts of size
600 mm and above shall be cross broken by single continuous
breaking between flanges and bracings. Alternatively, beading at
300 mm centres for ducts upto 600 mm longest side, and 300 mm
centres for ducts above 600 mm size shall be provided for
stiffening.

IV. As far as possible, long radius elbows and gradual changes in

shape shall be used to maintain uniform velocity accompanied by
decreased turbulence, lower resistance and minimum noise. The
ratio of the size of the duct to the radius of the elbow shall normally
be not less than 1:1.5.

V. Flanged joints shall be used at intervals not exceeding 2500 mm.

Flanges shall be welded at corners first and then riveted to the
duct.

VI. Stiffening angles shall be fixed to the sides of the ducts by riveting
at 1.25 meters from joints for ducts of size 600 mm to 1500 mm,
and 0.6 mm from joints for ducts of size larger than 1500 mm.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 536

Bracings for ducts larger than 1500 mm can alternatively be by

diagonal angles.

VII. Plenums for filters shall be complete with suitable access door of
size 450 mm x 450 mm.

VIII. All factory fabricated duct shall be supplied in L sections, the

length of any piece shall not be more than 1800 mm for duct with
longest side of cross section as 600 mm.

b) Air Outlet and Inlets (Supply and Return)

I. All air outlets and intakes shall be made of extruded aluminium

sections & shall present a neat appearance and shall be rigid with
mechanical joints.

II. Square and rectangular wall outlets shall have a flanged frame
with the outside edges returned or curved 5 to 7 mm and fitted with
a suitable flexible gasket between the concealed face of the
flanges and the finished wall face. The core of supply air register
shall have adjustable front louvers parallel to the longer side to
give upto 22.5 degrees vertical deflection and adjustable back
louvers parallel to the shorter side to achieve a horizontal spread
air pattern to at least 45 degrees. Return air grilles shall have only
front louvers. The outer framework of the grilles shall be made of
not less than 1.6 mm thick aluminium sheet. The louvers shall be
of aerofoil design of extruded aluminium section with minimum
thickness of 0.8mm at front and shall be made of 0.8mm thick
aluminium sheet. Louvers may be spaced 18 mm apart.

III. Square and rectangular ceiling outlets/intakes shall have a flange

flush with the ceiling into which it is fitted or shall be of anti-smudge
type. The outlets shall comprise an outer shell with duct collar and
removable diffusing assembly. These shall be suitable for
discharge in one or more directions as required. The outer shell
shall not be less than 1.6 mm thick extruded section aluminium
sheet. The diffuser assembly shall not be less than 0.80 mm thick
extruded aluminium section.

IV. Circular ceiling outlets/intakes shall have either flush or anti

smudge outer cone. Flush outer cones shall have the lower edge
of the cone not more than 5 mm below the underside of the
finished ceiling into which it is fitted. Anti-smudge cones shall have
the outer cone profile designed to reduce dirt deposit on the ceiling
adjacent to the air outlet. The metal sheet used for construction of
these shall be minimum 1.6 mm thick extruded aluminium sheet.

V. Linear diffusers shall have a flanged frame with the outside edges
returned 3.5 mm and shall have one to four slots as required. The
air quantity through each slot shall be adjustable. The metal sheet
used for the construction of these shall be minimum 1.6 mm thick
extruded aluminium sheet.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 537

VI. Grilles and diffusers constructed of extruded aluminium sections

shall have grille bars set straight, or deflected as required. These
shall be assembled by mechanical interlocking of components to
prevent distortion. These grilles and diffusers shall have a rear set
of adjustable blades, perpendicular to the face blades for
deflection purposes.

VII. All supply air outlets shall be fitted with a volume control device,
made of extruded aluminium gate section. The blades of the
device shall be mill finish/ block shade pivoted on nylon brushes
to avoid rusting & rattling noise, which shall be located immediately
behind the outlet and shall be fully adjustable from within the
occupied space without removing any access panel. The volume
control device for circular outlets shall be opposed blade radial
/shutter type dampers, or two or more butterfly dampers in
conjunction with equalizing grid. Opposed blade dampers shall be
used for square and rectangular ceiling/wall outlets and intakes.

VIII. All the products supplied by contractor should supplement in

performance by selection curves of product ratings from the
manufacturer.

IX. Laminar supply air diffusers shall be made of 2mm thick powder
coated aluminium sheet duly insulated with 5mm thick closed cell
polyethylene foam insulation having factory laminated aluminium
foil and joints covered with self-adhesive aluminium tape and
having holes 2/3 mm dia. including frame work.

c) Fresh Air Intakes

I. Fresh air intake grills shall be made of extruded aluminium
sections.

II. A flanged frame using RS sections shall be provided on front face

to conceal the gap between the louvers and the adjoining wall
face. Corners of frame shall be welded. The frame shall be made
structurally rigid.

III. Louvers made from extruded aluminium section shall be in

modular panel form for ease of handling. These shall be free from
waves and buckles. Vertical blades shall be truly vertical and
horizontal blades shall be truly horizontal. Butt joints in blades shall
not be accepted.

IV. Additional intermediate equally spaced supports and stiffeners

shall be provided to prevent sagging/ vibrating of the louvers, at
not more than 750mm centres where the louver's length is longer
than 750mm.

V. A bird wire screen made of 12 mm mesh in 1.6 mm steel wire held

in angle or channel frame shall be fixed to the rear face of the

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 538

louver frame by screens.

d) Fire Dampers
I. Fire dampers shall be provided in all the supply air ducts and
return air ducts (where provided), return air passage in the air-
handling unit room and at all floor crossings. Access door shall be
provided in the duct before each set of fire dampers.

II. Fire dampers shall be multi blade louvers type. The blade should
remain in the air stream in open position & shall allow maximum
free area to reduce pressure drop & noise in the air passage. The
blades and frame shall be constructed with minimum 1.6mm thick
galvanised sheet & shall be factory fitted in a sleeve made out of
1.6mm galvanised sheet of minimum 400mm long. It shall be
complete with locking device, motorised actuator & control panel.

III. Fire dampers shall be motorised smoke & fire dampers type. It
shall be supplied with spring loaded UL stamped fusible link to
close fire damper in the event of rise in duct temperature. Fire
damper shall also close on receipt of fire alarm signal to cut off air
supply instantaneously. An electric limit switch shall also be
operated by the closing of fire damper, which in turn shall switch
off power supply to AHU blower motor as well as strip heaters.

IV. Fire dampers shall be CBRI tested & certified for 120 minutes
rating against collapse & flame penetration as per UL 555-1995.
Fire dampers shall be compatible with the fire detection system of
building& shall be capable of operating automatically through an
electric motor on receiving signal from fire alarm panel.

V. Necessary wiring from fire alarm panel up to AHU electric panel &
further to fire damper shall be provided by contractor.

VI. Installation of Ducting, Air Outlets and Inlets shall be as per CPWD
Specifications.

e) Installation

a) Ducting

I. All exposed ducts within the conditioned space shall have slip
joints. Flanged joints shall not be used. All joints shall be airtight.

II. Ducts shall be supported independently from the building structure

and adequately, to keep the ducts true to shape. The support
spacing shall not be more than 2 m. Where ducts cannot be
suspended from ceiling, wall brackets or other suitable
arrangements, as approved by the Engineer-in-charge shall be
adopted. Neoprene or other vibration isolation packing of minimum
6 mm thickness shall be provided between the ducts and the angle
iron supports/brackets. Vertical duct work shall be suitably

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 539

supported at each floor by steel structural members.

III. Where metal ducts or sleeves terminate in woodwork, tight joints

shall be made by means of closely fitting heavy flanged collars.
Where ducts pass through brick or masonry openings, wooden
frame work shall be provided within the openings and the crossing
ducts shall be provided with heavy flanged collars on either side
of the wooden frame work, so that duct crossing is made leak-
proof.

IV. Duct connections to the air-handling unit shall be made by

inserting a double canvas sleeve 100 mm long. The sleeve shall
be securely bonded and bolted to the duct and unit casing.

V. Dampers shall be provided in branch duct connections for proper

volume control and balancing the air quantities in the system.
Suitable links, levers and quadrants shall be provided for proper
operation, control and setting of the dampers. Every damper shall
have an indicating device clearly showing the position of the
dampers at all times.

b) Air Outlets and Inlets

I. In installing fresh air intakes, no fixing device shall be visible from

the face of the frame. Where louvers are to be fixed in masonry or
concrete, fixing shall be with either expanding plugs or raw plugs.
Where the louvers are to be fixed in steel or wood, non-ferrous
screws or bolts shall be used.

II. Supply air outlets and return air intakes shall be anodized/ powder
coated aluminium to the desired colour to match the surroundings
wall/ceiling. The fresh air intakes shall be anodized/ powder
coated aluminium as approved by the Engineer-in-Charge.
f) Balancing
Air systems shall be balanced in a manner to minimize throttling
losses.
Theentireairdistributionsystemshallbebalancedwiththehelpofananemo
meter. The measured air quantities at fan discharge and at the
variousoutlets shall be within + 5 percent. For fans
greaterthan0.75KW(1.0HP),fansmustthenbeadjustedtomeetdesignflo
wconditions.Branch duct adjustments shall be permanently marked
after the airbalancing is completed so that these can be restored to
their correct position ifdisturbedatany time.

8.20 Insulation
Expandedpolystyrene(T.F. Quality)shallbeusedforpipeinsulation like inside
the A.C. plant room, exposed to outside or burried in ground.In the case of
expanded polystyrene (TF quality), Resin bonded glasswool the pipe
insulation should be in rigid sections in two halves
andpreformedtofitsnuglyontopipes(up
topipesizesforwhichthepreformedsectionsaremanufacturedbythemanufactu

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 540

rerofinsulation).Forhigherpipesizes insulationslabs shallbeused. Resin

bonded glass wool is to be used for piping inside the building duetoitsfire
retardantproperties,forconsiderationsoffiresafety. Polyvinyl Nitrile (Closed
cell rubber foam) available in tube shapes forsliding on to the pipes can be
used if successfully tested forfire retardantproperties. All shall need to be
covered with vapour barrier and claddingwithaluminiumsheet.
I. For Insulationofductwork:-
(a) Resin bondedglass wool.
(b) PolyvinylNitrile(Closedcellrubberfoam)

II. Foracousticliningofductworkand AHU rooms: -

(a) Resin bonded glass wool.
(b) Resinbonded mineralwool.

III. For suction line,ChilledwaterpipeandChillerinsulation:-

(a) ExpandedPolysterene(T.F. Quality)

(b) PolyvinylNitrile(Closedcellrubberfoam)

IV. Fordouble skinAHUs:

(a) Polyurethanefoam (PUFinsulation)

8.20.1 Material Specifications

Theinsulationmaterialshall satisfythefollowingrequirements:-
i) For thermal application on pipes.

S.No Minimum
Material Density(Kg/cu.m)
1 Resin bondedglass wool 32
2 Expandedpolystyrene
20
(TF)
3 PolyvinylNitrilefoam 55
ii) For thermal insulation of ducts:

Material Minimum
S.No Density(Kg/cu.m)
Resin bondedglasswool 24
1
PolyvinylNitrilefoam 40
2

FiberGlass Insulation used forductinsulation shall be factory

facedwithaluminiumfoilononesidereinforcedwithkraftpaper&fusedtotheins
ulationmaterial. Polyvinyl Nitrile foam Insulation used for duct insulation
shall be factory faced with aluminium foil on one side.

iii) For acousticlining:

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 541

Application Minimum
Material
Thickness Density
(Kg./Cu.M)

Duct 25 mm Resin bondedglass wool 32

AHU room Resin bonded glass 32/48

wool/Mineralwool
50 mm

The specification for resin bonded glass wool insulation & resin bonded
mineral wool insulation shall conform to IS 8183 as amended up to date.
The specification for expanded polysterene shall conform to IS-4671 as
amended upto date.

iv) Expansion tank Insulation

Expanded polystrene insulation of density not less than 20kg per cu.m.
shall be used.
The thickness of insulation shall be as indicated below unless specified
otherwise in the tender specifications.

i) Forpipe insulation(for chilled water as well as hot water application

PipeSize(mm) Glassfiber/Exp. Polystyrene(mm)

150&below 50
Above150 75

ii) For Ductinsulation

Application Fiber glass (mm)

Thermal for AC area 12.5

Thermal for Non-AC area 25
Acoustic 25

iii) For room acoustic lining

Resin bondedglasswool 50mm
Resinbonded mineral wool 50mm
iv) Forpumps:
Expanded polystyrene TFquality 50mm

v) Chiller Insulation Thickness of polyvinyl rubber insulation used for

chiller insulation shall not be less than 19mm.

vi) Expansion tank Thickness of expanded polystyrene (TFquality)

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 542

insulation used shall not be less than 50mm.

Application of Insulation on pipes, ducting, pumps and other
various items shall be as per CPWD Specifications.

8.20.2 Equipment Safety Controls

A. Compressor:

Compressor shall be provided with the following safety controls:-

a) High discharge pressure (HP) safety (cut out) to stop the

compressorautomatically, in case discharge pressure exceeds a pre-
set safe value.This safety shall operate when discharge head pressure
exceeds the set point. Only manual resetting shall be provided
forthissafety.

b) Low suction pressure (LP) safety (cut- out) to stop the compressor
automatically, in case suction pressure falls below a pre-set value.
Thissafety shall operate when the suction pressure falls below the set
point.Automatic resetting shall be provided for this safety, with
adjustable cut-in and cut-out pressures. This safety shall be
used forpumping down the system for shutting off the refrigeration plant.

c) Oil pressure (O.P) safety (cut-outs) to stop the compressor, in case

lubricating oil pressure falls be low as a feset value. A time delay
mechanism shall also be provided, so a stopper mitrunning of the
compressor up to a maximum period of 90 seconds, with the oil pressure
differential below the set value and allow it to continue normal
operation if the pressure differential builds up to the set value within
that time, or otherwise shut-down the compressor. Only manualresetting
shall be provided for this safety.

d) High bearing oil temperature cut-out (for centrifugal compressor

only).This shall be provided with a manual resetonly.

e) High lubricating oil temperaturecut- out

(forcentrifugal compressoronly).This
shall be provided with a manual reset
only.

f) Time delay mechanism on the starting gear to limits hort cycling

regardless of mal-functioning of controls.

g) Thecut-outs mentioned above shall operate when the respective

controlled variable crosses the set point to trip the compressor. Audio
visual alarm shall be provided to indicate such operations. A manual
reset shall be providedfor them.

B. Condenser

The safety control for a condenser shall comprise a safety pressure relief

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 543

valve on the shell.This shall operate to relieve the pressure at the set point
without prior leakage. For small condensers, a fusible plug may be
provided to meltata predetermined temperature.

C. Chiller

a) An anti-freeze shall be provided with water chiller, set at a few

degreesabove the freezing point.This shall operate, when the
temperature ofwaterinthe chillerfallsbelow the set point to trip the
compressor motor.The reset provided for the safety shall be manual.

b) Flooded type of chiller shall beprovided with safety pressure relief valve.
8.20.3 Refrigerant Flow Controls
A refrigeration plant shall be provided with controls, necessary for
starting,stopping and modulating the flow of refrigerant in the plant so as to
satisfy theload requirements.These comprise solenoid valve, thermostatic/
Electronictype expansion valve, float valve, compressor capacity controls
etc. and otherspecialcontrolsifspecifiedinaparticular work.
A. Solenoid Valve

a) For reciprocating and screw type compressors liquid line solenoid

valveshallbeprovidedintheliquidlineofthesystem,aheadoftheexpansion
valve, to allow or to stop the flow of liquid refrigerant to anevaporator,or
asectionofsectionalizedevaporator.Thisshallbeoperated by snap-acting
thermostat and it shall also be provided with atestswitchto enable
manualenergizing.

b) Discharge gas valves shall be provided in the following applications

asrequired:-

i) Hotgasdefrosting:Normallythissolenoidvalveshallremainclosed, but
it shall open up to feed the evaporator with hot gas fordefrosting
when required,especiallyin cold storageapplications.

ii) Compressor capacity control for reciprocating compressor and

forcylinderunloadingduringstarting.

c) Solenoid valves shall be direct acting in smaller sizes and pilot operated
for larger sizes, as required. The size of the valves shall be determined
by the desired flow rate of refrigerant through them and the pressure
drop across the same (and not by the size of the refrigerantline).

B. Thermostatic / Electronic type Expansion Valve

a) Thermostatic/ Electronic type expansion valves shall be provided in
DX type refrigeration plant to modulate the flow rate of liquid refrigerant
entering the evaporator in response to the extent of superheat of
refrigerant gas leaving the evaporator, so that only a metered flow is
ensured matching the load.

b) The number of expansion valves shall be such that the specified

accuracy of temperature control of the system can be achieved and

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 544

that no valve is expected to operate below 35% of its rated capacity.

The sizes shall be selected suitably so as to avoid hunting. Adjustable
super heat control and external equalizer port shall be provided for
each valve. Each expansion valve shall be easily removable for
cleaning and adjusting.

C. Float Valve
Float valve shall be provided in refrigeration plant with flooded type chiller
formaintaining the liquid level in chiller under all conditions ofload at a
ratecommensurate with the rate of vaporization. This can be provided
either onlow pressure side or on high pressure side.When provided as low
side floatvalve,thisshallbelocatedasapartofthechilleroraccumulator.
8.20.4 System Controls

a) The requirements for maintaining the inside design conditions as

specified in the tender specifications for the work shall be met by
appropriate system controls and control elements. The system shall
satisfy the requirements of both full load and partial load conditions.

b) For cooling applications in plants other than package type AC (PTAC)

units, control shall be effected by 3 way diverting valve in chilled water
coil. For heating using hot water coils, flow control through them shall
also be achieved by using 3 way valves.

c) In the case of PTAC type units, the control of the units is affected
through snap acting room thermostat.

d) The size of 3 way diverting valves shall be selected so as to match the

coil wherein the flow is to be regulated.

e) Operation of the modulating motor of 3 way diverting valve shall be

controlled by proportional type thermostat.

f) One snap acting humidistat shall be provided for each humidifier.

g) Every bank of strip heaters shall be controlled by a snap acting

thermostat in case of temperature control requirement and by a snap
acting humidistat for reheat control to maintain the specified RH
condition.

h) Where more than one bank of heaters is required to be provided for

one AHU, thermostat shall be provided in each bank shall be suitable
for operation in stages.

i) A safety thermostat (safety stat) shall be provided as high limit safety

for each bank of heaters.

j) The heater banks intended for reheating during monsoon shall form
part of the heaters required for winter heating (where winter heating is
specified). Necessary change-over switch shall be provided as part of
the system wiring to change their control by thermostats or humidistat

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 545

as required.
8.20.5 Operational Controls and Interlocks

a) The operation of refrigeration plant shall be either manual or

automatic, as specified. The plant shall be started by an ON/OFF
switch. Additionally, in the case of an automatic plant, an auto/manual
switch shall also be provided.

b) The automatic operation shall be affected through the monitoring of

return chilled water temperature, or the room conditions, as the case
may be. In multi-unit installations, one unit shall be arranged to be
loaded fully before the next unit is switched on automatically. A similar
operation system shall be followed in shutting off of the unit. Change
over from one operating unit to another shall be possible through the
status switch of the plant to be shut down by change to manual position
and thus overriding its anti-cycle timer. It should be possible to
introduce the changed unit by running it to speed and changing over
the status switch to "auto" position.

c) Pump shut down shall be provided through low pressure (LP) safety
irrespective of the status switch position, auto/manual.

d) It should be possible to start the compressor motor only after the

cooling tower fan motor (where provided), chilled water (where
provided) and condenser water pumps are operated.

e) The compressor motor shall be able to be started or run, only after all
the safeties are satisfied.

f) The blower motor shall be interlocked with strip heaters (where

provided) such that power supply to strip heaters will become ON, only
after the blower has been started and run to full (designed) speed.

g) Where only the blower motor and not heaters is connected to standby
generating set in any particular application, a timer shall be provided,
such that the heaters may get energized, only after a period of time,
after the blower is run.

h) In the event of signal from high limit safety of heaters the power supply
to the blower motor and the heater bank shall automatically and
instantly be switched off.

i) The power supply to AHU shall be cut off on receipt of a signal from
the Fire Alarm System.

8.20.6 Requirements of control elements

The system control elements comprise controlling elements such as

thermostats, humidistat, three-way valves, heaters, humidifiers,
dehumidifieretc. as required for individualapplications.
A. Thermostats

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 546

a) Thermostats shall be electric fixed differential type, withsensing

element located in the return air stream.All thermostats shall
besuppliedwiththestandardmountingboxesasrecommendedbytheman
ufacturer.The profile, mounting arrangement and exact location of
thethermostatshallbesuchasto suitthe site.

b) Proportional control thermostats shall be provided for actuating the

three-way modulating valve at each air handling unit. Thermostat shall
provide manual switching (heat-off-cool-in heating-cooling system).

c) Snap-acting fixed differential type thermostat for actuating the three-

way diverting valve at each fan coil unit. Thermostat shall have
temperature adjustments WARM-NORMAL-COOL settings and fan
switch. Switching off must break fan circuit.

d) Snap-acting fixed differential heating thermostat for electric winter

heating and reheat applications for putting on/off power supply to
electric heating or reheat coils in air handling units.

e) Safety thermostat shall be provided for electric winter heating and

reheat application for cutting off power supply to strip heaters in case
air flow across strip heater is not established.

f) Air-stat shall be provided within air handling unit containing electric

heating or reheat coils to prevent heaters from energizing unless the
air flow is established.

B. Humidistat

a) Humidistat shall be provided with air handling unit for areas, which
require humidity control. One humidistat shall activate the reheat coils
in case the space humidity rises beyond the preset limit. Another
humidistat shall energize the humidifier when the humidity falls below
the preset limit. These humidistats shall also de-energize these
devices when the desired humidity is reached.

b) Humidistat shall be snap-acting type having humidifier/dehumidifier

control from 20-80 percent relative humidity, with differential of 5
percent. Humidistat shall have nylon element with three bobbins, and
removable knob to prevent tempering of set point.

C. Three-way modulating valves (for AHUs)

a) These shall be provided in chilled/hot water lines as diverting valves

at each air-handling unit and shall be actuated by a space thermostat.
Space conditions shall be maintained by continuous proportional
modulation of the chilled/hot water through the coil. The valve shall
revert to fully bypass position when fan is shut off. Maximum pressure
drop across valve shall not exceed

b) 0.85 kg/ sq.cm. Where VSD (to control chilled water flow) is provided,
the AHUsshallbeprovidedwith2waydivertingvalve.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 547

D. Three-way diverting valves for FCUs

a) This shall be provided as 2 position diverting valves in chilled/hot water

lines at each fan coil unit and shall be actuated by a space thermostat.
Space conditions shall be maintained by allowing all of chilled/hot
water to either pass through the coil or bypass the coil and mix with
the chilled/hot water return. The valves shall revert to fully bypass
position when fan is shut off. Pressure drop across the valve shall not
exceed 0.14 kg/ sq.cm. Valve shall have the facility to replace motor
actuator without removing the valve body.

b) Strip heaters shall be of finned type construction with a surface

temperature not exceeding 45 deg. C. The same shall be suitable for
230 V, AC supply. The heaters shall adequately be insulated
electrically from their mountings unit/ casing.

c) Dehumidifiers, wherever provided shall use adsorption type

desiccants. The desiccant used shall be non-toxic, non-corrosive
having a life of about 5 years with constant employment in
regeneration cycle.

8.20.7 Special Requirements for Cold Storages

Automatic defrosting arrangement shall be provided in cold

storages.Thearrangement shall comprise stopping of the refrigeration
system and providing defrosting using warm air or water as specified. Hot
gas defrosting arrangement shall be provided wherever specified in
particular applications.

8.20.8 Variable Speed Drive (VSD)

A. Airquantityflowcontrol The VSD System shall function to supply

variable air quantity in the air- conditioned are a in response to the load
variations including that due to variations in ambient conditions and filter
cleanliness conditions, to maintainthe inside designed temperature,
RH and pressure conditions in conjunction
with the humidifier and re- heaters. During the day hours, as per the time
interval selected, the VSD System shall regulate the speed of the AHU
tomaintain the temperature within maximum designedtemperature and
positiveair pressureinside the air- conditioned area. The positive air
pressure shall bemaintained by keeping a difference of minimum 15% in
the airflow between thesupply and exhaust air. However, under any
circumstances during the dayhours, the air flow rate will not fall below the
60% of the rated CFM of the AHUor 15 air changes, whichever is higher.
During the rest of the night hours, theProgrammable timer shall give a
signal to the VSD to run the AHU at a pre-determined reduced speed so as
to provide only 25%of the normal CFM or the minimum CFM achievable
closest to 25% but not below 25% of the normalCFM. Due to the
cloggingof the air filter ifthe inside temperature
conditionsare not achieved even at 100% AHU speed then the VSD will
close an N.O.contacts to activate an alarm. The VSD shall have the

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 548

provision to switch overto the manual mode as and when required. The
system shall comprise ofdedicated Variable Speed Drives (VSDs) designed
for HVAC applications toaccept 2 feedback signals (from temperature
sensor installed in the AC
area and programmable timer controller) and have 2 programmable set
points(in side temperature conditions, and 60% of the normal CFM condition
as stated above) using HVAC terminology, to regulate the
speed ofthe AHU motors in response to the variations in load
and filter cleanliness conditions to maintain temperature and Air flow
differential in supply and exhaustconditions.In case, any additional sensor
(s) including wiring etc. are required to meet the system requirements.The
VSD control shall have:

I. RFI (Radio frequency interference) Filters for EMC (Electro magnetic

compatibility) compliance.

II. Voltage Vector Control technology to generate advanced sinusoidal

output voltage, 100% true RMS value of the fundamental voltage at
rated speed and nominal torque, cause no motor de-ration and keep
motor temperature limits within permissible class B limits.

III. Displays in user‘s friendly Alpha Numeric Characters for all operating
parameters, programming parameters and faults.

IV. Built in energy meter.

V. Built in run time counter.

VI. Local controlpanel(keypad)

a) The system shall also comprise a suitable programmable timer & PLC
with required electronic components, to allow 2 feedback signals
(Temperature & Minimum CFM) to be passed on to the VSD during
the day hours. In the night hours, only one signal from the
programmable timer shall go to the VSD to run it at pre-determined
reduced speed. The room/ space air temperature and air flow shall be
sensed by a temperature and air flow transmitters, which shall
generate suitable DC signal to provide feedback to the VSD, which in
turn shall regulate the speed of the AHU fan to maintain the designed
conditions as described above.

b) VSD shall be designed, with built-in PID controller, control panel

(keypads & display), IP 20 enclosure for use on standard centrifugal
fans. The VSDs should not cause any de-ration of the connected
motors and must ensure that class B temperature levels of the
connected motors are never exceeded. The display should be in alpha-
numeric characters and programming facility should be in user- friendly
HVAC terminology. The VSDs should be able to accept up to
2 feedback signals from temperature & air flow transmitter
simultaneously and to program 2 set points in it.
c) The system shall also have following features incorporated:

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 549

I. Heat sink over temperature protection

II. Under voltage protection
III. Over voltage protection
IV. Alpha-numeric display facilities
V. ON indication
VI. Trip indication
VII. Selectable display of various parameters line voltage, frequency,
speed, power, torque, motor temperature percentage, VSD
temperature percentage, KWH.
VIII. Raise and lower speed push button in local mode.
IX. Frequency range variation from 0 to 50 Hz.

X. Remote start and stop facility including indications thereof with

necessary hardware and terminal blocks, including toggle switch etc.
to override remote start & stop at the time of maintenance/ repairs.
XI. Off delay facility through timer or PLC with 30 sec to 120 sec. time
delay, to be connected to air flow switch.
XII. Safeguard facility against single phasing.
XIII. Tripping of AHU blower motors in response to the fire alarm signal from
AFAS.
XIV. Inter locking of Exhaust and AHU blowers such that power supply gets
fed to exhaust blower onlywhenthe supply airflowisthere.

B. Chilled water flow control

a) Variable Speed Drive (VSDs) for controlling the chilled water flow rate
in the secondary circuit may be provided when AHUs operation is for
24 hours and where the secondary chilled water system has been
provided.

b) The VSD System shall function to supply variable chilled water flow in
the secondary circuit of air-conditioning system in response to the load
variations including that due to variations in ambient conditions to
maintain the inside designed temperature conditions. However, under
any circumstances, the secondary chilled water pump speed shall not
fall below the 30% of the nominal speed or any other suitable minimum
speed as per the system requirement. The VSD shall have the
provision to switch over to the manual mode as and when required and
facility for the manual speed variation from VSD itself. The system
shall comprise of dedicated Variable Speed Drives (VSDs) designed
for HVAC applications to accept two feedback signals (from differential
pressure transmitters installed across the two farthest, most significant
AHUs of the zone to select either maximum of the two or average of
the two (as selected by the user) feedback signals using HVAC
terminology, to regulate the speed of the secondary chilled water
pump motors in response to the load variations. In case, any additional
sensor (s) including wiring etc. if required to meet the system
requirements, The VSD shall have:

I. RFI(Radiofrequencyinterference)FiltersforEMC(Electrom agnetic
compatibility)compliance.
II. Voltage Vector Control technology to generate advanced
sinusoidal outputvoltage, 100% trueRMS value of the fundamental

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 550

voltage at rated speedandnominaltorque,causenomotorde-

ration,andkeepmotortemperaturelimits withinpermissibleclass
Blimits.

III. TheVSDsshallhaveD.C.linkreactors/harmonicfiltersintegratedtomi
nimize power line harmonics. There shall be reactors in both the
positiveandnegativerails.

IV. An automatic energy optimisation feature shall be provided as

standard inthe frequency converter. This feature shall reduce
output voltage, further toquadratic V/f characteristics, when the
motor is lightly loaded and minimisethemotorlosses.

V. The VSD shall be able to provide full rated output current

continuously,110% of rated current for 60 seconds and 160%
torque for up to 5 seconds(for highinerticand highfrictionload).

VI. TheVSDshallincludeAutomaticMotorAdaptation(AMA)tooptimize
motor performance, improve start capabilities and compensate for
motorcable variances. The AMA shall be carried out at motor
standstill with noneedfordetachingthepumpfrommotor.

VII. Unlimited output power circuit switching must be possible without

the need for central circuit interlocking and without causingdamage
to the VSD.

VIII. Auto-derating of maximum drive current shall be incorporated in

VSD to allow continued operation at reduced speed in case of VSD
over temperature phase loss or main sim balance without
damaging the VSD.

IX. Displays in user‘s friendly Alpha Numeric Characters for all

operating parameters, programming parameters, faults,

X. Builtin energymeter.

XI. inruntimecounter.

XII. Localcontrolpanel(keypad)

c) The system shall also comprise a suitable PLC if required, with

electronic components.

d) VSD shall be designed, with built-in PID controller, control panel

(keypads & display), IP 20 enclosure for use on standard centrifugal
pumps. The VSDs should not cause any de-ration of the connected
motors and must ensure that class B temperature levels of the
connected motors are never exceeded. The display should be in
alpha- numeric characters and programming facility should be in user-
friendly HVAC terminology. The VSDs shall be able to accept up to
two feedback signals from differential Pressure transmitters
simultaneously and to program set points in it.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 551

e) The system shall have following features incorporated: -

Heat sink over temperature protection

I. Under voltage protection

II. Over voltage protection

III. Protections against input transients, loss of A.C. line phase, short
circuit, ground fault, frequency converter over temperature.

IV. Alpha-numeric display facilities

V. ON indication

VI. Trip indication

VII. Selectable display of various parameters like output line voltage,

output frequency, speed, power, motor temperature percentage, heat
sink temperature, VSD temperature percentage, KWH, hours run,
differential pressure.

VIII. Raise and lower speed push button in local mode.

IX. Frequency range variation from 0 to 50 Hz.

X. Remote start and stop facility including indications thereof with

necessary hardware and terminal blocks, including toggle switch etc.
for override of remote start & stop of at the time of maintenance/
repairs.

XI. Safeguard facility against single phasing.

Where both building management system and air quantity flow control /
chilledwaterflowcontrolthroughVSDareprovidedforsameapplication,contro
lpanelforsequencingofVSDshallnotbe required.

8.20.9 Demand Based Control

a) Conventional HVAC controls employ pressure or temperature-set point
control to isolate (or decouple) one system element from another. In any
air conditioning plant, the cooling towers, chillers, distribution pumps, and
supply fans are controlled independently with temperature or pressure set
points that ensure the surrounding equipment also can operate
independently over a wide range of loading requirements. Although a
network-capable direct-digital-control (DDC) system may be employed for
control, the network typically is used only to collect information for
operations. In many systems, additional isolation is provided with primary-
secondary pumping, bypasses, decoupling lines, and valves or dampers
that have large pressure drops.

b) Demand-based control is a method of applying direct-coupled network

control. It is based on the idea that a building HVAC system is a single
system the energy efficiency and comfort performance of which are
optimized when the operation of all the components is coordinated to
meet actual needs in the spaces served.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 552

c) Demand based control is intended to fill the vacuum created by

development of variable frequency drive for HVAC equipment.

d) Demand based control ties the operation of all the equipment to end use
requirements- actual space requirement in single building HVAC
applications but this does not mean that chillers and cooling towers
operate directly from the room temperature sensor. Rather in this control,
all the components of air conditioning plant are directly coupled and
work as a single system.
e) With variable-speed equipment and network capabilities, the long-
standing dictum that equipment must be decoupled to operate
effectively has been reversed. Direct coupling leads to simpler, more-
efficient operation. It is intuitive that coordinating the operation of a
chiller plant and chilled-water distribution network is required to
achieve the highest overall cooling system efficiency. When cooling
needs to adjust in response to space conditions, demand-based
control coordinates the operation of all elements to provide cooling
where it is needed according to predefined efficiency relationship.

f) Equal marginal performance principle is applied to optimize the pumps

operation under all loading conditions. A circuit consisting of cooling
towers, chiller pumps, and conditioning fans with VSD could be optimized
in this manner. These components could be directly coupled and
controlled using demand-based control to operate the circuit as a single
system and provide the cooling capacity required. Thus, with demand-
based control, equipment is coordinated to operate according to power
(kilowatt) set points, which is simpler, more stable, and much more
efficient.

8.21 Electrical Work

8.21.1 All equipment and materials for electrical works shall be suitable for
continuous operations on 415 V / 240 V + 10% (3 phase/single phase),
50 Hz. AC system. All electrical works shall be carried out complying with
the Indian Electricity Rules, 1956 as amended to date.All parts of
electrical works shall be carried out as per appropriate CPWD General
specifications for Electrical worksas amended to date.

a) The main switch board in the A.C. plant room shall be floor mounted, free
standing cubical type and shall be TTA type factory built fabricated. It
shall be suitable for termination of the incoming cable(s)/ bus trunking
from top/ bottom. The switchboards in air handling unit (AHU) rooms shall
be cubical design wall mounted/ floor mounted as feasible at site and as
approved by the Engineer-in-charge.

a) The capacity of switch gear, starters etc. shall be suitable for the
requirements of loads fed/controlled. Starting currents shall be duly
considered in case of motor loads.

b) MCCBs shall be used upto 630 A. ACBs shall be used for 630 A and above
ratings.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 553

c) Switch boards controlling motors shall house starters for motors, unless
otherwise specified. Independent single phasing preventors for each such
starter shall be provided. The starter and SPP shall be located adjacent to
the controlling switch gear.

d) One volt meter with selector switch, a set of indicating lamps and fuses for
voltmeter and lamps shall be provided at each switchboard. One ammeter
with CTS, and selector switch shall be provided with each motor starter.
Instruments shall be flush mounted with the panel and have a glass index
not higher than 1.5. The instruments and accessories shall be provided
whether or not specifically indicated in the tender specifications.

e) The fabrication of switchboard shall be taken up only after the drawings for
the fabrication of the same are approved by the Engineer-in-charge.

f) Switchboards shall be fabricated as per specifications indicated in sub- para

above.

g) The layout of bus bars and cable alleys shall be designed for convenient
connections and inter-connections with the various switchgear. Connections
from individual compartments to cable alleys shall be such as not to shut
down healthy circuits in the event of maintenance work becoming necessary
on a defective circuit.

h) Care shall be taken to provide adequate clearances between phase bus bars
as well as between phase bus bars, neutral and earth.

i) Where terminations are done on the bus bars by drilling holes therein, extra
cross section shall be provided for the bus bars. Alternatively, terminations
may be made by clamping.

j) Provision shall be made for proper termination of cables at the switchboards

such that there is no strain either on the cables, or on the terminators.
Cables connected to the upper tiers shall be duly clamped within the
switchboard.
k) Identification labels shall be provided against each switchgear and starter
compartment, using plastic engraved labels.Metallic danger notice board
conforming to relevant IS shall be fixed on each electrical switchboard.

l) Switchboard near cooling towers shall be housed in weather proof

enclosure. The mounting arrangement shall be as approved by the
Engineer-in-Charge tosuitthe siteconditions.

8.21.2 Power Cabling

a) Unless otherwise specified, the power cables shall be XLPE insulated,
PVC outer sheathed aluminium/ copper conductor, armoured cables
rated for 1100 V grade. Power cables sizes shall be as approved by
the Engineer-in- Charge, after taking into consideration the load, the
length of cabling and the type of load.

b) Cables shall be laid in suitable metallic trays suspended from ceiling,

or mounted on walls, or laid directly in ground or clamped on

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 554

structures, as may be required. Cable ducts shall not be provided in

plant rooms. Cable trays shall be fabricated from slotted angle/solid
angles to make ladder type cable tray, designed with adequate
dimensions for proper heat dissipation and also access to the cables.
Alternatively, cable trays may be of GI sheet with adequate structural
strength and rigidity, with necessary ventilation holes therein. In both
the cases, necessary supports and suspenders shall be provided by
the Contractor as required.

8.21.3 Control Wiring

a) Control wiring in the plant rooms and AHU rooms shall be done using
PVC insulated and PVC sheathed, 1.5 sq.mm copper conductor,
cables drawn in steel or PVC conduits. Alternatively, armoured multi-
core copper conductor cables may also be used for the purpose. The
control cables interconnecting the plant room and the AHU rooms shall
be of multi-core armoured type only, and suitable for laying direct in
ground.

b) The number and size of the control cables shall be such as to suit the
control system design adopted by the Contractor.Runs of control wires
within the switchboard shall be neatly bunched and suitably
supported/clamped. Means shall be provided for easy identification of
the control wires.

c) Control wiring shall correspond to the circuitry/sequence of operations

and interlocks approved by Engineer-in-Charge.In cold storage
involving temperatures below zero deg. C, polythene cables shall be
used instead of PVC cables.
8.21.4 Earthing:
All metallic body of Motors, Chillers, Pump sets and other equipment shall
be properly earthed. Number of earth tapping points shall be intimated well
in advance to the Structural earthing agency and shall connect to the points
being provided.

8.21.5 Power Factor Capacitors

PF capacitors shall be provided for all motor loads of 5 HP and above.These

capacitors shall come into circuit when the respective motor load is
switchedon.For this purpose, necessary inter connections between the
capacitors and the motors/starters shall be included in the scope of work.
Where the PF capacitors are provided in banks, each bank shall be
controlled by suitably rated switch gear.

8.21.6 Motor Starter

a) The motor starter shall conform to IS: 1822 ―Motor starters of voltage
not exceeding 1000 volts and shall be air insulated and suitable for
415 volts + 10%, 50 Hz., 3 phase AC supply. Enclosures shall have
protection of IP 42 for Indoor applications and IP 55 for outdoor
applications. Starters shall be rated for intermittent duty. Starting
current should not exceed two times the full load current.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 555

b) The starter shall be mounted on the main electrical control panel/ unit
mounted/ self-mounted as specified.

c) Each starter shall be provided with the following protections:-

I.Thermal over load on all the three phases with adjustable
settings, II.Under voltage protection,and
III.Independentsingle phasing preventor. (currents ensing type)

d) Adequate number of extra NO/NC contacts for interlocks, indicating

lamps etc.shall be provided on the starter/contactor.

8.21.7 Motor Efficiency

a) All motors shall have a minimum acceptable nominal full load motor
efficiency not less than IE3 class as per IS 12615 for Energy Efficient
motors.
b) Motor name plates shall list the nominal full load motor efficiencies and
the full load power factor.
c) Motors should be installed with soft start energy savers and Variable
Speed drives based on the application required.

8.22 Inspection, Testing and Commissioning

Inspection and testing of compressor, condenser,chiller& AHUs at
manufacturer ‘s works, and other equipment/materials on receipt at site,
final testing &commissioning of allequipmentatsite shall be carried out.
Testingprocedure shall be done as per CPWD Specifications.

8.22.1 Testing of Chiller at Manufacturers works

All units shall be subjected to physical inspection. Performance tests to

verify various performance parameters shall be carried out at on any one
chiller at 100%, 75%, 50% and 25% loads at site conditions with constant
condenser entry to verify compliance to 5-star rating as per ECBC 2017 (up
to date amended) norms. Testing shall be witnessed by Engineer-in-
Charge or his authorized representative. Inspection, Major seasonal testing
shall be done during Summer or Monsoon and Testing and Commissioning
shall be done as per the procedure mentioned in the CPWD HVAC
Specifications-2017. All instruments and personnel for tests shall be
provided by the contractor. Contractor shall inform the Engineer-in-Charge
about the chiller testing schedule min. 10 to 15 days before the chiller is
ready for factory testing.

8.23 Differential and Static Pressure Switches

a) Differentialpressureswitches-air:

i) They shall have field adjustable set-point capability for the specified range.
ii) They shall provide a built-in switching differential at the
set- point over the specified range.
iii) Switches shall be piped to fan discharge except where fans operate at

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 556

less than 25mm WC (water column), they shall be piped across the
fan. Maximum pressure rating shall be atleast 300mm WC.
iv) The electrical contacts shall providedry contacts as specified and
shall be rated for at least 300VA pilot duty@240VAC.

b) Differential pressure switches-water:

i) Switches shall be adjustable differential pressure type as specified in

the sequence of operation or data point summary.
ii) Devices shall be 10 kg/ sq.cm rated except chilled water flow
switches shall be provided with totally sealed vapor tight switch
enclosure on 20 kg/sq.cm body.
iii) Differential pressure switches shall have valved manifold for
servicing.
iv) The electrical contacts shall provide dry contacts as specified and
shall be rated for atleast300VApilotduty@240VAC.

c) Water Hardness Analyser

i) The water hardness analyzer shall be on-line conductivity type and

shall provide analog output proportional to specified range.

ii) Control relays and analog output transducers shall be compatible with
controller output signals. Relays shall be suitable for the loads
encountered. Analog output transducers shall be designed for
precision closed loop control with pneumatic repeatability error no
greater than 2%.
8.24 Level Measurement

a) LevelSwitches

i) Level switches shall be directly vessel mounted type either top

mounted or side mounted as required.
ii) These shall be float type unless specified. Process connection shall
be flanged. Wetted parts shall be made of stainless steel(SS316).

b) Level Sensors

i) Level sensors shall be capacitance probe type.

ii) It shall be possible to mount the transmitter unit integral to the probe
on the vessel or field mounted away from the probe
iii)Unless specified probe insulation shall be of PTFE and probe rod
material SS316
iv) Process connection shall be flanged or BSP connections as specified.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 557

c) AutomaticControlValves

i) Automatic control valves unto 50mm and smaller shall be screwed

type, and valves of 65 mm and larger shall be flanged type.
ii) Valves shall be ANSI-rated to withstand the pressures and
temperatures encountered. Valves shall have stainless-steel stems
and spring loaded Teflon packaging with replaceable discs .
iii) All modulating straight-through water valves shall be provided with
equal-percentage contoured throttling plugs. All three-way valves shall
be provided with linear throttling plugs such that the total flow through
the valve shall remain constant regardless of the valve's position.
iv) Valves shall be sized as specified for a pressure drop equal to the coil
they serve but not to exceed 0.2 kg/ sq.cm.
v) All modulating steam valves shall have linear characteristic for 90% of
the closing stroke and equal-percentage for the final 10%. Valves shall
be sized for 0.68kg/ sq.cm entering steam and 0.2 kg/ sq.cm pressure
drop through valves.
vi) All automatic control valves shall be actuated by a directly coupled
proportional electric actuator. Eccentric linkages are not acceptable.

d) Electric Actuators for Valves and Dampers

i) Unless specified, the electric actuator shall accept proportional input

signal of 0/2- 10VDC or 0/4-20mA. Unless specified actuators shall
provide modulating control. Actuators shall be powered 24VAC or
240VAC as specified.
ii) The actuators shall be designed to deliver the required torque and
have close off pressure ratings as required by the specified process
data
iii) The actuator shall incorporate magnetic coupling to ensure torque
limitation which shall be independent of voltage supply.
iv) Unless specified, in case of power failure the actuator shaft position
will remain stay-put at the last position just before power off.
v) It shall be possible to replace the actuator / remove the actuator /
dismantle it from the valve body without having to remove the valve
body.
The actuator shall have a built-in electronic switch to enable switch-
vi)
over of direct / reverse action of valve/damper. It shall be possible to
change the direct/reverse action of valve without having to remove the
actuator from valve body or change linkage assemblies.
8.25 Codes and Standards

Following standard & guidelines shall be adopted while designing the HVAC

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 558

system.

i) ASHRAE Hand Book

ii) ASHRAE HVAC System and Equipment
iii) NABH guidelines
iv) ISHRAE COVID-19 Guidance Document for Air Conditioning &
Ventilation
v) Duct construction standards as per relevant SMACNA standards
vi) BIS Codes / IE Rules / IS Codes
vii) National fire protection association NFPA.
viii) Health Technical Memorandum 2025 Design consideration,
ventilation in health care premises.
ix) Facilities for critical care HBN 57.
x) National Building Code of India – 2016
xi) CPWD HVAC Specifications-2017
xii) ANSI – American National Standards Institute
xiii) NEMA – National Electrical Manufacturers Association

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 559

C-9 Solar Water Heating System

9.0 Technical Specification of Solar Water Heating System

This specification covers Design, Engineering, Manufacture, Installation, Testing

and Commissioning of Solar Water Heating System. However, the minimum,
Solar Water Heating System of capacity shall be provided for Labour Complex
including NICU, PICU, Kitchen, Canteen, CSSD, ICUs and other areas as per
hospital requirements.

System shall comprise of solar flat plate collector, collectors stand assembly,
SS316 Stainless Steel insulated hot water storage tank with closed circuit heat
exchanger and various other components. Suitable Number of Flat Plate
Collectors should be installed for each Solar Water Heating system. Each Flat
Plate collector should be of at least 100 LPD capacity. These technical
specifications shall be read along with the General Conditions for all E&M
works given under subhead C-B.

9.1 Solar flat plate collector

Solar flat plate collector shall have BIS approval and as per IS: 12933 (Part-1 & 2)
with up-to-date amendments, various components shall be as under:

9.1.1 Cover plate

Cover plate shall be tempered/ toughened glass of thickness 4.0mm (min)

conforming to section-1 of IS: 12933 (Part-2)/2003. The solar transmittance of the
cover plate shall be minimum 82 percent at near normal incidence. The glass shall
be free from bubbles and rough surface.

9.1.2 Collector Box:

Collector box shall be made of Aluminium sections only. Type, grade, size,
workmanship and finish of the material used shall be as per section-2 of IS: 12933
(Part-2)/2003. The minimum thickness of Aluminium shall be as under:

i) Channel section for sides:1.6mm

ii) Support for glass retaining:1.2mm
iii) Sheet for entire body:1.0mm

9.1.3 Absorber:

Absorber shall consist of riser, header and sheet for absorber. Type, grade, size,
workmanship and finish of the material used shall be as per section-3 of IS: 12933
(Part- 2) / 2003. Sheet for absorber shall be made of copper only. Riser and
header assembly designed for working pressure up to 2.5kg/ Square Cm, shall
be tested for leakage at a minimum hydraulic pressure of 5 kg/ Square Cm.

9.1.4 Collector box insulation:

Insulation shall be provided at back and sides. Thermal resistance (R) of

insulation material shall be minimum 0.96 square meter. degree C /W for back

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 560

insulation and minimum 0.48 square meter. degree C /W for side insulation. This
shall be derived after determining thermal conductivity (K) value at 100 degree C
mean temperature in accordance with IS: 3346. Collector box insulation shall
conform to sec.4 of IS: 12933 (Part-2)/2003. Aluminium foil shall be used for covering
the back as well as side installation.

9.1.5 Gaskets and Grommets:

Gaskets and Grommets shall conform to sec.5 of IS: 12933 (Part-2)/2003.

9.2 Insulated hot water storage tank:

The thickness of the water storage tank shall be uniform.

9.2.1 Material:

Insulated hot water storage tank shall be non-pressure type and made of SS
316 grade stainless steel of IS:1570 (Part-5)/1985) (Reaffirmed 2004), TIG/MIG
welded, minimum sheet thickness shall be 16 SWG. The storage tank shall be well
insulated and large enough to hold/store about two days’ supply of hot water.

9.2.2 Insulation:

Solar water heating system shall be insulated with 100 mm thick Rock wool, 48
Kg/m3 density, 22 SWG Aluminium cladding. Alternatively, 50 mm thick CFC
free thermal grade PUF insulation, 32Kg/m3 or higher density may be used.
PUF insulation could be pre-extruded type fitted with FRP exterior cladding or
alternatively injection moulded in a twin walled steel tank and PPE end cap.

9.3 Tank stand assembly & Collector stand assembly:

Shall be made of MS angle of size (min) 40 mm x 40 mm x 5 mm duly pre-treated

and stove enameled with black colour paint. Alternatively, tubular structure with
powder coating could also be provided. The structure should be designed in such
a way that it will take less space and will withstand wind load up to 200
kilometer/hour

a) Electrical back up

For 1000 LPD - 6 KW

For 2000 LPD - 9 KW

Suitable capacity Electrical control panel containing MCCB/MCB,

contractors, Multifunction meter, Auto thermostat cut-off, FRLS PVC
insulated copper conductor wiring and other items as necessary for
electrical back-up shall be provided.

Heat Exchanger of SS 304 material of coil type or any other suitable type
for thermosyphon operation complete in all respects with all accessories as
required shall be provided.

9.4 System inter connection piping:

The Contractor shall provide

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 561

a) Providing and fixing Polyethylene-Aluminium-Polyethylene PE-ALPE

Composite Pressure Pipes conforming to IS - 15450, U.V. stabilized with
carbon black having thermal stability for hot & cold-water supply, capable
to withstand temperature up to 80°C, including all special fittings of composite
material (engineering plastic blend and brass inserts wherever required)
e.g., elbows, tees, reducers, couplers & connectors, accessories, fittings
etc., for hot water piping at terrace and clamps at 1.00 meter spacing. This
includes testing of joints complete as per direction of the Engineer-in-
charge
b) ISI marked, medium class GI pipes of IS:1239 of suitable size inclusive of
all accessories, fittings and necessary supports for connecting Cold water
tank with Solar Water Heating System.

c) ISI marked valves of gun metal shall be provided.

d) Suitable capacity SS304 makeup water tank along with piping and valves as
required shall be provided.

e) Temperature Gauge: Dial type, duly calibrated and suitable for temperature
range from 0 degree C to 120 degree C and shall be provided.

f) Other components essential for completeness of the system as per tender

specifications.

g) Contractor shall submit general arrangement drawings clearly indicating parts

of the system (such as solar flat plate collectors, collectors stand assembly,
internal and external piping, tank stand assembly, various valves, pressure
gauges, temperature gauges, water meter etc.) and their fixing arrangements.

h) The contractor shall supply instruction manual containing following details:

I. The Contractor shall furnish complete and satisfactory type test reports for
each size / type of solar flat plate collector as per contract specification from
any govt. laboratory. Type test reports shall include all the tests listed in IS:
12933 amended up to date.

II. Civil work for foundation, grouting etc. of the system complete as required is
in the scope of this work. While erecting the equipment at terrace, contractor
shall make sure no damage is done to water proofing and civil structure,
location at which grouting is required shall be sealed with high quality water
proofing compound. Installation shall be as per guideline issued by
MNRE/Manufacturer’s standards, whichever is stringent.

9.5 Warranty

All the solar water heating system shall be warrantied for a minimum period of
5 years from the date of installation and commissioning against any
manufacturing and design defects.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 562

C-10 LAN System

10.0 Technical Specifications of LAN & Wi-Fi

10.1 The brief scope of work shall include Planning, design & preparation of
drawings, supplying,installation,testing&commissioning of LAN and Wi-fi
networking cabling system and subsystem componentslike OFC/CAT6A
cables, termination hardware, supporting hardware, necessary
software,licenses and other required to supply, and to install a complete
cabling infrastructurefor the entire campus with backbone and Wi-fi
switches. The total system has to be supplied, installed, tested
andcommissioned in complete manner to have a fully functional system, as
required. If anyitem required to make the scheme functional, is not
specifically mentioned in the scope and specifications, the
sameisdeemedtobeincludedwithinthe scopeofthis tender. These technical
specifications shall be read along with the General Conditions for all E&M
works given under subhead C-B.

10.1.1 GeneralScope
a. The LAN, Wi-Fi network system shall be designed with
100G/40G/10G/1G fiberbackbone with 100% redundancy at Core level
switch and fiber backbone. Thenetwork shall be used for other services
like IP-PABX system, CCTV system,
Accesscontrolsystem,AVsystem,Videoconferencesystem.

b. Agency shall design the sizes of fiber optic cables, capacities of Core
switches, Distribution switches, Access switches, Wi-Fi Access Points,
required firewall, suitable size racks, required hardware and software
including licenses for all the buildings of the campus as per requirement.

c. Earthing system shall be an integral part of the telecommunications

wiring system. In addition to helping protect personnel and equipment
from hazardous voltages, the Earthing system shall reduce the effect of
electromagnetic interference (EMI) to and from the telecommunications
wiring system. Earthing system shall meet the IE/NEC requirements and
practices or local authorities or codes.

d. Suitable Data Centre shall be established in Hospital Building, which

comprises of LAN Core Switches and shall accommodate IP-PABX
server, CCTV server are deemed to be part of this sub head and included
in the scope of work.

10.1.2 InternalLAN,Wi-Finetwork.
a. The Internal LAN, Wi-Fi network system shall consists Main routers,
Firewalls, Coreswitches with 100% redundancy at fire wall, distribution
switches, access switches,suitable size racks, Wi-Fi indoor access
points, required hardware, software withlicenses (for not less than 5
years from the date of completion and taking over ofthe whole project),
Cat6A cabling for all data points, IP-PABX points, CCTV points,Access
control points, video conferencing Hospitals and adjoining Hospitals. The
further detailson IP-PABX system, CCTV & Access control system and

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 563

video conferencing referrespectivesubheadsofthis tenderdocument.

b. TheRackPanelsshallcompriseofjack/Patchpanels,Networkswitches,patc
hcords,powersupply units,CoolingFans,Wire managers,LIUs,Trans-
receivers,Fiber patch cord etc. of individual buildings/Blocks/ floors shall
be provided as perrequirementsandspecifications.

c. Every floor shall have suitable no. of floor-standing / wall-mounted racks

withsuitableno.ofswitchesineachwingwheretheCAT-
6Acablingfromtherespective floor data points shall terminate.The
contractor shall ensure that themaximum length from the switch to the
data point including the patch cords etc.does not exceed 80m. There
shall be 20% redundancy on each switch. Each floorrack shall be
connected to the Server Room Main racks through backbone
OpticalFiber cable and links. Each rack shall have dual linkage from the
different serverracks.

d. High speed Data Networking system is to be provided in the campus.

Work
shallincludeallpassiveandActivecomponentsincludingCoreSwitch,Distrib
utionSwitch, Access Switch (L2, L3 Switches), Fire wall, and NMS/SD.
The Local AreaNetwork should be a three tier Architecture, Both Core
Switches connectivity
todistributionswitcheson100G/40G/10Gwithredundantfibercablesandfro
mdistribution to Access switches on 10G/1G with redundant fiber cables.
The LocalArea Network System shall have all the main devices in
redundancy mode
likeRedundantCoreSwitches,RedundantFirewalls,RedundantWi-
FiControllerRedundantRouters.

e. The server shall be connected to Core Switch, Redundant core in Active-

Activemode(Active-activeclusteringisadataresiliencyarchitectureinwhich
clientworkloadsare distributedacross two or more nodes ina cluster
tokeepyourdatasafeandavailableintheeventofanunexpectedcomponentf
ailure)Core Switch with switching capacity of 6.4Tbps with 32 QSFP28
ports from day 1,dual hot swappable internal power Source and Core
switch to Distribution Switch between
Connectivity Minimum 40 Gand switch shall be through Optical Fiber
cable.

f. The Server shall have Fire wall protection, Bandwidth management &
required client Access license.

g. The Rack Panel/computer hub at various floors shall be connected to

Main rack ofthe building/ block with Fiber Optic Cable through conduit or
raceways on surface/recess.

h. Installation, termination and identification of wiring between networking

distribution rack(s) and main rack(s) shall be considered part of the
system provider’s work. All cables and terminations shall be tested,
identified, labeled with ferrules on both ends and documented at all
locations.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 564

i. Complete installation shall be done in accordance with installation

practices for awell-structured cabling system, using components from a
single vendor to ensureconsistent and assured performance. The
structured cabling distribution networkshall serve as a vehicle for
transport of data, video, and voice telephony signalsover a common
network throughout the network. Devices and services that shall run on
the passive network shall include, but not limited to,the following:

i. WiredLAN access
ii. WirelessLAN access
iii. Voice communications servers and IP/SIPend points
iv. IP-based CCTV/Surveillance Cameras
v. Ipbased Access Control System/SCADA System

10.1.3 Inventory for both internal and external (Minimum):

The data outlets, in general, shall be provided as per inventory and drawings pro posed.The
LAN network is to be providedin
I. Hospital Building
II. Mortuary
III. Substation & Services Building
IV. MGPs Room
V. STP/ETP Room
All the above building networks shall be interconnected.

10.1.4 The Minimum Inventory of LAN system is asfollows:

----- Inventory will be prepaire by agency -----

The above inventories are indicative only, the agency has to design
andsubmit the inventories as per requirement and get them approved
before execution atsite.

10.1.5 The specifications for items in this section, applies to the following:

a) Singlemode,multi- mode fiber opticcable (OM4) and associated

components such as distribute on shelves, LIUs, pigtails and patch
cords.

b) Category 6A cables and associated components such as distribution

shelves, patch panels, patchchords, Information Outlets, face
platesetc.

c) Networking Racks–for termination of networking cables.

10.1.6 Fiber optic cable can be installed inside buildings using the same
methods as coaxial cable or twisted pair; however, the following
guidelines should be observed:

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 565

a) Do not deform the cable sheath, specifically when using cable

fasteners or tiesto secure the cable to a support or hardware

b) Donotpullfiberopticcablesoverexistingcables.Thefrictioncouldbeexces
sive and cause cable damage. The cables may also become
entangled,resultingindamagetothefiberoptic cable.

c) Do not exceed minimum (installed and long-term) bend radius. (The

minimumbend radius varies with the cable diameter. Consult the
appropriate Cablespecification.)

d) Do not pull the cable around sharp corners, such as support brackets.
Provideadditionalcrush /mechanical protectioninhigh-
riskenvironments.

e) Secure the cable to larger permanent cables or available supports

when possible. Do not attach the cable to cables that may be removed
later or tosteam orwaterlines.

10.1.7 Passive Components:

a) All Copper & fiber components should be from the same OEM.

b) All product Data Sheets shall be available on the OEM’s public

website, the same will be also referred to when evaluating the
technical submission.

c) All factory test reports of the Copper/Fiber component hard copies to

submitted with the material supply.

d) There should be minimum 25-year extended product warranty and

ApplicationAssuranceforcompletechannel.

e) The copper panels shall be upgradeable to intelligence in the field at

a laterstage with the Intelligent Upgrade Kit. The upgrade shall be
performed withoutnetworkdisruptions,withouttheremovalofpatchcords.

f) Certified Partner should submit Manufacturer Authorization Formfrom

OE M

g) All Single Mode FO Cables, Patch cords and Pigtails should be made
up of Bend In sensitive Fibers
h) Allthe copper cables, Patch cords, Fiber Patch cords should be LSZ
Honly

i) All the passive components shall have their Testing reports from the
OEM withBatch No. and all standard parameters. There shall be the
proper ferruling andNumbering on the Cat 6A/fiber cables. There shall
be proper dressing of the cables and equipment management in side
the racks.

j) The Cat 6A cable installation measurements shall be done through

Penta orfluke scanning with standard parameters and shall have the
OEM certification for the installation of all the components.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 566

k) The optical fiber splicing for connecting in LIU or anywhere in the

campus shall be the part of installation offiber.

l) The optical fiber cable installation shall be checked by the OTDR

machine andthe reports shall meet all the parameters of the technical
data sheet of the Cable and shall have the OEM certification for the
installation.

m) After installation & OEM certification, Commissioning of the passive

components shall be completed.

10.1.8 ActiveComponents

Campus LAN Network shall be designed considering highly available &

scalability. Network must have fast converge, self-healing itself without
human intervention and have minimal disruption in
services to with stand any one of component,linketc.failures.
The component providing there dundancy should also provide additional benefits,
such as load balancing. To the network during normal operations. This objective
can beachieved by using mechanisms such as Virtual Switching/Virtual Port
Channel/MLAG,and routing protocols that can load-balance across multiple
paths. Current Network shall bedesignedusing a3-tierarchitecture.

The overall physical architecture of campus LAN backbone network shall consist
of below elements.

a) Core Layer: The core layer shall be responsible for aggregating all the
traffic residing andflowing in the below distributed layer or network.
The core switch will be hosted inthe Data Centre that will provide
connectivity between Wi-Fi traffic, surveillance,VOIP& user
applications hosted inside the DC and field devices
installed/positionedin the campus network. The core switch will be
installed in redundant manner, withredundant&hot-
swappable fan & Power supplies.The multiple corering will connect to
Data Centre Hospitals and adjoining Hospitals & will be
foundational network over multiple or single of 100/40/10 Gbps link
using single modefiber.

b) Distribution layer: It act as distribution node in overall hierarchy of the

network. This layer will be on 100/40Gbps ring minimum for north
bound uplinks. This node will terminate the aggregation node ring with
at least 10 Gbps speed from day one. South bound port will on 1G and
will downlink to Access Layer. The Distribution switch will be installed
in redundant manner, with redundant & hot-swappable fan & Power
supplies.

c) Access Layer: These switches shall be configured with multiple VLANs

for sending traffic to/from Distribution node. These switches shall be
used to provide wired connectivity to all end user end point layer
devices like IP CCTV Camera, Laptop, Desktop, Access point & IP
Phones. Access Layer switches should have capabilities to provide a
convenient way to save and share common configurations. To enable

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 567

features and settings based on the location of a switch in the network

and for mass configuration deployments across the network. All the
end point devices will be connected over 1Gbps speed and uplink to
Distribution layer over 10 or 25 Gbps.

d) WAN connectivity and other components:

Internet Links shall be terminated at internet routers. This shall be
either from NKN or Service Provider or both. Routers are proposed in
high availability and scalable to support 10Giga Internet Bandwidth.
Each router shallhaveredundantPowersupply.

10.2 WirelessNetwork:
a) Wireless network shall be based on latest bandwidth (802.11 a/b/g/n)
compliant and supporting multi users covering various in door and
latest band width(8 02.11ah)compliant for out door locations or better.

b) All Access points shall be managed by centralized wireless controller

placed in campusServer room. This wireless controller shall be
configured in high availably to avoid anydowntime.

c) Indoor Access points will be poweredonvia POE+access

switches. Out door access points may power on viaany source as
prefeasibility and site survey.

d) Network Manager to manage both switching and wireless network

devices spread across networkshall be noted.

e) Wirelessaccesspoints&ControllerforWi-
Ficonnectivityshouldhaveradiostosupport2.4Ghzand5Ghzbandina4X4
:4Mu-MIMOconfigurationwithsupportfor 802.11 a/b/g/n/ac Controller
shouldbe AI driven on premise or cloud-based controller. The
controller should be based
on Micro Services based Architecture. The solution should support
802.11 acprimarily.

10.3 NetworkSecurity
a) Network security can go beyond conventional
anomalydetectionbyharnes singthepower of network traffic flow data.
Real-time situational awareness of all the users,devices, and traffic on
network shall allows to respond to threats quickly and effectively.Thus,
it can detect and protect against a wide range of attacks with
continuous monitoringand intelligence. Traffic flow analysis for all
connected devices to proactively get detailsof security threat vectors.
This shall include details like IP address of sender / receiver,alongwith
basic parametersthetime,date,and size of network transaction.

b) Central Authentication, Authorization and network device

management server shall
be placed in HA with required number of licenses. Next Generation
Firewall must be deployed in redundancy with multiple segment
based on user traffic flow and exposureto internal and external internet
traffic.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 568

c) DNS based security to block malicious destinations before connection

is established and stop malware beforeitenters LAN network.

GENERALARCHITECTURE:

10.4 Specifications for Structured Cable and Components:

1 Optical Fiber Cable (OFC)

6F SM (OS2) 9/125, Outdoor ECCS Armored Fiber, with PBT

Loose Tube Filled with Thixotropic Jelly, 2 Nos of FRP/ Steel
wire under HDPE Sheathing as strength member Unitube UV-
HDPE, Black

Should fulfill the standard Compliance of ITU G.652.D (OS2),

IEC 60794-1

No of Cores: 6

Max. Attenuation: At 1310 nm <= 0.36 dB/km, At 1550 nm

<=0.22 dB/km

Fiber/Tube Identification: Single Tube

Fiber protection (Tubes): Polybutylene Terephthalate (PBT)

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 569

Armouring: ECCS Armoring

Outer Sheath: UV Stabilised High Density Polyethylene (HDPE)

Central Strength Member: 2 Nos of Steel Music Wire Embedded

in Sheath

Water Blocking: Water blocking tape

Gel filled: Thixotropic Jelly

Cable Diameter (D) :8.5 ± 0.5 mm

Armor Thickness: 1.5 mm

Min. Bending Radius (during Installation): 20 D; D-Outer

Diameter

Max. Tensile Strength-Short Term: 1000N [IEC 60794-1-2-E1]

Max. Crush Resistance-Short Term: 2000N/100 mm [IEC 60794-

1-2-E3]

Operating Temperature range: -20°C to +60°C IEC 60794-1-2-

F1]

2 LC Type 9/125μm OS2 Fiber Optic Simplex Pigtail

Type: 9/125-micron fiber performance

Jacket Material: LSZH complying to IEC 61034-1 & 2, IEC-

60332-1, IEC-60754-1 & 2

Storage Temperature: -40°C to + 60°C

Connector Insertion Loss: 0.20dB (Max)

Attenuation: 1310/1550: 0.30/0.20 dB/KM

3 Patch Cord, LC, Duplex, SM, G652D, PC, LSZH

Cable: LC-LC 9/125μm OS2 Single mode Duplex Patch Cord

Length: 3mtrs

Connectors: The optical fiber patch leads shall comprise of

Single mode 9/125μm fiber with 2XLC type fiber connectors
terminated at each end of fiber patch cord.

Insertion loss should be better than 0.35 dB

Jacket Material: LSZH complying to IEC 61034-1 & 2, IEC-

60332-1, IEC-60754-1 & 2

Attenuation: 1310/1550

Connector Loss: 0.30dB(max)

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 570

Repeatability: <= 0.2DB 1000 Times Mating Cycles

4 Fiber Optic LIU Rack Mount LIU (12/24 Ports)

1U, Rack Mount-Sliding-Loaded (SC/LC) SM OS2 Fiber Optic

LIU, loaded with required numbers of (LC/SC) SM Pigtail,
Adapter Plate, Adapter / Coupler, Splice Tray, Cable routing
spool and with 4 Cable & Exist with Rubber Gourmet

Should have Slide type drawer structure, with Screw fit lock
design.

Height: 1 U, 1.75 inches 6/12/24 F Count

Material: 1.2 mm Steel Metal with Black texture Power Coating

1U Size: 490x340x45mm

Compatible with《YD/T 778-2006 Optical Distribution Frame》

Compatible with《YD/T 1272.1-2003 Optical Fiber Connector

Part 1: Type LC》

Compatible with《YD/T 1272.3-2005 Optical Fiber Connector

Part 3: Type SC》

Compatible with《YD/T 1272.4-2007 Optical Fiber Connector

Part 4: Type FC》

Operating Temperature: -20°C to +55°C

Port Density: 6/12/24Fiber per 1U LC/SC Adaptor Plates (Single

mode)

The adaptor plate should be pre-loaded with LC/SC Type Single

mode Duplex Adaptors.

Compliance: RoHS Compliant

Technical Specification for Structured Cable and Components:

6 Cat 6A UTP Cable

Cat 6 A UTP Data Cable Consists of 4 Pair PE Insulated Solid

Annealed Bare Copper Conductors, Two insulated conductors
twisted together to form a pair and four such pairs laid up Over
Cross filler to form the basic unit, Rip Cord, and LSZH Outer
Jacket.

Cat6A 23 AWG Solid Conductor UTP LSZH Cable roll of 305 Mtr,
in accordance to ANSI/TIA 568 C.2 and ISO/IEC 11801 2nd ED
(Class EA), 500 Mhz tested, Flammability IEC 60332-1-2 IEC
60754 -1,2 & 3, IEC 60134-2, RoHS Certified and UL & ETL Listed
Cable.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 571

Category 6A U/UTP cables shall extend between the work area

location and its associated telecommunications closet and
consist of 4 pair. ISO/IEC 60332-1-2; IEC 60754-1 & 2; IEC
61034-2

Conductor: Solid Copper

Conductor Diameter: 0.57+/- 0.03mm (23 AWG Solid Conductor)

Insulator HD Polyethylene solidDiameter (1.08 ± 0.05mm)

Jacket: LSZH (IEC 60332-1-2)

Outer Diameter: 7.2± 0.2mm

Max Temperature: -20°C to + 70°C

Mechanical Test

Breaking strength400N.

Electrical Test

D.C. resistance conductor :<9.38Ω /100m

Resistance Unbalance 5% Max

Mutual Capacitance :< 5.6nF/100m

Capacitance Unbalance :< 330PF/100m

Dielectric Strength: DC 1500V/Min

Operating Temperature: -20°C to +70°C

Propagation Delay Skew 1–500 MHz: Max. 45 ns/100 m

Should be RoHS complied & UL, ETL Verified.

7 Cat 6A UTP RJ 45 Keystone Jack

RJ45 Jack of Category 6A, for the establishing of transmission

channels of class EA with up to 4 plugged connections, complies
with Category 6A requirements of the standards ISO/IEC
11801:2.1 edition, IEC 60603-7-4 2nd Edition, EN 50173-1,
ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-C.2, ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-D.2 backwards
compatible with Cat6, Cat.5e and Cat.5.

Suitable for 10GBase-T applications in acc. with IEEE 802.3an

more than or equal to 500 MHz.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 572

Compatible with RJ standard plugs (RJ11, RJ12, RJ45), PCB-

and Universal tool& Toolless based connection of installation
cables AWG 23 – 26. YDT926.3-2009

IDC termination should feature nil crossover in acc. with EIA/TIA

568-A/B, Tin phosphor bronze contacts for complying IEC
60603-7

Each Jack should be supplied with one Strain relief boot and
additional bend limiting boot and a cable tie for proper holding of
cable to the JACK.

The Bend limiting boot should have additional clip or locking

facility to project the Cable and it should be inbuilt with the JACK.

Housing material: High impact flame retardant plastic (UL-94-V0)

Jack Contacts: Phosphor bronze, 50 micro-inch gold over nickel

plating of 40μ ~ 80μ

Plug Retention Force: 30 lbs minimum

Dielectric Withstand Volt: DC1000V/AC750V 1min

Contact Resistance: <= 20 mΩ

Current Rating: 1.5A at 68°F

Plug insertion Life: >=750 times plug in

Temperature Test: -10°C to 68°C

Material: RoHS complied

Should be UL / ETL Complied

8 Patch Cord, UTP 4P, Cat.6A, length 1.0/ 2.0 m

Standardization: Compliant with Cat.6A, Class EA requirements:

ISO/IEC 11801 2.1 Edition, EIA/TIA 568-C.2 AND IEC/ISO
11801 Compliant with Cat.6A component

Cable shield: UTP with LSZH sheathing

Number of conductors: 8

Stranding: 7 x 0.16 mm (26 AWG)

Cable jacket characteristics: cable, metal-free

Cable overall diameter: 6.1±0.3 mm

Tube / Wire type: stranded conductor

Insulation: foam skin, polyolefin, 0.98±0.02mm OD.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 573

Plug: Feature cable retention, with enhanced pull strength.

Cat 6A patch cord plug to have round cable holder and strain relief
boot to avoid bending.

plug should have high repeatability cross talk performance

Plug design should be with 3 Pin internal lock for cable guide
and holding the plug with cable to provide maximum tension

Should be UL /ETL Complied.

9 19"- 1U - 24 Port / 19"- 2U - 48 Port Copper Patch Panel

24-Port 1U / 48-port 2U Unloaded Universal Modular Straight

Patch Panel, pre-loaded with cable support Bar, Individual port
transparent shutter and labelling point, Preloaded earthing plug
for surge protection. UL & ETL Verified. CRC Metal / Steel with
Black Powder Coated. RoHS Compliant, in accordance to
ANSI/TIA-568-C.2, ISO/IEC 11801:2002/AMMD.2:2010, YD/T
926.3-2009, ISO/IEC 60603-7 standards. Safety parameters as
per UL 94V-0,

Patch panel should be Enhanced with cable strain relief with

retention tray; It should have integrated cable support Bar along
with the panel with clip mechanism.

Each port of the panel should have individual transparent

labelling point

Panel should be inbuild transparent spring shutter for dust

protection on each port.

Material: sub-rack made of Aluminum / Steel

Information Outlet or connection module should comply with the

specification mentioned above

Panel should be supplied with earthing wire and earther lug with
each panel

ANSI/TIA-568-C.2, ISO/IEC 11801:2002/AMMD.2:2010, YD/T

926.3-2009, ISO/IEC 60603-7 standards

Should be RoHS& UL/ ETL complied.

10 Faceplate

Should be UK style Keystone-type Faceplates are available in 1,

2 & 4 port configurations

Should be featured with spring shutter options

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 574

Should support Work with both Flush and Wall mount box

Should support Operating Temperature: -10～+60; Storage

Temperature: -40～+68; Humidity: 10%~90% RH

Material: ABS, UL 94V-0; Spring; Surface Finish: Polished

Shutter Face Plate with elegant 2 Piece, hidden screw design

ABS- UL.

11 Cat6/Cat6A Field Termination Plug (Industrial Grade)

Standardization: Compliant with Cat.6A, Class EA requirements:

ISO/IEC 11801 2nd Edition backward Compliant with Cat.6
component standards IEC 60603-7-4 and 60603-7-5

Cable: UTP LSZH

Number of conductors: 8

Termination: IDC type Tool less

RJ45 Plug Metal covers: PA

RJ45 Plug contacts: Copper Alloy

Plastic Wire Organizer: PC, Color: White, UL 94V-0

IDC Durability: ≥20 Termination cycles

Insertion/withdrawal cycles: ≥500 Plug-Jack mating cycles per

IEC 60603-7-81

Operating Temperature: -20 degree C to +70 degree C

Patch Cord retention strength: 7.7 Kg Max. according to IEC

60603-7-5

Degree of protection: IP 20

Number of positions: 8

Transmission characteristics (category): Cat6(100 Mbps)/Cat6A

(10G Base T)

Pollution degree: 3

Insulation resistance: ≥100 MΩ

Rated current: 1.75A

Rated voltage: 50V DC

RoHS & UL / ETL complied

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 575

Warranty:

Owner seeks warranty for the installed cable plant from the OEM equipment
supplier. Biddershall ensure that the OEM norms for supply, installation,
testing and documentation as specifiedby the OEM supplier shall be
adhered to, provided those are in line with TIA / EIA standards andOwner
requirement specifications. The warranty shall be provided by the OEM
vendor. The duration of the warranty shall be for a minimum of 25years and
shall cover the system performance, application assurance and the costs of
the supplyofcomponents andinstallation.

10.5 SpecificationsOfActiveComponents:
Sl.
Detailed Technical Specifications
No

A Solution Requirement

The Switch should support non-blocking Layer 2 switching and

Layer 3 routing

There switch should not have any single point of failure like power
supplies and fans etc. should have 1:1/N+1 inbuilt level of
redundancy

B Hardware and Interface Requirement

Switch should have the 32 x 40G/100G QSP28 ports

Switch should have 16GB DRAM and 64GB Flash/Storage

Switch should support Configuration roll-back and check point

Switch should support for different logical interface types like

loopback, VLAN, SVI/RVI, Port Channel, multi chassis port
channel/LAG etc.

100K IPv4 routes and 100k IPv6 routes entries in the routing table
with 48000 Multicast Routes

The switch should support hardware-based load sharing at wire

speed using LACP and multi chassis etherchannel/ LAG

Switch should support minimum 6.4Tbps of switching capacity

C Layer2 Features

Spanning Tree Protocol (IEEE 8201.D, 802.1W, 802.1S)

Switch should support minimum 200,000 no. of MAC addresses

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 576

h should support 64 Nos. of link or more per Port channel (using

LACP) and support 64 number of ports per Link Aggregation
Group

Support for broadcast, multicast and unknown unicast storm

control to prevent degradation of switch performance from storm
due to network attacks and vulnerabilities

D Layer3 Features

Switch should support all physical ports to use either in Layer2 or

Layer 3 mode and also should support layer 3 VLAN Interface and
Loopback port Interface

Switch should support static and dynamic routing like Static,

OSPF and BGP

Switch should provide multicast traffic reachable using PIM-SM

and SSM

E Availability

Switch should provide gateway level of redundancy in IPv4 and

IPv6 using HSRP/ VRRP

Switch should support for BFD For Fast Failure Detection

F Quality of Service

Switch system should support 802.1P classification and marking

of packet CoS, DSCP etc.

Switch should support for different type of QoS features for real
time traffic differential treatment using WRED and SP Queuing

Switch should support Flow control of Ethernet ports to control

traffic rates during congestion by allowing congested nodes to
pause link operation at the other end for receiving traffic as per
IEEE 802.3x

G Security

Switch should support for deploying different security for each

logical and physical interface using Port Based access control lists
of Layer-2 to Layer-4 in IP V4 and IPv6 and logging for fault finding
and audit trail

Switch should support control plane i.e., processor and memory

Protection from unnecessary or DoS traffic by control plane
protection policy

Switch should support for AAA using TACACS+ / Radius

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 577

Switch should support to restrict end hosts in the network.

Secures the access to an access or trunk port based on MAC
address. It limits the number of learned MAC addresses to deny
MAC address flooding

Switch should support for Role Based access control (RBAC) for
restricting host level network access as per policy defined

Switch should support to prevent edge devices in the network not

administrator's controlled from becoming Spanning Tree Protocol
root nodes

Switch should support unicast and/or multicast blocking on a

switch port to suppress the flooding of frames destined for an
unknown unicast or multicast MAC address out of that port

H Manageability

Switch should support for RMON I / II

Switch should provide remote login for administration Telnet,

SSHv2

Switch should support for management and monitoring status

using different type of Industry standard NMS using SNMP V2 and
V3

Switch should support for basic administrative tools like Ping and
traceroute

Switch should support central time server synchronization using

Network Time Protocol NTP V4

I IPv6 features

Switch should support for IPv6 connectivity and routing required

for network reachability using different routing protocols such as
OSPFv3, BGP+ etc.

Should support route redistribution between these protocols

J Safety and Compliances

Switch should be IPv6 Certified

Switch Should be Common Criteria/NDPP/NDcPP certified

OEM should be leader in Gartner data centre latest report.

10.6 Distribution Switch

Sl.
Detailed Technical Specifications
No.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 578

Architecture

1 Switch fabric capacity - 1.2 Tbps

2 Switch forwarding rates – 1000 Mbps

24 x 1G/10Gigabit Ethernet ports scalable to 40 x 1/10G and 4

3
x 40G Ports with required optics

Connectivity

802.3ad based standard port/link aggregation, Jumbo frames,

4
storm control

Switching features

5 Support at least 20000 ARP entries and 120K MAC Address

6 Should support 64 LAG groups and upto 16 ports per LAG.

L3 Features

Support for 64K IPv4 and 64k IPv6 routes and 24K multicast
7
routes

Layer3 routing protocols like Static, RIP, OSPF, RIPnG,

8
OSPFv3 from day 1

9 Should support L3VPN, BGP

10 IGMP v1, v2, v3, IGMP snooping, PIM SM, MSDP

DC features

11 Datacenter bridging exchange, IEEE 802.1Qbb

12 Enhanced Transmission Selection (ETS)

13 Data Center Bridging Exchange Protocol

14 Should support VXLAN

Security

15 Control plane denial-of-service (DoS) protection

16 Filtering based on source and destination address

support for various ACL/ filters like port based, Vlad based and
17
routed filters/ACL

Quality Of Service

18 minimum 8 number of hardware queues per port

19 802.1p, WRED

Management

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 579

SNMP v1, v2, v3, RMON enabled, SSH, telnet, CLI and should
20
have out of Band Management port

Switch should support port mirroring feature for monitoring

21
network traffic of a particular port/VLAN.

Extended ping and traceroute, Configuration and Image

22
rollback.

Switch should have internal Hot Swappable redundant Power

23
supply

24 Should have redundant cooling FANS

Certifications

Switch should be ROHS compliant, WEEE, EN 55022 Class A

25
and CISPR

26 Switch should be IPv6 Logo Certified

27 Switch Should be Common Criteria/NDPP/NDcPP certified

28 OEM should be Leader in Gartner latest reports Data Centre

10.7 Access PoE Switch

Sl.
Detailed Technical Specifications
No.

Minimum 24 x 10/100/1000 Base-T PoE+ and 4 x 1/10G ports.

1
(With required transceiver modules)

1 U Rack mountable and should provide stacking of minimum 9

switches with 140 Gbps of dedicated stacking/ equivalent
2
bandwidth (All the stacking accessories should be included from
day 1).

3 The Switch should have 2GB DRAM and 2GB internal Flash

240 Gbps or higher Backplane capacity and minimum 190 Mpps

4
of forwarding rate

5 Should support non-blocking hardware architecture

All interfaces should provide wire speed forwarding for both Fiber
6
and copper modules

7 Support for at least 2000 VLANs & 32k MAC address

8 should support IGMP snooping v1,v2 & v3

should support static IP routing and should be upgradable to

9
support OSPF and PIM

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 580

10 Switch should support 8 hardware queues per port

11 Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) snooping

12 Switch should support LLDP capabilities

Should support IP Source Guard, DAI and IPv6 Security feature

13
like IPv6 RA Guard and IPv6 Neighbor Discovery Inspection

Should support Secure Shell (SSH) Protocol and Simple

14
Network Management Protocol Version 3 (SNMPv3).

Switch needs to have console port for administration &

15
management

Management using CLI, GUI using Web interface should be

16
supported

17 FTP/TFTP for upgrading the operating System

18 Should support Energy Efficient Ethernet

19 IEEE 802.1x support

20 IEEE 802.1D Spanning-Tree Protocol

21 IEEE 802.1p class-of-service (CoS) prioritization

22 IEEE 802.1Q VLAN

23 IEEE 802.3 10BASE-T specification

24 IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX specification

Switch should have internal redundant power supply and Hot

25
swappable fans

Switch should able to support management via CLI, Web

26
interface

27 SNMP v1, v2, v3

28 Switch should be manageable through both IPv4 & IPv6.

Switch should be UL-UL60950-1, FCC Part 15, VCCI Class A,

29 EN 55022, EN 55024, EN 300386, CAN/CSA 22.2 No.60950-1,
RoHS Complied.

30 Switch Should be Common Criteria NDPP/NDcPP certified

10.8 ITAM

Sl. No Specifications

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 581

Rack based Intel Core i7 or better,

Web Appliance Hardware
1 3.20GHz w/ HD Graphics

Memory 32GB 4x8GB DDR4 2666MHz

Minimum 1 TB SATA/SSD Drive

Integrated NIC

COTS Compliant

2 Web Appliance Software

Capture specifications, warranties, Serial

Numbers, MAC Addresses, IP info, what
Items
other H/W relates/connects to this H/W,
item status, event logs, assignees

Software Specifications, License information

Location of each asset building, floor,

Locations
room, rack, rack row, row depth

Define custom contract types, like

Contracts support& maintenance, SLA, etc. Track
contract events.

Multiple tags for items and software. You

Tags may use tags for grouping according to
usage, budget, owner, importance, etc.

Attach documents to every main object

Files entity (Items, Software, Invoices,
Contracts)
Display rack layout with items assigned
Racks to each rack row. (Supports multiple
items/rack row).
Print label stickers for tag all your assets,
with or without barcode, from phones
Print labels and laptops to cooling units and UPS.
Easily define new label paper layouts
through the GUI.
Get a full backup of the installation and
Backup
data. Ability to restore
All screen pages/lists/reports print-outs
Page Print Support possible without menus, scrollbars and
other clutter.
Interface Translations Translation file support
Pull user list for item assignment from an
LDAP support
LDAP URL

10.9 Indoor Access Point/Outdoor

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 582

Sl.
No Specification

1 The Access Point proposed must have radios to support

2.4Ghz and 5 Ghz channels with 802.11ac Wave-2, 4X4:4 MU-
MIMO with a throughput of up to 2.5 Gbps.
2 Should come with standard Mounting Brackets
3 Access point should have a Gigabit link that can support atleast
1 Gbps of throughput.
4 Should be capable of Band Steering
5 Should support Way finding within covered areas to start with.
6 Should not require any calibration for configuration of BLE
location-based messaging
7 AP should support encrypted data transmission between user
and also to cloud management platform
8 Should support virtual BLE technology
9 Should support automatic RF optimization
10 WIPS/WIDS detection of rogue and honeypot Access Point
detection,
11 Should be able to limit per SSID or per user based, uplink or
downlink bandwidth
12 Should be based on the platform of Artificial Intelligence
13 Should have following compliances: -
UL 60950-1 CAN/CSAC22.2 No. 60950-1
FCC Part 15.247, 15.407, 15.107, and 15.109 RSS247
ICES003
Artificial Intelligence Support from wireless access point to
14 Switching end.

10.10 Wireless Controller (Wi-Fi Controller)

SN Specification
1 Should have a Artificial Intelligence (AI) driven, Cloud based
Controller
2 The Solution should support 802.11ac primarily and should be
backward compatible to 802.11n/a/b/g. The solution should also
support 802.11ax as per requirement.
3 The solution should support Location Based services via
Bluetooth low energy and should also support Asset Tracking.
4 The solution should support Guest Portal
5 The solution should support WIPS, Rouge AP detection and
Honeypot AP detection
6 Should be able to provide insights based on Time to connect,
successful connect, coverage, capacity, AP Uptime, Roaming
and throughput.
7 should be able to integrate with various authentication
mechanism including the RADIUS servers, etc.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 583

8 Should support Dynamic Packet capture to enhance

troubleshooting.
9 Should support upto 16 SSIDs per AP and the cloud controller
should be scalable to handle around 5000 APs or more in future
10 Should have a virtual assistant to troubleshoot deeper and
facilitate investigation of existing or future issues in the Wi-Fi
network

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 584

11 Must be able to limit per SSID based uplink or downlink

Bandwidth
12 Must be able to limit per user-based uplink or downlink
bandwidth
13 Must be able to provide per application bandwidth limit as well
14 The per application-based Bandwidth limit should be applicable
on Home Grown or Organization specific applications as well
15 Pre-staging of APs should be possible to have zero touch
provisioning
16 Should support bulk configuration based on templates
17 Should be able to handle interference and shift the
communication on another channel automatically if, needed
18 Should be able to create access policies based on various
groups/labels/subnets
19 Should be able to extend API to integrate with other systems as
well.
20 Network Switching should also Artificial Intelligence (AI) driven,

10.11 NMS

Minimum Specification
SN Requirement
IT infrastructure Proposed Network Management system
Monitoring shall monitor key metrics like availability to
measure SLA’s. Following are key
functionalities that are required which will
1 assist administrators to monitor network
faults & performance degradations in
order to reduce own times, increase
availability and take proactive actions to
remediate & restore network services.
The proposed tool should be able to
monitor various operating system
2 parameters such as processors, memory,
files, processes, file systems, etc. where
applicable.
Device Discovery The proposed solution must automatically
discover management elements
connected to the infrastructure and map
3
the connectivity between them. Solution
should provide centralized monitoring
console displaying network topology map.
Audit The system should be able to clearly
identify configuration changes and
4
administrators should receive an alter in
such cases

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 585

Dashboarding The system should provide complete and

up-to date picture of the managed
environment. Should have capability to
received discovery and topology
information from multiple automated
discovery sources on a near realtime
5
basis Solution should provide a
consolidated event dashboard of the
entire IT environment covering
virtualization technologies, third-party
products, applications, servers, storage,
networks
Accept Data from a variety of formats,
provide pre-configured connectors and
6
adapters, Ability to define Adapters to data
source in a visual manner without coding.
Reporting Proposed solution should provide
7 customizable reporting interface to create
custom reports for collected data
The System must use advanced root-
cause analysis techniques, discovered
8 topology data and policy-based condition
correlation technology for comprehensive
analysis of infrastructure faults.
Solution should support effective root
cause analysis, support capabilities for
investigating the root causes of failed
9
service levels and must make it possible
to find the underlying events that cause
the service level contract to fail.
The proposed tool should integrate with
network performance management
10 system and support operating system
monitoring for various platforms supplied
as part of the solution
Web Appliance Rack based Intel Quad Core Processor or
Hardware better, 3.20GHz, Memory 32GB 4x8GB
11
DDR4 RAM or Higher 2666MHz, Minimum
1 TB SATA/SSD Drive, Integrated NIC

10.12 NETWORK ANALYZER

Minimum Specification
SN
Requirement
Network Network performance tool should provide
performance Network bandwidth usage, Packet loss
1 rate, Interface error rate, High CPU or
memory utilization, Number of tcp
connections is anomaly high for this day of

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 586

the week, Aggregate throughput of core

routers is low.
Network Monitoring Proposed Network Tool shall monitor key
KPI metrics like availability to measure
SLA’s. Following are key functionalities
that are required which will assist
2 administrators to monitor network faults &
performance degradations in order to
reduce own times, increase availability
and take proactive actions to remediate &
restore network services.
Network Discovery The proposed solution must automatically
discover network elements connected to
the infrastructure and map the connectivity
3
between them. Solution should provide
centralized monitoring console displaying
network topology map.
Network Health The solution should provide monitoring of
Link is down, System status is in
warning/critical state, Device temperature
4 is too high / too low, Power supply is in
critical state, Free disk space is low, Fan
is in critical state, No SNMP data
collection
Configuration The proposed solution should provide
changes capability of monitoring new device added
or removed Network module is added,
5 removed or replaced, Firmware has been
upgraded, Device serial number has
changed, Interface has changed to lower
speed or half-duplex mode
Dash boarding The system should provide complete and
up-to date picture of the Network. Should
have capability to received discovery and
topology information from multiple
6
automated discovery sources on a near
Realtime basis Solution should provide a
consolidated event dashboard of the
entire IT networks
Reporting Proposed solution should provide
7 customizable reporting interface to create
custom reports for collected data
The System must use advanced root-
cause analysis techniques, discovered
8 topology data and policy-based condition
correlation technology for comprehensive
analysis of infrastructure faults.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 587

Solution should support effective root

cause analysis, support capabilities for
investigating the root causes of failed
9
service levels and must make it possible
to find the underlying events that cause
the service level contract to fail.
The proposed tool should integrate with
network performance management
10 system and support operating system
monitoring for various platforms supplied
as part of the solution
Web Appliance Rack based Intel Quad Core Processor or
Hardware better, 3.20GHz, Memory 32GB 4x8GB
11
DDR4 2666MHz, Minimum 1 TB
SATA/SSD Drive, Integrated NIC

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 588

C-11 – EPBAX System.

11.0 Technical Specifications of IP Based PABX System

11.1 IPTelephonyNetwork
The scope of work covers Planning, Design, preparation of Drawings,
Supply, Installation, Testing and Commissioning of IP Based PBX of
initial capacity of 1000 Telephones & expandable up to 2000 telephones
shall be located at server room. All the Telephones in the Complex will
be IP Based and will use theexisting LAN Network for the communication
within the complex (inside buildings &
inbetweenbuildings)aswellasforoutsidethecomplex.AllRackPanelsofIndiv
idualbuildings shall be connected to Central PABX (private automatic
branch exchange) systemthrough Optical Fiber Cable IP based voice
communication system with PRI (Primary
RateInterface)Trunklines(30channels)withclipfacilityforminimum500IPus
erslicensefor 5 Years.Theoutlets areaspertheapproveddrawings. These
technical specifications shall be read along with the General Conditions
for all E&M works given under subhead C-B.

a. IP PABX is proposed in redundant manager for campus locations to

support voice andhigh-
definitionvideocallingsupportinglatestauthentication,communicationande
ncryptionprotocols andSolutionsupports industry standards.

b. Two types of phones will be deployed across campus as per end user
requirements. One isbasicfeaturephoneforall usersandExecutivephones
for doctors/ senior staff.

c. The scope of work also includes the provision of the IP based telephones
in the followingbuildings:
I. Hospital Building
II. Mortuary
III. Sub Station
IV. Security Gate
V. A.C PlantRoom.
VI. MGPS Room.

d. RJ-45 Telephone socket outlets with suitable IP Phones instruments

shall be provided in all blocks/ buildings at convenient locations, as
required. CAT-6A wiring shall be provided in recessed/surface conduits/
raceways from each telephone point up to the Rack panel (Patch Panel
& Switch) at each floor or nearest Rack Panel of all buildings /Blocks. The
Maximum length of the CAT-6A cable shall be 75m. The cabling work
shall be covered under LAN sub-head.

e. The Rack Panel (comprising of jack/Patch panels, Network switches,

patch cords, power supply units, Cooling Fans, Wire managers, LIUs,
Trans receivers, Fiber patch cord etc.) of individual buildings/Blocks shall
be connected to the main IPPBX Server Rack & IP based Operator
console with optical Fiber cables to be laid underground in trench
/DWCPipe of suitable size.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 589

f. The IP based PBX system is to be provided in the above buildings with

wiring outlets as per the Approved drawings/Inventory. All the building
telephone networks shall be interconnected.

g. The Scope and purpose are to provide the voice to all the users within
the campus including IP based operator console, In-skin Voice mail for
all the users & access to call outside the campus through analog trunks
or PRI (Primary Rate Interface) trunks via local service provider.

h. The system should have minimum 8 port in-skin voice mail to play the
user defined message during the incoming call through the analog or PRI
(Primary Rate Interface) trunk.

i. The hardware & software required for the system including IP Phones.
Servers, gateways, workstations, IP based Operator console, racks,
online UPS, Access switches, gateways for analog as well as PRI trunks
will be in the Contractor’s scope.

j. It will be the responsibility of the Contractor to make the entire system

fully functional as per the specifications. Contractor shall consider any
equipment/devices required to make the system functional if not
mentioned herewith.

k. The project is on design and build basis and must cover the entire
campus and building. Every individual staff should have telephone facility
to communicate within the campus &outsidethecampus.

11.2 TentativeinventoryfortheIP-PABXpoints:

BuildingName IPPABXPts.
Basement 5
Ground Floor 86

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 590

First Floor 113

Second Floor 107
Third Floor 58
Fourth Floor 63
Fifth Floor 58
Sixth Floor 58
Seventh Floor 47
Sub Station / AC Plant 3
Mortuary 1
Gate 1
TOTAL 600

Theaboverequirementisindicative,thecontractorshouldplan,desig
nand submittherequirementalongwithlayoutdrawings
forapprovalandexecution.

11.3 TechnicalSpecifications ofIP-EPABX System

Sl. No. Description

1 IP Telephony System Architecture

The IP telephony system must be based on a pure IP
technology that is a software-only solution.
The IP telephony system must support unified
communication (UC) server & gateways architecture for SIP,
Digital and Analog trunks connectivity.
The System must be TEC Approved with GR Number.
The system must be capable of supporting Analog, Digital,
IP Telephones, and SIP based video desk phones.
The communication servers must work in an Active/Active
redundancy mode. It should be possible to define servers
load balancing mode.
All servers must be provided in a cluster mode. If one cluster
server fails, one of the other cluster servers in the network
must be able to take the complete load of the calls
automatically (without any manual intervention) and without
dropping any existing calls (IP, TDM& PRI) or data (CDR,

CTI). Management of all servers in cluster should be from

same web page. All servers should have same database.
The telephony system must be able to register SIP
phones/SIP video phones and MGCP phones directly to it
System should have Distributed Architecture
It should be possible to install Telephony system in VMware
EXSi 5.5 or higher.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 591

All Data (Numbers, COS, Routing, Applications) should

reside in all the Servers
Database replication in All servers should be automatic and
real time
Should support N+1 Redundancy Architecture as well as 1+1
redundancy Architecture
Should support Remote Survival Nodes
In case of failure of one server, the SIP Phones, SIP
Gateways, MGCP Phones should register with second
Server automatically
System Diagnostics should be done in Server
Hot Standby for SIP Phones and Gateways i.e., SIP Phones
and Gateways should register automatically to next available
telephony server.
COTS - commercial off-the-shelf Servers should be used for
telephony system
Telephony system should use Linux Operating System
system should support CSTA phase III Protocol
Full continuation for call signaling and media must be
supported
Calls must not be disconnected and control must remain
throughout the swap to an alternate server including full call
control (transfer, conference actions, continuation of CDR
data for the existing call).
Load Balancing of end points must be possible by the
administrator
There must be no restriction on the number of endpoints
being backed up in case of one server failure.
UC platform servers must provide full failover and
redundancy
System should support the following SIP RFCs:
RFC 3261 (SIP: Session Initiation Protocol)
RFC 3262 (Reliability of Provisional Responses in Session
Initiation Protocol)
RFC 3263 (Locating SIP Servers)
RFC 3264 (An Offer/Answer Model with Session Description
Protocol (SDP))
RFC 3265 (Specific Event Notification)
RFC 2327 (SDP- Session Description Protocol)
RFC 1889 and 1890 (RTP/RTCP)
RFC 3515 (REFER)
RFC 2833 (DTMF over IP)
Scalability
It should be possible to add more sites and users without the
need to change the software and existing configuration.
The system must be scalable to at least 25,000 endpoints in
a single cluster architecture.
Each server must support a minimum of 1000 endpoints

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 592

The call signaling server must handle traffic at a minimum of

100K BHCC.
The system must be modular, scalable and distributable
System Survivability
The UC platform must consist of one or many servers where
each server in the cluster provides complete 100%
application functionality.
In case of a failed server, all endpoints registered with that
server need to register instantly with a different server in the
cluster with no interruption to on-going calls.
Media Gateways must have survival mechanisms that allow
them to maintain 100% of the telephony services for their
users in case of failure in the WAN links when the signaling
with the call server drops.
The life cycle of the entire system being provided must be at
least Ten (10) years.
The system gateway must be able to restart automatically
without human intervention when the external AC power
supply is resumed after complete power failure (even after
the batteries are discharged).
The telephony system must be capable of providing 99.999%
availability.
Distributed Architecture
The UC platform must have distributed architecture and
centralized control for all the sites in the network.
The proposed solution must support Hybrid cloud solution in
order to guarantee business continuity with overall
survivability regardless of a failure at any single location.
The proposed solution must enable part of the cluster to be
hosted in a Cloud Service Provider (CSP) to run all
applications.
The proposed solution must have built in redundancy using
a cloud solution to provide automatic disaster recovery
option.
The proposed solution should have provision to be installed
using an image of the application and easily implemented on
the Cloud Service Provider servers.
Quality of Service (QOS)
The voice and signaling frames must be marked [tagged] in
order to be recognized.
Server – Physical Attributes
COTS – Commercial Off-the-Shelf servers must be used.
The redundant server must have separate hardware, not
sharing elements like hard drives and RAM etc., to avoid a
single point of failure.
The server should have AC power supply.
The system must be based on server gateway architecture
with external appliance servers

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 593

No card-based processor systems / soft switch should be

quoted.
The call processor must run on Linux OS.
Minimum Server Specifications:
The CPU must be from the Intel® Xeon® processor E3-
1220v5 or latest
The server must have at least 16GB RAM
The server must have Hard Drives (300GB each) of storage
The server must have a Dual 1GB network interface.
Form Factor for physical server (Not Virtual Machine) should
be 1 U
Gateways
The media gateways shall be capable of being centrally
managed via the telephony management application. The
system should support multiple gateways.
The system gateway should be able to restart automatically
without human intervention when the external ac power
supply is resumed after complete power failure
The system gateways should support the following type of
extensions:
Analog
Digital
Cordless (DECT) Extension
SIP
MGCP
The system gateway should support the following type of
trunks:
Analog: E&M (2W), E&M (4W), DC loop signaling, decadic,
DTMF
Digital: 2Mb stream with the following signaling protocols
(Digital CEPT, R2MFC)
Standard ISDN BRI, PRI
SIP and MGCP on VOIP
ISDN (30B+D / 23B+D / 2B+D)
SS7
ISDN QSIG (30B+D / 2B+D)
Q-sig over IP
Security
Administration of the system should be using HTTPS
It should support the Interop with leading SBC
System should use TLS (Transport Layer protocol) to encrypt
SIP, HTTP, FTP and SRTP (Secure Real-time Transport
Protocol) and SRTCP to encrypt RTP and RTCP
System should have auto Provisioning profiles containing
pre-configured sets of features that must automatically polls
and updates registered phones with the latest phone
firmware and configuration files.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 594

Mobility
The system should have Call Back feature. If the user dials
his own extension from predefined number (mobile/landline)
then system should disconnect the call and then system
should call the user to provide the dial tone so that user can
make intercom or PSTN calls.
The system should have Call Through feature. If the user
dials his own extension from predefined number, then
system should provide dial tone to make intercom or o/g
calls.
The system should have Flexi Call (Forking, reach-me-
anywhere) feature. Users should be able to receive calls on
any of their phones, from almost anywhere. An incoming call
rings on all or specific phones until the user answers the call.
The user can transfer the call, establish a conference, and
so on, whether the answering device is an internal device,
an external phone, or a cellular handset. If the answering
phone is an external device, the call automatically becomes
an authorized mobility call.
The system should support SIP Client on smart phone.
SIP Endpoints
All SIP phones must support the standard SIP protocol. No
proprietary protocols are allowed to be used.
SIP phones must support the configuration of programmable
buttons with functions such as Break-in, Conference call,
Deflect, silent monitoring and more.
SIP phones must work in conjugation with the following
applications:
1. Contact Centre (Agents Phones)
2. Attendant Console
3. Managed Audio Conferencing
4. Managed Video Conferencing
5. UC clients

ACD
System should have built in Automatic Call Distribution
(ACD) with following features:
Busy ACD Group announcement
Hunt Group Release
IVR-ACD
Log In / Log Out
Multiple Announcements:
1. Mandatory announcement - All incoming callers to an
ACD/HUNT group must be able to hear an introductory
announcement in its entirety usually explaining about the
company, product, or campaign.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 595

2. First announcement - If all agents are busy, callers must

be able to hear this announcement once usually informing
them that their call has been placed in queue. (The system
must be able to cut short this announcement if an agent
becomes available to attend to the caller.)
3. Music - If no agents are available after the first
announcement (or no First and Periodic announcers have
been configured), the caller must be able to hear background
music while in queue.
4. Periodic announcement - Alternating with background
music, these announcements can also be played to callers
in queue according to the Periodic Announcement Interval
(see above) until the ACD/HUNT call is answered.
Release / Resume
Wait Queue
Wrap-Up Time
Automatic Release of ACD Agent
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) Extended Overflow
Zone Page
A phone user must be able to simultaneously broadcast a
message over all types of end points.
The maximum quantity of end points in one zone should not
be less than 100.
System Administration
System administration should be web based.
All programming of system should be done through a web-
based GUI interface.
The administrator should have Dynamic Profiles.
The system should allow for complete multi-level
administration. The administrator must be able to define at
least five (5) different administration level profiles that can be
applied to allow subsets of users to access and manage
particular pages in the systems Web Portal
Certification Requirements

1. The OEM must comply with ISO 9001 certification in all

the company’s activities.
2. The products must comply with Safety and EMC
standards, including FCC, UL/TUV, CE, and the RoHS
directive.
System Features
ANI (Caller ID) Restriction
ARS (Automatic Route Selection)
Auto Attendant
Call Forward at Night/Holiday
Call Forward Destinations
Call Forward for Undefined Stations
Call Forward on Busy

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 596

Call Forward on DND (Do Not Disturb)

Call Forward on Logout
Call Forward on No Answer
Caller id-based routing for individual extension
Deflect (Divert) Call
Digit Train Conversion
Direct-In-Dial
Direct-In-Line (DIL)
Hot Line
Interactive Voice Response (IVR)
Least Cost Routing
Look Ahead Routing (LAR)
Numbering Plan
Personal Routing Rules based on caller id and DNIS
Predetermined Night Answer
Toll Restriction – Digit Analysis
Toll Restriction – Trunk Groups
Trunk to Trunk Connection
Trunk Transfer Restriction
Classes of Service
Night Answer Central Bell / UNA Pickup
Page Queue
Recall
Recall / Incomplete Destination
Second Ring back Tone
Speed Dial Public (System) and Private
Virtual Numbers
Music On Hold
Voice Page
Silent Monitor

Zone Page
Barge In
Wake up
Extension Features
Answer Call Waiting by Transfer
Auto Set Relocate
Auto-Answer
Automatic Disconnect
Automatic Number Identification (ANI) Display
Browse Personal Directory
Busy Lamp Field
Call Forward All
Call Hold
Call Log

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 597

Call Parking and Call Pickup

Call Waiting
Caller ID Control
Caller-ID Screening
Caller id-based routing for individual extension
Calling Number and Name
Camp-on Idle
Configurable DSS Buttons
Direct Dial without Off Hook (Hands Free)
Directed Call Pickup
Display Automatic Number Identification (ANI)
Display Dialed Number and Name
Display Dynamic Call Divert Information
Display Select Hold Display
Display Time/Date Function
Do Not Disturb (DND)
DSS/BLF
Elapsed Time Display
Group Call Pickup
Hands Free
Hands-Free Announce and Reply (Idle State)
Last Number Redial
Login and Logout
Message Waiting Indication
Multi Appearance (Call Waiting)
Multiple Line Appearance
On-Hook Dialing
Placing Multiple Calls on Hold

Privacy – ANI Restriction

Reminder/wakeup Call
Restrictions – Station
System Non-Exclusive Hold
Transfer with Consultation
Transfer without Consultation (Blind)
Voice Page
Emergency Preemption
Listen to Paging while in a call (Busy Condition)
ULA - User Line Appearance (ULA)

2 Emergency communication

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 598

The Emergency communication resource should be from the

same telephony server and have the facility to automatic dial
out to connect up to 100 participants in a single conference.
System should also have 100 party managed meet me
conference. It should be possible to further divide 100 party
conference bridge into any combination like 10 X 10 party, 5
x 20 party etc. if required. The meet me conference should
be secured means to enter to the conference bridge, the user
should enter the password.
The emergency communication management should be
from Web Browser/HTML5 based GUI based interface from
Windows PC and Touchscreen Devices.
The emergency communication must be controlled by a user
defined as Group Operator from the web-based GUI.
The Group Operator should have following features as
below:
1. The Group Operator must be able to add / remove
members
2. The Group Operator must be able to add other
conference members
3. The Group Operator must be able to mute / unmute
(User, None, All)
4. The Group Operator must be able to lock / unlock
the conference
5. The Group Operator must be able to close the
conference
6. It must be possible to dial out a pre-defined group
(or multi-groups) of participants/numbers by simply pressing
the pre-assigned virtual key on PC.
7. Each pre-set conference must have its own unique
dial number such that when this group number is dialed; all
the number stations will ring simultaneously.
8. Any combination of stations and external numbers
must be able to be defined as members of the Group Call.

9. Participants may join a conference in the audible or

in the mute mode, if in mute mode, the right to speak must
be selectively offered to attendees per their request by a
special signal sent to the Group Operator by the attendees.
10. Attendees must be able to be added or excluded
at any time by the Group Operator
11. The conference must be terminated when the Group
Operator leaves (auto terminate if all members left are
muted).
12. The Group Operator must be able to barge into an
existing user call based on pre-emption predefined rules.
13. Group operator must have two SIP phones so that if
one phone is busy in conference, the second phone can be
used to add participants.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 599

14. Both group operator SIP phones should be controlled

by web-based conference management GUI for telephony
feature like answer, hold, transfer etc.
15. The same Group operator should also function as
operator console

3 Specification of Type -1 IP phone

SIP phone should be from the same OEM of IP telephony
system
132 x 64-pixel graphical LCD
1 VoIP accounts
XML remote phonebook
Auto provision via FTP/TFTP/HTTP/HTTPS for mass
deployment
Anonymous call, anonymous call rejection
PoE, Headset, Wall-Mountable
Volume adjustment, ring tone selection
Voicemail, MWI
Call Park, call pickup
DTMF: In-band, out-of-band (RFC 2833) and SIP INFO
VAD, CNG, AEC, PLC, AJB, AGC
Full-duplex hands-free speakerphone
SIP v1 (RFC2543), v2 (RFC3261)
NAT Traversal: STUN mode or 3rd party SBC
DTMF: In-Band, RFC2833, SIP Info
IP Assignment: Static/DHCP/PPPoE
1xRJ9 handset port
1xRJ9 headset port
Transport Layer Security (TLS)
LED for call and message waiting indication
2xRJ45 10/100M Ethernet ports

Power over Ethernet (IEEE 802.3af)

4 Specification of Type -2 IP phone

SIP phone should be from the same OEM of IP telephony
system
132 x 64 -pixel graphical LCD with backlight
2 VoIP accounts
Local phonebook up to 100 entries
Auto provision via FTP/TFTP/HTTP/HTTPS for mass
deployment
SRTP/ HTTPS/ TLS, 802.1x
PoE, Headset, Wall-Mountable
Volume adjustment, ring tone selection
Voicemail, MWI

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 600

Call Park, call pickup

Narrowband codec: G.711, G.723.1, G.726, G.729AB
VAD, CNG, AEC, PLC, AJB, AGC
Full-duplex hands-free speakerphone
SIP v1 (RFC2543), v2 (RFC3261)
NAT Traversal: STUN mode or 3rd party SBC
DTMF: In-Band, RFC2833, SIP Info
IP Assignment: Static/DHCP/PPPoE
1xRJ9 handset port
1xRJ9 headset port
Transport Layer Security (TLS)
LED for call and message waiting indication
2xRJ45 10/100M Ethernet ports
Power over Ethernet (IEEE 802.3af)

5 Specification of IP Video phone

SIP phone should be from the same OEM of IP telephony
system
7 inch (124 x 600) adjustable touch screen
720p30 HD Video
Runs Android 5.1.1
Built in Bluetooth 4.0 + EDR for headsets and pairing mobile
devices
Dual Port Gigabit Ethernet with PoE
Built in WiFi(802.11b/g/n)
Call recording, hotline, one touch dial
Redial, call waiting, emergency call
Data import/export via Bluetooth
Ring tone selection/import/delete

Local phonebook up to 1000 entries

XML/LDAP remote phonebook
Intelligent search method
Phonebook search/import/export
Black list
HD voice, HD Handset, HD Speaker
Audio Codec: Opus, G.722, G.722.1, G.722.1C, G.711,
G.723, G.726, G.729AB, iLBC
Video Coded: H.264 High Profile, H.264, VP8
Self-View (local video preview)
27 one-touch DSS keys
Illuminated mute/headset/hands free speaker phone key
SIP v1 (RFC2543), v2 (RFC3261)
Call server redundancy supported
IPv4/IPv6
NAT transverse: STUN mode

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 601

Proxy mode and peer-to-peer SIP link mode

Time and date synchronization using SNTP
UDP/TCP/DNS-SRV (RFC 3263)
QoS: 802.1p/Q tagging (VLAN), Layer 3 ToS, DSCP
SRTP for voice encryption
Transport Layer Security (TLS)
HTTPS certificate manager
AES encryption for configuration file
Digest authentication using MD5/MD5-sess
OpenVPN, IEEE802.1X
Auto provision via FTP/TFTP/HTTP/HTTPS for mass deploy
Auto-provision with PnP, Zero-sp-touch, TR-069, SNMP
Package tracing export, system log
Setup assistant wizard

6 Help desk specification

1.1 General capabilities
1.1.1 The proposed solution must be embedded within
the platform, not installed on a separate server and should
be from the same OEM of the telephony system.
1.1.2 The system must be an All-in-one solution that
provides a one server solution for UC&C and 5 agent
licenses for help desk.
1.1.3 Single server deployment with intuitive and central
management capabilities should support true multimedia.
1.1.4 Help desk managers must be able to easily
prioritize customers and incoming contacts regardless of the
media used.

1.1.5 The same set of business and routing rules can

be applied to voice / chat calls, emails, and faxes if required.
1.1.6 The help desk must support multi-layer routing
including Priority, Skill Based, Statistical, Business Rules,
and Customer Defined Values.
1.1.7 Help desk must have embedded IVR, enabling
managers to design routing plans and accurately assess
help desk activity trends.
1.1.8 The IVR application must be a GUI application
that can be managed by the customer.
1.1.9 The customer must have the ability to build new
self-services applications like new IVR flow for new service.
1.1.10 Customer must have the ability to define/change
routing rules by himself based on customer's profile.
1.1.11 The help desk must support Out bound, Call-back
and Campaigns – including preview, progressive and
automated out bound dialing.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 602

1.1.12 The supervisor must be able to see the status of

help desk agents in real-time in his PC like logout, busy, free,
release, non ACD etc. in graphical form in pie chart / bar
chart.
1.2 Help desk facilities
1.2.1 Real-time Monitoring – must provide supervisors
with statistical information about the current status of the help
desk with on line refresh (1sec). The application must include
pre-defined list of reports and the customer (end user) should
be able to choose reports as needed.
1.2.2 Historical Reports – must be able to collect all
information from call entry to call termination. Call profile
details for internal investigation purposes should be part of
the contact center solution.
1.2.3 The help desk solution must have an embedded
Management Information System (MIS) suite that monitors
all help desk activities, generating reports that summarize
the past performance of the system over a given time period,
and providing statistical analysis of the help desk within a
specified period. Real-time and historical reports provide:
Help desk agent should be able to do following activities from
agent application installed on PC:
Login/Logout from group
Release/Resume
Ready
Wrap-up Code
Release for Break
Release for Meeting
Control Wrap Up
Supervisor Help

Agent Board
Answer
Hold
Retrieve
Hang Up
7 Specifications for Self-Survivable Gateway:
Gateway should have minimum 96 analog/CO ports. Gateway
should be from the same OEM of IP telephony system
Voice Processing – voice codecs: G.711, G.729A, G.723.1, etc.
and echo cancellation: G.168 with 64ms echo tail; dynamic jitter
buffer; voice activity detector (VAD)
Call Handling – configurable dialing plan
Fax Processing – T.30, T.38 fax relay
User Features – caller ID, call forward, call transfer, hotline,
CRBT, do not disturb, speed dialing
Protocol – SIP (RFC3261, MGCP etc.)
Standards – caller ID detection (FSK)

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 603

Primary and Backup – the gateway can be configured and

controlled in server clusters
LED indicators– power, system status, network status, line
status
Ethernet Connector – Dual Gigabit ethernet. The Gateway
should function as a Self-Survivable unit when the Ethernet
connectivity at gateway end breaks.
Power Input – -48 VDC, should have dual DC power supply
or dual AC power supply
Operation Humidity – 10% to 90% (non-condensing)
Operation Temperature – 0 to 40ºC

8 PRI Gateway specification

PRI gateway should have Configuration – 1 PRI (30 Channels)
or 2 PRI (60 Channels) and should be from the same OEM of
telephony system.
Voice Processing – G.711, G.729A, G.723.1, GSM, iLBC; echo
cancellation: G.168 with 64ms echo tail; dynamic jitter buffer;
VAD and CNG
Calling Control – called/calling party number translation;
second stage dialing; voice detection; auto dialing with DTMF;
ring back tone generation and detection; voice announcement
Voice Proxy – RTP voice proxy function for NAT/firewall
traversal
Fax Relay – T.30 transparent mode, T.38 fax relay
Call Handling – configurable dialing plan, up to 500 routing
rules
Configuration Interface – Web Utility
Remote Management – Telnet, HTTP, TR069

PSTN – ISDN PRI standard: ANSI, NI-2, DMS, 5ESS

SIP – RFC3261, RFC2976, RFC3515, RFC3581
DTMF – tone detection generation and detection; DTMF
relay: RFC2833, INFO (SIP)
DTMF detection and progress tone detection
Play ring-back tone
T.30 and T.38
RTP proxy for NAT traversal
Ethernet – RJ-45, 10/100 Base-T
Trunking Interface – RJ-45
System Memory – 128MB or higher
System Flash – 16MB or higher
Power Input – 220V AC or - 48 VDC, should have dual
AC/DC power supply
Operation Humidity – 10% to 90% (non-condensing)
Operation Temperature – 0 to 40ºC
9 Specification of Soft client

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 604

The soft client should be from the same OEM of IP telephony

system. WIFI facility for smart phone to be provided by the
customer.

Soft client should be available for Windows PC, Android

Phone and IOS phone
It should support Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows 10
it should be freely downloadable from Google Play / Apple
store
it should support following features:
Make a call
Hold
Retrieve
transfer
"Presences (User Select) -
Change status: Available, Busy No Answer, Busy call
waiting, DND, Logoff, Forward to VM "
Dial users number - Internal, External, Mobile
"Instant messaging - IM with another soft client User, IM with
a Multi Destination, Search on IM sessions, Save IM
sessions, IM to groups"
3-way audio conference
call divert
camp on
view missed call
Contacts synchronized with the PBX directory

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 605

C-12, CCTV System

12.0 Technical Specifications IP Based CCTV System:

12.1 The brief scope of work shall include Planning,design& preparation of

drawings,obtainingapprovalsfromthedepartmentandSupply,Installation,t
esting&commissioning of IP based CCTV system on centralized OFC
network backbone If anyitemrequired tomake thescheme functional,
isnotspecifically mentioned in the scope of services, the same
isdeemedtobe includedwithin thescopeofthistender. These technical
specifications shall be read along with the General Conditions for all E&M
works given under subhead C-B.

i. The IP based CCTV system shall be designed based on centralized OFC

back bone network with suitable PTZ, Bullet, Dome cameras to monitor &
supervise the designated commonareas of buildings, Corridors,
staircase, and common areas. Entrance and Exit gates, Entrances of all
buildings, internal roads, road junctions, parking lots, etc.,
for security purpose, as well as record and inform officials
on unwanted, untoward incidents.Itisalsoessential to have recorded
images to be stored at least for min 90 days of all criticalareas (around
30% of total area) to facilitate investigations of a reported incidents and
30 days for all non-criticalareas.

ii. The cameras will cover important points in campus and internal areas of
buildings.The system will be designed to cover the areas keeping inview
these curityrequirement in consultation with the Engineer-in-Charge.

iii. The CCTV and Surveillance System shall control and monitor from
hospital building in the Campus as per requirement. All the buildings shall
have IP Based Dome Cameras, Bullet Cameras and PTZ Cameras for
surveillance. The types of cameras & locations of various Cameras
indicated here in are minimum to be provided. However, during detailed
designing, if required and found necessary, thetype/ ratingoftheCameras
shall be upgraded.

iv. The hardware required for the system including Servers VMS, Recording,
Work stations, Monitors, Cat 6A cables & Patch Cables to connect the
camera tonearest PoE enabled LAN point, Cables, connectors, conduits,
power supplies etc.are inthescopeofwork.

v. The complete LAN networking required for the CCTV & Access Control
System are commonfordata andshall be covered inLAN, Wi-fi Networking
subhead.

vi. Entire system must be designed by keeping a min of 20% Buffer in

system capacities for VMS Servers, Recording Servers, Storage,
Network, and all the equipment.
vii. Multiple NVRs (N + 1) shall be designed for the CCTV System with each
NVR capacity of 64 Channel with redundant facility.
viii. Each Counselling room of the hospital shall be provided with CCTV
Camera with Audio recording facility along with 128 GB memory card.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 606

12.1.1 External CCTV system

i. The IP based CCTV system shall be designed based on centralized OFC
backbonenetwork with suitable PTZ, Bullet cameras to monitor &
supervise the designatedexternal areas viz. Entrance and Exit gates,
internal roads, road junctions, parkinglots, etc. for security purpose, as
well as record and inform officials on unwanted,untoward incidents.

ii. It is also essential to have recorded images to bestored atleast form in 90

days of all critical areas to facilitate investigations of a reported incidents
and 30 days for allnon-critical areas.

iii. The cameras will cover important points in campus and internal road
junctions,entrance and exit gates, entrance porticos/porch of all
buildings. The system will bedesigned to cover the areas keeping in view
the security requirement of the ESIC Hospital authorities.

iv. All the cameras shall be with IP-66 Housing with Junction box,
IndustrialGradeSwitchesetc.withweatherproofhousing.The existing LAN
network switches shall be used for CCTV connectivity.

v. Network connectivity for cameras having distance more than 75 meters,

shall be on optical fiber.Suitable provision shall be provided to connect
with existing LAN infrastructure. The power supply to LAN switches and
Monitors will be on UPS. The video recording shall be non-embedded
based recording server with video management software.

vi. For Camera Monitoring and Control, required number of 65-inch Full HD
LED Monitors shall beprovided. All the cameras shall be live on using
monitors. One shall not have more than 36 camera6x6Grid. Min 02
concurrent workstation license shall beoffered and no of Work stations
and Monitors shall be got approved from Engineer-in-charge.

vii. Suitablepolesfor fixingtheexternal CCTV camerasareinthisscope. All the

OFC cables and Cat-6A cables are to be laid in trenches with suitable
size DWC pipe, is in the scope of the contractor.

viii. Trays are provided for the run cable trenches which is with in supply of
the contractor.

12.1.2 Internal CCTV system

i. The IP based CCTV system shall be designed based on centralized OFC
backbonenetwork with suitable Bullet, Dome cameras to monitor &
supervise the designatedcommon areas of buildings like entrance

lobbies, corridors, lift lobbies etc.

ii. It is also essential to have recorded images to be stored atleast form in

90 days of all critical areas to facilitate investigations of a reported
incidents and 30 days for all non-criticalareas.

iii. Network connectivity for cameras having distance more than 75 meters,

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 607

shall be on opticalfiber. Suitable provision shall be provided to connect

with existing LAN infrastructure. The power supply to LAN switches and
Monitors will beon UPS. The video recording shall be non- embedded
ased recording server with video management software.

2. Minimum Inventory of CCTV is as given below.

12.1.3 Specifications

a) This part covers the specifications of CCTV cameras, multiple NVR

etc. which are used in the system. The brief specifications are as
follows:
b) All equipment and materials used shall be standard components that
are regularly manufactured and used in the system.
c) All systems and components shall have been thoroughly tested and
proven in actual use.
d) Motion detection CCTV cameras shall record video based on
sensitivity to movement.

The typical connections of equipment are shown in below figures:

Fig-1

12.2 Technical Specifications:

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 608

12.2.1 Dome Camera

Features Specifications
1) Camera type Dome
2) Housing IP IP66
3) Impact Protection IK10
4) Camera resolution 2 MP (1920 ×1080)
5) Image sensor 1/2.8"or larger Progressive scan CMOS
6) Min-illumination Color0.05 lux
@F1.6(AGCON);B/W0.001lux@IRON
7) Focal Length 2.7 -13.5mmVarifocalMotorized
8) Shutter Speed 1/3s~1/100,000s
9) Multiple streaming
Quad Stream
Main Stream 2 MP,
1080P(1920x1080),720P(1280x720),
SubSteam
720P(1280x720), VGA (640x480), QVGA
(320x240)
Frame Rate 30fps
10
11 Digital Zoom should have the capability to digitally
zoomed in web browser by selecting the area
using mouse
12 WDR Yes

13 IR InbuiltIRLEDswithIRdistanceupto40mtrs

14 Day & Night IRcutfilterwithautoswitch

15 Day & Night Switch Auto/Color/Black & white

16 Noise Reduction 3DDNR

17 Video Compression H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264+/MJPEG

18 Bitr rate 32Kbps to8Mbps

19 Image setting Saturation, Brightness, Contrast,

Sharpness, AGC, White balanceadjustable
byclientsoftwareorwebbrowser
20 Edge analytics Motion Detection, sound detection, Video
Alarm Trigger tampering alarm, Network disconnected, IP
address conflicted, Illegal login, File upload
via FTP or E-mail, SD/SDHC/SDXC
recording at event triggers.
21 Protocols TCP/IP, HTTP, DHCP, DNS, DDNS,
RTP/RTSP, SMTP, NTP, HTTPS, FTP,
PPPOE,

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 609

22 Security IP address filter; complicated password;

Authenticatedusernameandpassword
23 Privacy Masks Shouldsupportat least4Zone,Rectangle

24 White Balance Auto/Manual

25 Alarm I/O 1Input/1Output

26 Image Mirror / Disable/Horizontal/Vertical/All

Image rotation / flip
27 Audio compression G711A, G711U

28 Audio I/O Uni-directional.

29 Factorydefault Should have the option of setting the

Configuration to factory default except network
settings.
30 Operating 0°C ~+55° C/lessthan≤ 95%RH
Temperature & RH
31 Mobile Surveillance Support mobile surveillance through app on
android andi-phone
32 Certification UL/CE/FCC, RoHs

33 System Compatibility ONVIFprofileS, G &T

34 Power D12V/POE(IEEE802.3af)

Note: Cameras with Audio recording facility along with 128 GB memory card shall be provided in
the hospital counselling rooms.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 610

12.2.2 Bullet Camera:

Features Specifications
1. Cameratype Bullet
2. Housing IP IP66
3. Cameraresol 2 MP (1920 ×1080)
ution
4. Imagesensor 1/2.8"or larger Progressive scan CMOS
5. Min- Color0.05 lux
illumination @F1.6(AGCON);B/W0.001lux@IRON
6. FocalLength 2.7 -13.5mmVarifocalMotorized
7. ShutterSpee 1/ 3s~1/100,000s
d
8. Multiplestrea Quad Stream
ming Main Stream 2 MP,
1080P(1920x1080),720P(1280x720),
SubSteam
720P(1280x720), VGA (640x480), QVGA
(320x240)
9. Frame Rate 30fps
10. should have the capability to digitally
DigitalZoom
zoomed in
webbrowserbyselectingtheareausingmouse
11. WDR YES
12. IR InbuiltIRLEDswithIRdistanceupto40mtrs
13. Day&Night IRcutfilterwithautoswitch
14. Day/ Auto/Color/Black &
NightSwitch white
15. Noise 3D DNR
Reduction
16. Video H.265+/H.265/H.264+/H.264+/MJPEG
Compression
17. Bit Rate 32Kbps to 8Mbps
18. Image Saturation, Brightness, Contrast,
setting Sharpness, AGC, White balance
adjustable by client software or web
browser
19. Edgeanalytic Motion Detection, sound detection, Video
s, Alarm tampering alarm, Network disconnected, IP
Trigger address conflicted, Illegal login, File upload via
FTP or E-mail, SD/SDHC/SDXC recording at
event triggers.
20. Protocols TCP/IP, HTTP, DHCP, DNS, DDNS, RTP/RTSP,
SMTP, NTP, HTTPS, FTP, PPPOE,

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 611

21. IP address filter; complicated password;

Security
Authenticatedusernameandpassword
22. Privacymasks Shouldsupportat least4Zone,Rectangle

23. White Balance Auto/Manual

24. AlarmI/O 1Input/1Output

25. Image
Disable/Horizontal/Vertical/All
Mirror/Image
rotation/flip
26. Audio Compr G711A, G711U
ession
27. AudioI/O Uni-directional
28. Should have the option of setting the
Factorydefault
configuration tofactorydefaultexceptnetwork
settings.
29. Operating 0°C ~+55° C/lessthan≤ 95%RH
Temperature &
RH
30. MobileSurvei Support mobile surveillance through app on android
llance andi-phone
31. Certification UL/ CE/ FCC/ RoHs
32. System ONVIF profile S, G & T
Compatibility
33. Power D12V/POE(IEEE802.3af)

12.2.3 2MPNetworkIRPTZCamera

S. No Features Description
Cameratype IR PTZ
Material Metal
1. No. of Pixels 1920×1080(2MP)
(H×V)
2. Housing IP IP66, TVS Lightning 4000 TVS, Surge and
VoltageTransie nt Protection
3. Impact Protection IK10
4. Certificate CE,FCC,UL, ROHS, IK10, RoHS
5. ActivePixels 1920x1080
6. Scanning system Progressive
7. ImageSensorTyp 1/2.8"or larger ProgressiveScanCMOS/CCD
e
8. Illumination Color: 0.05 Lux @ (F1.6, AGC ON)
0LuxwithIR
9. ShutterSpeed 1/1 sto 1/30000 s
10. WDR TrueWDR 120dB

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 612

11. DigitalNoise 3D DNR

reduction
12. LensSupport 4.3~4.8mm to 117~120 mm,25x optical
zoom, DC-IRIS
13. IRRange minimum 100m
14. Presets 250 orhigher
15. Patrol Min.8,up to 32presets foreach patrol
16. PrivacyMask 24programmableprivacymasks
17. PanandtiltSpeed PanSpeedConfigurable,from0.1
°/sto160 °/s,Preset speed:240 °/s
Tilt Speed: Configurable, from 0.1 °/s to 120
°/s Preset Speed: 200 °/s
18. Angle of View H:65o -1.88o, V: 39.4o -1.09o
19. MovementRange PAN:360°endless
Tilt: From -15°to90°(auto-flip)
20. Auto Pan Scan Support

21. Auto Tracking Support

22. Auto Resume after Resume from home position

Power failure

23. VideoCompressi H.265+/H.265/MJPEGSupportall

on
24. Privacy Masking Off/On (24 areas)
25. VideoStream Min.TripleStreamwithconfigurable
26. Video H.265 HEVC/H.264/MJPEG, Smart Codec
compression
27. Video Analytics Intrusion, Loiter, Line crossing, Unattended
object, Missing object, Face detection
28. Event type, Video motion detection, system boot,
Analytics record notification, Camera tampering
supported detection, Face Detection, Intrusion
Detection, Trip Wire Detection, Entry
Detection, Exit Detection,
AlarmInput,AlarmOutput,VideoTampering
Detection
29. No. of Video 3
streams
30. Gain control 0 to 100%
31. ROI 12 Zone
32. Electronic Image Support
Stabilization
33. 1stStream 2MPatrealtime1920xl080@50/60fps
34. BLC, Defog Support
35. EIS Support

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 613

36. LocalStorage MicroSD/micro SDHC/micro

SDXCslotsupportingmemory card for min.
256 GB In the event of failure
ofconnectivity to the network storage the
camera shallrecord video locally on the SD
card automatically. After the connectivity is
restored, these recordings shall
beautomatically pulled by the network
storage recordersuch that no manual
intervention is required to transfertheSD
card-basedrecordings to networkstorage.
37. Security User authentication (ID and PW), Host
authentication (MAC address); HTTPS
encryption; IEEE 802.Ix port- based
network access control; IP address filtering
38. Standard ONVIF (PROFILE S, PROFILE G), ISAPI,
CGI
39. Remote Remote configuration and status using
Administration web-based tool
40. SVC Support
41. SystemUpdate Remote system update over Network
using web client
42. Protocol IPv4/IPv6, HTTP, HTTPS, 802.1x, Qos,
FTP, SMTP, UPnP, SNMP, DNS, DDNS,
NTP, RTSP, RTCP, RTP, TCP/IP, UDP,
IGMP, ICMP, DHCP, PPPoE, Bonjour
43. Communication 10/100M Self-adaptive Ethernet port, 1
Interface RJ45
44. SimultaneousLiv Up to 20 channels
e
45. SmartFeatures 3D Positioning, PTZ Position Display,
Preset Freezing, Power-off Memory
46. Userbase/Sched Preset/Pattern Scan/Patrol Scan/Auto
uleBased Scan/Tilt Scan/Random Scan/Frame
Scan/Panorama Scan
47. PatternScan 4 pattern scans, record time over 10
minutes for each scan
48. MainStream 50Hz: 25fps (1920 x 1080, 1280 x 960,
1280 x 720)
50fps (1920 x 1080, 1280 x 960, 1280 x
720)
49. SubStream 50Hz: 25fps (704 x 576, 640 x 480, 352 x
288)
50. ThirdStream 50Hz: 25fps (1920 x 1080, 1280 x 960,
1280 x 720, 704 x 576, 640 x 480, 352 x
288)
51. Alarm 2 input / 1 output
52. AlarmLinkage Alarm linkage with other relay devices

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 614

53. Audio 1 input/1 output

54. TemperatureRan 0°C to +55 °C, Humidity 95% or less (non-

ge condensing)
55. PowerSupply 24 VAC and Hi-PoE

12.2.4 64 Channel NVR (NetworkVideoRecorder):

S.no parameter Specification

1. ANR ANRtechnologytoenhancethestoragereliab
ilitywhen thenetworkis disconnected
2. HD Output HDMIand VGAindependent outputs
provided
3. VCADetection SupportsmultipleVCA(VideoContentAnalyti
cs)events
4. HDD Quota Support
andGroup
Modes
5. Recording 400 Mbps
Bandwidth
6. Outgoing 160Mbps
Bandwidth
7. HDMI/VGA HDMI:
outputresolutio 4K(3840 x 2160)/30Hz,1920x 1080/60Hz,
n 1600 x1200/60Hz;
1280x 1024/60Hz, 1280 x 720/60Hz;1024 x
768/60HZ
VGA:
1920x 1080p/60Hz, 1280
x1024/60Hz;1280 x
720/60HZ,1024 x768/60Hz,
8. Audiooutput 1CH
9. Decodingformat H.265/H.265+/H.264/H.264+/MPEG4
10. Recording Supportsup to 8 MP
resolution
11. Capability 4-ch@ 4K or8-ch @ 4 M P
12. AlarmInterface 4 input / 1 output
13. Network TCP/IP,DHCP, DNS,DDNS, NTP,SADP,
protocols SMTP,NFS, iSCSI,UPnP™,HTTPS
14. SATA 2SATAInterface
15. Capacity 8Nos x 8TBcapacityforeachHDD
16. Two-wayaudio 1-ch,RCA
17. Network interface 1RJ-
4510M/100/1000MbpsEthernetinterface

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 615

18. USBinterface 1 x USB 3.0, 2 x USB 2.0

19. Powersupply 12VDC
20. Consumption( <18W
withoutharddis
k)
21. Working 0o to+55°C
22. Working humidity 10 to 90 %
23. Certificates FCC/ CE/ UL&RoHS

12.2.5 VideoManagementHardwareSpecification.

Sl.No Parameter Description

.
1. OperatingSystem Windows®ServerIoT2019 or better
2. Database Microsoft®SQLServer® 2017Expressor
better
3. Processor Intel®Xeon®E-22363.4GHz or better
4. ProcessorChipset Intel®C246 or better
5. Memory 16 GBDDR4
6. OSHardDrive Dual(RAID1)480GBSSDsforOS
7. Network 2xGigabitEthernetports
8. VideoCard MatroxG200 or better
9. USB 2xUSB3.0
10. MonitorOutput 1 x VGA
11. Ethernet Port 2 x RJ45
12. Input Voltage 100~240V AC50Hz
13. Temperature(Oper 10°C to 55°C
ating)
14. Relative
Humidity(Operati 10%~90%non-condensing
ng)
15. CEEN60950-
1:2006+A1:2010+A2:2013+A11:2009
Safety +A12:2011,EN62311:2008,IEC60950-
1:2005ed2+A1:2009
+A2:2013;UL60950-
1,CAN/CSAC22.2No.60950-1-07
16. Certificates FCC, CE, UL&RoHS

12.2.6 VMSSoftware:

Sl. Parameter Description

No
1. Multiplesubsystem VariousNVR's/MatrixSwitchersand3rdParty
sSupport systems
2. ArchitectureSuppo DistributedArchitecture(Parent-

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 616

rt ChildTopology)
3. CameraDiscovery Auto
4. CameraType/Comp MultipleCameras,MultipleCompressionsup
ression port
5. OtherSystemSupp AccessControl,Intrusion,VideoSolution
ort
6. Redundancy 1+1/ N+MFailoversupport
7. Alarm Event Pre-eventandposteventvideodisplay
8. Playback SmoothreverseandSynchronousplaybacka
crossNVRs
9. SequentialPlaybac Incident management mode allows creating
k apackageofclipsmultiplecamerasatdifferent
timesthatcanbeplayedbacksequentially
10. VideoAnalytics Supporttobeprovidedforallthevideo
analytics
11. Surroundingcamer Surrounding cameras mode with presets,
aview makes followingsubjectsofinterest simple
andefficientbyallowingthe
nearestcameraofinterest
tobeimmediatelyin view
12. PTZControl Innovative“One-
Click”or“MouseDrag”3DPTZcontrol
13. LowBandwidth Enriched video viewing experience
through intuitive videorendering engine
optimizes CPU utilization by altering
thevideoframerateforlowbandwidththrottli
ng
14. GPURendering GPU rendering support for H.264 and
H.265 decoding up to 60frames per
second (1080p camera) with smooth
display on
4Kmonitorsreducesthenumberofworkstati
ons needed
formonitoringlargesiteswith30+cameras
15. MonitorControl Monitorcontrolallowscontrollingallmonitors
fromasingleclient (MonitorWallcontrol)
16. RemoteView Remotemonitormodeallowssharingand
controllingaremote
monitorwhilestillviewinglocally
17. VMS in VMS MultiplesVMSintegration to bepossible
18. Privileges Role-basedoperatorprivileges
19. AD Support SupportforActiveDirectoryuserauthenticatio
n
20. E-Map Web-based maps with drag-and-drop
camera setup, easycross-
sitenavigationandHTML5livevideopop-
upandinstant
playback,allowquicksituationalresponse

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 617

21. PrivacyOptions Body pixilation and blurring in live view to

protect
customerandemployeeprivacyfromabuseo
f surveillancedata/4-Eye
dualuserauthenticationforplayback
22. CybersecurityFeat Enhanced password security – non-
ures recoverable
passwords,enforcingcomplexpasswords,p
asswordexpiry,andnodefault passwords
AddressedUnauthenticated/Unauthorizedc
hannels Securedfirewallconfiguration
SecuredWebclient–
enabledHTTPSandTLS1.2,and
protectionfromCSRFandXSSattacks
Restrictedfolderand
Registryaccesstooperators
SecuredAssemblies–Digitalsigning
SecurecommunicationwiththeCamerasusin
gTLS1.2. encryptedvideostreams.
SupportforDigestAuthenticationinmulticast
streambetween cameraand VMSclient

12.2.7 Workstation:

Sl. CPUSpecifications
No
1 TotalCores 4
2 TotalThreads 8
3 ProcessorBaseFrequency 3.40GHz or better
4 Cache 8MBCache
5 BusSpeed 5 GT/s
6 TDP 77W
MemorySpecifications

1 Max Memory Size 32 GB

2 MaxNo. ofMemory Channels 2

3 MaxMemoryBandwidth 25.6GB/s
4 ECCMemorySupported No
ProcessorGraphics

1 ProcessorGraphics Intel®HDGraphics4000 or
better
2 GraphicsBaseFrequency 650MHz
3 GraphicsMaxDynamicFreque 1.15GHz
ncy
4 QuickSyncVideo Yes

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 618

5 3DTechnology Yes
6 FlexibleDisplayInterface Yes
7 ClearVideo HDTechnology Yes
8 No ofDisplaysSupported 3

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 619

C-13 Audio Video / Conference System

13.0 Technical specifications

The scope of work includes Planning, design, preparation of drawings,

supplying, installation, testing & commissioning of Audio-Visual System
including Video Conference System, podium in complete manner to have a
fully functional system, as required. If any item required to make the scheme
functional, is not specifically mentioned in the scope and specifications, the
same is deemed to be included within the scope of this tender. These
technical specifications shall be read along with the General Conditions for
all E&M works given under subhead C-B.

13.1 Location and technical specifications of AV system and Video

Conference system is mentioned below. For each location, necessary
software shall be used to identify the type and quantity of equipment/item
required.

13.2 AV system including Video Conference system shall run on UPS power,
which shall be drawn from the nearest UPS DBs.

a) AV system with video conferencing system shall be provided at

MS VideoConference room

13.3 Technical Details of the AV System

S. Descripti Technical Specification

No on
.
4 K, Professional display with IPS technology, 16:9 aspect
Display ratio,3840*2160 (4K UHD) native resolution, 300 nits’
TV 85’’ / brightness,178 x 178 degree viewing angle, hard coating (3H)
75’’/55’’ minimumsurface treatment, should be anti-glare treatment,
should be24 hours operational hours, should be usable in
landscape orportrait modes, should have at least 2xHDMI, DP,
Audio, USB3.0, should have RS232C in/out, RJ45 In, IR
receiver in, pixelsensor inetc. complete.
Column Column array loud speaker with Frequency range (-10dB) of 80
Array Hz – 16 kHz or better; Power handling of 300Watt prog; Nominal
Loudspe dispersion of 145H X20V Coverage; Sensitivity of 88 dB SPL
aker and Max SPL of 121 dB SPL peak; Nominal Impedance 8
Ohms; Integral multi-tap Transformer with tap settings of
60/30/15W @ 70/100V or better. Pan/Tilt brackets with
adjustable angles shall be included. Shall be rated for Outdoor
IP55 rated with optional accessories.

Dual High performance dual channel Class-D amplifier supporting

Channel the following specifications. 2X500W @ 4ohms, 1500W @ 4
Amplifier ohms in bridge mode, SNR >103dB (at 0.775Vrms), THD

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 620

<0.5%. DSP with band pass filters, Peak limiters. Front LCD
display with LED indicators, Menu and Volume control. Remote
power trigger, amplifier status monitoring using onboard
auxiliary ports, forced-air fans to prevent excessive thermal
buildup Balanced XLR,1/4' and RCA phono inputs. 2 nos. of 4-
pole Speaker on or binding posts for speaker connectivity.

Wireless Wireless Lapel Microphone Set, Audio bandwidth: 35 Hz to 16

Lapel KHz or better, Signal/noise ratio :120 dB(A) or better (Receiver),
Micropho THD: <0.3% (at 1 kHz) or better (Receiver), Modulation:
ne Wideband FM, THD: <0.7% (Transmitter),

Signal/noise ratio: > 120 dB (A) or better (Transmitter),

Selectable channels: 1200 or better, Max. channels for
multichannel operation: > 24 with presets, RF output power: 50
mW or better, Capsule with Cardioid Polar Pattern, Condenser
Microphone, Audio frequency bandwidth: 35 Hz to 16 KHz or
better, Sensitivity: 8.8 mV/Pa or better, Signal to Noise Ratio:
60 dB-A or better, Electrical Impedance: 200 Ohms or better.

Goosene Wired Gooseneck Microphone with Desktop base unit and

ck on/off switch for Podium, Desktop gooseneck Mic. Audio
Micropho frequency bandwidth: 70 Hz – 16 KHz, Signal to Noise:64 dB-
ne A, Length: 500 mm, Voltage: 9 to 52 V Power Interface.

12 12 input / 8 output audio mixer with on board effects, low noise

Channel performance having minimum 2-in /2-out USB audio playback
Audio and recording, USB Interface, Compatible with
Mixer Windows 10 and Higher versions.

Digital 12 input and 8 output Networked Digital Signal Processor with

Signal AEC Processing ,12 Control Inputs and 6 Logic Outputs for
Processo GPIO Integration, 48V phantom power on all analog inputs,
r THD: <1%, 20 Hz to 16 KHz +10dBu output, Open architecture
software configurable, Separate logic processing power, 2
digital audio bus RJ 45 Port, 1 Ethernet port for Monitoring and
configuration, Capable to handle +5V unloaded logic output
voltage, at-least 6, Should have speech sense engine, Capable
to control 3rd party devices with TCP IP and RS 232, Should
have 1nos of RS 232 port for integration with control System,
Should have Bi-Directional Locate Functionality, 48 or more
digital audio Channel Bus, monitoring LED for COM, STAT,
ERR and PWR. Shall support bidirectional 8 channels of USB
audio with built-in or external expansion box over ethernet.

USB USB based Camera; Resolution is up to 1920X1080 with frame

Camera rate up to 30 fps; Should support Minimum 20X Optical Zoom
with Panning range of -170°~+170° and Tilt Range of -
30°~+90°; Effective Pixels: 2.0 Megapixel or better; Interface:
USB 2.0, LAN, RS232 x 2 (In & Out); Audio In Video
Compression Format:H.265/H.264; lens: Manual Focus;

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 621

Electronic Shutter : Auto/Manual; Focus : Should be

Auto/Manual/One Push; BLC:ON/Off; WDR : Off/Dynamic level
adjustment; Video Adjustment: Brightness, Color, Saturation,
Contrast, Sharpness, B/W mode, Gamma curve; SNR : >55 dB;
Interface: USB 2.0, LAN, RS232 x 2 ( In & Out); Audio In Video
Compression Format:H.265/H.264; LAN Port :Yes; Network
Protocol: RTSP/RTMP/ ONVIF, GB/T28181.

VC Software based Scalable Video Collaboration Solution to be

Software supplied with 99% uptime; Capacity : The solution must support
1 virtual Meeting room with minimum 100 participants joined
from various devices based on iOS, Android, Mac or Windows
Operating Systems. one additional webinar license must also
be provided within the Package connecting 500 remote
participants in a single session; Continuous presence of 49
onscreen videos through PC and Mac during Meeting mode and
10 onscreen videos during Classroom and webinar Mode;
Resolution : The solution must support 1080p, 30fps, HD
resolution; Protocols : The solution must support standard
based Audio Video Codec system like H.264 and G.711.

Streamin H.264 AV over IP Encoder with USB for record Video scaling at
g eitherinput or output, allows seamless switching from any
Software source, at
anyresolution,toanydisplayorprojector,whilepreservingvideofide
lity. Device can still be powered locally from 12VDC
allowingforeasyrack-mountable.ShouldhaveRS-
232andIRportsforcontrolling3rdpartydevices.UnlimitedScalabilit
yHDMIoutputinterface allows easy installation with local display
such as desktop PCapplications.DigitalVideoInput:HDMI,DVI-
D,Dual-ModeDisplayPort(DP++),RGB/VGA, DVI-DandDual-
ModeDisplayPort(DP++) aresupported through a passive
adapter Formats: HDMI, DVI-
D(throughadapter),HDCPcontentprotectionsupport,RGBHV,YP
bPr Latency: Up to 175 ms at 30 fps. Should have analog audio
out (Stereo) HDMI OUT:HDMI video output (passive pass-
through fromHDMIIN)USBconnector

:OneUSB-Aforaudio/videostreamrecording.

4X2 4X2 4K@ 60 Hz, RGB 4:4:4 matrix switcher with 4 HDMI Inputs
Matrix and 2 HDMI Outputs. Supports HDCP 2.2, HDR, Audio De-
Switcher Embedding from each HDMI outputs, Front panel switching
WEB UI, External RS-232 control. Should include with all
necessary OEM Mounting accessories.

Wall Wall plate with Inputs 1 HDMI, 1VGA with Audio, 2K and 4K
Plate support, HDTV Compatible, HDCP Compliant etc., complete as
required.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 622

Button Programmable, POE enabled Ethernet wall controller with 8 or

Control more buttons and rotary encoder supporting the following
Pad specifications. Onboard 2 Digital I/O, 2- RS232,2 IR/Serial ,2
Relays,1-LAN(POE) and USB programming port.

Backup and restoration of data, program files, and firmware

updates from a free management remote software and via USB.
Shall support Network Syslog, IPv6, IEEE 802.1X, X.509
Certificate Services, LDAP Integration, TLS / SSH Client &
Cryptographic Support Backwards and Cross-Compatibility,
Hardware / Software Built for 24/7/365 Operation Simplified
WEBUI configuration, customizable Keypad text. Shall include
custom standard 2 gang US, UK, or EU back boxes.

POE PoE Injector, 802.3AF Compliant for the above-mentioned

Adapter Control pad.

Digital Digital Podium Consisting of 21” Interactive Monitor with

Podium Motorised Angle Adjustment, Electromagnetic Technology –
Pen Touch, Switcher cum controller, Visualizer, - Full HD with
PC i5, 7th Gen, 16 GB RAM and 2TB Hard Disk.

HDMI To 4K HDMI to USB Capture Device supporting the following

USB specifications.
Capture
Card HDMI Input supporting 4096×2160p@60 4:4:4, HDR,

And 10-bit per channel Deep Color with analog audio input.
USB 3.0(Type-C) output supports resolutions up to
3840×2160p@30fps or better.Shall be compatible with popular
OS platforms and software-based codec applications.
Presente Professional presenter with cordless protocol cordless range
r 100 feet.
HDMI HDMI /VGA/Audio/Microphone/HDBase T Cable for entire
/VGA/ projection system, and as per site requirement.
Audio/
Micropho
ne/
HDBase
T Cable
Chairma The Table top microphone shall be equipped with twin-
n / loudspeaker system guarantees a homogenous sound level in
Delegate the meeting room. The cabling of the units, which is done by
Micropho CAT6A cables and hidden connections can be optionally
ne Unit secured with strain reliefs for fixed installations. Microphone
with hidden cable connections, cabling via RJ45 sockets Strain
relief shall be available for fixed installations.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 623

C-14 STP (Sewerage Treatment Plant)

14.0 Technical Specifications for Sewage Treatment Plant (STP) The scope of
work includes Planning, design, preparation of drawings, supplying, installation,
testing & commissioning of Sewage Treatment Plant (STP) equipment including
Pump sets, cabling, hardware and other connected items install a complete STP .
The total system should be in complete manner to have a fully functional
system, as required. If any item required to make the scheme functional, is not
specifically mentioned in the scope and specifications, the same is deemed to be
included within the scope of this tender. These technical specifications shall be
read along with the General Conditions for all E&M works given under subhead
C-B.

a) Sewage water from Toilets, Bathrooms, Canteen, Pantry, washrooms

etc. is fed into the Sewage Treatment Plant.

b) Effluents from Hospital, Laboratories such as microbiological

pathogens, radioactive isotopes, disinfectants & sterilizants, drugs and
their metabolites, chemical compounds, heavy metals and
pharmaceuticals etc. are fed into ETP inlet.

c) Moving Bed Bio-film Reactor (MBBR) is an aerobic attached biological

growth process. It does not require primary clarifier and sludge
recirculation. Raw sewage, after screening and degritting, is fed to the
biological reactor. In the reactor, floating plastic media is provided which
remains in suspension. Biological mass is generated on the surface of
the media. Attached biological mass consumes organic matter for their
metabolism. Excess biological mass leaves the surface of media and it
is settled in clarifier. Usually, a detention time of 5 hours to 12 hours is
provided in the reactors.

d) The contractor shall set out the works in relation to original points, lines
and levels of reference required for execution of work. The contractor
shall be responsible for the correct positions of all parts of the works
and shall rectify any error in the positions, levels, the dimensions, or
alignment of works.

e) Water tightness(seepage)/ testing of all the water retaining structures

as required.

f) Trail Run: The contractor shall initially operate the STP for a period of
one month, after completion of work, for start-up/stabilization and for
satisfactory performance, by deploying experienced staff in two shifts a
day and the staff of the user department shall be trained for operation
of plants.
g) The designs of Civil/ Electrical/ Mechanical portion shall be based on
the latest relevant IS codes, CPWD specifications, PH Engg. Manual,
Indian Electricity Rules. Norms of pollution control board, Local By –
laws and WHO standards with up-to-date amendments and correction
slips and sound engineering practice. Side references along with

calculations are to be given regarding adoption of references from

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 624

books/ manuals/ IS codes etc., including their page numbers.

h) The characteristics given are indicative and subject to change. The

Sewage and Effluent treatment should be based on MBBR Technology.
The treated sewage & effluent shall be subjected to tertiary treatment.
Quality after tertiary treatment shall be in conformity with the standards
laid down by Pollution Control Board for discharge in to a stream.

i) The tenderers are free to adopt the sizes to suit the design requirements
for final approval from State Pollution Board/ Local authorities.

j) The STP treatment plant shall follow satisfy the following requirements.
I. Efficient
II. Low power consumption.
III. Minimum maintenance.
IV. Minimum space requirement.
V. Self-operating system.

k) The scheme proposed shall be free from environmental hazard to the

occupants and neighbouring tenants.

l) The tenderer shall obtain No-Objection Certificate from Pollution Control

Board before and after execution of work.

14.1 Mechanical design Basis

S.No. Pressure Vessels and Piping, flanges & fittings

1. Pressure Vessels Design

2. Small Atm. Tanks Good Engineering Practice.
Horizontal tanks
3. MBBR tanks and Tube Design
Settler
4. Piping (MS) These shall be as per IS 1239 Part-
I, medium duty ERW up to 150 NB
and IS 3589 ERW for 200 NB and
above/ PVC/MS piping.
5. Fittings (MS) These shall be fabricated from the
parent pipes.
6. Flanges (MS) These shall be plate type made
from IS 2062
Grade A plates drilled to BS10TD
SOFF.
7. UPVC Piping These shall be of PN 10 class upto
110 mm OD, PN 6 class upto
219mm OD.
8. Fitting PVC Piping Socket cemented joint with rating
as per pipe.
9. Flanges PVC Piping BS10TD SOFF – Socket
Cemented.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 625

10. Fasteners These shall be as per IS 1367

class 4.6.
11. Valves These shall be BUTTERFLY
WAFER type MOC: -Body CI
(FG200) Disc: - SG Iron with

Nitrile / EPDM seating. For PVC

piping PVC ball valves will be
provided wherever required.
12. Check valves These shall be CI/CIEL Wafer type
/PVC.
13. Instrument isolation For 1/2 “connection GM/SS 316
needle valve. For 1” connection
CI/CIEL diaphragm valves shall be
used.

14.2 Sewage Treatment Plant (STP)

Inlet Characteristics for Sewage

Flow 50 m3/day (Minimum)

Discharge period 24 hours

Peak Flow for 8 Hours 15 m3/hr.

pH 6.5 - 8.5

BOD5 @ 200C >325 mg / litre

COD >300 mg / litre

TSS >300 mg / litre

O&G >20 mg/ litre

14.3 Treated Sewage Characteristics after Activated Carbon Filter: -

PH 6.5 – 7.5

BOD5 @ 200C < 10 mg / litre

COD < 20 mg / litre

TSS <10 mg / litre

O&G < 5 mg/ litre

E-Coli Absent

Odour Unobjectionable

14.4 Sewage treatment is done in the following manner:

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 626

Bar Screen To trap any free-floating debris.

Oil & Grease removal To trap free & floating oil if any
tank
Equalization tank To equalize the sewage quantitatively
& qualitatively
MBBR Treatment of organic matter to reduce
BOD / COD aerobically
Tube settler tank For solids liquid separation.
Chlorine contact tank For polishing & disinfection.
Filter Feed tank For Feeding to Filters.
DMF, ACF Filtering Units.
Sludge Tank For storage & digestion of Sludge.
Filter Press To make sludge into cakes for final
disposal.

14.5 The STP shall have the following equipment

a) Bar Screen: -
Raw sewage from the source is usually received into the bar screen chamber by
gravity. Screen provided will remove all floating and big size matter, which may
otherwise choke the pipeline and pumps.

Type -1 Manually cleaned with Handrake

In SS 304 / SS 316 flats of size 1000 mm x 500
mm having clear opening of 10 mm with necessary
Construction SS flat stiffeners. 1 No. hand rake shall also be
provided with GI pipe rod.
Type – 2 Mechanically cleaned automatic system.

In SS flats with opening not more than 4-5 mm with

Construction automatic cleaning system based on head loss.
b) Mechanical Oil Skimmer:

Material of CI
Construction
Type Belt type of 2-4" belt width and belt length suitable
for chamber depth below Liquid in O&G Tank.
Skimmer shall be Motor driven type with suitable
Motor and suitable speed reduction arrangement.

c) Equalization Tank: -

Usually, Sewage generation is more during peak hours. Visually no Sewage

is generated during shift change hours. Any biological system needs
constant feed for bacteria to work efficiently. Hence, it is important to put an
equalization tank to collect the excess flow during peak hours and feed
Sewage in lean hours. Equalization tank shall have a capacity of 8 hours to
12 hours of average flow rate. Provision of air grid shall be made for

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 627

thoroughly mixing the sewage to make it of homogenous quality and to keep

the suspended matter in suspension and to avoid septic conditions. The well
mixed sewage is then pumped into the MBBR Tank with the help of pumps.

d) Raw Effluent Transfer Pump:

Non-Clog, Self-Priming, raw Effluent transfer pump of suitable capacity to

pump Effluent from equalization tank to Aeration tank No.1 & 2(MBBR Tank
1 & 2) suitable for handling 25 mm to 30 mm solid particles and liquid
discharge.

e) Air Blower:

Twin lobe rotary type air blower capable of delivering suitable capacity of
Air at designed pressure, driven through “V” belt or directly coupled/ through
flexible coupled to a suitable TEFC motor with accessories. The pressurized
air from blower shall be fed to Equalization tank, MBBR Tank-1, MBBR
Tank-2.

f) MBBR Tanks (Aeration tanks):

The process at MBBR tanks under aerobic conditions is that the rising
buoyancy of air bubbles generated during aeration and oxygenation can
promote the flow of the filler and surrounding water. When the airflow
passes through the water flow and the gap of the filler, it is blocked by the
filler and divided into small bubbles. In this process, the filler is fully stirred
and mixed with the water flow, and the air flow is fully divided into fine
bubbles, which increases the contact and oxygen transfer efficiency of the
biofilm with oxygen. Under anaerobic conditions, the water flow and the filler
are fully fluidized under the action of a submersible mixer to achieve the
purpose of full contact and degradation of biofilm and treated pollutants.

g) Polypropylene MBBR Media:

MBBR media is one kind of new bioactive carrier as a house for attached
growth bacteria in MBBR process. It works as carrier for the growth and
attachment of microorganisms and are directly put into the MBBR system,
the wastewater go through the suspended carriers in MBBR reactor,
Kaldnes media adopt scientific formula and blend some micro-elements in
the high polymer material, which microorganisms attach themselves to
submerged moving biofilm carrier, forming a biofilm. Air is transferred into
the water, mixing the media and water and providing oxygen to the bacteria.
The MBBR media biofilm absorbs oxygen and reduces organic and
inorganic material thus providing treatment.

h) Tube Settler tank:

The aerated mixture shall be transferred from MBBR tank to RCC Tube
settler Tank. The aerated mixture shall be passed through tube settler
media before it reaches to the bottom of the tube settler tank.

i) Flocculation–Diffusers &Tube Settler:

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 628

Suitable size and quantity, Coarse & fine bubble disc type diffusers, with
necessary accessories, of EPDM/Silicon with anti-fungal treatment, to
provide clog free oxygen for aeration at Equalization tank, sludge holding
tank, treated water tank and aeration tanks. Suitably designed UV treated
PVC tube deck settling media to be installed in Tube Settler Tank along with
retainer plates and suitable sludge removal arrangement either by pumps
or any other suitable arrangement. Poly aluminium chloride (PAC) dosing &
Polymer (PE) dosing shall be done at Tube settler media.

j) Sludge Holding Tank:

The sludge from the Tube Settler tank is to be removed from bottom of tank
and transferred to RCC Sludge Holding Tank (SHT). SHT shall have 6 days
sludge holding capacity. The sludge collected at bottom of sludge holding
tank shall be fed to filter press.

k) Filter Feed Pump, Screw Pump for Dewatering and Filter

Press:

Filter feed pump, Screw pump for dewatering of sludge and Filter press of
suitable capacities shall be provided, suitable for operation on 415 ± 10%
volts, 3 phase, 50 cycles A.C. Supply.

l) Clear water tank:

The sewage water from tube settler tank is transferred to RCC clear water
tank of suitable capacity, for chlorination.

m) Disinfection:

The clear sewage water is then added with chlorine using chlorination pump
to kill the pathogens / E-Coli coliforms. The chlorinated sewage water
becomes clear water and now it is substantially free from organic
contamination, free from coliform bacteria.

n) Dual Media Filter and Activated Carbon Filter:

The chlorinated water is disinfected and then fed to Dual media filter with
the help of centrifugal pump for removing suspended solids. After removal
of suspended solid from the treated water, it is passed through the Activated
carbon filter for polishing of treated water in terms of reduction in BOD,
Colour removal etc. The Dual Media Filter and Activated carbon Filter vessel
shall be constructed with MILD Steel-Epoxy Painted.

o) Ultraviolet (UV) Disinfection Unit:

Ultraviolet dis-infection unit shall have over 99.9 % bacterial reduction from
inlet to outlet. The dis-infection chamber shall be constructed of SS 316L
steel. The UV lamp shall be of low-pressure mercury vapour type with hard
glass enclosure, the sockets shall be water tight & vibration resistant. The
lamp life shall be rated for 6000 hours. The UV unit shall have reactor,
cabinet housing, cabinet cooling, treatment chamber, electrical panel,

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 629

temperature safety control, lamp out alert, UV radiometer along with UV

monitoring system and UV monitoring readout panel. The UV lamp shall be
easily replaceable type. The lamps should be selected based upon the flow
requirement of respective unit.

p) Treated water Tank:

The treated water from UV Disinfection unit shall be led to treated water
tank before its disposal. The capacity of treated water tank shall be
designed accordingly.

14.6 List of Civil works:

S.No. Item Qty. Material of

construction
1. Bar screen pit 1 No. RCC
2. Oil & Grease Trap pit 1 No. RCC
3. Equalization tank 1 No. RCC
4. MBBR tank 2 Nos. RCC
5. Tube settler tank 1 No. RCC
6. Sludge Tank (For 6 days 1 No. RCC
storage)
7. Clear water tank 1 No. RCC
8. Treated water tank 1 No. RCC
9. Platforms for Dosing Tank 1 Lot. RCC
and foundation for
equipment.

14.7 List of E & M Works:

S.No. Item Qty. Material of

construction
1. Bar screener 1 No. Manual type MS-EP
1No. Mechanical type
2. Mechanical Oil 2 Nos. (1 W + 1 S) MS-EP
Skimmer
3. Raw Effluent Transfer 2 Nos. (1W+1S) Impeller – CI
Pump: Body – CI

4. Air Blower for2 Nos. (1W+1S) CI

Equalisation Tank &
MBBR Tanks
5. MBBR media 1 Lot. PP
6. MBBR -Air Distribution 1 Lot. UPVC
grid

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 630

7. Sludge Transfer Pumps 2 Nos. (1W+1S) Impeller – CI

Body – CI
8. Filter Feed Pump 2 Nos. Impeller – CI
(1W + 1S) Body – CI
9. Screw pump for 2 Nos. (1W+1S) Impeller – CI
dewatering of sludge Body – CI
10. Treated water transfer 2 Nos. (1W+1S) Impeller – CI
pump Body – CI
11. Filter Press, Centrifuge 2 Nos. (1W+1S) Basket –SS304
type Body - MS
12. Air grid for Equalization 1 lot. UPVC
Tank & SHT.
13. PAC Dosing Tank 1 No. (1W) LDPE

14. PAC Dosing Pump 1 No. (1W) PP

15. PE Dosing Tank 1 No. (1W) LDPE

16. PE Dosing Tank 1 No. (1W) SS304

Agitator
17. PE Dosing Pump 1 No. (1W) PP
18. Tube Settler Media 1 Lot. PVC
19. Collection Trough 1 Lot. MS-EP
20. Sodium 1 No. (1W) LDPE
Hypochlorite
Dosing Tank
21. Sodium 1 No. (1W) PP
Hypochlorite
Dosing Pump
22. Chlorine Contact Tank 1 No. MS-EP
23. Dual Media Filter. 1 No. (1W) MS -
Bituminous

24. Activated Carbon Filter. 1 No. (1w) MS -

Bituminous
25. Air grid – Sludge tank1 lot. (1W) uPVC
Coarse Bubble aeration
without Diffuser.
26. DWPE Dosing Tank 1 No. LDPE
27. DWPE Dosing Pump 1 No. PP
28. Agitator for DWPE 1 Lot. SS304
Dosing Tank.
29. Interconnecting piping-1 Lot. MS
Air blower line (B-Class
- Confirming to IS1239)
30. Interconnecting valves - 1 Lot. CI
- Air blower line
31. Interconnecting piping - 1 Lot. UPVC
- Sewage line.
32 Interconnecting Valves 1 Lot. PP
-- Sewage line

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 631

14.8 List of Instruments:

S.No. Item Qty. Material of
construction
1. Pressure Transfer pumps / air blowers 1 Lot.
Gauge discharge headers except
dosing pump
2. Air Rotameter Discharge header on MBBR 1 No.
Air Line.
3. Level Switches All tanks connected with 1 Lot.
pumps

14.9 List of Termination Points:

S.No. Item Location

1. Untreated At the inlet of Bar Screen Chamber
sewage
2. Treated At the outlet of Treated water Tank
Sewage
3. Power Supply At one point in the Distribution Board
4. Sludge Inside Sludge tank.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 632

14.10 PROCESS BLOCK DIAGRAM OF SEWAGE TREATMENT

PLANT

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 633

a) Control Panel and Cabling:

Separate Electrical control panels shall be provided for STP. Indoor control
Panel shall be made out of 14 SWG CRCA sheet duly powder coated. The
panel shall be having PVC heat shrinkable sleeved and 4 strip (3 phase +
1neutral) copper bus bar of suitable size and copper interconnections etc.
complete as required along with suitable rated MCCBs/ MCBs for incoming
and outgoing, Starters, O-L relay, Single Phase Preventer, Dry run
preventer, LED Indication Lamps, Digital Ammeters and Volt meters with
selector switch. The Panel shall function in complete Auto Mode / Manual
Mode.

Supplying and providing all inter-connecting cabling with XLPE insulated

PVC sheathed unarmored copper conductor cables of 1.1 KV grade
conforming to IS: 7098 with up-to-date amendments and of suitable sizes
with ISI mark, including connections, lugging, testing, i/c laying UG cable
along with earth wires from panel board to all the Equipment / Pumps of
STP in suitable size GI pipes below ground/G. I. tray on surface including
supply of suitable size of GI pipe/G. I tray.

Electrical supply shall be tapped from nearest feeder through XLPE

insulated PVC sheathed Aluminium/ Copper conductor cable, 1.1 KV grade.

b) Motors

Motors shall be as per IS 325, TEFC squirrel cage induction motors. Degree
of protection shall be IP55. Motors shall be suitable for supply voltage of
415 volts +/- 10%, 50 Hz, A.C. Supply. Insulation Class ‘F’ considering
temperature Rise as Class ‘B’. Efficiency Class IE2

c) Earthing:

All the Panels, pumps and other current carrying items shall be properly
earthed. Sizes of earth strips, wires shall be as per calculations and shall
be of copper only. All the copper earth strips, copper earth wires shall be
connected to main earth grid at suitable points.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 634

C-15 Medical Gas Pipeline System (MGPS)

15.0 Technical Specifications of Medical Gas Pipeline System

15.1 The scope of work includes Planning, design, supplying, installation, testing
& commissioning of Medical Gas Pipeline System for 100 bedded Hospital. If any
item required to make the scheme functional, is not specifically mentioned in the
scope and specifications, the same is deemed to be included within the scope of
this tender. These technical specifications shall be read along with the General
Conditions for all E&M works given under subhead C-B.

15.1.1 The complete Medical Gas Pipe Line System must follow Single Standard
(anyoneonly from: NFPA 99c /HTM 02-01/ ISO 7396-1/DIN/EN)
forrelevantequipmentexceptCopperPipes. Third party compliance certification
after installation to be done.Thecostforthesame shall bebornebythe Contractor.
The work consists following components.

a) Liquid Medical Oxygen (LMO) tank, Oxygen manifold,

emergency Oxygen manifold with automatic control panels.
b) Nitrous oxide (NO2) manifold and emergency NO2 manifold with
automatic control panel.
c) Carbon dioxide (CO2) Manifold with automatic control panel.
d) Medical Air Supply System (4Bar&7Bar) complete.
e) Medical Vacuum (suction)Supply System complete.
f) An a esthetic Gas Scavenging (AGSS) system complete
g) Distribution Piping Complete with accessories.
h) Area Valve Service System, Valves.
i) Alarm systems (master & area).
j) Bed Head Panels.
k) Controlcabling from/to control panel and associated
sensors, Other associated works.

15.1.1 General Specification for Medical Gas Pipe Line System (MGPS) lays
down guidelines to ensure safe, efficient, reliable and economical
provision and use of MGPS in frastructure.

15.1.2 ResponsibilityoftheContractor
15.1.2.1 The contractor shall be primarily responsible for supply,
installation, testing, commissioning of complete MGPS, OEM warranty
for products, defect liability of MGPS installations for Three years from
the date of completion of the work.

15.1.2.2 The Contractor shall execute complete work including

submission of layout drawings and working drawings. The contractor
shall provide power supply distribution within the MGPS plant room,
manifold rooms and dedicated earthing for MGPS Equipment.

15.1.2.3 The Contractor shall provide factory test certificates for the
materials/equipment used for the installation of Medical Gas Pipeline
System (MGPS). The MGPS firm shall supply complete set of manuals
for all the systems and sub-systems.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 635

15.1.2.4 The Contractor shall arrange at his cost on-site training of user
for a week by original equipment manufacturer (OEM), wherever
required.

15.1.2.5 Final electrical safety test, system test, and calibration shall be
done as per required standard for the equipment installed by authorized
persons using calibrated test equipment, and declaration to this effect
shall be submitted by the MGPS firm.

15.1.2.6 Contractor shall be responsible for suitable arrangement of heat

dissipation and Air-Conditioningrequired in the MGPS room.

15.1.2.7 Contractor shall supply the required number by ‘D’ Type cylinders
with first fill to be used in the system for different gases i.e., Oxygen,
N2O, CO2, for which nothing extra shall be paid.

15.1.3 Gas out let configuration location wise as below:

I. General Ward Bed (on Wall): O2-1 & Vc-1 for each bed.
II. SuperSpecialtyGeneralBed(OnWall):O2-1&Vc-
1foreachbedandMA4-1foreachCubicle.
III. PrivateRoom&IsolationRoom/SpecialWard (like-Dialysis, etc.) (on
Bed head panel): O2-1,Vc-1andMA4-1foreachbed.
IV. ICU/CCUBed (on Bed head panel):O2-2,Vc-2&MA4-2foreachbed.
V. Pre-OpBed/Emergency (on Bed head panel):O2-1,Vc-1&MA4-
1foreachbed.
VI. HDU/Post-OpBed(on Bed head panel):O2-2,Vc-2&MA4-
1foreachbed.
VII. Treatment/ProcedureRoom(OnWall):O2-1,Vc-1andMA4-
1foreachbed
VIII. Endoscopy/etc.,O2-1,Vc-1,MA4-1,CO2-1, N2O-1
IX. MinorOT/CathLab/CT/LINAC/Etc.(OnBHP):O2-2,Vc-2,MA4-1,N2O-
1foreachRoom(ForMRI/LINAC/ETC.
X. MoTs – O2-2, Vc-2, N2O-, CO2 -, AGSS-

a) The Configuration may change as per Client

specificrequirements,ifany. Contractor shall be responsible for
providing dedicated earthing forMGPS Plant room equipment and
panels and the same shall be in the scope of thework.

b) All tanks (Air, Vac and AGSS) shall be installed on dedicated platform
near MGPS Plant room and this platform shall beconstructed
withshedas pertheirrequirement. Contractor shall submit the MGPS
Plant and Manifold equipment loading design
withfootprintofallcomponentaspertheirofferedplant. Contractor shall be
responsible for complete development of LMO area.

c) The MGPS system must be designed to keep it operational round the

clock, with practically zero downtime. TheMGPSplanning,designand

execution should be code compliant. The system so installed must
ensure for its maintenance, all critical components being available for
periodical inspection&calibration and the overall system must have

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 636

sufficient resilienceto meet the varying loads that hospitals experience.

d) MGPS also includes Area Valve Service Units(AVSUs). These permit

isolation of certain parts of the system for servicing or repair. It includes
Line Valves and Line Valve Assemblies (LVA) to permit isolation of
larger parts of the Hospital Building formodificationand/orrepair.

e) In MGPS, Pressure Monitoring and Alarm Systems shall be integrated

to alert the medical staff responsible for the administration of medical
gases.
15.1.4 MGPS Plant Room & LMOYard

15.1.4.1 ThereshallbeaMGPSPlantRoom,MGPSManifoldRoom,LMOYard
witha Liquid Medical Oxygen apron, and a Medical Gas Cylinder Store.
MGPS Plant Room & LMO Yard, shall be connected to main Hospital
buildings through a trench/suitable route.

15.1.4.2 One Room shall be provided for Medical Oxygen, Medical

Nitrous Oxide.It shall get connected to the LMO Yard. It shall need to be
linked to the MGPS Plant Room and Cylinder Store Room. MGPS
Plant Room is required to house the Medical Air plant and the
medical vacuum Plant. All manifolds, including the emergency reserve
manifolds of a gas serviceshall belocatedwithinthesameroom.

15.1.4.3 One more Room for Medical Carbon

Dioxide, with floor- based Ventilation to prevent gas
accumulation.

15.1.4.4 Cylinder Store, organized in bays for Gas specific Empty & Full
Cylinders, forMedical Oxygen, Medical Nitrous Oxide, Medical Air and
Medical Carbon Dioxide. It shall also provides to rage space for
CylinderTrollies.

15.1.4.5 Care should be taken to ensure that different gas types and full
and empty cylinders are segregated as clearly as possible in gas
specific bays and provided with a labelling system that clearly indicates
the cylinder status.

15.1.4.6 All cylinder stores should be covered and, ventilated by means of

high- and low-level vents. Vent area shall be more than 1.5% of total
floor and wall area of the room.

15.1.4.7 The MGPS installation shall meet the requirements of NBC

2016, PART 4 Fire and Life Safety or Local Fire Safety Rules, as
applicable.
The MGPS Plant Room, Manifold Rooms and the Medical Gases
Cylinder Stores shall be provided with Smoke or Heat Detectors as
part of Hospital’s Fire Detection System and shall be provided with
adequate Fire Fighting Systems & Equipment. MGPS Plant Room and
LMO Yard shall be integrated with Central Fire Control Room and
Hospital’s Integrated Building Management System (I,) service.

15.1.4.8 Manifold room should have a suitable acoustic enclosure with

100% generator backup and fire security. The location should be

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 637

marked clearly for ease of identification in the event of an emergency. It

houses the control panel which allows a flow at stipulated rate from the
vacuum insulated evaporator (VIE) and relays alarm to secondary
panels located throughout the hospital. VIE tank has to be placed 6-
10 m away from built structure.

15.1.5 Sources of Supply for MGPS Plant Room

For Medical Air Plant and Central Medical Vacuum Systems, Multiple
Pump Systems (Multiplexing) shall be deployed on a cascading duty
arrangement, operated in a sequential manner to achieve redundancy
as well as energy saving. The following configuration may be
considered for plant sizing:

Service Source PlantSize

Medical Triplex System Each compressor size dat
Air Compressor halfdesignflowcapacity
AirReceiver TheminimumwatercapacityoftheAirRe
ceivers should be 50% of the
compressoroutput in 1 minute, stated
in terms of free
airdeliveredatnormalworkingpressure.
Medical Triplex Eachpumpsizedathalfdesignflowcapa
Vacuum Pumpsystem city
VacuumReservoir The water capacity of the Vacuum
(Whenmultiple Reservoirshould be equal to the plant
reservoirsare design flow at450mmHg60intermsof
provided arrange freeairaspiratedinoneminutewiththepu
theminparallel) mpoperatingat475mm.
AGSS 1+1 Standby together.
Pumps
ofAGSSdisposals
ystempumps.
Allpumpsshallbesi
zedforthe Highest
design flow,
asdeterminedacro
ssallOperatingRoo
ms.

15.1.5.1 The Gas Flow Regulator provided in a line, of as pecific gas

service, must be of same capacity, based on calculation of the source
size.
15.1.5.2 MGPS Installation shall be provided the Duplex
Control Manifold with two Banks of Gas Cylinders with equal number of
cylinders and AutomaticChange over Units, for al
Medical Gases including Medical Oxygen, Medical Nitrous
Oxide, Medical Carbon Dioxide.
15.1.5.3 For Medical Compressed Air and Medical Vacuum, one set of
triplex pumps shall service with respective Terminal Units. Provision
shall be kept in the Manifold Room for adding Oxygen Generator

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 638

(Concentrator)at a later date.

15.2 Medical Oxygen System

15.2.1 Continuous supply of oxygen is the primary requisite of any medical
unit. The manifold room should have 2 banks of requiredNumber of D-type
cylinders attached to a fully automatic changeover control panel. Supply
of cylinders with first fill is included in the scope ofwork.

a) Nominal Distribution Pressure to be considered is 400 k Pa. Each

terminal should be capable of passing 10 LPM Oxygen at standard tem
perature and pressure.

b) Rate of Oxygen consumption to be assumed for design calculations

in Operating Room sand Ventilation stations, Bio- medical Equipment
Service Stations shall be 100 Litres per minute, perpati ent.

c) Design Flow rate to be assumed for pipe sizing, for Oxygen,

inallwards, in all Labor cum Delivery Room (LDR) Rooms and New-born
Care Stations, shall be 10 Litres per minute.

d) All Patient Bed Stations in the Hospital shall be provided minimum

one or more,Oxygen Terminal Units. The MGPS design must ensure
that all Complement Beds in the
HospitalhaveaccesstoanOxygenTerminalUnit.

e) Oxygen Terminal Units shall be provided in all Treatment Rooms in

all wards. All New-borne care Units, new-borne Stabilization Units, All
Triage Stations, Pre-operative Wards, Post-operative Wards,
Recovery Rooms, Procedure Rooms, Treatment Rooms and Patient
Preparation Rooms. These Beds are collectively listed as Non-
Complement Beds.

f) Oxygen Terminal Units shall be provided in all Operating Rooms

and in designated Procedure Rooms, Examination Rooms, Therapy
Rooms, Dialysis Stations and DisasterExpansionWards.

g) The Medical Oxygen supply system shall be provided with a test

point compr is in gofa lockable valve and a terminal unit immediately
upstream of the Isolation valve of the Hospital Distribution Line. All
sources of Medical Oxygen supply should be fitted with their
respective testpoints.
15.2.2 LiquidMedical Oxygen Installation

a) The Liquid Medical Oxygen VIE (Vacuum Insulated Evaporator)

Tanks Supply System consists of One or more, vacuum-insulated
cryogenic bulk storage vessel to store the bulk liquid, constructed from a
stainless-steel inner pressure vessel that is supported in a mild steel
outer shell. Minimum 20 KL Capacity tank shall be provided.

b) The tank should be PESO certified and outer shell material used
should conform to EIGA IGC 73/08/E/IS2062/SA36. A typical system
requirement for hospital installation is as follows:

• LMO Storage Tank

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 639

• Ambient Air Vaporizer – should provide ambient air heat exchangewhich

is able to vaporize 300-600 N cum per hour LMO into vapours.

• Pressure regulation skid

• Interconnecting pipe between tank and vaporizer.

• Foundation bolts for tank and vaporizer

LMO tanks are installed vertically in open space in the hospital

premises. The selection of location should comply with PESO
regulations. The site should be 6 feet high industrial gauge fenced
having a gate for entry/exit. Fire extinguishers & water connection,
lighting, safety warnings, earthing pit etc.

c) The Contractor shall carry out all needed Civil Works of

Foundation,for free approach by truck up-to the installation site and
security of theInstallationtothesatisfactionofEngineer-In-Charge.

d) Provision of pressure-raising regulator system which can

automatically control thepressureintheLiquidOxygenSystem

e) Duplex (Two) ambient-heated vaporiser to convert the cryogenic

liquid into a gas for supply to patients via a pipeline system, with
manual changeover shall be provided.

f) Provision for water spraying facility for manual changeover of

vaporisers.

g) Pressure Control Equipment to control the pressure and flow of gas

to the pipeline deploying a system of duplex pressure regulators,
valves and Pressure Alarms. In turn, this shall get connected to
Hospital Supply line, upstream of the Automatic Changeover Control
Panel, through a non-return Valve.

h) As a system, on safety-valve operation, oxygen must be able to vent

safely to atmosphere. The use of telemetry on the Liquid Storage
System to monitor relevant supply conditions continuously, including
storage vessel levels and pressure, is required to provide a data
output feed to Hospital’s MGPS Monitoring and Alarm System for
real time monitoring and gas consumption evaluation.

i) The layout of the Liquid Medical Oxygen installation shall provide

adequate access to all components of the system and permit
adequate airflow for the ambient vaporisers and provide for adding
an additional bulk storage vessel in future, on additional plinth.

j) A pipework and installation diagram (P&ID) of the Liquid Medical

Oxygen VIE Tank System installation shall be displayed clearly to
indicate the appropriate valves that are
necessarytooperatetheplantsafely.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 640

k) The provision and maintenance of the Liquid Medical Oxygen

Supply System, from thesource, including the Vaporizer, pipeline up
to its integration with the Oxygen manifoldsystem and all the
accessories, shall be the responsibility of Contractor.

l) All statutory requirements of the Chief Controller of Explosives of India

and SMPV rules need to be followed; PESO approval for filling &
operation of the LMO installation.

15.2.3 Liquid Oxygen Vessel of min. 20 KL Capacity Vacuum Insulated

Evaporator, insulated double walled, vertical storage tank of 20,000 Liter
as per technical specification.

• The double walled Vacuum Insulated Evaporator (VIE) shall be

constructed of stainless-steel inner vessel contained within a carbon
steel outer vessel. The annular space between the vessels shall be filled
with non-inflammable perlite insulation material to insulate under
vacuum. The VIE should be self-pressurizing type by partial evaporation
of liquid oxygen through a pressure building coil by a non-ferrous
imported pressure regulator. Hard stand shall be provided for VIE.

• The vessel shall be supplied as a functional whole with all materials of

construction & the cleaning regime suitable for medical grade liquid
oxygen. Material used (including lubricants) should conform to EIGA
IGC 73/17/E (Revised version of Doc 73/08). The LMO tank should
have Liquid outlet & Gas Outlet along with all the necessary valves and
accessories. There is constant display of the level of LMO and pressure
etc. inside the vessel. The output from the tank is connected through a
copper pipe of suitable diameter to the MGPS network at the MGPS
Manifold.

Technical Data of Liquid Oxygen Storage Tank:

Quantity :One no.

Installation :Outdoor

Type of Insulation :Vacuumwith Perlite powder.

Type of Vessels :Vertical cylindrical supported on
Skirt
Overall Volume :20 KL water capacity
Design Code : AD 2000, 2004 edition of the
technical rules for pressure
vessels code.

a) Inner Vessel

Material : Stainless SteelSS304

Design & Manuf. Code : EN13458
Maximum Allowable Pressure : 17.00 Kg/cm2
Design Pressure : 26 Kg/cm2
Design Temperature : -196 to +50 Deg. C
Insulation : Vacuum Plus Perlite

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 641

b) Outer Vessel
Material : Carbon Steel ASTMA516
Design Code : EN13458
Operating Pressure : Vacuum
External Surface : Mechanical Cleaning
Primer / Final Coat : Two Coats each Equivalent

Low Pressure Atmospheric Vaporisers 2 Nos shall be provided. Type :

Ambient Air Heated & Vertical.
Draft : Natural draft provided by
enlarged area of fins.
Capacity : 600 Nm3 /Hr.
Inlet Temperature : -196 Deg.Cto +40 Deg.C
Outlet Temperature : 10 Deg below amb.
Heating medium : Ambience Max. Operating Pressure :20 Kg /
Cm2Design Pressure : 22 Kg / Cm2 Pneumatic Tube
Pressure : 30 Kg / Cm2Design & Manuf. Code : ASME
Material of Construction :SB 221 A96063 T5 or
c) Standard fittings: Pressure rising coil, pressure building regulator of
adequate capacityand size, dual safety valve with imported three-way
diverter valve, bursting disc.,pressuregauges,liquid over flow line,
Liquid levelgaugeandadequatenumbersofextendedspindleglovevalveetc.

The pressure regulator installed should be made of suitable material

(Nonferrous) with bonnet & trim parts. Inlet pressure max. 20 Kg/sq
cm., outlet pressure range within 0.5 to 10 kg per sq cm (adjustable)

a) MaximumEvaporationRate:<1%ofnetvalue.
b) MaterialofConstruction: Innershellandwettedpartsof SS304
Outershellof CS AST MA516.
c) JointEfficiency: 100%
d) Radiography : 100%for inner,forouterspot
e) Externalpiping: FromLMOTanktoVaporizer:SS304
f) From Vaporizer to inlet of Pressure Reducing Station: SS304
g) FromOutletofPressureReducingStationtoMainheader:Copper
h) CryogenicValves:
i) CryogenicSafetyValves: Nonferrous
j) PressureBuildingregulator: N o n ferrous
k) LeakDetectiontest: HeliumLeak detection
l) Painting: PrimerandfinishwithWhiteRAL9010
m) Inspection:By3rdparty (SGS/LLOYDS/TUV)
n) Cleaning: DegreasingforOxygenServiceandPressurizewith
Nitrogen.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 642

o) Withdrawal rate:1000cumperhr.at12BarGorasperdesign
d) Accessories:LMO Tank along with P&ID shall be fitted with the
following accessories:
a) TopFillValve, Bottom FillValve
b) Liquidcharginglineblowvalve
c) LiquidDeliveryValve
d) OverflowValve, Gasblowvalve
e) FillingCoupling, VaporizerCoupling
f) LiquidLevelGauge(Dial100mm).
g) HighLevelValve, EqualizingValve, LowlevelValve
h) PressureGauge(100mmdial,Range0-25kg/cm2)
i) PressureGaugeIsolationValve
j) PressurizingValve
k) PressurizingCoil
l) Filter
m) Pressure Regulator
n) Economizer
o) Check Valve
p) Evacuation Port
q) VacuumGauge Connection Port/vacuum probe valve.
r) Vessellowpressurealarm
s) Pipelinelowpressurealarm.
t) Twinregulator
u) Automaticchangeovertomanifoldswithcontrolpanel/regulator
v) Alarmonindicatingmanifoldinuseincase thevesselisnotinuse.
w) Alarmonlowpressureback-upmanifoldcylinders

Should have safety features in line with Global Safety as a part of

installation The minimum safety (Alarm) features for LMO installation
are as follows:

a) Alarm VIE (Vacuum Insulated Evaporator)

b) For low content level (audio-visual)
c) Low pressure alarm (audio-visual) and backup at manifold
room.
d) Alarm VIE low pressure alarm (audio-visual), low pressure in
pipeline system. Deviation or fall in pipeline pressure by more
than ± 10% from nominal distribution pressure (The nominal
distribution pressure should be within the range of 400kPa to
500 kPa).
e) Alarm for changeover from primary to secondary supplies.
f) Alarm for secondary or reserve supply below minimum
pressure.
g) Dual parallel regulator system for uninterrupted supply in case
of regulator has to change for repair. One regulator is set at 4.2
bar and the other at 3.8 bar as per international practice.
h) Three-way gauge valve for isolation of line pressure with

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 643

manual manoeuvre.
i) Remote monitoring telemetry-continuous monitoring of VIE
stock based on daily consumption.

e) SafetyFitting:
a) Twosafetyvalvesforinnervesselfittedonpipelinewithflowdivert
valve
b) Rupturediscforinnervessel.
c) Safety valveforinletpipeline.
d) Safetyvalveforpipelineofpressurizing evaporator.
e) Onerupturedisc/safetydeviceonoutervessel.

f) TheLiquidMedicaloxygentankshallaccompanytheOriginalQualityTe
stCertificate covering following Documents:

a) Approvalletteralongwithapproved drawing fromCCOE.

b) ApprovalletterfromCCOEforuseofcryogenicvessel(s)atsite.
c) Certificatefromtheauthorizedinspectionagency.
d) Heatchartforpressure parts.
e) Dimensionchecksreport.
f) DishedEndreports.
g) Mechanicalpropertiestest reportforproductiontestcoupon.
h) Visualinspectionreport.
i) Radiographyexaminationreport.
j) Liquidpenetrantexamination.
k) Cleaninginspectionreport.
l) Hydro-pressuretestreport.
m) Certificate of safely valve, pressure gauge and level gauge.

15.2.4 Pressure Reducing Station

The healthcare facility supply pipeline reducing station which reduces
supply pressure must consist of dual parallel regulator system. Both
regulators must be online, and all isolation valves and regulators must be
kept in the open position. The nominal distribution pressure should be
maintained within the range of 400kPa to 500kPa. Pressure relief Valve –
Medical oxygen pipeline system should be provided with a pressure relief
device downstream of the line pressure regulator connected by means of
a 3-way valve. Material used should conform to (including lubricants) EIGA
IGC 73/17/E. The control equipment should be protected from weather.

15.2.5 Maintenance and Training

The Contractor should organize satisfactory on-site training to the health

facility staff designated by the authority for a period of 2 weeks. Refresher
training shall be provided by the Contractor at the time of scheduled
preventive maintenance visit by service engineer. Maintenance, repair,
and safety of the whole installation and LMO related to liquid oxygen
vessel will be the responsibility of the contractor and monitored by the
hospital management committee.

15.2.6 Oxygen Manifold System

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 644

a. Oxygen Manifold shall be Certified as per Medical Device Directives

(93/42/EEC) having the CE mark. It should be manufactured in an ISO
13485 quality management system duly certified in accordance with
the requirement of Indian/International standard. The Compressed Gas
Duplex Cylinder Manifoldisa High- Pressure, Low Flow System.

b. Manifold shall consist of two high-pressure header bar assemblies to

facilitate connection of primary and secondary cylinder supplies. The
Manifold size is of 10+ 10 cylinders Manifold with D Type, Gas
Cylinders in each bank of the manifold.

c. The manifold assembly shall provide two stages of pressure regulation.

Two single stage pressure regulators shall be provided for pressure
regulation. Multistage regulators combined into a single unit are not
acceptable.

d. The high-pressure header bar shall be designed in such a manner that it

can be extended to facilitate additional cylinder connections. Each
header bar assembly shall be provided with a high – pressure shut off
valve.

e. The manifold should be hydraulically tested to 3500 psig. The manifold

should be so designed that it shall suit easy cylinder changing and
positioning. The system should have non – return valves for easy
changing of cylinders without closing the bank. The cylinder should be
placed with the help of cylinder brackets and fixing chains which should
be zinc plated. Non-return valves fitted to header manifolds.

f. The changeover from the “Duty” to the “Stand-by” bank of cylinders

shall be Automatic, Based on pneumatic pressure, without fluctuationin
Hospital Distribution Line Pressure. On Automatic changeover, the
Empty LED indicator shall show adepleted bank by turning red. A buzzer
shall also sound to indicate an empty bank or banks. When the s ystem
is reset, by replacing the depleted cylinders, the indicator shall turn
green and shall also silence thebuzzer.

g. In this MGPS Installation, when it is connected to I,, this information

shall be relayed and shown in Central Monitoring System, that the
cylinder bank was depleted and, inturn, has been reset.

h. Three pressure gauges on the front of the control cabinet shall indicate
left bank pressures, right bank pressure sand Hospital Distribution Line
pressures. A main shut off valve shall be installed between the
AutomaticChangeover Control Paneland the Hospital Distribution Line.

i. The use of PTFE, PCTFE, Viton and other halogenated polymers in

these applications is strictly prohibited. Non-return valves fitted to header
manifolds shall have a metallic seat with ceramic ball. Soft seat non-
return valves utilizing polymers or elastomers are not acceptable.

j. Apneumatic relief valve shall be incorporated, upstream of Pressure

Regulator, in Hospital Distribution Line for regulating excessive line
pressure. Its discharge pipeline shall bevented to atmosphere, outside

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 645

the building, in an area where the discharge of oxygen, shall not present
a fire hazard or cause in jury to personnel. All the manifolds shall be
capable of passing the full pipe line flow.

k. AllCylinders shall be positioned where they can be easily moved, on

floor and held in place, against the wall, with two (2) Cylinder Holding
Brackets and tape rest raints or Chains.
l. The Header Bar shall be high-pressure copper pipe, with integral check
valvesand cylinder pigtail assemblies of copper. confirming to IS3224,
incorporating a checkvalve at the header connection The Header
Bar shall be provided with high pressure brass fittings made of high
tensile brass. These shall be cleaned prior to installation and supplied
complete with wall mounting brackets.
The manifold connections shall be Oxygen Specific.

m) The manifold should be suitable to withstand working pressure of

150 Kg/cm2. The manifold shall be tested (hydraulically) at 20,000k Pato
24,000 k Papressure and necessary test certificate from the
manufacturer shall be provided.

15.2.7 Oxygen Emergency/ Reserve Manifold System

a) Oxygen Emergency/Reserve Manifold System shall be provided to

form a sourcefor emergency reserve supply. It shall connect to Hospital
Supply line throughapressureregulatorandacontrolvalve.

b) Emergency Reserve Medical Oxygen Supply Systems can be

deployed through secured NISTconnections provided at areaalarm level.

c) Located in the MGPS Manifold Room, Reserve

Medical Oxygen Supply Systems shall be a Duplex Control Manifold
with automatic changeover connected to two header barsas has been
describe dearlier. It should fully comply with the requirements of HTM
02- 01/ISO/IS-7396.

d) It shall be a 4 or more + 4 or more Duplex Control Manifold with

DType, Gas Cylinders in each bank of the manifold. Another 4 cylinders
shall be stored inthe MGPS Manifold Room itself.

e) Ts specifications remain the same as for Main Gas Cylinder Manifold.

The manifold is connected to the medical gas pipeline system via a
non- return valve.

f) Changeover from the primary manifold to the emergency manifold can

be carried out manually by opening the isolating valve. The manifold
has two pressure gauges, one to indicate the pressure in the cylinder
and the other to show the regulated pressure being supplied into the
medical gas pipeline system.

g) Monitoring is provided to detect when the pressure in the cylinder has

fallen to a predetermined level, with contacts for transmission to the
main alarm system.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 646

h) Apipe work and installation diagram (P&ID) of the Manifold installation

shall be displayed in the Manifold Room. It shall clearly indicate the
pressure regulators, safety instructionsand other statutory signs and
instructions. It shall also clearly state the location of sintered bronze in
let filters and the procedure to replace these, in the event of their
choking.

15.2.7 Fully Automatic Oxygen Change over Control Panel

a) The fully automatic oxygen control panel shall comply

withHTM 02- 01/NFPA 99C/ DIN / EN / ISO/IS- 7396-1
standards. The manifold control system shall provide an
uninterrupted supply of Oxygen from equally sized high
pressure cylinder banks via a suitable arrangement of
pressure regulators, providing a constant downstream
nominal pipeline gauge pressure of 400 kPa.

b) The manifold control system shall be powered by an extra

low voltage on board supply. A separate power supply board
should be provided. The controller shall include alarm
connections with a wire monitoring technology and sets of ,
connections for both normally open and normally closed
operation.

c) The Automatic Changeover Control Panel shall be water

resistant, complete with its master control valves, power
supply & all Valves, Gauges and Pipes, etc. Suitable
Electrical power outlet shall be fitted in preparation for
Installing the Unit. The control unit power supply shall provide
a visible green LED indicator to display “Mains Supply On”.

d) The Automatic Changeover Control Panel shall be wall type

and so mounted that it can take a cylinder bank of 10
cylinders on either side. Average mounting Height for
Automatic Changeover Control Panel Box is that its centre
shall be 1650 mm from finished floor level.

e) The Manifold control panel shall be withdigital display, fully automatic

type and switches from “Bank in Use” to “Reserve bank “without
fluctuation indelivery supplyline pressure. Change over shall be
performed by electrically/pneumatically operated valves contained in
the control cabinet. In the eventof an electrical power failure (in case
of electronically operated) the valves shall automatically open to
provide an uninterrupted gas flow.It shall be 100% automatic and shall
not require manual adjustment.

f) All regulators shall be protected from over-pressurization by

relief valves that are vented to atmosphere. There shall be a
bypass valve fitted to the 2nd stage relief valve to enable gas
to be vented outside the manifold room during the
commissioning stage.

g) The Control Panel shall be housed in a single panel having a

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 647

solid construction in a glass-reinforced polymer moulding for

high chemical and corrosion resistance and high impact
strength.

h) To aid maintenance, the connections within the panel

shall use ‘O’ rings sealing against flat-face connectors to
facilitate easy removal and replacement of components. For
added safety, the voltage inside the panel shall not exceed
12V D.C. The mains supply transformer shall be in its own
housing in a moulded recess at the rear of the panel. To
simplify installation there shall be an installation bracket
attached.to the wall with four screws, the main panel then
shall locate on to this bracket and be secured.

i) Either the left- or right-hand manifold bank may be

designated “Duty” and the Control Panel shall automatically
changeover to supply the distribution system from the
“Standby” bank when pressure in the “Duty” bank falls to a
pre-determined level. Each side of the Control Panel shall be
capable of being fully isolated via a full flow ball valve in
order to change any regulator without cessation of supply.
The inlet of the 1st stage regulator shall be protected from the
particulate matter by a 25μm sintered bronze filter. There
shall be a fail-safe system in the event of power failure so
that solenoid valves open and there is full continuity of supply
pressure and flow. Upon power restoration, the unit shall
revert back to the original bank of cylinders being used.

j) To avoid inadvertent resetting of the change cylinder, alarm

the solenoid valves shall be latched so that once changeover
has occurred and the cylinders have been replaced, a reset
button must be operated to cancel the alarm condition. There
shall be manual changeover buttons so that servicing either
side of the system can be simply achieved. The PCBs shall
be linked with plug and socket connectors for easy removal.

k) The system should incorporate graphical display to indicate

pressure level in each bank of cylinders and a line pressure.
Digital display should be backed up by mechanical gauges in
case of power failure. All alarms should be duplicated on a
display and embedded membrane panel with LEDs. A
manifold status panel shall be provided with colour coded
LED indication lights for the following operating and fault
indications:
• Power On
• High Line Pressure,
• Low Line Pressure
• Reserve Low,
• Left Bank Running,
• Left Bank Low,
• Left Bank Empty,
• Right Bank Running,
• Right Bank Low,
• Right Bank Empty.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 648

l) All components in the gas stream and contact with the oxygen
pressures above 30 bar shall be made from halogen-free
materials.

15.2.9 Oxygen Flowmeter with Humidifier Bottle

Oxygen Flow Meter with humidifier bottle for Oxygen shall be certified
as per Medical Device Directives (93/42/EEC). It should be
manufactured in an ISO 13485 quality management system duly
certified constructed in accordance with the requirement of
international standard. It should be as per HTM 02-01/EN/ DIN/ NFPA-
99C standards.

Back Pressure Compensated flow meter for accurate gas flow

measurement with following features:

a) Oxygen Flow Meter with humidifier bottle should be having

control giving 0-15 liters per minute. It shall meet strict precision and
durability standard. The flow meter body shall be made of brass
chrome plated materials.

b)The flow tube and shroud components shall be made of clear,

impactresistant polycarbonate. Flow tube shall have large and
expanded 0- 15LPM range for improved read ability at low flows.
Inlet filter of stainless- steel wiremesh to prevent entry off oreign
particles shall be provided.

C) The humidifier bottle is made of unbreakable & reusable

polycarbonate /polysulfonematerial autoclavable at 121 degree
centigrade.Humidifier Bottleshall be covered under warranty & CMC.
Shall be BIS/European CE certified/ULListed/USFDA/ETLlisted.

15.2.10 Pressure Regulation for Piped Oxygen Supply

To harmonise the supply of Medical Oxygen from different supply
sources on to the same Hospital Pipeline System, following design
parameters areto be evaluated for implementation.

a) The Nominal Distribution Pressure should be within the range of 3.8

Barto 5B ar.
b) The respective Pipeline Pressure Regulator on supply sources, must
consistofa system of duplex pressure regulators and valves. Both
regulator smust be online, and all isolation valve sand regulators must
be in the open position.

c) A Pressure Relief Device shall be provided, downstream of the

Pressure Regulatorconnected by means of a three-way connection, so
that the Safety Device can bereplacedeasily. Apressure Relief Device is
a safety device designed to protect a pressurized
pipeline during an over pressure event.

d) The Pressure Relief Deviced is charge should be run to the exterior of

the building by providing a Vent Pipe of suitabledia.
e) Pressure sensors to provide the alarm function need to be fitted to

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 649

pipeline distribution systems.

15.2.11 The Source Pressures & multipoint, multi stage Pressure

Regulation is as under:
(a) InLiquidMedicalOxygenTanks,thepressureoftheVIEisautomaticallycon
trolled by a pressure raising regulator which controls the flow of liquidto
thepressure raising vaporiser as required. The vaporised liquid maintains
the VIE gasspacepressureataminimumof10bar.

b) The Manifold Control Panel of the source for secondary supply of

Medical Oxygenprovides Automatic Changeover from Duty Bank to
Stand-by Bank and a two-stagereductionofGasPressure;to4.5Bar–
5.0Bar,beforeitentersthePipelinePressureRegulationStationanddelive
redtotheHospital.

16.3 Nitrous Oxide System

a) N2O is liquefied by the high pressure within the cylinder. The supply
is generally limited to Operating Rooms so no variation is generally
required. TheDuplex Control Manifold with 4 or more plus 4 or more
Class-D type bulk cylinders shall be provided. Manifold shall consist of
two high- pressure header barassemblies to facilitate connection of
primary and secondary cylinder supplies. Each header bar shall be
provided withrespective number of cylinder pigtail connections to suit
cylinder valves as per IS.3224/BS/ ASME incorporating a check
valve at the header connection. Each header barassembly shall be
provided witha high pressure shut off valve.

b) The manifold assembly shall provide two stages of pressure

regulation. A single stageprimary regulator, one for each cylinder bank
shall be used to initially reduce cylinder pressure and two single stage
pressure regulators shall be provided in the control cabinet for final
delivery pressure regulation. One delivery pressure regulator in service
and one shall be ready for service in a Stand by mode. The
manifold shall behydraulically tested to at least 3500 psig. The
manifold shall be so designed that it shall suit easy cylinder changing
and positioning. The cylinder shall be locked with the help of cylinder
brackets and fixing chain swhich shall be galvanized.

c) In N2O cylinders, the pressure shall remain constant until all of the
liquid is evaporated, after which the pressure drops rapidly as the
remaining gas is removed. The additional Gas Cylinders, as per design
calculations, shall be stored in the cylinder store room.

d) The N2O supply system shall be provided with a test point comprising
of a lockable valve and a terminal unitimmediately up stream of the
Hospital distribution line isolation valve. N2O Terminal Units shall be
provided in all Operating Rooms.

e) Three pressure gauges on the front of the control panel shall indicate
left bank pressures, right bank pressures and Hospital Distribution
Line pressures. The changeover from the “Duty” to the “Stand-by”
bank of cylinders shall be Automatic, preferably based on pneumatic

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 650

pressure, without fluctuation in Hospital distribution line pressure. On

Automatic changeover, the Empty LED indicator shall show a depleted
bank by turning red. A buzzer shall also sound to indicate an empty
bank or banks. When the system is reset, by replacing the depleted
cylinders, the indicator shall turn green and shall also silence the
buzzer.

f) This MGPS Installation shall be connected to I, this information shall be

relayed and shown in Central Monitoring System, that the bank was
depleted and, in turn, has been reset.

g) A pneumatic pressure relief valve shall be incorporated in Hospital

distribution line upstream of Automatic Changeover Control Panel for
regulating line pressure. The discharge pipeline of this valve shall be
vented to atmosphere, outside the building, in an area where the
discharge of Nitrous Oxide, shall not present a hazard or cause injury
to personnel.

h) The Header Bar shall be N2O gas specific high pressure copper pipe
with integral check valves and cylinder pigtail assemblies of Stainless
Steel or Copper, confirming to IS 3224. The Header Bar shall be
provided with high pressure brass fittings made of high tensile brass
and connections and supplied complete with wall mounting brackets.

i) The manifold should be suitable to withstand working pressure of 150

Kg/cm2. The manifold shall be tested (hydraulically) at 20,000 kpa to
24,000 kPa pressure and necessary test certificate from the
manufacturer shall be provided.

15.3.1 SecondarySupply of Nitrous Oxide

a) A Duplex Control Manifold with automatic changeover shall be

providedin this MGPS installation, as source for secondary supply of
Nitrous Oxide. Thesecondary supply is provided to form a reservesource
of supply. when the primary source is depleted, or to permit servicing or
repair ofprimarysupplysource.

b) The Gas Flow from Source of secondary supply shall be determined by

the main pipeline supply pressure and should be triggered by 5% to
10% drop of linepressurecomingfromsourceofprimarysupply.

c) ThisDuplexControlManifoldshall have 2 or more + 2 or more, D Type,

Compressed Gas Cylinder Manifold, withmastercontrolvalve. All
specifications remain the same as specified for Primary Supply. It shall
be located in the N2O Cylinder Manifold Room.

15.3.2 Source Pressures & Regulation

In order to harmonise the supply of N2O from different sources of

supply on to the same Hospital Pipeline System, following design para
meters are to be evaluated for implementation.

a) The Cylinder Vapour Pressure shall be about 5000 kPa. The Nominal

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 651

Distribution Pressure should be within the range of 370 kPa to

500kPa.
b) The respective Pipeline Pressure Regulator on sources of supply,
must consist of a system of duplex, double stage, pressure regulators
and valves. Both regulators must be online, and all isolation valves
and regulators must be in the open position.
c) A Pressure Relief Device shall be provided, downstream of the
Pressure Regulator connected by means of a three-way connection,
so that the Safety Device can be replaced easily. The Pressure Relief
Device discharge should be run to the exterior of the building by
providing a Vent Pipe of suitable dia.
d) Pressure sensors to provide the alarm function shall need to be fitted
to pipeline distribution systems.

15.3.3 FullyAutomaticNitrousOxideControlPanel

a) ThefullyautomaticN2O controlpanelshall complywithHTM 02-

01/NFPA99 C/EN /DIN/ISO7396-1STANDARD. The Control Panel
shall have inbuilt heaters to prevent frosting of regulators. The Control
Panel shall be wall type and so mounted that it can take a cylinder
bank of 4 or more cylinders on either side. Average mounting height
for control panel box, is that its centre shall be 1650 mm from finished
floor level.
b) The Manifold control panel shall be digital, fully automatic type
and switches from “Bank in Use” to “Reserve bank “without
fluctuation in delivery supplyline Pressure. Changeover shall be
performed by electrically/ pneumatically operated valves contained in
thecontrol cabinet. In the event of an electrical power failure the
valves shall automatically open to providean uninterrupted gas
flow. The manifold shall not require any manual resetting or
adjustments after the replacements of the depleted cylinders.

c) The Control Panel shall be water resistant, complete with its master
control valves, power supply & all Valves, Gauges and Pipes, etc.
Suitable Electrical power outlet shall be fitted by the Contactor in
preparation for Installing the Unit. The control unit power supply shall
provide a visible green LED indicator to display “Mains Supply On”.

d) The Control Panel shall include two pressure relief valves,one high
pressure, approximate 200psi, and one low pressure,
approximate75psi. The control panel shall also have heaters to
preventice formation on the regulators at high flowrates. The Control
Panel shall be made to provide Heavy Duty and have a flow capacity of
1500LPMormore at 50to 60 psi.
e) The Automatic Control Panel shall be installed in such a way to meet
the peak flowrequirement of the Hospital. Control panel shall have
Alarm resets witch/Mute/acknowledgements witch to control and
monitor the alarm indications by the operator.
f) The system should incorporate graphical display to indicate pressure
level in each bank of cylinders and a line pressure. Digital display
should be backed up by mechanical gauges in case of power failure.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 652

g) A manifold status panel shall be provided with colour coded LED

indication lights for the following operating and fault indications:
• Power On,
• High Line Pressure,
• Low Line Pressure,
• Reserve Low,
• Left Bank Running,
• Left Bank Low,
• Left Bank Empty,
• Right Bank Running,
• Right Bank Low,
• Right Bank Empty.

h) All components in the gas stream and contact with the Nitrous oxide
pressures above 30 bar shall be made from halogen-free materials. It
should fully comply with the requirements of the HTM 02-01/ ISO
7396.

15.4 Medical Carbon Dioxide System

15.4.1 The system shall consist of medical CO2 Manifold Primary & Standby with
Class-D type Cylinders and control panel.The Modular Manifold supply
system shall provide carbondioxide piped distribution system. The
Modular Manifold system shall be in such a way that it increases flexibility
andallows easy enlargement of the manifold capacity in case of future
expansion. Shall complywithHTM02-01/NFPA 99C/EN/DIN/ISO 7396-
1standard.
15.4.2 SourceforPrimarySupplyshallbetwobanksofaDuplexControlManifoldwith
Automatic Changeover, with minimum 4 number of D Type Compressed
CO2 Cylinders,(required number to be calculated based on number of
Operating Roomsto be deployed). Nominal Pressure to be considered is
400 kPa.
i. It is required that the Carbon Dioxide Gas manifold be installed in a
separate room.This room shall not have any other gas. The Carbon
Dioxide Gas Cylinders,both empty and filled shall be stored in a separate
room.
ii. The specifications for pipeline system installed for CO2 shall be as
per the general requirements for other Medical Gas Pipelines. The
terminal unit should comprise a NIST connector with integral check
valve contained in the surgeon’s pendant. The level of provision of
AVSUs should be provided as for other medical gas pipelines.
iii. Caution Notice should be put at suitable locations where CO2 isused.

a) Design Flow rate to be assumed for pipe sizing.For Carbon Dioxide, it

shall be 50 Litres per minute in this MGPS Installation. Install upstreamof
the manifold, a shut-off valve, pressure regulator and a constant
pressure header with heater. In addition, provide a shut-off valve at each
outlet tap. The Carbon Dioxide supply system shall be provided with a
test point comprising of a lockable valve and a terminal unit immediately
upstream of the Hospital Distribution Line.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 653

b) The Header Bar shall be having Carbon dioxide gas specific high
pressure copper pipe with integral check valves and cylinder pigtail
assemblies of Stainless Steel or Copper, confirming to IS 3224. The
Header Bar shall be provided with high pressure brass fittings made of
high tensile brass and connections and supplied complete with wall
mounting brackets.

c) The manifold should be suitable to withstand working pressure of 150

Kg/cm2. The manifold shall be tested (hydraulically) at 20,000 kPa to
24,000 kPa pressure and necessary test certificate from the
manufacturer shall be provided.

d) A pipework and installation diagram (P&ID) of the Manifold installation

shall be displayed in the Manifold Room. It shall clearly indicate the
pressure regulators, safety instructions and other statutory signs and
instructions. Three pressure gauges on the front of the control panel
shall indicate left bank pressures, right bank pressures and Hospital
Distribution Line pressures.

15.4.3 SecondarySupplyofCarbon Dioxide

a) A Duplex Control Manifold with automatic changeover shall be

providedin this MGPS installation, as source for secondary supply
of Carbon Dioxide. The secondary supply is provided to form a
reserve source of supply for emergencyuse, when the primary
source is depleted, or to permit servicing or repair
ofprimarysupplysource.
b) The Gas Flow from Source of secondary supply shall be
determined by the main pipeline supply pressure and should be
triggered by 5% to 10% drop of line pressure coming from
source of primary supply.
c) This Duplex Control Manifold shall have 2 or more + 2 or more, D Type,
Compressed Gas Cylinder Manifold, withmastercontrolvalve. All
specifications remain the same as specified for Primary Supply. It
shallbelocatedintheCO2CylinderManifoldRoom.

15.4.4 FullyAutomaticControlpanelforCO2System

a) Control panel of CO2 shall fully satisfy therequirements of HTM 02-

01/ NFPA 99 C/EN/DIN/ ISO 7396-1 standard. The fullyautomatic
CO2 control panel shall comply with the standard. The Control
Panel shall be wall type and so mounted that it can take a cylinder
bank of 4 or more cylinders on either side. Average mounting
height for control panel box is that its centre shall be 1650 mm from
finished floor level. The Automatic Changeover Control Panel shall
provide a Flow Capacity of over 100 LPM, or as calculated.

b) The warning and alarm system indicator for CO2 supply system
shall normally be installed in the Operating Room control panel.

c) Eithertheleft- or right-hand manifold bank may be designated

"Duty" and shall automatically changeover to supply the distribution

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 654

system from the "Stand by" bank when pressure in the "Duty" bank
falls to a predetermined level. The control unit power supply shall
provide a visible green LED indicator to display “Mains Supply
On”.

i. The “Duty” Bank is indicated by the green colour of LED in

Manifold control panel.

ii. The “Stand-by” Bank is full indicated by the yellow colour of LED

iii. The Red colour of LED indicates “Replace Empty Cylinders”. On

Automatic changeover, the Empty LED indicator shall show a
depleted bank by turning red. A buzzer shall also sound to indicate
an empty bank or banks. When the system is reset, by replacing
the depleted cylinders, the indicator shall turn green and shall also
silence the buzzer.

iv. The Control Panel shall have inbuilt heaters to prevent frosting of
regulators.

d) The Control Panel shall be water resistant, complete with its

master control valves, power supply & all Valves, Gauges and
Pipes, etc. Suitable Electrical power outlet shall be fitted for
Installing the unit.

e) A Pressure Relief Device shall be provided, downstream of the

Pressure Regulator connected by means of a three-way
connection, so that the Safety Device can be replaced easily. The
Pressure Relief Device discharge should be run to the exterior of
the building by providing a Vent Pipe of suitable dia. Pressure
sensors to provide the alarm function shall need to be fitted to
pipeline distribution systems.

15.5 Medical Compressed Air Installation

15.5.1 Themedical air plant shall fully comply with the requirements of the HTM
2022, C11/EN1441/EN737. Medical quality air shall be delivered at a
nominal pressure of 400 kPa (4 bar) and 700kPa (7 bar) gauge for supply
of the hospital medical air and surgical air. Compressor plant shall be
designed in such a way that compressors shall switch on in a sequential
manner as per flow demand.

15.5.1.1 TheDouble-Stage Pipeline Distribution System shall be provided

where the Nominal Supply System Pressure is 1000 kpa. The Trunk
Mains remain unitary at Nominal Supply System Pressure of 1000
kpa. The Distribution Branches on each floor shall be connected to
create a ring main at the Nominal Distribution Pressure of 400 kPa/
700 kPa by deploying pressure regulators. The Terminal units are
connected to this ring main.

15.5.1.2 Medical Air, as generated must be dry and should not contain
any lubricant vapours, odours, excessive moisture or particles which
are over 0.01 microns in size. It requires that the quality of Air Intake

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 655

be monitored, the storage and supply system be non-corrosive and

supply air is filtered to remove all particulate material. Design must
prevent ingress of water at any stage of manufacturing the Medical
Air.

15.5.1.3 MA4 is used in respiratory therapy for patient ventilators, and for
blending with oxygen. It is also used as the driving (carrying
medium) gas for nebulized drugs and chemotherapy agents.
Therefore, it is essential that MA4, as manufactured must be tested
by a certified Laboratory to be compliant with the requirement of
Indian or European Pharmacopeia, as stated in IS/ISO 7396-1. The
MGPS Installation shall be taken over only when this certificate is
provided.

15.5.1.4 Use of Medical Air is permitted as a power source for pendant

control and braking systems in the Operating Rooms. When so
used, the Medical Air System must be connected via a non-return
valve and flow-limiting device. It must be capable of isolation by
means of an AVSU labelled to identify the equipment controlled.
These additions must not compromise either the Medical Air
System or operation of any connected equipment.
15.5.2 NominalDistributionPressure for MA in smaller installations is 400k Pa.
Nominal Supply System Pressure in large installations is 1000 kPa. It
shall be reduced to400kPa/ 700 k Pain feederlines before it is distributed
toTerminal Units.

a. Medical Air is generated by deploying a multiplex system of air

compressors.The Compressed Air shall be purified and supplied.
Thecompressors are controlled by a PLC Controller which provides
Cascaded Control &Sequencedoperations.The control panel shall
include an Hours-run counter.

b. The dew point of medical air must be at or below the frost point
(0DegreeC). At every point within the system, regardless of how much
pressure is being created by the compressed air system. The Air
dryers must lower the dew point while the system is operating at
maximum capacity and for any level of demandand when all air
consuming devices are inuse.

c. It must be ensured that all system components including the

Compressors must be specified for Peak flow rate.
(i) All Critical Care Patient Bed Stations in the Hospital shall be
provided minimum one or more Medical Air4 Terminal Units.
(ii) Medical Air 4 & Medical Air 7 Terminal Units shall be provided in
all Operating Rooms.
(iii) In addition, one Medical Air 4 Terminal Unit shall be provided on
all new-borne Stabilization Units.
(iv) Medical Air 4 Terminal Units shall be provided in all Triage
Stations, designated beds in pre-operative wards, Post-operative
Wards, Recovery Rooms, Procedure Rooms and Treatment
Rooms.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 656

d. The Medical Air supply system shall be provided with a test point
comprising of a lock able valve and a terminal unitimmediately up
stream of the Hospital Distribution Line.

15.5.3 SystemConfiguration

a) Medical Air supply system must be able to operate continuously to

meet the peak calculated demand for long periods and provide
adequate redundancy for maintenance of the system. So, a system of
multiplexing smaller horsepower (hp) compressors should be
provided.
b) When sizing the air compressor, it is important to size with the load
being maintained even with one unit out of service.
c) Each compressor, of the multiplex system shall be connected through
acommon header to a set of 2 Air Receivers. The Air Receivers, in
turn shall be connected to a duplex set of Driers, a duplex set of
Filter sandad uplex set of Pressure Regulators.
d) Allvalves, regulators, relief valves, filter assemblies and other in line
components must be able tooperateat thepressureof 1000kPa.
e) After the Pressure regulator, all valves, and other in line components
must be able tooperate at the pressure and designed flow rate
universally till the terminalunit.
f) TheMedical Air Plant Room shall be air conditioned. The required
design temperature is 25 Degree C.
g) The Medical Air Plant Room, specifically, shall provide an open,
protected drain, with suitable slope, to remove all water coming out
from various drain ports.

15.5.4 Air Intake

I. Each Compressor shall have its dedicated Air Intake which

must provide unhinderedflow of adequate air as per design. It
should not cause pump starvation at any time. In take Air piping
must be sized to induce no more than a 4-inch water column at
the compressor when all compressors are operating.

II. The Air Intake shall be a ducted system of Copper Pipes. It must
be provided withsuitable screens and a coarse filter,
inspectable, to prevent ingress of ant insects orsmall birds, or
particles of 100 micron or larger. Ideally, the Air Intake circuit
shouldhave a set of Inlet Filters comprising of a Coarse Filter of
20 micron and an active charcoal filter to filter particles and
hydrocarbons.

III. It must be isolated from all piped and un- piped exhaust
systems, of the Hospital, as per Compressed Gas Association
Norms.
IV. Air Intake shall be at least 5 Meters above Ground, in opposite
face of the plant roomwhere pump exhaust is being sent, to
ensure a reasonable quality of Air Intake. It isrequired to be 8
Meters away from any exhaust or vent, or from the any source
orcollection of noxious fumes and at least 3 Meters away from
any window. It must be soprotected that birds shall not

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 657

contaminate the Air In take.

V. Ventilating systems with a fan motor or drive belts located in the

air stream shall not be used as a source of Air Intake.
VI. The Air Intake shall be labelled as the source of Medical
Air. The labelling must be illuminated and signed as a caution
sign.

15.5.5 Compressors
The Compressors to be known as Medical Grade Compressors. The
capacity of Medical Air Compressoris expressed as “Free Air Delivery”
or FAD.

The design of medical air plant shall fully comply with the requirement
of IS/ISO 7396 for flow of 2000 LPM +/- 10% in Triplex configuration.
Each Compressor should be Reciprocating/ Scroll / Rotary / Screw Oil
free air compressor with output at 8 -10 bar is 2000 Lpm +/- 10%.

The medical air plant shall deliver both medical and surgical air with
minimum total flow rate of 2000 LPM l/min +/- 10%. Compressor plant
should be designed in such a way that compressor will switch on in a
sequential manner as per flow demand. One or more identical air
compressors/Modules should run to provide a primary flow rate of
2000 LPM +/- 10% and one more compressor to provide as
standby. Each compressor should be suitable for both continuous and
frequent start/stop operation at a nominal plant pressure of 8 bar or
more.

All compressors in multiplex configuration shall have same

specifications. The Medical Air Compressors must be suitable for
continuous running on load and for high frequency start/stop operations.

a) They must be energy efficient. Medical Grade Air Compressors

employ Electrical motors of Less than 30 horsepower.

b) Theduty compressors shall be automatically rotated by the plant

control system to ensure even wear. Desiccant dryer shall be
provided with a dew point sensing switch that shall provide an
alarm on the plant control panel and central hospital alarm
system when the water concentration in the delivered air rises
above the limit.

c) Out let pressures ford rills/equipment and ventilators shall be

aminimum of 7bar and 4 barrespectively.
Contractor shall provide all electric control panels, starters etc.
required for proper functioning of MGPS.

15.5.6 All moving parts, viz, fans, pulleys and belts, shall be fully
protected by enclosures and guards. Each compressor shall be
equipped with isolation valve, check valve, safety valve, electric
motor, belts, belt guard, aftercooler and Thermal Malfunction
Protection Device (TMPD), as appropriate. Vibration mounting,
by means of spring isolators, shall be provided.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 658

15.5.7 Designproper Compressors, Control systems, to regulate their

operation in accordance with compressed air demand.
a) Start-stop Controls are recommended for a compressor when
adequate air storage isprovided, and air requirementisless than 75
percent of the compressor free air delivery.
b) Consider providing “Variable Speed & Variable Frequency Drive”
(VSD/VFD) control of all pump motors as an energy saving
mechanism, controlled from the control panel manager of the system.
This shall be considered for Air Compressors and the Vacuum
Pumps of MGPS system.

c) Variable Speed Controls shall be provided to obtain energy

efficiency.A variable speed drive shall control the speed of the motor
and dynamically adjust the speed (in crease or decrease) in order to
meet the air demand.

d) Sequencing Controls coupled with Cascading Control for operating a

group ofcompressors at peak efficiency levels provide alternate
operation of each compressorat each operating cycle. This also
permits simultaneous operation of all compressors,ifrequired

e) The compressor should be heavy duty, reliable with long MTBF. Each
compressor cylinder is to be protected by a temperature switch,
which will stop the drive motor and provide an alarm signal in the
event of abnormal discharge air temperature. Each compressor
module should include an inline filter inlet isolation valve, discharge
isolation valve, and pressure relief valve. The capacity should be
capable to take care of total load of all the outlets.

15.5.8 Air Receivers

a) The Medical Air Receiver Tank (Wet Air Tank or Primary Receiver)
provides asteady stream of Medical Air to compressor controls,
eliminating short-cycling andover-pressurization.

b) Air Receivers should comply with ISO/ASME/BS EN 286,

andshouldbesuppliedwithtestcertificates.

c) The minimum water capacity of the Air Receivers should be 50%

of the plant capacity in 1 minute, stated interms of free air delivered at
normal working pressure.

d) Two (2) Vertical Air Receivers, each of 2000 lts capacity, to withstand
apressure of 10 Kg/cm2, fitted with onePressure Gauge, one Safety
Valve and one Auto Drain Cock shall be provided. The two Air
Receivers shall be inter connected to perform as a single unit.

e) Air Receivers Tanks should conform to ASME Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code2017, It shall be a Vertical, Cylindrical,
Stainless-Steel Tank(304/ 304L) and shall be provided with epoxy-
lined coatinginside.These shall be provided with valve arrangements
to permit isolation of one or the other for inspection purposes. The

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 659

corrosion resistant coated receiver is to be equipped with tested

safety pressure relief valve, sight glass pressure gauge, automatic
drain, three- valve by-pass and source isolation valve. Air receiver
shall have two out putlines, eachline with an individual control valve.

f) Each air receiver shall be protected by a pressure relief valve, a

fusible plug and include a pressure gauge with isolating valve and a
drain cock. It should comply with relevant IS Standards. The plant
control and power management system shall monitor the safe
operation of the plant, providing signal into the alarm system as per
the requirement of the standard and hospital.

g) The Air Purification process requires traps, valves, isolating valve sand
non-return valves to maintain stage wise purity as well as to provide
isolation of components for maintenance or replacement. It also needs
to be monitored. All components and accessories, that are specified,
must be suitable for continuous use at the system demand flow at
higher pressures than the distribution pressure. The Compressed Air
System Plant design must take care of the resultant pressure drop.

15.5.9 MoistureSeparation

a) A Moisture Separator is a mechanical device designed to remove

condensate from air stream. Item ployscyclonicairmotion guided by the
baffleplates,fi xedatangles,around the inner pipe, to separate the
moisture. The inner pipe is provided with 100-micron Stainless Steel
mesh fixed inside the inner pipe. Moisture separators requiread rain
valve for removing condensate during its operation.
b) It should be noted that moisture separator is 85% (average) efficient
and that somecondensate passes through the device. Also, a moisture
separator does not lowerthe compressed air dew point, meaning further
cooling down stream shall result in additional condensate in the piping
system.

15.5.10 Oil Separation

a) Medical Air must notcontain oil vapours more than 0.1 mg/m3.
Therefore, after the Moisture Separators, and before the Desiccant
Dryers, online Oil Filters shall be providedtoremoveHydrocarbon
vapours, water vapours, particles and odours. Activated Carbon Filters
bond hydrocarbon residue, odorants and oil vapours.
b) For Oil Separation, Adsorption filters which contain activated carbon
granules and have an extremely high surface area and well time shall
be used. An absorption filter must be protected by anupstream filter to
prevent gross contamination byliquid oil.The Air temperature should
be+/-20 Degree C.
c) Deployment of an Oil Separation Filters with Oil free Air Compressors
shall be provided. It should be an air filtration system which
utilizesaprefilter, high- efficiencycoalescing filter and charcoal
adsorber element; capable of removing particles to meet the
requirement of ISO 8573.1, for Clean,dry andodour-free air.

15.5.11 Air Dryer

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 660

The air treat ment module shall included ualdryers system and a dew
point transmitter with local audible and visual signals and dry contacts
for MGPS monitoring. The components shall be mounted on a
common base with in ter connecting copperpiping and upstream and
downstream isolation valves. The isolation valves must allow either
set of components to be serviced without shutting down the system.
Dryers shall be of heatless desiccant design and sized to provide for
the peak calculated demand. The desiccant dryers shall be
equipped with dew point dependent switching feature to minimize the
need for purge air.
a) Each Air Dryer installation shall consist of the following, as a minimum.

a)Twin Desiccant Vessels with Vessel Internal of 316 Stainless Steel

b) Pre-filters and after-filters
c)Inter connecting piping, valves, switch- over
valves, relief valve, automatic drain and vent
d)All Control Instrumentation, Control Panel, Dew points ensor
with Indicator
e)First fill of desiccant
f)Noise Attenuation Equipment including purge air out let silencer
g)All needed Accessories
b) The Design shall provide adequate operational clearance and
maintenance access. The performance test of the dryer shall be
carried out in accordance with section7 of ISO7183 to demonstrate the
following.

a) Pressure Dew Pointatrated flowrate through the dryer

b) Pressure Dropacrossdryer package
c) Purge Flow Rate
d) Drying and Regeneration Cycle Time
e) Pressurisation and De-pressurisation
f) RegenerationTemperature
g) Sound Pressure Level during purge outlet and blow down, as per
ISO3 744orISO9614-2.

15.5.12 Bacteria Filtration

a) After the Airdryer, as etof duplex, activate dcarbon filters may be
installed for final odour removal. Aset of duplex high efficiency, low
pressure loss, medical grade bacteria filter shall be installed with
minimum of 98% efficiency, at 1 micron. The sefilters shall be
equipped with a continuous visual indicator showing the status of
the filter element life.
b) They should provide differential pressure of inlet and outlet to
assistindeterminationoflossoffiltrationefficiency.
c) After multistage treatment, filtration and Purification, a set of
duplex line pressure regulators, with suitable isolating valves, shall
be provided to maintain the nominal pipeline distribution pressure.
d) Duplex desiccant dryer and filtration modules shall be provided
withthree individual stages of filtration as follows:
Stage 1: Coalescing filter upstream of the desiccant dryer for

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 661

removing liquid water, oil and oil aerosol down to 0.1mg/cum (0.1
ppm) and particles down to 1micron.

Stage 2: Particulate filter after the desiccant dryer for dust

protection and removing particles down to 01 micron. Stage 3:
filter for removing particles down to 0.01 micron.
Bacteria filter: - Duplex bacteria filter system for removing particles
down to 0.01 micron and preventing bacterial contamination.

16.5.13 Air Pressure Reducing Station

a) Pressure Reducing Station for 4 bar and 7 bar should fully comply and
meet with the requirements of the standard. Duplex pressure reducing
station to have two branches, connected to the MGPS in parallel in
order to allow maintenance on the components of one branch, while
the gas flow is maintained in the other branch.
b) Ball Valves - Full bore which operate from fully open to fully closed
position with a quarter turn of the handle. Complete pressure
reducing station with base plate mounted for ease of installation.
Padlocks available to allow locking of the valves in both open and
closed positions and must have easy to read pressure gauges. Base
plate mounted and supplied with copper stub pipes for ease of
installation using inert Jointing procedures.
c) The pressure regulators shall provide the specified air flow as perdesign.
d) The Medical Air plant may be provided with continuous monitoring
system with central alarm capabilities for dew point and carbon
monoxide contamination downstream of the dryers and upstream of
the piping system.
e) An automatic pressure switch may be provided downstream of the
main supply line shut-off valve along with a visual and audible
alarm to indicate a rise or fall of the main line pressure above or below
the nominal line pressure.
f) The compressor system should have
• Intake filter
• Check Valve
• Delivery pipe
• Mounting on air tank along with all standard fittings viz. safety valve,
pressure gauge, delivery valve, drain valve etc.
• Bidder shall provide all electric control panels, starters etc. required
for proper functioning of motor.
• Desiccant Air Dryer – 2 nos.
• 3-Stage Breathing Air Filters – 2 sets
• Bacteria filter for air – 2 nos.

15.5.14 System Controls

The “Continuous on Demand” feature will stop the operation of the
motors during periods of low or no demand. The control shall include
individual self-protected combination motor controls with short circuit
protection, single phase and thermal overload protection, individual
control circuit with transformers primary and secondary protection,
pressure sensors, temperature switches with reset buttons, and an
electronic controller to automatically change the operating sequence
of the compressors. The cabinet shall have status display to include

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 662

system pressure, dew point pump operation, accumulated time,

maintenance interval, fault conditions, and silence button, lighted
Hand-Off-Automatic selector switches and safety disconnect operating
handles. All required local alarm functions shall be integrated in to the
packaged system.

15.6 MedicalVacuumSystem

15.6.1 Medical Vacuum to be regulated from High

Pressure+High Flow to Low Pressure and Low
Flow as perclinical requirement by using Suction
Regulators. Piped Vacuum Systems shall be provided in
Wards, Intensive Care Units, Treatment Rooms,
Obstetric Suites, LDR Rooms, Operating Rooms and
all other designated areas. This is controlled by a PLC
Controller which provides Cascaded Control &
Sequenced operations. The Medical Vacuum shall then
be supplied to the user at
healthcare delivery point and
suction pressure is regulated.

15.6.2 Medical vacuum plant shall be designed in compliance

to HTM 2022, andEN737 requirements.
The purpose of this station is production and storage of vacuum in
hospitals. The stations shall be fully automatic. A time relay regulates the
vacuum pump working in this way to let them work alternately in time
intervals. At the time of an exceeded consumption, automatically idle
vacuum pump is put to use. The vacuum pumps are set up in the way to
enable always the repair and the cleaning.

Control unit of the station is intended to control and monitoring the activity
of the vacuum station system. It consists of electrical, electronic and
measuring units and the control for the vacuum pump unit activity.

This unit is intended to generate vacuum for the use in Hospitals. The
pump has non-return valve system for its protection. Vacuum vessel
maintains the vacuum.
Filter: Vacuum filter protects the mechanical part from
contaminants like bacteria, dust and similar particles. The fluids drain
in to the flask below the filter. The filter is mounted on the suction side
of the system.
Pressure Switch: Pressure switch is a part of the signaling system. It
is built on critical pipeline measuring points. By vacuum under
exceeding the switch send the signal to the signal unit in the main
board.

Pressure Transmitter: The transmitter constantly sends the signals to

the signal unit of the main board. By exceeding values of the pressure,
the alarm will activate.

Dirtiness Eliminator: Dirtiness eliminator is intended for secretion of

particles of impurities in the vacuum system.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 663

Product Description of Medical Vacuum System should comply with

HTM 02-01/ ISO/IS 7396. The unit shall consist of electric motor driven
pumps vacuum receiver, electrical control system and interconnection
piping and wiring. The components shall be modularly assembled for
easy service.

15.6.3 Design Flow Rates for Medical Vacuum

a) Design Flow rate to be assumed for pipe sizing of Medical Vacuum in

Operating Rooms shall be 40 Litres per minute at 300 mm Hg.

b) Design Flow rate to be assumed for pipe sizing of Medical Vacuum

in wards shall be 15 Litres per minute at 300 mm Hg.

c) All component capacities specified, shall be at 480 mm Hg (64 kPa)

d) For preventing continuous running of Vacuum Pumps, a set of

vacuum reservoirs are provided in MGPS Vacuum System. These
shall maintain the pipeline vacuum pressure.

e) Vacuum is used via a suction control device and fluid is collected in

suction jars. In wards, these are typically of approximately one- or
two-Liter capacity. In Operating Rooms four x 2 Liter capacity
vessels are provided for the suction control regulator.

f) The Medical Vacuum System shall be a centrally piped, vacuum

system containing Three (minimum) continuous duty vacuum
pumps.

g) The Piped Vacuum Systems consist of Vacuum Terminal Units

supplied with suction pressure from the Vacuum Pump System.
The Vacuum Terminal Units, through a pipe carcass, shall be
connected to a duplex filtration (0.3-micron hydrophobic filter or
equivalent) & isolation system.

h) The Vacuum Pumps are connected to the discharge (exhaust)

system which discharges the vacuum to atmosphere. The Vacuum
Pump Exhaust is provided with a silencer to reduce the Noise
generated.
i) Two vacuum reservoirs, to be installed in the MGPS Plant Room,
to prevent continuous running of vacuum pumps.

j) Use of “Y-connectors” as a means of increasing available inlets is

not permitted. Any justified need for additional vacuum inlet shall be
accommodated with another wall inlet, not a Y-connector. As per
design redundancy, this factor of creating additional terminal units
shall be determined.

k) The system shall be sized so that if one vacuum pump fails, the
remaining vacuum pump(s) can supply 100 percent of the total
system demand. The system design shall include automatic
operation of the vacuum pumps including cascading and
sequencing operations.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 664

l) The system shall be provided with an alarm to indicate vacuum

pump failure that annunciates to the Master Medical Gas Alarm
Panel.

m) All Medical Vacuum Terminal Units shall be used by deploying

either a Ward Suction Unit or or a Theatre Suction Unit.

16.6.4 Vacuum Pumps

a) It should fully comply and meets with the requirements of the NFPA 99
standard. Designed flow capacity should be minimum 2000 LPM
± 10% variation in triplex configuration.

b) The medical vacuum plant shall comprise Triplex, air-cooled, oil free,
Reciprocating/ Scroll / Screw/ Rotary vacuum pumps to provide a flow rate
of at least 2000 LPM ± 10% each as per the relevant standards to provide
the desired flow of the hospital to maintain a vacuum level of 450 mm Hg at
the plant connection point.

c) The control system should normally employ automatic rotation of the lead
pump to maximize pump life and ensure even wear. Each vacuum pump
shall be fitted with anti- vibration pads between the pump foot and mounting
frame. The plant shall be fitted with duplex bacteria filter system. Each
individual filter shall have the capacity to deliver full design flow such that
one set is designated duty and the other will be standby. Each bacteria filter
shall be provided with a transparent sterilize collection jar to collect
condensate.

d) The plant control and power management system shall monitor the safe
operation of the plant, providing signaling into the alarm system. Vacuum
pump exhaust shall be piped out of the plant room and discharged outside
the building at high level away from windows and any other air intakes.

e) The Medical Vacuum Pumps must be suitable for continuous running on

load andforhighfrequencystart/stopoperations.
f) The capacity of the vacuum pump should be specified in terms of the free
air aspirated (FAA) in cfm (or L/min) when the pump is operating at a
vacuum of 475 mm Hg (63 kPa) and at 450 mm Hg (60 kPa) at the plant
pipeline connection.

g) Since Medical Vacuum is a closed system, Vacuum pumps shall neither be

under rated nor overrated. In general, the next higher capacity of pump, that
is available, is specified viz a viz calculated capacity. Also specify the
Horsepower (HP) rating of the motor.

h) PurgeOperationisasunder:
i. Pumpsstartbasedonvacuumset pointdemands.
ii. When the pump shuts down, it operates the purge cycle (generally
of 10minutes).
iii. The purge solenoid valve opens to allow atmospheric air into the
system toremove condensable vapours. It also removes the heat
generated due to pumpoperation.
iv. Afterthepurgecycle,pumpshutsoff,andisreadyfornextvacuumcycle.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 665

i) When the system vacuum is controlled by automatic on/off or load/

unload cycling of the vacuum pump, the maximum vacuum required
shall relate to the cut-out pressure value of the system control.

j) Medical Vacuum Pump employ Electrical motors of 30 HP and

below. Typically, power is transmitted by V-Belt, gear or direct drive
configurations.

k) The drive unit must be powerful enough to assure satisfactory

operation of the pump under all rated operating conditions. It also
includes providing adequate energy to overcome friction and inertia
effects at start-up. Drive Power requirements of a vacuum pump is
relatively low, compared with those of an air compressor.

l) All Medical Vacuum Pumps and motors in multiplex configuration

shall have the same specifications. Multiplexing should also allow
for expandability.

m) Each Vacuum Pump shall be provided with non-return valve at its

inlet and output.

n) Discharge from multiple Medical Vacuum Pumps can be combined

into one discharge pipe, sized for no restriction while flowing the
maximum discharge possible, and provide an isolation valve and
non-return valve at the header connection for each pump served. It
is preferred to oversize the common discharge pipe in relation to its
length. Discharge check valves should be a low differential pressure
type with positive shutoff.
o) The Vacuum Pump Exhaust pipe shall be provided with an
automatic drain valve at its lowest point. The drain valve shall be
provided with a collection Jar.
p) The whole system shall be controlled by a PLC Controller which
provides Cascaded Control & Sequenced operations. It shall also
include an “hours-run”counter.

15.6.5 Vacuum Reservoir Vessels

a) The vacuum receiver shall be made of rust-free corrosion resistant Mild steel
and fabricated as per IS:2825 for a vacuum pressure of 760mmHg. It should
include bypass valves, manual drain valves, vacuum gauge. Vacuum reservoir
shall have volume of at least 4000+4000 Litres capacity.
b) silencer shall be provided in the exhaust system of pumps for silencing the
noise from pumps creates on the exhaust system.
c) AsetoftwoVacuumReservoirVessels,alsocalledVacuumReceiver,arra
ngedinparallel,shall be provided so that the duty pump does not run
continuously for low loads.
ThereservoirshouldbemanufacturedinaccordancewithBSEN286,AirRe
ceivers2005,withtestcertificatesprovidedbytheReservoirVesselmanuf acturer.
d) The water capacity of each Reservoir Vessel should be equal to the plant
design flow at 450 mm Hg (60 kPa) in terms of free air aspirated in one minute
with the pump operating at 450 mm Hg (60 kPa). Vacuum Reservoir Vessel
should conform to ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code 2017.
e) It shall be preferably be a Vertical, Cylindrical, Stainless-Steel Tank (304/ 304L)

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 666

epoxy-lined coating inside. Vacuum Reservoir should be capable of

withstanding a Pressure of 760 mm Hg.
f) Provision should be made for draining the Reservoir Vessel under vacuum
conditions. By- pass facilities (isolation valve) should be provided so that the
reservoir can be drained and inspected without interruption to the vacuum
supply.

15.6.6 Filters

a) The bacteria filters and drainage trap should comprise two identical sub-
assemblies with manually-operated isolating valves, arranged to allow either
sub-assembly to be on stream. Each sub-assembly should contain a bacteria
filter rated at the plant capacity. The bacteria filter should be marked with the
legend “bio-hazard”, together with a description of a safe procedure for
changing and disposing of the filtersand emptying the drainage trap.
b) The bacteria filters should have a filter efficiency of greater than 99.99% at the
system design flow. The pressure drop across a clean filter at the system
design flow should not exceed 25 mm Hg (3 kPa) at a vacuum of 475 mm Hg
(63 kPa). The drainage trap may be integral with the bacteria filter and should be
fitted with a transparent bowl to collect liquid. The bowl should be suitable for
steam sterilization at 121°C.
c) PipedVacuumSystemsshallbeprotectedwithappropriatefiltration(0.3-
micronhydrophobicfilterorequivalent)onthesuctionsideofthepumpstom
inimizethepotential forcontaminationofthevacuumpumps.
d) In addition, a Liquid Trap or Mechanical Filter, that use Gravity, is required in the
system to prevent any of the material's being drawn through the vacuum line
from getting into the pump.

15.6.7 Plant Control System.

a) The Medical Air System and Medical Vacuum Systems shall be provided
with a Control System. It shall provide Overall Plant Operations and
Centralised Control over operational parameters and Maintenance.

b) A Display unit to display all major controls status and plant monitoring
status, in an intelligent format for at-a-glance checking. The Display unit to
display all major Alarm conditions and Alarm signaling status. The Display
unit shall provide all maintenance Notifications.

c) The Centralised Control Panel Manager or the Combined Control System

shall be integrated with MGPS Central Alarm Panel and I,.

d) The user interface of Centralised Control Panel Manager or the Combined

Control System shall reside in a computer, and provide an Easy-to-read,
easy-to-use, touch screen colour LCD as well as a Keyboard Input. The
System Control and System Level Alarms and notifications shall be
software driven and displayed on a single screen.

e) The Centralised Control Panel Manager or the Combined Control

System, Henceforth called MGPS Plant Control System (PCS), should
provide easy configuration, remote monitoring, access to software
upgrades, event history and data logging. It shall be providing with UPS
power supply for its operation.

f) The PCS (Plant Control System) shall always be installed in a protected

area, in the MGPS Plant Room. It shall not be installed in the Manifold
Room or in the Gas Cylinder Storeroom. There shall be 600 mm

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 667

clearance all around the panel and 900 mm clearance in front of the panel
at installation point.

g) The PCS shall be suitable for the multiplex system and provide cascading
and sequenced control to start and stop the Air Compressors and
Vacuum Pumps. It shall provide programmed delay to ensure that both
Equipment Systems i.e., Air Compressors and Vacuum Pumps do not
restart simultaneously.
h) All internal components, control system components, and circuitry
boards, needed for operation of the PCS control system shall be non-
proprietary. These shall be readily available from local and standard
electrical suppliers.
i) General Lighting, Alarm Panels, air-conditioning units, Energizing the
Medical Air System and Medical Vacuum Systems, etc. shall require
additional Electrical Distribution Board(s). Provision of this Electrical
Distribution Board shall be in the scope of the Contractor. All Electrical
Works including power supply to Medical Air Compressors, Medical
Vacuum Pumps, other System components, provision of Mains Incomer,
Bus Bar arrangement, all required meters, contactors, relays, switches,
indicators, Earthing, etc., shall be as per National Electrical Code and
relevant Codes.

15.6.8 Anaesthetic Gas Scavenging Systems (AGSS)

a) TheOperatingRoomsshallbe
providedwithanactiveAnaestheticGasScavenging(Disposal)Systemsc
onformingtothe IndianStandard,IS/ISO7396-
2(2007):MedicalGasPipelineSystems,Part2:AnaestheticGasScavengi
ngDisposalSystems

b) Anaesthetic Gas, to be disposed off, comprises of collection of exhaled

mixtures of Medical Oxygen, Medical Nitrous Oxide and inhalation
anaesthetics from the breathing circuit of the anaesthesia apparatus
or from the exhaust port of the Ventilator.

c) A gas collection assembly, which captures excess anaesthetic gases

at the site of emission and delivers it to the transfer tubing. Transfer
tubing, which conveys the excess anaesthetic gases to the interface.

d) The Gas Disposal Assembly, which conveys the excess gases to a

point where they can be discharged safely into the atmosphere,
outside the building and away from any return air ducts or open
windows, thus preventing the return of the waste gases back into the
facility.

e) The proposed AGSS system shall be a dedicated, High Flow, active

extraction and disposal system. It shall provide a maximum flow rate
of 80 LPM with a 1 kPa resistance to flow and a minimum flow rate of
50 LPM with a 2 kPa resistance to flow at the terminal unit. It shall
provide open scavenger interface.

f) Waste Anaesthetic gas, from the patient, or patient ventilator, diluted

by roomair, is transmitted by vacuum generated in the exhauster

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 668

system. Care be taken that it should

Not be interfacing any air in take of any system in the building. It has to
be ensured that Anesthesia Work Stations in Hospitals are provided
with open scavenger interface to operate AGSS. This service floor
must be served by at least one lift to move the Equipment and its
maintenance.

g) The Discharge Outlet shall be sited at roof level, far away from
ventilation inlets, opening windows and other apertures, where it
cannot be entrained into the air-supply system and re-enter the
building.

h) It must provide protection for Rain ingress. The First Fix connections
(including gas specific NIST Connections), as well as second fix
connections, specifically for Medical Supply devices and all
peripherals, must be adequately staggered to prevent cross
connections.

15.6.9 Scavenging, Receiving and Transfer System

a) It is a compact, integrated unit with pipe connections. It gets

fitted on the Anaesthesia workstation using AGSS type-specific
connections.
b) The receiving system is designed to match the variable flow in the
breathing system to the constant flow of the disposal system and
ensure that very low induced flows are imposed (0.5 LPM to 0.05
LPM).
c) Using a Type 1H Terminal Unit, usually placed on the Ceiling
Supply Unit (Pendant), waste anaesthetic gases are transferred to
the Disposal System. The anesthetist makes connection and
disconnections to this unit using Type 1H ISO probe and type-
specific connection point.
d) From the Ceiling Supply Unit (Pendant) Type 1 H Terminal Unit,
this transfer and receiving unit is connected to First Fix Bracket
usingflexible hose and NIST assembly. From the First Fix Bracket,
using Copper Pipe, the connection is extended to the AGSS
disposal unit.
e) Using a Type 2 Terminal Unit, usually placed on the AGSS
disposal unit, waste Anaesthetic gases are finally disposed off
from AGSS discharge point. The connection is made using Type 2
ISO probe and type-specific connection point.

15.6.10 DisposalSystem & Discharge of waste Gases.

The AGSS disposal system shall be a skid mounted, Simplex pump

with directly coupledimpeller assembly, to its totally enclosed, fan-
cooled, electric motor. It shall be suppliedcomplete with motor control
unit, starter, air inlet filter, Vacuum flow regulator,
moisture rain flask and flexible connect or to connect the plant to the
AGSS pipeline. A spare pump shall be provided with complete
system. The pumps shall be air cooled and rated for continuous
operation.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 669

a) AGSS Pumps should be located close to the Surgical Operating Rooms.

The AGSS exhaust should be disposed off to outside of the Hospital Building.
This can be at multiple points or at a designated point.

b) The AGSS disposal system shall be provided with its dedicatedControl

Panel suitable for remote control.

c) The Discharge Outlets must provide protection for Rain ingress. The point
where these AGSS Discharge Outlets are located is referred to as AGSS
Discharge Point.

d) The flowrate through each type 1H terminal unit shall not exceed 80 LPM
when the resistance to flow which is provided to simulate the resistance of
the receiving system, is such as to produce a pressure drop of 1 kPa at 80
LPM, and shall not be lower than 50 LPM when the resistance to flow,
which is provided, is such as to produce a pressure drop of 2 kPa at 50
LPM (ISO 8835-3,10.2)/ (ISO 7396-2).
e) AGSS disposal system with type 2 Terminal Units with a flowrate of 50
LPM through the socket of each AGSS type 2 terminal unit, the pressure
drop shall not exceed 7.5 kPa. (ISO 7396-2) resistance to flow at each
terminal unit, irrespective of the number of Terminal Units in use.

15.6.11 System Configuration

a) The AGSS system shall use dedicated radial blowers in simplex
configuration.
b) The AGSS pump assemblies shall be skid mounted and included on the
skid shall be the pump, motor control unit with starter/isolator, moisture drain
flask and flexible connectors to connect the plant to the pipeline.
c) Each pump including the spare pump, shall be rated for continuous
operation, and shall include an air-cooled electric motor, motor control panel
and directly coupled impeller assembly.
d) Each motor control panel shall incorporate an emergency panel isolation
switch facility, which controls all electrical power to the exhauster unit,
remote start switch-panels and system indication lights.
e) The starter/isolator panel shall incorporate a thermal protection over load
device. In the event of a fault, the overload device shall break the circuit to
the pump, preventing operation until the system is manually re-set.
Operation of the overload device shall also break the circuit to the remote
start switch panels, extinguishing the green running indicator.

f) The system shall incorporate a line pressure switch which monitors vacuum
levels and provides an additional control of the remote start switch and
starter/isolator panel green 'RUNNING indicators. The pressure switch shall
include a digital display providing readout of the vacuum level in the
pipeline.

i. The remote-control unit shall provide the following indications,

ii. Mains On
iii. Air Flow Normal
iv. Plant Fault Indicator
v. Plant Emergency indicator

g) Integration of AGSS control panel with Hospital, for displaying alarm conditions, shall be
provided.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 670

15.7 Pipe line Distribution System

a) The Medical Gases shall be distributed in this MGPS installation, using

Copper PipelineCaracas, from the source to the terminal unit, for all
gases including Medical Vacuum and AGSS.

b) The MGPS Pipeline Carcass includes all fixed Medical Gas Pipelines,
Terminal Unit baseblocks and Area Valve Service Units (AVSUs),Line
Valve Assemblies(LVAs).

c) The Main Hospital Supply Pipeline shall run from the MGPS Manifold
Room or the MGPS Plant Room till the service enters a Building Block.
There it shall be connected to the Feeder pipelines, which travel
horizontally as well as vertically. On the floor, it is connected to the
Distribution Pipelines, which serve only one floor or part of the floor
and do not travel vertically. They, through Drop pipes, get connected
to Terminal units.

d) The Distribution Branches on each floor are inter - connected to create

a ring main at the Nominal Distribution Pressure. It shall ensure MGPS
Service continuity at the desired pressure.

e) To optimize Gas Delivery in a safe manner at a specified pressure and

to control oxidising effects of Medical Oxygen and Medical Nitrous
Oxide or their mixture, it is required that MGPS pipelines run in Open
Shafts or open on walls and not concealed in walls or falseceilings.

f) This is the pressure in a pipeline carcass under design flow conditions

at which the Terminal Units are provided the Positive Pressure Gas
like Medical Oxygen, Medical Air, Medical Nitrous Oxide and Medical
Carbon Dioxide.

15.7.1 Nominal Pipeline Supply System Pressure

a) This is one of the two pressures in a pipeline carcass under design

flow conditions.

b) The Nominal Supply Pressure is the pressure at which the Oxygen

Gas is supplied to the pipeline carcass. In this MGPS Installation, it
shall be 1000 kPa.

c) This Nominal Supply Pressure is reduced to Nominal Pipeline

Distribution Pressure of 400 kPa by deploying pressure reducing
stations and supplied to the distribution part of the pipeline
carcassThere after, it is distributed to the Terminal units at the reduced
pressure.

15.7.2 Pipe Material

a) The Copper Pipes used for internal or external installation shall be

of Medical GradeCopper, which is phosphorous de-oxidised non-
arsenical copper conforming to BS EN1412:1996gradeCW024A(Cu-

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 671

DHP).
b) The Copper Pipes shall be seamless, round, solid drawn, sizes
confirming to BS EN 13348, suitable for installing vertically or
horizontally without sagging or distortion.
c) Pigtail connections for Oxygen, Nitrous Oxide, Medical Air 4 and
Carbon Dioxide manifolds shall be of copper. All other fittings, valve
and control panel fittings, etc., can be of Copper, Brass, Gun-metal
& Bronze. Except for mechanical joints, only copper-to copper
joints shall be permitted on site, made with brazing filler rods.
Copper to Copper joints shall be made on site by silver brazing
(Recommended copper-phosphorus brazing alloy CP 104
conforming to BS EN 1044:1999).
d) All Copper Pipes must be inspected and certified by a Third-party
Inspection Agencies like Lloyds, SGS, TUV as to their physical
properties and chemical composition including cleanliness status
before dispatch. The pipes shall be accompanied with
Manufacturer’s Test Certificate.
e) All turns, offsets, and other changes in direction shall be made using
only Copper Pipe fittings. Fittings, as required for jointing in pipe
carcass, shall be end-feed capillary fittings of Medical Grade
Copper, which conform to EN 1254-1.
f) All Copper Pipe Fittings, when supplied must be certified by the
manufacturer to be clean and degreased. These shall be individually
packed to maintain cleanliness.
g) silver Provision of Tapered Threaded Fittings shall be limited to the
connections for pressure and vacuum indicators, alarm devices,
gas- specific demand check fittings, and source equipment on the
source side of the source valve. Where these joints are needed,
they may be made with unsintered (de-greased)
Polytetrafluoroethylene (PTFE) tape.
h) The cleaning process shall not result in grooving of the surfaces to
be joined. The use of steel wool or sand cloth shall be prohibited for
cleaning exteriors of tube ends, etc.
i) Brazing, for all positive pressure gases and for vacuum pipelines –
up toand including 22 mm pipes, that are run in Medical Gas Supply
Units, shall be carried out using oil free, oxygen-free nitrogen as an
internal inert gas shield to prevent the formation of oxides inside of
the pipes and fittings. Pipes shall be continuously purged with oxygen-
free nitrogen with terminal flow rate of 2 liters per minute.
j) Pipe sizing is determined either by Volume of Gas to be delivered
or by impact of overall negative pressure required. When sizing, for
Medical Vacuum, always provide pipes of one size higher diameter
to prevent clogging.
k) No pipe smaller than 15 mm OD shall be used anywhere in this
MGPS Installation.

15.7.3 ThefollowingpipespecificationsaremandatedasperEN13348,2016.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 672

Outer Diameter Wall Thickness

15mm 1.0mm
22mm 1.0mm
28mm 1.0mm
42mm 1.2mm
54mm 1.2mm
76mm 1.5mm
108mm 1.5mm

a) MGPS pipes shall not be installed in lift shafts, kitchens, laundries,

boiler houses, generator rooms, incinerator rooms, storage rooms
designed to house combustible materials, or in any other fire-risk
areas.
b) Medical Gas Pipelines should be routed away from Natural Gas
Pipelines where there is a potential for a flammable gas mixture to
accumulate in the case of a leak.
c) Depending upon the Location of LMO Yard, Manifold Room,
Manifold Plant Room, Building Entry Point, number of Terminal
Units served and required Flow Rates, specifically for Oxygen
supply and Medical Air supply, consider providing twin pipe supply
or ring main design for Gas supply to insulate the MGPS installation
from pressure failure
d) All MGPS service pipes (except small sections provided for final
disposal of gases or air intake) when provided outside of buildings
shall be buried at a sufficient depth to protect the piping from
excessive stresses. The potential hazard arising from this situation
shall be assessed using risk analysis procedures in accordance with
ISO 14971.
e) Buried underground piping can be placed in a continuous conduit, of
high-density polyethylene (HDPE). In such cases, the ends of the
conduit sleeve shall be sealed to prevent the entrance of ground
water.
f) All underground piping shall be provided with valves at a convenient
locations at either end, housed in accessible manholes or valve
chambers. The valves should comprise LVAs for the purposes of
pressure testing and other tests.
g) Trenches shall be excavated so that the pipe has a firm,
substantially continuous bearing on the bottom of the trench.
Trenches shall provide Sand padding of 100 – 150 mm, with
suitable rock-free material. Backfill shall be clean and compacted so
as to protect and uniformly support the piping. The Contactor must
get the pipe layout inspected by the Engineer-In-Charge or his
representative, prior to backfill. A continuous tape or marker shall be
placed immediately above the pipe enclosure which shall clearly
identify the pipeline by specific name.

h) The route of pipes placed underground should be indicated at the

site by appropriate means, e.g., by continuous marking tape above

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 673

the pipeline at approximately one-half the depth of burial, by

placing proper route makers. Further the route of the pipeline should
be identified on the surface by placing proper permanent warning
signs, 300 mm above the top surface, in a manner that they are
clearly visible. It should be clearly shown on site layout drawings
also.

i) Suitably placed covered Manholes or valve chambers, with

removable covers, shall be provided to enable access to the joints
and valves, during visualinspectionandleaktesting.

15.7.4 Support for Pipeline

a) The MGPS pipeline shall be adequately supported at sufficient
intervals as tabulated here under. The supports shall suitably be
treated to minimize corrosion and prevent electrolyticaction
between the pipes and supports.

OUTSIDEDIAMETER MAXIMUMINTERVALS
(mm) ForVerticalRuns/Horizontal(m)
12-15 1.5
22-28 2.0
35-54 2.5
>54 2.5

b) Where pipes pass through walls, partitions or floors they shall be fitted
with sleeves of copper pipes and provided with appropriate
escutcheon plates where to view.
c) The sleeves shall project at least 25 mm beyond the surface of
penetration. The annular space between the sleeve and pipe shall be
tightly caulked with a suitable material.
d) Due allowance shall be made in the installation for building movement
at all constructional expansion joints.
e) The design of supports, brackets and hangers for all pipe work shall
be in accordance with BS 3974. The Contactor shall co-ordinate the
tie-in of pipe supports with Structural and Architectural works and shall
provide additional support structures, wherever necessary.

15.7.5 Identification, Marking, Colour Coding of Pipelines

a) Pipelines shall be identified by painting them with colors, as under.
This colour codinghas been taken from DIN EN 737 and has been
found to be most distinctive, easy tomaintainasspecifiedhere. It also
meets the requirements of IS/ISO 9170-1: 2008 for Terminal Units.
b) The Gas symbols are also indicated for marking on pipes, identification
plates, etc.

c) The height of the lettering shall be at least 2.5 mm.

GAS SYMBOL WHITE

Oxygen O2 White

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 674

NitrousOxide N2O Blue

MA4
MedicalCompressedAir Black&White
orAIR-4

Vacuum VAC Yellow

CarbonDioxide CO2 Grey

AGSS AGSS RedMagenta

(3050-
R40 Bin accordance with SS1910
2,NCS Colour Atlas)

d) In addition, arrows shall be marked on pipes to indicate direction of

flow of gas.
e) The Warning Signs, illustrative Graphics and Signs shall be in English
and Hindi either on the same panel, plate, poster, etc.
f) The identification plates shall be in English only and shall be white
plastic plates engraved with black letters and screwed on to various
Equipment, Components, Housings,etc.

15.8 ProvisionofValves

a) Provision of valves is subject to MGPSDesign. In addition toproviding

access to MGPS in emergency, they also help in shutting off supply of
Oxygenand Nitrous Oxide in case of fire and also assist in controlling
movement of smoke.
b) All valves shall be of the lever-ball type, having flanged O-ring seal
connections which open and close with a 90-degree rotation: the
handle should be in line with the pipeline when open. The Valves in
open position shall permit full gas flow without any pressure loss.

c) Gas identity and flow direction arrows should be provided for each
valve. Valves are provided for all gas Services including Medical
vacuum but not for AGSS.

d) All Valves are in Open position in a commissioned MGPS system.

Therefore, Gas pressure loss by a closed valve should be notified to
the MGPS Alarm System.

e) Placement of Valves are required for Safety and maintenance of the

MGPS system as well as general Life & Fire Safety. Therefore,
discretion must be exercised to arrive at the logical number of Valves
to be deployed to make MGPS a safe system.

15.8.1 Valve Designations Main Line Valve

(Source Shut Off Valve)

a) A Source Shut Off Valve is always provided for each Medical Gas
Service at theimmediate outlet (or inlet, in the case of Medical
Vacuum) of the source of supply,so that the entire supply source,

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 675

including all accessory equipment, can be isolated from the entire

pipeline system.
b) These are provided MGPS Manifold Room or MGPS Plant Room.
c) The Source Shut Off Valve Location must always be a supervised
Location and accessible to MGPS staff only. These are not
normally locked.

15.8.2 Branch Valves including Riser Valves

a) Branch Valves shall be provided at every major branch and the base
of each riser, whichbranches out from the Main Hospital Supply
Pipeline, on all types of Gas Service,primarily for Fire Safety of the
building. (A major branch is any line that serves two or more fire zone
son a given Floor Plate).
b) BranchValves are placed in secured locations and are accessible to
MGPS staff only. These are not normally locked. These are not
normally enclosed inlocked boxes. These are not provided NIST
connect or fittings.

15.8.3 Line Valves Assembly (LVA)

These are pipeline-isolating valve fitted to facilitate maintenance of

defined
sectionoftheMGPSinstallation.ThesecansubstituteBranchvalves,ifsolo
cated. LVAs shall be installed on branches from the Main Hospital
Supply Pipeline,for all typesofgasservice,asunder;
i. AtthepipelineentrytoaBuildingBlock
ii. At the pipeline exit from a Building Block
iii. At the Emergency Inlet Port
iv. At the connection of branches to the main pipeline if branch valve
has not been provided.
v. At the connection of risers to the main pipeline if branch valve
has not been provided
vi. LVAs are normally locked in their operating positions.
vii. These are not normally enclosed in locked boxes.
viii. These are not provided non-interchangeable screw thread
connector (NIST) fittings.

15.8.4 Zone Valves

a) Depending upon Floor Plate Configurations, a Zonal Valve shall be

provided upstream of LVA to control one (sometimes more than one
Fire Zone) and should ideally be placed at the entry to the fire zone
on the fire escape route, clearly visible, signed and away from the
extentof the Fire Door.
b) Zone valves are usually provided on Medical Oxygen Supply
Service and MedicalNitrousOxideSupplyService.
c) ZonevalvesmustbeaccessibletoFloorStaffandFireServiceStaff.
d) ZonevalveLocationmustbeindicatedinFloorEvacuationPlanCharts.

15.8.5 Area Valve Service Unit Modules (AVSU):

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 676

a) AreaValves,whenprovided with Non-interchangeable NIST Gas

Specific Connectors, Gas Pressure Switch, and Pressure Gauge,
etc., are called Area Valve Service Unit Modules (AVSU). These
multifunction units can monitor and control Gas Pressures as well as
assist in Emergency Gas Alarm Management.
b) Area
Valves are provided for user access to alimited area or zone of MGPS
installation, in an emergency (or for maintenance purposes).
c) In case of gas supply interruption, AVSU are used to connect
local external gas sources through the emergency inlets. This
provision should always be made.
d) AVSU can be a Single Gas Service
Unit Multi- Gas Service Unit shall service maximum 6 Gas
Services, but the provision of Area Valves and other devices shall be
gas specific. In Multi- gas Service Unit, Gas identity and flow
direction arrows should be provided for each valve.

e) Typically, AVSUs are provided as per functional department layout

and controls all Terminal Units in the respective departments. AVSU
must be solocated that they are visible from are a son able distance
and can be easily operated. The Area valves should be at a height of
1000 mm (lowest 800 mm) to maximum 1800 mm finished floorlevel.

f) The Alarm and Monitoring Display Unit is placed in the Nursing

Station.

g) An AVSU controls maximum 36 number of Terminal Units in a

multibed ward, or 10 or a smaller number of rooms (or wardbays)
with Terminal Units. It controls only 8 Terminal Units or less when
installed in Critical Care Areas including Triage Stations,Treatment
Rooms, Labour Rooms, Class A and Class B Operating Rooms

h) In case of a layout where a corridor crosses two fire zones in its

evacuation path, additional Zone Valve should be provided to
control Terminal Units, Fire Zone wise.

i) In case of provision of dual circuits, as may be provided in critical

care are as with or without isolation facilities, AVSU provision is
made separately for each circuit. Each AVSU must list all the
terminal units, that it controls. In this situation, Alarm modules are
not repeated.

j) Provision of AVSU shall be at appoint immediately out side the entry

door, individually, while the gas supply terminal unit and the alarm
cumpressure monitoring unit shall be in the room and inside the
room in the following locations.
i. Class Corhigher, Surgical OperatingRooms
ii. Endoscopy Rooms (Canbecombined for up to 8 Endoscopy rooms)
iii. All specialuse critical care rooms

k) In Operating Rooms, where pneumatically powered pendant

fittings are providedusing medical air as the power source, the
AVSU that controls the pneumatically- powered devices should be

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 677

identified and marked out.

l) Provision of AVSU shall be in the control room of the machine

while the gas supply terminalunitshall be in the examination/Therapy
room in the following locations.
i. Radiological Examination Rooms for CT, MRI, General X-ray,
Cardiac CathLab,etc.
i. i. Nuclear Medicine PET Scanner Examination Room, Gamma
Camera Room,etc.
iii. RadiotherapyRoom
I v BrachytherapyRoom

m. In Critical Care areas of the Hospitals, AVSUs should be labelled to

identify theTerminal Units controlled.
n. For Functionally different departments on same floor, separate AVSUs
shall be provided. For Example,ifafloorhas General Ward and a
maintenance Dialysis Unit,each of these shall have their respective
AVSU to controlthe Gas Terminal Units, asprovided.

o. AVSUs are lockable enclosures which can be closed with the valve
either in the “open” or “closed” position. In an emergency, the user
must be able to gain access in order to operate the isolating valves
quickly and simply without the need for a key.There are several
methods of providing such emergency access, for example break-
glass panels and plasticpush/pull-out inserts, etc. AVSU with display
units shall require electrical power supply.

p. The AVSU enclosure should have adequate ventilation to prevent the

accumulationofgasintheeventofaleak.

15.8.6 MGPS Pressure Monitoring and Alarm Systems

This MGPS Installation shall be provided with adedicated computerized
MGPS Monitoringand Alarm System for continuous monitoring of the
installed system and to provide systemstatus information by deploying
multiple display panels and generate alarms to warn the Hospital’s
Clinical and Engineering Staff at the time of abnormal conditions. If
system alarm condition occurs, the alarm shall activate automatically.

15.8.6.1 The MGPS Monitoring and Alarm System shall be operated by deploying a
System Control Software that provides comprehensive monitoring over the whole
MGPS installation, specifically over the Status of Equipment deployed and gas
Pressures available. It provides comprehensive analysis of data as generated and
presents the results in display panels and indicator panels. It activates the Alarm
Module, monitors all alarm conditions and also generates requiredreports.

15.8.6.2 The MGPS Monitoring and Alarm System shall monitor all gas services
installed, including AGSS. AGSS is controlled and monitored in the
Operating Rooms but additional data shall be logged into MGPS Alarm and
Monitoring System.

15.8.6.3 MGPS Monitoring and Alarm System shall be a wired communications

system. It shall use its dedicated MGPS LAN which must reside on a
separate dedicated structured cable network.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 678

15.8.6.3.1 It consists of a central unit that receives signals and data that is
generated by various sensors, transducers, devices, etc., installed as
apart of MGPS installation for monitoring its status, on 24 x 7 basis.

15.8.6.4 It shall interface with Communication System and Software provided to

monitor the status of Liquid Medical Oxygen. This integration is in the
scope of the Contactor.

15.8.6.5 It shall also interface with Hospital Information. It is an interface system to

allow messages generated by other Communication Systems to be sent to
a range of receiving devices including Telephone System (EPABX) and
Hospital Paging System. This integration is in the scope of Contactor

15.8.6.6 MGPS Monitoring and Alarm System, using LAN, shall connect all PLC
controlled panels, as deployed in MGPS installation, collect the data for
analysis against pre-set bench marks and provide either Normal Condition
Display or Emergency Condition display to display panels, as per Hospital
approved format.

15.8.6.7 When an emergency condition occurs, it shall automatically activate the

Alarm Signal Module which shall activate the alarms. Simultaneously, it
shall activate the Hospital’s Message IntegrationEngine to broadcast
notifications.

15.8.6.8 The MGPS Monitoring and Alarm System shall provide Audio-visual display
panels. The panels shall provide physical, labelled, visual alarm indicators.
MGPS Monitoring and Alarm System Master Display shall be provided in
the Central MGPS Plant Room & Manifold Room or where the MGPS Duty
Technician is located, as per Hospital requirement.

15.8.6.9 Slave of Master System Audible Alarms in the Central Fire Control Room of
the Hospital as a Slave Monitor (also called Repeater Indicator Panel).
Area Audible Alarm Panels installed at the corresponding Nurse Station or
Control Stations, in all areas of the Hospital, for those Gas Types which are
being used there. The criteria is availability of Gas Specific Terminal Units.

15.8.6.10 MGPS Monitoring and Alarm System shall be provided uninterrupted power
supply (UPS), the same is in the scope of work. MGPS Monitoring and
Alarm System shall be provided with RF Protection.

15.8.6.11 Contractor shall provide drawings, low voltage control wire layout and data
cable layout, location of Alarm panels, Pressure Switches and related
valves.

15.8.6.12 The MGPS Monitoring and Alarm System output shall be Multi viewer, HD,
display panels (Monitors) for simultaneous display of multiple screens
related to multiple parameters. In addition, visual LED indicators or LED
display units shall be provided, where required.

15.8.6.13 The MGPS Monitoring and Alarm System output display can be wall
mounted or a Tabletop display unit. The audio-visual Alarm Panels must be

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 679

installed where the alarms can be attended to.

15.8.6.14 The panels shall be HD/Multi viewer display panels for simultaneous
display of multiple screens related to multiple/parameters. Inaddition, LED
signal displays can be provided, where required. All display panels, PLC
Panels and PC integrated Units in MGPS installation shall provide
suitableData Connections for networking.

The Display shall be structured as under.

I. Normal Condition Display

The Normal condition for all piped MGPS should be displayed as a
steady green visual signal.
The “Normal” indicator should extinguish in warning and alarm
conditions.

II. Warning Condition Display

Warning conditions appropriate to each MGPS should be displayed
as a flashing yellow visual signal that may be accompanied by a
mutable audible signal.

Emergency alarms are generated by loss of pipeline pressure or

vacuum and are indicated by flashing red visual signals accompanied
by mutable audible signals.

15.8.6.15 The MGPS Monitoring and Alarm System is a comprehensive system that
shall collect gas specific data, pressure data, Gas Source data, on
continuous basis, analyses it and provide MGPS status of normal
conditions and activate alarms when abnormal conditions occur. It deploys
a large number of digital Pressure, Airflow, Force, Magnetic and Tactile
Sensors; Pressure Switches; Pressure Transducers, etc., to monitor and
operate the MGPS Alarm and Monitoring System. It shall generate Text
messages for informing the occurrence of emergency condition, which
require urgent action by the user.

15.8.6.16 It requires that all MGPS components are provided a unique ID which shall
be used by the system to monitor and to display. It means all pumps,
manifolds, LVA, AVSUs, etc. shall be listed and provided a unique ID.

15.8.6.17 The Alarm Panels must be visible and/or within the hearing range of the
Healthcare Providers. The alarm should be loud enough to be heard over
the surrounding ambient noise. In any case, all local area Alarms are
repeated in master Alarm and from there in the Central FireControl Room.

15.8.6.18 In Critical Healthcare Delivery Areas, Hospitals must ensure that alarm
panels are located in Nursing Stations. When MGPS services are used in
radiotherapy rooms, radiology examination rooms, Alarm panels are
located in respective Control rooms.

15.8.6.19 If the Alarm Panels are combined, to reduce the number of audible
notifications, the panel must indicate location of origin of the alarm.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 680

15.8.6.20 Master Alarms, panel shall provide comprehensive information about the
sources and give warning of any issues developing within the source
equipment themselves. They also provide status of MGPS System, like the
source being used, in case of Duplex manifolds, which bank is being used,
etc.

15.8.6.21 Local Alarm panels provide information about the status of MGPS supply
downstream of Area Valve or Line Alarm. Local Alarm panels may also
provide relevant information about the Gas Pressure. The Alarm panel
component of LVAs can be placed at a different location where it is more
effective like at the Nursing Station in a ward where LVA is placed in ward
evacuation path. It is permitted to provide the Alarm panel inside the
Operating Rooms.

15.8.7 Sensors

a) For all locations, the sensors shall be placed on the pipe and wired to
the alarm panel. All Area Valves should be integrated with Alarm
Sensors

b) For all Critical Healthcare Delivery Areas, where an area alarm shall
monitor a single zone, the sensor should be placed on the patient side
of the zone valve. Closing the valve should activate the alarm.
Additionally, the sensor may be placed on the source side of the Zonal
Valve to determine the extent of area affected.

15.8.8 The Auditory Signal

a) TheAuditory Signals for emergency alarms shall conform to the

requirements of IEC 60601-1-8. The A-weighted sound pressure level
of the auditory components of these alarm signals, at minimum
volume, shall be at least 2 dB above the background level or 55 dB
when tested in accordance with ISO 3746.

b) Ifanauditory signal can be silenced by the operator, the silencing shall

not prevent the auditory signal from being activated by anewal arm
condition.

c) If an emergency auditory signal can be silenced by the operator. the

period of silencing shall not exceed 15 minutes.

d) Visual Signal(s) for emergency clinical alarms shall conform to the

requirements of IEC 60601-1-8. These shall be clearly visible up to a
distance of 4 meters, and in ambient illumination of 100 LUX to 500
LUX.

e) For Emergency Clinical and Operating Alarms, there shall be a

simultaneous Visual and Auditory Signal. When the condition which
has caused the alarm has cleared, the auditory signal and the visual
signal shall reset automatically or by deliberate operator action.

f) MGPS Monitoring and Alarm System shall provide following 3 types of

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 681

Display Panels. These may be with or without controlling valves, asper

design. These shall provide direct data connectivity for slave panels.
a. Master MGPS Alarms Display Panel
b. Area MGPS Alarms Display Panel
c. Local MGPS Alarm Display Panel

15.9 Master MGPS Alarms Display Panel

a) It shall be located in the Central MGPS Plant Room & Manifold Room
or where the MGPS Duty Technician is located.

b) One Slave Monitor Panel of Master Alarms Display Panel shall be

provided in the Hospital’s Central Fire Control Station. If the MGPS
Plant Room, manifold Room and the Liquid Medical Oxygen yard are
in different locations, each shall have Master MGPS Alarms Display
by providing suitably located Master Panel and Slave Panels.

c) In addition, one or more Slave Monitor Panel of Master Alarms Display

Panel may be provided in following locations.
I. Central HIT Hardware Room.
II. Biomedical Engineer’s Duty Room.

d) In Master Alarms Display Panel, the number of lights and their

arrangement can vary depending on the details of the source
equipment being used. Some types of pumps require extra alarms
and some backup systems shall also require alerting the continuously
attended location.

e) It shall provide the following information, grouped in a Gas Specific

format.
i. AGSS Disposal Unit Status
ii. Bacterial Filter Status
iii. Dew Point Measurement
iv. Dryer In Use
v. Duty Bank Pressure
vi. Filter Service Date
vii. Gas Distribution Pressure
viii. Gas Flow Rate
ix. Gas Pressure at defined Locations
x. Gas Supply Pressure
xi. Liquid Medical Oxygen Tank Liquid Level
xii. Outlet Pressure to Pipeline
xiii. Power Amps in Use
xiv. Pump Hours Run
xv. Pump No. On Duty
xvi. Pump Oil Level
xvii. Pump Service Date
xviii. Vacuum reservoirs Pressure
xix. Stand by Bank Pressure

f) Shall provide signals to indicate the following conditions.

1. Oxygen
a) High mainline pressure

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 682

b) Low mainline pressure

c) Primary Liquid level Low (Less than an average day’s supply)
d) Reserve Liquid level Low (Less than an average day’s supply)
e) Reserve in use
f) Reserve low pressure.

2. Manifolds with containers or cylinders (usually Medical Nitrous Oxide,

Medical Carbon Dioxide)
g) High main line pressure
h) Low main line pressure
i) Change over from primary to secondary supply
j) Reserve in use (If reserve header is present)
k) Reserve low pressure (If reserve header is present)

3. Medical Air
l) High mainline pressure
m) Low main line pressure
n) High Dew point (>35°F)
o) High Temperature (operating temperature of the compressor)
p) LagCompressor

4. Medical Vacuum
q) Low Vacuum pressure
r) Lag Pump

15.9.1 Area MGPS Alarms Display Panel

a) These are located in Functional Are as of the Hospital to monitor the

gas specific pressure in specific are as or zones, like in an urse Station
for a multibed ward or in a Surgical Suite.
b) These can be located along side AVSUs.
c) These must always be placed where the alarm condition can be attended to.
d) A single panel shall display all Monitored Gas Service Status, scrolling
display.

15.9.2 Local MGPS Alarm Display Panel

a) These are located in Functional Areas of the Hospital to monitor
thegas specific pressurein specific rooms, like in an Operating
Rooms or Endoscopy Room, on the ward Nursing Stationin Critical
Care Wards,etc.

b) These must always be placed where the alarm condition can be attended to.

c) A single panel shall display all monitored gas services.

15.9.3 MGPS Monitoring and Alarm System Software

a) The MGPS Monitoring and Alarm System Software shall be

capable of being interfaced to Hospital HIS, can talk to most third-
party software(s) for any enhancements of the system and capable
of being upgraded. It shall retain MGPS data for a limited period and
submit all data to HIS for archiving.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 683

b) It shall provide real-time monitoring and tracking of all transactions

of all linked devices. By itself or by deploying third party add on, it
shall provide a comprehensive, stable, secure system with100%
backup.

c) It shall provide
i. Acomprehensive System Control with integrated alarms
ii. Real-time system status Display and Graphics
iii. Full System StatisticsTracking and Reporting, including messaging and E- mailing
iv. Interface all needed third party Software
v. Ability to add additional plug-in Technologies
vi. User-Friendly Programming Abilities

d) The Central Control Centre where this software resides, requires

tertiary Source Power. UPS shall be provided by the Contactor.

e) All Alarm Conditions shall be supervised in addition to automatic

control and monitoring. All reconfiguration operations and all
changes in operational bench marks; shall be carried out after due
authorisation.

15.9.4 Other Parameters

a) MGPS Monitoring and Alarm System as deployed in the Hospital is
connected to Hospital LAN through a Low Voltage Integration Switch
for Data management. Once this connectivity to Hospital LAN is
established, the MGPS data and reports become part of HIS database
and can be viewed anywhere in the Hospital depending upon the
privileges of the viewer.
b) The design of all panels including Central Panel, Repeater Panel, Area
Panels and LocalPanelsincludingits SLDshallbeapproved bythe
Engineer in Chargebeforetheseunitsarefabricated.

15.10 Commissioning and Handing Over

a) MGPS Commissioning includes following activities to be carried out in

the stated order.

b) The testing procedures as described in the IS ISO 7396-1 Standard,

IS ISO 7396-2 Standard and, if required, HTM 02-01: Medical Gas
Pipeline Systems/ as per standards adopted, shall be followed.

c) A record shall be made of all tests performed and results. All testing
shall be witnessed by the Engineer-In-Charge or his representative.

d) All defects or errors, found during testing must be rectified, and the
relevant systems must be retested as appropriate before the records
are signed.

e) The Contractor shall provide labour, materials, equipment,

Instruments, Tools and Tackle to carry out these tests.
f) The Contractor shall co-ordinate with Test Laboratories for testing gas
specificity.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 684

g) In the MGPS Installation, no MGPS Accessories or Devices which

require G as Service shall be connected to the Installation, till the
Project Engineer has certified the MGPS System to be a
Commissioned System

15.10.1 Specific Activites

Pipeline car cases
a) Labelling and Marking
b) Sleeving and Supports
c) Physical plant & Pipe Accommodation
d) Signage including Construction Safety signage
e) Pipe Leakage Tests (First Stage)
f) Valve Leakage Tests
g) Cross-Connection Tests

15.10.2 Pipeline System Complete –SystemTest (with Installed Terminal Units for
safe Performance with test Gases)

a) LeakageTests(Second stage)
b) AVSU/TU/NIST Identification,Function & PerformanceTests
i. Closure of AVSUs and LVAs
ii. Zoning of AVSUs
iii. Terminal Unit Identification

c) Cross-connectionTests
d) Pipeline System PerformanceTests
e) Flow and pressure dropat individual Terminal Units
f) Supply System PerformanceTests
g) Safety Valves PerformanceTests
h) Alarm Systems PerformanceTests
i) Purging with Test Gases
j) ParticulateContaminationTests
k) Vacuum Disposal System
l) AGSS Disposal System

15.10.3 MGPS System Complete with specific medical gases

i. Purging with Working Gases
ii. Carry out Gas Identity and Quality Tests
15.10.4 Handing Over Documentation
a. Check all OEM Manuals and Certificates
b. Check Liquid Medical OxygenLicense
c. Check DFONOC
d. Check Maintenance Manual
e. Check all “As Built” drawings
f. Check all “As Installed” Equipment drawings
g. Check Electrical Installation Drawings
h. Check Safety Signage
i. Record Pressures immediately prior to commissioning.

15.10.5 Validation and Verification

a) All validation tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer-In-Charge or his

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 685

representative and test reports are verified. The Contractor shall

provide all instrumentation for the functional tests along with their
Calibration certificates.

b) The Liquid Medical Oxygen system shall not be tested under no flow
conditions.

c) In this MGPS Installation, the test gas shall be Compressed Air supplied
in Cylinders, or generated by the Medical Air Plant, provided the
Medical Air has been tested, complying to IP or EP or USP. Non-
medical compressed air, from any source – cylinders or portable
compressors, shall not be used.

d) When employing Medical Air Plant Compressors for this testing, the
total flow under test shall not be more than 75% of the flow capacity of
the dryers.

e) The testing shall be carried out in three stages as under and as listed
in detail above.
I. Tests and checks on the pipeline carcass.
II. Tests and commissioning of the complete pipeline system (with
Terminal Units installed) for safety, performance and particulate
contamination using test gas.
III. Only after tests for particulate contamination are validated, filling
of the MGPS gasdelivery systems with specific gases for the
purposes of identity and quality tests of the specific gases shall be
done, prior to its use for patient care.

f) After the testing and validation, if MGPS is not to be commissioned,

the pipeline shall remain filled with test gas under pressure, till it is
commissioned when respective gases shall be filled, and identity tests
and quality tests of the specific gases repeated.

g) Always, the designated Authorised Person (MGPS) is responsible for

the day-to-day management of the MGPS, after commissioning of this
MGPS Installation. This shall be included in this contract agreement. All
works including maintenance works and repair.

h) works, modification works, addition or deletion of terminal units, etc.

must be authorised before these works are carried out. All new Terminal
Units shall be supplied with “Do not use” labels. These labels shall
remain in place until the final identity and quality tests have been
completed. They shall then be removed by the Authorised Person
(MGPS).

i) The results of all tests must form part of the permanent records of the
Hospital and should show details of the services and areas tested.

15.10.6 SystemControls

The “Continuous on Demand” feature shall stop the operation of the

MGPS

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 686

During periods of low or node mand. The control includes individual self-
protected combination MGPS controls with short circuit protection, single
phase and thermal over load protection, individual control circuit with
transformers primary and secondary protection, pressure sensors,
temperature switches with reset buttons,and an electronic controller to
automatically change the operating sequence of the compressors.The
cabinet shall have status display to include system pres sure, dew point
pump operation, accumulated time, maintenance interval, fault conditions,
and silence button, lighted Hand-Off- Automatic selectors witches and
safety disconnect operating handles. All required local alarm functions
shall be integrated into the packaged system.

The system shall be designed to function even if the programmable

controller fails.

Accessories including for jobs it e installation such as inlet and discharge

flexibl e connectors, vibration mounting pads, and source isolation valve
shall be supplied.
All the filters shall be covered under warranty period and CMC Period.

· Air Compress or Faulty/Operation

· Vacuum Pump Faulty/Operational
· Vacuum Deficiency Vacuum Reservoir
· And Other MGPS Signals & Alarms Contractor shall be
responsible for allcabling from local alarm panels (OTS&ICUs)
to master alarm panel.
Master alarm shall be integrated with, / HIS

15.10.7 Gas Outlets (Terminal Units)

Terminal Units (Gas Outlets) with probes/Adaptors for O2, N2O,

Compressed Air 4, Air 7, AGSS, Vacuum & CO2 (CO2 can be option
aldepending on the requirement)
The Medical gas out lets shall confirm to
HTM 02- 01/NFPA99C/EN/DIN/ISO7396-
1. Terminal Outlets shall be designed to dispense medical gases
(oraninletformedicalvacuum)tothesecondaryequipment(flowmeters,Sucti
onregulators, etc.) at the point of use and is gas specific so that
secondary devices cannot be “attached” to the wrong gas. When not in
use the gas in a non- flowing state with in the Outlet (Terminal unit)
sealed by “O” ring. The adapter when inserted pushesthe poppet inside
and the gas starts flowing and sealing is ensured by the “O” ring or
aseat. The Outlets are Quick Connect Type and gas specificity is
accomplished by"Pinindexing."The out lets shall have following features:

• Push to insert and press-to-release mechanism for probes.

• Allows plugging of probes from front.
• Self-sealing valve on disengaging the probe (Quick disconnect)
• Smooth quite action.
• Non return valve for on line servicing/repairing
• Indexed to eliminate inter-change ability of gas services
• Color-coded gas specific front plate
• Totally leak proof, safe & easy to operate

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 687

• Configurations possible: surface, flush & Bead-head.

• Outlets shall beUSFDA / European CE complied.
• All outlets shall have respective labels (i.e.,O2/N2O
/Air4/Air7/Vacuum/ CO2 / AGSS etc.) displayed accordingly.

15.11 Terminal units, probes and their gas-specific components shall be

marked durably and legibly with the symbol of the relevant gas, as
under. In addition to the symbol, the name of the gas can be used.

a) Terminal units and probes shall be marked with the manufacturer’s

name or identification mark and, if applicable, with additional means to
ensure traceability such as type, batch or serial number or year of
manufacture.

b) Dimensions of probes shall be as per BS 5682:2005. It is essential that

probes be machined from stainless steel.
c) Terminal units may also be incorporated with electrical services, nurse
call systems, low voltage services, in proprietary fittings such as
medical supply units, wall panel systems, Head Wall Panels and
pendant fittings etc. When they are installed within such fittings, it is
essential to maintain the concentricity of the terminal unit bezel with
the fascia plate aperture.

a) The recommended mounting height for installing Terminal Units on

walls or Similar vertical surfaces is 1300 mm (4ft.4in) above finished
floor level (FFL) to the centre of the socket.

b) In the Operating Rooms, Terminal Units are provided on pendant

fittings, shall use rigid pipe work as much as possible.

c) AGSS Terminal Unit shall be provided on both pendants in the

Operating Room.

d) Terminal Units should be arranged in the following order from left to

right as seen when facing the terminal units.

15.11.1 HorizontalBedHeadPanel

It shall confirm to HTM 02-01/ NFPA 99 C/EN/DIN/ISO 7396-1 standards.

The design shall beapproved by the respective hospital authority/
department before installation and it isresponsibility of the Contractor to
interact with respectivehospital authority/ department and finalize the Bed
Head Panel aspersitecondition. It shall be 1000mm for 2 Gas out let
configuration,1200 mm for up to 4 outlets configuration and 1500mm for
6/8 Outlet configurations. It shall have following features: -

Efficient,Safe & Robust design in extruded Aluminium section. Smooth

curved surfaces, and choice of base colour and fascia plates. Unit shall
have integrated rail system to mount accessories. The head wall system
shall be constructed of Aluminium extrusions joined together to form a
carcass to suit the application. Unit shall be factory assembled for
electrical and mechanical components. Segregation of services i.e., Low
voltage supplies, High Voltage supply and Medicalgases shall be
maintained with built-inLED Lighting (withON/OFFcontrol) in lower

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 688

section. Front fascia plate shall be removable individually to access for

respective service. Each bed- head unit shall be supplied with electrical
out lets pre-fitted, wired. 5/15 A combined Electrical socket with switch –
minimum 4 Nos, Telephone, Data outlets. It shall be suitable for
providing Nurse call unit.

15.11.2 Ward Vacuum Units It must

consists of the following:-

1no of Suction Regulator and 1no of 1000 ml polysulfone /polycarbonate

collection jar. Suction regulator shall be supplied with a safety jar,
including antibacterial filter and an anti-overflow safety device. Shall have
wide membrane continuous suction controller. In case of digital suction
regulator, battery shall be replaced by during warranty & CMC period.

Shall have vacuum levels: 0-750 mm Hg or more. Shall have vacuum

gauge fitted with a protective bumper device. Shall have on/off knob
allowing for the quick restoration of a readjusted vacuum level. Must have
central adjustment knob with a color coded for 0 to 750 mm Hg or more.
Shall have Polysulfone/ polycarbonate 100cc safety jar, autoclavable at
121º C at 5mins, unbreakable, fitted with an anti-overflow safety device
and equipped with antibacterial filter. It shall be totally transparent to
ensure perfect sucked liquid visibility. Low flow ward vacuumunit-
Shallhavevacuumlevels:0-150mmofHg+/-10%.

15.11.3 Theatre Vacuum Unit For OT

It must consist of the

following:-

1 No. Suction Regulator and 2nos. 1500ml or more polysulfone/

polycarbonate collection jar, and both to be mounted on
a trolley. In case of digital suction regulator, battery shall be replaced
by the Contractor during warranty & CMC period

Suction Regulator: Suction regulator shall be supplied with a safetyjar,

including an anti-bacterial filter and ananti- over flow safety device. Shall
have wide membrane continuous suction controller. Shall have vacuum
levels: 0-750 mm of Hgor more Shall have vacuum gauge fitted with
aprotective bumper device.
Shall have on/off knob allowing for the quick restoration of are adjusted
vacuum level. Must have central adjustment knob with a color coded for
0-750 mm Hgor more. Shall have poly sulfone/ poly carbonate safety jar,
autoclavableat121ºC,unbreakable,fittedwithan anti-over flow safety device
and equipped with antibacterial filter.

Collection jar shall be totally transparent, to ensure perfect sucked

liquidvisibility.

15.11.4 Line Isolation Valves

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 689

The Lockable line valves must be degreased and complete valve with
stuffed pipe & fittings, factory tested and compliant with HTM02-
01/NFPA99C/EN/DIN/ISO7396-1standard.

15.11.5 Electrical Wiring with Electrical Panels –

Allwiring inside the Manifold Room and Plant room required for MGPS
equipment and General electrification shall be in the scope of work. The
department shall provide one point supply only. Other are under the
scope of Contractor. All the work shall be as per BIS/CE standard and
material used shall be reputed make only.
The scope shall be inclusive of all installation, material (Copper Pipes,
fittings, etc.), trenches and labour etc. as per site condition.

Contractor shall be responsible for antistatic rubber flooring in the

manifold room and thickness of flooring shall not be less than 1 inch.

Contractor shall provide a raised Loading/Unloading Platform of suitable

sized adjacent to manifold room, so that cylinder can be loaded &
unloaded easily form the lorry/vehicle.

Contractor shall be responsible for provide foundation for Medical Air

Plant, Vacuum Pant& AGSS Plant.

Contractor shall co-ordinate with respective hospital authorities/

department for the finalization of required Office/ Control Room for &
Toilet for MGPS maintenance staff into Manifold/Plant Room.

Contractor shall be responsible for all civil modifications and repair for
successful completion of MGPS Plant, Manifold, and Pipeline installation
and commissioning throughout the proposed blocks/buildings.

Contractor shall be responsible for internal walls/partitions & doors for

creating separation between MGPS Plant and Manifold room, etc. as per
site requirements.

15.12 Defect Liability Period:

a) The contractor shall be responsible for defect liability, OEM warranty

of products ofMGPSinstallationsforThree years from the date of
completion of the work. If the performance of any individual equipment
or system is not satisfactory, the same shall be replaced free of
cost.On receipt of any complaint, the Contractor shallrespond to take
action to repair or replace the defective goods or parts there of free of
cost.

b) Upon failure of the MGPS firm to respond to take action to repair or

replace the defect(s), the hospital may proceed to take such remedial
action(s) as deemed fit, at the risk and cost of the contractor without
prejudice to right of Government to take other remedial actions under
the agreement.

c) The contractor along with the manufacturer shall ensure continued

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 690

supply of the spare parts for the machines and equipment supplied by
them for 10 years from the date of completion of the work.

d) There shall be no extra cost for software upgradation/ supply and

installation of security patches/ lifetime license fee for system.
Contractor should submit OEM certificate to the effect that the software
as well as security patches etc. shall be made available for enabling
free upgradation of the system till the expiry of the defect liability
period.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 691

C-16 Modular Operation Theatre

16.0 Technical Specifications for Modular Operation Theatre

16.1 The brief scope of work shall include Planning, design & preparation of
drawings, and supplying, installation, testing & commissioning of Modular
Operation Theatres for 100 Bedded Hospital. The total system has to be
commissioned in complete manner to have a fully functional system, as required. If
any item is required to make the scheme functional, is not specifically mentioned in
the scope and specifications, the same is deemed to be included within the scope
of this tender.These technical specifications shall be read along with the General
Conditions for all E&M works given under subhead C-B.

16.2 Walls forOperatingRoom

Cladding structure shall consist of insulated stainless steel wall panels with
total panel thickness between 50-60 mm. It shall be 0.8 mm thick, 304 grade
stainless steel sandwich panel (both side 0.8 mm thick sheet), with core
consisting of rigid polyurethane foam injected under high pressure with a
minimum density of 40 kg/m3. The individual wall panels shall use the
tongue and groove technology/ welding method for joining panels. Panel
should be covered with protective sheath to prevent scratch during
installation. The gap between panel and room wall shall be filled with
suitable materials as per International Standards. The gap between the
finished surface of OT and wall should be sufficient for the flush mounting
equipment. and to enable services, pipes, conduits etc. to be run. Stainless
Steel plate finished to fine grain surface, treated properly to take antifungal
paint. The wall panel design should be such that it allows installation and
provides support to all equipment and shall have the provision of openings
required for the installations, without affecting rigidity and strength. Access
boxes shall be fitted to the rear side of all wall-mounted equipment to enable
maintenance to be carried out from outside the operating theatre. Anti-
bacterial and Anti-fungus sterile coating shall be applied on the SS 304
finished walls with at least 3 coats to achieve a thickness of minimum 300
micron. Before application of sterile wall coating, an Industry standard
Primer shall be applied. Contractor should maintain anti-bacterial & anti-
fungal paint during warranty period. Wall elements should be resistant to all
standard cleaning agents, disinfectants, and fumigation agents. It should
have minimum number of junctions. The junction should be seamless and
should be sealed with suitable sealants. Filling of all joints and cavities with
metallic epoxy filler and sanded flush to provide a jointless finish, sprayed
with a water based liquid plastic aseptic and self-sterilizing wall coating
system.

The Panel shall be flame resistant. Third party test certificate for SS304 from
material testing lab to be provided at the time of pre-dispatch
inspection/supply. The inner surface shall be fixed with suitable supports.
Panel should be easy to maintain, durable, antistatic/conductive and fire
retardant.

These technical specifications shall be read along with the General

Conditions for all E&M works given under subhead C-B.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 692

16.2.1 CeilingforOperatingRoom
The prefabricated ceiling plates/cassettes shall be made up of SS 304
panels with sheet thickness of at least 0.8 mm sandwich panel (both side
0.8mm thick sheet) of PUF with minimum density 40kg/m3, matte finished
and coated with antibacterial paint. It shall be from the same manufacturer
as that of wall panel. Total thickness shall be 30- 40mm. Anti-bacterial and
Anti-fungal sterile coating shall be applied on the SS 304 finished ceiling
with at least 3 coats to achieve a thickness of minimum 300 micron. Before
application of sterile ceiling coating, Industry standard Primer shall be
applied. The makes and specifications of primer and paint shall be as per
the guidelines of Panel fabricator/ International standards, whichever is
higher. Contractor should maintain anti-bacterial & anti-fungal paint during
warranty period. Ceiling Panel should be from the same manufacturer of
wall panel. The Supports shall be of Suspension bracket with tension
spring/Threaded rod and shall made up of high quality galvanized or powder
coated steel. Room lighting, air supply inlet, ceiling service units, return air
outlets, etc. should be integrated with SS metal ceiling system. The
individual panels except those at the edges should be removable
individually. The Panel shall be flame resistant. Third party test certificate
for SS 304 from material testing lab to be provided at the time of pre dispatch
inspection/supply. The ceiling panel shall be fixed with suitable supports.
Panel should be easy to maintain, durable, antistatic/conductive and fire
retardant.Filling of all joints and cavities with metallic epoxy filler and sanded
flush to provide a jointless finish sprayed with a water based liquid plastic
aseptic and self-sterilizing wall coating system.

16.2.2 Static dissipative Flooring

The operation theatre floor finish should be laid with 2 mm antistatic seamless
conductive PVC roll/tiles on a semi-conductive adhesive base. On the sub-
floor, a self-leveling compound shall be laid prior to laying of the floor finish.
The self-leveling compound shall be of the type that does not promote
bacteriological growth. The floor should be scratch resistant, fire resistant,
chemical resistant, non-corrosive, slip resistant, smooth, anti-fungi, anti-
microbial, impervious material conductive enough to dissipate static electricity
but not conductive enough to endanger personnel from electric shock. Joints
should be welded by special PVC thermal welding units using PVC welding
bars of same colour. It should be scratchproof. The floor finish should pass over
a concealed cove former and continue up the wall for 100 mm. The floor should
be provided flat to within a tolerance of ±3mm. Copper grounding strip of size
0.05 mm thick, 50 mm width should be laid flat on the floor in the conductive
adhesive and connect to copper wire of grounding. The connection from copper
grid should be brought out uniformly at places to form equi-potential grid.
Colour should be uniform pleasant, and matching with ambience and as
approved by Engineer-in-Charge. One earthing lead should be brought out
from every 14 Sq.m area and attaching it to the main earthing strip/ground.
Relevant Test certificates as per Industry standards shall be produced.

16.2.3 Laminar Air flow System

Theplenumbox of size 2400mmx2400mm shall be madeofhigh-quality

Aluminium sheet, 2 mmthick& Air diffuser shall be made of Woven polyester

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 693

cloth that shall introduce the highest air quality into the Operation Theatre.
The filters installed in the plenum should be suitable for application for
laminar flow and clean rooms. The ceiling system should be equipped with
“H 14” class, 8 Nos. deep HEPA filters (complying with European Norms)
with 99.99% efficiency to ensure highest quality of clean air for 0.3-micron
particles & tight control over bacterial infection system. Air shall be diffused
into the theatre uniformly over thetotalarea. The ceiling filtration system
should be designed to ensure unidirectional distribution of sterile air of the
surgical theatre to ensure the cleanliness of all the area covered by the air
flow. Filtration Ceiling System holding structure, Filter frames and top
plenum should be made of Aluminium. The positive pressure should be
maintained inside the OT to prevent contamination due to air from outside
the OT. The laminar flow installation & lighting system of Operation Theatre
shall be designed in such a way to prevent patients being infected during
operation which lies on the design of sterilized air conditioning system and
the flow pattern of draught as well as the quality of engineering. The filtration
ceiling system should have diffuser to achieve uniform & constant air
distribution over the whole surface. The ceiling shall have supports to
secure the main structural frame to the modular operating theatre. The air
management system should be designed to achieve Class 100 as per IS /
ISO 14644-1. The supplier should provide test certificate for HEPA filter and
laminar air flow systems from the original manufacturer. It shall be
CE/UL/USFDA/LTC/UL/BIS certified / listed

16.2.4 Peripheral lights

Peripheral lighting and clean room luminaries with intensity min 500 Lux,
should be minimum 8 in numbers for each OT. Luminaries cover should be
made of highly resistant, disinfectant leak proof laminated safety
glass/acrylic with fine-grained surface. The body should be made of sheet
steel, perfectly powder coated, supplied ready for connection with dimmable
electronic control gear in multi lamp technology. Recess frames should be
air tight. The fitting should be flush with the ceiling and should be removable
from bottom. The light fitting should be uniformly and aesthetically
distributed on the ceiling to provide uniform illumination in the OT. Light
should not interfere when green mode endoscopy is performed. Peripheral
lighting should be done according to IP 65 regulations. Control equipment
for the general lighting and the light dimming should be provided in the
theatre control panel. The operation procedures should never be affected
by shadows, shimmering lights, and dazzling eyes. This must be achieved
by the lighting system with sufficient illumination level and to provide flicker
less design lighting control system. Suitable for areas with infrared
regulation.

16.2.5 Automatic Sliding Door

The door shall be of Single Flap with frame size 1800 mm wide x 2100 mm
height and hermetically sealed. It should be light weight, noise proof, rust
proof and insulated door. The door frame is to be made from high quality
anodized aluminum extrusion and the door panel to be made from compact
laminated board that will withstand high abrasions.
Thecontrollershouldbecapableofbeingoperatedbyelbowswitches/footswitch

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 694

esaswellas touchless sensor. The track shouldbe of aluminum and the

running surface for the top rollers should be suitably angled to reduce
resistance to movement. The door leaf should be hung by means of hard
plastic rollers of high quality with double bearing at the top. Rollers should
be provided under the track to enable smooth and noiseless movement.
Opening and closing of the door should be microprocessor controlled
electromechanical movement. The door material should be of High-
Pressure Laminate (HPL)/Solid mineral composite surface sheets (SMS),
Color should match the interior and care shouldbetaken to make the leaf
stronger and lighter in weight.One should be able to open and close the door
effortlessly in case of failure of automatic mechanism. Door opening handle
should be strong and sturdy. Material should be of Stainless Steel (gloss
finish/Matte finish), should be provided with high quality cylindrical/Espag
lock. Door leaf should have high quality synthetic rubber gasket with long
life to ensure hermetic sealing (to maintain air pressure differential). Air
tightness of99.99% at a pressure of l00 KPa shall be achieved.

The finished floor on either side of the door should be perfectly levelled with
hygienic PVC laminate (maximum permissible difference + 1 mm). The
overall thickness of the finished door should be 55 mm to 60 mm. The inner
part of the door should be filled with CFC free polyurethane foam (PUF)
thickness of 48mm with high density (Sealed airtight to prevent further
ingress of any microbial organism). The door and controls should comply
with IEE regulation/EU directions. All motors used should be DC motors with
essential isolation from mains. Door should have a vision window 300 mm
x 300 mm with double glazed panels and hermetically sealed. Door
movement should have minimum noise. The starting time after receiving the
signal should be adjustable between 0.5 sec to 20 seconds. Test certificate
for hermetically sealed door frame should be enclosed with the pre dispatch
documents.

Switch: - Device should be used to manually activate and open the door.
Specifically designed for use in clean rooms.

17.2 Touch Screen Surgeon's Control Panel

a) The Control panel shall be Touch Screen type and size shall not be less
than 24", Medical Grade. It shall be able to be configured to incorporate
all the services that Operation Theatre staff requires. The connection
between the Surgeon control panel and the distribution board shall be as
per manufacturer’s recommendations by a multiplexed system, providing

a Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) signal on a two- core cable.

I. The panel shall contain tiles as follows:

II. Time- day clock
III. Time Elapsed Clock
IV. Temperature & Humidity Indicator
V. General/peripheral Lighting control
VI. Medical Gas Alarm Panel
VII. Room Pressure
VIII. Handsfree Telephone system

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 695

IX. HEPA Filter status module

b) Time Day Clock, Time Elapsed Clock and Indicator shall be digital type
and clocks shall have high bright characters, not less than 30 mm in
height. Temperature Indicator shall indicate the theatre temperature and
shall be connected to the Air-Conditioning system.

c) The touch screen control panel should work as the central control panel
for the HVAC controls, instruction board, Peripheral& OT light control.
The controller should be capable of adjusting the temp. adjustment of +/-
5 Deg within 5 Minutes. The touch screen should be wall mounted,
stationed in the visibility line of the surgeon and OT staff. The access
height should be convenient for the nurse to operate and help/assistant
when in need. The panel should accommodate digital clock and the
elapsed time indicator. The medical gas alarm should indicate high and
low gas pressures for each gas service present in the OT including
vacuum. This should be supported by audible alarm also. The panel
should have an alarm mute (fault annunciation) facility. The sensors
(pressure switches) should be at the nearest isolation valve. Control for
general lighting: ON/OFF and dimming controls organized in groups to
provide uniform illumination. ON/OFF control of the operating light shall
be provided.

d) The Control Panel should be able to display the Isolation Panel Alarm
Conditions along with MGPS Alarms, Digital room pressure indicator
(signal from pressure sensor shall be provided to indicate pressure
difference between OT and outside), HEPA filter bank differential
pressure indicator. The control Panel should be able to be integrated with
HIS/,.

e) General Lighting System shall incorporate all the necessary controls of

the lighting system inside the theatre. The medical gas alarm shall
indicate High and Low gas pressure for each gas service present in the
operating theatre and shall have an audible buzzer with mute facility. The
medical gas alarms shall be connected to local pressure switches located
downstream of the last isolation valves.

f) All the required protective items as per industry standards shall be

provided in the distribution board.
16.2.1 Pressure Relief Damper
Pressure Relief Dampers should be provided in each Operation Theatre to
prevent cross contamination of air from clean and dirty areas. Suitably sized
air pressure relief damper should be strategically placed, enabling
differential room pressure to be maintained and to ensure when doors are
opened between operating room and corridors. Counterweight balancing
system should be provided in the PRD (pressure relief damper) to maintain
positive pressure inside the operation room. Air pressure stabilizers should
have unique capability of controlling differential pressure to close tolerance.
The PRD should remain closed at pressure below the set pressure and
should open fully at pressure even at a fractionally above the threshold
pressure. The body and blades should be SS 304 with epoxy powder coated
as per standard BS colors.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 696

16.2.2 Double arm Surgeon Pendent

The Pendants should comply with NFPA 99C/HTM02-01/DIN/EN/ISO/7396.

The support arms should be extremely robust and revolve on high quality
bearings, so that the pendant head glides smoothly and quickly to any
desired position. Double moveable arms (any combination) with total
coverage of min 1800 mm and 330 deg. Horizontal movements for each
arm. Each arm should be capable of 330 degrees of rotation, which can be
easily adjusted to suit the desired mode of operation. Vertical movement
should be motorized and the arm height should remain at height greater
than 1950 mm above floor level. An extremely quiet electric motor,
dampened stoppers and very low hand forces for horizontal movements
shall be provided. Advanced Electromagnetic brake system/Pneumatic
braking shall be provided for various safety requirements and construction
facilities. Weight carrying capacity of the arm should not be less than 180
Kg. Modern and very quiet, high-performance motors as well special
spindles are to be provided to realize precise & steady movement. As a
safety feature the motor should be equipped with an overload protection.
The large interior cross section for supply lines shall offer completely new
applications with 120 mm diameter. The Pendant Service Heads should be
modular with minimum 800mm head. The heads should be capable of
accepting a range of shelves, infusion poles, electrical switch/sockets, gas
outlets other accessories as specified in tender document. The Pendant
Heads should support the range of Physiological Monitor Mounting
Solutions.

The Pendant Service Heads should be supplied with medical gas terminal
units and 5/15 Amps. or 6/16 Amps. hybrid Sockets. Each pendant should
be supplied with outlets and probes as mentioned below –

a) Horizontal arm system- 2Nos.

b) Weight carrying capacity - 180kg
c) 5/15 Amp. Or 6/16 Amp. Electrical sockets - 10 Nos.
d) Adjustable Shelf with two rails one on each side – 3 Nos.
e) IV Fluid Pole with 4 hooks – 1No.
f) Provision to fix Gas outlets(i.e.) Oxygen- 2 Nos., Vacuum- 2 Nos.,
Medical Air 7 bar -2 Nos., CO2 -1 Nos, N2O -1No, Medical Air-4 -1No.
g) Gas interface set for interface plate- 1 No.
h) Interface plate with electrical fittings- 1 No.
i) Ceiling cover for internal ceiling – 1 No.
j) LAN points with RJ 45 outlet – 2Nos.

Surgeon pendent shall have NIST connection for all gases to connect the
MGPS system.

16.2.3 Double arm Anesthesia Pendent

The Pendants should comply with NFPA 99C/HTM02-01/DIN/EN/ISO/7396.
The support arms should be extremely robust and revolve on high quality
bearings, so that the pendant head glides smoothly and quickly to any desired
position. Double moveable arms (any combination) with total coverage of min
1800 mm and 330 deg. Horizontal movements for each arm. Each arm should
be capable of 330 degrees of rotation, which can be easily adjusted to suit the
desired mode of operation. Vertical movement should be motorized and the

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 697

arm height should remain to a height greater than 1950 mm above floor level.
An extremely quiet electric motor, dampened stoppers and very low hand
forces for horizontal movements shall be provided. Advanced
Electromagnetic/brake Pneumatic brake system shall be provided for various
safety requirements and construction facilities. Weight carrying capacity of the
arm should not be less than 180 Kg. Modern and very quiet, high-performance
motors as well special spindles are to be provided to realize precise & steady
movement. As a safety feature the motor should be equipped with an overload
protection. The large interior cross section for supply lines shall offer
completely new applications with 120 mm diameter. The Pendant Service
Heads should be modular with minimum 800mm head. The heads should be
capable of accepting a range of shelves, infusion poles, electrical
switch/sockets, gas outlets other accessories as specified in tender document.
The Pendant Heads should support the range of Physiological Monitor
Mounting Solutions. pendent shall have NIST connection for all gases to
connect the MGPS system.

The Pendant Service Heads should be supplied with medical gas terminal units
and 5/15 Amps. or 6/16 Amps. hybrid Sockets. Each pendant should be
supplied with outlets and probes as mentioned below –

a) Horizontal arm system- 2Nos.

b) Weight carrying capacity - 180kg
c) 5/15 Amp. or 6/16 Amp. Electrical sockets - 10 Nos.
d) Adjustable Shelf with two rails one on each side – 3 Nos.
e) IV Fluid Pole with 4 hooks – 1No.
f) AGSS outlet - 1Nos.
g) Provision to fix Gas outlets(i.e.) Oxygen- 2 Nos., Vacuum- 2 Nos.,
Medical Air 4 bar-2 Nos., N2O -1 Nos.
h) Gas interface set for interface plate- 1 No.
i) Interface plate with electrical fittings- 1 No.
j) Ceiling cover for internal ceiling – 1 No.
k) LAN points with RJ 45 outlet – 2Nos.

16.2.4 LED OT Light, FHD Camera, Flat Head Panel Monitor and Recording
System LED OT Light

Operating Room Surgical Lighting System should provide an ideal

combination of brightness, maneuverability, and shadow resolution without
sacrificing color accuracy through a consistent LED technology.

Such Lighting System should have the following technical specifications:

a) Number of Light heads: Two per suspension.

b) Color Temperature range: 3800k-5000k.
c) Field Size Diameter: 20 to 30 cm.
d) CRI (Ra) >/=95.
e) R9 >/=95.
f) Radiant Energy around 3-4 mW/Sr.
g) Working Range: 750 to 1100mm.
h) Illumination Level: 1,60,000Lux (For Major Dome & For Minor dome).
i) Controls: Control Panel (wall and on dome).

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 698

j) Rotation: 360 degrees.

k) Detachable Sterilizable Handle: 02Nos.
l) Mounting Type: Ceiling.
m) Supply Voltage: 100 V- 240 V AC, 50 Hz.
n) Bulb Type: LED.
o) Dimming Range: 50% - 100%.
p) Operating/Storage Humidity: 10% – 95%.
q) Life of Light Source: >/= 50,000 Hrs.
r) Should have provision to mount the camera in one dome.
s) The light should have an Automatic/Manual switchover to reserve Bulb.

16.2.5 HD Camera System: 1080 p/i

Integrated In-Light Camera System should be integrated at the centre of one
of the domes of this lighting system/ third arm to capture images & video
sequences of the open cases. Such a autofocus – Lockable camera should
have the following specifications –

a) Signal to Noise Ratio (S/N Ratio):>50 dB.

b) CCD/CMOS: 1/3” or 1/2.8”.
c) Optical Zoom: 10X.
d) Digital Zoom: 12-15X.
e) Video Output: HD, DVI, S-Video & Composite Video.
f) White Balance & Gain: Automatic/Manual.
g) Light and Integrated Camera should have a control through Touch
Panel of the control equipment placed inside the operating room.
h) Minimum Illumination: 1 Lux at F1.4
16.2.6 FHD LED Flat Head Panel Monitor:

Should be 32” Ful High-Definition Progressive Scan Flat-panel Monitors with

ceiling mounted spring arm suspension to support high definition/HDTV
progressive Scan images and should be able to support and display
DVI/HDTV, RGBHV, S-Video, Composite video signals. Aspect ratio
16:9/16:10. Resolution – 1920X1080 or better, with IP 54 The flat Panel
suspension should be ready with the cables for integration of Full High-
Definition Digital (DVI/HDTV), RGBHV (High Resolution), SVHS (S-Video),
Composite video signals to travel from the various sources of video like
endoscopic camera, room camera, in light camera, high-definition flat panel
monitors, while assuring native resolution / signal.

16.3 Recording system:

a) Recording system to be offered separately. Recording system should be

FHD medical grade LED monitor LED 21” touch screen and having the
one TB storage space.
b) Data cable for communication from both pendants and monitors should
be laid down up-to outside of OT in a patch port for future expansion
forall OT’s where there is no integration.
c) Patch Panel for power & signal to be laid down for 21” LED Monitor at
wall of MOT.
d) Recorder should be capable of recording video from other sources like -
microscopes, endoscopes. Etc., suitable provision should be provided
as per standards.
e) Should be flush mounted on the OT wall with suitable frame.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 699

16.3.1 X-ray Viewing Screen

Should be designed to provide a high level of control luminance without flicker.

The system should comply electrical safety codes for high and low voltage
system. The theatre should be equipped with a 3-plate X-Ray viewing screen.
It shall be designed to provide flicker free luminance for the film viewing
purpose. It shall be flushed with the theatre wall for hygienic and ease of
cleaning purpose. The X-Ray viewing screen shall be positioned for the
purpose of front access. The X-Ray viewing screen shall be illuminated by LED
Lamps. The diffuser shall be able to diffuse the light evenly and shall provide
enough luminance for film viewing. It shall be of high-quality opaque acrylic
sheet. The film is held firmly by using spring-loaded clips for ease of mounting
and demounting. The body is built by using electrolyzed steel with powder
coated to BS standards. The size of the X-ray viewing screen shall not be less
than 1000 mm x 700 mm x 95 mm (deep). It works on a PCB button control
system.

16.3.2 Storage Cabinet

The storage unit should be made with 1.5 mm or above thick SS 304 sheet
panels. Storage Cabinet should be divided in two equal parts and each part
should have individual glass doors with high quality locking system. Each part
should be provided with shelves. The shelves should be of SS 304 &
removable for cleaning. The minimum overall size should be 1800 mm (H) x
1200 mm (W) x 400 mm (D) (approx.).

16.3.3 Writing Board

One Operating writing board should be provided in each Operating Theatre

and should be made of Ceramic Magnetic white board. Operating write Board
should be flush mounted with Sterile joint system with 1.5 mm thick, white
ceramic board bonded to a 2 mm sheet steel for additional rigidity. Size shall
be 940 mm x 600 mm (approx.)

16.3.4 Hatch Box

A Hatch box of 600 mm (H) x 600 mm (W) 450mm (D) size should be provided
in the Operation Theatre as specified in the scope of the work to remove waste
materials from the Operation Theatre to Dirty linen Area just adjacent to
Operation Theatre. Each Hatch should be equipped with two doors and the
door should be operated electrically / manually. The Hatch box should be
designed in such a way that only one door should be opened at one time. The
UV light should be so installed that it is kept ON while both the doors are
closed, this UV light must be automatically turned OFF in case of opening of
either of the doors. There should be indicators on both sides of the OT so that
the door open/close status can be monitored from both ends. Hatch Box should
be manufactured from Stainless Steel, grade 304. It should have a glass vision
window on each door with at least 5 mm thick glass.

16.3.5 Scrub Station

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 700

The scrub station shall be equipped with 3 bays. The scrub station shall be
made of Stainless steel, Grade 304, with satin polish finish and wired. Compact
surgical scrub sink should be designed for use in OT complex providing for pre
procedural scrub up. (Double sink combination as suitable). Each fixture
should be fabricated from heavy gauge type 304 stainless steel (minimum
thickness 1.5mm) and should be seamless welded construction, polished to a
satin finish. The scrub sink should be provided with a front access panel which
should be easily removed for access to the water-controlled valve, waste
connections, stoppers and strainers. Hands free operation should include
infrared sensors with programmable adjustment. Thermostatic mixing, valve
control should be located behind the access panel and maintain constant water
temperature. Timing should be adjustable to meet individual application
requirements. Provided with infrared sensors, thermostatic control taps with
fail safe temperature controls. All units should have reduced anti- splash fronts.
Knee/foot/elbow operated switch should be provided additionally. The scrub
stations control system shall be based on advanced microprocessor. The
scrub station shall be sensor-activated 24V AC. The scrub station shall be
provided with user selectable time out control. The supply shall not be
interrupted in case of power failure or maintenance. The station shall be
equipped with thermostatic mixing valve to control the temperature of hot and
cold-water supply. The washing faucet shall be made of Chrome plated brass
hand. The minimum size shall be 1500 mm x 550 mm x 840 mm.

16.3.6 Online UPS System

Backup should be minimum 30 min. Electrical Power to UPS room shall be

drawn from the nearest distribution board. Contractor should provide required
electrical wiring from UPS to all modular MOT as per IEC/International
standard. Electrical control panel complete with MCCB, Switchgears etc.
should be provided. Each Modular Operation Theatre shall be provided with
minimum 20 KVA UPS with inbuilt isolation.

16.3.7 Electrical Installation & Distribution Board

Electric power from the nearest SMDB shall be taken to the operation theatre.
Necessary cables, MCCBs / MCBs etc. shall be provided, which is within the
scope of the work. Isolated power supply, insulation measuring and protection
as per IEC standards should be provided. Earthed equipment bonding of all
exposed metalwork should be provided. Power sockets within the Operating
Theatres ancillary areas should be matched to the rest of the hospital. Each
wall of MOT should have minimum 02 Nos. 6/16A hybrid switch socket & 32A
industrial socket at any two walls as per IEC standard. Light fittings within the
clinical areas should be recessed LED type with control gear. Fittings should
be sealed in accordance with the standard IP65. All equipment should be fully
and permanently labelled to identify and describe the function, operation and
voltage of the apparatus concerned. Throughout and upon completion of the
electrical installation, tests in accordance with relevant sections of the local
wiring regulations should be carried out and the results should be recorded.

All high voltage equipment should be installed in a separate enclosure. The

remote cabinet should house the operating lamp transformers, mains failure
relays, UPS, electrical distribution equipment & circuit protection equipment for

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 701

all circuits within the operating theatre. All internal wiring should terminate in
connectors with screw & clamp spring. Connections of the clip- on type
mounted on a CE complied rail & labeled with indelible proprietary labels.
Individual fuses or miniature circuit breakers should protect all internal circuits.
Complete schematic drawing with description should be enclosed with the
equipment. DB Should have minimum two 32A/16A (As per requirement) extra
circuits with MCCB/MCB for future uses like integration equipment, etc.

16.4 AHU System and Internal HVAC ducting & Exhaust system
a) Floor mounted Air handling units in double skin construction having 48mm
thick PUF Sandwich Panels at a static pressure of 120 mm WG complete
with backward curved blower, TEFC blower motor suitable for operation on
415 V +_ 10%, 3 Phase, 50 Hz, A.C. Supply complete with 8 Rows copper
tube, aluminium finned DX cooling coil, prefilter, micro-vee filters, Heater
Bank, Mixing Box complete with drain connections with anti-vibration
mounting and with VFD compatible motor.
b) The contractor or associated contractor for HVAC work shall execute all the
HVAC ducting, return air grill and interconnections for supply and return air
inside the modular OT.

c) The Internal ducting inside of the operation theatre should be done with duly
fabricated out of 20 SWG Aluminum sheet complete with flanges and
accessories such as GI suspenders and GI supports completely sealed
with Silicon sealant duly insulated with Aluminum foil, 12 mm thick Nitrile
rubber, self-adhesive type insulation. Supply & return air cabinet should be
made from SS304 and should be from the same manufacturer of ceiling
and wall panel. The exhaust air cabinets should be openable and
cleanable. These cabinets should have suction from bottom and top. Also,
it should match perfectly with the ceiling system aesthetically. Distribution
of exhaust air volume should be divided in such a way to maintain the
required pressure within the theatre without causing turbulence. Design
flow rate shall not be less than 1000 cu.m/ hour. Distribution of exhaust air
volume shall be divided between fluf strainers to maintain the required
pressure within the theatre without causing turbulence. The work shall be
carried out as per CPWD Specifications for HVAC works-2017

d) Wall mounted electrical control panel comprising of contactors, starters for

Heaters, AHU Fan motor, MCCB for Condensing unit, complete with
indication lights etc. including power cabling, control wiring and GI plate
earthing.

16.5 Medical Gas Line Installation

The contractor should ensure that all works carried out are to the
recommendations made in the HTM 2022/NFPA 99C / DIN. Contractor should
provide Oxygen, Air, Vacuum, Carbon Dioxide and Nitrous Oxide supply to
Operation Theatres from the existing lines terminated outside the OT.
Contractor shall be responsible for supply, installation, testing and
commissioning of complete MGPS system inside the operation theatre
including Distribution piping, Pendants, Outlets, and other essential
accessories. Terminal units should be gas specific and only accept the correct
medical gas probe. Gas specific components shall be pin indexed to ensure
that a correct gas specific assembly is accepted. Each terminal unit should be

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 702

identified by the appropriate recognized name or symbol, colour, coding and

shape as per HTM 02-01 /NFPA 99C. Copper pipes should be of solid drawn,
seamless, deoxidized, non-arsenical, half hard, tempered and degreased,
delivery capped at both ends. The pipes should be accompanied with
manufacturers test certificate for the physical properties & chemical
composition. The copper pipe should be medical grade and comply with
Indian/International standards. Fittings should be made of copper and suitable
for a working Pressure of up to 17 bar and especially made for brazed socket
type connections.
16.5.1 Isolation Panel System (20KVA)

Isolation Panel System of minimum 20 kVA capacity shall be provided for every
operation theatre to ensure the safety of staff and patient. System shall have
isolators provided through leakage relays etc., if required, according to IEC
recommendation. This unit shall be EN/European CE /UL /BIS /FDA /ETL
listed/certified. These systems are to be commissioned by specialists. It shall
be medical grade Isolation panel. It shall have fault detection feature. It shall
be compliant to CEI 64-8/IEC 60364-7-710/BS 7671 Standard as amended up
to the last date of receipt of tenders. It shall be compact and mountable on
wall. The IPS shall be able to integrate with HIS/, and Surgeon Control Panel
as standard. Isolation panel system shall have facility to detect fault of leakage
current for each circuit (Minimum 12 circuits) and same shall be integrated with
touch screen control panel of MOT and alarm status shall be displayed on the
touch screen control panel. The double frontal window shall be mechanically
interlocked. The panel shall have forced ventilation system.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 703

C-17 NURSE CALL SYSTEM

17.0 Technical Specifications of Nurse Call System

17.1 The brief scope of work shall include Planning, design & preparation of
drawings, supplying, installation, testing & commissioning of Nurse Call System
for 100 bedded Hospital. Total system has to be commissioned with required
hardware, software, licenses and other items to have a fully functional complete
Nurse Call System. If any item is required to make the scheme functional, is not
specifically mentioned in the scope and specifications, the same is deemed to be
included within the scope of this tender. These technical specifications shall be
read along with the General Conditions for all E&M works given under subhead C-
B.

a) Nurse Call System is the communication and automation system allowing

patients to call nurses from their rooms, patient toilets and bath rooms, and
emergency short stay units; the original addresses of these calls (room, bed if
applicable) are indicated by Over Door Lights, and sent to the nurses as alerts
on Nurse Control Panels at service desks, and service performance shall be
logged and reported by service nurses. It shall increase the quality of the
services provided by nurses by allowing the patients to reach the nurses quickly
and easily when they are in need, while also reducing alarm fatigue experienced
by nurses through intelligent call routing; the call scan be configured to go to any
specific nurse or group of nurses depending on the call type or location.

b) Assist Call System is the communication and automation system that allows
nurses in a patient room, when they need assistance from other personnel, to
call for such assistance. The origin of this call is indicated to auxiliary staff or
to other nurses through Over Door Lights, and as text messages on Nurse
Control Panels at service desks, and service performance is logged and
reported through the smart cards.

c) Code Blue System, is the communication and automation system that shall
allow health care personnel to make emergency code calls from all internal
phones of the hospital, Room Control Units in patient rooms and the Emergency
Service Consultation Panel that can be found in the emergency ward, when
Basic Life Support (CPR) is required in the hospital. The address of this call is
indicated and response performance is logged and reported by the smart cards
of the Code Blue team personnel. In case of respiratory or cardiac arrest, the
Code Blue System increases the success rate of Basic Life support by
immediately directing the expert personnel to perform resuscitative efforts on
the patient in any location within the hospital. In addition, it aims to increase the
service quality by recording incident and response data of all Code Blue calls
andgenerating various performance reports.

d) All devices and materials that constitute the system shall be new and standard
products. The products used must not have an EOL (End of Life)
announcement declared. The company shall commit to continueproduction of all
devices and components used in a system for a minimum of 5 years after the
implementation of the system.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 704

e) Equipment shall be placed according to types of patient bed areas, location of

nurse desks and architectural parts within the hospital. A bed side calls unit and
a patient hand set shall be placed with each bed in the hospital and each short
stay unit in emergency service unit.

f) A pull-cord call unit shall be placed in every WC/ bath room used by patients in
the hospital.

g) A nurse control panel shall be placed on in-patient service nurse desks,

emergency service short stay unit nurse desks and other nurse desks to be
designated. The Panel shall be connected to a UPS supply. The panel shall be
located in a place that attracts attention, provides readability and is accessible
by touching the screen in the event of audible and text alerts. The panel shall
be able to make VoIP calls to other VoIP enabled devices within the nurse call
system.

h) Emergency Service Consultation Panels shall be wall mounted in the

emergency service unit; the Panel shall be mounted in a place that attracts
attention, provides readability and is accessible by touching the screen in the
event of audible and text alerts.

i) The system shall have full integration with the Fire Detection System, IP-
EPABX and , (Building Management System).

17.2 Nurse Call System consists of Room Control Units, Over Door Lights,
patient handsets, patient Bed side Call Units, patient Pull-cord Call Units, Nurse
Control Panels, personnel smart cards and hospital call system software designed
to perform as stated above.

17.2.1 Room Control Units

a) Room Control Units shall have a structure capable of controlling the call
system within each room. Its outer casing shall be made of non- flammable
PC-ABS- FR material.
b) Room Control Units shall send all calls and system information including
time stamps and origin addresses of all Bed Side Call Units, patient hand set
and Pull-cord Call Units within the room to the hospital call server using the
static hospital call server’s IP address.
c) Room Control Units shall store all calls and system information they receive
until a verified connection is made with a server. The RoomControl Unit shall
store at least 100 records; when the connection is made, it shall
automatically send the records it holds to the server.
d) Room Control Units shall have SIP (Session Initiation Protocol) support and
allow speech communication.
e) Voice calls made over the Room Control Unit shall be able to be recorded
over the server based on request. These records may be reviewed on
the logs of the server interface.
f) Room Control Units shall be able to work directly with a Nurse Control Panel
without any issue if there is no connection with a server.
g) The connected devices may be monitored on the Room Control Unit. The
main screen of the room control unit shall be able to show which patient
made the call. For observation, rooms with multiple beds, for identification,

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 705

a separate Alert Lamp per bed shall be provided.

h) The unit shall be mounted on the wall to allow easy access by the personnel
in the room and to prevent easy disassembly (shallow or flush montage
options).
i) The panel may perform general room control by reading personnel smart
cards, initiating and terminating Blue/White/Red Emergency Code calls and
Consultation calls, and giving visual and audio alerts about the call status.
j) Room Control Units may read personnel smart cards, preventingintervention
of unauthorized persons.
k) Room Control Units shall have an LCD touch screen of at least 5” and when
health care personnel enter the room and use their smart card on the panel,
their name shall appear on the screen. The LCD screen shall show the
information about the active calls in the room.
l) There shall be Code Blue, Code White, Code Red and Consultation buttons
in a non-screen Emergency Codes menu and these buttons shall only be
able to be used by activation via personnel card. Without using a personnel
card, no call shall occur even if these buttons are touched.
m) There shall be a non-screen menu for any other feature functions to be
configured at the request of the hospital, such as room cleaning or room
service buttons, reminders, rounding timers, etc.
n) There shall be a task list feature option, displaying task lists for personnel.
This feature shall provide a centralized way for personnel to track the
completion of daily, weekly, and special tasks.
o) The responding nurse shall note that he/she has arrived in the room by
holding (his/her) card to the Room Control Unit’s built-in RFID card reader.
p) Nurses may perform routine observation procedure by signing into the room
through an on-screen option and showing their card when there is no active
call by any patient. The Over Door Light shall remain green for as long as
the nurse is present in the room (as while responding to regular calls), and
shall turnoff when the nurse signs out of the room with her card. This is a
condition for a routine observation and there is no call made, but the
entrance and exit time stamps and nurse identification are logged on the
server.
q) Healthcare personnel may initiate emergency code calls (code blue, code
white, and code red) by using their smart cards on the Room Control Unit.
r) Termination of emergency code status calls shall be done by the relevant
team personnel holding their personnel cards to the Room Control Unit.
s) Power supply shall be 220VAC or PoE. It shall be supplied by an
uninterrupted power source (UPS).
t) Nurse calls made shall be logged on the hospital call server and shall be
directed to IOS/ Android-based smart phones and defined Nurse Control
Panels.
u) When the nurse enters the room, the presence information shall be applied
to update the status of all active calls within the room.
v) Room Control Units shall be IP based and each room shall be connected to
the network through an independent line. Each Room Control Unit shall have
an independent IP address.
w) All connections inside and outside the room shall be made with standard Cat
6/6E UTP cable and terminations shall be RJ 45 with international standard
B type connection.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 706

x) Room Control unit comprises of touch screen LC colour graphic display for
displaying all details (Active /offline call). The system shall be able to do
internal & external call or conference call, full duplex speaker phone in
brilliant sound quality & inbuilt microphone. The Room control unit shall be
able to communicate to own or other nurse station, hospital staff, code blue
and other custom emergency codes through screen menu. Patient
information from HIS (Hospital information system) should be monitored on
the server system through the corresponding bed icon on screen. If desired,
the information about the patient can be edited through the touch screen.
The room terminal shall have inbuilt card reader for Nurse attending the
patient. The system shall be self-sufficient to share data to central Nurse
management station.

17.3 Over Door Light

a) LED technology shall be used in Over Door Lights. LED Indicators Module
at outside of each ward with ecofriendly LED. It shall warn with three main
colour red, green, blue, and combinations of these depending on the call
status of the room.

b) It shall consist of red, green, and blue colored warning lights. Upon request,
different color combinations for different calls with RGB matrix shall be
created.

c) In normal condition, no light shall be lit. If the patient makes a nurse call, a
red light shall be lit within 0.5 seconds. After the nurse call, when the nurse
makes an authorized card entry on the Room Control Unit, the light shall turn
green. If an Assist Call is made, the green light shall flash with 2 second
intervals. If a Consultation Call is made, the light shall flash red and green.

d) In blue and white emergency code cases, the blue light shall be lit, and shall
only be able to be terminated via authorized entry to the room control unit.

e) he Over Door Light shall give information by lighting in different colors based
on other non-nurse personnel presence in the room, white bydefault.

f) The outer casing of the Over Door Light shall be made of non-flammable
PC- ABS-FR materials.

g) Room Control Unit–Over Door Light connection shall be made with Cat 6/6E
UTP cable and RJ 45.

h) In situations where it is deemed necessary, lamps may be connected and

defined to light up showing the status of specific beds.

17.3.1 Bed Side Call Unit

a) The Bedside Call Unit shall be mounted on headboards where there are patient
headboards, or on the walls where it can be implemented within the system.

b) It shall be in communication with the Room Control Unit via an in-room

communication network.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 707

c) On its FRONT side there shall be: A “start call” button with Nurse symbol.

d) Backlight in order to give visual information about the call status and easy
visibility of the unit at night.

e) Audio alert feature notifying a successful or unsuccessful call attempt.

f) No DIP (Dual In-line Package) switch or similar method shall be used in the
function assignment for these buttons.

g) The Bedside Call Unit shall be made from non-flammable PC-ABS-FR

materials.

h) Its connection with the patient handset shall be easily established by connecting
via RJ45. It shall be protected against forcing and stretching.

i) A nurse call can be initiated via the patient handset nurse call button or the
call initiation button of the Bed Side Call Unit. These two buttons shall be
accepted by the system as equivalent. In the event that these buttons are
pressed.

j) If the unit is able to transmit the call to the Room Control Unit, the LED on the
unit shall flash with 1.0 second intervals. Call transmission information shall be
audibly notified to the patient.

k) If there is an error in call transmission, a continuous red light showing the error
status and shall only stop when the call termination button is pressed or room
control connection is made. Subsequent presses of the button shall trigger an
audio alert each time.

l) Its connection shall be made with Cat 6/6E UTP cable and RJ45.

17.3.2 Patient Handset Without Speech

a) The patient shall be able to inform to nurse. The handset shall be complete
with module & accessories as required for installation
b) There shall be a call button for the patient to initiate a call. It shall not need
an external power supply. Its connection shall be made via Cat 6/6E HF
cable and RJ 45. Patient hand set shall be made from nonflammable PC-
ABS-FR materials.

17.3.3 Patient Handset with Speech

a) The patient shall be able to speak directly to the nurses. This system allows
hospital staff to save time on service, prioritize critical cases, and comfort
patients through voice communication. The handset shall be complete with
module & accessories as required for installation.

b) It shall not need an external power supply. Its connection shall be made via
Cat 6/6E HF cable and RJ 45. Patient hand set shall be made from
nonflammable PC-ABS-FR materials.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 708

17.3.4 Pull-Cordcall Unit (WC / Bath Room):

a) It shall be in connection with the Room Control Unit via the in-room
communication network.

b) On its Front side, there shall be: A call pull-cord with minimum 1.5 m
length to serve as a call initiation button, A call termination button
(indicated by a green check mark symbol).

c) The product shall have minimum IP 55 protection class. Its connection

shall be made with Cat 6/6E UTP cable and RJ 45.

d) No DIP switch or similar method shall be used in function assignment

for these buttons. A priority WC Emergency Call shall start when the
cord is pulled.

17.3.5 Nurse Control Panel

a) The Nurse Control Panel shall have a minimum 7” touch screen (based
on preference) and include its own integrated phone handset.
b) The Nurse Control Panel may be used to monitor the status of every
connected room, including device errors, call and alarm status.
c) The origin room and bed information of all active nurse calls,
emergency code calls, assist calls, and nurse presences shall be
shown with an audio-visual alert along with the call type.
d) On screen call points shall have notifications of relevant icons, colors,
and tones according to their call status.
e) Calls shall be shown by priority; in cases where two equally important
calls are made, the oldest (chronologically) shall be shown first.
f) When a nurse is present in a room, the nurse presence in that room
shall be shown.When a call is cancelled the call alert on screen shall be
cancelled.
g) Time and error information for situations when the energy supply of the
panel is cut or there is no network connection, shall be recorded on
hospital call server and shall be sent to relevant technical personnel’s
Android-based/IOS smart phones, as error message.
h) Functions of the panel shall be routed to another Nurse Control Panel if
there are no on-call nurses assigned to the first panel (Night mode).
This should be done manually on the panel or automatically through
hospital information system integrations.
i) There shall be voice call feature between the panels. The nurse may
adjust the volume level. The nurse may activate or deactivate the night
mode and redirecting features. The panel shall be structured to allow
speech communication with any room or patient.
j) At some locations, Nurse Control Panels may be configured as parallel
observation points. In this case, the same calls shown on the main
nurse panel shall be shown on the secondary “mirror” Nurse Control
Panel.
k) If a panel needs to be changed, the new panel only needs to be given
the old panel’s IP information, and this shall be enough to configure the
panel. The other settings shall automatically be configured from the
server.
l) Nurse Station comprises of touch screen LC colour graphic display for
displaying all details, Querying receiver for speaking discretely,
Microphone and loudspeaker for hands-free speech (incl. volume
control), full duplex speaker phone in brilliant sound quality & inbuilt
microphone. The Nurse station shall have access to patient

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 709

information, In case of emergency, shall have facility to jump as many

calls to other Nurse station. All call indications follow the priority and
must display the exact location of the calls.
m) The system shall be self-sufficient to share data to central Nurse
management station.

17.3.6 Central Monitoring Unit

a) The Central Monitoring Unit shall be web based monitored that shall observe all
activities such as nurse calls, code blue (and any custom emergency codes),
assist calls, and nurse presences throughout the hospital. It shall show picture
IDs of personnel that are present in-patient rooms. Different parameters (call
type, department, and floor info) can be filtered based on needs. In this way, the
focus of health personnel can be directed and reaction and intervention times
can be minimized.

b) The Central Monitoring Unit is a web-based licensed monitoring software able to

be viewed from a computer or television screen, typically placed in a central
location.

c) The Central Monitoring Unit shall display real time status of all or selected call
types originating in all or selected areas of the hospital.

d) The Central Monitoring Unit shall display these calls with icons and
colors indicating their type. The time elapsed since the initiation of the call and
the time stamp of the call shall also be visible.

e) Nurse and Personnel presences shall be displayed on a separate part of the

screen. The names of responding personnel as recorded on the hospital call
server shall be shown as along with relevant timeinformation.

f) If uploaded to the hospital call server, pictures of the personnel may be

associated with their smart cards, and these pictures will be shown on the
Central Monitoring Unit as well.

17.3.7 Server:

Server Shall be available to control the system. The server shall be able to
provide log reporting through a web interface and shall have option to
integrate system throughout the building.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 710

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 711
C-18 Water supply System & R,O, Plants with water cooler
18.0 Technical Specifications Water Supply and Hydropneumatic
System

18.1 The brief scope of the work shall include Planning, design & preparation of
drawings, supplying, installation, testing & commissioning of Water Supply
system equipment including Pump sets, Panels, VFDs, Cabling and other
connected items required to supply, and to install a complete Water Supply
System. If any item required to make the scheme functional and is not
specifically mentioned in the scope and specifications, the same shall be
deemed to have been included within the scope of this tender. These
technical specifications shall be read along with the General Conditions for
all E&M works given under subhead C-B.

18.2 The water supply to the hospital campus shall be met from the local
Municipality /Tube Wells/ Bore wells and treated water from STP.The water
so received shall be treated to make it fit for human consumption, hospital
needs.

18.3 List of Codes and Manuals:

The following IFcodes of practice and design manuals shall be referred:

i. CPWD specifications
ii. National Building Code 2016.

18.4 Water supply system

i. Contractor shall consider water capacity for half day on terrace over
head tank and one-and-a-half-day capacity for underground water
tank.

ii. As per water demand, minimum 3 number of bore wells with

each bore well having a yield of 250 LPM or more. Accordingly,
Stainless Steel vertical Submersible Pump sets of minimum 250
LPM discharge at 100 m head shall be provided (3 Nos. working
+ 1 No. Standby).

iii. Bore well water shall be fed into underground raw water tank,
where, it shall be treated with Water treatment Plant (WTP).
Treated water shall be fed into underground firefighting tank and
overflown water from firefighting tank shall be stored in the
underground treated water tank.

iv. Domestic overhead tank shall be fed through hydropneumatic

system from treated water tank.

v. Treated water from STP shall be stored in underground flushing

water tank.Flushing overhead tank shall be fed through
hydropneumatics system from underground flushing water tank.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 712

vi. Centralized RO Plants shall be provided at terrace level to cater

for drinking and Operation Theatre demands. Separate normal
filtered water shall be supplied to all drinking water points as well.

vii. Water coolers in each floor shall be supplied with R.O. water
from R.O. plants, under gravity or automatic pumping system.

a) Under Ground/Overhead Water Storage:

The storage capacity of Underground water tanks shall be equal to

minimum 1.5 day requirement in the Domestic. The Over Head Tanks at
Terrace level shall be half day capacity. The storage capacity of firefighting
tanks shall be as per NBC-2016.Only treated water shall be used for
firefighting, HVAC.

b) Water Supply System

Water requirements shall be calculated on the basis of present acceptable

standards, references from various sources such the National Building
Code of India, Public Health Manuals, Ministry of Environment, Forests
Guidelines, and Specification. STP Treated Water shall be used for flushing
system and gardening.

Minimum requirements of various pump sets:

Application Type of Pump set Qty. Minimum

S.No. Discharge/He
ad of each
pump set
1. Domestic Stainless steel, 2 Nos. 200 LPM at
Hydropneumatic Centrifugal pump Working 65 m
pump set set, horizontal + 1No.
type, driven with Standby
individual VFD
2. Flushing Stainless steel, 2 Nos. 125 LPM at
Hydropneumatic Centrifugal pump Working 65m
pump set set, horizontal + 1No.
type, driven with Standby
individual VFD
3. Gardening Stainless steel, 1 No. Suitable
pump set Centrifugal pump Working Capacity of
set, horizontal type + 1No. pump sets
Standby shall be
designed for
horticulture
purposes.
4. Bore well pump Stainless steel, 3 Nos. 250 LPM at
sets Vertical type Working 100m
Submersible pump + 1No.
set, Standby

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 713

18.5 Hydro pneumatic system

Supply, installation, testing & commissioning of Hydro-pneumatic system

(minimum 400 LPM for domestic use and 250 LPM for flushing) with
vertical /Horizontal inline Multistage booster centrifugal pump-motor
sets, suitable for operation on 415 volts, 50 Hz, 3 phase AC supply, with
pneumatic balancing tank, mounting skid, foot valves, G.I. suction &
discharge pipes, fittings, brass / GM valves, C.I. Strainers suction head,
etc. Each pump shall have TEFC 1450 rpm, three phase electric motor.
The scope includes pressure switches, VFD based control panel with
starters, protections, relays, cables, interlocking with level & pressure
switches. Suction lines, all connections etc. shall be covered under this
head. Delivery pipelines from pump sets to overhead tanks and other
places shall be carried out under Civil Plumbing sub-Head. Hydro
pneumatic pump sets shall be provided for domestic water supply and
flushing water supply. Panels shall be , Compatible with adequate IOs.

18.6 Pump-Motor Set

18.6.1 Design & Construction Features

Depending on the design considerations, either inline vertical multistage

or horizontal type centrifugal pump shall be provided. Variable frequency
drive shall be provided and connected to all the installed pump sets. The
pump motor set shall be suitable for 3 Phase, 415 V, 50 Hz. AC power
supply. The pump shall be installed with isolation gate/ butterfly valve, non-
return valve, etc.

The pump shall be capable of developing required total head at rated

capacity. Impeller shall be closed type and shall be dynamically balanced.
The pump shall have non overloading characteristics.

The casing shall be of rigid construction and shall have side suction and
side delivery in case of vertical multistage pump and side suction and
central delivery in case of horizontal centrifugal pump.

The pump shall have small length suction and delivery pipe connections
Impeller and shaft shall be of Stainless Steel SS 316.

Shaft sleeves shall be provided to protect shaft from any damage. Bearing
shall be ball or roller type. Mechanical seal shall be provided to avoid any
leakage.

Pump set shall be mounted on a concrete foundation, projecting at least

30 cm above finished floor level. The pumps base shall be set on an anti-
vibration pad. All the parts of the pumps that are in contact with water shall
be hot dip galvanized or of stainless-steel construction.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 714

Pumps shall be so selected that the design duty point is within 5% of the
maximum efficiency point. Shut off head shall be 120% of duty point head.

All pumps and motors shall be of minimum vibration and noise level during
operation. Facilities shall be provided to prevent starting of pumps when
the water is at low or high level in the tank. An indicator for this low/high
level alarm shall be provided. Facilities to select which pump to be duty
pump and standby pump shall be provided and be interchangeable and
this should be manual/automatic.

Leakage from pump gland shall be drained to the nearest floor waste.

Pump shall be driven by directly coupled squirrel cage induction motor

having TEFC enclosure, IP 55 protection and Class F insulation. Pump
motors above 7.5 kW shall be equipped with a spacer coupling which
allows changing of shaft seals without removing the motor.

18.6.2 Inspection & Testing

Material Test certificates, Hydraulic test certificates of pump components,

VFD, Control panel and other electrical accessories shall be furnished for
the approval of Engineer-in-charge.

18.6.3 System Description

The system operation will be such that the initial small water demand shall
be met by the charged diaphragm pressure vessel. When the water
demand continues, the system pressure will dip to a pre-set pump cut-in
point then the lead pump starts to operate at reduced speed through the
variable speed drive. However, if the system pressure is still below the pre-
set value, the controller continuously increases pump speed to meet the
system demand. When the lead pump is not able to meet the system
pressure at full speed, the second pump also starts to operate.

At peak demand, all the pumps shall operate.Similarly, if there is a drop

in water demand, the lead pump speed starts to reduce, then
standby/second pumps cuts-off, followed by stopping of the lead pump.

The variable frequency drive pumping system shall maintain a constant

pressure regardless of the system demand. This shall be achieved by
continuously varying the motor speed of the duty pump according to the
demand up to a maximum designed capacity. Alternatively, pumping
system shall be with fixed speed drive motor. By getting the signal from
microprocessor based control panel through pressure transmitter, pumps
will operate in sequence & vice a versa. The frequency converter shall be
linked to the motor of the duty pump for continuous speed adjustment and
ultimately the water delivery shall be maintained at constant pressure at
the pre-set value.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 715

The closed diaphragm pressure vessel shall be of polyethylene material

with a pressure gauge and isolating valve. The interior shall be of non-
toxic lining suitable for use with potable water. The vessel shall be
manufactured to conform to ASME pressure vessel code/ standards.

The system shall be under the control of a microprocessor based control

panel. A pressure transmitter shall detect the pressure at the delivery
manifold and feedback to the microprocessor control panel via control
circuit. The system shall incorporate a frequency converter or frequency
converter motors on the pumps and the pressure transmitter shall register
the actual pressure on the discharge side.

18.6.4 Control Panel

The motor control panel shall be equipped with all the necessary electrical
components including a microprocessor control unit and a frequency
drive. The control panel and the microprocessor shall cover the followings
functions.

Flexibility and simplicity in allowing the necessary re-adjustment of the

pumping system pre-set delivery pressure to operate the pumps within the
specified maximum and minimum delivery ranges. Automatic changeover
of the pumps to be controlled by the microprocessor which dictates
the duty and standby pumps. In the event of control failure, the pumps
shall be able to be started/ stopped manually at the local panel by means
of pressure switches.

The microprocessor control panel shall be able to cut-off the pumping

system when excess pressure is registered in the discharge common
manifold. The system shall have the capability of receiving input signal in
case of reduced water level in suction tanks and shall have control
mechanisms to prevent the pumps from running dry. Automatically
starting the pumps when the water level is back to normal.

In case of lead pump failure due to motor overload, the standby pump
shall be switched on automatically. Alarm signal is displayed on the LCD
Display unit and alarm lights are to be activated. Functions to limit the
number of start/ stop of pumps per hour.

18.6.5 Operation of Control panel

i. Auto mode
The desired delivery pressure within the range specified, shall be set at
the control panel. The pressure transmitter shall detect the delivery
pressure continuously and give feedback to the microprocessor which will
control the variable speed drive frequency converter for speed control of
the duty pump. When the demand increases, the subsequent pumps in
the system will be activated to boost up the pressure. Ultimately the duty
pump set shall be operated fully automatically to maintain the delivery
pressure constantly at the desired set value.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 716

ii. Manual Mode

The on/ off function of the pump shall be manually adjusted at the
microprocessor provided at the local control panel. Frequency Control By-
pass Mode shall be provided. All the pumps shall be started/ stopped
automatically with the pump output at fixed maximum rotational speed. All
the control and protection functions shall remain active. The cut in/ cut out
pressure shall be internally calculated by the microprocessor for each
pump.

iii. Electrical Component

All circuit breakers, thermal overloads and contactors shall be of as per

the preferred makes specified in the tender documents. Electrical supply
to the pump controller shall be protected using an isolating circuit breaker.

iv. Method of Starting

The panel shall be built to start the pumps in suitable starting modes.

v. Pump Pressure Vessel

Diaphragm type pressure vessels shall be provided. They shall be

incorporated into the system so that during normal operation, the pump
needs to start after 30 seconds of pump pressure vessel switching off in
order to prevent the pump hunting.

The pressure vessel shall be of adequate capacity to accommodate a

considerable fluctuation in water demand by the system with minimum
start/ stop cycles of the pumps. The vessel shall be constructed of steel
plate built as per ASME Standards for Unfired Pressure Vessel. A rubber
diaphragm shall be provided in the vessel for separating the water and pre-
charged nitrogen. The pre-charged pressure shall be adjustable and
charging port with non-return device shall be provided. The adjustable cut-
in and cut-off pressure unit for the pumps shall be built-in at the vessel to
suit the system.

vi. Suction and Delivery Pipe, Fittings, Flanges & Valves

All suction, delivery and header pipes shall be GI & shall conform to IS:
1239, medium duty. Fittings shall be as per the pipe thickness. All pipes
shall have flanges connection. All hardware shall be zinc plated. The
system shall be equipped with suction & delivery valves as flanged valves.
On suction side ball/gate valve shall be provided, while on delivery side
ball/ butterfly valves shall be provided. Also, spring operated check valves
shall be provided on delivery side of each pump & on delivery header. In
case of negative suction, foot valve shall be provided for each pump
suction or suction header. Flexible bellows shall be provided on suction &
delivery side of each pump.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 717

vi. Accessories

The system shall be provided with all accessories such as base plate,
mounting pads, foundation bolts, foot valves, pressure gauge, pressure
switches, pressure transmitter, level indicator, isolation valve for pressure
vessel, etc. All accessories required for proper and safe operation shall
be furnished with the pumps.

18.7 Reverse Osmosis(R.O) Plant

18.7.1 R.O. Plant for Drinking water

Minimum 2 Nos. 500 LPH capacity, Reverse Osmosis Plant shall be

provided at terrace and interconnecting the supply lines and delivery lines.

The R.O. plant shall comprise of R.O. High Pressure Feed Pumps (HPP),
RO Raw Water Pumps (RWP) of Vertical multistage centrifugal type and
suitable head to generate permeate flow as per requirements. The pump
casing and impeller construction shall be of SS-316. The motor shall be
TEFC with minimum IE-2 efficiency suitable for operation on supply of
415Volts, 3 Phase, 50 Hz. A.C. Supply. The pump shall be supplied
complete with base channel, coupling foundation bolts, pressure gauge,
valves at inlet and outlet of each pump. One standby pump needs to be
considered for each type. Capacity of R.O Plants shall be selected based
on the functional requirement (RO water demand) as stated above within
minimum operating hours (preferably 8 hrs. /day).

It shall consist of Package type R.O. module capable of giving a net

treated water output as per requirement, Special Anti-sealant dosing
system consisting of suitable no. of Stainless-Steel tanks of capacity as
per requirement with a positive displacement diaphragm dosing pump
having variable flow rate, Micron cartridge filter (shall be made of FDA
compliant high quality poly propylene or some other suitable material)
suitable for a flow rate as per requirements.

CIP system (Cleaning in Place) consisting of SS tank with agitator

complete with inlet/outlet, drain overflow etc. along with SS pump of
capacity and cartridge filter of 10-micron, PH correction dosing system
consisting of one SS tank with a positive displacement diaphragm dosing
pump having variable flow rate. All the interconnecting pipelines shall be
of SS 316 with press fittings.

Tank shall be provided with water flow meter at inlet & outlet, inlet& outlet
valves, overflow, drain connection. Centralized control panel made out of
CRCA sheet min. 2mm thick having main contactors for all pumps.

All control and power cabling shall be provided. Earth leads shall be
connected to the structural earthing points available at the terrace. An
emergency stop push button shall be provided in the panel.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 718

18.7.2 R.O. Plant for Dialysis Units

Design shall be done for arriving at the capacity of R.O. Plant

for Dialysis Unit including storage tank, piping etc. R.O. water
to be used for the preparation of dialysis fluid shall be taken
from the hospital drinking water. A-two stage or double R.O.
plant, shall be provided in the dialysis room, shall remove
pathogens i.e., inorganic and organic solutes, microorganisms,
viruses, endotoxins, salts and metals from the inlet water.
TDS of filtered water shall be less than 10 PPM. Used water
shall be connected to a piping system, leading to Effluent
treatment plant. The work shall be complete in all respects and
as per the directions of the Engineer-in-Charge.

18.8 Portable Water Coolers:

Minimum 8 Nos. Portable Water Coolers of following

specifications shall be provided in the corridors, canteen of
hospital building.

Storage capacity : 80 Litres

Cooling capacity : 40 Litres/ hour

MOC of outer panel : SS/ Pre

coated GI sheet MOC of water tank :

Stainless Steel 304 gradeDrain Pan :

Stainless Steel 304 grade

No. of Faucets : Brass chrome plated 2 Nos;

1No. for Cold water, 1No. for Normal water

Compressor : Hermitically sealed

Refrigerant : R134A

Thermal Insulation :

PUF Temperature range :

10oC – 25oC

Temperature Control : Controlled through Thermostat.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 719

C-19 NON – Medical Equipments

19.1 CSSD and TSSU Equipments:

The Techinical Specifications of Equipments are given below:

(1) Double Door Horizontal Rectangular Steam Sterilizer (500 – 600

Litres with Accessories):

(A) Operating parameter

• Operating Pressure 34 PSI
• Operating Temperature 134°C
• Vacuum 20-24” Hg
(B) Quality compliance
• NABH Norms Compliance
• BIS 3829 Part 1
• Indian BD Test: Air Removal & Steam Penetration Test
Compliance
• European BD Test: EN-285 (EN ISO 11140-1+4 7 KG Test)
Compliance
• American BD Test: AAMI/ANSIST79 (ISO 11140-1+5 4 KG Test)
Compliance
• Biological Testing
• Test Strip all Classes
(C) Features required
• Single Sheet Chamber Fabrication
• Gasket Groove for Silicon Gasket long life
• Maximize Loading Capacity design
• Minimize Electric, Water and maintenance cost
• Completely Pneumatic Valve Control System
• Sterilizer Sealing with Teflon / Silicon or better material for long
service life
(D) Chamber:
• Triple Walled Rectangular design
• SS 316 quality heavy duty chamber design
• Single Sheet Chamber Design for long working life
• Maximum Chamber utilization by minimum curb design.
• Mirror Polish surface for preventing water deposit
• Chamber design with 2 % Slope for full draining of the condensate
• Baffle For effective distribution of steam throughout in the chamber
& to avoid the entering steam from directly hitting onto the load.
• Front Panel S.S. 304 for Controlling and Operational Parameter
Display by HMI and Gauges.
(E) Jacket:
• SS 304 quality heavy duty Jacket design
• 40-50 mm jacket for maximum storage of steam

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 720

• Resin Bonded High Density insulation for minimize thermal loss.

• Heavy gauge S.S. 304 insulation covering
(F) Boiler:
• High Pressure Boiler with thermal insulation for heat loss recovery.
• Dual site heating element one for working and other for emergency
planning (Single Side Heating Element)
• Dual sensor low water cut off device for heaters extra precautions.
• St. Steel Water Level Indicator with graduation marking
• Stainless Steel Heating Element
(G) Door:
• Hinge Type Door.
• Door made of SS 316
• Flat Door Design inside for maximum space utilization.
• Heavy Duty Door Design
• Door with Gasket Slot for long service life
• High Accuracy Mechanical Door Safety inside door Plate
• Silicon & Teflon Sealing Door Plate
• Joint less Silicon Door Gasket
• Heat Loss Insulation Door
• Special Covering for preventing burning issue
• S.S. 304 radial arms duly polished
• Smooth operating door
(H) Stand:
• Square / Round Heavy-Duty Stand
• Powder Coated
• Height adjuster shoe for Label setting.
• Control panel:
• Programmable Logic Controller
• Touch Screen Panel (HMI)
• Fully Auto & Manual Control System for Emergency use.
• Emergency Stop Button
• Panel with Siemens/Schneider/L&T product design.
• Dual Pressure Control System
(J) Vacuuming system:
• Water Ring Type Vacuum Pump with 20”-24”Hg vacuum capacity
• Stainless Steel 304 Condenser for stem condensate
• S.S. 304 Vacuum Pipeline
(K) Online feeding system:
• High Pressure online water feeding pump
• Water Feeding without distribution of Pressure & Temperature.
• Back-to-Back Continuously Sterilizer operation
• Heating Element Safety Device
(L) Fresh air supply:
• HEPA Filtered air supply accuracy .3 Microns.
• Hot Air supply by Jacketed forced convection System
• Pneumatic Control Air Supply.
• S.S. 304 Pipeline

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 721

(M) Pneumatic control system:

• Pneumatically actuated angle valves with threaded connections.
• Jacket to Chamber steam controlling
• Vacuum Line Control
• Exhaust Line Controlling
• Fresh Air Injecting to Chamber
• Online Water Feeding
• Auto water Line Control
(N) Sterilizer sealing
• Door Sealing with joint less Silicon rubber gasket
• Boiler Plate sealing with Teflon Gasket
• All Pipeline connector seal with Teflon or “O”ring
• Low Water cut off device sealing with Teflon Gasket
• Water Level Glass Gauge sealing with dye mold silicon rubber
(O) Automation software features:
• 7 Standard program and unlimited recipe designable
• 3 label passwords protected controlling system
• Online Trends of operational parameter display in screen panel
• Bowie Dick Test, Vacuum Leak Testing and all parameter manual
testing facility
• Process control valve operation display
• User ID and Institutional detail display and printing facility
• Fault Diagnostic system available in TFT Display.
• Operation Data recording facility.
• Inbuilt Real Time Clock with Date & Time Function.
• Batch Printing Facility. With facility to save the last cycle data.
• Cloud monitoring System
(P) Inbuilt Accessories:
• S.S. 316 Pressure Gauge range 0 to 60 psi with accuracy ± 0.5%
• S.S. 316 Compound Gauge range -30 to 60 psi with accuracy ±
0.5%
• S.S. 316 Temperature Gauge range 0 to 300°C with accuracy ±
0.5%
• High Accuracy Safety Valve with accuracy ± 3 PSI in entire range
• Door Locking Plate Accuracy ±1 PSI on set point of 5 PSI
• Thermostatic Control Steam Trap
• Bucket Type Float Valve for minimum steam loss and better
temperature.
• Thermostatic Steam Trap for jacket air removal
• Low Water Pressure Control System
• Low Air Pressure Control System
• Single Phase Preventer
• High Accuracy Control Pressure Switch for accurate pressure
control
• Door interlock to prevent simultaneous opening of both doors.
(Q) Mounting & control panel:
• M.S. Powder Coated Control Panel

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 722

• The sterilizer should be mounted on a Tubular M.S. Powder

Coated Stand
(R) Manual Control:
The control system should provide with Manual Control in case of
PLC failure. Here all process should be operated with the help of
Manual Control Switches.
(S) Quality Control:
Calibration Certificate of pressure, Temperature and Compound
Gauge Hydraulic Testing Report
(T) Test Report along with Sterilizer

•
Chamber Hydraulic Test Certificate
•
Jacket Hydraulic Test Certificate
•
Pressure Safety Valve
•
Vacuum Safety Valve
•
Door Plate Operating Accuracy
•
Pressure Gauge Accuracy Test Certificate
•
Compound Gauge Accuracy Test Certificate
•
Temperature Gauge Accuracy Test Certificate
(U) Quality Control Certificates:
• US FDA/European CE certified with four digit notified body
number / BIS 3829 Parts -1
• ISO Certificate
• ISO 13485:2016 Certificate
• CE Certificate
• IEC 61010-1:2010 Certificate
• ISO 14001:2015 Certificate
• ISO 45001:2018 Certificate
• BS EN ISO 17665-1:2006 Certificate
• BS EN 285:2015 Certificate
(V) Spare Parts with each Sterilizer:
• 3 Heating Element
• 2 Nos. Seamless Silicon Gasket
• 2 No. Pneumatic Control Valve
• 2 Nos. Pneumatic Control Valve
(W) Accessories (Optional)
• S.S. Material Un-loading Trolley 2 Nos. Each Sterilizer
• SS 304 Material Loading Carriage 1 No. Each Sterilizer
• Panel Mounted Printer
(2) Rapid Sterilizer (Flash Autoclave) Table Top Capacity 24 Ltr)
• Should be a class b Steam sterilizer with efficient vacuum & drying
system
• Should be fully microprocessor controlled high pressure rapid
sterilizer.
• Should have cycle suitable for wrapped, unwrapped, rubber, &
Prion & should have user defined cycle facility also.
• Should have test program : BD & Helix and leak test.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 723

• Should have design pressure ranging from -0.1 MPA to 0.3 MPA
• Designed temp upto 144 degree c
• Working temperature range of 105 to 138 Degree C.
• Should have cycle time between 20 min to 60 min depending upon
the load.
• Chamber Structure: Cylindrical , Horizontal
• Chamber Capacity: 24 Liters
• Chamber dimension not less than: 250mm *450mm
• Weight not more than 60 kgs
• Should have automatic door opening through press of a button
• Power Supply: 230 V/50 Hz
• Should have instant built in seperate steam generator.
• Should have LCD screen for display of Pressure , temperature,
time, running process ,error
• and alarm information.
• Should have built in printer to print the data during cycle operation.
• Should have protection device for over temp., for steam generator
& should have door safety interlock protection & chamber over
pressure protection.
• Chamber should be made of 304/316 S.S quality
• Should have three loading trays
• Should be European CE certified and as per directive 93/42/EEC
of MDD
• Chamber design should be as per PED directives/ ASME.
• should be as per ISO 9001:2015
(3) Washer disinfector 265 Liter. (12 DIN Basket 2 Door) with
accessories
• The washer disinfector should be suitable for cleaning and
disinfection of surgical instruments / goods. The process should
include pre-wash, detergent wash and hot water disinfection,
rinse and drying cycles.
• The unit should be suitable for electrical operation and would be
complete with water circulation pump, necessary valves &
fittings.
• It should be microprocessor based so as to ensure correct
program sequence and irregularities or deviations which are
displayed immediately.
• Chamber Capacity: Chamber capacity: Operational Volume
should be able to process minimum 12 DIN trays
(Approx480X250X50)with 6 levels in single process. Should
supply 12 Nos of standard Stainless-steel DIN trays. The
chamber should be made of S.S. 304 or S.S. 316 L quality with
electro polished washed surfaces. The chamber edges should
not have the pockets & folds so as to avoid bacterial growth. The
wash chamber should also be fitted with bright light for clear
visibility of the washing process.
• Washer should have following features:

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 724

• For shortest possible filling and draining phases, higher capacity

quick opening valves should be used so that short total process
time is achieved. The design should focus on saving the
environment through reduced consumptions of all utilities.
• Cleansable spray arms should be located at the top and bottom
of the chamber.
• Wash carts should be equipped with cleansable spray arms
between each shelf so
• as to facilitate water to reach all the surfaces which needs to be
cleaned.
• Injection wash carts should be automatically connected to water
and drying air in order to clean and dry the inside of the tubular
instrument.
• The drying air should be pre-heated.
• The washer should be equipped with independent temperature
monitoring and validation test port.
• Data interface RS232 should be available.
• All electrical components should be easily accessible for easy
service - ergonomic design.
• Washer should be equipped with audible alarm that alerts if error
code occurs.
▪ Double door should be automatic made of toughened glass for
see through

• &should facilitate the loading process. (Vertical sliding operating

door)
• The washer should have 3 dosing pumps (detergent, alkaline &
lubrication) for process chemicals, instrument lubricants /
enzymatic cleaners.
• The washer should perform:
• Pre-rinses with cold water.
• Main washes with hot water (60C) and detergent
• Final rinse with water (55C)
• Disinfection with hot water (85C)
• Unit to have LCD display and operating console to have
membrane key pad for durability or LCD touch screen display
• Unit should feature safety measures such as:
• Automatic door lock.
• Automatic temperature regulation.
• Electronic adjustment of water level.
• The unit should also have an interface as standard for an optional
batch printer.
• The washer disinfector should be supplied with universal rack,
minimum 4 level racks for instrument tray, full size instrument tray
as well as stop valves, anti- suction device and plastic water trap.
• Should ensure essential washing accessories.
• Standards & Norms:
1) Compliance to EN ISO 15883-1/2

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 725

2) Compliance to CE Medical Device 93/42/CEE

(4) ETO STERILIZER:

Capacity : 135 Ltr.
OPERATING PARAMETER
• Operating Period 8-10 hours.
• Operating Temperature 38°C -55°C
• Vacuum 10”Hg
QUALITY COMPLIANCE
• NABH Norms Compliance
• ISO 13485 & MDSAP
• Biological Test compliance
• Test Strip all Classes compliance
• Sterilization Tape and Indicator
• ELECTRONIC SAFETY STANDARD
• IEC 610102-010:2019 (Fourth Edition)
• IEC 610102-040:2040 (Fourth Edition)
• IEC 61326-1 (Edition 2.0):2012-07).
FEATURES
• Chamber body is made up of SS 304 with Electro polish.
• Door material is Aluminum (High grade).
• Pureto + powered with dexterous Automatic door locking unlike
any handle or radial door locking system.
• Food grade Silicon Gasket.
• Cartridge puncturing automatic inside chamber.
• Outer cover: SS 304.
• Vibration less, noise less, oil free vacuum pump.
• No need of compressed air.
• Powered with inbuilt steam generator.
• No need to pour water every time manually. System will suck water
form reservoir or from tap water (Note: we recommend DM water
only).
• Thermostat provided for external temperature safety.
• Powered with UPS for uninterrupted cycle.
• Online thermal printer for cycle printing.
• Castor wheel at bottom for easy movement.
• Complete cycle run under vacuum to avoid gas comes out from
chamber in any condition.
• Ergonomic and intuitive new generation 10’’ touch screen with
high resolution and user friendly easy operation.
• Visual guidance on touch screen to make operation simple.
• eRemote: Operator can operate PurEto through his Mobile,
Laptop or Computer having wifi PurEto powered with Inbuilt WiFi.
• No need of internet for WiFi connectivity. (WiFi connectivity
subject to its range.)
• Powered with eServer software via Ethernet for data logging
directly to computer.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 726

• Touch screen having facility with 21 CFR part II features like alarm
logging, alpha numeric password and under id setting.
• Data back up with online thermal printing & USB (optional).
• Temperature sensor for accurate measuring and controlling of
Temp. in the Chamber.
• Temperature controlled by PID to keep temperature within 2 C to
set point.
• Pressure sensor for measuring & controlling the pressure/
vacuum that the loading subjected to during removal & charging
of gas.
• Automation system powered with UPS (1 KAV) for uninterrupted
cycle.
• If any malfunction happen like pressure sensor, temperature
sensor, vacuum system, vacuum break failure display will give
massage on screen.
• Manual operation can possible with password protection in any
emergency.
• Password setting can be manage by customer.
• All action on touch screen need password access to avoid any
unwanted intervene.
• Minimum 3 hrs Aeration for removal of EO residue.
• System will also indicate if cartridge has lower quantity of gas or
not puncture properly.
• Before EO injection system will check chamber leakage in every
cycle.
• System will give High temperature alarm if chamber temperature
is higher 3° C from set point

(5) Ultrasonic Cleaner (30 L) or more

• The units should be a compact free-standing bench model, with a
built-in tank manufactured from high-quality (304L) stainless steel
and a solid-state generator that sends ultrasonic (approx. 40 KHz)
impulses through wash water containing detergent and electrical
heating; microprocessor-controlled display with memory time and
temperature functions.
• The electrical energy should be transformed into sound waves by
transducers, fixed to the bottom of the tank.
• The tank should be made of solid stainless steel (304L).
• The ultrasonic cleaner should have a display and control which
could be easily seen and placed above any liquid for safety and
reliability. Degassing facility should be there.
• It should have digital read out timer and temperature setting
(temperature adjustable from 30 to 69 °C or more) monitoring.
• Capacity should be 30 L
• Should work on 230V, 50 Hz AC Supply.
• Ultrasonic cleaner should be supplied with Wire mesh basket of
suitable size & Stainless-steel lid.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 727

(6) REVERSE OSMOSIS TREATMENT PLANT:

• Production Capacity: 1000 Liter./Hr.
• Equipped with: - Pre-filtration of sediments (high grade)- Pre-
filtration for the removal of chlorides with granular activated
carbon-Pre-filtration of sediments.
• Complete with Stainless Steel AISI 304 structures assembled with
dual pressure pump, Controller process indicating display and
Tank of 5000 Liter.
(7) Heat Sealing Machine:
• Rotary heat sealers should provide validated sealing of
sterilization bags and clear- view pouches (paper/plastic
laminate).
• It should be microprocessor-controlled.
• The rotary heat sealer should give documentation of process
parameters via an integrated printer and could be integrated with
documentation system.
• The ergonomically design should be tilted forward for increased
user convenience
• and space saving installation.
• The sealer housing should be powder-coated and the control
panel is of the flat- membrane type, for easy cleaning.
• It should be operationally simple. When a bag is fed into one side
of the machine, the machine should start automatically or by
pushing a button, moving the bag through the machine, and
applying pressure and heat to form a perfect seal.
• The warm-up time should not exceed 30 seconds, and the feed
speed should be approx. 10 m/min.
• The temperature should be adjustable from 50–200°C with a
tolerance of 1% of the set value.
• It should be regulated by a heating element that is highly
sensitive to temperature fluctuations, assuring even temperature
and perfect seals.
• It should offer a number of additional features, including:
• Automatic start-up
• Reverse feed function in case an instrument accidentally enters
the sealing area
• Energy-saving stand-by mode
• Pre-set temperatures
• Re-settable counter function
• Rotary heat sealers come with a port and cable for connection of
the sealer to a PC

▪ and printer, enabling monitoring and documentation of the entire

process.
• Should have a protection mechanism against overheating and
start prevention at temperature deviations outside +/- 5° C
tolerance.
(8) Spray Gun Rinse:

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 728

• Spray gun rinse unit should be designed for connection to water

or compressed air, to use for assisted cleaning of pipettes,
catheters, cannulas, syringes etc.
• The spray-gun should include tubing and different tips and
nozzles for the various cleaning purposes, like
• syringes and cannulas with Record cone
• Measuring and blood pipettes
• Catheters and small pipes
• Drainage tubing
• Syringes and cannulas with Lure cone
• Spray jet for rapid instrument cleaning
• Bottles and Erlenmeyer flasks
• Water jet pumps for suction cleaning
All appliances are stored within easy reach on a special wall-
mounted rack (included).
• A special wall-mounted rack should be a part of standard supply
to store all appliances within easy reach.
• All tips should be able to get easily locked to the spray gun by
a safety cone.
• The gun grip is heat-insulated. The water/air pressure is
released, regulated and fully controlled by the spray-gun trigger
(adapted to a 1/2" connection).
(9) Multi-Roll Tape Dispenser
• Approx. Size (LxWxH) 260x60x120mm
• This dispenser for sterilizer tape should hold two reels of tape.
• The heavy-duty bottom plate should be fitted with anti-slip
rubber to prevent the dispenser from slipping when tape is torn
off.
• Should be made of high quality coated steel for long use.
(10) Manual Trolley Washer:
Use two stainless steel sinks for the manual cleaning process.
Sinks should be large and deep enough to immerse
completely any article processed
(11) Documentation Labeler:
• It should be integrated with Work flow management system
• The labeler should be 3–line for printing the following
information
• Person responsible for sterilization
• Load number
• Packaging content
• Sterilizer number
• Production date
• Expiry date
(12) Gauze Cutting Machine:
• Should be useful in cutting thickest of cotton gauze material
• Should consist of a cutting unit and a knife sharpening unit
• Blade size should be 200 mm.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 729

• Cutting Capacity should be 165 mm.

• Should work on 230V, 50 Hz power supply.
(13) Drying Cabinet:
• Should be automatic in operation
• Inner chamber should be made up of stainless steel and
outer chamber should be of epoxy painted CRCA sheets
• Should have heaters of minimum 2 KW
• There should be provision for setting the drying temperature
and drying time.
• Approximate Dimension: 475X370X 1500 mm (WxDxH)

(14) Work Table for Wet Goods for dirty area, Dry Goods for Clean
area, Goods for sterile area.
• Minimum Size. (LxWxH):1800x650x900 mm
• Stainless steel tables specially designed for working with dry
goods and for general purpose pre-storage.
• The work tables should have a rigid stainless-steel
construction which is easy to clean and without sharp edges
or corners.
• The table should be ergonomically worked up, should have
easy to clean robust matt finished (to reduce reflection of
light from the surface) with minimum sheet thickness of 1.5
mm stainless steel (304) worktop/surface to withstand and
carry out heavy work comfortably, either sitting or standing.
• The edges along the front, back and sides should be
reinforced and widened to 37 mm, giving a rigid
construction.
• They are welded together and polished at all corners for
good hygiene, as well as for the comfort and safety of the
staff.
• The worktop should be supported by a complete assembly
with full-length reinforcements along the front, back and
ends, welded together at the corners.
• The worktop and support frame are bonded together with
double-adhesive tape of a special, age-resistant quality to
give rigidity and noise abatement.
• The support frame should be mounted on a solid, stable floor
stand, made of polished stainless-steel square tubing, with
horizontal braces 300 mm above floor level. An adjustable10
cm (± 25 mm) plastic foot, easy to clean, is mounted on each
leg
• The provision is to be made for a sturdy 445 mm-wide
stainless-steel shelf

o (optional) can be mounted on the horizontal braces.

• Should be delivered ready for assembly

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 730

•All edges should be smooth and the rigid frame should be

made up of minimum 1.5 mm sheet thickness stainless steel
(304).
• There should be unobstructed access to the working space,
since the only supports needed along the front of the table
are the corner legs. This also facilitates cleaning of floors.
(15) Wash Stations with 2 sinks for dirty area
• Minimum Size (LxWxH): 2000x750x850 mm
• The worktop should be made of solid, bright-polished
minimum sheet thickness of

• 1.5 mm stainless steel (304) to withstand heavy-duty work

with wet instrument.
• Designed with an integrated 10 mm high edge at the front
and sides, and a 60 mm high edge (splash back) at the rear
• The front and side edges are reinforced and widened to 49
mm. Edges are welded together and polished at the corners.
• The worktop should slope to the sinkand reinforced by a full-
length support frame.
• The support frame should be a complete assembly with the
front, back and ends welded together at the corners.
• The worktop and support frame should be bonded together
with double-adhesive tape of a special, age-resistant quality
to give rigidity and noise abatement.
• The floor stand should be made of polished stainless steel.
• The table should be available with double sink units
preferably at both ends of the table, all with a smooth,
polished inside finish made of stainless steel (304) top.
• Corners should be curved to a 65 mm radius for easy
cleaning.
• The bottom should slope to the drain.
• Sink units should be of sizes that allow processing of the
large modular instrument
• trays
• Sink units should have 650 mm wide and 900 mm high
(adjustable ± 25 mm).
• The legs should be able to provide strong support and hold
to the entire unit securely.
• The sink should include a drain valve, removable strainer,
manually operated drain- valve, overflow drainpipe and
water trap. The table also includes a mixing faucet with
swivel spout, for cold and hot water connection.
• Should be delivered ready for assembly.
• Manufacturer should be ISO 9001.
(16) Control & Packing Table with two shelved for clean area
• Minimum Size (LxWxH): 2000x1500x900 mm
• This table should be specially designed for sorting,
inspection, functional control and packing of various sets for

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 731

wards, clinics etc. and for surgical instrument sets in trays.

The work could be done comfortably, either sitting or
standing.
• The worktop should be made of a robust wood-based core
material, surfaced with plastic laminate in a soft beige color
that reduces reflection of light from the
• surface / stainless steel top. All edges should be smooth.
The extended width of the worktop should be designed to
facilitate thorough inspection of instrument trays and allow
the use of large wrapping material.
• The rigid frame is made of stainless steel (304).
• There should be unobstructed access to the working space,
since the only supports needed along the front of the table
are the corner legs. This also facilitates cleaning of floors.
• Should have double workspace. One workplace table should
have 700 mm wide worktop and another workplace should
have 1400 mm worktop.
• The table should include a two-shelf console, mounted on
the worktop, for storage of packaging materials. The rigid
supporting columns of the console include 3 electrical
outlets.
• There should be a free space of 450 mm between the lower
shelf and the worktop, and 150 mm between the two
shelves.
• The table should have a drawer unit (both sides as double
model) mounted under
• the worktop.
• Each drawer unit should be 400 mm wide and should include
a drawer and a sliding plate.
• Fluorescent tube fittings (Inspection lamp).
(17) Linen Fold Table for clean area:
• Size (LxWxH): 2000x1400x900 mm
• The table should be specially designed for sorting,
inspection (each piece of linen can be moved over an
illuminated inspection panel) and folding of surgical dressing
sets and individually packaged towels/gowns. The extended
width also facilitates work with large dressing sheets. Work
can be carried out comfortably, either sitting or standing.
• Worktop should be made of stainless steel SS 304 Grade
with thickness 1.2mm, mat finished.
• All edges of the worktop should be smooth.
• The top should have a built-in opalescent (milky) plastic
surface plate, 1000 x 600 mm, illuminated from underneath
by two 25 W fluorescent tubes located beneath the top in a
laminated recess.
• The table should have two electrical outlets (one on each
side).
• The rigid frame should be made of stainless steel (304).

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 732

• There should be unobstructed access to the working space,

since the only supports needed along the front of the table
are the corner legs. This also facilitates cleaning of floors.

(18) Wire Storage Shelf module for dirty / disinfection area, Clean
supply area & for Sterile Store.
• Minimum Size (LxWxH): 1525x455x1895 mm
• Construction should be based on single free-standing shelf
modules for storage of clean linen, instruments, and packing
material or sterilized goods, including disposables.
• Moreover, two single modules can be placed back to back
and combined as a double module unit.
• If two units should be connected, 10 S-hooks should be
supplied.
• The wire construction should allow good air circulation while
permitting easy inspection of the goods.
• The wire shelves should be made of special heavy-duty
steel (304), chromium- plated and surface treated with clear
epoxy varnish to facilitate cleaning.
• The shelf unit should be easy to assemble on site and all
parts should fit precisely.
• Shelves should be mounted by means of plastic clamps onto
circular rigid posts, with the adjustable height within a range
of about 50 mm. Each post should include a height
adjustable foot.
• Each unit should include 5 shelves.
• The shelf unit should have optional Ø 125 mm castors for
using as a mobile storage unit by replacing the foot with
castors.
(19) Free Standing basket rack (15 Baskets) for Sterile store:
• Size (LxWxH): 1850x480x2150 mm(Single),
1850x800x2150 mm(Double)
• Quotations should be offered for both single and double
basket storage racks to store wire baskets in sterile storage
and/or as pre-storage of clean packed goods.
• The rack should be designed as an open unit to promote
aeration of sterilized goods and to make inspection of stored
goods as easy as possible.
• Should provide rigid, horizontal guide-rails, consisting of 50
x 20 mm steel profiles for loading and unloading the baskets
by sliding the baskets on rail.
• The guide-rails should be welded to a robust support column
mounted on a rigid floor stand.
• The columns should be joined by support frames on top and
below the base of the rack.
• To facilitate cleaning of the floor, the base should have a
rigid construction that minimizes the number of legs needed
for support.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 733

• Each leg should have an adjustable foot (± 25 mm).

• The rack should be made of SS.
• The single rack should be a free-standing section that holds
5 baskets in each vertical.
(20) Pass Box:
• Area: Dirty to Clean supply.
• Size: 600x600x600mm, internal
• Should be made up of SS 304 sheets with double wall
construction
• Should have UV lights for safe storage of components
• UV light should automatically switch off when any one door
is opened.
• Pass-through chamber should be based on pneumatic/
electrical operated and should fit all types of standard racks.
• The control should feature two modes of operation to open
or close the hatch with a press button mechanism.
• Should have door interlocking to prevent simultaneous
opening of both the doors
• Should be provided toughened glass paneling for easy
visibility.
• Manufacturer should be ISO 9001
(21) Closed Transport Trolley from Sterile Store to OT:

(22) Linen Distribution & Storage Trolley:

(23) Table Trolley for Dirty/Clean/Sterile Area:

Size: 1080x550x800 mm
• The table trolley is made of all-welded medical grade
stainless steel tubing.
• The trolley should have handlebars.
• The solid top and bottom shelves are made of heavy gauge
stainless steel (304)with a ground and polished finish, and
with a 12 mm raised edge all around.
• The lower shelf is 300 mm above floor level. There are
protective buffer rollers on all four corners.
• The table trolley has 4 swivel wheels, mounted in ball
bearings, for easy handling even in narrow passages.
• Manufacturer should be ISO 9001
(24) Instrument Tray Big:
• Area: Various movement
• Size: 450x250x70 mm
• It should be modular design with high precision and should
be designed for use
• with modular wire baskets through all phases of instrument
processing: washing and disinfection (both manual and in an
automatic washer-disinfector), ultrasonic cleaning,
inspection and packing, sterilization, storage, distribution
and usage.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 734

• It should be self-drying after disinfection in hot water

(min.+85°C)
• Instrument trays should be sturdy, jig-welded trays maintain
their size and shape even if handled carelessly.
• It should be stackable.
• The tray should be made of stainless steel (304) wire net,
with a maximum mesh size of 6.5 mm and a wire diameter
of 1.5 mm. This design gives optimal cleaning results and at
the same time prevents instruments from penetrating the
sides of the tray.
• All cross-points in the network and vertical wires to top and
bottom frames should be point welded.
• All free wire ends should be soft-polished to prevent injury
when handled.
• The bottom wire construction should include a rigid, 3 mm
diameter, stainless steel

• (304) wire frame to provide space for airing between goods

and work surface and to allow use on roller, belt and chain
conveyors.
• It should be electro-polished for smooth, clean surfaces and
also suitable for ISO
• modular wire baskets.
(25) Instrument Tray Small:
• Area: Various movement
• Size: 340x250x70 mm
• It should be modular design with high precision and should
be designed for use with modular wire baskets through all
phases of instrument processing: washing and disinfection
(both manual and in an automatic washer-disinfector),
ultrasonic cleaning, inspection and packing, sterilization,
storage, distribution and usage.
• It should be self-drying after disinfection in hot water
(min.+85°C)
• Instrument trays should be sturdy, jig-welded trays maintain
their size and shape even if handled carelessly.
• It should be stackable.
• The tray should be made of stainless steel (304) wire net,
with a maximum mesh
• size of 6.5 mm and a wire diameter of 1.5 mm. This design
gives optimal cleaning results and at the same time prevents
instruments from penetrating the sides of the tray.
• All cross-points in the network and vertical wires to top and
bottom frames should be point welded.
• All free wire ends should be soft-polished to prevent injury
when handled.
• The bottom wire construction should include a rigid, 3 mm
diameter, stainless steel (304) wireframe to provide space

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 735

for airing between goods and work surface and to allow use
on roller, belt and chain conveyors.
• It should be electro-polished for smooth, clean surfaces and
also suitable for ISO modular wire baskets.
(26) Modular Sterilizing Baskets Big:
• Dimensions: 580 x 300 x 280 mm. (length x width x height)
• Made of electropolished AISI 304 stainless steel.
(27) Office Table Complete with all accessories
(28) Shoe Rack Complete with all accessories
(29) Computer

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 736

1 9 . 2 LAUNDRY Equipments

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF-WASHER EXTRACTOR(HIGH SPIN) 25 KG

S.No Features Description

1 Outer Drum Stainless Steel AISI 316 Quality 2mm.
2 Inner Basket Periphery in Stainless Steel AISI 316 Quality 2mm sides 5 mm (back)/2.5
mm.
3 Size of Inner Basket As per OEM.
4 Front Plate 2.5 mm SS AISI 316 Quality, highly polished.
5 Door SS Die pressed highly polished Door. 2.5 mm S.S. AISI 316.
6 Door Opening As per OEM.
7 Door Interlock Pneumatic cylinder used to lock the door electro pneumatically so that it
opens only after the complete operation is over.
8 Fabricated 100mm & 80mm of MS pipe used with SS 316 Cladding mat finished.
9 Pulleys & Belts With taper lock bush pulley.
10 Drive Motor VFD Controlled.
11 Switchgear Starter VFD- As per OEM recommendation.
12 Paint PU Paint. Complete phosphating done on the heavy base before.
13 Bearing Heavy duty, 21314 2RS – 21315 2RS.
14 Bearing Housing A large close grained cast iron bearing housing duly machined on
computerized machine with two extra wide roller bearing that are
permanently lubricated for trouble free operation. In addition, 4 high
quality seals provide four times the sealing power to isolate.
15 Water Inlet 50mm x 1 No. BSP Pneumatic operated valve
16 Drain 80 mm X 1 No. pneumatic operated, Butterfly valve
used or Electric Valve.
17 Dosing System Provided 3 compartments of 1 Liters each with centrifugal pump and S.S.
jets incorporated through solenoid valves
18 Suspension Through Heavy duty, special designed springs, shock absorber
19 Control Micro processor Controlled
20 Electric Consumption 18 - 24 KW heaters used
21 Overall Dimensions As per OEM.
22 G Factor Not Less than 300G

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF-WASHER EXTRACTOR(HIGH SPIN) 15 KG

S.No Features Description

1 Outer Drum Stainless Steel AISI 316 Quality 2mm.
2 Inner Basket Periphery in Stainless Steel AISI 316 Quality 2mm sides 5 mm (back)/2.5
mm.
3 Size of Inner Basket As per OEM.
4 Front Plate 2.5 mm SS AISI 316 Quality, highly polished.
5 Door SS Die pressed highly polished Door. 2.5 mm S.S. AISI 316.
6 Door Opening As per OEM.
7 Door Interlock Pneumatic cylinder used to lock the door electro pneumatically so that it

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 737

opens only after the complete operation is over.

8 Fabricated 100mm & 80mm of MS pipe used with SS 316 Cladding mat finished.
9 Pulleys & Belts With taper lock bush pulley.
10 Drive Motor VFD Controlled.
11 Switchgear Starter VFD- As per OEM recommendation.
12 Paint PU Paint. Complete phosphating done on the heavy base before.
13 Bearing Heavy duty, 21314 2RS – 21315 2RS.
14 Bearing Housing A large close grained cast iron bearing housing duly machined on
computerized machine with two extra wide roller bearing that are
permanently lubricated for trouble free operation. In addition, 4 high
quality seals provide four times the sealing power to isolate.
15 Water Inlet 20mm x 1 No. BSP Pneumatic operated valve
16 Drain 50 mm X 1 No. pneumatic operated, Butterfly valve
used or Electric Valve.
17 Dosing System Provided 3 compartments of 1 Liters each with centrifugal pump and S.S.
jets incorporated through solenoid valves
18 Suspension Through Heavy duty, special designed springs, shock absorber
19 Control Micro processor Controlled
20 Electric Consumption 6 - 9 KW heaters used
21 Overall Dimensions As per OEM.
22 G Factor Not Less than 300G

Technical Specification Of Drying Tumbler- 15 Kg

S.No Features Description

1 Inner Basket Densely perforated SS AISI 316 quality used. Argon Arc Welding, single
and unvisible joint, 1 mm thick sheet used.
2 Sides of Basket Material & 1.6 mm Stainless Steel, AISI 316 Quality
Thickness
3 Basic Structure Double walled glass wool insulated, 1.25 mm to 3 mm thick CRC sheets
used & M.S. plates 5 mm to 8 mm thick used.
4 Size of the Basket As per OEM
5 Volume As per OEM
6 Loading Ratio Door As per OEM
7 Door Die pressed door M.S. 2.5 mm thick PU painted with toughened
8 Door opening As per OEM
9 Drive Idler type system
10 Electric Heating As per OEM
Suction Blowers
11 Suction Blowers 1 No. Alu. Centrifugal blowers directly mounted duly statically as well
dynamically balanced.
12 Painting PU paint done after complete rust removal through rust removal
chemicals prior to epoxy priming & knifing putty base
13 Control Panel Switch gear used with motor protection relays, single phasing preventer,
reverse phasing, Auto timed, Auto reverse with
14 Overall Dimensions As per OEM

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 738

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF- FLAT WORK IRONER(CHEST HEATED)

S.No Features Description

1 Roller Size (Padded) 250 Dia x 1000 Length.
2 Roller Rolled & fabricated in Boiler quality steel plates, precision machined with
drilled perforations. Runs on self aligning roller bearings. One side has
hollowed shaft for moisture suction.
3 Ironing Chest Fabricated in boiler quality steel plates duly annealed. Stepless machining
& Grinding. Ground smooth and polished in the direction of flow of linen.
Suspended at four corners on large pneumatic cylinders.
180° contact angle with the roller. Adjustable & uniform ironing pressure
across the entire roll. Chest lowers.
4 Type of Lowering & Pneumatically Operated
Lifting of Chest
5 Main Body Made out of Steel plates & channel base frame, Shot Blasted & Hot
Painted. Stainless steel feed & collection trays.
6 Drive Single Motor with Gear Box and Variable Frequency Drive for variable
roller.
7 Switchgear All motor through AC inverter.
8 Drive Motor As per OEM.
9 Blower Motor As per OEM.
10 Suction Blower Direct mounted centrifugal blower on the roller. Heavy duty blower
driven by independent blower motor.
11 Gears Helical Gears for Final and Positive drive, Helical Gear and Pinion.
12 Conveyor Belts 100% polyester with welded seam of thickness of 2mm & width of 50mm.
13 Exhaust As per OEM.
14 Feeding Table Provided in SS 316 grade highly polished.
15 Controls Digital control. Auto digital temperature control, Rocker switch for
forward- reverse chest rotation, Emergency stop. Auto cut off for false
feeding & finger safety.
16 Air Connection Provided with Miniature, Filter, Lubricator & Pressure
17 Electric Consumption As per OEM.
18 Electric supply 415V 10%, 3 Phase + N, 50 Hz AC

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF- VACCUM IRONING TABLE

S.No Features Description

1 Table Top Size 1000 mm x 750 mm
2 Main Body Formed out of steel sheets, Powder Coated painted, all components
easily accessible.
3 Table Top M.S. sheet (powder coated) of minimum 1.5 mm thickness perforated flat
top padded with high porosity & heat resistant
4 Suction Blower Heavy duty centrifugal blower driven by independent blower motor
activated by spring loaded full length foot pedal work in conjunction
with study micro switch.
5 Heater Full stainless steel in-built heater of minimum 1 KW capacity.
6 Electric Supply 230 V ± 10%, Single Phase

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 739

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF-ELECTRIC STEAM GENERATOR

S.No Features Description

1 Pressure Vessel Boiler quality steel construction. S.S. 316 grade heavy duty electric
heaters, imported water level regulator, electric solenoid steam release
safety valve, water into the vessel.
2 Rating 09 KW
3 Steam Output 8 Kg. / Hr.
4 Suitable for No. of 2
Irons
5 Body 2 MM, M.S, Powder coated.
6 Pressure Vessel Boiler quality construction 10 MM thick seamless.
7 Heaters S.S. Heavy duty Electric Heaters used.
8 Pump Water feeding pump of 1 HP capacity.
9 Control Panel Contactors (1) 25 AMP 1 No (2) 16 AMP 1 No.
10 Electric Pressure Make in India compliance products.
11 Mechanical Safety Make in India compliance products.
Valve
12 Water Level Controller Make in India compliance products.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF- WET LINEN TROLLEY

S.No Features Description

1 Body Formed out of steel tubes.
2 Structure Hinged front half with spring loaded latches on both sides. Galvanized &
Hot Painted.
3 Side Round tubular handle on the side.
4 Volume of container 750 Ltrs.
5 Wheels Fitted with 4 nos. swiveling type Ø150 ball bearing wheels.
6 Dimension 850 x 650 x 800 ht.
7 Capacity 50 Kg.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION OF-DRY LINEN TROLLEY

S.No Features Description

1 Body Formed out of steel tubes.
2 Structure Hinged front half with spring loaded latches on both sides. Galvanized &
Hot Painted.
3 Side Round tubular handle on the side.
4 Volume of container 720 Ltrs.
5 Wheels Fitted with 4 nos. swiveling type Ø150 ball bearing wheels.
6 Dimension 850 x 650 x 1680 ht.
7 Capacity 50 Kg.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 740

19.3 Kitchen & Canteen Equipments

STANDARD SPECIFICATION FOR FABRICATION

1. All tops shall be in 1.6mm thick S.S. Sheet duly sound dampened and supported
by sturdy S. S. angle framework.

2. All tops shall be bent down 50mm and in 12mm.

3. All under shelves shall be constructed in 1.2mm thick S. S. Sheet and supported
by sturdy S. S. Angle framework.

4. All under shelves shall be bent down in 38mm and inside 12mm.

5. All uprights (main legs) shall be 38mm OD S. S. pipe 1.6mm thick with S.S. adjustable.

6. Uprights for S. S. Racks shall be 38x38x2mm thick S.S. angles or S. S. Pipe

38mm OD 1.6 mm thick, as stated.

7. All top frames and vertical members shall be made out of 38x38x3mm marked S. S. Angles.

8. Frames for under shelves shall be made out of 30x30x3mm ISI marked S.S. angles

9. All front panels shall be made in 1.2mm thick S.S. Sheet of cooking equipment.

10. All sides/ rear panels of cooking equipment shall be made in 1.0 mm thick

S. S. Sheet.
11. Sides/ rear panels of Food Pick - Up Counter shall be made in 1.2/1.0 mm S.S. Sheet.

12. All sinks shall be made in 1.6mm thick S.S. Sheet, argon arc welded coved
to 38mm radius and provided with drains duly welded.

13. Drawers shall be of size 500x500x125mm having telescopic slide rails with
double walled front and recessed handle.

14. All doors shall be in 1.2mm thick S.S. Sheet with reinforcement channels, Magnetic
catchers, recessed handles and facility for pad locks.

15. All side bracing shall be made of 25mm OD 1.6mm thick S.S. Pipe.

16. Dish Wash equipment tops shall be recessed by 25mm on account of drip less marine
edges.

17. Garbage chute shall be made out of 1.6mm thick S.S. Sheet and shall be 150mm dia. x
100mm.

18. Cooking range grates shall be of Cast Iron for standard sizes and shall be
fabricated with M. S. square rod in case of special sizes.

19. All cooking ranges shall have drip trays in 1.2mm thick S.S. Sheet with handles of
1.2 mm thick S.S. Sheet.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 741
20. Dosa / Griddle plate / Chapati Plate tops shall be 16mm thick M.S. Plate.

All burners will be of United – Bombay make or HPC make and shall have pilot flames.

23. All main burners and pilot burners shall have individual needle control valves.

24. All burners shall be duly calibrated for heat output and flame characteristics.

25. All Griddle Plates shall have grease trays.

26. Deep Fat Fryer tops / tanks shall be in 1.6mm thick S. S. Sheet with dripless edges
complete with drain valves, double walled construction and frying baskets.

27. Salamander shall be fully constructed in1.2mm thick S.S. Sheet.

28. Tea Water / Milk Boiler shall be fully constructed in 1.2 mm thick S. S. Sheet

29. Hot Case interiors shall be in 0.9mm thick S.S. Sheet.

30. Bain Marie tanks shall be in 1.6mm thick S.S. Sheet.

31. Insulation shall be mineral wool, glass thermocool or puf as in where required.

32. Thermostats shall be of reputed make.

33. Main switches shall be of Kaycee – Bombay make or L & T make.

34. All electric wiring shall be Teflon coated.

35. All Contractors shall be of L & T make.

36. Castors shall be of Semsons – Delhi and shall be of swivel /fixed type as erequired.
Castors shall have brakes wherever needed.

37. Castors of 150/100mm dia. shall be used in trolleys.

38. All counter top equipment shall have white nylon legs.

39. Overhead Shelves/ Wall Shelves shall be made of 1.2mm thick S.S. Sheet bent
down 50mm and in 12mm S. S. Channels, 25mm OD, S.S. pipe uprights and S.S.
Round gussets.

40. Exhaust Hoods shall be constructed in 1.0 mm thick S.S. Sheet with S. S. Baffle
Filters and Bulk Head light fittings.

41. Aluminum Racks shall have shelves of 2mm thick anodized aluminum
sheet reinforced with 25x100x25 mm channel of same material and
38x38x5mm aluminum angle uprights.

42. Pot racks shall have uprights of 38mm OD 1.6 mm thick S.S. Pipe and shelves of
25mm OD 1.2 mm thick S.S. Pipe with all welded construction.

43. Oven interiors shall be in 2/2.5mm thick M. S. Sheet oven exteriors in 1.2 mm
thick S.S. Sheet, oven front in 1.2mm thick S.S. Sheet and oven door exterior in 1.6
mm thick S.S. Sheet.

44. S.S. Sheet shall be only AISI 304 grade for tops, sinks and tanks AISI 304 grade

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 742
for under shelves and paneling.

45. All items shall confirm to approved shop drawings.

All finish shall be smooth, without any chatter or vibration marks and having uniform
polishing grains all around.

47. Refrigerators interiors shall be in 0.9mm thick S. S. Sheet and exterior in 1mm
thick S. S. sheet. Compressor shall be of Kirloskar make, indfoss thermostat with
Puff Insulation. Door shall have integral Handle and springs for self closing and shall
have locking arrangement.

48. Front of Display Cabinet shall be of curved glass and shall be in 12mm thickness.
Sides glass shall also be in 12mm thickness Display Cabinets shall have shelves of
1mm thick S.S. Sheets duly copper coiled beneath for affective cooling.

49. S. S. Racks shall have shelves made of 1.2mm thick S. S. Sheet welded to
upright or nut bolted to uprights with gussets as stated. Uprights to be of
38x38x2mm thick S. S. Angle.
50. All material to be processed through NC shearing & CNC bending machines only.

Warranty: OEM / Contractor shall provide standard 36 months warranty for the offered
products.

Note : Equivalent material and finishes of any other specialized make may be
used in case it is established that the brands specified above are not
available in the market but only after approval of the alternate by the
Competent Authority/NIT Approving authority. In case make of any
equipment or material is not specified in the NIT the decision of Engineer-
In-Charge in this regard will be final

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 743

19.4 – I.V. Tree System 5-Point Hanger with Track

Supply and Installation of Surface Mounted/ Suspended Aluminium I.V.

Track is a dual channel extruded aluminium track.

I.V. Tracks:

Cubicle Curtains I.V. track model 17000. Surface-mounted tracks of

heavy extruded aluminium alloy 6063-T5, 1 ⅜" x ¾", slotted to receive
twist lock I.V. Carriage, complete with accessories and components
required for complete and secure installations including splicers, end
caps and corner bends. 1. 2. Corner Bends: Shall have a 12” - 18"
radius fabricated in one continuous “L” shape. Finish: Clear anodized
aluminium.

I.V. Pendants: 5 Bottle I.V. Pendant, Fabricated of polished stainless

steel 9/16" diameter tubing for the main shaft and four ¼" stainless steel
folding arms. This I.V. Unit will be able to be raised or lowered to a height
from 19" to 32" to adjust to most ceiling heights. The locking mechanism
is a stainless-steel thumb push at the base of unit.

Technical Data:
• High quality extruded aluminium 6063-T5. 1-3/8" Wide x 3\4" deep
& 0.06" thick track, integrated with false ceiling.
• Clear anodized finish or white powder coat finish as per
instruction of Engineer-in-charge.
• Dual channel to provide smooth and snag free operation
consistently.
• Continuous radius bends to be done in 36" or as per site
situation.
• Radius Bends that include a straight piece after the bend in the
following radius: 12", 21", 24" as per site situation.
• The IV track system will be surface or suspend mounted
installations.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 744

Schematic Drawing of IVTree System 5-Point Hanger with Track

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 745

C-20-LIST OF PREFERRED MAKES FOR E&M

S. Details of material/equipment Manufacturer`s name/make

No.
(A) I.E.I., MCBDB & MCB, Cable & Wires
1 MCB, Isolator, Industrial Plug Socket, Schneider Electric/ Legrand / L&T/ ABB/
RCCB, RCBO`s (Only Premium series) Seimens /Havells/C&S

2 MCBDB & Loose wire Box (Only Schneider Electric/ Legrand / L&T/ ABB/
Premium series) Seimens /Havells/C&S
3 Change Over Switch (Only Premium Schneider Electric/ Legrand / L&T/ ABB/
series) Seimens /Havells/C&S
4 Automatic Transfer switch (ATS) (Only Schneider Electric/ Legrand / L&T/ ABB/
Premium series) Seimens
/Havells/C&S/Asco/Russel/Socomac
5 FRLS PVC ins. Copper cond. Single Finolex/ RR Kabel/ KEI/ Havells/ Polycab/
core cable for wiring (ISI marked) Grandlay
6 Armoured/ Unarmoured telephone Delton/Finolex/ RR Kabel/ Havells/
cable, coaxial cable Bonton/AKG
7 MS Conduit (ISI marked) with heavy BEC/ NIC/ AKG
duty MS Conduit pipe accessories.
8 PVC Conduit (ISI marked) with heavy AKG/ BEC/ Precision/Anchor / Polycab
duty PVC Conduit pipe accessories.
9 Modular Switch, Socket/Telephone Legrand (Arteor)/ Schneider Electric
socket/ cable TV Socket/ Data outlet (Zencilo)/ Wipro (North West-Platia/MK
socket/ Fan Regulator/ G I Boxes Etc. (blenze)/Havells (Murano)/Honeywell
(Wiring Accessories). (Only Premium
series)
10 Selector Switch & Toggle switch Sailzer(L&T)/ Siemens/ ABB
11 PVC Trunking MK/Schneider Electric / Legrand.
12 GI pipe Tata / Jindal (Hissar)/ Prakash, Surya.
13 Paints ICI/ Asian/Berger
14 Terminal Block & Connectors Elmex/ Wago/ Hensel/ Connectwell
15 phenolic laminated sheet/ Bakelite Hylem/ Formica (P-I grade)/ Mylam/
sheet Greenlam.
16 Cat-6 cables, Wires & Fiber optic cable Amp, Avaya/Beldon/Legrand/Molex/
Schneider/Bonton/Anchor/AKG
(B) Fan & Fittings
1 Exhaust Fans/Fresh Air fan Havells, Crompton, Almonard, Orient,
Usha.
2 Ceiling Fans Havells, Crompton, Orient, Usha.
3 LED fittings Havells/ Phillips/ Lighting
Technology/Wipro/Regent/Trilux

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 746

(C) Sub -Station Equipment.

1 LT panels, Meter Panel Boards, AMF Tricolite Electrical Industries/Control &
Panels, Outdoor Feeder Pillars, APFC Switchgears Pvt. Ltd./ Adlec Control
Panels, Bus ducts System Pvt. Ltd. /Advance Panels &
Switchgears Pvt. Ltd./Ambit switch gear
/Precision System control/R.P. Controls/
Advance Power Control / Milestone/
Application Control Panels /HPL
/NEPTUNE/ASPL/ GLOBAL,
2 TTA Panels design verified (Main LT Siemens (Sivacon)/Schneider (Block
panels, capacitor panels Set)/L&T(Ti)/Legrand
(XL3)/ABB/HPL/NEPTUNE
3 Air Insulated Rising Main C&S/ L&T/Schneider/Legrand/Seimens

4 Sandwich type/Compact type Bus C&S/ L&T/Schneider/Legrand/ Seimens

Trunking
5 Moulded Case Circuit Breaker (MCCB) Schneider Electric NSX series/ Legrand
Thermal release/ Microprocessor based (DPX3)/ L&T(D-Sine)/ ABB(TMax)/ HPL/
(Ics=Icu=100%) Seimens (VL series)/ C&S(Winbreak-1/2).
6 Power/ Aux. contactor 3/4 pole Schneider Electric / Legrand/ Hager/ L&T/
ABB/ Seimens/ C&S/BCH
7 Potential transformers, Current Automatic Electric/ Gilbert & Maxwell/
Transformers. Matrix/ Precise/ L&T/ Kappa
8 LED type indicating lamp/ Push Button Schneider Electric / L&T/ Seimens/
C&S/Vaishno
9 Over load Relays Schneider Electric / L&T/ Seimens/
C&S/ABB
10 Conventional/ Electronic Digital Meters Conzerv/ L&T/ Secure/ AE/
(A/V/PF/Hz/KW/KWH) C&S/NEPTUNE
11 Timer Schneider Electric / Legrand/ Hager/ L&T/
ABB/ Seimens/ C&S
12 Fasteners, GI Clamps Hilti/ Fisher/ Chilli/ GMGR
13 D.W. Corrugated HDPE pipe (ISI Rex/ Duraplast/ Triputi/ Duraline/ CPE
marked)
14 Transformers (Oil/Dry type) Crompton/ ABB/ Schneider/ Voltamp
15 HT panels / Ring Main unit Crompton/ Seimens/ABB/ Schneider/.
16 HT Cables (ISI marked) CCI/ KEI/ Havells/Polycab/
Universal/Nicco, Grandlay.
17 HT End Termination/ Cable jointing Kit Reychem/Denson/ Cap Seal/Safekei/ 3M
18 ACBs with Display Schneider Electric (Masterpact NW6.0A) /
Legrand (DMX3MP4)/ L&T(U-Power-
OMEGA)/ ABB (New Series) PR122/
Siemens (3WL-ETU45B)/ C&S (Win
Master2.4.1)/HPL
19 Rubber Mat Jyoti/ Deep Jyoti/ Premier (duly ISI
marked)

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 747

20 Ammeter Rishabh/ L&T/ AE/ C&S

21 Voltmeter Rishabh/ L&T/ AE/ C&S
22 Fire Extinguishers (ISI marked) Minimax/ Safex/ Lifeguard/ Kanex/
Omex/Ceasefire/ Andex/Kalpex
23 Capacitor & Reactors/ APFC Relay Epcos/L&T/ Ducati/ ABB/ Siemens/
Schneider/Havells/NEPTUNE
24 XPLE insulated PVC sheathed Alum. / Finolex/ RR Kabel/ KEI/ Havells/
Copper conductor Armored / Unarmored Polycab/AKG/Grandlay
cable of 1.1 KV grade
25 Cable Glands double compression with Baliga lighting/ Comet/ Cosmos/ Dowells/
Earthing links Gripwell
26 Bimetallic Cable Lugs Comet/ Dowells (Biller India)/Hax Brass
(Copper Alloy India) / Jainson/ Action.
27 MS / GI Cable tray Pilco/ Slotco/Pasco/ MEM/
BEC/Steelways/Legrand/Trueleader/LS
Power control
28 Programmable logic controller (PLC) Seimens/ Allen Bradley/ L&T/ ABB
(D) DG Sets.
1 Diesel operated generating engine Cummins India/ Caterpillar/ Volvo Penta/
Perkins/Kriloskar
2 Alternator Stamford/ Lerroy Sommer/ Caterpillar/
Crompton/Jyoti/Kirloskar
3 DG set Canopy/ Enclosure & AMF panel As per OEM/ OEA of respective DG set
manufacturer
4 Alarm Annunciator Advani Oralikon/ L&T/ Minilec
(E) Fire fighting Equipment.

1 M.S. Pipe TATA/ JINDAL HISAR/ SAIL

2 G.I. Pipe TATA/ JINDAL HISAR/ SAIL
3 Forged steel fittings/ Flanges Johnson Industries/ VS Forge/ JK
Forging/ Trueforge
4 Forged steel fittings & Flanges (For VS Forge/ Rohini/ Kanwal Forge/johnson/
Welding joints) Trueforge
5 Pipe Hangers Chilli/ Hilti/ GMGR
6 Gun Metal/ Brass valve (ISI marked)/ Sant /Leader/Advance/Zoloto/ Kirloskar
(Full way Globe valve/ Non return valve)
7 Butterfly/ Sluice valve (ISI marked). Audco/Sant /Leader/Advance/Zoloto/
Kirloskar
8 Check valve (ISI marked). Audco/Sant /Leader/Advance/Zoloto/
Kirloskar
9 Foot Valve (cast iron/ Gunmetal) Audco/Sant /Leader/Advance/Zoloto/
Kirloskar

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 748

10 Y Type Strainer Audco/Sant /Leader/Zoloto/ Kirloskar

11 Fire / Sprinkler pump / Terrace Fire Kirloskar/ KSB/
pump Grundfos/Wilomather&platt
12 Electric Motor ABB/ Siemens/ kirloskar/ Grundfos/
crompton/NGEF
13 Diesel Engine for Fire Pump Cummins India/ Ashok Layland/ KOEL

14 Couplings (Type -Type) Lovejoy/ Fenner/ Dunlop

15 Anti Vibration Mountings Kanwal Industries Corporation/ Dunlop/
GERB/ Resistoflex
16 Pressure Switch (ISI marked) SystemSensor/Infoss/Danfoss/Switzer/Ho
neywell & Siemens
17 Pressure Gauge (ISI Marked) H Guru/ Fiebig/dwyer
18 Double / Single Headed Landing Valve Minimax/New Age/ Safeguard/ Lifeguard/
(ISI marked) Padmini/ Omex/Andex/Kalpex.
19 Male Female fire Hose Coupling (SS Minimax/New Age/ Safeguard/ Lifeguard/
304) (ISI marked) Padmini/ Omex/Andex/ Kalpex.
20 First Aid Hose Drum / Fire Hose Reels / Minimax/New Age/ Safeguard/ Lifeguard/
Shut off Nozzle (Gunmetal / ABS) (ISI Padmini/Kalpex.
Marked)
21 SS 304 / Gun metal Branch Pipe & Minimax/New Age/ Safeguard/ Lifeguard/
Nozzle (ISI Make) Padmini/ Omex/Andex/ Kalpex.
22 Fireman Axe Minimax/ New Age/ Safeguard/ Kalpex.
23 Water Flow Switch (FM/UL Listed) System Sensor/Rapid
Control/Potter/Switzer
24 Rust Preventive polymeric 4mm thick Pypcoat/ Marphalt/ Rustech/ Safex.
tape for pipes. (AW4) Wrapping (ISI
Marked)
25 Level Controller & Indicator (water) (ISI Auto pump/ Cirrus Engineering / Techtrol
Marked)
26 Fire Brigade Inlet Connection (ISI Minimax/New Age/ Safeguard/ Lifeguard/
Marked) Padmini/ Omex/Eversafe/ Kalpex.

27 Thermoplastic pipe for first Aid Hose New Age/ Safeguard/ Lifeguard/ Padmini/
Reel (ISI Marked) Omex/Eversafe/ Kalpex.
28 Fire Sealant Promat/ Birla 3 M/ Hilti

29 Over load Relays Schneider Electric / L&T/ Seimens/

C&S/ABB
30 power/ Aux. contactor 3/4 pole Schneider Electric / Legrand/ Hager/ L&T/
ABB/ Seimens/ C&S/BCH
31 LED type indicating lamp/ Push Button Schneider Electric / L&T/ Seimens/
C&S/ABB
32 LT jointing kit / Termination Reychem/Denson/ Cap Seal/Safekei/ 3M
33 RRL Hose pipe (ISI Marked) New Age/ Safeguard/ Lifeguard/ Padmini/

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 749

Kalpex
34 Dry Battery Exide/ Amar Raja/ HBL/Amco
35 Battery Charger Statcon/ Amar Raja/ CDC/ AE/ Expofyn/
thycon India
36 Epoxy Paint ICI/ Asian/Berger/Nerolac
37 Air Release Valve Rb/ Tbs/ Cimbrio/ Zoloto
38 Analogue/ Digital Measuring AE/ Rishabh/ L&T/ C&S/ Conzerve
Instruments (Voltmeter/ Ammeter/
Energy meter/ KW/ PE/ Multi-Function
meter)
39 Aluminium / Copper power cable / Finolex/ RR Kabel/ KEI/ Havells/ Polycab
Control cable (Armoured / Unarmoured) /AKG
40 Cable glands & Lugs Comet/ Dowells/ Hax Brass (copper Alloy
India)/ Jainson/ Action
41 Solenoid Valve / Spray Nozzle Perker/ HD/ Tyco/ Emersion
42 Sprinkler HD/ Tyco/Reliable/ Wormald/Viking
43 Sprinkler Heads/ Water Curtain Nozzle Tyco/ Viking/ Omex/ Newage/ Lifeguard
44 Steel Flexible Extension Omex/ Newage/ Tyco/ Lifeguard/ Kalpex.

45 Vibration Eliminator Resistoflex/ D Waren /Kanwal

46 Welding Electrodes Advani/ ESAB/ L&T

47 Deluge Valve Tyco/ Viking/ HD

48 Cast Iron Valve Kirloskar/ Joloto/ Audco/ Advance
(F) Fire Alarm Systems.
1 Addressable Manual call box Notifier, Johnson control, Honeywell,
Siemens, Bosch, KALPEX, ASES.
2 Addressable type fault isolator Johnson control, Honeywell, Siemens,
Bosch, EST (Edward), KALPEX, ASES.
3 Strobe lights cum hooter Notifier, Johnson control, Honeywell,
Siemens, Bosch, KALPEX, ASES.
4 Addressable control modules for hooter Notifier, Johnson control, Honeywell,
Siemens, Bosch, KALPEX, ASES.
5 Addressable monitor module for flow Notifier, Johnson control, Honeywell,
switch Siemens, Bosch, KALPEX, ASES.
6 Addressable type fire alarm control Notifier, Johnson control, Honeywell,
panel Siemens, Bosch, KALPEX, ASES.
7 Network repeater panel Notifier, Johnson control, Honeywell,
Siemens, Bosch, KALPEX, ASES.
8 Addressable multi sensing fire detector Notifier, Johnson control, Honeywell,
(Combination of optical type smoke Siemens, Bosch, KALPEX, ASES.
detector and ROR type heat detector)
9 Cat-6 cables, Wire & Fiber optic cable Amp, Avaya, Beldon, Legrand, Molex,
Schneider, Bonton, Anchor.
10 Response Indicator Agni devices, Apollo, System sensor,
Electroquip.

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 750

(G) PA System
1 PA System Tyco/ Honeywell-Notifier/ Bosch /
Johnson Control
2 Junction Boxes Customized
3 Speakers Bosch / Bose/ JBL/ Honeywell
4 Amplifier Bosch / Bose/ JBL/ Honeywell
5 Microphone Bosch / JBL / Philips / Honeywell
6 Fire Survival Cables/ Circuit Havells/ Finolex/ KEI/ RR
Integrity Cable Kabel/Belden/Rallison
7 MS Conduits BEC/ AKG/ NIC
(H) UPS System
1 UPS System (Minimum Level-3 Schneider / VERTIV /
Inverter topology Legrand(Numeric) / ABB / Eaton /
only to be used) Mitsubishi
2 Sealed Maintenance FreeBatteries
Exide / Amaron / HBL / Rocket / Hitachi
/ Panasonic / Amco
(I) HVAC
1 Chiller Unit (AHRI Certifiedonly) Johnson Controls (York) / Carrier /
Daikin / Trane / Blue Star / Voltas /
Dunham Bush
2 Cooling Towers -CTIApproved Bell / Paharpur / Advance / Mihir
/Baltimore air cool
3 Cooling Tower Watertreatment Hydropath / Merus / Nalco / Sensorex
4 Air Handling Unit (Double Skin) /(Note: Systemair / Zeco Aircon / Edgetech /
All equipment shall be Eurovent Flaktgroups / VTS / Carrier / York / Trane
certified, AHRI certified coils and / Nutech / Humidin / Citizen /DJK
AMCA certified fans.)
5 TFA units, / Cooling Coils / Fan coil unit Systemair / Zeco Aircon / Edgetech /
/ Air Washer / Air Scrubber Flaktgroups / VTS / Carrier/ York /
Trane / Nutech / Humidin / Citizen /
Midea / Putoria
6 Centrifugal Pumps sets Siemens / Schnieder / Danfoss / ABB
/ Fuji/ Allen Bradly / Grundfos /
Armstrong/ Xylem / Kirloskar / CRI
/Crompton / Wilo
7 Pumps with VFD controlpanel Siemens / Schnieder / Danfoss / ABB /
Fuji/ Allen Bradly / Grundfos /
Armstrong/ Xylem / Kirloskar / CRI
/Crompton / Wilo
8 Centrifugal fans, Inline fans, Jet fans, Zeco / Edgetech / Systemaire / Nicotra
Axial fans, Propeller fans, Exhaust / Kruger/ GreenHeck/
air Comefri /Humidin / LAU
fans (AMCA certified) /OST Berg / Maico
9 HEPA Filters, Pre Filtersand Fine Thermadyne / Klenzaids / Spectrum /
filters Camfil / AAF / Airtech / Puromatic /

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 751

Purafil / Athlete / Anfilco /

Freudenberg / Mechmark
10 Process cooling water Swagelok / Valex / Sandvik
pipe, SS-304
11 Pre-Insulated Pipe Zeco Aircon / Seven Star / PermaPipe
12 Grooved Pipe Connector Victaulic / Seven Star / Tyco
13 Gun metal / Bronze Gate / Globe / Sant / Leader / Emerald / Zoloto/
Check / Butterfly / Ball Valve Non Advance/ Audco / Kitz / Castle/ Intervalve
return / Anergy / VTM
Valves with ISI mark,
14 Auto air vent with stopvalve Anergy / Honeywell / Johnson Control
/ Emerald / Rapidcool /Sant
15 Manual BalancingValves Advance / Kitz / Honeywell / Danfoss
(Water duty) / Belimo / Tour & Anderson / Bell &
Gosset / Castle/ Victaulic / T & A
/Flowcon
16 Pressure Independent Control cum Danfoss / Johnson Control / Honeywell /
Balancing Valves / High Rangeability Belimo / Advance / Castle / Audco / T &
Valve /Automatic A / Flowcon
Balancing Valves
17 GI Sheets SAIL / TATA / Jindal / Essar /Nippon
18 Aluminum Sheet Balco / Hindalco / Nalco
19 G.I / Aluminium Factoryfabricated duct Technofab / Rolastar / Zeco / Ecoduct
/ Ductofab / Waves / NuAir (Nutech) /
Radical Duct / Asawa / Voltas /
Edgetech
20 Expanded Polystyrene / Extruded Mettur-Beardsell / Lloyds Insulation /
Poly Styrene (TF Cooline / Krutz / Owen Croning/
Quality) Supreme/ Insu board
21 Chemically cytosinepolymer Paramount / Trosslin / Twiga
22 Cross Linked Polythene Paramount / Trocellene / Supreme /
Foam Insulation Armacell
23 Fiber Glass / Resin bonded glass wool U.P Twiga / Owens Croning / Lloyd
(HVAC & Solar Insulation / Kimmco / Supreme
water heating)
24 Elastomeric Nitrile Foam/ Rubber for Armacell / K-Flex / A-Flex
Duct / Pipe
(Class ‘O’)
25 Extruded Aluminium Grills/Diffuser / Ruskin - Titus / Systemaire / Airmaster
Damper / Cosmos / Caryaire / Dynacraft /
Greenheck/ Triston/ Kruger
26 Fresh / Exhaust Air Louvers with Bird Ruskin - Titus / Systemair / Airmaster
Screen,Acoustic Louvers Duct / Cosmos / Caryaire / Dynacraft/Caryaire
Attenuators / / Tristar
27 Pot Strainers / Y-Strainers Rapid Cool / Sant / Trishul / Emerald /
Castle / Advance /Lakos / victaulic
28 Humidifier / Oil drip heater KEPL / Emerald / Rapid Cool

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 752

29 Thermostat / Humidistat /Duct Danfoss / Belimo/ Schneider/ ABB/

Temperature Sensor Honeywell/ Trane/ Johnson Controls /
Siemens/ Greystone/ Dwyer/ Omicron
/ L&T / Ira
30 Thermometer Penn-Plax / Teddington / Emerald/ H-
Guru / Metzer/ Bestobell/ Star
Scientific
31 Pressure gauge Penn-Plax / Teddington / Emerald/ H-
Guru / Forbes Marshall / Wika / Arrow
/ Dwyer / Taylor
32 Room Temperature, RHSensor Belimo / Schneider / ABB /
Honeywell/ Trane/ Johnson Controls /
Siemens/ Greystone/ Dwyer/
Omicron
33 Pressurization unit Armstrong / Bell & Gosset / Anergy
34 2/3 way control valve withmodulating Schneider / Belimo / Johnson
actuator Controls / Danfoss / Honeywell /
Siemens / L& T / SbtDats
35 DCC control for AHU Schneider / ABB / Danfoss /
Honeywell / Johnson
Controls /Siemens
36 Modulating Motors Belimo / Honeywell / Danfoss /
Johnson Controls
37 Vibration isolators Dunlop / Emerald / Ressitoflex /
Easyflex / Cori/ Bdk /
38 Water Flow switch &Pressure Switch Danfoss / Emerald / Anergy /
Honeywell / Johnson Control / Belimo
/ Siemens
39 Desiccant coated Enthalpy DRI / Ostberg / VTS
Recovery Unit (Latent +Sensible):
Wheel Only
40 Central Air Cleaner System Magneto / Honeywell
(Electronic filtrationsystems)
41 Air separator / Pressurized Expansion Anergy / Emerald / Rapid Cool
Tank / vacuum degasser / Flamco / Amtrol / Bell and Gosset /
Derrik / Tenova / Armstrong /
Grundfoss
42 Jet Nozzles Ruskin - Titus / Systemair / Airmaster
/ Caryaire / Dynacraft
43 Airstat Honeywell / Belimo/ Rapid Control
44 Aluminum Foil Tape Birla / 3M/ Jonson
45 Suction guide Anergy / Sant / Emerald / Armstrong
46 UPVC Pipe Astral / Supreme / Finolex / Ashirwad
Prince / AKG
47 Air Curtain Beacon/ Thermodyne, Envair Electro
dyne
48 Smoke sensor / CO Sensor Honeywell / Danfoss / Johnson

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 753

Control / Actis / System sensor /

siemens / Kele
49 HEPA Filters, Pre Filtersand Fine Thermadyne / Klenzaids / Spectrum /
filters Camfil / AAF / Airtech / Puromatic /
Purafil / Athlete / Anfilco /
Freudenberg / Mechmark
50 Process cooling water Swagelok / Valex / Sandvik
pipe, SS-304
51 Pre-Insulated Pipe Zeco Aircon / Seven Star / PermaPipe
52 Grooved Pipe Connector Victaulic / Seven Star / Tyco
53 Gun metal / Bronze Gate / Globe / Sant / Leader / Emerald / Zoloto/
Check / Butterfly / Ball Valve Non Advance/ Audco / Kitz / Castle/ Intervalve
return / Anergy / VTM
Valves with ISI mark,
54 Auto air vent with stopvalve Anergy / Honeywell / Johnson Control
/ Emerald / Rapidcool /Sant
55 Manual BalancingValves Advance / Kitz / Honeywell / Danfoss
(Water duty) / Belimo / Tour & Anderson / Bell &
Gosset / Castle/ Victaulic / T & A
/Flowcon
56 Pressure Independent Control cum Danfoss / Johnson Control / Honeywell /
Balancing Valves / High Rangeability Belimo / Advance / Castle / Audco / T &
Valve /Automatic A / Flowcon
Balancing Valves
57 GI Sheets SAIL / TATA / Jindal / Essar /Nippon
58 Aluminum Sheet Balco / Hindalco / Nalco
59 G.I / Aluminium Factoryfabricated duct Technofab / Rolastar / Zeco / Ecoduct
/ Ductofab / Waves / NuAir (Nutech) /
Radical Duct / Asawa / Voltas /
Edgetech
60 Expanded Polystyrene / Extruded Mettur-Beardsell / Lloyds Insulation /
Poly Styrene (TF Cooline / Krutz / Owen Croning/
Quality) Supreme/ Insu board
61 Chemically cytosinepolymer Paramount / Trosslin / Twiga
62 Cross Linked Polythene Paramount / Trocellene / Supreme /
Foam Insulation Armacell
63 Fiber Glass / Resin bonded glass wool U.P Twiga / Owens Croning / Lloyd
(HVAC & Solar Insulation / Kimmco / Supreme
water heating)
64 Elastomeric Nitrile Foam/ Rubber for Armacell / K-Flex / A-Flex
Duct / Pipe
(Class ‘O’)
65 Extruded Aluminium Grills/Diffuser / Ruskin - Titus / Systemaire / Airmaster
Damper / Cosmos / Caryaire / Dynacraft /
Greenheck/ Triston/ Kruger
66 Fresh / Exhaust Air Louvers with Bird Ruskin - Titus / Systemair / Airmaster
Screen,Acoustic Louvers Duct / Cosmos / Caryaire / Dynacraft/Caryaire

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 754

Attenuators / / Tristar
67 Pot Strainers / Y-Strainers Rapid Cool / Sant / Trishul / Emerald /
Castle / Advance /Lakos / victaulic
68 Humidifier / Oil drip heater KEPL / Emerald / Rapid Cool
69 Thermostat / Humidistat /Duct Danfoss / Belimo/ Schneider/ ABB/
Temperature Sensor Honeywell/ Trane/ Johnson Controls /
Siemens/ Greystone/ Dwyer/ Omicron
/ L&T / Ira
70 Thermometer Penn-Plax / Teddington / Emerald/ H-
Guru / Metzer/ Bestobell/ Star
Scientific
71 Pressure gauge Penn-Plax / Teddington / Emerald/ H-
Guru / Forbes Marshall / Wika / Arrow
/ Dwyer / Taylor
72 Room Temperature, RHSensor Belimo / Schneider / ABB /
Honeywell/ Trane/ Johnson Controls /
Siemens/ Greystone/ Dwyer/
Omicron
73 Pressurization unit Armstrong / Bell & Gosset / Anergy
74 2/3 way control valve withmodulating Schneider / Belimo / Johnson
actuator Controls / Danfoss / Honeywell /
Siemens / L& T / SbtDats
75 DCC control for AHU Schneider / ABB / Danfoss /
Honeywell / Johnson
Controls /Siemens
76 Modulating Motors Belimo / Honeywell / Danfoss /
Johnson Controls
77 Vibration isolators Dunlop / Emerald / Ressitoflex /
Easyflex / Cori/ Bdk /
78 Water Flow switch &Pressure Switch Danfoss / Emerald / Anergy /
Honeywell / Johnson Control / Belimo
/ Siemens
79 Desiccant coated Enthalpy DRI / Ostberg / VTS
Recovery Unit (Latent +Sensible):
Wheel Only
80 Central Air Cleaner System Magneto / Honeywell
(Electronic filtrationsystems)
81 Air separator / Pressurized Expansion Anergy / Emerald / Rapid Cool
Tank / vacuum degasser / Flamco / Amtrol / Bell and Gosset /
Derrik / Tenova / Armstrong /
Grundfoss
82 Jet Nozzles Ruskin - Titus / Systemair / Airmaster
/ Caryaire / Dynacraft
83 Airstat Honeywell / Belimo/ Rapid Control
84 Aluminum Foil Tape Birla / 3M/ Jonson
85 Suction guide Anergy / Sant / Emerald / Armstrong
86 UPVC Pipe Astral / Supreme / Finolex / Ashirwad

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 755

Prince / AKG
87 Air Curtain Beacon/ Thermodyne, Envair Electro
dyne
88 Smoke sensor / CO Sensor Honeywell / Danfoss / Johnson
Control / Actis / System sensor /
siemens / Kele
(J) Solar Water Heater System
1 Solar Hot Water System Racold / V-Guard / TATA BP Solar /
Emmvee Solar / Solahart / Venus/
Honeywell/ EPL India / Suntech /
Rashmi Industries / Kotak Urja /
Photan / Greentek Northern
2 Insulation for Hot water Thermaflex / K-Flex/ Arma cell /Supreme
pipes / AKG
(K) LAN System
1 Wireless LAN Solution, Wireless Cisco / HP / Extreme / Arista/ R&M /
controller, Web Security Solution, Impulse / Ruckus / Juniper / Aruba /
Web Application Firewall Panduit/ Allied Telesis
solution, Wireless LAN
2 Managed Network Switches, Cisco / HP / Extreme / Arista/ R&M /
Core Switch, Distribution Switch, Impulse / Ruckus / Juniper / Aruba /
Access Switch, Fiber Module, Panduit /Nexus / Allied Telesis
Wireless Access Point
3 End point security Cisco / Aruba / SolarWinds / Everest /CA
Technologies Secure
4 Server / Networking Rack (wall mount / Rittal Emersion / APW / Netrack / WQ/
floor mount) Panduit/ Valrack / Derwiser / MTS
5 Cat-6ALAN Cable/ OFC and Panduit / Belden / Systemax
accessories. /Commscope / Legrand / R&M /Siemens
/ Derwiser / Siemon
6 Patch panel / Patch Cord / Fiber patch Panduit / Belden / Systemax
cord / pigtails / Adapters / Connectors /Commscope / Legrand / R&M /Siemens
/ Derwiser / Siemon
7 Hospital Information / Wipro Limited / Napier Healthcare /
management System Tenwave Healthcare /Icons
8 Queue managementsystem Wavetech / Qmatic / Plutron / Irisys /
Honeywell /Icons
9 Firewall/Router Cisco / Fortinet / Sophos/ Juniper/Arista
(L) EPABX System
1 EPBAX IP based Server with Cisco / Alcatel-Lucent / Ericsson /
Licenses / IP Phone / PC based Siemens / Avaya / Unify / NEC /
Operator Console /IP Phone/ Analog Panasonic / Matrix / Tadiran/ Arista/
Phone Toshiba
2 Telephone Cable / TV Co- Finolex / Havells / RR Kabel / KEI /
axial Cable L&T / Polycab / Molex
3 MDF Box ADC / GE / Malson / D-Link / ITL /
Legrand / Krone

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 756

(M) CCTV System

1 IP CCTV Camera, NVR Honeywell / Bosch / Pelco / Tyco /Axis/
Management Software (ULListed) Impulse / Avigilon
2 FHD LED Display Monitor / Touch Samsung / Sony / Dell / HP /LG/
screen panel Panasonic
3 Magnetic Contact Assa Abloy / SDC Security / GE /Ebelco
4 Access Controller Reader& Software Tyco / Axis / Lenel / RBH / Impulse /
Bosch / Honeywell / HID
5 Line Interface Unit Belden / Comm Scope / Tyco / Panduit
/ Molex / Schneider / R & M /
Legrand
6 Network Video recorder Honeywell / Bosch / Pelco / Tyco /Axis /
Impulse / Avigilon
7 Workstations,Server,Storage HP / Dell / IBM / Lenovo
8 Hard Disk WD / Seagate / Toshiba / HP
9 U Rack Valrack / Rittal / Cisco / Wipro
(N) Audio Video / Conference System
1 FOH Speakers, Sub- Woofer, SPL Fill Bose / Martin Audio / JBL
LoudSpeaker, Floor monitor /ElectroVoice / Renkus Heinz /
Speaker, Wall Speaker Kramer
2 Video and TeleConference Solution Avaya / Cisco/ Lifesize/ Polycom
3 4 K Video Streamer QSC / Extron / Crestron / AMX /Kramer
4 Audio conference system i Bose / JBL / EV / Renkus-Heinz
/ c chairman -
unit &delegate units
5 Power Amplifier Bose / Lab Gruppen / Ashly Audio/ QSC /
Crown / Dynacord / Yamaha/ Kramer
6 Recorder & StreamingSystem Lumens / Mediasite / Extron / Crestron
/ Kramer/ Wolfvision / Polycom
7 Digital Signal Processor Bose / Lab Gruppen / Ashly Audio/
QSC / Crown / Dynacord / Yamaha/
Kramer
8 Audio Mixer Yamaha / Soundraft / Studio Master /
QSC/ Midas / Extron / DiGiCo
9 AV Over IP Encoder / AMX / Extron / Crestron / Kramer /QSC
Decoder
10 Wireless Handheld Bose / AKG / Audio-Technica / Electro
Microphone, Wireless Lapel Voice / Sennheiser / Shure / JBL
Microphone with Receiver,
Gooseneck,
Table Top, Microphone
11 Digital Metallic Podium EAPL / Liberty/ Aagman Digital /ATDSC/
LABWE/ AHA
12 Wireless PresentationSystem Crestron / Barco / Extron / Kramer /
AMX
13 Microphone Cables,Speaker Cables Beldon / Sommer / Klotz/ Delton /QSC /
Bose / Kramer / R &M

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 757

14 Camera Wolfvision/ Lumens / Epson/ Digitek /

Hikvision / Matrix
15 Control System, Streaming Aurora / Crestron / Extron / Krammer
Transceiver, Streaming Trans
receiver, wall plate, HDMI to USB
Capture
Card
(O) STP
1 Air Blower Everest / TMVT / Beta / Airvac/ KPT /
Kay
2 Sludge transfer pump / Armstrong / Grundfos / Kirloskar /
Filter feed pump Xylem/ CRI/ Crompton/ Wilo/ KSB /Lubi
3 Screw Pump Roto / UT / Heliflow pumps / Lubi
4 Filter Press W2ptek / Universal / Venza / Royal
Precision / Thorat / Sachin / Eureka
Forbes / Pharmatech / AN Engineers
& Chemicals /MEC
5 MBBR Reactor Venza / Thermax / LEI / Ion Exchange
/ AN Engineers & Chemicals
6 MBBR Media Thaha / AB Polymers / Enviro Water
Solutions / Venza / Forbes / PP Aqua
/ MM Aqua / Ion Exchange / W2pTek
/ AN Engineers & Chemicals
7 HDPE / PVC Tank Sintex / Duracon / Fusion
8 CPVC / UPVC Pipes &Fittings Supreme / Aqurate / Prince / Astral /
AKG / Kissan / Finolex
9 Multi grade Sand Filter, Activated Aventura / Pentair / Venza / Starlite /
Carbon Filter,Softeners Astha / Ion Exchange / Thermax / LEI
/ Aquanomics / AN Engineers &
Chemicals
10 Oil And Grease Skimmer Akar Impex / Venza / Universal /
Greasebuster / Reva / Premier /
Techno / wastech
11 Coarse / Fine Bubble Diffuser Universal / W2ptek / Venza / Proflex /
Southern Cogen / Tecpro / OTT / EDI
/ Rehau
12 Tube Settler Media /Biopac Media Venza / Marvelous / PP Aquatech /
Tecpro / Cooldeck/ Thaha / Aquainc
/W2pTek
13 Chemical Dosing Units Prominent / E-Dose / Thermax /
Certikin / Oase / Milton Roy / Asian/
Grundfos / Asian /Crystal / Water
Tech/ Doshich
14 UV System Alfaa / Sukrut / Hydrocon/ Pentair Hi-
tech/ Honeywell
15 Ph Sensor / Ph meter Aster / Digital / Akar Impex / sensorex
/ W2pTek / Volant / Hanna
(P) Medical Gas Pipeline System
1 Air Compressor Ingersoll Rand / Anest Iwata / AtlasCopco

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 758

/ Hitachi / ELGI / FS Curtis

2 Automatic Gas Control Panel / Atlas Copco / Pneumatik Medical Gas
Reduction Station Solutions / Silbermann / Drager /
Berman Srl / Gregressen / Amico / Ohio
/ Operista / Medicap / Delta-P / Beacon
Madeas / Tritech / Reanimed
/ G. Samaras
3 Air Dryers/ Air Filters Atlas Copco / Delair/ Gem/ Summits
Hygronics / Trident / Kaeser / Domick
Hunter
4 Air Receiving Vessels Airtech / Kamla Engg. / Hydro
Pneumatics / Anest Iwata / Gem/
Reliable Equipment / MDD / Med
Freshe / Prenit World / Multitech
5 Medical Vacuum System Ingersoll Rand / Anest Iwata / AtlasCopco
/ Hitachi / ELGI / FS Curtis
6 Vacuum Bacterial filter Domnick Hunter / Parker / Filtration
Technik India Pvt. Ltd / Trident/Atlas
Copco
7 Vacuum Vessel Airtech / Kamla Engg. / Hydro
Pneumatics / Anest Iwata / Med Freshe /
Prenit World / Multitech
8 Ward vacuum units Aktiv Technologies / Aneer Engg. /
ASB System / MDD / S Kumar / Med
Freshe / Sigma Meditech / Altos /
MPS / Meditek / Prenit World
9 Gas Manifold System, Pig Tail & Aktiv Technologies / Aneer Engg. /
NRVs for Manifold Genstar Tech Co. / I H Bakir / S Kumar
/ Med Freshe / Mr. Engineer / Atlas
Copco / MDD / PES / Prime / Sigma
Meditech / Altos / MPS / Meditek /
Prenit World
10 Theatre suction unit Aktiv Technologies / Aneer Engg. / S
Kumar / Med Freshe / Altos / Sigma
Meditech / MDD / MPS / Meditek /
Prenit World
11 Gas Supervision system Aktiv / Aneer Engg. / S Kumar / Med
Freshe / MDD / Mr. Engg. / Sigma
Meditech / Altos / MPS / Prenit World
12 Medical Hoses Allied Medical / Inspital / Ohio Medical
/ Precision Medical Inc. / MDD / Altos
/ Sigma Meditech / Medicop / MPS /
Aktiv / Meditek / Prenit World
13 LVA units Leader / Legrise / Multimet / R BValves
14 Gas Outlet / Terminal Unit Atlas Copco / Aktiv Technologies /
Aneer Engg. / MDD / Miracle / Sigma
Meditech / S Kumar / Med Freshe /
Sree Krishnaa Industries / Altos / MPS
/ Aktiv / Meditek / Prenit World

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 759

15 Bed Head Panel Sree Krishnaa Industries / Sigma

Meditech / Global Meditech / S Kumar
/ Mediline Industries / Creative / MPS
/ MDD / Aneer Engg. / PES / MedFreshe
/ Altos / Meditek / Prenit World
16 Ceiling Pendant Beacon Medaes / Berman Srl / Delta
P / Medicop / Sigma Meditech / S
Kumar / GHI / MDD / Med Freshe /
Altos / Meditek / Prenit World
17 AVSU (with Integrated Alarm Panel) Medicop / Delta-P / Beacon Madeas /
Tri-Tech / Reanimed / G. Samaras /
Aktiv
18 Oxygen flow meter, BPC, Flow meter, Sree Krishnaa Industries / Sigma
Suction Unit Meditech / Global Meditech / S Kumar
/ Mediline Industries / Creative / MPS
/ MDD / Aneer Engg. / Medrubb / PES
/ Lifeline / Med Freshe / Altos / Aktiv /
Prenit World
19 Isolation Valve Legris / Matrix / RB / RN / Superflow /
CIM / Med Freshe / Prenit World
20 Pressure Regulators Aneer Engg. / Atlas Copco / Esab Indial
Ltd / Genstar Tech / Inspital / Ohio
Medical / Med Freshe / Parker / Norgen
/ Meditek / MPS / Prenit World
/ G. Samaras
21 Copper Pipe Max-Flow / Rajco / Mehta Tubes /
Mandev / Metalco / Star Copper
22 PLC Electrical control panel Airtech / BSI Health Care / Jog
Electricals / MPS / Sigma Meditech /
Linde / Altos / Med Freshe / PES /MDD /
Meditek
23 Anaesthesia Gas Scavenging System Medicop / Activ / WTK / Beacon Madeas /
Amico / Tri-Tech / G. Samaras / Meditek
24 LMO Tank Linde/ Praxair / Sonal fabricator/ Inox/
Sectech/ Super Crygenic
(Q) Modular Operation Theatre
1 Stainless Steel (SS304) for Tata/ Jindal/ Sail
wall Panels & CeilingPanels
2 Wall / Ceiling paint (Anti- bacterial) / Skk / Liquid Plast / Jotun
Anti-fungal
3 Seamless PVC washableflooring Tarket / Gerflor / LG / Armstrong
4 Laminar Flow system MPS / Sigma Meditech / Altos / Med
Freshe / MDD / PES / Prenit World.
5 Clean room LED Fittings, for peripheral Phillips / Trilux / Lighting Technology /
lighting Wipro

6 Automatic Sliding door Meta Flex / Altos / Rebbon / MDD /

PES / Kos / MPS / Prenit World

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 760

7 Surgeon control panel with electrical Pneumatik Berlin/ LM Medical/

Distribution Board Medepha / Bender / SHD / Operista /
Stark Storm /Reanimed /Danmedics /
G. Samaras
8 Pressure relief damper MPS / Sigma Meditech / Altos /Synergic /
Drager / MDD / Nexor / MedFreshe / PES
/ Prenit World
9 Double Arm Surgeon /Anesthesia Allied Healthcare/ Pneumatik Berlin /
Pendant Steris / Drager / LM Medical / Operista
/ Ondal / Berman Srl/ Reainmed / G.
Samaras
10 LED OT lighting Simeon / Trumpf/ Drager / KLS Martin
/ Etkin / Maquet / Nexor Medical /
Evonos/ Amico/ Stryker/ Dr. Mach /
Danmedics
11 Antibacterial modular type switches Legrand / Honeywell / Schneider /
sockets/ RJ45 crabtree
12 Twin Plate X-ray viewingscreen MPS / Sigma Meditech / Synergic /
Altos / MDD / Med Freshe / PES /
Prime / Prenit World
13 Storage Unit MPS / Sigma Meditech / Altos / Med
Freshe / PE / MDD / Prime / Prenit
World
14 Writing board MPS / Sigma Meditech / Altos / Med
Freshe / Prime / MDD / PES / Prenit
World
15 Hatch Box MPS / Sigma Meditech / Altos / MDD
/ Nexor / Med Freshe / PES / Prime /
Prenit World
16 Scrub Sink MPS / Sigma Meditech / Medimatic /
Altos / Med Freshe / MDD / PES /
Prime / Prenit World
17 VRF Unit Daikin / Hitachi / Carrier / Blue Star /
Voltas
18 Aluminium Sections Bhoruka / Hindustan Aluminium /Indian
Aluminium Company / Jindal
19 Isolation panel system LM Medical / Nexor Medical / SHD
Italia / Pneumatik Berlin/ Medepha /
Bender / Operista / Stark Storm
(R) Nurse Call System
1 Nurse call system Schrack / Rauland / Austco/
Ackermann (Honeywell)/ Legrand/ GE/
Johnson Controls
(S) Hydro Pneumatic Pumps
1 Automatic variable temperature Jaquar / AOS-Robo-U-Tec / Euronics
control / fixed temperature control
faucets
2 Hydro Pneumatic system Kirloskar / CRI / KSB / Grundfos / Wilo
/ Armstrong / xylem / Lubi

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)
 761

3 Water Meter Capstan / Kranti / Anand / Kant

4 Cartridge Filter Milton Roy / Grundfos / Big Blue
5 Water Level Controller/ Switches & Auto pump / Cirrus engineering /
Indicator Techtrol / Danfoss /Dwyer / Indfoss
/Omicron / Technika / Advance /
Honeywell
6 Raw Water Pump Set / Treated Water Armstrong / Grundfos / Kirloskar /
pump set /Drainage Pump set Xylem (Bell-Gosset) / CRI / Crompton
/ Wilo / KSB /Lubi
7 Deluge valve / Solenoid valve / Spray Victaulic / Smith Copper / Anvil / Tyco
nozzle / Installation Control Valve / Danfoss / Minimax / Rotorex /Siemens
8 Vibration Eliminator / Rubber Resisto flex / Kanwal / Easy Flex
Bellows
9 Starters (DOL / Star Delta /Soft) L & T / Siemens / ABB / Legrand
10 R.O Water Treatment plant Kent/ Aqua guard / Ion exchange Water
Tech / 3DAqua / Rain drops/Nefsol
11 Water cooler Voltas / Blue star / Carrier / Usha /
Hitachi
(T) NON – Medical Equipments
1 CSSU & TSSD RCUBE/RARU/R.K/
Equipments IGGI / RIPL
2 Laundry Equipments Qualipro EquipmentsLLP / STEFAB
INDIA LTD.
3 Kitchen and Canteen Equipments Qualipro EquipmentsLLP/ Srihari Kitchen
Equipments Pvt Ltd, Coimbatore/ Kovai
Kitchen Equipments/ Sastha Kitchen
Equipments./ Sri Lakshmi Food Machines/
Prema Industries Commercial Kitchen
Equipment
4 I.V. Tree System 5-Point Hanger Construction Specialties / Gradus / Inpro

Note: The firm has to ensur[e that equipment manufacturer comes under definition of local
manufacturers as per Govt. of India, Policy of Public Procurement (Preference to make in
India) order,2017(PPM-MII order 2017) issued by Department of Industrial Policy and
Promotion. Only products conforming to above policy shall be allowed to be used in the work.

Executive Engineer(E),
GED, CPWD, Ghaziabad,

Addition: NIL Correction: NIL

Overwriting: NIL Deletion: NIL AE(P) AE(E)P EE(P)